Skip to main content

Full text of "1961 Awake"

See other formats 


ere  Should  Tolerance  End? 


n  You  Enjoy  Being  a  Housewife 


W^TK'^f—it^^ 


cle  Sam's  Gold  Plight 


Body  Build  a  Clue  to  Personality 


^2£^&^ 


JANUARY  8.   1961 


THE  MISSION  Or*  THIS  JOURNAL 

New*  *ource«  that  ar«  able  to  keep  you  awoke  to  the  vital  l»uet  of  our 
tlmei  mult  be  unfettered  by  ceniorihip  and  **|fl«h  Interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fettert.  It  recognise*  facts,  face*  focti,  It  free  to  publish  facts.  It  is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  It  Is  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  onj  It  Is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  It  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  Integrity  to  truth, 

"Awake!"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  it  not  dependent  on  them, 
Ifl  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  Prom  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  Is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  mony  fields  of  knowledge  pass  In  review— -government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as Jiias  qsihV  heavens'. 

"Awake!"  eAet|0j&^  jgbl£>lj^l)h)*ys£rfrchjfw,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom"  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World, 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awokel"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awakel" 


Published  Simultaneously  in  the   United  States  jtr  the 
WATCHTOWER   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY   OF  NEW   YORK,   INC. 
117   Adams   Street  Brooklyn   1,    New   York,    U.S.A. 

AND    IN     ENQLAND    BY 

WATCH   TOWER    BIBLE   AND    TRACT    SOCIETY 


Watch  Tower  House,   The  Rldgeway 
N.  H.  Knohh,  President 

Printing  this  issue:  3,125,000 
"Awntt!"  Il  publlihid  In  tho  fallowing  23  languatw: 
Samlmoiithly — Afrikaans,  Clnyanja,  Danish,  Dutch,  Eni- 
liah,  Finnish.  French,  Cernsan,  Greek,  Italian,  Japanese, 
Norwegian,  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Swedish,  Tagalog,  Zulu, 
Went  hty — lloeann,  Indwicslaji,  Korean,  Malayalarn,  Pol- 
ish,  Ukrainian. 

Yearly  subscription  rata 

Dfflcu  for  semimonthly  editions 

A  merlin,   U.S.,  UT  Adams  St..  Brooklrn   1,  N.Y.  SI 

Aiitralla,  n  BeresfcmJ  M..  StrathlleM,  N.S.W.  g/- 

Cannda,  150  Brlrigeland  Ave.,  Toronto  19,  Dot-  II 

England,  Watch  Tower  noise, 

Tht  R1d(sway,  London  N.W.   1  7/- 

Nhi  iMUni  621  New  North  Rd.,  Auckland.  S,W.   1    1/- 
Sottn  Africa,  Private  Bit,   Elandsfonttfl),  Tvl.  1j- 

Montblr  editions  cost  half  the  ahnve  rates. 


London  N.W.  7,   England 
Grant  Swtbb,  Secretary 

4d   a  copy    (Australia,  Id) 

r  Remittances  for  subscriptiens  should  be  sent  to  the  office 
in  your  country.  Otherwise  send  ynnr  remittance  to 
London.  Notice  of  tidlrjtlon  Is  sent  at  least  tiro  issues 
before  subscription  elites. 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  still i H  reach  us  thirty  days 
Mora  ygur  moving  date.  Sin  as  your  old  and  new 
■•iraii  (if  RHsibia,  yon  old  iddreu  latiil).  Watcb 
Ttwa-,  Witth  Tower  Heiu,  Tfai  R I  die  way,  Lnn- 
I'nn   N.W.   7,    Enjlasd. 


Entered   as  seconrl-class  matter  at  Brooklyn,  N.Y. 
Printed  In  England 


The   Dlhli   translation   lied   in   "Amain:"    b   the   Mew   World   Translation   of   the    Holy   Scripture), 
When   ather  translations   art   mid   thi  following  ivmtols  will   appear   behind  the   eltatiom: 

AS  -  American  Standard   Version     By  -  Catholic   Douay  version     Mo  -  .Tamfts    frloffatf  3  venlon 
AT  -  An  American  Translation       fijD-  The  k-mphitls  Dlajlott    Ro  -  J.   B.  Rat  her  ham's  yerston 
AV  -  Authoriitd  Version  (1011)    JP  -  Jen!*u  Publication  Koc.   JJ3  -  Bertied  Stanrlarfl  Version 
£)&  -  J.  N.  Darby's  version  he  -  Isaac  Leeser's  version       Yg  —  Robert  Young's  version 


CONTENTS 


The  Value  of  Experience  3 

Where  Should  Tolerance  End?  5 

Can  You  Enjoy  Being  a  Housewife?  9 

Uncle  Sam's  Gold  Plight  13 

Is  Body  Build  a  Clue  to  Personality?  Iff 

Notes  on  Nature  20 


Dublin's  Manuscript  Treasures  21 

Spiritual  Revival  23 

Take  Good  Care  of  That  Watch  24 

"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 

How  God  Disciplines  His  Children  27 

Watching  the  World  29 


"Now  it  is  hioh  time  to  awake."   0tf 

— Roman  Dill  ^L/ 


Volume    XLIt 


London,    England,  January  S,    1961 


Number  1 


ABOUT  to 
under- 
go the  experi- 
ence of  being 
hanged,  the 
man  on  the 
gallows  said,  among  his  last  words;  "This 
will  surely  be  a  lesson  to  me."  Those 
words,  recorded  by  American  journalist 
Irvin  S.  Cobb,  underscore  the  fact  that  per- 
sonal experience  may  be  a  teacher  but  that 
it  is  not  the  best  one. 

We  dare  not,  then,  place  too  high  a  re- 
gard on  personal  experience,  thinking  we 
must  experience  all  things,  even  sin,  to 
acquire  knowledge  and  wisdom.  It  would 
not  only  be  fruitless  and  dangerous  to  try 
to  experience  all  things  personally,  but  we 
cannot  be  certain  that  personal  experience 
will  teach  us  correctly.  What  we  learn 
might  have  to  be  unlearned,  as  Joseph 
Whitney  states  in  the  column  "Mirror  of 
Your  Mind,"  published  in  various  journals 
such  as  Pictorial  TVview  of  April  26, 1959 : 

"Most  of  us  have  been  taught  to  believe 
that  experience  is  a  good  'teacher,  but 
usually  we  do  not  learn  as  much  from  ex- 
perience as  we  think.  Furthermore  what 
we  do  learn  is  often  bad,  and  continuing 
experience  usually  makes  it  worse.  Big 
League  baseball  teams  spend  tidy  sums 
every  Spring  helping  potential  future  stars 
unlearn  the  faulty  pitching,  fielding  and  hit- 

JANUARY  8,  1961 


ting  eccentricities  that  experience  has 
taught  them.  This  is  no  easy  task,  for 
ball  players,  like  the  rest  of  us,  tend 

to  cling  to  accustomed 
ways  they  have  learned 
and  solidified  through 
past  experience." 
So  experience  does 
not  necessarily  bring  wisdom  or  success. 
Many  persons  seem  incapable  of  learning 
from  experience,  for  they  keep  on  making 
the  same  mistakes.  Nor  have  many  men 
taken  lessons  from  the  experiences  of  oth- 
ers. Has  this  world  learned  from  the  ex- 
perience of  wars  not  to  war?  Has  the  dis- 
astrous end  of  many  dictators  been  an  ef- 
fective lesson  to  modern  dictators?  "If 
history  repeats  itself,"  says  Bernard  Shaw 
in  Man  and  Superman,  "and  the  unexpect- 
ed always  happens,  how  incapable  must 
man  be  of  learning  from  experience!*' 
True  it  is,  as  the  Bible  declares:  "There 
exists  a  way  that  is  upright  before  a  man, 
but  the  ways  of  death  are  the  end  of  it 
afterward." — Prov.  14:12. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  there  is  value  in 
the  right  kind  of  experience.  By  experience 
the  public  speaker  becomes  more  skilled, 
just  as  does  the  musician,  the  mechanic 
and  the  doctor.  The  value  of  a  man  to  an 
organization,  in  fact,  is.  often  determined 
largely  by  his  experience  within  that  or- 
ganization. But  there  is  no  value  in  ex- 
perience if  we  do  not  have  the  capacity  to 
learn  from  it.  From  our  experiences  we 


should  learn  to  distill  principles  that  will 
help  us  avoid  mistakes  and  that  will  help 
us  become  more  effective  in  what  we  are 
doing. 

But  if  we  were  to  rely  entirely  on  self- 
distilled  principles  for  daily  living,  for  cop- 
ing with  the  problems  certain  to  confront 
us  in  these  difficult  times,  how  unhappy  we 
would  be!  How  unhappy  the  automobile 
driver  who  must  learn  skill  as  a  result  of  * 
many  accidents!  How  unhappy  the  busi- 
nessman who  must  go  through  bankruptcy 
to  learn  efficiency  and  skill  in  manage- 
ment! How  unhappy  the  ship's  captain  who 
must  learn  by  repeated  wrecks  how  to 
avoid  the  rocks!  How  pitiable  those  per- 
sons who  are  never  convinced  that  they 
can  know  a  thing  unless  they  have  ex- 
perienced it!  If  we  can  avoid  disastrous 
personal  lessons  by  studying  the  experi- 
ences of  others,  why  not  do  so? 

But  we  cannot  afford  to  wait  till  we  build 
up  a  vast  backlog  of  personal  experience 
and  have  had  time  to  analyze  extensively 
the  experiences  of  others.  When  the  ques- 
tion arises,  "What  shall  I  do?"  we  need 
principles  by  which  we  can  make  the  right 
decision.  Here  we  see  the  wisdom  of  hav- 
ing inculcated  principles  that  never  change, 
principles  that  can  be  learned  within  a 
reasonable  time,  principles  that  will  lead 
the  inexperienced  one  to  success. 

Where  are  such  principles  to  be  found? 
In  God's  Word,  the  Holy  Bible.  Declares 
the  inspired  psalmist:  "The  law  of  Jeho- 
vah is  perfect,  bringing  back  the  soul.  The 
reminder  of  Jehovah  is  trustworthy,  mak- 
ing the  inexperienced  one  wise."  (Ps.  19: 
7)  That  is  what  makes  one  wise — taking 
teaching  from  Jehovah,  for  as  inspired 
Elihu  said:  "Surely  it  is  the  spirit  in  mor- 
tal man  and  the  'breath  of  the  Almighty 
that  gives  them  understanding.  It  is  not 
„  those  merely  abundant  in  days  that  prove 
wise,  nor  those  just  old  that  understand 


judgment."  (Job  32:8,  9)  We  need  divine 
principles. 

In  the  Bible  we  find  principles  such  as 
the  one  stated  at  1  Timothy  6:10:  "The 
love  of  money  is  a  root  of  all  sorts  of  in- 
jurious things."  What  misery  could  be 
avoided  by  applying  this  principle  in  one's 
life!  Further,  the  Bible  illustrates  divine 
principles  by  giving  the  experiences  of 
others.  Thus  the  disastrous  experience  of 
Judas  Iscariot  illustrates  the  divine  prin- 
ciple on  "the  love  of  money."  The  Bible 
abounds  with  experiences  that  serve  as  a 
warning  to  us,  such  as  those  of  the  un- 
faithful Israelites:  "Now  these  things  went 
on  befalling  them  as  examples  and  they 
were  written  for  a  warning  to  us  upon 
whom  the  accomplished  ends  of  thev  sys- 
tems of  things  have  arrived."  (1  Cor.  10: 
11)  Nor  does  the  Bible  give  merely  warn- 
ing examples;  it  also  gives  encouraging 
examples,  experiences  of  those  who  came 
off  successfully  because  of  living  by  divine 
principles. 

Rightly  evaluate  experience.  Do  not 
overrate  personal  experience.  Distill  prin- 
ciples from  your  personal  experiences,  but 
also  make  the  experiences  of  others  an  ex- 
tension of  your  own.  Above  all,  take  in 
knowledge  of  the  life-directing  principles 
found  in  the  Bible.  In  this  way  we  will  not 
learn  hard  lessons  that  could  not  benefit  us, 
as  did  the  man  on  the  gallows.  In  this  way 
we  may  be  certain  of  happiness  and  suc- 
cess: "Happy  is  the  man  that  has  not 
walked  in  the  counsel  of  the  wicked  ones, 
and  in  the  way  of  sinners  has  not  stood 
and  in  the  seat  of  ridiculers  has  not  sat.. 
But  his  delight  is  in  t£e  law  of  Jehovah, 
and  in  his  law  he  reads  in  an  undertone 
day  and  night.  And  he  will  certainly  be- 
come like  a  tree  planted  by  streams  of  wa- 
ter, that  gives  its  own  fruit  in  its  season 
and  the  foliage  of  which  does  not  wither, 
and  everything  he  does  will  succeed." — Ps. 
1:1-3. 


AWAKE! 


Where 
Should 


Why  are  so  many  people 

tolerant  about  almost 

everything? 


DURING  the  1960 
presidential 
campaign    in    the 
United  States,  much 
was  said  about  reli- 
gious bigotry  and 
tolerance.    Not    the 
tolerance  that  allows 
men   to   express 
themselves    freely 
concerning  differing 
opinions,  but  a  tol- 
erance that  would 
silence  one  in  the  face  of 
contradictory    opinion. 
There  were  times  when 
even   a    passing   refer- 
ence to  the  Roman  Cath- 
olic  Church  brought 
loud  cries  of  bigotry  from  all  sides. 

Silent  tolerance  was  demanded  only 
where  religious  matters  were  concerned, 
but  there  was  no  semblance  of  it  where 
political,  commercial,  social  and  military 
issues  were  involved.  In  these  fields  fiery, 
verbal  broadsides  were  loosed  so  that  truth 
would  triumph  over  error,  but  not  so  in 
the  secluded  sanctuary  of  religion.  To  chal- 
lenge religious  opinion  and  dogma  was 
strictly  taboo. 

Why  this  silent  tolerance  only  in  the 
realm  of  religion?  Robert  J.  McCracken, 
minister  of  Manhattan's  Riverside  church, 
said:  "In  nine-cases  out  of  ten  what  goes 
by  the  name  of  tolerance  is  really  apathy. 
There  are  too  many  easygoing  Americans 
who  are  up  in  arms  against  nothing  be- 
cause they  have  no  fixed  standards  of  right 
and  wrong.  They  do  not  come  out  positive- 
ly and  wholeheartedly  on  the  side  of  any- 
thing because,  unlike  their  fathers,  they 
have  no  robust  convictions.  Tolerance  is  a 
virtue,  but  it  is  not  the  supreme  virtue." 
Apathy,  not  a  firm  conviction,  is  what 
cries  for  silent  tolerance.  In  a  great  num- 
ber of  cases  advocates  for  this  sly,  subtle 


doctrine  of  tolerance 
have  stronger  politi- 
cal ties  than  religious 
convictions.  There- 
fore, not  wanting  to 
have  their  religious 
weakness  exposed 
and  their  religious 
s  u  sceptibilities 
shocked,  they  cry — 
tolerance!  If  this  cry 
does  not  silence  the 
more  courageous, 
they  swing  the  ax  of  bigotry  to 
quiet  the  tongue  of  anyone  who 
dares  to  mention  the  truth.  If 
Christians  are  to  guide,  then 
they  must  speak  out.  Far  too 
many  persons  have  been  put  on 
the  defensive  by  what  Bishop  Fred  P,  Cor- 
son, Methodist  bishop  of  Philadelphia,  calls 
a  "false  conception  of  tolerance,  which 
teaches  that  you  must  not  stand  for  any  po- 
sition of  your  own  or  defend  your  beliefs." 
Christians  disassociate  themselves  from 
fanatical  bigotry,  but  they  do  maintain 
their  right  of  free  speech,  their  right  to 
witness  concerning  their  convictions. 

As  a  rule,  modern  persons  like  to  think 
of  themselves  as  tolerant  of  opposing  opin- 
ion. Churchgoers  are  no  exception  to  the 
rule.  For  example,  Our  Sunday  Visitor,  a 
Roman  Catholic  paper,  states:  "We  are 
convinced  that  Catholics  are  the  most  tol- 
erant of  all  people.  They  never  hear  an- 
other organization  attacked  from  their 
pulpit,  while  they  are  taught  that  they 
must  love  every  individual,  friend  or  ene- 
my." 

While  Catholic  churchgoers  may  like  to 
think  themselves  tolerant,  and  without 
question  many  are,  yet  the  Roman  Catho- 
lic Hierarchy  does  not  adhere  to  or  advo- 
cate the  doctrine  of  tolerance.  The  Catho- 
lic Encyclopedia,  volume  14,  page  766,  says 
that  the  Catholic  church   "regards  dog- 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


matic  intolerance  not  alone  as  her  incon- 
testable right,  but  also  as  a  sacred  duty." 
Moreover,  it  is  argued  by  this  authority 
that  since  God  tolerates  no  strange  gods, 
the  Catholic  church  "can  tolerate  no 
strange  Churches  beside  herself." 

The  Catholic  church  actually  teaches 
that  toleration  came  in  only  when  faith 
went  out.  She  states  that  lenient  measures 
were  resorted  to  only  where  the  power  to 
apply  more  severe  measures  was  wanting. 
"Tolerance,"  says  this  authority,  is  the 
"patient  forbearance  in  the  presence  of  an 
evil  which  one  is  unable  or  unwilling  to 
prevent."  And  when  the  Catholic  church 
has  been  in  position  to  prohibit  other  re- 
ligions from  carrying  on  their  worship,  do- 
ing so  either  by  law  or  force,  history  even 
in  this  century  testifies  that  she  has  done 
so.  The  Cincinnati  (Ohio)  Times  Star  pub- 
lished this  report:  "The  Evangelical  Con- 
federation of  Colombia  has  listed  23  new 
cases  of  alleged  persecution  of  Protestants 
in  this  predominantly  Catholic  country,  in- 
cluding the  murder  of  a  Protestant  lay 
preacher  and  the  dynamiting  of  a  Presby- 
terian chapel.  ...  In  another  serious  in- 
cident, the  report  said,  a  parish  priest  with 
a  revolver  led  the  mayor  and  police  of  La 
Plata,  in  the  Huila  Department,  in  a  shoot- 
ing attack  on  a  building  where  Protestant 
services  were  being  held."  Is  that  toler- 
ance? If  freedom  of  religion  is  to  be  main- 
tained in  good  and  tolerant  spirit,  then 
such  actions  should  be  unequivocally  con- 
demned by  Roman  Catholics  themselves. 
But  such  crimes  they  endure  in  silent  tol- 
erance, which  makes  them  sharers  in  such 
cruel  intolerance. 

Examples  of  Tolerance 

Almighty  God  Jehovah  is  the  greatest 
example  of  tolerance.  For  thousands  of 
years  he  has  tolerated  those  who  corrupt 
mankind  and  who  misuse  the  earth.  Some 
have  questioned  his  being  so  tolerant  with 


wicked  men,  workers  of  lawlessness.  But 
this  tolerance  on  the  part  of  God  will  have 
an  end;  he  is  not  weak  in  faith  or  lacking 
in  power.  "He  is  patient  with  you,"  writes 
Peter,  "because  he  does  not  desire  any  to 
be  destroyed  but  desires  all  to  attain  to 
repentance"  and  live.  But  it  is  not  a  silent 
tolerance  now.  God  commanded  his  proph- 
ets to  expose  wrong.  His  written  Word  de- 
clares his  judgments  against  lawlessness. 
And  his  witnesses  in  the  earth  today  teach 
that  Word.  At  Armageddon  God's  toler- 
ance of  wickedness  will  end.  He  will  root 
out  the  wicked  and  preserve  the  righteous 
as  he  did  in  Noah's  day.  For  "Jehovah  is 
guarding  all  those  loving  him,  but  all  the 
wicked  ones  he  will  annihilate." — 2  Pet. 
3:9;  Ps.  145:20. 

Jesus  Christ  was  a  tolerant  man  who  en- 
gaged in  no  violent  religious  crusades.  His, 
however,  was  not  a  silent  tolerance,  for  he 
vigorously  exposed  false  religious  doctrine. 
The  zeal  of  Jehovah  consumed  him  to  the 
point  where  he  entered  the  temple  and 
threw  out  all  those  selling  and  buying  in 
the  temple  and  overturned  the  tables  of  the 
money-changers  and  the  benches  of  those 
selling  doves.  This  was  not  an  invasion  of 
someone  else's  place  of  worship,  however, 
for  it  was  his  'Father's  house.' — John  2: 
15,  16. 

False  religious  blasphemies  were  not  tol- 
erated in  silence  by  Jesus.  The  twenty- 
third  chapter  of  Matthew  contains  one  of 
the  most  forceful  denunciations  of  false 
religion  ever  recorded.  When  a  man  versed 
in  the  Law  complained  to  Jesus,  saying: 
"Teacher,  in  saying  these  things  you  also 
insult  us,"  what  did  Jesus  do?  Did  he 
change  his  line  to  satisfy  these  men?  None 
of  that.  Jesus  said  to  the  man:  "Woe  also 
to  you  who  are  versed  in  the  Law,  because 
you  load  men  with  loads  hard  to  be  borne, 
but  you  yourselves  do  not  touch  the  loads 
with  one  of  your  fingers!"  Tolerance  did 
not  prevent  Jesus  from  speaking  out  when 


AWAKE! 


truth,  righteousness  and  the  name  of  God 
were  involved. — Luke  11:45,  46. 

Further,  neither  Jesus  nor  his  disciples 
tolerated  the  unequal  yoking  of  believers 
with  unbelievers,  righteousness  with  law- 
lessness, light  with  darkness,  Christ  with 
Belial,  God's  temple  with  idols.  Jesus  called 
the  false  religious  sects  of  his  day  "yeast" 
and  warned:  "Be  on  the  alert  and  watch 
out  for  the  yeast  of  the  Pharisees  and  Sad- 
ducees."  "Let  them  be.  Blind  guides  is 
what  they  are.  If,  then,  a  blind  man  guides 
a  blind  man,  both  will  fall  into  a  pit."  Not 
a  silent  toleration  this  or  an  appeal  for  an 
interfaith  movement;  rather,  a  bold  warn- 
ing to  stay  dear  lest  the  righteous  be  swal- 
lowed up  with  the  wicked  in  the  ditch  of 
destruction.— Matt.  16:6;  15:14;  2  Cor. 
6:14-18. 

The  Christian  congregation  was  coun- 
seled by  Paul  not  to  tolerate  in  silence  or 
in  any  other  way  uncleanness  in  its  midst. 
Christianity  was  not  to  be  a  religion  with 
a  split  personality,  believers  on  Sunday  and 
workers  of  iniquity  on  Monday.  Concern- 
ing those  who  refused  to  conform  to  Chris- 
tian principles,  Paul  admonished:  "Quit 
mixing  in  company  with  anyone  called  a 
brother  that  is  a  fornicator  or  a  greedy 
person  or  an  idolater  or  a  reviler  or  a 
drunkard  or  an  extortioner,  not  even  eat- 
ing with  such  a  man 'Remove  the  wick- 
ed man  from  among  yourselves.'  "  Chris- 
tianity was  to  be  exemplified,  not  by  a 
silent  tolerance  of  wrongdoing,  but  by  a 
vigorous  championing  of  right  principles 
by  word  and  deed.— 1  Cor.  5:9-13. 

Christian  Tolerance  Today 

With  such  strong  emphasis  and  exam- 
ples set  before  us,  how  are  Christians  to 
deport  themselves  in  this  twentieth  cen- 
tury, this  so-calied  age  of  tolerance  in 
which  everything  goes?  Certainly  no  dif- 
ferently than  the  way  faithful  men  con- 
ducted themselves  in  the  past.  They  must 


fearlessly  speak  the  truth.  True,  God  did 
commission  his  ancient  nation  of  Israel  to 
destroy  the  places  of  pagan  worship  and 
even  the  worshipers  of  false  gods  in  the 
land  of  Canaan;  they  served  as  his  divinely 
appointed  executioners.  But  Christians  to- 
day have  no  such  commission.  Their  com- 
mission is  to  preach  "this  good  news  of 
the  kingdom"  and  "make  disciples  of  peo- 
ple of  all  the  nations."  The  one  appointed 
by  God  as  executioner  now  is  Jesus  Christ. 
It  would  be  presumptuous  for  any  group 
on  earth  to  try  to  take  his  role,  to  destroy 
nonbelievers  and  their  places  of  worship. 
Even  Jesus  Christ  must  await  the  divinely 
set  time  to  take  action  against  the  wicked. 
—Matt.  24:14;  28:19,  20. 

It  is  well  to  remember  that  Christendom, 
despite  all  her  professions,  is  not  an  exam- 
ple of  Christianity.  She  is  an  example  of 
what  happens  when  Christians  tolerate  the 
intolerable  in  their  midst,  when  they  wa- 
ter down  Christian  doctrine  and  principle 
in  the  name  of  tolerance  until  it  has  lost 
all  force.  She  is  an  example  of  what  hap- 
pens to  men  who  fail  to  speak  out  for  fear 
of  becoming  unpopular  or  being  called  big- 
ots. Christendom  is  an  image,  not  of  Christ, 
but  of  this  world.  Methodist  Bishop  F.  Ger- 
ald Ensley  of  Des  Moines,  Iowa,  charged 
that  Christendom's  religions  have  become 
so  much  like  the  world  that  she  is  now 
powerless  to  change  the  world.  "In  our 
time  the  world  calls  the  tune,  not  the 
church,"  he  said.  "Instead  of  the  church 
insisting  that  the  world  shall  be  Christian, 
the  world  has  insisted  that  the  church  be 
worldly."  He  gave  examples  to  back  up 
his  charges:  "Society  segregates  itself,  so 
we  segregate,"  he  said.  "The  nation  gets 
into  war,  the  church  hurries  into  uniform. 
It  is  the  fashion  in  a  social  set  to  drink,  so 
churchmen  join  in  with  the  world."  After 
so  much  worldliness,  the  only  will  left  is 
for  compromise  and  tolerance. 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


Light  versus  Darkness 

Among  the  true  Christian  witnesses  of 
Jehovah,  however,  principle  is  not  lacking. 
As  far  as  they  are  concerned,  God  still  calls 
the  tunes  according  to  his  divine  Word, 
and  they  follow.  When  vital  issues  arise 
and  there  are  decisions  to  be  made,  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  today  answer  in  the  same 
way  the  first-century  Christians  did:  "We 
must  obey  God  as  ruler  rather  than  men." 
Compromise  does  not  enter  their  minds. 
—Acts  5:29. 

Jehovah's  witnesses  are  not  about  to 
compromise  Christian  doctrine,  principle 
or  truth  for  favors  or  out  of  fear  of  being 
labeled  fanatical  bigots.  They  ask  no  quar- 
ter in  their  fight  against  satanic  error; 
they  give  none  and  they  get  none.  They 
do  have  the  courage  to  speak  the  truth. 
Religious  teachings  such  as  Christmas  and 
Easter,  while  widely  popular  among  pro- 
fessed Christians,  are  still  pagan  and  un- 
christian. This  fact  Jehovah's  witnesses  as 
true  Christians  will  not  fail  to  declare. 
Doctrines  that  represent  God  as  a  freak 
and  a  fiend,  such  as  trinity,  purgatory 
and  a  hell-fire  where  souls  are  torment- 
ed in  flames  for  all  eternity,  will  be  vig- 
orously challenged  by  Christians  and  ex- 
posed as  being  of  demonic  origin.  Chris- 
tians will  not  tolerate  in  silence  such  blas- 
phemies against  God,  neither  will  they  al- 
low religious  gambling,  clerical  hypocrisy 
and  religious  warmongering  to  go  unmen- 
tioned  in  the  name  of  tolerance.  Jehovah's 
witnesses  appreciate  that  God  must  "be 
found  true,  though  every  man  be  found  a 
liar."—Rom.  3:4;  Matt.  10:27,  28. 

Christendom  has  permitted  the  world  to 
call  the  tunes  for  her,  and  she  loves  to  have 
it  so.  The  world's  darkness  has  blinded  her 
to  the  point  where  she  has  become  intol- 
erant of  exposure,  intolerant  of  unadulter- 


ated Bible  truth,  intolerant  of  gospel 
preaching  that  sets  men  free  on  the  road 
to  life.  Tolerance  no  longer  means  to  her 
tolerating  expression  of  opinion  different 
from  hers;  to  her  it  means  tolerating  dif- 
ferences that  must  never  be  vigorously  de- 
bated. Engrossed  with  worldly  darkness, 
she  cannot  see  God  in  the  picture.  She  can- 
not see  the  need  of  letting  his  truth  tri- 
umph over  error  through  public  discus- 
sion, of  letting  Bible  truth  be  preached 
even  though  it  divides,  as  Jesus  said  it 
would.  Christendom  prefers  blasphemy 
against  God  to  error  exposure  that  shocks 
her  vulnerable  religious  susceptibilities. 
Like  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  the  mind  of 
Christendom  contracts  as  more-  spiritual 
light  of  God's  truth  is  poured  upon  her. 
—Luke  12:51-53. 

Christendom's  worldliness  must  not  en- 
tice or  discourage  the  Christian  witness  in 
the  performance  of  his  duty.  He  must  learn 
to  strike  hard  with  Bible  truth,  not  only 
at  the  mind  of  man,  but  also  at  his  heart. 
The  wrongdoer  must  be  impressed  with  the 
seriousness  of  his  error  and  be  led  aright. 
Fear  of  wounding  a  man's  pride  should  not 
dissuade  the  witness  of  Jehovah  from 
speaking  the  truth.  Better  cut  him  with 
truth  and  wake  him  to  his  senses  and  save 
his  life  than  to  tolerate  in  silence  his 
wrongdoing  and  see  him  go  down  into  de- 
struction. 

Human  salvation  is  not  the  only  thing 
that  is  at  stake.  God's  name  is  involved. 
Jehovah's  witnesses  are  called  upon  to 
champion  that  name  and  to  vigorously  up- 
hold God's  truth  against  all  contradictions. 
This  they  must  do  faithfully  without  fear 
until  the  time  when  Jehovah  himself  will 
arise  to  put  an  end  to  all  intolerant  blas- 
phemers of  that  which  is  right,  just  and 
true. 


The  truth  vAll  set  you  free. — John  S.-32. 


AWAKE! 


WHAT'S  wrong  with  being  a  house- 
wife? Many  American  women  es- 
pecially shy  .away  from  the  title  as  if  it 
were  a  bad  word.  When  called  upon  to 
state  their  occupation,  a  goodly  num- 
ber of  them  are  reluctant  to  say  that 
they  are  housewives.  And  when  they 
finally  do  own  up  to  it,  they  do  so  in  an 
apologetic  manner  as  if  they 
were  ashamed  of  it.  Columnist 
Hal  Borland  says:  "At  cock- 
tail parties  particularly  if 
there  are  career  women  pres- 
ent,  she    [the  housewife]    is 
likely  to  murmur  when  intro- 
duced, 'Oh,  I'm  nobody.  I 
don't  do  anything.  I'm  just  a 
housewife.' " 

Unhappily,  the  pride  of  being  a  house- 
wife, once  great  in  women  the  world  over, 
has  been  waning  year  after  year.  The 
downgrading  has  been  so  complete  that  to- 
day the  very  thought  of  becoming  a  house- 
wife sends  some  women  through  the  raft- 
ers. Dr.  Rebecca  Liswood,  executive  direc- 
tor for  Marriage  Counseling  Service  of 
greater  New  York,  says  she  knows  a  moth- 
er that  wears  a  little  red  apron  with  the 
words  "The  Hell  with  Housework"  printed 
across  the  front  in  large  letters.  Authoress 
Eve  Merriam  wrote:  "Clearly,  staying 
home  full-time  is  not  fit  occupation  for  a 
fullrgrown  woman.  What  is  surprising  is 
not  that  so  many  housewives  leave  home, 
but  that  50  per  cent  of  them  prefer  to  re- 
main housewives." 

Why  such  distaste  for  homemaking? 
Many  wives  confess  that  they  do  not  mind 
the  work,  what  they  do  not  like  is  to  be 
called  a  "housewife."  A  reflection  of  this 
feeling  can  be  seen  in  a  double-spread  Ac- 
rilan  advertisement,  which  says  of  a  young 
woman  holding  aclothesbasket:  "She  hates 
her  title  of  housewife,  but  loves  her  job." 
More  than  half  of  the  housewives  inter- 


viewed in  a  survey  stated  that  they  did 
love  their  jobs  and  that  "housework  helps 
their  self-esteem."  But  they  were  quick  to 
add  that  the  title  "housewife"  gives  them 
an  inferiority  complex.  They  complain  that 
the  word  seems  drab,  suggesting  drudgery 
and  a  dull  existence,  which  they  do  not 
like. 

"Disaffection  for  the  word  'housewife' 
may  stem  in  part  from  the  unsympathetic 
definition  given  it  by  some  dictionaries," 
says  the  New  York  Times.  "Dictionary  'X,' 
for  example,  coldly  defined  'housewife'  as 
'the  woman  in  charge  of  a  household.'  This 
does  not  even  indicate  that  a  housewife 
may  be  wedded.  The  Oxford  Universal 
Dictionary,  on  the  other  hand,  says  gen- 
erously that  a  housewife  is  'the  mistress 
of  a  family;  the  wife  of  a  householder. 
Often,  a  woman  who  manages  her  house- 
hold with  skill  and  thrift,  a  domestic  econ- 
omist.' This,  especially  if  one  accepts  the 
canny  use  of  the  word  'often,'  "  says  the 
newspaper,  "is  much  nearer  the  mark." 
Thoughtfully  R.  H.  Grenville  suggests: 
"It's  time  we  found  a  better  word  to  desig- 


JANVARY  8,  1961 


nate  man's  spouse;  though  every  now  and 
then,  I  know,  the  average  woman  feels  as 
though  she's  married  to  a  house!" 

Serious  efforts  are  now  under  way  to 
popularize  homemaking  by  glamorizing 
woman's  position  with  fancy  titles  such 
as  "home  executive,"  "household  engi- 
neer," "domestic  economist,"  "household 
mathematician,"  and  other  high-sounding 
ear-ticklers.  But  so  far  none  of  these  have 
caught  on.  And  as  far  as  the  housewife  is 
concerned,  she  is  still  "just  a  housewife." 

Fruits  of  Downgrading 

Downgrading  the  position  of  housewife 
was  bound  to  bear  fruit  in  time.  It  is  not 
surprising,  therefore,  to  learn  that  in  a  re- 
cent nationwide  study  conducted  by  the 
University  of  Michigan  Survey  Research 
Center,  when  1,925  young  girls  of  eleven 
to  nineteen  years  of  age  were  asked  about 
their  future  plans,  94  percent  replied  that 
they  hoped  to  marry  someday,  but  only 
3  percent  wanted  to  be  housewives! 

Homemaking  is  obviously  at  a  very  low 
ebb  these  days.  Office  and  factory  jobs  ap- 
pear to  have  the  greater  appeal.  Attractive 
young  girls  seem  to  prefer  punch-press  op- 
erating jobs  in  dingy  factories  to  home- 
making  in  pleasant  surroundings.  Why 
this?  What  are  the  reasons  for  such  dim 
views  of  being  a  housewife? 

Young  single  homemakers  and  married 
women  without  children  especially  seem 
to  feel  that  being  a  housewife  is  unneces- 
sary work.  Only  one  in  four  single  women 
said  housework  made  them  feel  useful  and 
important,  whereas  about  50  percent  of 
the  married  women  said  homemaking  gave 
them  a  sense  of  achievement.  Findings  by 
Robert  S.  Weiss  and  Nancy  Morse  Samuel- 
son  for  the  University  of  Michigan  showed: 
"With  marriage,  housework  remains  a 
source  of  feeling  of  social  worth  through- 
out life;  but  for  the  single  woman,  includ- 


ing the  woman  who  has  lost  her  husband, 
increasing  age  makes  housework  more  and 
more  likely  to  lose  its  meaning." 

Primarily  among  single  girls  has  house- 
keeping lost  its  meaning.  Far  too  many  of 
them  feel  that  nobody  thinks  anything  of 
a  housewife,  and  that  the  life  lacks  im- 
portance and  thrills.  Too  often  they  are 
right.  There  is  no  denying,  says  columnist 
Borland,  "that  the  shop  talk  of  wives  is 
not  always  as  interesting  as  the  reminis- 
cences of  actresses  or  lady  wrestlers.  But 
few  professional  career  women  live  a  life 
one-half  as  exciting  or  satisfying  as  that 
of  the  ordinary  housewife.  Motherhood, 
the  art  of  raising  children,  is  an  endless 
drama,  a  ceaseless  adventure."  It  is  truly 
difficult  to  imagine  what  could  be  more 
exciting  or  challenging  than  rearing  the 
next  generation.  This  is  the  privilege  and 
joy  of  the  housewife.  What  secular  job 
could  possibly  be  more  worth  while? 

Contrary  to  the  general  consensus,  it 
takes  brains  and  a  great  deal  of  skill  to  be 
a  mother  and  a  manager  of  a  good  home. 
Those  who  look  upon  housework  as  simple, 
unimportant  activity  have  never  tried  to 
manage  a  home.  Dr.  Liswood  emphasizes 
that  "running  a  home  is  just  as  hard  and 
complex  as  operating  a  small  business.  In 
many  ways,"  she  says,  "it's  harder  and 
more  complex!  Also,  there  is  more  at  stake. 
A  good  wife  must  also  be  a  thoroughly 
competent  housekeeper,  dietitian,  child  ex- 
pert, cook,  nurse  and  food  buyer.  She  must 
know  a  great  deal  about  the  cleaning  of 
modern  fabrics,  budgetary  matters,  school 
problems  and,  yes,  even  machinery.  Even 
in  a  push-button  kitchen,  she  has  to  know 
what  buttons  to  push  and  which  knobs  to 
twirl,  and  often  this  isn't  easy!"  House- 
keeping has  its  variety,  interest  and  im- 
portance, if  the  ladies  would  but  give  it  a 
chance.  They  certainly  would  not  be  bored 
for  lack  of  things  to  do. 


10 


AWAKE.' 


Why  the  Dim  View  of  Things? 

Kitchen  automation  is  being  blamed  for 
some  of  the  negativism  among  women  to- 
ward housekeeping.  This  Week  Magazine 
states:  "Push-button  kitchens,  automatic 
cleaning  equipment  and  easy-to-fix  meals 
have  made  mothers  feel  less  important  and 
hence  less  prideful."  Not  experiencing  any 
personal  challenge  or  triumph,  housewives 
find  it  hard  to  reflect  joys  they  do  not  feel 
— joys  that  once  aroused  the  desire  in 
daughters  to  want  to  copy  their  mothers 
as  homemakers. 

However,  Dr.  Liswood  says,  women  have 
no  reason  to  feel  useless  because  of  auto- 
mation. "Women  must  realize  that  as  their 
part  in  the  physical  side  of  the  job  shrinks, 
the  managerial  role  of  the  homemaker  be- 
comes increasingly  significant."  She  states: 
"They  should  understand  that  the  removal 
of  drudgery  is  a  blessing,  giving  them  time 
to  attend  to  other  factors  such  as  child 
rearing,  nutrition,  good  family  relations 
and  real  management." 

Despite  all  the  gadgets  and  modern  con- 
veniences in  the  up-to-date  home,  many 
housewives  complain  that  the  work-load 
is  still  much  too  heavy,  and  that  house- 
work is  harder  than  holding  down  an  out- 
side job.  Their  growing  daughters  agree 
with  their  mothers  and  there  is  some 
scientific  support  for  their  plaint. 

Scientific  measurements  show  that 
household  chores  require  as  much  energy 
as  some  heavy  male  occupations.  A  woman 
ironing  or  mopping  a  floor,  for  example, 
exerts  more  energy  than  a  bricklayer. 
Making  beds  takes  more  effort  than  shoe 
repairing.  It  takes  more  out  of  a  house- 
wife to  beat  a  carpet  than  to  push  a  wheel- 
barrow with  a  115-pound  cargo.  Wringing 
out  wash  or  hanging  it  is  more  taxing  than 
plowing  with  a  tractor.  Little  wonder  a 
woman  that  markets,  cooks,  cleans  and 
cares  for  husband  and  children  is  tired  at 


the  end  of  the  day.  Some  of  them  do 
outside  work  besides! 

Many  authorities  are  urging  house- 
wives to  break  their  kitchen  chains  and  to 
get  rid  of  their  cooped-up  feeling  by  par- 
ticipating more  fully  in  civic,  economic  and 
political  life.  Millions  of  women  are  heed- 
ing these  calls,  but  they  are  not  happy. 
Says  This  Week  Magazine:  "Their  natural 
instincts  keep  turning  them  homeward. 
They  develop  strong  guilt  feelings  about 
neglecting  their  families,  while  still  yearn- 
ing for  brighter  vistas  outside."  Because 
of  their  makeup,  it  is  almost  impossible  for 
women  to  achieve  happiness  to  the  full 
apart  from  being  housewives.  Therefore, 
something  ought  to  be  done  to  make  the 
role  of  the  housewife  more  attractive.  But 
what? 

Recapturing  the  Joys  of  Homemaking 

Perhaps  one  of  the  first  things  to  da 
is  to  make  woman's  load  lighter.  Anne  Jes- 
sup  has  come  up  with  this  suggestion: 
"Why  don't  we  launch  a  campaign  to  con- 
vince young  grandmothers  and  able  wid- 
ows that  they  ought  to  volunteer — for 
good  wages — to  help  younger  women?  The 
stigma  of  being  a  servant  could  be  re- 
moved, and  in  every  respect  our  society 
would  be  strengthened."  She  believes  de- 
veloping a  new  occupation  called  "house- 
hold helper"  or  something  of  the  kind 
would  be  a  giant  step  in  the  right  direction. 

Another  suggestion  offered  is  that  girls 
be  trained  to  be  good  wives,  mothers  and 
homemakers.  This  training  should  begin  in 
the  home  with  the  mother  setting  a  right 
example.  Dr.  Liswood  says:  "If  a  mother 
takes  pride  in  running  a  well-managed 
home,  if  she  believes  she  is  undergoing  a 
richly  rewarding  experience  and  glows 
with  this  feeling,  the  battle  is  more  than 
half  won.  On  the  other  hand,  if  her  home 
is  poorly  run,  if  the  meals  are  unimagina- 
tive, the  rooms  untidy,  the  marketing  hap- 


JANUARY  S,  1961 


11 


hazard,  the  finances  mixed  up  and  her 
grousing  loud,  clear  and  constant,  the 
daughter  may  well  take  a  dim  view  of  the 
entire  setup."  So  a  good  example  in  the 
home  is  all-important. 

There  must  also  be  a  cultivating  of  a 
right  attitude  toward  housework.  So  much 
dissatisfaction  can  be 
traced  back  to  the 
belief  that  house- 
work is  undesirable. 
If  a  housewife  be- 
lieves her  work  is 
dull,  it  will  appear 
that  way  to  her,  re- 
gardless of  the  exciting  things  that  take 
place  in  the  home.  If  she  believes  that  work 
is  an  evil  to  be  done  efficiently  only  because 
that  means  it  can  be  done  quickly  and  got 
through  with,  then,  even  though  her  home 
may  be  efficiently  kept,  it  will  not  bring 
her  pleasure  and  it  will  not  reflect  the 
warmth  and  love  that  homes  should.  If,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  housewife  loves  her 
work  for  itself  as  well  as  for  its  results, 
she  will  receive  great  joy  from  dressing 
her  children,  from  feeding  them,  from  wax- 
ing the  floors  and  seeing  that  the  home  is 
lived  in.  Each  little  thing  she  does  about 
the  house  will  have  a  rewarding  effect 
upon  her. 

Doing  things  for  the  love  of  the  family 
and  not  just  because  they  have  to  be  done 
makes  all  the  difference  in  the  world.  A 
housewife  can  cook  for  the  love  of  it,  for 
the  challenge  that  it  presents  or  because 
it  relaxes  her,  but  she  receives  her  great- 
est pleasure  if  she  cooks  because  of  her 
love  for  the  family.  Her  love  prevents  cook- 
ing, baking  and  housekeeping  from  becom- 
ing commonplace — routine.  She  will  not 
be  satisfied  to  throw  together  whatever 
she  has  on  hand  and  in  any  form  and  with- 
out imagination.  Her  table  will  be  set  with 
dishes,  glassware,  and  perhaps  fresh  flow- 


ARTICLES  IN  THE  NEXT  ISSUE 

0  Light,  Crime  and  Corruption. 

%  Why   Poison   Your    Mind? 

9  Fascinating,  Versatile  Fabric — Fiber  Glass. 

*>  Miracle   of  the   Snowtlake. 


ers,  as  if  it  were  a  special  occasion.  Her 
meals  are  tasty,  and  her  salads  colorful 
and  imaginative.  She  makes  even  her 
stews  seem  elegant.  The  "oohs"  and  "ahs" 
and  the  love  of  her  family  are  her  reward. 
Rise  Stevens,  Metropolitan  opera  star, 
said:  "Whenever  a  cake  turns  out  just 
right,  I  feel  as  if  I've 
just  given  a  wonder- 
ful performance."  But 
she  added  that  she 
feels  her  best  when 
she  cooks  to  please 
her  husband  and 
child.  "What  a  won- 
derful feeling  it  is  to  see  them  take  second 
and  third  helpings."  To  be  with  the  family 
is  the  "most  important  part  of  life,"  she 
says,  "as  it  must  be  to  every  other  wom- 
an." Surely  a  woman  who  loves  her  family 
dearly  finds  being  a  housewife  the  most 
enjoyable  work  in  the  world. 

Loving  one's  family  also  calls  for  many 
sacrifices.  It  calls  for  the  giving  of  oneself 
willingly.  Dr.  Walter  C.  Alvarez,  emeritus 
consultant  in  medicine,  Mayo  Clinic,  said: 
Frequently  husbands,  because  of  the  im- 
portance of  their  work,  have  to  neglect 
their  wives.  Then  it  may  help  the  women 
to  pick  up  their  Bibles  and  read  how  the 
hands  of  Moses  had  to  be  held  up  before 
a  battle  was  woa  (Ex.  17:8-12)  "Many  a 
time  I  have  said  to  a  disgruntled  wife: 
'Your  job  is  a  big  one  and  an  important 
one — it  is  to  hold  up  your  fine  husband's 
hands.  Thus,  you  can  have  a  share  in  his 
work,  and  a  proud  share.  How  much  better 
it  is  to  help  him  in  this  way  than  to  stand 
off  and  complain  that  your  life  seems  lone- 
ly and  empty,'  " 

Such  a  loving,  unselfish  attitude  toward 
husband  and  family  is  not  only  desirable 
and  important  but  one  of  the  most  precious 
gifts  that  a  mother  can  give  her  daughter 
today  that  will  help  her  to  become  and  en- 
joy being  a  good  wife  tomorrow. 


12 


AWAKE! 


IMC3L1 


66T  AST  week  London's  gold 
J_j  market  sounded  a  warning 
that  was  heard  around  the  world,  a  rush 
to  exchange  dollars  for  gold  sent  its  price 
up  to  $41  an  ounce  .  .  .  Central  bankers 
are  finding  it  hard  to  fall  asleep  at  night." 
Thus  reported  Business  Week,  October  29, 
1960. 

What  had  happened?  The  tide  was  turn- 
ing against  Uncle  Sam,  In  addition  to  his 
loans  and  expenditures  for  World  Wars  I 
and  II,  Uncle  Sam  has  felt  it  is  duty  to 
underwrite  the  free  world's  fight  against 
communism,  pouring  out  $73  billion  since 
1945  in  foreign  aid  alone.  It  may  all  have 
been  well  meant,  but  was  it  well  advise 
And  judging  by  the  many  reports  rectfved, 
it  is  pertinent  to  ask,  To  what  exfcmt  were 
these  billions  squandered  was^rully? 
Further,  as  Uncle  Sam  h^Jped  other  na- 

ions  to  get  back 
on  their  financial 
feet,  they  not  only 
began  to  take 
over  his  foreign 
markets  but  to 
outprice  him  at 
home.  As  a  re- 
sult, during  the 
past  three  years 
he  has  paid  out  a 
total  of  511.5  bil- 
lion more  than 
he    received. 
Highlight- 
ing the  irony 


"\ 


> 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


qf  this  situation  are  the  comments  of  a 
New  York  Times  financial  editor  on  the 
money  Germany 
loaned  to  Greece  at 
6  percent:  "So  goes 
the  incredible  finan- 
cial miscarriages  of 
the  postwar  period. 
The  war  victor  [U.S.] 
pays  reparations  to 
the  loser  [Germany] 
by  forgiving  debt. 
The  loser  lends  out 
the  forgiven  debt  cap- 
ital  in  the  land  he 
ravaged  [Greece]. 
The  victim  of  the  rajrtfgement  pays  6  per- 
cent interest  to  tl^war  ravager  for  the  use 
of  capital  dona#a  by  the  war  victor." 

Thus  in  Jrf»9  Uncle  Sam  spent  on  im- 
ports, supjf  as  Volkswagens,  Leika  cameras 
and  TeTefunken  radios,  $15  billion;  on 
5s  abroad  arid  on  foreign  military  and 
fonomic  aid,  $6.6  billion;  on  foreign  in- 
vestments and  travel  abroad,  $6  billion.  All 
together,  he  spent  $29,6  billion  abroad  but 
received  only  $25.8  billion,  leaving  a  deficit 
of  $3.8  billion.  In  1958  the  deficit  was  $3.4 
billion,  in  1960  at  least  $4.3  billion. 

Obviously,  such  adverse  balances  cannot 
go  on  indefinitely.  After  all,  Uncle  Sam's 
gold  supply  is  limited;  it  has  already 
dropped  from  a  peak  of  $25  billion  to  $18 
billion.  Of  this  amount  his  own  law  re- 
quires that  $11.6  billion  be  held  as  a  25- 
percent  support  for  his  internal  financial 
structure,,  to  back  his  Federal  Reserve 
notes.  This  leaves  him  but  $6.4  billion  with 
which  to  pay  the  claims  that  nations  and 
individuals  outside  the  United  States  have 
against  him,  and  those  claims  amount  to 
well  over  $20  billion. 

True,  aside  from  the  United  States,  only 
Belgium,  El  Salvador,  Switzerland  and  the 
Union  of  South  Africa  carry  gold  reserves 
to  back  their  own  currency.  And  Great 

13 


Britain  has  only  $1  billion  of  gold  while 
having  claims  against  her  of  $4  billion,  a 
ratio  of  one  to  four.  However,  Great  Brit- 
ain has  deliberately  kept  this  ratio  as  good 
business,  while  Uncle  Sam's  unfavorable 
ratio  is  due  to  circumstances  apparently 
outside  his  control  and  therefore  his  unfa- 
vorable ratio  may  well  get  worse;  and  that 
it  will  if  the  present  rate  at  which  gold  is 
leaving  his  coffers  keeps  up.  (Incidentally, 
the  gold  does  not  actually  leave  the  United 
States,  it  merely  gets  shifted  from  one 
room  to  another  in  the  Federal  Reserve 
Bank  in  New  York  city.) 

What  Can  Be  Done  About  It? 

There  are  a  myriad  conflicting  remedies, 
according  to  Fortune,  1960;  the  reason  for 
this  being  that  there  are  valid  objections 
to  all  of  them.  Thus  one  leading  banker 
recommends  scrapping  the  25-percent  gold 
reserve  requirement  and  thereby  freeing 
$11.6  billion  of  gold.  But  another  states 
that  this  would  be  merely  removing  the 
brakes  from  a  locomotive  that  is  already 
speeding  too  fast.  Obviously,  unless  the 
trend  is  reversed,  such  a  step  would  only 
delay  the  crisis,  not  eliminate  it. 

International  bankers  have  gotten  to- 
gether and  agreed  to  lower  the  interest 
rates  in  certain  European  financial  centers 
so  as  to  lessen  the  temptation  for  money 
to  leave  the  United  States  because  of  the 
low  interest  rate  there.  But  this  device  has 
amounted  to  no  more  than  "a  flea  bite  on 
an  elephant,"  according  to  one  New  York 
Times  writer. 

The  one  step  or  measure  that  many  lead- 
ing economists  insist  is  the  most  impera- 
tive, but  from  which  Uncle  Sam  shrinks 
the  most,  is  getting  his  financial  affairs  in 
order.  His  debt  ceiling  has  steadily  risen 
until  today  it  stands  at  $290  billion.  The 
interest  charge  on  that  alone  is  staggering, 
not  to  say  anything  about  reducing  it.  Un- 
cle Sam's  annual  expenses  have  risen  from 

14 


$3  billion  in  1930  to  $9  billion  in  1940,  to 
$40  billion  in  1950,  to  almost  $80  billion  in 
1960.  During  about  the  same  time  Uncle 
Sam  has  taken  for  his  Share  of  the  gross 
national  income  ever  more— from  10  to  20 
to  31  percent. — Taxpayer's  Dolktr,  July, 
1960. 

But  apparently  it  is  expecting  too  much 
of  politicians  that  they  take  wise  and  firm 
measures;  it  is  far  more  popular  to  keep 
wasting  at  the  bunghole  while  saving  at 
the  spigot.  And  so  Eisenhower,  on  Novem- 
ber 16,  1960,  issued  a  directive  to  certain 
of  his  cabinet  members  requiring  them  to 
cut  down  expenses  abroad  in  one  way  or 
another,  which  by  the  middle  of  1962 
should  amount  to  $1  billion  a  year.  This 
directive,  long  overdue,  apparently  was  not 
issued  sooner  because  of  the  effect  it  might 
have  had  on  the  election. 

Another  step  being  taken  but  which  has 
borne  little  if  any  fruit  is  that  of  asking 
West  Germany,  France  and  the  United 
Kingdom  to  take  over  a  share  of  the  cost 
of  keeping  United  States  troops  in  Europe. 
To  this  end  Treasury  Secretary  Anderson 
and  Under  Secretary  of  State  Dillon  visit- 
ed the  capitals  of  these  countries  in  the 
latter  part  of  November,  However,  where 
they  had  hoped  to  achieve  most,  in  Bonn, 
they  accomplished  practically  nothing.  In 
spite  of  her  present  favorable  gold  balance, 
West  Germany  would  not  raise  taxes  or 
float  a  loan  to  contribute  $600,000,000  a 
year  to  pay  for  United  States  troops. 

Regarding  this,  D.  H.  Lawrence  wrote 
in  the  New  York  Herald  Tribune,  Novem- 
ber 25,  1960:  "They  simply  couldn't  accept 
the  fact  that  the  great  United  States 
would  have  to  ask  West  Germany  and  oth- 
er European  countries  for  any  help.  But, 
as  has  often  been  said,  pride  goes  before 
a  fall  and  the  time  had  come  to  face  up  to 
the  true  state  of  affairs  and  let  the  world 
know  that  the  dollar  will  be  in  jeopardy 

AWAKE! 


unless  co-operation  is  forthcoming  from 

Western  European  governments." 

Among  other  steps  that  Uncle  Sam 
might  have  to  take  to  save  his  dollar  is  to 
restrict  travel  abroad  as  well  as  lower  the 
value  or  the  amount  of  goods  Americans 
can  bring  home  duty  free.  Especially  would 
cutting  down  his  troops  abroad  help;  which 
is  what  Treasury  Secretary  Anderson 
warned  Bonn  that  the  United  States  would 
do  to  save  her  dollar.  Uncje  Sam  could  also 
cut  down  on  foreign  military  and  economic 
aid,  but  what  effect  would  such  a  step  have 
on  the  cold  war?  The  State  Department 
would  shudder  to  think  of  taking  such  a 
step! 

Still  other  measures  that  Uncle  Sam 
could  take  to  restore  his  balance  of  pay- 
ments, to  have  his  income  equal  his  ex- 
penses, are  the  limiting  of  investments 
abroad  by  Americans,  the  limiting  of  the 
floating  of  foreign  loans  In  the  United 
States,  and  the  limiting  of  imports.  All 
such  measures  would  go  against  Uncle 
Sam's  idealism,  but  in  time  of  stress  some- 
thing has  to  give. 

More  Drastic  Monetary  Surgery 

More  drastic  than  any  of  the  foregoing 
would  be  a  gold  embargo — to  forbid  any 
gold  at  all  to  leave  the  United  States.  While 
other  nations  have  resorted  to  this  device 
when  financially  embarrassed,  their  mone- 
tary unit  was  not  the  world  standard  as  is 
the  dollar. 

Most  drastic  of  all  would  be  the  devalua- 
tion of  the  dollar,  in  expectation  of  which 
the  rush  to  exchange  dollars  for  gold  start- 
ed last  October.  In  view  of  the  fact  that 
gold  has  been  selling  for  $35  an  ounce  for 
the  past  twenty-seven  years,  when  every- 
thing else  has  soared  in  price,  it  could  with 


consistency  be  raised  to  $70  an  ounce.  But 
not  without  catastrophic  reverberations. 
Why  not?  Because  even  though  it  is 
claimed  that  gold  is  merely  a  commodity. 
It  is  more  than  that;  it  is  a  monetary  rule 
or  gauge,  by  reason  of  its  price  being 
pegged  at  $35  an  ounce. 

Thus  today  ever  so  many  nations  have 
been  keeping  dollars  instead  of  gold  as  a 
matter  of  convenience  because  the  two  are 
interchangeable.  But  should  gold  soar  to 
$40,  $50  or  even  $70  an  ounce,  all  those 
holding  dollars  would  lose  proportionately. 
This  is  why  we  are  told  that  today  "for- 
eign bankers  are  keeping  a  sharp  eye  on 
the  U.S.  economy."  Just  how  much  is  in- 
volved in  What  happens  to  the  dollar  Lud- 
wig  Erhard,  Germany's  Economics  Min- 
uter, underscored  when  he  stated:  "If  the 
sun,  the  dollar  around  which  other  cur- 
rencies revolve,  starts  to  move,  which  God 
forbid,  the  consequences  would  be  unthink- 
able." 

'  What  the  future  holds  out  for  the  West- 
ern world's  monetary  system  remains  to 
be  seen.  Will  the  new  administration  at 
Washington  deal  with  the  problem  with 
more  realism?  The  long  delay  in  dealing 
with  it  because  of  the  elections  was  inex- 
cusable. On  the  other  hand,  the  Frankfur- 
ter Rundschau,  one  of  West  Germany's 
leading  newspapers,  in  commenting  on  the 
course  taken  by  Bonn,  observed  that  "bol- 
stering the  weakening  dollar  means  pro- 
tecting the  German  mark  as  well.  .  .  .  It's 
possible  that  later  it  may  be  even  more 
expensive  to  protect  the  United  States  cur- 
rency." 

Having  placed  its  confidence  in  material 
wealth,  the  world  is  in  a  sad  plight.  Truly, 
"the  love  of  money  is  a  root  of  all  sorts  of 
injurious  things." — 1  Tim.  6:10. 


JANUARY  S.  1961 


15 


IS  IT  possible  to  determine 
a  person's  temperament  by 
his  body  build?  Many  studies, 
have  been  made  in  recent 
years  of  the  relationship  be- 
tween personality  and  body 
build.  The  results  have  deep- 
ly impressed  many  persons. 
But  first  of  all  it  should  be 
stated  that  the  conclusions 
reached  are  controversial- 
Some  authorities  regard 
them  as  highly  valid;  others 
say  the  results  offer  only 
very  general  criteria.  None-, 
theless,  an  examination  of 
the  results  will  prove  interesting  and 
perhaps  furnish  some  help  in  the  mat- 
ter of  understanding  why  people  are 
as  they  are. 

The  combination  of  weight  and 
height  of  humans  results  in  various 
builds  or  physiques  that  have  been  gen- 
eralized into  three  divi- 
sions: (1)  The  broad 
build  with  relatively  short 
limbs,  (2)  the  medium 
or  muscular  build,  and 
(3)  the  thin  and  tall  build. 
The  German  psychiatrist, 
E.  Kretschmer,  was  led  by 
his  work  with  mental  pa- 
tients to  develop  this 
threefold  physical  classi- 
fication. 

Many  authorities  op- 
posed Kretschmer's  views, 
saying  that  it  was  not  pos- 
sible to  classify  most  peo- 
ple into  any  of  his  three 
groupings  with  any  degree 

16 


_>Cfiue 


of  accuracy.  Kretschmer's  views 
underwent  refinement  by  Dr.  William 
H.  Sheldon,  now  director  of  the  Con- 
stitution Laboratory,  Cortege  of  Phy- 
sicians and  Surgeons,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity, New  York.  Dr.  Sheldon  pub- 
lished the  results  of  his  more  than  ten 
years  of  research  in  the  volumes  The 
Varieties  of  Human  Physique  and  The 
Varieties  of  Tempera- 
ment. His  latest  work  is 
the  volume  Atlas  of  Men, 
which  contains  numerous 
pictures  and  descrip- 
tions relating  to  eighty- 
eight  classifications   of 
body  builds. 

Obviously  Dr.  Sheldon 
does  not  try  to  St  every- 
one into  three  physical 
groupings,  but  he  does 
maintain  that  some  of 
each  of  three  basic  com- 
ponents are  found  in 
everyone;  the  relative 
amounts  are  highly  vari- 
able. Some  persons  are 
said  to  have  a  fairly  even 
balance  between  the  three  primary  com- 
ponents, but  most  persons  are  usually 
predominant,  at  least  slightly,  in  one. 
Then  again  many  persons  are  markedly 
predominant  in  one  of  the  three  basic 
components.  Dr.  Sheldon's  theory  is  that 
a  person's  body  build  can  be  drastically 
altered  by  factors  such  as  disease,  glut- 
tony or  malnutrition  but  still  remains 
basically  the  same. 

AWAKEJ 


The  three  basic  components  of  body 
build  are  said  to  be   (1)   En'domorphy, 

(2)  Mes'omorphy   (MACE-oh-morfi)   and 

(3)  Ec'tomorphy.  Dr.  Sheldon's  studies 
have  led  him  to  believe  that  there  is  a 
high  correlation  between  temperament  and 
these  three  primary  components.  This  is 
said  to  be  especially  perceptible  when 
there  is  a  high  degree  of  one  of  the  com- 
ponets.  Following  is  a  very  general  descrip- 
tion of  the  three  primary  body-build  com- 
ponents, together  with  a  few  of  the  typical 
personality  traits,  according  to  the  theory; 

Endomorphy:  Digestive  Organs 

When  endomorphy  predominates,  it  is 
said  that  the  digestive  viscera  are  highly 
developed,  the  endodermal  layer  having  de- 
veloped chiefly  into  the  digestive  appara- 
tus. The  person  high  in  endomorphy  tends 
to  have  good  digestion  and  to  put  on  extra 
weight  in  middle  age.  The  face  is  round, 
the  abdomen  is  bulkier  than  the  chest  and 
the  limbs  are  comparatively  short 

The  person  high  in  this  primary  com- 
ponent is  said  to  be  characterized  by  a  love 
of  sociability.  He  is  seldom  bothered  with 
tenseness  but  is  able  to  relax  better  than 
other  persons;  in  fact,  the  arms,  as  Dr. 
Sheldon  puts  it,  "often  show  a  limp  relaxa- 
tion like  that  of  a  seal's  flipper."  There  is 
extraordinary  love  of  food  and  a  genuine 
fondness  for  people.  The  person  is  gener- 
ous, has  an  evenness  of  emotional  flow, 
great  tolerance  and  comfortable  accept- 
ance of  customs  and  situations.  Sleep 
comes  easily  ahd  sleep  is  deep. 

Mesomorphy:  Bone  and  Muscle 

When  this  primary  component  predomi- 
nates, the  person  is  said  to  have  an  ath- 
letic build,  with  broad  shoulders  and  trunk, 
good  all-around  muscle  development.  The 
chest  is  larger  than  the  abdomen,  and  the 
limbs,  whether  long  or  short,  are  strong. 
The  person  is  hard,  firm,  upright  and  rela- 
tively strong  and  tough. 


The  person  high  in  the  mesomorphic 
component  is  said  to  possess  vigor,  push 
and  assertiveness.  He  abounds  with  tre- 
mendous energy  and  so  is  a  real  doer,  a 
person  of  action.  The  dynamic  executive 
who  gets  things  done  is  said  to  be  high 
in  bone  and  muscle  development.  There 
is  a  liking  for  exercise  and,  as  Dr.  Shel- 
don phrases  it,  "genuine  pleasure  in  par- 
ticipation in  dangerous  and  strenuous 
undertakings."  The  person  may  enjoy  dan- 
gerously competitive  athletics,  mountain 
climbing,  deep-sea  diving,  exploration,  and 
so  forth.  There  is  no  chronic  fatigue,  and 
the  individual  seems  to  be  able  to  get  along 
with  one  fifth  to  one  third  less  sleep,  than 
other  people;  energy  is  quickly  available 
— a  source  of  wonderment  to  persons  high 
in  other  body  builds. 

There  is  also  great  enjoyment  in  leader- 
ship, "a  consummate  willingness  to  as- 
sume responsibility."  In  getting  things 
done  the  person  highly  mesomorphic  may 
seem,  although  not  deliberately  cruel, 
"ruthless  in  the  sense  that  he  is  oblivious 
to  purposes  or  wishes  that  conflict  with 
his  own."  The  person  often  makes  deci- 
sions immediately.  There  is  spartan  in- 
difference to  pain  and  general  overmaturi- 
ty  of  appearance,  there  often  being  a 
striking  manliness  or  womanliness  about 
the  appearance. 

In  women  this  component  is  predomi- 
nant in  greatly  varying  degrees.  "The  term 
'bustling,'  "  says  Dr.  Sheldon,  "seems  to 
apply  excellently  to  females  who  are  highly 
endowed  with  this  trait." 

Ectomorphy;  Skin  and  Sense  Organs 

When  ectomorphy  predominates,  the 
person  is  tall,  lean,  long-necked,  narrow- 
chested  with  narrow  shoulders,  hips  and 
face.  The  body,  in  comparison  with  the 
other  two  types,  is  fragile  and  delicate, 
there  being  only  slight  development  of  mus- 
cle and  visceral  and  bone  structures.  This 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


17 


component  represents  predominance  of 
skin  and  sense  organs  and  nervous  system. 

Among  those  high  in  ectomorphy  there 
is  frequent  tenseness,  unrelaxability,  over- 
ly fast  reactions  and  self -consciousness  be- 
cause of  what  is  called  "biological  extro- 
version." (Endomorphic  individuals  are 
said  to  have  biological  introversion  with 
a  resultant  converse  mental  extroversion.) 
The  ectomorphic  type  is  more  easily  fa- 
tigued than  others,  since  muscles  are  long 
and  slender  and  the  digestive  tract  is  poor- 
ly upheld.  More  sleep  is  required  than  for 
those  high  >in  the  other  two  builds.  There 
is  frequent  inability  to  gain  weight  no  mat- 
ter how  much  food  is  eaten.  Because  of  a 
small  stomach  the  person  prefers  four  or 
five  small  meals  a  day  rather  than  the  con- 
ventional three.  The  individual  does  not 
gravitate  to  social  gathering.  "Solitude  is 
enjoyed;  he  is  thus  a  good  student,  likes 
ideas  and  likes  to  study.  Though  often 
brilliant,  the  person  may  not  do  as  well  at 
rote  learning  as  others.  There  is  a  varying 
degree  of  emotional  restraint,  although  the 
person  may  not  feel  he  is  secretive  of  his 
feelings. 

"The  diagnostic  hallmark,"  says  Dr. 
Sheldon  of  a  markedly  ectomorphic  indi- 
vidual, "lies  in  the  behavior  of  the  indi- 
vidual in  the  presence  of  a  person  whom 
he  needs  to  please — ideally  his  employer  or 
a  woman  who  has  not  yet  accepted  him. 
If  he  has  this  trait  predominantly,  he  is 
at  his  worst  in  such  a  circumstance." 
There  is  also  said  to  be  hypersensitivity  to 
pain  and  insect  bites,  poor  sleep  habits  and 
a  youthful  intentness  of  manner  and  ap- 
pearance. There  is  emotional  and  mental 
versatility. 

So  different  are  the  personality  traits 
belonging  to  each  of  the  three  primary 
components  of  body  build  that  Dr.  Sheldon 
contends:  "It  is  conceivable  that  consti- 
tutional characteristics  can  some  day  be 
diagnosed  by  educators  with  sufficient  ac- 


curacy to  justify  establishment  of  two  or 
possibly  several  quite  different  kinds  of 
academic  teaching  procedure." 

Each  type  is  said  to  contribute  valuable 
qualities.  It  is- said,  for  example,  that  for- 
mer president  of  the  United  States  Frank- 
lin D.  Roosevelt  (mesomorphic  build)  was 
strongly  influenced  by  Louis  Howe  (ecto- 
morphic build)  and  James  Farley  (endo- 
morphic build),  each  contributing  wholly 
different  but  equally  important  qualities. 

'Difficult  and  Inconclusive 

Though  there  are  a  number  of  anthro- 
pologists who  champion  the  Sheldon  theo- 
ry (even  suggesting  jobs  for  men  accord- 
ing to  their  physiques),  others  take  a 
dubious  view.  Noted  anthropologist  Ashley 
Montagu  writes  in  his  recent  work  Human 
Heredity: 

"Studies  have  been  made  in  recent  years, 
but  the  results  have  been  quite  inconclu- 
sive in  spite  of  all  claims  to  the  contrary. 
Even  the  body  types  or  somatotypes  are 
quite  arbitrarily  standardized  types.  It  is 
impossible  to  emphasize  sufficiently  the 
fact  that  all  such  studies  are  extremely 
difficult  and  must  be  viewed  with  the  great- 
est caution.  . . . 

"Sheldon  and  others  before  and  since 
have  attempted  to  discover  whether  there 
is  any  relationship  between  body  types  and 
temperament.  It  is  generally  agreed  that 
they  have  failed  to  do  so.  The  riddle  of 
physique  and  temperament  is  one  that 
bristles  with  unsolved  problems.  It  is  also 
complicated  by  the  fact  that  body  type 
changes  with  different  ages.  .  .  .  The  fact 
is  that  the  more  measurable  traits  that 
are  included  in  any  attempt  to  group  men 
together,  the  more  strongly  emphasized 
does  the  essential  individuality  of  the  per- 
son become." 

In  a  similar  vein,  Amram  Scheinfeld 
writes  in  the  book  You  and  Heredity: 
"How  close  the  Kretschmer  or  Sheldon 


18 


AWAKE! 


classifications  come  to  establishing  a  direct 
relationship  between  body  build  and  tem- 
perament is  still  debatable.  .  .  .  With  nor- 
mal persons,  even  if  average  Correlations 
do  exist  between  body  builds  and  tempera- 
ment, one  must  be  extremely  cautious 
about  applying  them  to  individuals  with- 
out taking  note  of  all  the  exceptions  and 
of  all  the  other  factors  that  contribute  to 
personality  development." 

"New  Personality"' Despite  Body  Build 

Other  factors  indeed  affect  personality, 
the  most  powerful  of  which  are  the  opera- 
tion of  God's  holy  spirit  and  the  accurate 
knowledge  of  God's  holy  Word.  The  Bible 
shows  that  a  "new  personality,"  with  its 
assemblage  of  characteristics  marked  out 
by  God,  is  not  only  possible  for  a  Christian 
but  obligatory.  "Put  on  the  new  personality 
which  was  created  according  to  God's  will 
in  true  righteousness." — Eph.  4:24. 

Thus  if  a  person  high  in  what  is  called 
endomorphy  should  have  the  tendency  to 
love  sociability  and  food,  then  by  reason  of 
the  "new  personality"  with  its  self-control 
he  will  never  become  weighted  down  with 
excessive  socializing,  eating,  drinking  and 
love  of  physical  comforts,  wasting  precious 
time  and  dulling  mental  faculties. 

And  if  mesomorphic  persons  do  have  the 
tendency  to  insist  on  their  own  way,  they, 
too,  can  become  balanced  by  putting  on 
the  "new  personality,"  because  iove  does 
not  look  for  its  own  interests.1  (1  Cor.  13: 
5)  They  will  seek  to  do  all  things  Jeho- 
vah's way.  And  if  such  persons  do  have 
the  tendency  to  dangerous  undertakings, 
then  by  reason  of  the  accurate  knowledge 
of  God's  Word,  they  show  the  spirit  of  a 
sound  mind  and  do  not  risk  injury  un- 


necessarily to  their  bodice  that  are  dedi- 
cated to  doing  the  divine  will. 

And  if  ectomorphic  persons  do  have  the 
trait  of  self -consciousness  or  shyness,  pre- 
ferring solitude,  then  by  reason  of  God's 
spirit,  such  persons  become  willing  to  leave 
the  privacy  of  their  homes  to  talk  to  others 
about  God's  kingdom.  They  guard  against 
an  unbalanced  studiousness — always  tak- 
ing in  knowledge  but  never  giving  it  out 
to  others. 

According  to  the  Sheldon  theory,  it 
might  be  diffcult  for  persons  of  different 
body  builds  to  understand  the  tempera- 
ment traits  belonging  to  others.  "Each  ex- 
treme appears  to  be  offensive  to  the  oth- 
er," he  says.  From  the  standpoint  of  the 
ectomorphic  person,  the  endomorphic  lov- 
er of  sociability  and  conviviality  might  be 
a  time  waster;  on  the  other  hand,  the  en- 
domorphic person,  as  well  as  the  meso- 
morphic one,  might  view  the  less  talkative, 
less  social  and  less  aggressive  ectomorphic 
individual  as  "a  dark  and  suspicious  per- 
son." Even  if  Sheldon's  theory  is  a  ques- 
tionable clue  to  personality,  we  can  see 
magnified  the  wisdom  in  God's  command: 
"Do  not  hurry  yourself  in  your  spirit  to 
become  offended,  for  the  taking  of  offense 
is  what  rests  in  the  bosom  of  the  stupid 
ones."  Rather  "continue  putting  up  with 
one  another."— Eccl.  7:9;  Col.  3:13. 

Instead  of  being  overly  concerned  about 
the  temperament  of  others,  the  Christian 
does  well  to  make  certain  that  he  himself 
is  cultivating  the  fruitage  of  God's  spirit. 
For  each  Christian  is  responsible  before 
God  to  "put  on  the  new  personality" — re- 
gardless of  body  build  and  any  related  or 
unrelated  temperament  traits. 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


19 


is  torn  off,  me  Jaws  remaining  In  the  flesh, 
and  these  must  be  detached  separately.  The 
whole  drama  is  enacted  in  the  darkness  of  the 
night  by  the  light  of  the  lantern  held  by  my 
wife.  At  last  the  ants  move  on.  They  cannot 
stand  the  smel]  ot  the  iysoL  Thousands  of" 
corpses  He  in  the  puddles." 


TRAVELER  ANTS 

C  The  following  account  is  from  The  Animal 
World  of  Albert  Schweitzer:  "Serious  enemies 
are  the  notorious  traveler  ants,  which  belong 
to  the  genus  Dorylus.  We  suffer  a  great  deal 
from  them.  In  their  great  migrations  they 
travel  five  or  six  abreast  in  perfectly  ordered 
columns.  I  once  observed,  near  my  house,  a 
column  that  took  thirty-six  hours  to  pass!  .  .  . 
Usually  three  or  four  independent  columns 
march  along  one  beside  the  other  but  from  five 
to  fifty  meters  apart.  At  a  particular  moment 
they  disperse.  How  the  command  is  given  we 
do  not  know.  But  in  a  trice  a  huge  area  is 
covered  with  a  black  swarm.  Every  living  thing 
.  found  on  ft  is  doomed. . . . 
C  "Our  house  lies  on  one  of  the  great  military 
routes  of  the  traveler  ants.  Usually  they  swarm 
at  night.  A  scratching  and  a  peculiar  clucking 
of  the  hens  warn  us  of  the  danger.  Now  no 
time  must  be  lost.  I  spring  out  of  bed,  run  to 
the  hen  house  and  open  it.  Hardly  have  I 
opened  the  door  when  the  hens  rush  out;  shut 
in  they  would  be  the  victims  of  the  ants.  The 
latter  creep  into  the  nose  and  mouth  of  the 
hens  until  they  are  stifled.  Then  they  devour 
them  until  in  a  short  time  only  the  white  bones 
remain.  Ordinarily  it  is  the  chickens  that  fall 
victim  to  the  ravagers;  the  hens  are  able  to 
defend  themselves  until  help  arrives. 
H,  "Meanwhile  my  wife  snatches  the  horn  from 
the  wall  and  blows  it  three  times.  This  is  the 
signal  for  N'Kendju,  helped  by  the  active  men 
in  the  hospital,  to  bring  buckets  of  water  from 
the  river.  The  water  is  mixed  with  lysol,  and 
the  ground  around  and  under  the  house  sprin- 
kled with  it.  While  this  is  going  on  we  are 
badly  mistreated  by  the  warriors.  They  creep 
up  on  us  and  take  bites  out  of  us.  I  once  counted 

almost  fifty  on 
my  body.  The  an- 
imals  bite  so 
firmly  with  their 
jaws  that  one 
cannot  pull  them 
off.  If  one  pulls 
at  them,  the  body 

20 


THE  JACK  RABBIT 

C  "As  the  sun  was  going  down, "  wrote  Mark 
Twain  in  Roughing  It>  "we  saw  the  first  speci- 
men of  an  animal  known  familiarly  over  two 
thousand  miles  of  mountain  and  desert— from 
Kansas  clear  to  the  Pacific  Ocean — as  the  'jack- 
ass rabbit.'  He  Is  well  named.  He  is  ]ust  like 
any  other  rabbit,  except  that  he  is  from  one- 
third  to  twice  as  large,  has  longer  legs  in  pro- 
portion to  his  size,  and  has  the  most  prepos- 
terous ears  that  ever  were  mounted  on  any 
creature  but  a  jackass.  When  he  is  sitting  quiet, 
...  his  majestic  ears  project  above  him  con- 
spicuously; but  the  breaking  of  a  twig  will 
scare  him  nearly  to  death,  and  then  he  tilts  his 
ears  back  gently  and 
starts  for  home. 
All  you  can  see, 
then,  for  the 
next  minute,  is 
his  long  gray 
form  stretched 
out  straight  and  'streaking  It'  through  the  low 
sagebrush,  head  erect,  eyes  right,  and  ears 
just  canted  a  little  to  the  rear,  but  showing 
you  where  the  animal  is,  all  the  time,  the  same 
as  if  he  carried  a  jib. 

C  "Now  and  then  he  makes  a  marvelous  spring 
with  his  long  legs,  high  over  the  stunted  sage- 
brush, and  scores  a  leap  that  would  make  a 
horse  envious.  Presently,  he  comes  down  to  a 
long,  graceful  lope,'  and  shortly  he  mysterious- 
ly disappears.  He  has  crouched  behind  a  sage- 
brush, and  will  sit  there  and  listen  and  tremble 
until  you  get  within  six  feet  of  him,  when  he 
will  get  under  way  again.  But  one  must  shoot 
at  this  creature  once,  if  he  wishes  to  see  him 
throw  his  heart  into  his  heels,  and  do  the  best 
he  knows  how.  He  is  frightened  clear  through, 
now,  and  he  lays  his  long  ears  down  on  his 
back,  straightens  himself  out  like  a  yardstick 
every  spring  he  makes,  and  scatters  miles  be- 
hind him  with  an  easy  indifference  that  is 
enchanting," 

AWAKE! 


B*  "Aw«lt.l 
corratpondcnt    in 


HOW  would  you  like  the  thrill  of  ac- 
quiring papyrus  manuscripts  dating 
from  the  early  second  to  fourth  centuries 
A.D.,  manuscripts  that  are  portions  of  the 
Holy  Bible?  This  was  the  experience  of  Sir 
Alfred  Chester  Beatty;  and  through  fac- 
simile copies  he  has  made  them  available 
to  Bible  lovers  the  world  over.  Some  of  the 
originals  can  be  seen  in  the  Chester  Beatty 
Library  at  Ballsbridge,  Dublin, 

Where  and  how  did  it  all  begin?  In 
Egypt,  near  Aphroditopolis,  on  the  op- 
posite side  of  the  Nile.  Some  natives  dug 
up  a  number  of  jars  containing  papy- 
rus books.  In  1930,  Chester  Beatty,  a  cop- 
per magnate  of  Dublin,  bought* most  of 
these  papyri,  though  some  now  belong  to 
other  owners,  such  as  the  University  of 
Michigan.  When  these  books  were  deci- 
phered and  their  contents  announced  in 
November,  1931,  scholars  were  astonished. 
Here  was  a  group  of  eleven  papyrus  co- 
dices written  by  different  scribes  over  a 
number  of  years.  These  formed  part  of  a 
Greek  Bible  containing  some  of  the  Greek 
and  Hebrew  Scriptures.  They  have  been 
described  as  the  greatest  event  in  the  his- 
tory of  the  Greek  Bible  since  Teschendorf's 
discovery,  in  1844,  of  the  Codex  Sinaiticus. 


Papyrus  and  the 

Early  Christiana 

Papyrus  is  one  of  the  earli- 
est forms  of  paper  and  is, 
made  from  an  Egyptian  wa- 
ter plant.  Describing  how  pa- 
pyrus paper  was  made,  Sir 
Frederic  Kenyon  said:  "The 
pith  of  the  stem  of  the  papy- 
rus plant  was  cut  into  thin 
strips  and  these  strips  were 
laid  side  by  side  together,  ver- 
tically, in  the  form  of  a  sheet 
of  paper.  Over  this  layer  an- 
other was  placed  horizontally,  and  the  two 
layers  were  joined  together  by  a  sort  of 
glue  of  which  the  water  of  the  Nile  was- 
supposed  to  be  a  necessary  constituent.  The 
layers  were  put  under  pressure  and  then 
dried  in  the  sun,  after  which  they  were 
polished  to  remove  any  unevenness  of  sur- 
face, when  the  material  was  ready  for  use." 
When  a  person,  such  as  an  early  Chris- 
tian, used  papyrus  to  make  a  codex  or 
book,  he  would  take  a  sheet  twice  the 
width  of  a  page  and  fold  it  to  make  two 
leaves  or  four  pages.  Often  he  would  lay 
one  sheet  on  top  of  another  to  form  a 
quire.  We  can  imagine  a  Christian's  using 
his  initiative  and  experimenting  in  various 
ways  to  make  a  book.  Sometimes  a  codex 
would  be  made  of  one  quire  of  perhaps  a 
hundred  leaves.  It  might  have  been  a  bit 
awkward  to  handle,  so  the  next  time  he 
might  make  the  codex  with  a  number  of 
quires.  The  use  of  quires  of  eight  to  ten 
leaves  was  finally  adopted.  The  twelve 
Chester  Beatty  codices  show  examples  of 
all  kinds. 

What  a  flash  of  insight  these  codices 
give  us  into  the  dynamic  energy  of  the 
early  Christians!  Because  they  wanted  to 
serve  God  well,  they  keenly  desired  to  be 
familiar  with  the  text  of  the  Bible.  Up 
until  the  early  second  century  the  copying 


JANUARY  8,  1961 


21 


of  the  Bible  had  been  on  rolls.  This  meant 
that  no  work  that  was  materially  longer 
than  one  of  the  Gospels  could  be  included 
in  a  simple  role.  Imagine  having  to  carry 
sixty-six  rolls  or  more  to  read  the  Bible 
to  people!  Now  at  least  by  the  earlier 
part  of  the  second  century,  the  work  of 
putting  the  Bible  into  codex  or  book  form 
began.  How  much  easier  to  handle  and 
how  well  suited  to  the  needs  of  Christians! 
It  was  characteristic  of  their  zeal  and 
spirit  that  they  pioneered  the  art  of  co- 
dex manufacture.  The  Greek  and  Roman 
scribes  of  that  time,  in  writing  classical 
literature,  kept  on  using  the  papyrus  roll 
until  the  earlier  part  of  the  fourth  cen- 
tury, when  vellum  codices  began  to  be 
jnade.  Obviously,  in  aiding  others  to  know 
these  worldly  works,  they  did  not  feel  the 
same  urgent  need  as  the  Christians  did  in 
teaching  others  the  Bible! 

BefoVe  the  Chester  Beatty  papyri  came 
to  light  it  was  thought  that  the  Gospels 
were  circulated  separately  until  vellum  be- 
gan to  be  used.  However,  these  documents 
give  proof  of  the  existence,  in  the  third 
century,  of  a  codex  containing  all  four 
Gospels  and  the  book  of  Acts;  they  show 
that  Christians  used  the  codex  at  least  by 
the  early  second  century. 

The  Chester  Beatty  Greek  Biblical  pa- 
pyri have  been  carefully  mounted  under 
glass  by  Doctor  Ibscherof  Berlin  and  stud- 
ied by  Sir  Frederick  Kenyon.  While,  in 
general,  the  writing  of  these  manuscripts 
is  neat  and  clear  and  often  the  work  of 
accomplished  scribes,  the  noncanonical 
writings  are  poorly  written. 

Importance  of  Chester  Beatty  Papyri 

Here,  then,  is  a  Greek  text  more  than  a 
hundred  years  older  than  the  famed  Codex 
Vaticanus  and  the  Codex  Sinaiticus.  Let  us 
note  some  points  of  interest,  illustrating  the 
value  of  the  Chester  Beatty  papyri. 


Genesis:  J-^or  many  years  there  had 
been  no  earlier  manuscript  of  Genesis  than 
the  Alexandrine  manuscript  of  the  early 
fifth  century  and  the  Berlin  papyrus,  which 
is  badly  mutilated.  In  the  Vatican  manu- 
script the  whole  of  Genesis  up  to  chapter 
forty-sjx,  verse  twenty-eight,  is  missing. 
Even  Tischendorf,  in  1853,  on  a  revisit  to 
St.  Catherine's  monastery  at  the  foot  of 
Mount  Sinai,  was  unable  to  recover  more 
than  a  tiny  scrap  with  a  few  verses  of 
Genesis  on  it.  So  Bible  students  were  hap- 
py to  learn  that,  among  the  Chester  Beatty 
papyri,  there  is  a  copy  of  the  book  of  Gen- 
esis, with  the  exception  of  the  first  eight 
chapters  and  the  last  four.  "There  are," 
said  Sir  Frederic  Kenyon,  "no  substantial 
variations  in  the  narrative." 
'  Numbers  and  Deuteronomy:  This  co- 
dex is  the  oldest  manuscript  of  the  col- 
lection and  dates  back  to  about  A.D. 
150,  about  fifty  years  after  the  death  of 
the  apostle  John.  Substantial  portions  of 
thirty-three  leaves  and  many  fragments 
have  been  found  from  a  book  of  likely  two 
hundred  and  sixteen  pages.  No  doubt  this 
scribe  was  a  skilled  professional,  possibly  a 
Christian.  His  work  is  one  of  the  earliest 
extant  codices  and,  next  to  the  Dead  Sea 
Scrolls,  it  is  one  of  the  earliest  extant  Bib- 
lical manuscripts. 

Isaiah  and  Jeremiah:  In  the  collection 
there  are  portions  of  thirty-three  leaves 
of  Isaiah  out  of  a  codex  of  about  one  hun- 
dred and  four  leaves.  These  were  written 
in  a  stylish  hand  about  A.D.  250,  Small 
portions  of  two  leaves  of  Jeremiah,  written 
in  the  second  or  early  third  century,  have 
also  been  found. 

Ezekiel,  Daniel  and  Esther;  These  are 
all  found  in  one  codex,  probably  of  one 
hundred  and  eighteen  leaves.  It  was  writ- 
ten by  two  scribes  likely  in  the  first  half 
of  the  third  century.  The  book  of  Daniel  is 


22 


AWAKE! 


particulary  important  as  it  contains  the  un- 
revised  Septuagint  text,  which  was  previ- 
ously known  only  in  a  late  Greek  copy  and 
in  a  Syriac  translation.  It  is  convincing 
proof  of  the  divine  preservation  to  find 
that,  except  as  to  the  relative  order  of  two 
episodes,  the  text  of  this  manuscript  is  sub- 
stantially sound. 

Acts  and  the  Gospels :  This  codex,  writ- 
ten shortly  after  A.D.  200,  contains  parts 
of  all  four  Gospels  and  the  book  of  Acts. 
Imagine  being  in  London  when  this  treas- 
ure first  arrived.  What  is  this?  Just  a  lump 
of  papyrus  made  up  of  a  number  of  small 
leaves.  Imagine  the  painstaking  care  and 
skill  that  will  be  required  to  carefully  di- 
vide and  sort  out  these  fragments  and 
mount  them  under  glass.  When  the  second 
parcel  arrives  it  has  portions  of  the  Gos- 
,pels  of  Luke  and  John  in  a  much  better 
state  of  preservation.  It  is  found  that  this 
codex  is  of  the  early  third  century.  So  it 
carries  back  a  century  from  the  fourth- 
century  vellum  manuscripts  the  proof  of 
the  substantial  integrity  of  the  text- 
Paul's  Letters:  This  is  an  almost  com- 
plete copy  of  Paul's  letters,  and  it  is  at 
least  a  century  older  than  the  Vatican  and 
Sinaitic  codices.  It  is  of  the  early  third 
century  and  may  even  belong  to  the  sec- 
ond century.  This  manuscript  gives  proof 
that  the  early  Christians  accepted  the  book 
of  Hebrews  as  part  of  Paul's  epistles.  It 
contains  his  letters  in  this  order:  Romans, 


Hebrews,  First  and  Second  Corinthians, 
Ephesians,  Galatians,  Philippians,  Colos- 
slans,  and  First  Thessalonians. 

Revelation:  This  codex  was  written 
about  A.D.  275.  It  has  ten  leaves  out  of  a 
possible  thirty-two.  It  is  important,  as  it 
is  by  far  the  earliest  extant  manuscript  of 
Revelation. 

Speaking  of  the  textual  importance  of 
the  collection,  Sir  Frederic  Kenyon 
writes:  "The  first  and  most  important  con- 
clusion derived  from  the  examination  of 
them  is  the  satisfactory  one  that  they  con- 
firm the  essential  soundness  of  the  existing 
texts.  No  striking  or  fundamental  varia- 
tion is  shown  either  in  the  Old  or  the  New 
Testament.  There  are  no  important  omis- 
sions or  additions  of  passages,  and  no  var- 
iations which  affect  vital  facts  or  doc- 
trines,"   . 

We  can  be  grateful  that  Sir  Alfred  Ches- 
ter Beatty  has  made,  the  valuable  manu- 
scripts available  for  research  work  through 
facsimile  copies  and  that  provision  is  made 
for  the  general  public  to  see  the  actual  pa- 
pyri. Visitors  to  Dublin  will  find  a  visit  to 
the  Chester  Beatty  Library  very  reward- 
ing. Most  of  all,  our  heartfelt  thanks  go  to 
Jehovah,  the  Great  Preserver  of  the  Bible 
canon,  who  has  caused  to  be  recorded  in 
his  Word:  "The  green  grass  has  dried  up, 
the  blossom  has  withered,  but  the  word 
itself  of  our  God  will  last  to  time  indefi- 
nite."—Isa.  40:8. 


SPIRITUAL.      REVIVAL 

<S£  Dr.  Charles  Malik,  former  President  of  the  United  Nations  General  Assembly, 
made  this  observation  about  the  world's  urgent  need  for  a  spiritual  revival:  "Free 
representative   government,   the  primacy  of  the  human   person,   the  moral  law, 
the  continuity  of  history,   freedom,   truth  and  God— it  is  these  things  that  are 
at  stake  today.  They  are  all  rejected  and  opposed  from  without  and  some  of  them 
are  doubted  or  compromised  from  wit-hin.  Is  life  worth  living  without  them?  And 
yet  if  people  do  not  wake  up,  life  will  not  be  worth  living.  A  mighty  spiritual 
revival  therefore  is  needed.  For  much  more  than  peace  is  at  stake.  The  revival 
must  take  hold  not  only  of  individuals  here  and  there,  but  of  whole  institutions; 
not  only  of  the  leaders,  but  of  the  grass  roots." 


JANUARY  8,  X9G1 


23 


HOW  lost  we  modems 
would  be  without  a 
watch  or  clock!  We  wake 
up  in  the  morning  by  the 
alarm  clock,  and  if  our 
watch  is  just  a  minute 
late  without  our  knowing 
it  we  may  miss  our  com- 
muter train  and  be  late 
to  work.  So  we  check  the 
time  by  turning  on  our 
radio.  Time-conscious 
from  the  time  we  wake 
up  until  we  go  to  bed  at 
night! 

It  was  not  always  this 
way.  Millenniums  ago 
man  was  content  to  let 
the  sun  serve  for  the  re- 
cording of  the  passing 
time.  For  who  knows 
how  long,  sun  dials  fur- 
nished man  with  his  only 
means  of  counting  time. 
The  nighttime  hours 
were  not  counted  until 
man  began  to  note  a  re- 
lationship between  the 
location  of  certain  stars 
and  the  passing  of  time.  Still,  on  a  cloudy 
night,  as  on  a  cloudy  day,  man  was  without 
his  clock.  Could  we  imagine  such  a  thing 
today? 

However,  necessity  was  ever  the  mother 
of  invention,  and  so  we  find  man  inventing 
the  clepsydra,  literally  "water  thief," 
which  among  the  ancient  Babylonians  was 
used  to  count  units  called  "kashbu,"  mean- 
ing "to  fail"  or  to  run  dry.  The  clepsydra 
was  a  bowl  with  a  small  hole  in  the  bot- 
tom. When  filled  with  water  it  ran  dry  or 
failed  in  about  two  hours,  our  time.  Each 
solar  day  had  twelve  TcasMm  and  each  day 
the  count  began  at  noon,  regardless  of 
whether  the  last  or  twelfth  bowl  had  com- 

24 


pletely  emptied  or  not. 
Thus  history  tells  us  of  a 
march  that  Sennacherib 
and  his  army  took  that 
lasted  two  kashbu. 

Among  other  devices 
and  inventions  for  count- 
ing time  were  a  burning 
candle,  the  hourglass  and 
a  slowly  burning  rope 
with  knots  tied  in  it  to 
indicate  the  hours — a 
Chinese  invention.  The 
human  factor  was  vital 
in  those  days — forget  to 
All  the  clepsydra,  to  turn 
the  hourglass,  and  who 
would  know  what  time  it 
was? 

The  clepsydra  was  in. 
use  at  the  time  of  Christ 
and  quite  likely  by  the 
Jews.  The  Romans  used 
it  to  mark  the  time  in 
their  senate  and  in  their 
courts.  Lawyers  were  al- 
lowed so  much  water — to 
run  out  of  the  clepsydra 
— as  today  they  are  al- 
lowed so  many  minutes  to  argue  their  case 
before  the  judges.  Their  day  also  had 
twelve  divisions,  although  there  is  some 
question  as  to  whether  these  were  of  the 
same  length  throughout  the  year  or  not; 
they  may  have  varied  with  the  length  of 
daylight.  Hours,  as  divisions  of  the  day, 
are  first  noted  in  the  Christian  Greek 
Scriptures,  as  when  Jesus  asked:  "There 
are  twelve  hours  of  daylight,  are  there 
not?"— John  11:9. 

How  would  you  like  a  clock  or  watch 
that  in  the  course  of  a  day  varied  two 
hours  or  more?  That  was  the  case  with  the 
first  mechanical  clocks,  which  appeared  in 
the  thirteenth  century,  and  with  the  first 

AWAKE! 


pocket  watches  invented  two  centuries  lat- 
er. At  that,  the  watch  at  first  was  such  a 
luxury  that  the  rich  alone  could  afford  it. 
Only  in  the  nineteenth  century  did  it  come 
within  the  range  of  the  common  man. 

Five  countries  figure  prominently  in  the 
history  of  clocks  and  watches.  The  Dutch 
appear  to  have  been  the  inventors,  next 
came  the  Germans,  then  the  English,  next 
the  Swiss,  and  today  the  United  States 
holds  the  lead,  if  not  in  quality,  at  least  in 
quantity.  In  the  past  few  decades  the  wrist 
watch  has  almost  entirely  crowded  out  the 
pocket  watch,  at  least  in  the  United  States, 
where  annually  some  ten  million  watches 
are  sold. 

Buying  a  Watch 

The  place  to  begin  in  properly  caring 
for  your  watch  is  when  you  buy  it.  The 
better  the  watch  the  more  accurate  it  is. 
A  watch  costing  $100  should  not  vary 
more  than  a  few  seconds  a  day.  A  watch 
costing  less  than  $25  can  be  expected  to 
vary  several  minutes  daily.  A  good  man's 
watch  may  last  a .  lifetime;  a  woman's 
watch,  however,  does  well  to  last  twenty- 
five  years.  While  the  Swiss  may  make  the 
best  watches,  it  is  well  to  remember  that 
they  also  make  some  not  so  good. 

It  is  wise  to  buy  a  jeweled  watch  rather 
than  one  with  a  pin-lever  movement, 
which  seldom  will  last  more  than  two  years 
without  requiring  repairs.  Although  the 
jewels  in  themselves  do  not  make  a  good 
watch,  jewels  do  protect  the  bearings.  It 
takes  at  least  seven  to  protect  the  most 
important  ones;  seventeen  to  protect  all 
the  important  bearings.  In  a  twenty-three- 
jewel  watch,  all  the  bearings  are  jewels. 
But  jewels  alone  are  not  the  only  criterion 
for  judging  a  watch.  A  seventeen-jewel 
watch  may  be  much  better  than  one  hav- 
ing twenty-three  jewels.  Incidentally,  let 
it  be  noted  that  these  jewels  usually  are 

JANUARY  S,  1SB1 


synthetic  and  are  quite  cheap,  each  costing 
twenty-five  cents  or  even  less. 

In  buying  a  watch  it  should  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  smaller  it  is,  the  less  accu- 
rate, the  shorter  its  life  and  the  more  cost- 
ly it  is  to  repair.  Because  of  this  a  pocket 
watch  is  a  much  better  timepiece  than  a 
wrist  watch  of  the  same  price.  A  solid-gold 
case  usually  is  not  worth  the  extra  it  costs, 
and  gold-filled  cases  may  wear  through  or 
tarnish  readily.  Most  practical  is  the  stain- 
less steel  case. 

It  is  also  well  to  avoid  fancy  or  unusually 
designed  cases.  The  mechanism  may  be 
slighted  to  fit  the  shape,  and  such  watches 
are  both  difficult  and  costly  to  repair;  crys- 
tals likewise  will  be  more  difficult  to  obtain 
and  more  costly.  A  sweep  second  hand  is 
attractive,  but  expect  to  pay  a  good  price 
for  it  or  what  you  get  will  not  last  and 
will  require  costly  repairs.  Self-winding 
watches  are  also  somewhat  of  a  luxury; 
one  should  expect  to  pay  $20  more  for  this 
advantage.  A  nonmagnetic  watch  will  keep 
better  time  only  if  you  have  to  work  in  a 
laboratory  or  around  electrical  machinery. 

A  waterproof  watch  should  be  able  to 
withstand  at  least  thirty-five  pounds  of 
pressure;  but  do  not  be  deceived  by  "water- 
resistant"  advertising;  It  may  mean  some- 
thing or  nothing.  A  watch  should  have  a 
steady,  clear  and  sharp  tick.  The  stem 
should  wind  smoothly  and  it  should  pull 
out  easily  and  snap  in  or  out  sharply.  If 
the  watch  has  been  in  the  store  six  months 
or  more,  ask  to  have  it  cleaned  and  oiled; 
the  smaller  it  is  the  more  important  this  is. 

In  buying  a  watch  it  is  best,  as  a  rule, 
to  purchase  one  from  a  business  that  makes 
a  speciality  of  watches  rather  than  has 
them  merely  as  a  sideline.  A  watch  costing 
from  $20  to  $30  may  be  as  dependable  a 
timepiece  as  one  costing  two  to  three  times 
as  much  but  having  a  fancy  case,  shape 
or  wristband.  It  is  also  well  to  remember 

25 


that  prices  listed  on  fancy  watch  boxes 
mean  little  if  anything;  a  watch  bearing  a 
price  tag  of  $87.50  was  marked  down  and 
sold  for  518.50  retail.  Often  there  is  little 
relation  between  the  price  tag  and  its  ac- 
tual value;  people  like  to  think  they  are 
getting  a  bargain.  All  of  which  emphasizes 
the  importance  of  making  certain  of  the 
integrity  of  the  one  from  whom  you  pur- 
chase your  watch. 

Caring  for  That  Watch 

A  watch  being  a  delicate  instrument,  it 
must  have  proper  care  to  serve  you  proper- 
ly. It  is  well  to  have  a  watch  cleaned  and 
oiled  at  least  every  two  years,  more  fre- 
quently if  yours  is  a  small  one.  In  having 
it  cleaned  or  repaired,  give  some  thought 
to  the  one  to  whom  you  entrust  it;  there 
is  a  great  difference  in  both  the  skill  and 
integrity  of  watch  repairmen.  It  is  best  to 
go  to  one  that  has  been  established  for 
some  time,  or  whose  work  others  have 
recommended,  than  to  take  a  chance  with 
an  unknown  repairman. 

Take  care  not  to  let  your  watch  drop; 
if  it  happens  to  stop,  do  not  pound  it  to 
try  to  make  it  run  again;  you  may  do  it 
real  harm.  If  you  should  let  your  watch 
drop  into  water,  give  it  a  benzine  bath  at 
once  and  then  take  it  to  the  repairman  for 
cleaning  and  drying,  as  rust  can  do  much 
harm  to  the  mechanism  of  a  watch.  If  you 
break  the  crystal,  put  it  in  a  paper  en- 
velope when  taking  it  to  the  watchmaker. 
Wrapping  it  in  a  cloth  may  not  only  injure 
the  hands  but  also  cause  lint  to  get  into 
the  watch. 

Lint  and  dust  are  two  of  the  greatest 
enemies  of  your  watch.  That  is  why  you 
should  not  wear  your  watch  in  bed.  Lint 
and  dust  cause  the  oil  to  gum  up  and  hard- 
en. Another  foe  Is  moisture.  So  take  off 
your  wrist  watch  before  you  wash  your 
hands;  do  not  wear  a  wrist  watch  when 
working  In  a  kitchen  where  the  air  is  full 

26 


of  smoke,  steam,  fumes  and  suchlike.  Or 
you  may  want  to  do  what  many  And  prac- 
tical: have  a  cheap  watch  for  use  at  work 
and  a  good  one  for  other  times.  Extremes 
of  hot  and  cold  are  not  good  for  a  wateh; 
do  not  let  it  lie  exposed  in  the  sun  while 
you  swim. 

Women's  watches  require  twice  the  at- 
tention that  men's  watches  do.  Part  of  this 
may  be  due  to  the  fact  that  women's 
watches  are  usually  smaller  and,  as  we 
have  already  noted,  the  smaller  the  watch 
the  less  durable  it  is.  But  womenfolk  also 
are  prone  to  put  their  watches  in  their 
handbags  in  which  they  also  have  lipstick, 
face  powder,  perfumes  and  what  not,  and 
they  work  around  the  house  where  there 
is  lint  and  often  have  their  hands  in  water. 
All  this  can  play  havoc  with  the  delicate 
mechanism  of  a  lady's  watch  and  may  ac- 
count for  its  needing  repairs  more  fre- 
'  quently. 

It  is  also  in  your  interest  to  get  into  the 
habit  of  winding  your  watch  regularly:  Do 
it  at  a  set  time  each  day  and  wind  it  wheth- 
er you  are  using  it  or  not  to  keep  it  in 
good  running  order.  It  matters  not  how 
you  wind  it,  always  in  one  direction  or  for- 
ward and  backward.  It  is  important  to 
wind  it  fully,  yet  exercise  caution  as  you 
near  the  point  where  the  mainspring  is 
fully  wound.  The  smaller  the  watch  the 
more  care  you  should  exercise  not  to  force 
it  once  it  is  fully  wound. 

As  in  everything  else,  cause  and  effect 
are  involved  if  a  watch  is  to  give  satisfac- 
tory service.  The  more  we  invest  in  an  in- 
strument the  more  thought  and  care  we 
must  give  it  not  to  suffer  disappointment. 
By  giving  thought  to  your  watch,  first  of 
all  in  the  purchase  of  it,  and  then  in  prop- 
erly caring  for  it,  you  will  have  what 
skilled  and  conscientious  watchmakers  "de- 
sire you  to  have,  the  pleasure  and  satis- 
faction of  a  beautiful  and  dependable  time- 
piece. 

AWAKE! 


TODAY  many  parents  foolishly  neglect 
to  discipline  their  children.  Due  to  their 
having  imbibed  vain  worldly  philosophies 
th^y  believe  in  being  "permissive";  as  if 
a  child  knows  what  is  best  for  it!  Further, 
many  parents  set  a  bad  example  for  their 
children,  telling  them  to  do  one  thing  while 
they  themselves  do  another.  And  some  sen- 
timental mothers  so  identify  themselves 
with  their  children  that  they  fly  into  a 
rage  when  a  schoolteacher  dares  to  dis- 
cipline their  child.  No  wonder  there  is  so 
much  juvenile  delinquency  in  the  world! 
In  striking  contrast  to  all  such  folly  is 
the  example  set  for  us  by  Jehovah  God, 
our  exceedingly  wise  heavenly  Parent.  He 
believes  in  disciplining  his  children,  as  we 
read:  "My  son,  do  not  belittle  the  discipline 
from  Jehovah,  neither  give  out  when  you 
are  corrected  by  him;  for  whom  Jehovah 
loves  he  disciplines,  in  fact  he  scourges 
everyone  whom  he  receives  as  a  son."  He 
lets  no  sentimentality  deter  him  from  ad- 
ministering needed  discipline;  and,  differ- 
ent from  many  human  parents,  he  sets  the 
right  example,  a  perfect  one.  With  good 
reason  his  Son  said  to  us:  "You  must  ac- 
cordingly be  complete,  as  your  heavenly 
Father  is  complete."— Heb.  12:5-7;  Matt. 
5:48. 

How  does  Jehovah  God  discipline  his 
earthly  children?  Since  he  is  a  consuming 
fire,  whom  no  man  can  see  and  yet  live, 
obviously  he  could  not  in  person  administer 
discipline  to  his  earthly  children.  Then 

JANUARY  S,  1961 


how  does  he  do  it?  By  means  of  hts  Word, 
his  visible  organization,  his  inexorable 
laws,  and  by  means  of  his  enemies. 

As  a  wise  Parent  Jehovah  God  first  of 
all  disciplines  his  children  by  means  of  re- 
bukes contained  in  his  Word,  If  we  are 
dutiful,  wise  and  loving  children,  that  will 
be  sufficient  for  us:  "A  rebuke  works  deep- 
er in  one  having  understanding  than  strik- 
ing a  stupid  one  a  hundred  times."  Thus 
the  rebuke  that  the  apostle  Peter  gave  his 
Jewish  countrymen  on  the  day  of  Pente- 
cost served  as  discipline  to  them,  for  we 
read  that  they  "were  stabbed  to  the  heart." 
And  they  profited  by  that  rebuke  or  dis- 
cipline. Note  too  the  rebuke  contained  in 
the  words  of  the  apostle  Paul:  "What!  Do 
you  not  know  that  unrighteous  persons  will 
not  inherit  God's  kingdom?"  Yes,  God's 
Word  is  full  of  things  that  "were  written 
for  a  warning  to  us." — Prov.  17:10;  Acts 
2:37;  1  Cor.  6:9;  10:11. 

Another  means  our  wise  heavenly  Par- 
ent uses  to  discipline  his  earthly  children 
is  his  visible  human  agents.  In  the  case 
of  literal  children  that  agent  consists  of 
Christian  parents.  When  they  administer 
discipline  they  are  representing  Jehovah 
God,  and  are  acting  in  obedience  to  his 
commands,  such  as:  "Foolishness  is  tied  up 
with  the  heart  of  a  boy;  the  rod  of  disci- 
pline is  what  will  remove  it  far  from  him." 
—Prov.  22:15. 

In  ancient  Israel  even  adults,  if  delin- 
quent, were  given  stripes,  and  that  in  line 
with  God's  law,  which  stated:  "It  must  oc- 
cur that  if  the  wicked  one  deserves  to  be 
beaten,  then  the  judge  must  have  him  laid 
prostrate  and  given  strokes  before  him  by 
number  to  correspond  with  his  wicked 
deed.  With  forty  strokes  he  may  beat  him. 
He  should  add  none,  for  fear  he  should 
continue  to  beat  him  with  many  strokes 
in  addition  to  these  and  your  brother  must 
be  disgraced  in  your  eyes."  These  stripes 
were  given  with  a  leather  whip.  Paul  five 

27 


times  received  this  maximum  penalty,  not 
as  discipline  from  Jehovah,  but  because  of 
preaching  the  gospel,  but  he  was  given 
thirty-nine  strokes  instead  of  forty,  since 
the  Jews  wanted  to  be  on  the  safe  side  in 
case  of  a  mistake  in  counting.  Paul  also 
was  three  times  beaten  with  rods,  which 
was  a  much  more  severe  punishment  that 
was  no  part  of  the  law  of  Moses. — Deut. 
25:2,  3;  2  Cor.  11:24,  25. 

However,  in  the  Christian  Greek  Scrip- 
tures no  provision  is  made  for  a  congrega- 
tion to  inflict  corporal  punishment  upon 
those  needing  discipline.  Rather,  it  is  given 
by  means  of  public  rebukes:  "Reprove  be- 
fore all  onlookers  persons  who  practice  sin, 
that  the  rest  also  may  have  fear."  Paul 
once  found  it  necessary  to  administer  such 
a  rebuke  even  to  the  apostle  Peter,  because 
of  his  having  acted  hypocritically,  not 
wanting  to  be  seen  with  the  Gentile  con- 
verts. Depending  upon  the  circumstances 
and  the  seriousness  of  the  offense,  a  con- 
gregation may  discipline  the  erring  one 
by  putting  him  on  probation  or  excommu- 
nicating him  for  a  period  of  time. — 1  Tim. 
5:20;  Gal.  2:11-14;  1  Cor.  5:13;  2  Cor.  2: 
6-8. 

Then  again,  there  are  Jehovah's  inex- 
orable laws  by  means  of  which  he  may  be 
said  to  administer  discipline.  To  the  ex- 
tent that  any  of  his  children  act  unwisely 
or  foolishly  they  may  run  afoul  one  of 
these  and  suffer  the  natural  consequences. 
This  is  in  line  with  the  Scriptural  princi- 
ple: "Whatever  a  man.  is  sowing,  this  he 
will  also  reap."  Yes,  those  who  work  "what 
is  obscene"  will  receive  "in  themselves  the 
full  recompense  which  [is]  due  for  their 
error."  To  the  extent  that  we  lack  self- 
control  or  use  poor  judgment  in  conducting 
our  personal  lives,  to  that  extent  we  can 
expect  to  have  God  discipline  us  by  means 
of  his  laws,  which  take  their  toll  in  our 
bodies.  If  we  are  wise  we  will  profit  by 
these  lessons.— Gal.  6:7;  Rom.  1:27. 

28 


And  lastly,  Jehovah  God  at  times  disci- 
plines his  erring  earthly  children  in  a  col- 
lective way  by  means  of  his  enemies.  After 
Joshua  and  the  older  men  that  survived 
him  fell  asleep  in  death,  the  Israelites 
"abandoned  Jehovah  and  took  up  serving 
Baal  and  the  Ashtoreth  images."  For  this 
he  disciplined  them.  How?  "Jehovah's  an- 
ger blazed  against  Israel  and  he  gave  them 
into  the  hands  of  the  pillagers  and  they  be- 
gan to  pillage  them,  and  he  proceeded  to  sell 
them  into  the  hand  of  their  enemies  round 
about."  And  so  also  some  eight  hundred 
years  later.  First,  "Jehovah  the  God  of 
their  forefathers  kept  sending  against  them 
by  means  of  his  rr^ssengers,  sending  again 
and  again,  because  he  felt  compassion  for 
his  people  and  for  his  dwelling.  But  they 
were  continually  making  jest  at  the  mes- 
sengers of  the  true  God  and  despising  his 
words  and  mocking  at  his  prophets,  until 
the  rage  of  Jehovah  came  up  against  his 
people,  until  there  was  no  healing.  So  he 
brought  up  against  them  the  king  of  the 
Chaldeans,"  who  desolated  the  land  and 
took  the  Israelites  captive  into  Babylon. 
— Judg.  2:10-16;  2  Chron.  36:15-17. 

In  modern  times  God's  people  had  a  sim- 
ilar experience.  Erring  due  to  false  religion 
and  the  fear  of  man,  they  were  permitted 
by  God  to  be  taken  captive  during  World 
War  I  and  shortly  thereafter.  The  nations, 
however,  overdid  it;  so  God,  in  turn,  be- 
came angry  with  them.  God,  for  his  part, 
had  "felt  indignation  to  only  a  little  extent," 
but  the  nations  "helped  toward  calamity." 
After  Jehovah's  servants  repented  and  be- 
gan to  amend  their  ways,  their  God  deliv- 
ered them  early  in  1919. — Zech.  1:15;  Rev. 
11:2-11. 

Thus  we  see  how  Jehovah  God,  as  a  wise 
Parent,  disciplines  his  earthly  children,  by 
means  of  his  Word,  his  earthly  agents,  his 
inexorable  laws  and  by  his  and  their  ene- 
mies. 

AWAKE! 


^*  WATCHING  A 


WORLD 


Ilaiil  Expels  Archbishop 

<$>  On  November  24  Haiti's  In- 
terior Minister  Aurele  Joseph 
announced  the  expulsion  ■  of 
Roman  Catholic  Archbishop 
Francois  Potrier  from  the 
country.  He  had  been  charged 
with  efforts  to  overthrow  the 
regime  of  President  Francois 
Duvalier.  Warning  was  also 
issued  to  the  Catholic  news- 
paper La  Phalange  that  It 
would  be  suspended  if  it  did 
not  refrain  from  printing  ma- 
terial on  the  current  political 
Issues  other  than  what  was 
contained  in  official  bulletins. 

High  Cost  of  Armaments 

$>  On  November  21  the  Gen- 
eral A  s  s  e  m  b  1  y's  Economic 
Committee  voted  to  spend  $40,- 
000  to  study  the  economic  ef- 
fects of  disarmament.  It  was 
reported  that  U.N.  Secretary 
General  Dag  Hammarskjoid 
had  estimated  that  $32,000,000 
a  day,  or  nearly  5117,000,000,- 
000  a  year,  was  spent  on  arma- 
ments. Some  observed,  how- 
ever, that  even  If  disarmament 
was  achieved  the  cost  of  in- 
spection stations  and  other  ex- 
penses for  controlling  disarma- 
ment might  be  equal  to  that 
now  spent  on  arms. 

VJi.  Faces  Financial  Crisis 

^  On  November  21  U.N.  Sec- 
retary General  Dag  Hammar- 
skjoid said  that  the  treasury 

JANUARY  S,  1961 


of  the  U.N.  was  "virtually 
empty,"  and  that  the  U.N. 
would  have  to  begin  withdraw- 
ing its  force  of  18,000  men 
from  the  Congo  unless  $20,000,- 
0G0  in  cash  could  be  raised  be- 
fore December  31,  1960.  On 
November  30  the  U.S.  made 
a  cash  advance  to  the  U.N. 
for  the  $20,000,000.  According 
to  Hammarskjoid,  on  January 
1,  1960,  the  U.N.  had  a  cash 
balance  on  hand  of  $16,500,000, 
hut  he  said  that  there  would 
be  a  cash  deficit  of  $2,000,000 
by  the  end  of  the  year,  without 
taking  the  Congo  activities  in- 
to account.  He  estimated  that 
throughout  1961  it  would  cost 
510,000,000  a  month  to  main- 
tain the  U.N.'s  military  force 
in  the  Congo  at  its  present 
size. 

Train  Hits  School  Bub 

<$■  On  November  29  in  Lamont, 
Alberta,  Canada,  a  school  bus 
carrying  forty-one  high  school 
students  was  smashed  into  by 
a  speeding  freight  train,  kill- 
ing sixteen  and  injuring  twen- 
ty-five, ten  seriously.  It  is 
thought  that  the  bus  driver 
may  have  been  blinded  by  the 
morning  sun  as  he  approached 
the  crossing.  The  train,  trav- 
eling at  an  estimated  speed  of 
fifty  miles  an  hour,  hit  the 
bus  at  about  the  middle  and 
dragged  it  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
before  the  engineer  could 
bring  the  train  to  a  halt. 


Thanksgiving  Traffic  Ton 

<$>  The  Associated  Press  re- 
ported that  in  the  United 
States  442  persons  were  killed 
in  traffic  accidents  over  the 
four-day  Thanksgiving  holiday 
weekend.  This  toll  was  a  little 
lower  than  what  it  has  been 
the  last  two  years. 

Archaeology  Upholds  Bible 
<$■  On  November  12  Harvard 
University  announced  that  ex- 
cavations made  last  summer 
by  a  team  of  scholars  from 
ten  American  educational  in- 
stitutions has  revealed  evi- 
dence confirming  the  Bible's 
account  of  Abimelech  and  his 
destruction  of  the  city  of  She- 
chem.  Endeavors  were  directed 
toward  unraveling  the  history 
of  Shechem's  temple-fortress, 
called  the  tower  of  Shechem  in 
the  Bible,  and  which  Abime- 
lech burned  down,  killing  about 
a  thousand  men  and  women. 
The  excavators  placed  the  time 
of  that  destruction  at  about 
1150  B.C. 

Crime  and  Religion 

#■  Crime  and  religion  continue 
to  sky-rocket  together.  United 
States  church  membership  has 
leaped  76  percent  and  crime 
128  percent  since  1940,  where- 
as the  population  has  in- 
creased only  36  percent.  Writ- 
ing in  the  Catholic  publication 
The  Commonweal,  John  Cog- 
ley  laments,  "As  the  nation's 
religious  curve  has  gone  up, 
the  nation's  moral  curve  has 
gone  down."  The  Seventh-Day 
Adventist  journal,  Review  and 
Herald,  confesses:  "If  Chris- 
tianity is  what  it  claims  to  be 
it  cannot  escape  from  a  tre- 
mendous sense  of  accountabil- 
ity in  the  light  of  the  appalling 
comparative  statistics." 

Original  Ten  Commandments 

#In  a  recent  issue  of  Harp- 
er's, Sumner  Locke  Elliott  tells 
of  being  conducted  through  the 
late  Cecil  B.  De  Mille's  me- 
mento-studded palace  by  some 
reverent  ladies.  Coming  to  a 
particularly  hallowed  exhibit, 

29 


one  of  them  said,  "And  here 
are  the  Ten  Commandments." 
Then  she  added  thoughtfvdly, 
"They're  copies  of  course.  The 
originals  are  in  the  Paramount 
commissary." 

Robberies  In  London 

$>  A  study  made  by  the  Cam- 
bridge University's  new  Insti- 
tute of  Criminology,  which  is 
published  in  The  Economist, 
reveals  that  in  metropolitan 
London  robberies  have  in- 
creased 161  percent  in  the  last 
ten  years.  And,  according  to 
the  report,  "eight  out  of  every 
ten  offenders  now  get  away 
with  it." 

Markets  Short-weigh  Turkeys 

<$  In  a  pre-Thanksgiving  drive 
on  cheating  in  four  of  New 
York  eit/s  Ave  boroughs,  a 
team  of  inspectors  found  that, 
of  the  mora  than  100  stores 
checked,  thirty-five  were  short- 
weighing  turkeys  and  other 
meats. 

Rabies  Serum  Kills  Twenty 

^  A  UPI  dispatch  of  Novem- 
ber 28  from  Fortaleza,  Brazil, 
reports  that  twenty  were  dead 
and  about  120  others  were  sick 
because  of  being  inoculated 
with  a  defective  rabies  serum. 

Food  Additive  Banned 

■$■  On  November  22  the  U.S. 
Pood  and  Drug  Administration 
placed  a  ban  on  the  use  of  a 
water-soluble  coal  tar  color 
food  additive  known  as  Red 
No.  1.  It  has  been  widely  used 
in  hot-dog  casings,  ice  cream 
and  maraschino  cherries.  Pre- 
liminary tests  have  revealed 
that  it  produces  liver  damage 
in  experimental  anfmals. 

U.S.  Launches  Atomic  Sub 

^  On  November  22  the  United 
States  Navy  launched  the 
Ethan  Alien,  its  most  power- 
ful atomic  submarine.  It  is  the 
fourth  U.S.  submarine  capable 
of  firing  Polaris  missiles. 
Weighing  6,900  tons,  tt  is  1,300 
tons  heavier  and  30  feet  longer 
than  the  other  three  Polaris-  • 

30 


equipped  subs,  and  has  a  firing 
range  of  over  1,500  miles,  or 
about  300  miles  farther  than 
its  three  predecessors.  The 
George  Washington,  Patrick 
Henry  and  Robert  E.  Lee  are 
the  names  of  the  other  Polaris- 
equipped  submarines. 

Strontium  90  In  Soviet  Grain 

#  On  November  23  Britain's 
radiobiological  laboratory  re- 
vealed that  grain  recently  im- 
ported from  Russia  contained 
at  least  five  times  as  much 
strontium  90  as  grain  from 
North  America.  As  strontium 
90  is  a  radioactive  by-product 
of  nuclear  explosions,  some 
observers  felt  this  supported 
the  speculation  that  Russia  has 
been  secretly  testing  nuclear 
weapons. 

Human  Sacrifice  to  the  Gods 

&  A  report  from  Cuzeo,  Peru, 
reveals  that  Mashco  Indians 
of  southeast  Peru  burned  to 
death  a  16-year-old  girl  as  a 
sacrifice,  to  appease  their  gods 
and  bring  relief  from  a 
drought.  Police  from  Cuzco  ar- 
rested the  medicine  man  and 
his  woman  companion. 

TT,S,  Water  Consumption 

^  UPI  reveals  that  in  the 
United  States  312,000,000,000 
gallons  of  water  are  used  a 
day  of  an  available  supply  of 
about  515,000.000,000  gallons. 

Riots  In  Venezuela 

<§>  During  the  last  week  in  No- 
vember Venezuelan  President 
Romulo  Betancourt  called  out 
the  army  to  quell  violence  that 
resulted  in  five  deaths  and  at 
least  eighty  being  wounded. 
Seflor  Betancourt  said  that  the 
riotfng  was  sponsored  by  ex- 
tremist elements  desiring  to 
overthrow  the  government. 

Heated  Bow  Speeds  TJp  Ship 

$>  Soviet  news  agency  Tass 
reported  that  experiments  con- 
ducted by  Russian  scientists 
revealed  that  a  ship's  speed 
can  be  increased  up  to  ten  per- 
cent by  heating  Its  bow.  When 


sea  water  comes  in  contact 
with  the  heated  bow  it  bolls 
and  the  hull  is  enveloped  by  a 
layer  of.  steam  that  reduces 
friction  and  allows  the  ship  to 
move  more  freely  through  the 
water. 

Russian  Youths  Become 

Witness  »s 

<$>  Several  Soviet  newspapers  " 
during  the  past  year  have  re- 
ported that  students  In  high- 
er educational  establishments 
have  turned  to  religion.  Hugh 
Lunghi,  a  British  observer,  said 
that  "those  involved  are  not 
just  ignorant  or  sensation- 
seeking  youths"  and  that  "it 
is  perhaps  significant  that  it 
is  the  unorganized  forms  of 
religion,  the  sects  and  extrem- 
ist .  religious  groups  like  the 
Jehovah's  Witnesses,  that  have 
attracted  them." 

Church  in  Politics 

^  On  October  30  Archbishop 
of  Montreal,  Canada,  Paul- 
Emile  Cardinal  Leger  said  that 
the  churches  have  the  right  to 
intervene  in  political  and  sec- 
ular affairs.  He  told  a  meeting 
of  Roman  Catholic  lay  organ- 
izations in  Montreal  that  to 
intervene  "is  a  duty  imposed 
by  God."  He  said,  "They  are 
wrong"  who  say  "that  bishops 
have  no  right  to  occupy  them- 
selves with  politics." 

Persecution  In  East  Germany 

#  A  report  received  Novem- 
ber IS  reveals  that  up  to  Oc- 
tober 31, 1960,  there  have  been 
2,859  eases  in  East  Germany 
in  which  Jehovah's  witnesses 
have  been  imprisoned  for  more 
than  24  hours.  Two  thousand 
one  hundred  and  forty-nine  of 
them  (1,484  men  and  665  wo- 
men) have  been  registered  as 
sentenced  by  East  German 
courts  to  a  total  of  11,946 
years  and  Ave  months.  Of  the 
original  fourteen  who  received 
life  terms,  one  is  still  serving 
his  out.  Fifty  have  died  during 
their  imprisonment,  37  men 
and  13  women.  On  October  31 
there  were  still  407  of  Jeho- 

AW  AKE! 


vah's  witnesses  in  prison.  The 
persecution  has  not  died  out 
in  the  course  of  the  years. 
From  January  to  September 
30,  I860,  fifty-two  were  sen- 
tenced to  prison  terms  of  up 
to  seven  years. 

France's  Social  Problem* 

<$  The  French  government  his 
taken  steps  toward  correcting 
two  of  her  major  social  prob- 
lems— alcoholism  and  prostitu- 
tion. Alcoholism  is  credited 
with  17,000  annual  deaths. 
Throughout  France  there  is  a 
bar  tor  about  every  ISO  per- 
sons, and  It  is  said  that  about 
5,000,000  persons,  or  ten  per- 
cent of  the  population,  are  en- 
gaged in  the  produation  of 
wine  and  spirits.  New  govern- 
ment laws  are  designed  to  re- 
duce the  number  of  bars  and 
cut  down  publicity  favoring  al- 
coholic drinks.  Police  have 
been  granted  broader  powers 
by  the  government  in  order  to 
control  bars  and  hotels  visited 
by  prostitutes.  For  violations 


proprietors  will  face,  loss  of 
thefr  driver*!  license  and  pais- 
port  and  their  places  of  busi- 
ness may  be  closed  down  for 
periods  of  three  months  to 
five  years, 

Religion  and  PeUHo* 

In  Puerto  Rloo 

*  Just  before  the  elections  In 
Puerto  Rico  this  past  Novem- 
ber Catholic  bishops  warned 
that  any  Catholic  voting  for 
Governor  Lull  Muftoz  Marin 
would  be  guilty  of  Bin  and 
could  be  excommunicated.  De- 
spite the  warning,  Mufloas  Ma- 
rin was  overwhelmingly  victo- 
rious at  the  polls.  On  Novem- 
ber 20  Thomas  Maisonet,  pas- 
tor of  the  Homan  Catholic 
Cathedral  in  San  Juan,  told 
Sunday  worshipers  that  those 
who  had  sinned  by  voting  for 
Mufioz  Marin  must  confess 
this  sin  and  pledge  never  to 
repeat  it  before  they  could 
receive  communion  again.  Ac- 
cording to  Priest  Maisonet, 
San  Juan's  woman  Mayor  Fe- 


lisa  Rincon  da  Qautler  would 
be  expected  to  publicly  confess 
her  sin,  either  over  the  radio 
or  television  or  through  the 
newspapers,  before  she  could 
receiva'eommunion  again. 
However,  she  stated  she  did 
not  Intend  to  do  this. 

Far  North  Once  Tropical 

<§>  Professor  Andrew  H.  Mc- 
Nair  reports  finding  evidence 
through  fossilized  plants  and 
warm-water  marine  animals 
that  the  Canadian  arctic  at 
one  time  in  the  past  had  a 
tropical  to  warm  climate.  Pro- 
fessor McNair  headed  a  six- 
man  team  of  geologists  from 
Dartmouth  College  in  a  two- 
and-a-half-month  expedition. 

Parochial  Schools  In  U.S. 
#  It  is  reported  that  about  12 
percent  of  the  children  in  the 
United  States  are  educated  in 
the  12,668  parochial  schools 
maintained  by  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church.  This  repre- 
sents an  enrollment  of  5,539,- 
750  students. 


Anything  Can  Happen! 


With  the  major  world  powers  aiming  Iheir  military  might  at 
one  another,  truly  il  can  be  said:  "Anything  can  happen!" 
Yet,  despite  this  world's  uncertainly  of  the  future,  an  inter- 
national society  of  Christian  ministers  is  making  unprece- 
dented strides  in  the  pursuit  of  peace.  See  how  thousands 
of  persons  from  all  nations  are  finding  security  in  God's  way 
of  peace.  Read: 

1961    Yearbook   of   Jehovah's   Witnesses 

Send  only  3/6  (for  Australia,  4/-),  and 
for  a  beautiful  calendar  for  the  new  year 
add  1/8  (for  Australia,  2/-)  to  your  order. 


WATCH   TOWER  THE   RIDGEWAY  LONDON   N.W.   7 

I    am    enclosing    - Please    send    me    1961    Yearbook    of   Jehovah's    Witnesses 

(3/6;    for   Australia,   V-J;    - 1961  calendar    (1/S;    for   Australia,    2/-). 

Street  and  Number 

Name  or  Route  and   Box  

Post  Postal 

Town  „ District  No County 

JANUARY  8,  1S61  31 


Do  you  believe  there  is  spir- 
itual famine  in  the  world 
today?  Consider  these  facts: 


Strong  bones  and  muscles  depend  on  nourishing  food.  Like- 
wise, Christian  faith  and  integrity  will  be  strong  only  as  we 
feed  on  God's  Word  and  receive  spiritual  nourishment  If, 
today,  there  is  strengthening  spiritual  food  to  be  found  in  the 
many  religions  of  the  world,  why,  then,  is  there  such  a  rapid 
decline  in  moral  integrity?  Why  should  delinquency  be  spread- 
ing like  a  plague  in  all  walks  and  stations  of  life?  Man  is 
largely  what  he  eats,  spiritually  as  well  as  physically! 

How  can  you  protect  and  fortify  yourself  and  your  family? 
Read  The  Watchtower  regularly.  This  journal  has  brought  real 
faith  and  healthful  Christian  maturity  to  hundreds  of  thou- 
sands of  persons  throughout  the  world.  Published  in  58  lan- 
guages, it  has  reached  the  astounding  circulation  of  3,800,000 
copies  each  issue.  Here  is  spiritual  food  in  abundance!  Why 
risk  your  spiritual  welfare?  Send  today! 


Send  for: 


THE  WATCHTOWER 


1  Year  7/- 
(f  or  Australia,  t 


WATCH   TOWER  THE  RIDGEWAY  LONDON   ► 

Please  send  me  The  Watchtower  for  one  year  lor  the  7/-  (far  Australia,  3/-)   enclose 
mftllliiKthe  coupon  T  am  to  receive  free  the  Booklets  Herding  of  the  Nations  Has  Drawn  Near> 
God's  W<ty   Is  Love  and  Alter  Arnutgeddort— God's  New  World. 

Street  and  NumDer 

Name  + - .... . or  Route  and  Box  + 

Post  Postal 

Town  District  No.  County  . 

Jul  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Ha.,  Strithfleld,  K.S.W,  CANADA;  lit,  Bridgelaiul  Ave.,  Toronto  19.  Ont. 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bag,  Elandsfontein,  Transvaal   UNITED  STATES:  117  Adams  St..  Brooklyn  1,  N.  T. 

32  AWAKEt 


F»AGE    5 


PAGE   IS 


#hy  Poison  Your  Mind? 
Aey  Are  Pursuing  Peace 
mrto  Rican  Priests  in  Politics 


me  Fascinating,  Versatile  Fabric— Fiber  Glass 


RAGEI6 


PAGE24 


JANUARY  22,  1961 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAl 

News  sources  that  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  trie  vital  Issues  of  our 
times  must  be  unfettered  by  censorship  ond  selfish  interests.  ''Awake!"  has  no 
fetters.  It  recognizes  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts.  J  Ms  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  it  is  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  it  is  unprefudrced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  It  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  It  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth. 

"Awake!"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  Is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  1'ts 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  in  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awafcef"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awaket" 

Published  Simultaneously  in  the  United  States  by  the 
WATCHTOWER   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY   OF  NEW  YORK,   TNC. 
117   Adams   Street  Brooklyn   1,   New   York,   U.S.A. 

AND    IN     ENOLAND    BY 

WATCH  TOWER   BIBLE    AND    TRACT   SOCIETY 
Watch  Tower  House,  The  Riageway  London  N,W.  7,  Englaim 

K  H.  Knohh,  President  GaANT  Suiter,  Secretary 


Printing  this  issue:  3,125,000 
•'AnsteV'  tt  ttWihrt  In  flu  fellowlnf  23  languages: 
Semimonthly—- Afrf&aans,  Cinyanja,  Danish,  Dutch,  Eng- 
lish, Finnish,  French,  German,  Greek.  Italian.  Japanese, 
Noineelan.  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Swedish,  Tagalog,  Zulu. 
Monthly— llocano,  Indonesian,  Korean,  M&layalam,  Pol- 
la&  Ukrainian. 

Yearly  subscription  fates 

Mutes  for  semimonthly  editions 

Ameriin.  U.S.,  117  Adams  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N.Y.  11 

Australia.,  11  Beresrnrd  Ha..  Stisthfleld,  N.S.W,  S/- 

tanada.  150  Brlcigeland  A?e,.  Toronto  19,  Oct  jl 

Engl  and,  Watch  Tower  House, 

The  Bltfcewiy,  London  N.W.  7  1j- 

Hew  Zealand,  621  Xew  North  ltd.,  Auckland,  S.W.  1   T/- 
Soath  Africa.  Priiate  Bag.  Elandsfonfeiin,  Til,  7/- 

Monlitiv  edition*  cost  natf  ifcff  tifare  rstss. 


4d  a  copy   (Australia,  6fl) 

fleatttaness  for  subscriptions  should  be  sent  to  the  office 

In    ytfta-    sotmtrF.    otherwise  ssnn  joar    rsmittascff   ti? 

London,  Hotlct  of  expiration  Is  sent  at  least  two  issues 
before  subscription  expires. 


CHANGES 

OF  ADDRESS 

shoiH  rgaxb 

as  thirty 

days 

before  your 

moving  date. 

Sift 

es  yosr  old  and 

addreti   (11 

PMslble,  your 

Oil 

address 

label).  Watch 

Tmtr,    Wateh    Tower    Houst, 

The    Rtdgowai', 

L«- 

don  N.W, 

7,    Engl  an*. 

Entered  aa  second -class  matter  it  Brooklyn.  N.y. 
Printed  in  EnfcUmi 


Th*    Elils   trarnktitm   db«4   in   "Awakil"    h   thi    New   World   Translation   of   tte   Holy   Scriftg.ru. 

V-hvn  other  translations  ari  gut!  the  following  ajmtaola  will  appear  behind  the  citations: 
JL8  -  American  Standard  Version     Hy  -  Catholic   Donay  ver.sin.1    Mo  —  James  Muffatt'a  Tersion 
AT  -  An  Amertciin  Translation       ED  -  The  EmtfjatJq  Diaelntt     Rq  _  J.   B.  BotlnjFhans'a  nrtlan 
AY  -  Authoztzeil  Version   (1611)    JP  -  Jewish  Publication  i&oc.    RS  -  ntvLaea  Standard  Version 
Ua  -  J.  N.   Dartiy'a  Teraion  Le    -  Isaac  Laser's  version       Yg  ^  Roowt  TLQuntfa  version 


C  O  N  TE  NTS 


Light,  Crime  and  Corruption 
Why  poison  Your  Mind? 
The  Miracle  of  the  Snowflake 
They  Are  Pursuing  Peace 
Seven  Years  Without  Water 
Puerto  Rican  Priests  hi  Politics 
Having  Bahy  the  Malayan  Way 


3 
5 
9 

12 
15 
16 
20 


Overwhelmed  22 

Thirteen-Y"ear  Discrimination  Ends  23 
The  Fascinating,  Versatile  Fabric 

— Fiber  Glass  24 
"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 

Capitalist?  Communist?  or  Christian?    27 

Watching  the  World  29 


"Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake."   0k 


Vol  urn  o   XLII 


London,   England,   January  22,   1961 


Number  2 


^% 


it/^RIME  in  the  United 

\j(  States  is  perhaps  one  of 
the  biggest  businesses  in  the 
world  today,"  said  Dr.  Paul  L. 
Kirk,  a  noted  criminologist. 
In  1959  crime  cost  the  Ameri- 
can people  $22,000,000,000,  accord 
ing  to  J.  Edgar  Hoover,  director  of 
the  Federal  Bureau  of  Investiga- 
tion. Despite  this  colossal  bill,  crime  is  still 
on  the  increase. 

The  great  ally  of  crime  is  darkness. 
Across  the  world  the  shadowed  streets,  the 
dark  alleys  and  the  unlit  hallways  breed 
murder,  rape  and  burglaries  about  as  fast 
as  filth  breeds  disease.  One  report  states: 
"There  are  12  times  as  many  crimes  of 
violence  at  night  as  in  the  daytime.  An- 
other study  reveals  that  all  the  murders 
in  Canton,  Ohio,  Binghamton,  New  York, 
Wilkes-Barre,  Pennsylvania,  and  Hemp- 
stead, New  York,  were  committed  at  night 
after  dark,  as  were  90  percent  of  the  rob- 
beries of  Fort  Wayne,  Indiana,  In  Salt 
Lake  City,  96.5  percent  of  all  aggravated 
assaults  took  place  at  night;  in  Minneapo- 
lis, 92  percent  of  the  burglaries  happened 
after  dark;  in  Pittsburgh,  85  percent  of  sto- 
len cars  were  taken  under  cover  of  dark- 
ness," Add  to  this  list  the  number  of 
crimes  of  adultery,  fornication  and  drunk- 
enness that  flourish  at  night  and  the  con- 
clusion is  irresistible  that  crime,  corrup- 
tion and  darkness  go  hand  in  hand. 

If  darkness  is  a  "friend"  of  crime,  then 

IANVARY  22.  3961 


•    and 


light  is  its  "enemy."  Cleveland 
Police  Chief  Frank  W.  Storey 
said:  "Light  always  works  on 
the  side  of  the  law."  Re- 
cent experiments  with 
modern  fluorescent  and 
mercury  vapor  lamps  in 
crime-infested  areas  have 
proved  this  true.  New 
York  city,  for  example,  had  tried  about 
every  way  to  eliminate  crime,  with  only 
partial  success.  Then  the  city  set  aside  111 
crime-ridden  blocks  and  bathed  these  in 
white  light.  All  crime  dropped  immediate- 
ly. There  was  an  18.3-percent  reduction  in 
adult  crimes,  a  30-percent  drop  in  juvenile 
delinquency.  Crimes  of  murder,  assault 
and  rape  were  cut  49  percent. 

That  light  is  a  deterrent  to  crime  is  fur- 
ther revealed  in  this  report  by  Don  Mur- 
ray. He  states  that  Chattanooga,  Tennes- 
see, "had  a  12-block  area  with  a  fantastic 
homicide  rate.  The  city  flooded  the  area 
with  light,  and  crimes  of  violence  were  cut 
70  to  90  percent.  Denver  cut  assault  com- 
plaints a  third  by  relighting  some  streets; 
Brookings,  South  Dakota,  and  Marion,  In- 
diana, virtually  eliminated  vandalism  in 
certain  areas  by  expanding  lighting;  in 
Austin,  Texas,  new  lighting  cut  some  cate- 
gories of  crime  90  percent,  ...  A  street 
lighting  program  in  Flint,  Michigan,  cut 
felonies  60  percent  in  the  downtown  area." 
Everywhere  reports  are  about  the  same  re- 
garding light  and  crime 


Still,  in  the  United  States  major  crimes 
have  increased  9  percent  in  the  first  half 
of  1960.  J.  Edgar  Hoover  stated  that  "crime 
has  been  rising  four  times  as  fast  as  popu- 
lation." What  is  the  cause? 

While  bright  lights  unquestionably  in- 
hibit crime,  they  obviously  do  not  remove 
the  cause.  Many  of  the  roots  of  crime  lie 
in  the  mind.  To  nip  these  roots,  the  dark 
inner  disturbances  of  the  mind  that  drive 
men  to  wrongdoing  must  be  reached.  This 
can  be  done,  not  with  lamplight,  but  with 
the  light  of  Bible  truth.  "The  truth  will 
set  you  free,"  said  Jesus,  This  truth  can 
release  men  from  their  inner  conflicts  that 
lead  to  crime. — John  8:32. 

The  truth  of  God's  Word  is  a  powerful 
force,  capable  of  energizing  the  mind  to 
want  to  live  a  better  life.  "How  will  a 
young  man  cleanse  his  path?  By  keeping 
on  guard  according  to  your  word,"  writes 
the  psalmist.  "Your  word  is  a  lamp  to  my 
foot,  and  a  light  to  my  roadway."  The  apos- 
tle Paul  appealed  to  Christians  at  Ephesus 
to  allow  the  truths  of  God's  Word  to  actu- 
ate their  minds.  Paul  knew  that  the  mind 
must  be  freed  of  wrong  thinking  before 
right  thinking  could  take  root.  Therefore, 
he  urged  the  Ephesian  Christians  not  to 
"go  on  walking  just  as  the  nations  also 
walk  in  the  unprofitableness  of  their  minds, 
while  they  are  in  darkness  mentally,  and 
alienated  from  the  life  that  belongs  to  God, 
because  of  the  ignorance  that  is  in  them. 
. . .  You  did  not  learn  the  Christ  to  be  so," 
says  the  apostle.— Ps.  119:9,  105;  Eph.  4: 
17-20. 

The  fact  that  Christians  have  an  accu- 
rate knowledge  of  God  and  Christ  and  be- 
long to  a  common  brotherhood  by  virtue 
of  their  faith  should  be  more  than  enough 
reason  to  want  to  put  away  the  old  per- 
sonality with  its  .corruptive  desires  and  to 
put  on  a  new  personality  in  true  right- 
eousness and  loving-kindness.  This  can  be 


done,  Paul  says,  by  applying  the  principles 
of  Christianity  in  daily  life,  "Put  away 
falsehood,  speak  truth  each  one  of  you 
with  his  neighbor  .  .  .  Let  the  stealer  steal 
no  more,  but  rather  let  him  do  hard  work." 
"Let  a  rotten  saying  not  proceed  out  of 
your  mouth,  but  whatever  saying  is  good 
for  building  up  .  .  .  Let  fornication  and 
uncleanness  of  every  kind  or  greediness 
not  even  be  mentioned  among  you."  He 
emphasized  that  decent  Christian  lives  can 
be  lived  if  Bible  truths  are  allowed  to  ac- 
tivate the  mind.  "From  every  bad  path  I 
have  restrained  my  feet,  in  order  that  I 
may  keep  your  word,"  wrote  the  psalmist. 
—Eph.  4:21-5:3;  Ps.  119:101. 

Bright,  shining  lights  in  themselves  will 
not  stop  crime.  The  corruptive  roots  of  the 
mind,  where  crime  breeds,  must  be  reached 
with  truths  that  uproot  evil  thinking  and 
inspire  men  in  the  right  direction.  These 
truths  are  not  found  in  movie  and  televi- 
sion programs  that  glorify  crime  and  crim- 
inals. Neither  are  they  located  in  obscene 
comic  books,  salacious  magazines  and  pic- 
tures that  are  capable  of  poisoning  any 
mind  at  any  age.  Such  filth  pots  can  spawn 
only  one  thing — crime  and  corruption. 

Truths  that  build  up  the  mind  come 
from  God  through  his  written  Word,  the 
Bible.  They  are  truths  that  speak  of  a 
righteous  kingdom,  of  God's  love,  of  the 
wicked  being  destroyed  and  the  righteous 
inheriting  the  earth.  They  tell  of  things 
that  are  of  serious  concern,  chaste,  lovable 
and  praiseworthy.  "The  very  disclosure  of 
your  words  gives  light,  making  the  inex- 
perienced ones  understand."  (Ps.  119:130; 
Phil.  4:8)  As  Paul  writes  of  true  Chris- 
tians: "You  were  once  darkness,  but  you 
are  now  light  in  connection  with  the  Lord. 
Go  on  walking  as  children  of  light,  for  the 
fruitage  of  the  light  consists  of  every  kind 
of  goodness  and  righteousness  and  truth." 
—Eph.  5:8,  9. 


AWAKE! 


YOU  appreciate 
health  and  life,  do 
you  not?  Of  course! 
You  would  not  know- 
ingly take  poison, 
would  you?  You  know 
that  poison  disrupts 
the  processes  of  life 
and  may  lead  to  death. 
Should  you  accidental- 
ly take  poison,  you 
would  do  all  in  your 
power  to  counteract  it. 
But  people  in  general 
are  not  nearly  so  care- 
ful when  it  comes  to  taking 
mental  poison,  poisonous 
ideas  into  their  minds;  yet 
they  should  be  even  more 
careful. 

What  is  mental  poison?  It 
will  help  us  to  identify  it 
when  we  note  that  all  knowl- 
edge may  be  divided  into 
three  distinct  classes.  There 
is  art,  which  concerns  itself  with  the  ap- 
peal of  the  ideal,  the  beautiful,  to  the 
senses  and  to  the  mind  and  heart  of  man. 
There  is  science,  which  concerns  itself  with 
practical  things,  primarily  with  how  man 
can  wrest  from  the  earth  the  things  he 
needs  to  survive.  And  then  there  is  religion, 
which  fills  man's  need  to  worship,  to  keep 
in  touch  with  his  Maker  and  Life-giver. 

Not  all  three  of  these  classes  of  mental 
food  are  equally  nourishing.  Least  impor- 
tant is  art;  next  in  importance  comes 
science,  and  most  important  of  all  is  reli- 
gion. Most  important  because,  as  both  Mo- 
ses and  Jesus  Christ  said:  "Man  must  live, 
not  on  bread  alone,  but  on  every  utterance 
coming  forth  through  Jehovah's  mouth." 
If  we  are  wise  we  will  not  only  remember 
the  relative  importance  of  these  various 
kinds  of  knowledge,  but  we  will  carefully 
avoid  any  mental  poison  that  may  appear 


under  the  guise  of  one  or  the 
other  of  these. — Matt.  4:4. 

The  Scriptures  further  tell 
us  that  the  sayings  of  God,  as 
recorded  in  his  Word,  "are 
spirit  and  are  life."  It  follows, 
therefore,  that  everything 
that  contradicts  the  principles 
and  teachings  found  in  God's 
Word  must  be  death-dealing 
mental  poison.  While  a  Chris- 
tian will  not  knowingly  feed 
his  mind  on  what  he  knows  to 
be  corrupting  to  faith  and 
morals,  unless  he  is  alert  he 
will  do  so  unwittingly,  to  his  spir- 
itual harm. — John  6:63. 

Moral  Poison 

For  example,  we  are  told  that 
"the  minding  of  the  flesh  means 
death,  but  the  minding  of  the  spirit 
means  life  and  peace."  To  be  mind- 
ing the  flesh  is  to  do  the  works  of 
the  flesh,  among  which  are  "forni- 
cation, uncleanness,  loose  conduct, . . .  fits  of 
anger,  .  .  .  drunken  bouts." — Rom,  8:6-8; 
Gal.  5:19-21. 

Today  the  world  is  filled  with  minding 
the  flesh  under  the  guise  of  art:  music, 
drama,  literature,  and  so  forth.  For  the 
sake  of  profits,  "art"  is  made  to  appeal  to 
man's  inherited  sinful  tendencies.  A  Chris- 
tian must  therefore  guard  against  reading 
newspaper  scandal,  salacious  articles  in 
magazines  or  prurient  modern  novels. 

He  should  exercise  the  same  care  as  to 
his  entertainment.  More  and  more  the  mov- 
ing picture  industry  is  "Dishing  the  Dirt," 
as  the  moving  picture  reviewer  for  the 
New  York  Times  (September  25,  1960) 
named  his  article  in  which  he  gave  exam- 
ple after  example  of  motion  pictures  that 
were  "shocking  and  depressing  in  the  ex- 
treme." Immorality  and  violence  are  also 
featured  on  the  television  screen.  All  such 


JANUARY  22,  1961 


is  moral  poison  and,  if  countenanced,  will 
weaken  one's  ability  to  "distinguish  both 
right  and  wrong."  In  fact,  it  will  deprave 
one  so  as  to  prefer  evil  to  good.— Heb.  5:14. 

This  minding  of  the  flesh  that  causes 
death  reaches  out  also  to  the  popular  songs 
one  hears  today  on  every  hand.  Many  of 
them  flagrantly  violate  Scriptural  princi- 
ples and  therefore  should  never  be  on  the 
lips  of  a  Christian.  Some  forms  of  dancing 
also  arouse  one's  passions,  especially  in 
teen-age  boys  and  girls,  and  therefore 
should  likewise  be  avoided. 

For  the  same  reason  Christians  must 
watch  as  to  the  company  they  keep:  "Do 
not  be  misled.  Bad  associations  spoil  useful 
habits.  Wake  up  to  soberness  in  a  righteous 
way  and  do  not  practice  sin."  One  who  de- 
sires to  please  God  may  not  choose  the 
company  of  those  who  show  by  their  ac- 
tions that  they  say  in  their  hearts,  "There 
is  no  Jehovah."  Emphasizing  the  death- 
dealing  nature  of  all  immoral  conduct  are 
the  apostle's  words:  "The  one  that  goes  in 
for  sensual  gratification  is  dead  though 
she  is  living."— 1  Cor.  15:33,  34;  Ps.  14:1; 
1  Tim.  5:6. 

Science  So  Called 

Just  as  in  the  field  of  art  there  is  an 
abundance  of  morals-destroying  poison,  so 
in  the  field  of  science  there  is  all  manner 
of  faith-destroying  poisonous  propaganda, 
set  out  by  foolish  or  wicked  men.  Having 
settled  once  and  for  all  in  our  minds  that 
God  truly  does  exist  and  that  the  Bible  is 
his  inspired  Word,  we  will  not  poison  our 
minds  with  theories  that  deny  these  truths 
simply  because  they  parade  under  the  name 
of  science.  That  is,  we  will  not  consider  any 
such  wholly  disinterestedly,  as  if  we  want- 
ed to  determine  whether  they  are  true  or 
not.  We  know  they  are  false!  Our  only  con- 
cern therefore  will  be  to  prove  them  so.  As 
a  man  who  deeply  loves  and  has  full  con- 


fidence in  his  wife  and  has  no  reason  to 
suspect  her  will  not  entertain  scandal  about 
her  but  will  dismiss  it  as  simply  not  pos- 
sibly true,  so  with  the  Christian,  but  even 
more  so.  We  know  that  nothing  that  doubts 
the  existence  of  the  Creator  or  the  validity 
of  his  Word  could  be  true,  even  though  it 
comes  to  us  in  the  name  of  science — falsely 
so  called.— 1  Tim.  6:20. 

Is  this  a  narrow  view?  Not  at  all.  While 
tq  many  reason  alone  argues  that  God  does 
indeed  exist,  there  are  many  others,  athe- 
ists and  agnostics,  who  deny  his  existence 
or  doubt  it.  That  does  not  need  to  disturb 
us,  for  "faith  is  not  a  possession  of  all  peo- 
ple." Further,  we  know  that  no  line  of  rea- 
soning could  possibly  refute  the  combined 
testimony  in  favor  of  the  Bible's  authen- 
ticity: archaeology,  geology,  candor  of 
writers,  harmony  of  writers,  highest  prin- 
ciples, its  influence  for  good,  its  preserva- 
tion and,  above  all,  its  prophecies.  Surely, 
God's  "word  is  truth."— 2  Thess.  3:2; 
John  17:17. 

Along  with  the  other  "scientific"  mental 
poison  that  is  widely  distributed  is  the  evo- 
lution theory.  Many  have  had  their  faith 
destroyed  by  this  poison,  while  others  na- 
ively think  that  they  can  reconcile  it  with 
the  Word  of  God.  No  better  proof  as  to 
its  poisonous  nature  can  be  adduced  than 
the  effect  it  had  on  its  popularizer  Charles 
Darwin,  and  not  only  on  his  beliefs  but 
also  upon  his  morals.  In  his  youth  he  had 
studied  medicine  for  two  years  and  then 
dropped  it  for  the  study  of  theology.  After 
graduating,  instead  of  becoming  a  parson, 
he  dabbled  in  geology.  When  he  first  began 
to  study  theology  he  "liked  the  thought  of 
being  a  country  clergyman,"  and  he  "did 
not  in  the  least  doubt  the  strict  and  literal 
truth  of  every  word  in  the  Bible."  When 
traveling  on  a  ship,  the  Beagle,  he  was 
"heartily  laughed  at  by  several  of  the  of- 
ficers ...  for  quoting  the  Bible  as  an  un- 


6 


AWAKE! 


answerable  authority  on  some  point  of 
morality." — The  Life  and  Letters  of 
Charles  Darwin. 

But  his  preoccupation  with  the  evolution 
theory  changed  all  this.  Soon  to  him  "the 
Old  Testament  was  no  more  to  be  trusted 
than  the  sacred  books  of  the  Hindoos."  He 
even  doubted  the  existence  of  God. 

Formerly  he  had  believed  that  man  could 
prove  the  existence  of  the  Creator  by  rea- 
soning from  effect  to  cause,  but  now  "arises 
the  doubt,  can  the  mind  of  man,  which 
has,  as  I  fully  believe,  been  developed  from 
the  mind  as  low  as  that  possessed  by  the 
lowest  animals,  be  trusted  when  it  draws 
such  grand  conclusions?"  Proceeding  on 
this  false  premise,  "Charles  called  the 
Christian  concept  of  salvation  through 
faith  'a  damnable  doctrine,'  argued  cogent- 
ly against  all  revealed  religion,  and  roundly 
proclaimed  himself  at  theend  no  theist  but 
a  thorough  going  agnostic." — Scientific 
American,  August,  1958,  p.  118. 

Darwin's  speculations  not  only  played 
havoc  with  his  faith  in  God  and  the  Bible 
but  also  with  his  personal  integrity.  This 
is  not  surprising  since  for  him  man's  moral 
nature  was  also  the  product  of  natural  se- 
lection. Thus  he  tells  that  his  five  years  at 
university  were  "worse  than  wasted,"  but 
he  so  enjoyed  those  youthful  revelries  that 
he  could  not  "help  looking  back  to  those 
days  with  much  pleasure."  He  discarded 
religion  on  the  basis  of  his  theory;  yet 
when  asked  about  his  religion  he  replied: 
"I  have  never  systematically  thought  much 
on  religion  in  relation  to  science,  or  on 
morals  in  relation  to  society."  In  his  first 
edition  of  Origin  of  Species  he  used  the  ex- 
pression "my  theory"  forty-five  times,  al- 
though it  was  not  at  all  his  theory.  Chal- 
lenged, he  saw  to  it  that  subsequent 
editions  contained  this  expression  less  and 
less. 

Further,  Darwin  stands  charged,  by  Ox- 
ford University  Professor  C.  C.  Darlington, 

JANUARY  22,  1961 


of  "equivocation  on  the  central  issue  of  se- 
lection versus  direction,"  of  confusing  "the 
alternatives  on  all  possible  occasions.  .  .  . 
He  was  able  to  put  his  ideas  across  not  so 
much  because  of  his  scientific  integrity, 
but  because  of  his  opportunism,  his  equivo- 
cation and  his  lack  of  historical  sense. 
Though  his  admirers  will  not  like  to  be- 
lieve it,  he  accomplished  his  revolution  by 
personal  weakness  and  strategic  talent 
more  than  by  scientific  virtue." — Scientific 
American,  May,  1959. 

What  Darwin's  taking  up  with  the  evolu- 
tion theory  did  for  him  it  has  done  for 
countless  millions  of  others  world-wide.  No 
sound  scientific  proof  has  ever  been  pro- 
duced that  has  moved  the  theory  of  evolu- 
tion into  the  field  of  fact.  It  is  still  the 
"evolution  theory."  It  is  not  an  array  of 
scientific  evidence  that  causes  men  to  lose 
their  faith  in  God  and  his  Word  the  Bible. 
Rather,  godless  evolution  appeals  to  men 
who  want  to  throw  off  accountability  to 
the  Supreme  Being,  Jehovah  God,  and  who 
do  not  want  to  submit  to  his  righteous 
laws.  Their  selfish  craving  for  personal  glo- 
ry or  for  a  life  that  is  not  circumscribed  by 
the  requirements  of  the  Word  of  God  regi- 
ments their  thinking  in  an  endeavor  to  pro- 
duce evidence,  no  matter  how  shallow,  to 
uphold  their  theory  that  there  is  no  God. 
Thus  it  proves  to  be  poison,  a  baseless  the- 
ory that  destroys  faith  both  in  God  and  in 
his  Word  and  weakens  integrity. 

Religious  Poison 

Just  as  the  mental  poison  of  immoral 
"art"  runs  counter  to  God's  righteous  prin- 
ciples and  the  mental  poison  of  pseudo- 
scientific  theories  of  men  runs  counter  to 
the  inspired  divine  Revelation,  the  Bible, 
so  there  is  religious  poison  distributed  by 
professed  Christians  that  runs  counter  to 
God's  method  of  dealing  with  his  earthly 
creatures.  From  the  very  beginning  God 
has  had  a  channel  of  communication  for 


instructing  his  creatures  upon  earth.  Thus 
Adam  instructed  Eve;  Noah,  his  family; 
Abraham,  his  household;  and  Moses,  the 
nation  of  Israel.  John  the  Baptist  taught 
the  Jews,  and  when  Jesus  Christ  came  he 
served  as  God's  channel  of  communication. 
After  Pentecost  God  used  a  "governing 
body,"  the  aposttes  and  older  men  of  the 
Christian  congregation  at  Jerusalem,  as  his 
instrument  to  instruct  the  early  Christian 
congregation  as  to  Christian  doctrine,  prin- 
ciple and  policy,  under  the  direction  of  the 
holy  spirit  and  in  harmony  with  the  Word 
of  God.  There  were  other  religions,  but 
they  were  not  of  God. — Acts  15:1-35. 

The  facts  show  that  today  Jehovah  God 
is  using  a  "faithful  and  discreet  slave" 
class,  a  body  of  dedicated  and  anointed 
Christians,  to  direct  his  work  upon  earth. 
This  body,  also  known  as  the  "remnant" 
of  the  body  of  Christ,  is  the  nucleus  of  the 
New  World  society  of  Jehovah's  witnesses. 
This  society  bases  its  teachings  solely  upon 
the  Word  of  God;  it  carries  out  the  pro- 
phetic commission  that  "this  good  news  of 
the  kingdom  will  be  preached  in  all  the  in- 
habited earth  for  the  purpose  of  a  witness 
to  all  the  nations";  and  it  brings  forth  the 
Christian  fruitage  of  the  spirit,  'love,  joy, 
peace,  long-suffering,  kindness,  goodness, 
faith,  mildness  and  self -control.' — Matt.  24: 
14,  45-47;  Gal.  5:22,  23. 

However,  just  as  in  Jesus'  day  some  be- 
came disgruntled  and  said:  "This  speech  is 
shocking;  who  can  listen  to  it?"  and  "would 
no  longer  walk  with  him,"  and  just  as  in 
the  days  of  the  apostles  there  were  'those 
who  created  divisions  and  causes  for  stum- 
bling,' so  we  find  it  today.  Having  settled 
it  in  our  minds  what  instrument  brought  us 
the  truth  of  God's  Word,  what  instrument 
is  obeying  God's  commands  and  fulfill- 
ing Bible  prophecy  and  bringing  forth  the 
Christian  fruitage  of  the  spirit,  we  need 

8 


not  read  all  the  literature  published  by 
those  who  dispute  these  things. — John  6: 
60,  66;  Rom.  16:17. 

Does  a  Christian  missionary  have  time 
to  study  all  the  sacred  writings  of  the 
Oriental  religions?  Does  he  have  time  to 
study  all  the  beliefs  of  the  some  265  reli- 
gions that  claim  to  be  Christian  in  the 
United  States?  Certainly  not!  He  does  not 
have  sufficient  time  to  study  the  Bible  and 
the  Bible-study  aids  that  he  knows  to  be 
the  truth.  Of  course,  as  he  comes  in  con- 
tact with  various  points  of  teaching  of 
these  religions  he  will  equip  himself  to 
refute  them,  but  that  is  all. 

So  also  when  a  Christian  is  handed  liter- 
ature, the  contents  and  spirit  of  which  is 
that  of  'beating  his  fellow  slaves,'  he  is  not 
driven  by  idle  curiosity  to  examine  it.  Hav- 
ing settled  it  in  his  mind  who  is  being  used 
by  Jehovah,  who  is  bringing  forth  genu- 
ine Christian  fruitage  and  fulfilling  Bi- 
ble prophecy,  he  neither  wastes  his  time 
nor  risks  tarnishing  his  loyalty  by  perus- 
ing such  publications.  Having  built  his 
faith  on  a  knowledge  of  God's  Word,  he 
knows  that  there  can  be  no  facts  that  dis- 
pute his  position  and  that  therefore  mali- 
cious slander  can  be  nothing  but  assertions. 
In  this  way  also  he  avoids  knowingly  tak- 
ing poison.  He  wisely  uses  his  time  to  study 
the  Bible,  letting  it  mold  his  thinking. 
—Matt.  24:48-51. 

The  course  for  those  who  would  he  wise 
is  therefore  clear.  To  keep  their  integrity 
by  upholding  God's  righteous  principles,  to 
keep  their  faith  strong  as  ministers  of 
God's  inspired  Word  and  to  remain  loyal 
at  all  times  to  the  channel  that  Jehovah 
God  is  using  in  this  day,  they  will  distin- 
guish between  mental  food  and  mental  poi- 
son and  will  avoid  the  latter  even  as  they 
would  avoid  poisoned  material  food;  yes, 
and  more  so,  because  not  merely  tempo- 
rary life  but  everlasting  life  is  involved. 

AWAKE! 


BEFORE  you  lies  a  city  of  steel 
and  concrete.  Its  arteries  are 
in  full  swing  with  bustling 
traffic.  Its  shops  are  crowded 
with  customers  and  its  streets 
are  teeming  with  people  dashing  about, 
too  busy  to  look  upward. 

Then  a  fragile  snowflake  falls,  then  two 
and  three;  the  sky  is  white  with  them! 
With  the  stillness  of  a  falling  feather,  each 
delicate  crystal  dances  downward,  alight- 
ing on  face  or  street.  Now  there  is  an  inch, 
now  a  foot,  now  many  feet.  Traffic  is 
stilled.  The  shops  are  deserted-  The  streets 
are  empty.  A  muffled  silence  hovers  over 
the  inhabited  area.  Dirty  streets  show  pure 
and  clean  'neath  winter's  sheet.  Warmly 
lit  dwellings  seem  cozier  with  ermine 
blankets  draped  across  each  roof.  The 
whole  world  seems  transfigured,  fair  and 
white  when  softly,  softly  falls  the  snow! 

What  priceless  blessing  these  tiny  crys- 
tals, the  frailest  of  nature's  treasures,  have 
bestowed!  They  have  brought  peace  and  a 
moment  of  tranquillity  to  hurried  souls  and 
an  opportunity  to  meditate  and  reflect  on 
the  question  that  God  himself  asked  man: 
"Have  you  entered  into  the  storehouses  of 
the  snow?"— Job  38:22. 

In  these  storehouses  there  are  symmetry 
and  geometry.  There  are  endless  modifica- 
tions of  classes  of  crystals  whose  archi- 
tecture, beauty  and  variety  are  beyond 
description.  Here  in  these  regions,  most 
remote  from  human  observation,  fragile 
jewels  are  born  in  perfect  balance  and  ex- 
quisite in  design,  each  altogether  admira- 
ble. Here  takes  place  the  most  delicate  of 
miracles,  the  birth  of  the  snowflake. 

Snow  is  the  solid  form  of  water  that 
grows  while  floating  in  the  atmosphere.  It 
is  formed  when  the  temperature  is  below 


f  *lM» 


freezing  and  the  water  vapor  in  the 
air  changes  from  gas  to  solid  with- 
out going  through  the  intermedi- 
ate liquid  state. 

Scientists  claim  that  the 
water  molecule  needs  a  foun- 
dation on  which  to  build 
before  it  can  become  a 
snowflake.  This  founda- 
tion is  found  in  the  air. 
The  upper  atmos- 
phere is  "polluted" 
with  small  parti- 
cles such  as  dust, 
salt  crystals 


JANUARY  22,  1961 


from  the  ocean,  pollen  from  plants,  bacte- 
ria, volcanic  ash  and  even  star  dust.  Ac- 
cording to  author  John  S.  Collis,  2,000  tons 
of  star  dust  falls  from  outer  space  to  the 
earth  daily. 

In  sub-freezing  temperatures  the  motion 
of  these  tiny  particles  is  .slowed  down  con- 
siderably. A  water  molecule  will  attach  it- 
self to  one  of  these  particles.  The  particle 
thus  becomes  the  nucleus  or  foundation  for 
the  formation  of  a  snowfiake.  As  soon  as 
one  molecule  fixes  itself  to  a  dust  parti- 
cle, other  water  molecules  will  scramble 
aboard,  only  "in  an  orderly  sequence  in 
accordance  with  the  system  and  class  of 
symmetry  peculiar  to  oxide  of  hydrogen." 
When  the  particle  becomes  overloaded  with 
water  molecules,  it  becomes  too  heavy  for 
air  flow  to  support  it  and  begins  its  glide 
earthward.  Thus  is  born  the  snowfiake, 
and  we  behold  with  joy  the  falling  snow! 

Shapes  and  Sizes  of  Snow 

What  shape  and  size  the  snowfiake  will 
be  when  it  reaches  the  earth  depends  great- 
ly on  the  temperature  and  the  amount  of 
moisture  in  the  air  through  which  the 
flake  passes  on  its  way  down.  Snowflakes 
often  take  the  form  of  beautiful  crystals, 
generally  having  a  hexagonal  design  or 
pattern.  Some  crystallize  with  trigonal 
symmetry.  This  type  is  usually  born  in 
high  clouds  and  in  zero  weather.  The  larger 
crystals  form  in  warmer  sub-freezing  tem- 
peratures. "The  variety  of  appearance  is 
inexhaustible,"  writes  Collis,  "but  very 
often  (though  not  always)  a  hexagonal 
shape  is  adhered  to,  so  that  each  is  a  little 
star  with1  six  rays  crossing  at  an  angle  of 
60  degrees.  If  the  crystal  looks  like  a  com- 
position of  ferns  it  will  have  six  out- 
pointing leaves;  if  like  a  windmill,  it  will 
have  six  sails;  if  like  a  starfish,  it  will  have 
six  ribs;  if  like  a  fir  tree,  it  will  have  six 
stems  with  plumes  set  in  perfect  symme- 
try." 


In  1885  Wilson  Bently  acquired  a  photo- 
micrographic  camera.  With  it  he  took  pic- 
tures of  snow.  Out  of  5,300  pictures  that 
he  took  during  his  forty-six  years  of  study, 
he  was  unable  to  find  two  that  were  iden- 
tically alike  in  shape.  A  scientist  has  esti- 
mated that  1,000,000,000,000  flakes  may 
fall  on  an  acre  of  ground  in  an  average- 
size  snowstorm,  and  all  of  them  different! 
"Yet  this  is  not  surprising,"  says  Collis. 
"It  is  a  wonder  of  wonders  that  the  dance 
of  the  molecules  produces  these  geometri- 
cal designs  in  the  first  place;  it  would  be 
too  much  to  ask  that  the  exact  same  shape 
be  duplicated,"  In  recent  years  snowflakes 
have  been  preserved  with  a  transparent 
plastic  fluid  that  hardens  rapidly.  Pre- 
served snowflakes  can  be  filed  on  glass 
slides  to  be  studied  under  microscope  or 
photographed  at  leisure. 

How  big  are  snowflakes?  In  low  temper- 
atures in  the  polar  region  the  tiny  crystals 
known  as  "diamond  dust"  rarely  exceed 
.005  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  This  snow  is 
too  rough  for  a  ski  blade  to  glide  through 
it.  A  flake  of  this  type  may  take  many 
hours  to  fall  just  a  thousand  feet.  Whereas 
huge  cottony  flakes  that  often  measure 
several  inches  across  will  fall  the  distance 
in  from  eight  to  ten  minutes.  An  average 
snowfiake  will  travel  a  few  miles  from  its 
place  of  birth  before  it  lands;  unless,  of 
course,  it  was  formed  in  the  high  cirrus 
clouds.  In  that  case  the  traveling  distance 
is  much  greater. 

Weight  and  Color  of  Snow 

Newly  fallen  snow  is  very  light,  having 
much  air  space  in  its  captivating  structure. 
It  is  only  one  fifteenth  as  heavy  as  ice, 
and  ice,  in  turn,  due  to  expansion  at  freez- 
ing, is  only  nine  tenths  as  heavy  as  water. 
It  takes  about  twenty  inches  of  dry  snow 
to  produce  an  inch  of  water,  but  normally 
ten  inches  of  snow  will  make  that  amount. 

Even  though  snow  is  comparatively  light, 


10 


AWAKE! 


it  is  deceptively  heavy.  To  shovel  a  five- 
foot  sidewalk  for  a  hundred  feet  after  a 
thirty-inch  snowfall  would  mean  lifting 
close  to  four  tons  of  snow,  not  counting  the 
weight  of  the  shovel!  No  wonder  you  gasp, 
"My  aching  back!"  after  clearing  the  side- 
walk. The  Halifax  Gazette  stated:  "Ten 
inches  of  snow  covering  one  square  mile 
weighs  72,320  tons,  123  inches  on  ten 
miles  amounts  to  8,895,360  tons.  But  if 
you  are  waiting  for  it  to  melt,  give  a 
thought  to  it.  That  quantity  of  snow  when 
changed  to  water  will  turn  to  1,779,072,000 
gallons."  So  these  tiny  crystal  buckets  do 
bring  to  earth  oceans  of  water. 

When  thousands  of  billions  of  these  frag- 
ile flakes  fall,  huge  banks  of  white  mount 
up.  Highways  are  covered  over.  Often  cars, 
trucks  and  houses  are  buried.  Everywhere 
the  eye  can  see  there  is  nothing  but  white, 
yet  scientists  tell  us  that  snow  is  not  ac- 
tually white.  When  snow  crystallizes  in  the 
sky  it  is  transparent,  like  glass.  But  when 
snowfiakes  bunch  together  on  the  ground, 
the  myriad  minute  surfaces  of  the  crystals 
reflect  the  light  in  all  directions  and  create 
a  pure  whiteness. 

Of  what  value  is  snow?  Besides  beauti- 
fying the  earth  and  sky,  forests  and  moun- 
tains, it  serves  a  most  useful  purpose  in  the 
economy  of  nature.  It  conserves  the  heat 
of  the  earth  and  protects  vegetation  from 
the  intense  cold  of  the  winter.  The  soil 
needs  the  moisture  that  is  absorbed  more 
easily  in  the  form  of  snow.  Animals  bur- 
row into  nature's  fluffy  blanket  and  are 
protected  from  severe  winds  and  kept 
warm.  Eskimos  insulate  their  igloos  with 
snow.  It  is  so  effective  as  an  insulating 
agent  that  heat  from  the  human  body  can 
keep  the  igloo  room  warm. 

Besides  purifying  the  air  for  the  city 
dweller,  the  fragile  snowflake  represents 
"money  from  heaven"  for  the  farmer.  As 
each  snowflake  glides  down  on  its  micro- 


scopic dust  disk,  it  washes  out  of  the  at- 
mosphere certain  elements  such  as  nitro- 
gen and  sulphur  that  enrich  the  soil.  Back 
in  1936  these  nitrogenous  substances  de- 
posited in  a  winter's  fall  of  snow  and  hail 
were  said  to  have  a  financial  value  of 
"$14.08  per  acre."  If  you  ascertain  the 
number  of  acres  under  cultivation  where 
it  snows  and  multiply  that  by  $14.08  per 
acre,  you  will  get  a  stupendous  sum  of  real 
money!  "Hast  thou  entered  the  treasuries 
of  the  snow?"  asked  the  Creator, — Job  38: 
22,  AS, 

While  in  the  abstract  snow's  manifesta- 
tions are  beneficent,  yet  in  reality  some  of 
them  are  otherwise,  at  least  in  this  system 
of  things.  In  the  city  there  is  the  aggra- 
vating disruption  of  the  transportation 
system.  In  the  country  the  fanner  may  be 
stranded  for  weeks.  Sudden  melting  of 
deep  snow  over  large  areas  can  cause 
floods  and  the  destruction  of  property. 
Massive  snowfalls  have  caused  the  death 
of  man  and  animals,  and  whole  villages 
have  been  annihilated  by  snowslides. 

Perhaps  the  greatest  use  of  snow  is  still 
in  the  future  when  it  will  be  used  as  a 
weapon  of  destruction  at  the  battle  of  Ar- 
mageddon. Jehovah  God,  the  Creator  of 
the  snowflake,  says  that  he  has  reserved 
snow  and  hail  "for  the  time  of  distress, 
for  the  day  of  fight  and  war."  (Job  38:23) 
The  deluge  of  Noah's  day  brought  down 
water,  snow  and  ice  upon  the  world  of  the 
ungodly  of  that  time.  A  supernatural  use 
of  these  same  elements  is  foretold  for  the 
war  of  the  great  day  of  God  the  Almighty. 
"He  is  giving  snow  like  wool;  hoarfrost  he 
scatters  just  like  ashes.  He  is  throwing  his 
ice  like  morsels.  Before  his  cold  who  can 
stand?"  (Ps.  147:16, 17)  Yes,  at  Armaged- 
don Jehovah  will  call  into  service  a  vast 
number  of  these  tiny,  fragile  crystals  for 
a  most  glorious  purpose — the  vindication 
of  his  great  and  holy  name. 


JANUARY  %%,  1961 


11 


IE  whole  world  is  hoping  for  peace. 
But  can  it  be  achieved?  The  Peace- 
pursuing  District  Assemblies  held  by  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  during  the  past  year  lend 
proof  to  the  fact  that  there  are  actually 
persons  who  are  not  only  seeking  peace 
but  who  have  already  found  it — peace  with 
God,  peace  with  their  fellow  man  and  peace 
with  themselves. 

The  convention  servant  of  the  assembly 
held  in  Vienna,  Austria,  writes  us  as  fol- 
lows: "The  ancient  Danube  city  of  Vienna 
has  experienced  numerous  invasions.  In 
1529  and  1683  it  was  besieged  by  the  Turks, 
in  1805  and  1809  it  was  captured  by  the 
French,  in  those  dreadful  March  days  of 
1938  it  was  swallowed  up  by  Hitler's  Reich, 
and  in  1945  it  was  snatched  away  by  the 
Red  Army.  How  the  city  has  suffered!  All 
those  pushing  into  it  were  pursuing  war 
and  therefore  left  suffering,  hunger,  dis- 
ease, oppression,  rape  and  despotism  be- 
hind them.  In  July  of  this  year  Vienna  was 
invaded  by  a  people  not  nearly  as  numer- 
ous as  the  Turks,  French,  Germans  or  Rus- 
sians, but  this  time  it  was  a  peaceful  in- 
vasion. Instead  of  artillery  weapons,  can- 
nons and  tanks,  this  time  there  were  three 
special  trains  that  rolled  into  the  West  and 
South  railway  stations  loaded  down  with 
peaceful  witnesses  of  Jehovah.  Instead  of 
being  armed  with  crooked  sabers,  rifles 
and  pistols,  and  instead  of  displaying  se- 
vere grimaces  of  war,  each  of  them  carried 
concealed  in  his  briefcase  or  suitcase  the 
sword  of  the  spirit,  the  Bible,  and  it  was 


obvious  to  all  that  peace  reflectea  rr 
their  friendly  faces." 

Jehovah's  witnesses  also  met  together  in 
Berlin,  which  has  become  a  focal  point  in 
the  conflict  between  East  and  West,  a  sym- 
bol of  division  and  of  the  world's  lack  of 
peace.  From  there  we  are  told:  "It  did  not 
look  as  though  many  Witnesses  from  East- 
ern Germany,  where  they  have  been 
banned  since  1950  and  are  heavily  persecut- 
ed, would  be  able  to  seize  an  opportunity  to 
slip  quickly  through  a  hole  in  the  Iron 
Curtain  into  Berlin  as  they  have  done  in 
previous  years  in  order  to  attend  assem- 
blies. Because  of  this  fact,  only  visitors 
from  West  Berlin  were  actually  expected. 
Sure  enough,  three  weeks  before  the  as- 
sembly was  to  begin,  East  German  police 
began  visiting  all  known  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses in  Eastern  Germany  and  were  ask- 
ing them — some  trumped-up  reason  being 
given  for  this — to  surrender  their  person- 
nel cards.  Without  these  they  would  not  be 
able  to  travel  to  Berlin." 

But  when  the  time  came  for  the  baptism 
of  those  symbolizing  their  dedication  to 
Jehovah  God,  those  being  baptized  walked 
past  a  table  where  they  were  counted  and 
asked,  "West  or  East?"  One  heard:  "West" 

—  "East"  —  "West"  _  "East"  —  "East" 

—  "East"  —  "West."  Yes,  Witnesses  were 
here  from  Eastern  Germany;  they  have 
not  stopped  pursuing  peace  even  though 
banned  and  persecuted  there.  This  results 
in  many  more  continuing  to  associate  with 
them,  in  order  to  find  peace  with  God,  with 
their  fellow  man  and  with  themselves. 


12 


AWAKE! 


Peace  with  Their  God 

During  a  time  when  the  nations  are  pur- 
suing war,  there  are  numberless  difficulties 
encountered  by  those  striving  to  pursue 
peace.  The  eventual  winners  in  thjs  conflict 
are  indicated  by  the  report  from  Hannover, 
Germany:  "In  the  midst  of  the  tempo  of 
the  times  and  the  mad  pursuit  after  ma- 
terial things,  in  the  midst  of  this  old  world 
surrounded  by  war  and  atomic  danger,  Je- 
hovah's witnesses  celebrated  a  festival  of 
peace.  During  the  1939-1945  war,  Han- 
nover was  severely  bombed  and  the  ruins 
were  scooped  together  and  piled  together 
on  a  huge  dumping  ground.  Later  the  Nie- 
dersachsen  Stadium  was  built  on  top  of 
this  pile  of  debris.  In  this  stadium,  on  top 
of  the  ruins  left  by  the  now-disappeared 
'thousand-year  Reich,'  Jehovah's  witnesses 
held  their  district  assembly  this  year."  Was 
this  not  indicative  of  victory  for  those  pur- 
suing peace,  for  those  who  were  not  'learn- 
ing war  any  more'?  (Isa,  2:4)  Yes,  they 
have  come  to  be  at  peace  with  God  through 
Jesus  Christ,  and  for  that  reason  God 
blesses  them  with  success. 

Even  the  exterior  surroundings  at  the 
assemblies  stressed  peace.  That  platform 
in  Stuttgart's  Neckar  Stadium  was  deco- 
rated with  2,500  flowers  and  in  represent- 
ing a  small  paradise  certainly  reflected 
quietness  and  peace.  The  platform  in  Dort- 
mund was  similar.  The  Westdeutsche  Dort- 
munder  Tageblatt  wrote  about  this  on  July 
30 :  "Where  the  platform  is  normally  found 
[in  the  Westfalen  Hall]  a  mountainous 
landscape  has  been  erected  with  a  pool  in 
the  foreground  springing  from  a  bubbling 
fountain  in  the  background.  The  motif  of 
this  platform  decoration  is  taken  from 
Revelation  chapter  22.  Accordingly,  a 
stream  of  clear  water  springs  forth  from 
the  rocks.  In  front  of  this  stand  two  per- 
sons scooping  up  the  'water  of  life.'  " 


Peace  with  Their  Brothers 

In  Dortmund'  over  eighty  of  Jehovah's 
witnesses  asked  if  they  could  come  early 
and  help  in  making  preparations  for  the 
assembly.  Not  one  of  them  wanted  to  be 
paid  for  this  work.  They  appreciated  the 
privilege  of  working  in  the  house  of  Jeho- 
vah and  in  preparing  a  pleasant  place  for 
their  brothers  to-  assemble,  where  they 
would  feel  at  home.  The  report  from  Han- 
nover also  shows  their  willingness  and 
reads:  "During  installation  work  a  me- 
chanic was  heard  to  say  that  we  should 
not  take  the  work  away  from  them.  He 
was  told  that  he  could  certainly  do  the 
work  if  he  wanted  to,  but  would  have  to 
do  it  on  the  same  condition  as  we,  that  is 
to  say,  without  pay.  The  immediate  an- 
swer: 'Oh,  no,  that's  all  right — you  people 
just  go  ahead  and  do  it.'  "  A  businessman 
going  through  the  stadium  in  Stuttgart 
saw  a  large  sign  reading  "Volunteer  Serv- 
ice." He  observed  over  fifty  persons  stand- 
ing in  front  of  the  sign,  all  waiting  to  be 
assigned  work.  He  said,  "How  different 
this  all  is.  When  we  look  for  just  one  single 
worker,  we  can't  find  anyone  at  all,  and 
in  front  of  your  'Volunteer  Service'  sign 
there  are  over  fifty  persons." 

Outsiders  were  heard  to  say  over  and 
over  again:  "This  is  a  completely  different 
world;  here  there  is  real  peace,  no  com- 
plaining, no  swearing,  yes,  even  a  different 
language  is  spoken  here."  The  fire  chief  in 
Dortmund  praised  the  willingness  of  the 
Witnesses  to  work  as  ushers,  which  made 
it  possible  for  him  to  reduce  his  crew  of 
fire  watchers  to  just  a  few.  Neither  had 
the  police  much  to  do,  since  the  Witnesses 
even  directed  their  own  traffic.  The  Stutt- 
garter  Zeitung  printed  the  comments  of  an 
observer  in  the  following  article  on  July 
27, 1960:  "On  Sunday,  week  before  last,  in 
the  stadium.  Jehovah's  witnesses  were  di- 
recting the  traffic,  too.  They  discovered  a 
ear  which  had  been  parked  improperly. 


JANUARY  22,  1961 


13 


One  of  them  pulled  out  a  note  book,  but 
not  to  write  the  license  number  down.  He 
wrote  a  note,  placed  it  on  the  windshield, 
and  then  went  on.  I  curiously  read  what 
it  said:  'Dear  Brother,  you  have  parked  in 
the  wrong  place.  Please,  be  kind  enough  to 
move  your  car  to  the  proper  place.'  I  was 
curious  what  the  owner  of  the  car  would 
do,  so  I  waited.  He  came,  paused  a  minute, 
read  the  note,  took  it  off  the  windshield, 
climbed  into  his  car  and  then  parked  cor- 
rectly. The  driver  was — a  policeman!" 

Peace  with  Their  Fellow  Man 

As  these  thousands  of  volunteer  work- 
ers were  pursuing  peace  through  serving 
their  brothers,  the  others  of  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses were  not  inactive.  They  were  ex- 
pressing their  confidence  in  total  peace  by 
sharing  their  love  and  knowledge  with  the 
citizens  of  the  assembly  cities.  The  news- 
paper Luzerner  Neuesten  Nachrichten 
wrote  a  half-page  article  praising  the  activ- 
ity of  Jehovah's  witnesses.  The  article  read, 
in  part;  "It  can  easily  be  the  case  now  that 
anyone  in  Luzern  walking  down  the  street 
may  be  stopped  by  two  polite  ladies  or 
gentlemen  and  invited  to  hurry  along  to 
the  large  hall  there  on  the  Allmend  where 
the  Swiss  annual  convention  of  Jehovah's 
witnesses  is  being  held  .  .  .  Since  there  is 
no  such  thing  as  a  passive  member  among 
them — for  each  is  obligated  to  advertise 
his  belief — many  friendly  persons  are 
drawn  into  an  extensive  discussion  with 
them  almost  without  knowing  it.  But  why 
not?  It  will  harm  no  one  to  speak  about 
something  for  once  other  than  about  time 
off,  wages,  relatives,  recipes,  the  Congo 
and  movies." 

Jehovah's  witnesses  prove  their  love  for 
God  and  for  their  fellow  man  by  deeds. 
Outsiders  see  this  and  appreciate  it.  The 
stationmaster  in  Dortmund  praised  their 
orderliness.  The  Hasper  Zeitung,  in  report- 
ing about  the  Dortmund  assembly,  head- 


lined the  report  "Faithful  Servants  of  the 
True  God."  A  Stuttgart  businessman  said 
he  only  wished  all  his  employees  were  Je- 
hovah's witnesses.  An  interesting  experi- 
ence was  had  in  Berlin  in  connection  with 
a  leading  man  in  a  company  supplying 
chairs  for  the  hall.  "After  watching  for 
quite  some  time,  he  began  to  confide  in  one 
of  the  Witnesses  standing  nearby,  and  ex- 
pressed his  amazement  that  the  prepara- 
tion work  was  being  carried  on  so  smooth- 
ly. He  said  something  like  this:  'We  have 
often  provided  chairs  for  religious  conven- 
tions, but  I  see  that  everything  is  done 
completely  different  here  with  you  folks. 
Everyone  is  working  so  quietly  and  rapidly 
with  one  another,  and  in  spite  of  all  the 
work  to  be  done  they  are  all  so  friendly  to 
one  another.  Not  long  ago  while  preparing 
for  a .  religious  meeting  we  were  almost 
driven  to  despair  by  all  the  demands  that 
were  made.  Last  of  all,  extra-special  easy 
chairs  had  to  be  placed  in  front  for  the 
top  honored  guests,  the  next  section  of 
chairs  were  to  be  of  the  second-best  type 
for  other  guests  and  then  the  rest  of  the 
hall  was  to  be  filled  with  normal  chairs. 
You  people  make  no  such  differences. 
Aren't  you  expecting  any  honored  guests?' 
In  answer,  he  was  told  that  about  10,000 
honored  guests  were  being  expected;  he 
understood  exactly  what  we  meant." 

Some  were  not  so  friendly  to  the  Wit- 
nesses. In  Vienna,  for  example,  Catholic 
church  leaders  called  on  the  faithful  to  re- 
fuse accommodations  for  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses. Likewise  in  Switzerland:  "It  is 
true  that  periodic  warnings  were  issued 
from  the  pulpits  and  the  population  was 
asked  not  to  provide  any  accommodations 
for  the  Witnesses.  Due  to  this  about  one 
hundred  rooms  were  canceled.  But  a  spe- 
cial campaign  to  find  rooms  shortly  before 
the  assembly  began  resulted  in  our  having 
more  accommodations  than  were  needed. 
The  hosts  were  all  very  friendly,  and  be- 


14 


AWAKE! 


cause  of  the  friendly  attitude  shown  by 
Jehovah's  witnesses  many  prejudices  were 
beaten  down.  This  peaceful  and  Christian 
conduct  on  the  part  of  the  Witnesses  to- 
ward their  hosts  was  well  received.  Al- 
most everyone  who  had  kept  Jehovah's 
witnesses  was  heard  to  speak  words  of 
praise  about  the  guests  afterward.  One 
gentleman  who  had  offered  a  double  room 
met  one  of  Jehovah's  witnesses  he  knew 
on  the  street  and  stopped  her  to  say:  'Now, 
there's  just  one  thing  I'd  like  to  tell  you. 
At  church  the  preacher  said  we  should  not 
rent  our  rooms  to  any  of  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses. But  I  rented  one  of  mine  to  your 
people  anyhow.  And  I  must  say,  the  zeal 
and  the  spirit  of  my  guests  has  amazed  me. 
If  the  people  in  the  Catholic  church  had 
this  same  spirit,  then  things  would  be  a 
whole  lot  better  in  our  church.  I'm  going 
to  invite  you  over  sometime  in  the  near 
future  so  you  can  tell  me  more  about  your 
faith.  I  see  how  happy  you  are  and  how 


well  trained  your  children  are.  Your  belief 
can't  be  anything  bad.'  " 

Jehovah's  witnesses  are  convinced  that 
their  belief  cannot  be  anything  bad,  for  it  is 
based  upon  what  is  taught  in  God's  Word. 
They  will  continue  to  seek  peace  and  pur- 
sue it.  Already  they  are  happily  looking 
forward  to  their  large  conventions  to  be 
held  next  summer  in  New  York,  New  York, 
June  20-25;  Houston,  Texas,  June  27-July 
2;  Vancouver,  British  Columbia,  July  4-9; 
Copenhagen,  Denmark,  July  11-16;  Ham- 
burg, Germany,  and  Turin,  Italy,  July  18- 
23;  London,  England,  July  25-30;  Paris, 
France,  and  Amsterdam,  the  Netherlands, 
August  1-6.  Thousands  of  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses and  other  Bible-loving  persons  of 
good  will  are  planning  to  attend  these  as- 
semblies. Jehovah's  witnesses  would  like 
to  invite  you  to  be  present.  Prove  to  your- 
self that  they  are  persons  who  are  really 
pursuing  peace — yes,  that  they  are  per- 
sons who  have  actually  found  it! 


SEVEN  YEARS  WITHOUT  WATER 


•$  In  The  Voice  of  the  Desert  Joseph  Wood 
Krutch  discusses  plants  that  can  go  a  long 
time  without  water;  his  candidate  for  first 
prize  is  not  the  barrel  cactus  but  a  plant  that 
stores  little  water.  "Wander  down  into  the 
driest  desert  region  in  northern  Sonora,  Mexi- 
co," he  writes,  "and  you  are  likely  to  find  lying 
about  under  thorny  bushes  certain  amorphous 
masses  of  grayish  wood  eight  inches  or  more 
in  diameter.  They  look  rather  like  a  gnarled 
bur  from  some  old  apple  tree;  they  have  nei- 
ther roots  nor  stems,  and  they  seem  about  as 
dead  as  anything  could  be.  Pick  one  up  and 
you  will  find  it  heavy  as  well  as  dry,  and 
quite  hard— as  little  like  a  living  plant  as 
anything  you  can  imagine, 
•g  "This,  however,  is  the  resting  stage  of 
Ibervillea  sonorae,  a  member  of  the  gourd 
family.  Sometime  towards  the  end  of  May, 
it  comes  to  life  by  sending  out  a  few  shoots 

JANUARY  22,  1961 


upward  and  a  few  roots  downward. . . .  Sono- 
ra's  one  season  of  scanty  rainfall  is  about  due 
and  ...  it  must  be  prepared  to  take  advantage 
of  it.  If  the  rain  does  come,  flowers  and  fruits 
appear  before  the  whole  thing  dries  up  again 
into  a  state  of  suspended  animation  which 
seems  almost  as  complete  as  that  of  a  seed. 
At  best,  Ibervillea  is  not  much  to  look  at:  a 
few  straggling  stems,  small  yellow  flowers 
and,  finally,  a  small  berry-like  fruit  rather 
like  a  small,  soft  gourd, . . . 
'g  "Some  years  ago  a  specimen  of  Ibervillea 
was  placed  on  exhibition  in  a  glass  case  at 
the  New  York  Botanical  Garden.  There  was 
no  intention  to  have  it  grow,  but  it  showed 
what  it  is  capable  of.  For  seven  years,  without 
soil  or  water,  simply  lying  in  the  case,  it  put 
forth  a  few  anticipatory  shoots  and  then, 
when  no  rainy  season  arrived,  dried  up  again, 
hoping  for  better  luck  next  year." 

15 


A  FIERY  debate  rocked  the  Caribbean 
island  of  Puerto  Rico  in  1960,  from 
the  month  of  May  down  to  election  day,  No- 
vember 8.  The  Roman  Catholic  clergy  were 
on  one  side;  government  and  educational 
officials  were  on  the 
other.  The  voice  of  tfc 
public  added  tajllie 
clamor.  It  was  mr ver- 
bal war,  and  Jthe  ti- 
rades fired  raig  around  the 


world. 


1. 

The  clergy  cnjgpped  their 
bombshell  on  the 
ber  23;  this  was  a  pastoral 
letter  read  by  the  priests  in 
all  the  island's  Catholi 
churches.  The  letter  prohi 
ed  Roman  Catholics,  said 
make  up  about  90  percent 
the  island's  population,  from  vo 
the  Popular  Party  of  Governor  Mufii 
Marin.  The  reaction  was  immediate 

Some  parishioners  walked  out  of 
churches  when  the  pastoral  letter 
read.  When  the  governor's  wife  walk' 
out  of  the  church  in  Arecibo,  the  pries- 
shouted:  "Get  out,  all  those  who  wish;  yoi 
are  not  needed  in  this  church."  Priests,  in 
a  few  instances,  were  booed;  and  for  the 
first  time  in  history  the  San  Juan  diocese 
and  the  old  cathedral  in  San  Juan  were 
picketed — by  protesters  of  the  pastoral 
letter. 

Governor  Marin  denounced  the  pastoral 
letter  as  an  "incredible  medieval  interfer- 
ence in  a  political  campaign,"  adding:  "I 
could  never  believe  that  in  a  modern  com- 
munity like  Puerto  Rico,  so  closely  asso- 
ciated with  the  United  States,  such  an  in- 
credible position  could  be  taken." 

An  Old  Dispute 

What  is  the  story  behind  this  clerical 
plunge  into  Puerto  Rican  politics?  There 
has  long  been  a  quarrel  between  the  Cath- 

16 


mm 


olic  church  and  the  party  in  power,  the 
Partido  Popular  (Popular  Party)  of  Gov- 
ernor Luis  Muhoz  Marin.  For  one  thing, 
the  governor's  predecessors  had  instituted 
birth-contcoLi^inics,  and  these  the  gover- 
or  has  continued,  to  the 
sgruntlement  of  the 
tholic  clergy. 
Back  in  1951  Puerto 
ico  was  drawing  up  its 
own  constitution  under 
its  new  status  as  a  Com- 
onwealth  of  the  United 
ates.  The  Organic  Act, 
ich  the  new  Constitu- 
tion would  replace,  con- 
tained a  clause  in  its  Bill 
of  Rights  that  stated: 
1  "Never  will  public  mon- 
ey or  property  be  as- 
signed, applied,  donated, 
[or]  used,  directly  or  indi- 
rectly, for  the  use,  benefit, 
or  support  of  any  priest, 
preacher,  minister  or  other 
religious  instructor."  This  "clause  19"  be- 
came a  focal  point  of  battle. 

Bishop  McManus  of  Ponce  called  the 
clause  "a  blot  on  our  constitution."  Mon- 
signor  Vasallo  of  the  San  Juan  diocese 
added:  "If  our  demands  are  not  taken  into 
account  then  we  will  have  to  declare  war 
against  a  constitution  that  is  unjust  and 
humiliating  for  the  purposes  of  the  Church 
in  Puerto  Rico." 

The  Constitutional  Assembly  drew  up 
the  new  constitution  with  the  disputed 
clause  removed;  and  the  people,  on  March 
3,  1952,  voted  approval  of  the  new  consti- 
tution. The  Catholic  clergy  were  exultant 
over  the  extinction  of  clause  19,  but  two 
phrases  in  the  new  constitution  disturbed 
them:  (1)  "There  will  be  complete  separa- 
tion of  the  church  and  the  state"  and 
(2)  "There  will  be  a  system  of  public  in- 
struction .  .  .  entirely  nonsectarian." 

AWAKE! 


By  "Awofc.l" 
corrtiponcUnt 
In  Puarto  Rico 


Puerto  Rico's  public  school  system  thus 
came  under  attack  by  the  clergy.  The  di- 
rector of  the  Catholic  University  Center 
called  the  public  school  system  "completely 
atheistic."  A  bishop  called  the  school  sys- 
tem "antidemocratic  and,  in  addition,  anti- 
religious." 

Bishop  McManus  of  Ponce  rapidly  be- 
came a  leading  figure  in  the  1952  pre- 
election campaign.  He  condemned  educa- 
tion without  religion  and  the  distribution 
of  birth-control  information.  He  urged  25,- 
000  Holy  Name  Society  members  not  to 
"vote  blindly."  He  urged  "Christian  poli- 
tics against  lay  politics." 

As  the  campaign  progressed,  the  pro- 
moters of  clerical  politics  published  a  book- 
let declaring  three  of  the  four  candidates 
for  governorship  unacceptable,  leaving  the 
Independence  Party  candidate  as  the  only 
one  open  for  the  Catholic  vote.  To  those 
in  doubt  as  to  how  to  vote  the  counsel  was: 
"Ask  your  parish  priest." 

But  when  the  Puerto  Rican  people  went 
to  the  polls,  the  Church-approved  candi- 
date lost;  and  Governor  Marin  and  his  Pop- 
ular Party  won  by  an  overwhelming  ma- 
jority. 

In  the  spring  of  1960,  a  bill  was  present- 
ed before  the  Puerto  Rican  legislature 
providing  for  "released  time,"  an  arrange- 
ment whereby  children  might  receive  reli- 
gious instruction  on  school  time.  Attempts 
to  pass  such  a  bill  had  failed  in  years  past. 
The  clergy  concentrated  their  efforts  to 
push  this  bill  through.  On  May  22  a  re- 
ported 100,000  Catholics  gathered  before 
the  capitol  building  in  San  Juan  to  hear  the 
bishops  urge  them  to  insist  that  the  "re- 
leased time"  bill  be  passed.  The  crowd  also 
heard  the  bishops  warn  the  legislators  that 
if  the  bill  were  not  passed  they  would  not 
get  the  Catholic  vote  in  the  coming  No- 
vember elections. 

The  legislators  decided  to  "table"  the 
bill,  and  it  died.  The  bishops  now  declared 


war  on  the  Popular  Party  and  its  head 
Governor  Marin. 

Promoting  the  Catholic  Party 

The  bishops'  next  major  move  was  their 
approval  for  the  formation  of  a  Catholic 
political  party,  to  be  called  Partido  Accidn 
Cristiana  (Christian  Action  Party).  In  a 
joint  pastoral  letter  Bishops  Davis  and 
McManus  urged  the  people  to  support  the 
party's  registration  and  thus  "purify  and 
Christianize  public  and  private  life." 

A  wave  of  protest  came  from  all  sides, 
and  columns  in  newspapers  began  to  fill  up 
with  letters  approving  and  condemning  the 
clergy's  action.  In  answering  the  critics, 
Monsignor  Grovas  cited  the  Vatican  news- 
paper L'Osservatore  Romano  of  May  18: 
"The  church  cannot  be  agnostic  (or  indif- 
ferent), particularly  when  politics  touches 
the  altar,  as  Pius  XI  said.  It  is,  then,  its 
duty  and  its  right  to  intervene  even  in  this 
field." 

On  July  4  government  officials  publicly 
denounced  the  clergy's  actions,  and  Gov- 
ernor Munoz  Marin,  though  brought  up  a 
Catholic  himself,  warned  the  people:  "If 
the  prelates  and  priests  were  to  be  accord- 
ed the  right  to  be  obeyed  in  civil  life,  the 
vote,  the  legislature,  all  the  democratic  or- 
gans, including  the  Press,  would  be  super- 
fluous, and  freedom  would  be  dead." — El 
Mundo,  July  5, 1960. 

Undaunted,  the  bishops  continued  their 
campaign.  They  instructed  the  priests  to 
aid  in  registering  members  of  the  new 
party.  The  bishops  even  said  that  the  use 
of  Church  property  for  this  purpose  was 
permissible. 

A  report  from  Sabana  Grande,  in  El 
Mundo  of  July  18,  said  that  the  local  priest, 
Bias  Steffany,  arranged  for  a  talk  in  the 
City  Hall  and  that  he  went  to  the  public 
plaza  to  recruit  listeners.  On  returning  to 
the  City  Hall,  he  entered  the  headquarters 
of  the  Popular  Party  and  invited  the  men 


JANUARY  28,  1961 


17 


seated  there  to  his  talk.  One  of  them  asked 
the  priest  if  his  talk  would  be  on  religion 
or  on  politics.  The  priest  became  irritated, 
and  some  of  the  men  said:  "Lefs  get  out 
of  here;  remember  the  Inquisition."  A 
heated  argument  ensued  and  calls  of  "abajo 
los  euros"  ("down  with  the  priests")  were 
heard.  Finally  the  assistant  priests  had  to 
come  and  pull  priest  Steffany  out  of  the 
crowd  that  had  gathered. 

The  Catholic  party  was  registered;  it 
chose  the  Catholic  colors  of  yellow  and 
white  and  selected  as  its  party  insignia  a 
rosary  with  a  papal  emblem  inside.  Typical 
of  its  meetings  was  one  held  in  the  moun- 
tain town  of  Barranquitas.  At  5  a.m.  a  re- 
ported one  thousand  persons  gathered  on 
a  hill,  arid  the  meeting  began  with  cries 
such  as  "Viva  the  Most  Holy  Virgin"  and 
"Viva  the  Pope."  Similarly  extolled  was 
the  Catholic  political  party.  Then  came  the 
saying  of  the  rosary.  Afterward  the  group 
attended  mass  in  the  local  church. 

Election  day  was  drawing  near;  and  it 
was  now  that  the  bishops  dropped  their 
bombshell,  the  pastoral  letter  forbidding 
Catholics  to  vote  for  the  governor  and  his 
Popular  Party.  The  pastoral  letter  said, 
among  other  things:  "As  the  bishops  of 
Puerto  Rico  ,  , .  ,  we  are  interested  in  and 
are  concerned  about  the  chapter  of  the  of- 
ficial platform  [of  the  governor's  party] 
which  is  entitled  'Religion  and  Politics.' 
This  section  starts  by  saying:  'We  are  pro- 
foundly concerned  about  the  intent  to  mix 
religion  and  politics.  . . .  Clericalism  is  not 
the  noble  performance  of  the  functions  of 
the  religious  services.  .  .  .  Clericalism  is 
the  intervention  of  the  clergy  in  politics.' 
We  see  in  this  part  of  the  [party]  platform 
an  antidemocratic  attempt  to  limit  the 
clergy  solely  to  the  religious  functions." 

No  Open  Contradiction  of  Letter 

Coming  as  it  did  at  a  crucial  point  in 
the  election  campaign  in  the  United  States, 


the  pastoral  letter  produced  front-page 
news  for  many  continental  United  States 
newspapers.  Democratic  candidate  for  the 
United  States  presidency,  John  F.  Ken- 
nedy, had  been  working  hard  to  counter 
charges  that  the  Catholic  church  believes 
it  has  a  right  to  tell  its  members  how  to 
vote  and  its  adherents  what  to  do  in  office. 
Kennedy's  political  camp  worriedly  sought 
advice  from  Roman  Catholic  theologians, 
only  to  learn  that  no  Roman  Catholic  prel- 
ate in  the  United  States  would  be  likely 
to  issue  an  open  contradiction  to  the  Puer- 
to Rican  bishdps'  pastoral  letter. 

Thus  Richard  Cardinal  Cushing  of  John 
Kennedy's  home  state  of  Massachusetts  did 
not  contradict  the  letter  but  merely  said: 
"It  is  totally  out  of  step  with  the  Ameri- 
can tradition  for  ecclesiastical  authority 
here  to  dictate  the  political  voting  of  citi- 
zens." Cardinal  Cushing  did  not  say,  how- 
ever, that  it  would  be  "totally  out  of  step" 
with  the  Roman  Catholic  tradition. 

Though  Catholic  prelates  in  the  United 
States  were  cautious  in ;  their  remarks, 
there  were  some  forthright  comments, 
such  as  that  expressed  by  The  Tablet,  of- 
ficial publication  of  the  Catholic  diocese  of 
Brooklyn,  New  York,  which  said  that  the 
bishops  "are  definitely  within  their  rights 
in  advising  Catholics  of  their  diocese  not 
to  vote  for  the  Popular  Democratic  candi- 
dates." 

Governor  Mufioz  Marin  declared  that  he 
would  take  up  the  bishops'  action  with 
Vatican  officials.  It  did  not  appear  that  he 
would  get  much  help  from  the  Vatican.  A 
guarded  statement  from  the  Vatican  said 
that  Puerto  Rico's  bishops  were  within 
their  episcopal  authority  in  forbidding 
church  members  to  vote  for  the  governor, 
stressing  that  the  bishops'  action  was  re- 
stricted to  Puerto  Rico  and  to  the  "particu- 
lar and  special  conditions  of  that  island 
itself." 


18 


AWAKE! 


And  campaigning  prelates  and  priests 
were  busy  citing  Popes  Leo  XIII,  Pius  X, 
Pius  XI  and  John  XXIII  to  show  that  the 
Church  has  the  right  to  insist  on  obedience 

in  public  life. 

The  Election  and  Clerical  Contusion 

The  election  campaign  neared  its  climax, 
and  full-page  advertisements  appeared  in 
newspapers  urging  the  people  to  vote  for 
the  Catholic  party.  The  messages  were 
printed  against  a  variety  of  backgrounds, 
such  as  enormous  pictures  of  the  virgin 
Mary,  St.  Peter's  Basilica  and  Pope  John 
XXIII. 

A  second  pastoral  letter  was  read  in  the 
churches  on  October  30,  the  bishops  stress- 
ing that  failure  to  heed  their  previous  let- 
ter would  indeed  be  "a  sin." 

Election  day,  November  8,  arrived.  A 
record  number  of  voters  went  to  the  polls. 
That  night  the  count  showed  that  the  gov- 
ernor and  his  party  had  won  all  but  three 
of  the  island's  over  seventy  municipalities 
and  had  received  some  100,000  more  votes 
than  the  other  three  parties  combined.  The 
governor  received  58  percent  of  the  vote 
from  the  predominant  Catholic  electorate. 
The  Catholic  party  received  only  about  6 
percent  of  the  total  vote. 

Clerical  confusion  followed.  Catholics 
who  voted  for  the  governor  wondered  if 
they  had  sinned.  The  woman  mayor  of  San 
Juan  who  campaigned  for  the  governor 
was  ordered  to  do  public  penance  before 
she  could  receive  communion.  "As  it  now 
stands,"  said  the  San  Juan  Star,  "the  faith- 
ful do  not  know  whether  violation  of  the 
Pastoral  urging  is  a  sin,  whether  they  will 
burn  in  hell,  simmer  in  purgatory,  rot  in 
limbo  or  float  upwards,  unblemished."  Lat- 


er, while  attending  a  church  meeting  in 
Chicago,  the  archbishop  of  San  Juan  sent 
word:  "To  all  is  extended  the  pardon  they 
desire." 

important  Questions 

What  does  it  all  mean?  Was  it  a  wild 
crusade  embarked  on  by  a  few  impetuous 
bishops?  Or  was  it  a  revealing  position  of 
the  basic  tenets  and  true  aims  of  the  Cath- 
olic church?  Comments  by  various  Catho- 
lic authorities,  already  mentioned,  give  the 
answer.  In  the  United  States  and  other 
countries  where  its  members  are  in  the 
minority,  the  Catholic  church  professes  be- 
lief in  tolerance  and  freedom  of  worship. 
It  denies  interest  in  exercising  control  over 
political  officials  and  educational  systems. 
But  as  events  in  Puerto  Rico  and  other 
countries  such  as  Spain  show,  the  Church 
operates  under  a  double  set  of  standards, 
and  it  practices  a  chameleonlike  change- 
ableness  according  to  the  conditions  of  the 
country. 

Of  greatest  importance  is  the  question: 
Does  the  practice  of  priests  in  politics  re- 
flect the  pure  Christian  example  of  God's 
Son?  Jesus  Christ  said  of  his  true  follow- 
ers: "They  are  no  part  of  the  world  just 
as  I  am  no  part  of  the  world."  (John  17: 
16)  Just  as  a  man's  wading  into  a  mudhole 
to  wash  a  pig  would  not  result  in  a  clean 
pig  but  would  make  the  man  dirty,  so 
priests  in  politics  will  never  make  the 
world  Christian  but  it  does  make  the 
priests  and  the  church  they  represent 
worldly.  "The  form  of  worship  that  is 
clean  and  undefined  from  the  standpoint  of 
our  God  and  Father,"  says  the  Holy  Bible, 
is  "to  keep  oneself  without  spot  from  the 
world."— Jas.  1:27. 


JANUARY  22,  1967 


19 


Having  Labj 


THC 

MALAYAN 
WAY 


entrails,  a  vampire  that  sucks  the  blood  of 
the  victim.  When  a  woman  dies  in  child- 
birth, eggs  will  be  placed  under  her  arm- 
pits and  needles  in  her  palms,  in  the  super- 
stitious belief  that  she  will  not 
be  able  to  fly  and  thus  become 
a  vampire. 


»V  "AWAKB"  COtWWONDOff  IN  MAtAYA 

THE  Malays  have  a  tremendous  fondness 
for  children,  and  perhaps  nothing  em- 
phasizes better  the  hold  that  their  old- 
world  customs  have  upon  them  than  their 
common  saying,  "Biar  mati  andk,  jangan 
mati  adat,"  which  means  "Let  the  child 
die,  but  not  the  custom." 

Among  the  strange  customs  are  those 
pertaining  to  the  period  of  pregnancy  and 
childbirth,  which  is  believed  to  be  a  time 
of  increased  activity  of  evil  spirits,  a  time 
of  great  hazard.  From  the  time  of  concep- 
tion, an  expectant  Malay  mother  will  thus 
take  precautions  to  avert  imaginary  dan- 
gers to  herself  and  her  unborn  child. 

The  spirit  most  feared  in  connection  with 
pregnancy  is  the  "Pontianak,"  supposedly 
the  ghost  of  a  stillborn  child.  The  shape  of 
this  spirit  is  thought  to  be  a  vampire  that 
claws  into  the  belly  and  kills  the  woman 
and  infant.  Another  vampire  is  said  to 
be  the  "Langsuyar,"  a  beautiful  woman 
whose  long  hair  conceals  an  aperture  in 
the  back  through  which  the  internal  or- 
gans may  be  seen.  The  "Langsuyar"  is 
commonly  held  to  be  the  spirit  of  a  woman, 
sometimes  unchaste,  who  died  in  child- 
birth. Not  to  be  overlooked  is  the  "Penang- 
galan,"  viewed  as  a  human  head  with  long 

20 


Childbirth  Superstitions 

A  Malay  woman  during  preg- 
nancy will  wear  an  iron  nail  in  her  hair  or 
carry  a  sharp  instrument  such  as  a  knife 
or  a  pair  of  scissors,  in  the  belief  that  these 
spirits  of  the  dead  will  flee  at  the  sight  of 
iron  or  sharp  metal  objects.  Another  re- 
pellent used  is  lime  juice,  which  the 
mother-tc-be  applies  to  herself. 

Weather  conditions,  together  with  lunar 
and  solar  eclipses,  are  given  considerable 
regard,  A  pregnant  woman  must  not  ven- 
ture out  in  hot  rain  or  yellow  sunset,  as 
these  are  times  when  spirits  are  supposed 
to  become  very  active.  Various  rituals  are 
carried  out  if  there  is  an  eclipse  of  the 
moon.  In  the  State  of  Perak,  during  an 
eclipse  of  the  moon,  it  is  common  for  the 
woman  to  be  taken  into  the  kitchen  and 
placed  beneath  a  shelf  where  the  domestic 
utensils  are  kept.  She  will  be  given  a 
Malay-made  wooden  rice  spoon  to  hold 
and  must  remain  there  until  the  eclipse 
passes.  The  spoon  is  supposed  to  ward  off 
the  spirits.  In  the  case  of  an  eclipse  of  the 
sun,  the  mother  must  bathe  beneath  the 
house  in  order  that  her  child  will  not  be 
born  half  black  and  half  white. 

A  father,  too,  takes  certain  precautions 
to  safeguard  his  wife  and  unborn  child. 
During  the  first  three  months  of  his  wife's 
pregnancy  he  takes  special  care  in  his 
treatment  of  birds  and  fish.  According  to 
the  superstition,  if  he  were  to  lame  a  bird 
or  accidentally  slit  the  mouth  of  a  fish  in 
removing  the  hook,  retaliation  could  result 
to  his  child  by  its  being  born  lame  or  with 
a  harelip.  Homeward  bound,  a  f  ather-to-be 

AWAKE! 


would  likely  take  a  roundabout  way,  so  as 
to  lose  any  trailing  spirit. 

When  the  time  comes  for  the  birth,  the 
local  pawang  or  wizard  will  select  the  place 
for  the  birth  by  dropping  a  sharp-pointed 
object  and  marking  the  first  place  where 
it  lands.  There  the  birth  must  occur.  At 
that  point  the  bidan  or  midwife,  who  is 
given  great  respect  in  the  community, 
takes  over,  and  her  word  becomes  law. 

The  selected  place  of  birth  will  be  sur- 
rounded with  thorns  and  thorny  leaves  and 
bitter  herbs;  the  thorns  to  scare  off  the 
vampire  who  will  be  afraid  to  entangle  her 
entrails  thereon,  the  bitter  herbs  because 
they  are  unpalatable.  Nets  will  be  hung 
about  the  house  because  the  complexity  of 
them  is  bound  to  confuse  the  spirits.  Palm 
leaves  are  plaited  and  dressed  as  dolls  to 
divert  the  attention  of  the  evil  eye  from 
the  baby.  Perforated  coconuts  will  be  hung 
in  the  doorway,  in  the  belief  that  the  mul- 
tiplicity of  entrances  and  exits  will  mis- 
direct the  spirits.  Never  to  be  forgotten  is 
the  placing  of  iron  nails  between  the  sheets 
or  under  the  childbed. 

Long  labor  is  attributed  to  the  wife's 
sins  against  her  husband  and  can  include 
the  act  of  adultery.  It  can  be  easily  seen 
how  such  superstition  can  cast  doubt  on 
the  good  morals  of  a  woman  and  bring 
suspicion  and  unhappiness  to  the  home. 

To  protect  the  newborn  infant  from  spir- 
its that  are  believed  to  cause  disease,  the 
midwife  will  take  a  mixture  of  betel  juice, 
areca  nut  juice  and  oil  in  her  mouth  and 
spit  on  the  baby.  She  will  also  give  the 
child  a  name,  which  will  be  permanent  only 
in  the  event  that  misfortune,  such  as  illness, 
does  not  come  upon  it.  In  that  case  the  child 
must  be  renamed  to  mislead  the  spirits. 
After  the  cord  is  cut,  the  child  is  washed 
in  cold  water  and  wrapped  in  a  black  cloth 
to  ward  off  evil  spirits. 

If  a  boy  is  born  in  a  caul,  a  membrane 
sometimes  enclosing  a  child  at  birth,  it  is 

JANUARY  SB,  1961 


a  good  omen.  Probably  because  it  is  re- 
puted that  one  born  in  a  caul  can  attain 
a  hardness  of  body  which  will  make  him 
impenetrable  to  weapons  and,  upon  death, 
to  decay.  The  caul  is  preserved  and  may 
be  ceremonially  disposed  of.  In  royal  births 
it  is  anointed  with  gold  dust  or  cut  across 
a  gold  ring  to  symbolize  power. 

If  a  boy  resembles  his  father,  it  is  a 
cause  of  consternation.  Malays  believe  in 
reincarnation,  and  this  resemblance  is  an 
indication  that  the  vital  spark  is  about  to 
leave  either  the  father  or  son.  The  child's 
ear  is  immediately  pierced  to  distinguish 
him  from  the  father.  Conversely,  if  a  male 
child  resembles  his  mother  and  a  female 
the  father,  it  is  considered  a  good  omen. 

To  determine  the  future  prosperity  of 
the  child,  it  will  be  placed  on  a  brass  or 
tin  tray  on  which  are  weighed  an  amount 
of  rice,  seven  cloths  and  an  iron  nail.  Each 
day  one  cloth  is  removed,  and  on  the  last 
day  the  rice  is  weighed  again.  If  there  is 
an  increase  in  weight,  it  is  thought  that 
the  child  will  be  prosperous. 

During  the  first  weeks,  the  child  is  still 
considered  to  be  in  particular  danger  from 
the  attacks  of  the  spirits,  so  he  will  be 
spat  on  morning  and  evening  and  his  bed 
will  be  smeared  with  sacrificial  rice.  These 
and  many  more  customs  are  carried  out 
by  the  Malays  to  carry  them  safely 
through  the  period  around  childbirth. 

Chinese  and  Indian  Superstitions 

The  Malays  make  up  about  40  percent 
of  this  country's  population;  of  the  remain- 
der, about  38  percent  are  Chinese  and 
about  11  percent  are  Indians.  The  Chinese 
have  absorbed  some  of  the  superstitious 
practices  of  the  Malays  and  hold  many  in 
their  own  right.  When  a  Chinese  baby  is 
one  month  old,  he  must  be  given  a  taste 
of  whatever  food  is  cooked  in  the  home 
that  day  so  that  when  he  grows  up  he  will 

21 


have  a  strong  stomach  and  be  able  to  take 
all  kinds  of  foods.  On  that  day,  too,  he 
must  be  taken  outdoors  so  that  when  he 
grows  up  he  will  not  be  afraid  of  the  spir- 
its. Another  Chinese  custom  is  to  shave 
the  head  of  a  young  child  so  that  it  will 
not  gray  prematurely.  It  is  common  for  a 
Chinese  baby  to  have  one  of  its  ears 
pierced  immediately  after  birth  to  protect 
it  against  evil  spirits. 

The  Indian,  like 
her  Malay  sister,  may 
wear  a  sharp  nail  in 
her  hair  to  protect 
herself  and  her  un- 
born child  from  evil 
spirits.  In  addition 
she  may  wear  around 
her  neck  or  waist 
containers  enclosing 
prayers  or  perhaps 
a  bracelet  of  ginger 
on  her  wrist. 

Much  importance  is  attached  to  the 
physical  appearance  of  the  Indian  babe. 
From  his  birth  the  head  and  nose  bridge 
will  be  molded  to  give  them  good  shape. 
Arms  and  legs  will  be  stretched  for  good 
physique.  Soot  in  castor  oil  is  applied  to 
the  eyebrows  to  caUse  growth.  A  black  or 
silver  cord  tied  around  the  stomach  is  be- 
lieved to  protect  the  child  from  evil  spirits 
and  dangers,  and  it  is  not  uncommon  to 
see  a  little  dark-brown  body  running  about, 


COMING  IN  "AWAKE!" 

0  "How  Long  Were  the  Days  of  Creation?" 
The  answer  that  the  Bible  gives  will  both 
Increase  your  knowledge  and  strengthen 
your  faith.  Look  for  this  article* 
A  A  BUI  of  Rights  Tor  Canada!  Learn  how 
the  events  leading  up  to  the  enactment  of 
this  BUI  are  inextricably  entwined  with  the 
history  of  the  work  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
in  Canada.  Read  "Canada  Enacts  a  Bill  of 
Rights." 

Q  Should  older  people  who  enjoy  good 
health  and  desire  to  work  be  forced  to  re- 
t/re? How  do  older  workers  compare  wiih 
younger  workers?  Dbn't  miss  this  timely 
information. 

AH  in  the  next  issue! 


clad  only  in  a  black  cord  about  the  tummy. 
The  first  hair  of  an  Indian  baby  is  spoken 
of  as  "God's  hair"  and  must  be  cut  only 
by  a  priest  on  a  festival  day. 

Government  spokesmen  repeatedly  urge 
the  people  to  take  advantage  of  the  bene- 
fits of  modern  medicine.  Throughout  this 
country  are  to  be  found  many  medical  cen- 
ters and  hospitals  where  treatment  of  dis- 
ease can  be  obtained. 
However,  because  of 
the  many  supersti- 
tious beliefs  prevalent 
among  these  diverse 
peoples  that  sickness 
and  death  are  the  re- 
sult of  attacks  by 
spirits,  many  times 
modern  medical 
treatment  is  rejected 
in  favor  of  the  bo- 
mohs  or  local  medi- 
cine men  who  prac- 
tice the  magical  arts. 

Only  by  prayer  to  the  true  God,  Jehovah, 
and  by  complete  reliance  upon  his  Word, 
the  Holy  Bible,  may  one  find  protection 
from  the  real  evil  spirits,  the  demons  under 
their  leader  Satan  the  Devil.  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses in  Malaya  are  grateful  that  they  can 
participate  in  the  great  educational  work 
of  enlightening  human  minds,  freeing 
them  of  superstition  by  means  of  the  Word 
of  God. 


Overwhelmed 

•$>  Telling  of  the  many  magazines  published  for  doctors  these  days,  the  New 
York  Times  Magazine  of  June  7,  1959,  said:   "In  the  United  States  alone,  well 
over  1,000  journals  devoted  to  medicine  as  a  whole  or  to  its  various  branches  are 
published.  The  total  is  higher  still  if  journals  in  fields  related  to  medicine,  such 
as  physiology,  are  counted.  In  fact,  finding  journals  that  can  inform  him  of  new 
developments  is  not  the  doctor's  problem.  The  hard  part  is  choosing  which  journals 
to  read.  A  medical  editor  recently  pointed  out  that  if  a  surgeon  were  to  devote 
every  evening  in  the  month  to  reading  only  the  principal  journals  of  general 
surgery  in  the  English  language— all  containing  much  information  not  duplicated 
In  other  journals — he  could  not  get  through  one  month's  issues  before  the  next 
crop  descended  upon  him." 


22 


AWAKE! 


Thirteen-Year  Discrimination  Ends 


0MONG  the  provisions  made  in  a  democ- 
racy, such  as  the  United  States,  lor  the 
well-being  of  its  people  is  tax  exemption 
for  educational,  religious  and  like  philanthrop- 
ic institutions. 

Thus  the  policy  of  the  state  of  New  York 
from  an  early  day  has  been  "to  encourage, 
foster  and  protect  corporate  institutions  of 
religious  and  literary  character,  because  the 
religious,  moral  and  intellectual  culture  af- 
forded by  them  were  deemed,  as  they  are  in 
fact,  beneficial  to  the  public,  necessary  to  the 
advancement  of  civilization,  and  the  promo- 
tion of  the  welfare  of  society.  And,  therefore, 
those  institutions  have  been  relieved  from  the 
burden  of  taxation  by  statutory  exemption." 

Certainly  the  preaching  of  the  good  news 
of  God's  kingdom  by  Jehovah's  witnesses,  as 
foretold  at  Matthew  24:14,  comes  under  such 
provisions.  It  is  an  educational  work,  that 
of  teaching  the  people  the  truth  of  God's 
Word.  And  it  is  a  religious  work.  In  the 
truest  sense  of  the  word  theirs  is  a  philan- 
thropy, being  done  out  of  pfttKa  or  "affection" 
and  for  anthropos,  "man";  these  being  the 
two  Greek  roots  of  philanthropy. 

However,  the  message  Jehovah's  witnesses 
bring  or  the  manner  in  which  they  carry  on 
their  educational  and  religious  philanthropies 
does  not  please  certain  people,  for  the  Wit- 
nesses have  been  discriminated  against  time 
and  again.  An  instance  of  this  is  the  taxing 
of  their  Kingdom  Farm  property,  consisting 
of  797  acres  of  farmland  located  in  the  Town 
of  Lansing  near  Ithaca  in  upstate  New  York. 
While  exempting  the  school  located  at  King- 
dom Farm,  the  local  tax  assessors  have  stead- 
ily refused  to  recognize  the  farm  itself  as 
being  entitled  to  exemption,  although  its  pur- 
pose is  to  provide  food  to  feed  those  at  the 
school  and  other  ministers  serving  at  the 
headquarters  of  Jehovah's  witnesses  in  Brook- 
lyn. As  a  result  the  Witnesses  have  been 
paying  town,  school,  county  and  state  taxes 
on  this  farm  for  the  past  thirteen  years. 

Repeatedly,  Jehovah's  witnesses  have 
sought  relief  from  this  unjust  taxation,  but 
to  no  avail.  Among  the  ostensible  reasons 
given  for  denying  Kingdom  Farm  tax  exemp- 
tion was  that  the  ministers  of  Jehovah  serving 
there  had  not  spent  four  years  at  some  theo- 
logical seminary,  that  they  preached  paf"t 
time  and  that  they  received  contributions  for 

JANUARY  22,  1961 


the  literature  they  placed  with  the  people. 
Another  was  that  not  all  the  produce  was 
consumed  by  the  ministers,  a  small  surplus 
of  5  or  more  percent  being  sold  annually. 
Another  was  that  the  farm  itself  was  not  a 
part  of  the  educational  or  religious  activities 
of  the  Witnesses  but  was  merely  used  to 
provide  food  for  them.  And,  further,  it  was 
even  argued  that  for  the  farm  to  be  tax 
exempt  it  would  have  to  be  located  on  the 
same  parcel  of  land  on  which  stood  the  head- 
quarters buildings. 

All  such  befuddled  thinking  on  the  part 
of  the  counsel  for  the  Town  of  Lansing  tax 
assessors  certainly  betrayed  a  lack  of  ob- 
jectivity, and  may  well  raise  questions  as  to 
what  the  motives  were  that  prompted  such 
reasoning.  But  whatever  they  were,  they  were 
frustrated,  for  the  New  York  State  Court  of 
Appeals  in  Albany,  on  November  17,  I960, 
reversed  the  decisions  of  the  lower  courts, 
which  had  upheld  the  tax  assessors  of  the 
Town  of  Lansing  in  their  rulings. 

The  Appeals  Court  quoted  liberally  from 
legal  precedents  to  show  that  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses are  indeed  ministers  and  that  the 
Kingdom  Farm  is  not  subject  to  taxation. 
Tax  exemption,  it  pointed  out,  covered  "any 
society  'whose  organization  and  object  should 
be  of  the  benevolent,  charitable  or  missionary 
character  falling  within  the  general  term 
"religious"  as  contrary  and  distinguished  from 
private  and  secular  institutions.'  This  will 
serve  as  an  answer,"  the  Court  went  on  to 
say,  "to  the  argument  made  or  suggested 
here  that  the  somewhat  rudimentary  train- 
ing of  these  Witnesses  and  the  unorthodox 
character  of  their  religious  beliefs  and  prac- 
tices somehow  removes  them  from  the  benef- 
icent aim  and  coverage  of  this  statute."  The 
Court  also  quoted  from  other  decisions  to 
show  that  the  rest  of  the  arguments  used  to 
deny  tax  exemption  to  Kingdom  Farm  were 
likewise' invalid. 

This  fight  against  tax  discrimination  was 
not  fought  for  any  selfish  purpose  but  in 
order  that  all  the  contributions  made  by  Je- 
hovah's witnesses  might  be  used  in  preaching 
the  good  news  of  God's  kingdom.  This  court 
battle  therefore  was  part  of  the  campaign 
for  "defending  and  legally  establishing  .  .  . 
the  good  news,"  first  begun  by  the  apostle 
Paul  some  nineteen  centuries  ago. — Phil.  1:7. 

23 


Zke  fascinating,  Versatile  fabric 


IN  THE  basement  of  the 
Fiberglas  center  on  Fifth 
Avenue  in  New  York  city,  a 
youilg  woman  was  complete- 
ly swept  away  by  what  she 
saw.  Before  her  were  glass  fab- 
rics that  never  need  dry  clean- 
ing or  ironing;  rot-proof, 
shrink-proof,  stretch-proof  fab- 
rics! Each  dazzling  display 
flashed  to  her  mind  countless 
Ways  in  which  bright  new  color 
and  life  could  be  brought  into 
her  home.  "I  expected  to  see 
just  a  very  limited  selection," 
she  confessed  modestly.  "But 
look  at  this.  It's  fabulous!"  Her 
eyes  flashed  from  row  to  row 
of  fabrics  in  colors,  designs  and 
textures  of  unbelievable  varie- 
ty. Elegant  prints,  sheer  boucWs 
and  marquisettes,  nubby 
weaves  and  airy  casements,  bright  sun- 
toned  solids — more  than  5,000  styles  to 
choose  from!  She  was  in  a  shopper's  para- 
dise! 

Not  far  away  stood  another  woman  deep 
in  thought,  as  she  weighed  the  matter  of 
taste  and  pocketbook.  "We  have  just 
bought  ourselves  a  new  house,"  she  said, 
"and,  of  course,  the  problem  of  decorating 
it  comes  up.  That's  why  I'm  here.  I  figure 
that  the  window  space  in  our  new  home 
will  take  at  least  thirty  yards  of  material 
just  for  the  drapes.  Between  $2  and  $7  a 
yard— that's  not  considering  what  it  will 
cost  to  make  them.  You  can  see  that  it 
will  run  into  a  considerable  sum,  even  at 
that."  But  she  was  pleased  with  the  ma- 
terial's practicability. 

Both  of  these  women,  along  with  thou- 
sands of  others,  admired  the  amazing  flexi- 

24 


FIBER 

CI  JMKLd 


bility  of  an  exciting,  relatively 
new  fabric — one  possessing 
properties  and  possibilities  far 
beyond  the  reach  of  its  pred- 
ecessors. Already  the  new- 
comer has  inspired  more  mag- 
nificent designs  and  treatments 
than  many  fabrics  have  in  their 
history!  Besides,  its  fiber  is  as 
light  as  a  feather  and  almost  as 
soft  as  silk.  You  can  light  a 
match  to  it  and  it  will  not  burn. 
You  can  soak  it  in  water  and  it 
will  not  shrink.  Tug  on  it  and  it 
will  not  stretch.  Hang  it  up  in  a 
wet,  dingy  basement  and  it  will 
not  rot  Expose  ft  even  to  the 
brightest  sunlight  and  it  will  not 
deteriorate — all  this  because  the 
fiber  is  100  percent  glass. 

No  one  really  knows  who  dis- 
covered glass,  but  it  is  almost 
certain  that  the  man  could  not  have  been 
aware  of  its  vast  versatility.  Today  men 
take  batches  of  sand,  limestone  and  other 
mineral  ingredients  and  melt  them  in  a 
furnace.  The  molten  glass  that  comes  out  is 
formed  into  various  items,  such  as  win- 
dows, bottles,  glasses,  marbles,  and  so 
forth. 

Experience  has  taught  us  that  ordinary 
window  glass  shatters  quite  easily  when 
struck  with  a  stone.  But  melt  the  broken 
pieces  down  and  draw  it  out  into  several 
hundred  miles  of  fiber.  The  threads  be- 
come almost  invisible  to  the  eye.  You  can 
wrap  them  around  your  finger  and  weave 
them  into  a  window  screen.  Now  throw  a 
stone  at  the  screen  and  see  what  happens. 
Aha!  This  time  the  glass  does  not  break! 
A  water  glass  is  easy  to  shatter,  but  try 
to  pull  one  apart.  It  is  the  ability  of  glass 
to  withstand  tremendous  pull  that  largely 

AWAKE! 


accounts  for  its  turning  up  In  unexpected 
places  as  fiber.  Just  as  your  windows  or 
drinking  glasses  will  not  stretch  or  shrink, 
rust,  rot  or  wrinkle,  so  neither  will  mate- 
rial or  fibers  made  of  glass. 

While  glass  fibers  are  mere  infants  in 
the  family  of  fibers — hardly  thirty  years 
old — still  the  job  performed  by  them  to 
date  has  been  man-size.  Commenting  on 
its  many  uses,  one  report  states:  "Inside 
attractively  sonofaced  'tiles'  for  ceilings, 
glass  fibers  sound-condition  rooms  by  ab- 
sorbing useless  reverberated  noises,  mak- 
ing the  sounds  we  want  to  hear  clearer  and 
more  pleasant.  Also  unseen  in  walls  and 
roof  s,  glass  fibers  insulate  homes  and  other 
buildings  against  heat  and  cold,  sharply 
cutting  costs  of  heating  and  air  condition- 
ing. Almost  all  home  wiring,  from  the  fuse 
box  to  the  wall  outlet  is  glass  fiber- 
insulated." 

Glass  in  Plastics 

This  is  hardly  a  beginning  to  the  fiber's 
versatility.  Perhaps  one  of  its  most  dra- 
matic displays  of  strength  is  in  the  field 
of  plastics.  Chairs,  for  example,  made  only 
of  plastic  are  as  brittle  as  window  glass. 
But  add  glass  fibers  in  the  plastic  and  the 
chair  becomes  stronger  than  steel,  pound 
for  pound.  Some  629  New  York  city  buses 
now  are  equipped  with  plastic  seats  rein- 
forced with  glass  fibers. 

The  aircraft  industry  soars  ahead  of 
others  in  the  use  of  glass-reinforced  plas- 
tics. Glass  and  plastics  practically  surround 
passengers  in  the  new  commercial  jets.  The 
nose  radome,  the  pilot's  foot  warmer,  the 
control  cables,  tables,  door  latches,  passen- 
ger seats,  cabin  ceilings,  and  a  host  of  other 
items  are  all  glass  reinforced.  Today,  glass 
fibers  go  into  battery  separator  plates,  pro- 
tective underground  and  above-ground  pipe 
wrap.  They  are  used  in  disposable  air  fil- 
ters and  insect  screening,  as  reinforcement 
for  structural  plastic  products,  industrial 
papers,  and  in  what  have  you, 

JANUARY  2S,  1961 


The  Flberglas  people  say  that  a  few 
years  ago  it  would  have  been  difficult 
to  imagine  boats  with  completely 
maintenance-free  hulls,  molded  in  one 
piece;  or  colored,  translucent  panels  that 
could  be  sawed  and  nailed  like  wood  to 
make  patio  roofs,  decorative  interior  par- 
titions or  skylights  that  absorb  infrared 
light;  but  they  are  realities  today  because 
of  glass.  Today  we  have  glass  fishing  rods, 
sleds,  skis,  crash  helmets  for  jet  pilots, 
bullet-proof  vests,  auto  bodies,  airplane 
parts  and  many  other  products.  "Put  glass 
fibers  in  paper,  and  a  few  strands  of  paper 
tape,  i-inch  wide,  can  lift  a  3,000-pound 
automobile.  Reinforced  paper  is  used  in- 
stead of  steel  bands  on  cartons,  as  dura- 
ble tarpaulins,  freight  car  coverings  and 
heavy-duty  packaging.'!  Now  these  power- 
ful fibers  are  being  turned  into  yarn  for 
beautifying  the  inside  of  the  home. 

Glass  into  Yarn 

Each  year  about  100,000,000  tiny  crystal 
balls,  approximately  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  in  diameter  are  remelted  into  molten 
glass.  In  these  pale-green  marbles  that  re- 
semble the  marbles  children  have  played 
with  for  centuries,  men  have  found  cloth, 
believe  it  or  not. 

The  molten  glass  is  driven  through  tiny 
holes  at  speeds  up  to  three  miles  a  minute. 
This  stretches  the  glass  liquid  into  long, 
thin  fibers.  The  fibers  are  about  one  three- 
hundredths  of  the  thickness  of  human 
hair!  Out  of  one  small  marble  alone  comes 
ninety-five  miles  of  filament.  The  filaments 
are  twisted  or  plied  together  and  the  glass 
yarn  is  ready  for  weaving.  The  weavers 
receive  the  yarn  and  handle  it  like  any 
other. 

The  fabric  is  often  so  soft  that  it  is  hard 
to  believe  that  it  is  glass.  Some  of  the  yarns 
are  shot  through  with  jet  streams  of  air 
to  blow  up  or  fluff  the  yarn  and  give  it  its 
bulk.  The  fabric  is  put  through  a  special 

25 


heat  treatment  at  1,200  degrees  Fahren- 
heit, a  process  known  as  "Coronizing." 
This  treatment  softens  the  woven  fabric 
and  gives  it  its  fluffiness  and  makes  it  feel 
like  cloth.  This  same  heat  treatment  makes 
the  fabric  permanently  wrinkle-proof  and 
does  away  with  the  backbreaking  job  of 
ironing. 

At  this  point  the  cloth  can  be  dyed  or 
printed  with  a  wide  range  of  designs,  styles 
and  colors.  Finally  the  material  is  baked 
at  320  degrees  Fahrenheit  to  set  the  color 
and  give  buyers  cloth  with  almost  perfect 
washability.  Since  each  fiber  is  made  from 
glass,  dirt  cannot  possibly  penetrate  it,  so 
the  material  is  as  washable  as  a  glass  or 
a  dish  and  just  about  as  durable. 

Curtains  and  Draperies 

Glass  fiber  draperies  and  curtains  have 
proved  especially  practical.  They  transmit 
sunlight  like  a  stained-glass  window  and, 
at  the  same  time,  are  soft  to  touch  and 
delicate  in  appearance.  They  are  also  easy 
to  maintain.  For  example,  when  the  time 
comes  to  take  the  curtains  or  drapes  down 
to  clean,  simply  dip  them  in  mild  soapy 
water  and  squeeze  the  material  to  free  the 
dirt  particles.  Since  the  dirt  remains  on  the 
surface  of  the  fabric,  a  mild  detergent  is 
all  that  is  necessary  to  loosen  the  dirt, 
without  the  aid  of  hot  water  or  rubbing. 
Then  merely  rinse  the  material  in  clear 
water  and  hang  it  up  to  dry,  or  roll  the 
curtain  up  in  a  towel  first  to  remove  ex- 
cess moisture,  then  hang  it  over  a  shower- 
curtain  rod  or  clothesline  to  dry. 

Fiber-glass  drapes  are  easier  to  clean 
than  blinds.  According  to  a  Los  Angeles 
newspaper,  the  supervisors  of  a  new  $24,- 
000,000  courthouse  figure  that  the  main- 
tenance cost  of  fiber-glass  drapery  instal- 
lations is  only  one  tenth  that  of  blinds. 
There  is  no  need  to  dry-clean  fiber-glass 
drapes.  However,  if  you  insist  on  having 
glass  draperies  cleaned  commercially,  then 

26 


ask  to  have  them  "wet-wasnecr  or  -wet- 
cleaned."  Request  that  they  be  treated  in 
the  same  manner  as  a  fine  woolen  blanket. 
The  danger  of  sending  glass  fabrics  out  to 
commercial  cleaners  is  that  the  solvents 
used  in  the  commercial  process  can  be 
harmful  to  dyes  in  the  fabric.  And,  too,  the 
tumbling  action  of  the  cleaning  process  can 
be  abrasive  in  nature.  For  the  same  reason, 
it  is  not  recommended  that  glass  fabrics  be 
washed  in  a  washing  machine. 

When  hanging  glass  draperies,  be  sure 
the  fabric  clears  the  floor,  ceiling  or  any 
projection,  such  as  window  sills  and  radi- 
ators. The  movement  on  a  traverse  rod  will 
not  damage  the  material.  Since  glass  fab- 
rics do  not  sun-rot  and  are  highly  fade- 
resistant,  there  is  no  need  to  have  them 
lined.  However,  if  you  choose  to  line  the 
cloth,  then  make  sure  the  lining  is  pre- 
shrunk  and  washable.  While  it  is  not  nec- 
essary to  use  weights  to  improve  the  ap- 
pearance of  glass  drapes,  yet  if  weights  are 
used,  see  that  they  are  relatively  light  and 
are  covered  with  cotton  or  similar  material. 

While  glass  fabrics  are  ideal  for  dra- 
peries, they  are  not  recommended  for  bed- 
spreads, tablecloths  or  upholstery  because 
of  the  possibility  of  abrasion. 

Of  course,  the  fabric  can  be  sewed.  But 
first  cut  off  a  practice  piece  and  run  it  into 
the  sewing  machine  several  times,  until 
you  find  the  proper  pressure  adjustment. 
Then  sew  with  ordinary  cotton  thread,  but 
with  a  sharp  needle  and  with  slightly  looser 
tensions  than  usual. 

As  you  reflect  upon  the  many  ways  glass 
is  used  today,  think  how  bountifully  God 
has  provided  for  man  the  resources  of  the 
earth,  even  "the  hidden  treasures  of  the 
sands."  (Deut.  33:19,  footnote)  Beyond 
Armageddon  in  God's  new  world,  an  eter- 
nity will  unlock  many  more  secrets  that 
will  move  man  to  glorify  God  for  making 
his  home  and  life  so  beautiful. — Ps.  115:16. 

AWAKE! 


EVER  since  the  end  of  World  War  n  the 
nations  of  earth  have  been  more  and 
more  sharply  dividing  themselves  into  two 
opposing  camps:  the  Eastern  and  the 
Western  bloc.  The  Eastern  bloc,  headed  by 
Soviet  Russia,  advocates  Marxist  commu- 
nism as  the  panacea  for  mankind's  politi- 
cal, economic  and  religious  ills.  The  West- 
ern bloc,  headed  by  the  United  States, 
recommends  its  own  political  ideologies 
and  gives  more  or  less  lip  service  to  reli- 
gion. The  East  refers  to  the  West  as  "capi- 
talist" and  the  West  says  that  the  East 
practices  "godless  communism."  Both  sides 
are  extremely  suspicious  of  each  other  and 
the  state  of  their  relations  is  that  of  a 
"cold  war." 

Because  each  side  feels  very  strongly 
about  its  ideology,  each  jumps  to  the  con- 
clusion that  any  who  disagree  with  them 
must  be  of  the  opposing  camp — a  tool  of 
the  capitalists  on  the  one  hand,  or  a  stooge 
of  the  Communists  on  the  other  hand.  Thus 
when  Jehovah's  witnesses  distributed  a 
special  issue  of  this  magazine  telling  about 
the  Roman  Catholic  Church  in  the  twen- 
tieth century,  many  irate  Roman  Catholics 
accused  them  of  being  Communists.  Like- 
wise, because  they  published  certain  facts 
regarding  the  designs  of  the  heads  of  the 
Eastern  bloc  they  were  accused  of  being 
capitalists. 

Obviously,  Jehovah's  witnesses  cannot 
be  both  Communist  and  capitalist  at  the 
same  time,  can  they?  But  they  can,  at  the 


same  time,  be  neither  Communist  or  capi- 
talist, but  something  entirely  different,  and 
that  is  exactly  the  case  with  them;  they 
are  100  percent  Christian. 

That  Christians  should  take  their  reli- 
gion so  seriously  as  to  set  themselves  apart 
from  the  rest  of  the  people  of  their  own 
nation  or  of  the  bloc  in  which  they  live 
seems  exceedingly  strange  to  those  about 
them.  Most  persons  professing  to  be  Chris- 
tians seem  to  have  no  difficulty  at  all  in 
reconciling  their  idea  of  Christianity  with 
their  political  ideology,  be  it  the  commu- 
nism of  the  East  or  the  capitalism  of  the 
West.  Why  not?  Apparently  because  they 
are  Christians  in  name  only.  They  ignore 
the  pattern  set  by  Jesus  Christ,  the  found- 
er of  Christianity,  and  the  example  of  his 
early  followers  as  recorded  in  the  Chris- 
tian Greek  Scriptures. 

When  Satan  the  Devil  offered  to  Jesus 
all  the  kingdoms  of  the  world,  at  the  end 
of  his  forty-day  fast  in  the  wilderness,  Je- 
sus rejected  the  offer.  When  his  own  peo- 
ple, the  Jews,  wanted  to  make  him  king 
by  force,  he  "withdrew  again  into  the 
mountain  all  alone."  He  was  not  at  all  in- 
terested in  political  rule.  And  when  he  was 
on  trial  before  Pontius  Pilate,  he  plainly 
told  that  Roman  governor  where  he  stood 
in  regard  to  the  governments  of  this  old 
world:  "My  kingdom  is  no  part  of  this 
world.  If  my  kingdom  were  part  of  this 
world,  my  attendants  would  have  fought 
that  I  should  not  be  delivered  up  to  the 
Jews.  But,  as  it  is,  my  kingdom  is  not  from 
this  source." — Matt.  4:9,  10;  John  6:15; 
18:36. 

Because  of  his  keeping  separate  from 
the  world  Jesus  was  hated,  and  so  will  his 
followers  be  if  they  follow  his  example. 
"You  will  be  hated  by  all  the  nations  on 
account  of  my  name,"  he  said.  "If  you  were 
part  of  the  world,  the  world  would  be  fond 
of  what  is  its  own.  Now  because  you  are 
no  part  of  the  world,  but  I  have  chosen 


JANUARY  22,  1961 


27 


you  out  of  the  world,  on  this  account  the 
world  hates  you."  And  regarding  his  fol- 
lowers he  said  in  prayer  to  his  heavenly 
Father:  "They  are  no  part  of  the  world 
just  as  I  am  no  part  of  the  world." — Matt. 
24:9;  John  15:19;  17:16. 

The  apostles  and  disciples  of  Jesus  fol- 
lowed his  example.  When  brought  before 
the  authorities,  Peter  and  the  other  apos- 
tles said:  "We  must  obey  God  as  ruler 
rather  than  men."  Why?  Because,  as  the 
apostle  Paul  wrote:  "As  for  us,  our  citizen- 
ship exists  in  the  heavens."  And  the  dis- 
ciple James  wrote:  "The  form  of  worship 
that  is  clean  and  undefiled  from  the  stand- 
point of  our  God  and  Father  is  this:  to 
care  for  orphans  and  widows  in  their  tribu- 
lation, and  to  keep  oneself  without  spot 
from  the  world."  And  again,  "Adulteresses, 
do  you  not  know  that  the  friendship  with 
the  world  is  enmity  with  God?  Whoever, 
therefore,  wants  to  be  a  friend  of  the  world 
is  constituting  himself  an  enemy  of  God." 
—Acts  5:29;  Phil.  3:20;  Jas.  1:27;  4:4. 

True  Christians  today  therefore  can  no 
more  take  sides  in  the  cold  war  between 
East  and  West  than  Jesus  and  his  disciples 
took  sides  in  the  political  strife  between 
the  Romans  and  the  Jews.  How  can  they 
when  they  have  their  own  heavenly  King, 
termed  in  the  Scriptures  the  "King  of  kings 
and  Lord  of  lords,"  and  their  own  heaven- 
ly government,  the  kingdom  of  God,  to 
which  they  owe  their  allegiance? — Rev. 
19:16. 

Concerning  their  King  and  kingdom  it 
was  long  ago  prophesied:  "For  there  has 
been  a  child  born  to  us,  there  has  been  a 
son  given  to  us,  and  the  princely  rule  will 
come  to  be  upon  his  shoulder.  And  his 
name  will  be  called  Wonderful  Counselor, 
Mighty  God,  Father  for  eternity,  Prince  of 
Peace.  To  the  abundance  of  the  princely 
rule  and  to  peace  there  will  be  no  end." 
That  is  why  Christians  pray,  "Let  your 


kingdom  come,"  and  why  they  make  the 
most  important  thing  in  their  lives  the  ad- 
vocating and  preaching,  not  of  the  ideology 
either  of  the  East  or  of  the  West,  but  of 
the  good  news  of  God's  kingdom. — Isa.  9: 
6,7;Matt.6:H);24:14. 

That  Christians  can  be  of  neither  the 
Eastern  or  the  Western  bloc  is  further  in- 
dicated by  their  being  likened  to  spiritual 
soldiers  engaged  in  a  spiritual  warfare: 
''As  a  right  kind  of  soldier  of  Christ  Jesus 
take  your  part  in  suffering  evil.  No  man 
serving  as  a  soldier  involves  himself  in  the 
commercial  businesses  of  life,  in  order  that 
he  may  meet  the  approval  of  the  one  who 
enrolled  him  as  a  soldier."  "For  the  weap- 
ons of  our  warfare  are  not  fleshly,  but 
powerful  by  God  for  overturning  strongly 
entrenched  things.  For  we  are  overturning 
reasonings  and  every  lofty  thing  raised  up 
against  the  knowledge  of  God,  and  we  are 
bringing  every  thought  into  captivity  to 
make  it  obedient  to  the  Christ."  Since  the 
ideologies  of  both  East  and  West  are  op- 
posed to  God's  kingdom,  a  Christian  sol- 
dier cannot  take  sides  with  either. — 2  Tim. 
2:3,4;2Cor.l0:4,5. 

While  thus  keeping  separate  from  the 
world,  Christians  must  fulfill  their  com- 
mission to  make  known  the  truth,  regard- 
ing both  the  blessings  of  God's  kingdom 
and  its  execution  of  the  wicked,  Jesus  said 
that  "he  that  is  not  on  my  side  is  against 
me,"  and  those  who  are  against  him  he 
will  dash  to  pieces  as  the  vessel  of  a  pot- 
ter.—Matt.  12:30;  Ps.  2:9. 

At  the  same  time  Christians  keep  them- 
selves informed  on  what  is  going  on  in  the 
world,  in  both  the  Eastern  and  the  West- 
ern bloc.  But  in  doing  this  they  do  not  take 
sides;  they  remain  objective.  They  at  all 
times  keep  themselves  clean  from  the 
world  by  remaining  100  percent  for  Jeho- 
vah God  and  his  kingdom  by  Christ 


28 


AWAKE! 


THI 


W®[^L© 


Coup  In  Ethiopia 
#  On  December  14  Emperor 
Haile  Selassie  I,  who  bears  the 
titles  of  King  of  Kings,  the 
conquering  Lion  of  Judah,  De- 
fender of  the  Christian  Faith 
and  the  Chosen  of  God,  found 
himself  without  a  kingdom. 
Haile  Selassie,  whose  name 
means  "the  Power  of  the  Holy 
Trinity,"  was  in  Brazil  at  the 
time  oh  a  state  visit.  However, 
a  few  days  later  he  was  back 
in  Ethiopia  and  still  emperor. 

Algeria  In  Turmoil 
<§>  President  Charles  de  Gaulle 
of  France  paid  a  visit  to  Al- 
geria December  9.  His  pres- 
ence there  set  off  wild  demon- 
strations. Fighting  that  lasted 
for  days  broke  out  between 
Moslems  and  European  set- 
tlers. The  death  toll  in  Algeria 
rose  to  124,  of  whom  116  were 
Moslems  and  eight  Europeans. 
On  December  13  De  Gaulle  re- 
turned to  Paris  more  deter- 
mined than  ever  to  push  ahead 
with  his  policy  of  autonomy 
and  then  self-determination  for 
Algeria. 

Canterbury  Talks  with  Pope 
<&  On  December  2  Geoffrey 
Fisher,  the  archbishop  of  Can- 
terbury, called  upon  Pope 
John  XXIII  in  Rome.  The  arch- 
bishop Was  the  first  head  of 
the  Anglican  Church  to  do  so 
since  before  the  Reformation. 
Dr.  Fisher  said :  "I  am  in  Rome 

JANUARY  St,  1961 


neither  to  boast  nor  to  com- 
plain, but  to  greet  Pope  John 
in  the  courtesy  of  Christian 
brotherhood."  The  talks,  which 
lasted  sixty-five  minutes,  were 
termed  "cordial." 

Priest  Heckler  Cleared 
•#>  Giuseppe  di  Bella  was 
charged  in  court  with  heckling 
a  Roman  Catholic  priest  dur- 
ing a  church  sermon  at  Tre- 
castagni.  A  Sicilian  court  dis- 
missed the  charges,  stating 
that  It  was  no  offense  to  heckle 
the  priest  if  he  was  talking 
politics.  Local  elections  were 
being  held  in  Sicily  at  the 
time  and  the  priest  appeared 
to  be  politicking  from  the  pul- 
pit. Giuseppe  reportedly  shout- 
ed: "Don't  hold  a  rally — get 
on  with  the  mass." 

Shortage  of  Ministers 
#  The  United  Church  Observ- 
er pointed  out  that  there  is 
a  "desperate"  shortage  of  min- 
isters in  the  United  Church  of 
Canada.  There  has  been  a 
steady  decline  in  the  number 
of  recruits  for  the  ministry  in 
the  past  three  years,  from  185 
to  166  to  120.  The  Observer 
described  the  present  shortage 
as  "frightening." 

Army  of  Volunteers 

<$■  The  end  of  British  military 
conscription  Is  In  sight.  The 
last  conscripts  have  received 
their  catting-up  papers.  By  the 


end  of  1962  these  men  will 
have  been  released  from  the 
army.  Then  the  army  will  be, 
for  the  first  time  in  21  years, 
made  up  entirely  of  volunteers. 
Since  June  3,  1939,  over  5,000,- 
000  men  have  been  conscripted. 
The  British  War  Office  stated 
that  it  will  have  to  manage 
on  an  army  of  165,000  men, 
which  appears  to  be  enough 
to  keep  the  NATO  commit- 
ments. 

Telephones  for  Italians 

#  About  $544,000,000  (340,000,- 
000,000  lire)  will  be  spent  in 
Italy  over  the  next  five  years 
to  bring  her  telephone  system 
up  to  Western  Europe's  stand- 
ards. Nine  out  of  each  100  in- 
habitants are  expected  to  have 
a  telephone  by  1963.  For  the 
first  time  the  telephone  will  be 
brought  in  to  hundreds  of  small 
villages. 

Snow  Cripples  New  York 

#>  From  Virginia  to  Nova  Sco- 
tia a  howling  blizzard  raged 
December  10.  When  it  hajted 
two  days  later,  from  seventeen 
to  twenty  inches  of  snow  had 
fallen  in  New  York  city  and 
along  the  Atlantic  coast  It 
was  the  heaviest  early-season 
snowfall  in  U.S.  Weather  Bu- 
reau records  for  the  area  and 
the  worst  snowstorm  in  thir- 
teen years.  Ten  thousand  men 
and  3,000  pieces  of  heavy  snow 
equipment  were  being  used  to 
clear  the  snow  from  New  York 
city's  6,045  miles  of  streets. 
The  death  toll  related  to  the 
storm  was  286  persons. 

Photos  of  First  A- Bomb 

#  With  the  reluctant  approval 
of  the  U.S.  State  Department, 
the  Atomic  Energy  Commis- 
sion, on  December  6,  released 
photographs  of  the  types  of 
bombs  that  .were  dropped  on 
Japan  in  World  War  II.  The 
uranium  bomb  that  was 
dropped  on  Hiroshima  on  Au- 
gust 6,  1945,  was  described  as 
28  inches  in  diameter,  120  in- 
ches long  and  about  9,000 
pounds  in  weight.  Whereas  the 

29 


Plutonium  bomb,  which  was  ex- 
ploded over  Nagasaki  three 
days  later,  was  60  inches  in 
diameter,  128  inches  long  and 
weighed  about  10,000  pounds. 
The  death  toil  in  the  bomb- 
ings was  about  100,000. 

Cut-Rate  Prices 

$■  The  Soviet  Union  is  under- 
cutting the  Western  world, 
particularly  the  United  States, 
on  the  foreign  markets.  For 
example,  Soviet  oil  is  being  of- 
fered at  prices  that  U.S.  pro- 
ducers cannot  match.  Soviet 
sugar  is  being  sold  on  world 
markets  at  sharp  discounts. 
Prevailing  prices  are  $98  a  ton 
—Russia's  price,  $84  a  ton.  So- 
viet lathes  sell  in  Western 
Europe  for  $3,000.  The  same 
lathe  in  the  U.S.  costs  Euro- 
pean buyers  about  $10,000.  A 
boring  mill  in  the  U.S.  is  priced 
at  $46,000.  The  Soviet  Union 
is  selling  the  same  mill  for 
$21,000.  The  Russians  are  ex- 
pected to  grab  the  foreign 
market  in  machine  tools  away 
from  the  U.S.  within  the  next 
six  years,  and  it  is  easy  to 
see  why. 

Egyptian  Cotton  Growth 

#  The  Egyptian  Region's  Min- 
istry of  Agriculture  has  re- 
ported expanding  the  area 
under  cultivation  with  special- 
ly selected  cotton  seeds.  In 
1959  this  area  reached  a  record 
of  441,000  acres  as  compared 
with  45,000  acres  in  1953.  Cot- 
ton yarn  and  textiles  export 
climbed  from  19,000  tons  in 
1952  to  50,000  tons  in  1960. 
Cotton  represents  70  percent 
of  Egypt's  total  exports  and  is 
expected  to  rise  to  90  percent. 

Flights  from  East  to  West 
^  Persons  fleeing  from  East 
Germany  numbered  200,000  in 
1960,  a  total  of  nearly  3,000,- 
000  since  the  end  of  World 
War  II.  The  figure  was  44  per- 
cent higher  than  in  1959.  As 
a  result,  West  Germany's  pop- 
ulation has  increased  8.3  per- 
cent during  the  past  10  years, 
while  East  Germany  has  suf- 

30 


f ered  a  decrease  of  5.4  percent 
in  the  same  period.  East  Ger- 
many is  the  only  country  in 
Europe  with  a  declining  pop- 
ulation. 

Land  for  the  Landless 

^  The  Malayan  government 
has  set  aside  the  equivalent  of 
$16,170,000  for  land  clearing, 
fertilizer  and  farmer  subsidies. 
About  4,000  landless  families 
are  scheduled  to  receive  ten- 
acre  plots. 

Books  to  India 

<^>  The  Russians  are  said  to  be 
sending  more  than  4,000,000 
Communist  books  Into  India 
each  year,  while  only  1,350,000 
copies  of  the  Bible  were  dis- 
tributed there  in  1959.  The 
problem  is  not  to  get  the  peo- 
ple to  read  the  Bible,  the 
Canadian  Bible  Society  said, 
but  to  provide  them  with  Bi- 
bles in  languages  they  can 
read  and  in  quantities  that  are 
needed  and  in  a  price  range 
the  people  can  afford  to  pay. 

Supersonic  Transports 

^  By  1970,  It  has  been  pre- 
dicted, transport  airplanes  will 
be  taking  passengers  from 
New  York  to  Cairo,  a  distance 
of  more  than  5,000  miles,  in 
about  five  hours'  flying  time. 
Such  transports  are  now  being 
built  by  the  Russians,  accord- 
ing to  American  plane  builders. 
The  airplanes  are  designed  to 
hold  150  passengers,  fly  no  less 
than  2,000  miles,  at  altitudes  be- 
tween 60,000  to  80,000  feet,  and 
travel  at  rates  two  or  three 
times  the  speed  of  sound. 

Easing  Hypertension 

<§>  Japanese  doctors  have 
found  a  way  to  ease  tension. 
Instead  of  bathing  the  entire 
body,  only  the  arms  and  legs 
of  the  body  are  bathed.  This 
method  has  lowered  the  blood 
pressure  of  200  patients,  ac- 
cording to  Dr.  Takashi  Sugi 
yama  of  the  Tohoku  Univer 
sity  School  of  Medicine.  The 
partial  bath,  carried  on  each 
day   for   a    week    invigorates 


the  peripheral  flow  of  blood 
and  aids  circulation.  Whale- 
body  bathing  was  said  to  be 
bad  for  those  with  hyperten- 
sion, because  water  pressure 
about  the  abdomen  helps  in- 
crease blood  pressure,  not  les- 
sen it. 

Transfusions  Dangerous 

<$>  More  people  die  of  blood 
transfusions  today  than  of  ap- 
pendicitis, complained  Dr.  Carl 
W.  Walter,  Harvard  professor 
of  surgery.  The  deaths  are 
bad  enough,  he  said,  but  there 
is  no  way  of  telling  how  many 
patients,  after  having  been  giv- 
en a  blood  transfusion,  later 
come  down  with  a  dangerous 
attack  of  hepatitis. 

Youth  Fitness 

<&  A  recent  report  compiled  by 
the  American  Association  of 
Health,  Physical  Education  and 
Recreation  shows  children  in 
the  United  States  inferior  in 
physical  fitness  to  British 
youth.  The  British  state  that 
American  children  spend  too 
much  time  "watching  their 
team  play,"  while  the  British 
"encourage  the  children  to 
play  themselves." 

Having  Children  Alter  85 

<$>  Dr.  D.  Frank  Kaltreider  of 
the  University  of  Maryland 
School  of  Medicine  said  that, 
while  there  are  excellent  re- 
ports of  women  having  babies 
at  35  and  over,  still  he  feels 
that  "thirty-five"  is  a  little 
elderly  for  that  sort  of  thing 
any  more.  Older  mothers,  he 
said,  are  plagued  with  high 
blood  pressure  or  hyperten- 
sion. The  Incidence  of  diabetes, 
he  said,  was  three  times  that 
of  younger  women  who  had 
borne  children.  Older  mothers 
are  more  likely  to  have  twins 
and  large  babies  than  younger 
women;  also  the  risk  of  death 
is  more  likely  in  older  women 

Stop-the-Rot  Campaign 

^  The  British  are  in  the  midst 
of  a  "stop-the-rot"  campaign 
to    fight  tooth    decay    among 

,  ...  ,  f<  p 


British  children.  Surveys  show 
that  Ave  out  of  six  British 
children  have  bad  teeth,  and 
three  out  of  ten  rarely  use  a 
toothbrush.  Among  twelve- 
year-olds  only  one  in  two  hun- 
dred has  sound  teeth.  Unless 
parents  take  immediate  action, 
"one  in  four  under  Ave  will 
need  false  teeth  by  the  time 
they  are  twenty."  Three  main 
reasons  are  listed  for  the  prev- 
alence of  tooth  rot,  namely: 
Too  many  sloppy  foods,  not 
enough  apples  and  not  enough 
raw  vegetables.  The  report 
stated:  "There  is  nothing  like 
raw  fruit  or  vegetable  juices 
for  cleaning  the  teeth."  A  good 
brushing  also  helps. 

Why  People  Shiver 

<$  Experiments  conducted  at 
the  medical  school  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  California  at  Los 
Angeles  reveal  that  a  tiny  part 
of  the  brain  in  the  rear  portion 


of  the  hypothalamus  is  what 
touches  off  shivering  when  one 
becomes  cold.  If  this  region  is 
destroyed,  one  is  unable  to 
shiver.  Physiologist  Douglas 
Stuart  pointed  out  that  shiver- 
ing is  nature's  way  of  keeping 
one  warm,  for  It  produces  body 
heat  without  one's  doing  phys- 
ical exercise. 

Too  Many  Churches? 

^  The  Chancellor  of  the 
Worcester  diocese  is  quoted  as 
laving  said  at  Worcester  that 
'there  are  far  too  many 
churches  In  this  country 
[Great  Britain!  and  I  should 
not  be  shy  to  make  an  order 
resulting  In  a  reduction  of 
their  number."  A  fellow  coun- 
tryman replied:  "Until  now  I 
have  always  understood  that 
the  chief  problem  of  the 
Church  of  England  was  not  an 
excess  number  of  churches  but 
a  shortage  of  Christians." 


Kbrasbcbev  and  the  Pope 

<%>  Plans  have  been  discussed 
for  a  Khrushchev  visit  to  the 
"Eternal  City,"  Rome.  It  is  no 
secret  that  Khrushchev  has 
wanted  to  see  the  pope.  Of 
course,  the  Italian  Catholic 
party  is  opposed  to  the  idea, 
but  the  Italian  Communist  par- 
ty, the  second  strongest  in  the 
Italian  Parliament,  is  all  for  it. 
Some  suggest  that  the  pope 
would  avoid  such  a  meeting, 
but  many  feel  that  Pope  John 
XXIII  is  just  as  curious  to  meet 
Russia's  Khrushchev  as 
Khrushchev  is  to  meet  the 
pope. 

A  Snail's  Pace— How  Fast? 
#>  The  University  of  Maryland 
recently  discovered  that  a  snail 
travels  along  at  an  average 
speed  of  23  inches  an  hour, 
that  it  can  pull  items  200  times 
it  own  weight  and  slide  along 
the  sharp  edge  o&a  razor  blade 
without  getting  cut. 


LEARN 

Can  you  cope  with  every  problem  that  you  meet 
in  life?  Can  you  read  the  Bible  with  no  question 
left  unanswered?  Join  the  millions  of  persons 
who  are  finding  The  Watchtower  their  best  guide 
to  satisfying  Bible  knowledge.  One  year  7/-  (for 
Australia,  8/-). 

The  Watchtower  is  a  32-page  semimonthly  companion  magazine  to  Awake!  and  is  printed  in  58  languages. 
It  Is  devoted  exclusively  to  Bible  counsel  and  Instruction  in  Bible  prophecy.  Bead  it  with  your  Bible, 


WATCH  TOWER  THE   RIDGEWAY  LONDON   N.W.  7 

Please  send  me  the  Watchtower  magazine  lor  one  year  for  the  7/-  (for  Australia,  8/-)  enclosed. 
For  mailing  the  coupon  I  am  to  receive  tree  the  timely  booklets  "Look!  1  Am  Making  AH 
Things  New,"  When  God  Speaks  Peace  to  All  Nations  and  Healing  of  the  Nations  Has  Drawn  Near. 

Street  and  Number 

Name or  Route  and  Box  - 

Post  Postal 

Town District  No County 

JANUARY  32,  1961  31 


ARE  YOU 


Fating 


FUTURE 


Does  the  prospect  of  the  years  ahead  fill  you  with  deep  concern 
for  your  welfare  and  that  of  your  family?  Even  world  leaders 
recognize  the  uncertainty  of  the  future  and  repeatedly  express  fears 
for  the  outcome  of  international  peace  efforts.  Yet  few  persons  turn 
to  God's  Word,  the  Bible,  for  a  realistic  hope  or  a  concrete  course 
of  action  to  insure  security.  Have  you  read  the  Bible  lately?  Do 
you  read  it  regularly?  You  should!  It  is  God's  word  to  this  modern 
world,  outlining  God's  purpose  to  correct  the  world  situation.  Read- 
ing the  Bible  will  give  you  courage  coupled  with  the  right  kind  of 
knowledge  for  survival  in  the  days  ahead. 


Obtain  and  read  the  convenient  pocket-sbe  edition  of  the 
American  Standard  Version  Bible.  It  is  a  complete  Bible  with 
footnotes  and  a  cyclopedic  concordance  of  words  and  expres- 
sions. Size:  61"  x  44"  x  1".  Dark-blue  leatherette  binding.  Send 
only  10/6  (for  Australia,  13/3). 


For  a  time-proved  guide  to  Bible  reading  sec  page  31. 


WATCH   TOWER 


THE  RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W.  7 


Please  send  me  the  convenient  pocket-size  edition  of  the  American  Standard  Version  Bible 
for  the  10/6  (tor  Australia,  13/3)  enclosed. 


Name  . 

Post 

Town 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box 

Postal 
District  No County 


In:  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Rd.,  Strathfleld,  N.S.W.  CANADA:  1E0  Brldgeland  Ave.,  Toronto  19,  Ont. 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bag,  Elanoslontein,  Transvaal.   UNITED  STATES:  117  Adama  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N.  Y. 


32 


AWAKE! 


WE* 


mm 


m 


li 


m-; 


*sm 


&y$W$. 


^"wfT 


w  Long  Were  the  Days  of  Creation? 


Ipmada  Enacts  a  Bill  of  Rights 


fould  Older  People  Be  Forced  to  Retire? 


bmarine  Monster  of  the  River 


?h?M$£*Mak& 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 

jbb  j?1^  ;  ~j  r"  ss?  th  ;n*  rra  p;  ^jsr  ^e 

ssk^^tW^k; ^ :s .s r:; ^  ,;  "- V^ ,N  ;."' 'V:£.„',  ■    .  -:-*;-£■:&«*& 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAL 

Newt  source j  that,  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  'the  vital  Issues  of  our 
times  must  be  unfettered  by  certsorshfp  and  selfish  interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fetter*.  !t  recognizes  factt,  facet  facts,  if  free  to  publish  facts.  It  is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations)  it  It  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  it  is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  It  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth, 

"Awake I"  uses  the  regular  newt  channels,  but  is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  In  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  is  international,  [t  Is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  in  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  ail,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awakel"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awakel" 

Publish  id  Simultaneously  in  thu  United  Status  by  the 

WATCHTOWES   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY   OF  NEW  YORK,   INC. 

117   Adams  street  Brooklyn  1,   New   York.   U.S.A. 

aud  in   England  by 

WATCH  TOWER   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY 


Watch  Tower  House,   The  RWgeway 
N.  H.  KnCjsr,  President 

Printing  this  issue;  3,139,000 
"A«r«»!"  b  pi*»>*it  In  Hi  following  23  langiagw: 
SimlmnRtJily — Afrflsaaus,  CinyanJa,  Danish ,  Dutch,  Eng- 
lish* Finnish.  French,  German.  Greek,  Italian,  Japanese, 
Norwegian.  Portuguese,  Spanieli,  Swedish.  Tagalog,  Zulu. 
Monthly — nocano.  Indonesian,  Korean,  Malayalam,  Pol- 
lab,  Ukrainian. 

Yearly  subscription  rates 

Ofteei  foe  semimonthly  editions 

Anuria,  U.S.,  HI  Adams  Bt,  Brooklyn  1,  N.Tt. 
Antral  It,  11  Berestoed  Id.,  strsMelu,  N.B.W. 
Canada.  ISO  Brlogelnncl  Aw.,  Toronto  IS,  Ont. 
England,  Wateb  Tower  Rouse, 

The  Kidgeway,  London  N.W.  7 
Iw  Zealand,  621  New  North  Hd..  Auckland.  S.W,  1 
South  Africa,  Private  Bag,  Elanaefonteln,  TM. 

Msathly  editions  cost  half  tlte  alwpf  rate?. 


London  N.W.  7,  England 
Ghant  Suites,  Secretary 

4d  a  copy  (Australia,  Ed) 

nem  Ittan  ess  for  subscriptions  should  be  sent  to  the  office 
ta  roar  cfftfntry.  tfffrenF/se  send"  jwht  nn^mtr  ta 
London.  Hnrlfcth' of  expiration  Is  sent  at  least  two  Issues 
before  subscription  expires. 


II 

if- 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  iheild  reach  ss  thirty  days 
btforo  your  muring  data.  Glut  us  your  old  and  new 
ldsrui  (It  ponlhla,  your  ell  adtrut  Inbtl}.  Watch 
Tutnr,  Wstti  Tow*  Honit,  Tht  lUaenay,  Lon- 
don  N.W.   7,   Engl  ana*. 


Entered  as  seeond-elass  matter  at  Brooklyn,  K.T. 
Printed  in  Enjrlaiad 


Tks    Bill*  tranilation   wed   In   "Awaktl"    h  tki   New  World   Translatlen   of   the    Holy  Strlptarei. 

When   other  translations  ara  used  the  following  symbol!  will  *pp«ar  behind  the  oltatlons: 
jlS  -  American  standard  Version    Dy  -  Catholic  Douay  version    Mo  -  James  MohTatt'a  version 
AT  -  An  American  Translation       ED  -  The  Emphatic  Diislott    Ro  -  J.  B.  Botherham's  Teision 
AV  -  Authorised  Version  (1811)    JP  -  Jewish  Publication  8oc.   38  -  Bevisad  Standard  Version 
Do  -  J.  N.  Barhy'a  version  £,e  -  Isaac  Leeser's  version       Yg  -  Bohsrt  Young's  version 


The  Bitter  Goes  with  the  Sweet 

How  Long  Were  the  Days  of  Creatiop? 

Canada  Enacts  a  Bill  of  Rights 

Moral  Monsters 

Should  Older  People  Be  Forced  to 

Retire? 
Snowy  Mountains  Scheme 
"The  Luckless  Legion" 


CONTENT  S 

The  StorybooH  Land  of  Bali  20 

Elephant  KnoSv-How  23 

Submarine  Monster  of  the  River  24 

Birthday  for  a  Porpoise  26 

"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 

The  Bible  and  Prenatal  Influences  27 

Watching  the  World  29 


3 
5 

S 
12 

13 

17 
19 


"Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake." 

— Roman*  13:11 


Volume  XLI1 


London,    England,    February  8,   1961 


Number  3 


nBTTfE&  **fi 


G0tSW"»«r/ 


I 


S  LIFE  worth  living?  Cer-       ^^ 
tainly  it  is — to  all  those  in  ^ 


their  right  mind!  And  espe- 
cially is  life  worth  living  for  all  those  who 
by  faith  can  look  forward  to  something 
better  in  the  future,  namely,  the  kingdom 
of  God  for  which  Jesus  taught  his  disciples 
to  pray. — Matt  6:10. 

However,  we  will  never  be  able  to  enjoy 
life  to  the  full  unless  we  reconcile  our- 
selves to  the  fact  that,  under  present  im- 
perfect conditions  and  with  Satan  and  his 
demons  on  the  loose,  every  position  and 
vocation,  every  possession  and  location 
has  its  measure  of  bitter  to  go  with  the 
sweet.  Not  that  this  was  God's  purpose  for 
man  in  the  beginning.  On  the  contrary, 
concerning  the  things  he  gives  we  read: 
"The  blessing  of  Jehovah — that  is  what 
makes  rich,  and  he  adds  no  pain  with  it." 
When  God  gives  sweet,  bitter  does  not  au- 
tomatically follow.— Prov.  10:22. 

He  who  would  accept  the  sweet  but  re- 
bels at  taking  the  bitter  that  goes^with  It 
makes  both  himself  and  those  about  him  un- 
happy. And  equally  unwise  is  he  who  denies 
himself  the  blessings  the  Creator  meant 
his  creatures  to  enjoy,  merely  because  of 
the  bitter  that  goes  with  the  sweet.  Such 
a  one  leads  a  petty  and  lonely  life. 

To  illustrate:  Do  you  live  in  the  wide- 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


open  spaces?  Then  yours  to 
enjoy  are  the  beauties  of  na- 
ture, the  sunshine,  the  fresh 
air  and  the  quiet.  But  with 
these  also  may  go  poor  roads, 
long  distances  to  travel,  no 
neighbors  nearby,  as  well  as 
the  many  other  little  inconveniences  that 
are  a  part  of  life  in  the  country.  Do  you 
live  in  the  city?  Then  you  are  spared  the 
inconveniences  of  the  country.  But  you 
also  have  the.  noise  and  polluted  air  that 
are  a  part  of  most  modern  cities. 

The  Scriptures  indicate  that  under  cer- 
tain circumstances  it  is  best  to  marry.  And 
those  that  enter  the  condition  of  matri- 
mony eagerly  anticipate  all  the  blessings 
and  joys  that  go  with  that  state,  even  as 
Jehovah  God  intended.  But  because  of  hu- 
man imperfection  and  present  unsatisfac- 
tory conditions  "those  who  do  [marry] 
will 'have  tribulation  in  their  flesh."  If 
young  couples  would  enter  the  marital 
state  expecting  that  there  will  be  some  bit- 
ter going  with  the  sweet,  there  would  be 
less  frustration  and  disappointment  and 
more  happiness  and  contentment  in  wed- 
lock.—! Cor.  7:28. 

Rearing  a  large  family  is  a  source  of 
much  joy  and  satisfaction  to  wise  and  lov- 
ing parents.  Would  they  exchange  any  one 
of  their  children  for  a  pot  of  gold?  Yet  to- 
day with  these  blessings  there  goes  the 
bitter  of  meeting  the  rising  cost  of  living 


and  protecting  their  children  against  the 
rising  tide  of  delinquency. 

A  position  of  prominence  and  responsi- 
bility may  look  very  glamorous  and  de- 
sirable. Its  privileges  and  rewards  are 
sweet.  But  with  it,  under  present  condi- 
tions, also  goes  the  bitter  of  heavy  bur- 
dens, trials,  long-suffering  and  frustra- 
tions, If  inclined  to  doubt  that,  take  a  look 
at  Moses.  What  a  career  God  cut  out  for 
Moses!  Serving  notice  on  the  world  ruler 
Pharaoh;  being  the  instrument  by  whom 
one  amazing  miracle  after  another  was 
performed,  and  by  whom  some  two  million 
slaves  were  led  out  into  freedom.  Yet  at 
times  his  lot  was  so  bitter  that  he  told  Je- 
hovah God:  "If  this  is  the  way  you  are 
doing  to  me,  please  kill  me  off  altogether." 
—Num.  11:10-15. 

Particularly  does  this  principle  apply  to 
Christians,  as  seen  from  the  record  in  the 
Bible  at  Mark,  chapter  10.  A  certain  self- 
righteous,  rich  young  man  had  rejected  the 
cost  of  becoming  a  disciple  of  Jesus,  caus- 
ing Jesus  to  remark  that  it  is  a  difficult 
thing  for  the  rich  to  enter  the  kingdom  of 
God.  This  prompted  Peter  to  say;  "Look! 
we  left  all  things  and  have  been  following 
you."  In  reply  Jesus  assured  Peter  and  his 
fellow  disciples:  "Truly  I  say  to  you  men, 
No  one  has  left  house  or  brothers  or  sisters 
or  mother  or  father  or  children  or  fields 
for  my  sake  and  for  the  sake  of  the  good 
news  who  will  not  get  a  hundredfold  now 
in  this  period  of  time,  houses  and  brothers 
and  sisters  and  mothers  and  children  and 
fields."— Mark  10:23-30. 

But  did  Jesus  stop  with  that?  Did  he 
speak  only  of  the  sweets  that  would  be  the 
lot  of  his  disciples?  No  indeed!  Honestly 
and  wisely  he  also  called  attention  to  the 
bitter  that  went  with  all  these  sweets,  for 
he  added  the  words  "with  persecutions," 
as  well  as  the  promise:  "and  in  the  coming 
system  of  things  everlasting  life."  Chris- 
tian discipleship  is  not  an  exception;  it  also 


has  its  bitter,  but  not  so  much  as  to  spoil 
all  the  sweet  In  fact,  with  faith  and  love 
the  Christian  can,  not  only  "take  it,"  but 
can  "rejoice  and  leap  for  joy"  over  it,  even 
as  Jesus  stated. — Matt.  5:12. 

Here  is  a  lesson  for  ever  so  many  per- 
sons today.  Upon  hearing  the  good  news 
of  God's  kingdom  they  are  persuaded  as  to 
its  being  the  truth,  yet  they  never  act  upon 
their  belief.  Why?  Because  of  the  bitter 
that  goes  with  the  sweet — the  unpopulari- 
ty, the  work,  the  persecution  that  Jesus 
mentioned.  Yet  how  foolish!  Literally  hun- 
dreds of  thousands  of  persons  from  all 
walks  of  life  and  in  all  parts  of  the  globe 
have  proved  to  jheir  satisfaction  that  the 
sweet  that  comes  from  knowing  and  serv- 
ing Jehovah  God  far  outweighs  any  of  the 
bitter  that  goes  with  it. 

Nor  would  we  overlook  the  fact  that  the 
bitter  has  a  value  of  its  own.  Jehovah  God 
has  permitted  the  bitter  because  of  the  is- 
sue of  man's  integrity  as  raised  by  the  Dev- 
il. By  willingly  taking  the  bitter  with  the 
sweet,  Christians  prove  that  they  love 
God  and  at  the  same  time  prove  the  Devil 
a  liar  when  he  boasted  that  God  could  not 
have  creatures  upon  earth  that  would  un- 
selfishly love  God.  Thus  we  read  that  Je- 
sus Christ,  because  of  taking  the  bitter 
with  the  sweet,  "learned  obedience  from 
the  things  he  suffered."  More  than  that, 
thereby  he  became  a  high  priest  able  to 
"sympathize  with  our  weaknesses."  The 
same  principles  apply  to  all  his  fbtfowers. 
— Heb.  5:8;  4:15. 

So,  for  more  reasons  than  one,  we  do 
well  to  reconcile  ourselves  to  the  fact  that 
under  present  circumstances  the  bitter 
goes  with  the  sweet.  But  do  not  overlook 
the  fact  that  the  bitter  does  not  originate 
with  God;  he  only  permits  it.  The  bitter 
is  brought  about  by  imperfect  and  often 
selfish  creatures,  such  as  Satan  the  Devil. 
Still,  with  it  all,  life  is  worth  living! 


AWAKE! 


How  Long  Were  the 


Th*    antwar    thai    th*    BlbU    glvot    li    both 
•n  lightening  end  itrtngthtning  to  your  fdirh, 

4fiT  N  SIX  days  Jehovah  made  the 
X  heavens  and  the  earth,  the  sea 
and  everything  that  is  in  them  and 
he  proceeded  to  rest  on  the  seventh 
day."  So  reads  the  inspired  record 
at  Exodus  20:11.  What  is  the 
length  of  these  days — just 
twenty-four  hours? 

To  know  the  answer  to  this 
question  is  not  merely  of  aca- 
demic interest.  Rather,  it  is  vital 
to  our  faith,  for  one  of  the  chief 
arguments  raised  by  skeptics 
against  the  validity  of  the  Gene- 
sis account  of  creation  is  that  it 
teaches,  in  conflict  with  the  evi- 
dence of  science,  that  only 
twenty-four-hour  days  were  in- 
volved in  creation. 

In  this  they  greatly  err,  for  in 
regard  to  the  time  of  the  crea- 
tion of  the  starry  heavens  and 
the  earth  the  Bible  record  sim- 
ply states:  "In  the  beginning 
God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth."  (Gen.  1:1)  It  does  not 
tell  us  how  much  time  elapsed 
between  the  creation  of  the  uni- 
verse and  the  first  "day"  of  the 
creative  "week"  used  by  God  in 
preparing  the  earth  for  human 
habitation.  In  fact,  even  modern 
science  does  not  know.  Accord- 
ing to  one  of  the  latest  reports, 
"the  universe  may  be  a  million 
billion  years  old,  and  not  just  12 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


or  so  billion  years  old,"  or  4.5  hillion, 
which  is  the  most  commonly  given  fig- 
ure.— Science  News  Letter,  September 
3,  1960. 

That  the^seven  days  of  creation  were 
each  only  twenty-four  hours  long  is  held 
by  certain  fundamentalists.  And  says  a 
Protestant  higher  critic:  "There 
can  be  no  question  but  that  by 
Day  the  author  meant  just  what 
we  mean — the  time  required  for 
one  revolution  of,  the  earth  on 
its  axis.  Had  he  meant  an  aeon 
he  would  certainly,  in  view  of 
his  fondness  for  great  numbers, 
have  stated  the  number  of  mil- 
lenniums each  period  embraced. 
While  this  might  have  made  his 
account  of  creation  less  irrecon- 
cilable with  modern  science,  it 
would  have  involved  a  lessening 
of  God's  greatness,  one  sign  of 
which  was  his  power  to  do  so 
much  in  one  day." — Interpret- 
er's Bible,  Vol,  1. 

A  modern  Roman  Catholic  au- 
thority speaks  in  a  similar  vein: 
"That  the  days  of  creation  are 
proposed  as  natural  days  seems 
evident.  .  .  .  What  the  book  of- 
fers is  a  popular  account  suited 
to  the  mentality  of  the  age,  and 
directed  to  a  purely  religious 
rjurpose." — A  Catholic  Commen- 
tary on  Holy  Scripture,  Orchard, 
et  dl. 

But  the  Bible  does  not  explic- 
itly state  how  long  the  six  days 
of  creation  were,  and  the  testi- 


mony  of  nature  Indicates  that  they  in- 
volved long  periods  of  time.  The  Bible, 
however,  does  give  us  clues  by  which  we 
can  determine  the  length  of  God's  rest  day. 
Since  these  seven  days  were  all  part  of  one 
"week,"  it  is  reasonable  to  hold  that  the 
individual  days  were  all  of  equal  length, 
even  as  the  seven  days  of  the  calendar 
week  are  alike.— Ex.  20:8-11. 

Days  of  Varying  Length 

Since  the  Creator,  Jehovah  God,  in- 
spired the  Genesis  account  of  creation,  and 
since  the  evidence  of  nature  is  to  the  ef- 
fect that  many,  many  years  elapsed  from 
the  time  light  first  appeared  on  this  globe, 
after  it  had  once  cooled  off,  to  the  creation 
of  man,  it  follows  that  twenty-four-hour 
days  could  not  have  been  meant.  In  fact, 
right  in  the  Genesis  account  itself  We  find 
various  periods  of  time  called  a  day.  In 
calling  the  light  "Day,"  God  meant  a  day 
of  twelve  hours.  In  telling  that  the  lumi- 
naries would  mark  off  "days  and  years," 
clearly  twenty-four-hour  days  were  meant. 
We  even  find  the  entire  creative  week  re- 
ferred to  as  a  day:  "This  is  a  history  of 
the  heavens  and  the.  earth  ...  in  the  day 
that  Jehovah  God  made  earth  and  heaven." 
—Gen.  1:5,  14;  2:4. 

The  Bible  also  tells  that  God  appointed 
a  "day  for  a  year,"  and  that  "one  day  is 
with  Jehovah  as  a  thousand  years."  Like- 
wise, periods  of  time  are  doubtless  involved 
in  such  expressions  as  "the  day  of  Jeho- 
vah" and  "the  day  of  Christ."  So  there  la 
no  Scriptural  basis  for  holding  that  the 
days  of  creation  were  each  only  twenty- 
four  hours  long.— Num.  14:34;  2  Pet  3:8; 
Joel  2:1;  Phil.  1:10. 

In  fact,  many  are  the  Bible  scholars, 
from  the  first  few  centuries  down  to  our 
time,  that  agree  with  the  observations  of 
Delitsch  in  his  New  Commentary  on  Gene- 
sis: "Days  of  God  are  intended,  with  Him 
a  thousand  years  are  but  as  a  day  that  is 

6 


past,  Ps.  90:4.  .  .  .  The  days  of  creation 
are,  according  to  the  meaning  of  Holy 
Scripture  itself,  not  days  of  four  and  twen- 
ty hours,  but  aeons.  .  .  .  For  this  earthly 
and  human  measurement  of  time  cannot 
apply  to  the  first  three  days  .  .  .  and  not 
to  the  Sabbath,  because  there  the  limiting 
formula  is  absent."  The  Jewish  Encyclo- 
pedia of  Bible  Interpretation,  Kasher, 
1953,  makes  similar  observations. 

None  of  these,  however,  venture  to  give 
an  exact  period  of  time.  But  since  the  Bible 
indicates  how  long  God's  rest  day  is,  it  is 
possible  to  know  how  long  the  other  six 
days  of  creation  were,  namely,  seven  thou- 
sand years. 

Seven  Thousand  Years  Long 

Our  very  first  clue  to  the  length  of  God's 
rest  day  is  found  in  the  Genesis  record  il£ 
self  In  that  the  limiting  formula,  "the  eve- 
ning and  the  morning  \^ere,"  is  absent 
from  the  mention  of  the  seventh  day,  per- 
mitting the  conclusion  that  it  may  not 
have  ended  yet.  In  passing  let  it  be  noted 
that  "evening"  refers  to  the  beginning  of 
the  day,  even  as  the  day  with  the  Israelites 
began  in  the  evening,  at  sundown.  Of  in- 
terest in  this  regard  is  the  native  Hawaiian 
expression,  "from  night  till  now,"  meaning 
from  the  start  or  beginning  until  now. 

We  note  that  the  psalmist  David  makes 
reference  to  the  fact  that  the  Israelites 
who  had  rebelled  against  the  word  of  Je- 
hovah in  the  wilderness  failed  to  enter  into 
God'B  resting  place.  (Ps.  95:8-11)  The 
apostle  Paul,  in  his  letter  to  the  Hebrews, 
ties  in  this  statement  with  the  record  in 
Genesis  concerning  God's  rest  day  and 
shows  what  it  means.  He  says:  "For  we 
who  have  exercised  faith  do  enter  into  the 
rest,  just  as  he  has  said:  'So  I  swore  in 
my  wrath:  "They  shall  not  enter  into  my 
rest,"  '  although  his  works  were  finished 
from  the  foundation  of  the  world.  For  in 
one  place  he  has  said  of  the  seventh  day 

AWAKE! 


as  follows:  'And  God  rested  on  the  sev- 
enth day  from  all  his  works,'  and  again 
in  this  place:  "They  shall  not  enter  into  my 
rest.'  .  .  .  For  if  Joshua  had  led  them  into 
a  place  of  rest,  God  would  not  afterward 
have  spoken  of  another  day.  So  there  re- 
mains a  sabbath  resting  for  the  people  of 
God.  For  the  man  that  has  entered  into 
God's  rest  has  also  himself  rested  from 
his  own  works  just  as  God  did  from  his 
own,"— Heb.  3:12  to  4:11. 

Since  Paul  emphasizes  that  the  oppor- 
tunity for  men  to  enter  into  the  enjoyment 
of  that  seventh  day  of  rest  was  still  open, 
it  is  evident  that  the  "day"  had  not  yet 
ended  in  Paul's  day,  about  4,085  years  aft- 
er God  had  completed  creation.  And  since 
Paul's  words  apply  to  Christians  today,  we 
must  conclude,  with  no  information  to  the 
contrary,  that  God  has  been  resting,  or 
desisting  from  material  creation  as  re- 
spects the  earth,  down  to  the  present  time, 
or  for  now  a  total  of  almost  six  thousand 
years.  Finally,  fulfillment  of  Bible  proph- 
ecy shows  that  we  are  living  at  the  "con- 
summation of  the  system  of  things,"  or  the 
"time  of  the  end"  of  the  world,  which 
means  that  the  thousand-year  reign  of 
Christ  is  at  hand.  During  that  thousand- 
year  reign  all  mankind,  those  surviving 
the  end  of  this  wicked  old  world  as  well 
as  all  those  resurrected  from  the  dead,  will 
have  the  opportunity  of  entering  into  God's 
rest,  even  as  faithful  Christians  have  been 
doing  for  the  past  nineteen  hundred  years. 
Thus  we  have  the  seven  thousand  years  of 
God's  rest  day  accounted  for:  From  crea- 
tion's end  through  the  time  of  the  apos- 
tle Paul,  down  to  our  day  and  on  to  a 
thousand  years  in  the  future. — Matt.  24: 
3,  34;  John  5:28,  29. 

That  thousand-year  reign  of  Christ  will 
in  itself  be  a  sabbath  day,  a  sabbath  within 
a  sabbath.  It  will  be  the  seventh  thousand- 
year  day  of  the  seventh  great  seven- 


thousand-year  day,  when  mankind  will  en- 
Joy  rest  from  toil  and  bondage  to  sin, 
Satan  and  death.  When  on  earth  Jesus 
Christ  stated  that  he  was  Lord  of  the  sab- 
bath, and  in  a  particular  way  will  he  be 
the  Lord  of  this  thousand-year  sabbath. 
To  foreshadow  the  great  works  he  will  do 
on  this  thousand-year  sabbath,  he,  when  on 
earth,  performed  many  of  his  miracles  on 
the  literal  sabbath.— Luke  6:1-10. 

Concerning  the  end  of  Christ's  thousand- 
year  reign  the  apostle  Paul  wrote:  "Next, 
the  accomplished  end,  when  he  hands  over 
the  kingdom  to  his  God  and  Father,  when 
he  has  destroyed  all  government  juid  all 
authority  and  power."  (1  Cor.  15:24)  Je- 
hovah God  will  then  submit  all  mankind 
to  a  final  testing,  as  noted  at  Revelation 
20:7-9,  after  which  all  the  wicked  will  be 
destroyed.  Thus  the  name  of  Jehovah  will 
stand  vindicated  forever.  The  seventh  day, 
God's  day  of  rest,  seven  thousand  years 
long,  indeed  will  have  proved  to  be  sacred, 
in  keeping  with  what  God  caused  to  be 
written  at  its  very  beginning:  "And  God 
proceeded  to  bless  the  seventh  day  and 
make  it  sacred,  because  on  it  he  has  been 
resting."— Gen.  2:3. 

Since  the  Scriptures  indicate  that  God's 
rest  day  is  seven  thousand  years  long,  it  is 
reasonable  to  conclude  that  the  other  six 
days  referred  to  in  the  first  chapter  of 
Genesis  are  of  the  same  length,  or  a  total 
of  42,000  years.  True,  such  a  period  of 
time  seems  far  too  short  in  view  of  the 
guesses  of  scientists;  still  it  is  sufficient 
for  the  things  to  be  brought  forth  that  are 
mentioned  at  Genesis  1:3-28:  Light,  an  ex- 
panse, dry  land,  vegetation,  appearance  of 
the  luminaries,  fish,  birds,  land  animals 
and  finally  man.  Thus  reason  and  the 
Scriptures  themselves  unite  to  strengthen 
our  faith  in  the  Bible  account  of  creation 
by  enlightening  us  as  to  the  length  of  the 
days  of  creation. 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


wu %  ■' f  h e. ' h ig j,TCSit:'  -tl e  ttr* 
from  uu-<  Ci^n.'iidimn 
Parliament  in  OtUwa 
for  many  years.  The 
government  rf  Prime 
Minister  John  D*efen* 
bal«*r  final II y  enacted 
a  Bill  of  Rights  on  Au- 
gust 10,  i960— some- 
thing the  prim©  minte- 


JGfy  "AWoftF*  wi-rAif  iMwJejxf  m  Cwwwfo 


■  :tbte  S£n#f " ;  i^l.li'iQ t|i:^: 

:;  th'ijsjk  -4^-  ■  ■pp^^I,:}^.' 
.ife^-p^ta^  f&jnihiin©' 
of  Qnc^hee  aouftM-  f:o 
cimh,  Many  began  to 
say:  Tf  such  perc- 
ent ion  era.,  happen  to 
Je.h  a  v  a  I V  s  w  illnesses,  a  t 
w;m'  happen  to  others. 
Out  liberties  are  not 
a  ife  gu  s=)t.-(:  el:  y  protected . 
Thtu'e  should  be  a 


ta  had  been  promoting  for  ths.  past  Mtsen  written  Bill  of  Rights  to  guarantee  them.' 
years.  "This  Bill  h  a  major  step  forward"  Mwch  public  agitation  enmietiL  Promi- 
na said  proudly.  "It  will  set  up  ftn  altar  at  ne„t  politicians  interested  themselves  In 
feedom  that  will  ensure  that  the  minority  the  proposal  for  a  Bill  of  Rights.  In  1947 
will  not  be  luijuatly  treated  by  the  majort-  John  Diefenbate,  ten  a  private  member 
ty,  which  Jla  of  the  essence  of  frecctom."  of  the  House  of  Ccmamons,  stated  in  o> 


— Ofote  awl  MaU,  August  5,  IS&O* 


bate:   "What:  would  a  Bill  of  Eights  do 


Senator  Xfaorvcaldsun  described  the  new  It  would  estafelteh4l'ie  right  of  the  individ- 

law  as  "a  Canadian  Magna  Carta/'  com-  uai  to  go  into  the  courts  o£  this  country? 

pming  it  to  the  great  British  charter  of  thereby  assuring  the  preservation  of  his 

liberties,  which  fa  stttl  famous  more  than  freed onus*  Thwe  groat  tadHioml  rights* 

eight  hundred  years  after  it:  was  granted  are  merely  pious*  ejaculations  imlaKs  tJie 

A.D,  12X&  individual  has  the  right  tn  assert:  them  in 

But  why.  should  Otnada  be  pairing  a.  Bill  the  courts  of  law,"  Fur  .years  DiefernhakEr 

of  Rights  aa  late  as  this  year  1%U?  Great  proclaimed  the  neetf  of  a  Bill  of  Rights  in 

Britain  has  had.  such  a  law  since  1089  m\d  bis  speeches  throughout  the  country.  Par- 

t*ie  United  States  since  1791.  What  back'-  liamentarji-ctimmit^i^aiiid  representatives 

ground  had  drawn  the  attention,  of  Canada  rf  the  Canadian  Bar  Association  argued 

to  the  pnsstnj*  nsed  for  protecting  liberty  ****  question  in  much  detail. 


by  a  wntfe&i  Bill  of  Right's? 


After  many  ywm  of  dterassion  and  put)- 


The  events  leading  up  to  the  enactment  "city,   and.  a  continuing  legal  battle  for 

of  tills  Bill  are  inextricably  entwined  with  freedom    by    Jehovah's    witnesses,    there 

the  history  or.  the  work  of  Jehovah's  wit-  came  an  m^peeted  turn  of  the  political 

newsifts  in  Canada.  Their  battle  lor  freedom  wheel,    md   in    1957    John    Diefenhaker 

of  worship  in  Quebec  focused  public  at-  found  himeelf  prima  minister  of  Canada. 

tention  on  She  need  of  better  protection  Thereafter    he    introduced    the    Bill    of 

■for  civil  liberty.  Freedom-loving  Canadians  Rights  that  haw  now  became  law, 


■were  astoumdied  during  the  decide  of  the 
1940's  to  sera  the  assaults  on  rehgkmfl  lib™ 


The  girjwing  'daims  of  the  prime  minis- 
ter a>:id  fensUor  ThoiTalclson,  howevesr,  as 


erty  endured  by  ■  Jehu  van  *&  w:itne^^e^  in.  the  to  the?  value  of  this  Bill  of.  Rights  ware  by 

CathoIitC'^on ti^ikd   Province   of   Qwebfctv  no  me!ian^  unaniimously  echoed  hy  those 

The  Canadian  public  looked  on  first  with  who  had  studied,  it  carefully-  Profess  en- 

ainazeEnent  md  later  with  genuine  adrasra-  Frank  Soott  of  McGill  University,  a.  ixlc- 

tion  as  they  saw1  the  oourageoos  sl^nd  of  ogniKed  CK)nstitutii.anaJi  authority,  was  in 


favour  of  a  Bill  of  Rights,  but  voiced  dis- 
appointment at  the  one  that  the  govern- 
ment had  passed.  "We  have,"  he  said,  "a 
purely  declaratory  Bill  that  may  fool  us 
into  thinking  that  we  have  achieved  some- 
thing real  when  we  have  actually  achieved 
little  but  a  fine  statement  of  hopes  and 
aspirations."  Consider  also  the  view  of 
Professor  Laskin  of  the  University  of  To- 
ronto Law  School,  who  described  the  Bill 
as  "disappointing  in  its  approach,  unneces- 
sarily limited  in  its  application  and  ineffec- 
tive in  its  substance." 

Provisions  and  Limitations 

Are  the  foregoing  criticisms  justified? 
Or  is  the  Bill  as  valuable  as  the  prime 
minister  contends?  Just  what  does  the  Bill 
of  Rights  provide  for  the  average  Cana- 
dian? It  is  perhaps  best  to  let  it  speak  for 
itself. 

The  preamble  states:  "The  Parliament 
of  Canada,  affirming  that  the  Canadian 
Nation  is  founded  upon  principles  that  ac- 
knowledge the  supremacy  of  God,  the  dig- 
nity and  worth  of  the  human  person  and 
the  position  of  the  family  in  a  society  of 
free  men  and  free  institutions; 

"Affirming  also  that  men  and  institu- 
tions remain  free  only  when  freedom  is 
founded  upon  respect  for  moral  and  spirit- 
ual values  and  the  rule  of  law  .  .  .  There- 
fore enacts  as  follows: 

"Part  I.  1.  It  is  hereby  recognized  and 
declared  that  in  Canada  there  have  existed 
and  shall  continue  to  exist  without  dis- 
crimination by  reason  of  race,  national 
origin,  colour,  religion  or  sex,  the  follow- 
ing human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms, namely 

(a)  the  right  of  the  individual  to  life,  lib- 
erty, security  of  the  person  and  en- 
joyment of  property,  and  the  right  not 
to  be  deprived  thereof  except  by  due 
process  of  law; 

(b)  the  right  of  the  individual  to  equality 


before  the  law  and  the  protection  of 
the  law; 

(c)  freedom  of  religion; 

(d)  freedom  of  speech; 

(e)  freedom  of  assembly  and  association; 
and 

(f)  freedom  of  the  press." 

Section  2  shows  how  the  Bill  is  to  be 
applied:  "Every  law  of  Canada  shall  .  .  . 
be  so  construed  and  applied  as  not  to  abro- 
gate, abridge  or  infringe  .  .  .  any  of  the 
rights  or  freedoms  herein  recognized  and 
declared."  Certain  other  detailed  provi- 
sions state  that  no  law  of  Canada  shall  be 
applied  to  authorize  arbitrary  detention  or 
imprisonment  or  exile  or  the  imposition  of 
cruel  and  unusual  punishment,  or  to  pre- 
vent accused  persons  from  having  a  fair 
trial. 

Under  Section  5  the  Bill  states:  "The 
provisions  of  Part  I  shall  be  construed  as 
extending  only  to  matters  coming  within 
the  legislative  authority  of  the  Parliament 
of  Canada."  In  a  federal  state  such  as  Can- 
ada there  are  some  laws  that  are  within 
the  legislative  authority  of  the  federal 
Parliament  and  others  within  the  legisla- 
tive authority  of  the  individual  provinces. 
The  above  clause  limiting  the  application 
of  Part  I  of  the  Bill  to  the  'matters  coming 
within  the  legislative  authority  of  the  Par- 
liament of  Canada'  reveals  where  one  of 
the  major  weaknesses  of  the  Bill  lies.  This 
means  that  any  person  who  is  deprived  of 
his  liberty,  e.g.,  religion,  speech,  assembly, 
etc.,  due  to  a  law  passed  by  one  of  the 
provinces  can  get  little  help  from  this  Bill 
of  Rights.  In  recent  years  the  bulk  of  the 
denials  of  liberty  have  been  actions  of  the 
provinces.  Since  the  Bill  of  Rights  has  no 
application  to  these  denials,  it  means  that 
much  of  its  potential  value  is  lost. 

In  fairness  it  should  be  stated  that  there 
is  some  question  as  to  whether  the  federal 
government  has  the  constitutional  power 
to  make  the  guarantees  of  liberty  in  its 


FEBRUABY  8,  1961 


9 


Bill  of  Rights  applicable  to  provincial  leg- 
islation. Since  the  government  has  volun- 
tarily limited  the  operation  of  the  Bill  so 
it  does  not  apply  to  provincial  legislation, 
the  question  of  its  constitutional  authority 
to  do  so  will  not  have  to  be  determined. 

Section  6  of  the  Bill  of  Rights  states 
that  in  time  of  war  "any  act  or  thing  done" 
under  the  government's  war  powers  "shall 
be  deemed  not  to  be  an  .  .  .  infringement 
of  any  right  or  freedom  recognized  by  the 
Canadian  Bill  of  Rights."  In  other  words, 
its  operation  is  substantially  suspended 
during  wartime.  It  is  at  the  provincial  lev- 
el and  during  the  stress  of  war  that  most 
assaults  on  civil  liberty  occur.  The  Bill  of 
Rights  would  not  touch  either  of  these 
situations.  Thus,  in  the  places  where  it 
is  most  needed,  it  is  powerless  to  defend 
liberty. 

Despite  its  limitations  as  a  matter  of 
strict  law,  fevy  would  quarrel  with  the  good 
principles  outlined  in  the  Bill  "that  ac- 
knowledge the  supremacy  of  God,  the  dig- 
nity and  worth  of  the  human  person  and 
the  position  of  the  family  in  a  society  of 
free  men."  These  fine  statements  the  peo- 
ple can  now  call  upon  the  government  to 
respect  and  abide  by. 

Why  Needed 

What  was  the  need  or  lack  in  the  law 
of  Canada  that  the  Bill  of  Rights  was  de- 
signed to  All?  Separate  from  the  political 
developments  that  brought  John  Diefen- 
baker  to  power  has  been  the  continuing 
battle  of  Jehovah's  witnesses  for  their 
right  to  worship  in  Quebec.  This  struggle 
brought  home  to  thinking  Canadians  the 
need  of  better  protection  for  their  free- 
doms. The  Toronto  Star,  largest  newspaper 
in  Canada,  said  concerning  the  Bill  of 
Rights:  "That  teeth  are  needed  is  obvious 
when  one  considers  the  long  battle  that  has 
had  to  be  fought  for  freedom  of  religion — 


for  example  in  the  case  or  Jenovan's  wit- 
nesses." 

The  battle  reached  its  height  following 
World  War  II  when  over  1600  cases  were 
fought  in  a  ten-year  period  This  journal 
Awake!  as  well  as  the  ordinary  news  serv- 
ices kept  the  people  informed  of  this  vi- 
cious assault  on  fundamental  freedoms. 

So  concerned  did  the  Canadian  people 
become  that  when  Jehovah's  witnesses  cir- 
culated a  petition  to  Parliament  in  1947, 
calling  for  the  enactment  of  a  Bill  of 
Rights,  over  500,000  persons  supported 
the  petition  by  their  signatures.  In  1949  a 
yet  greater  petition  was  presented  to  Par- 
liament as  625,510  Canadians  signed  a  sec- 
ond petition  circulated  by  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses on  behalf  of  a  Bill  of  Rights.  This 
immense  expression  of  public  opinion  dem- 
onstrates how  prominent  the  issue  was  in 
the  minds  of  the  people.  The  determined 
battle  of  Jehovah's  witnesses  for  their  lib- 
erties in  Quebec  had  caught  the  Canadian 
imagination;  the  people  could  see  the  need 
for  a  Bill  of  Rights  to  stop  the  abuses. 

Parliament,  however,  moved  slowly. 
Committees  were  appointed;  discussions 
were  held.  When  the  attacks  on  the  free- 
doms of  Jehovah's  witnesses  were  at  their 
height,  there  was  no  Bill  of  Rights  to  pro- 
tect them. 

Protection  for  Civil  Liberties 

Since  Parliament  declined  to  take  any 
action,  Jehovah's  witnesses  fought  through 
the  courts  to  protect  their  own  liberties. 
Time  and  again  appeals  were  taken 
through  all  the  courts  to  the  nation's  high- 
est tribunal,  the  Supreme  Court  of  Canada. 

The  first  major  case  was  Boucher  v.  The 
King,  which  arose  out  of  a  charge  of  sedi- 
tious libel.  The  case  was  argued  twice  in 
the  Supreme  Court  and  resulted  in  a  de- 
cision in  favour  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
that  overruled  and  made  obsolete  the  prin- 
ciples set  out  in  all  the  standard  legal  ref- 


10 


AWAKE! 


erences.  So  important  was  the  victory  that 
Dean  Bowker,  head  of  the  University  of 
Alberta  Law  School,  stated:  "A  judgment 
like  Boucher  v.  The  King  is  worth  a  dozen 
declarations  of  the  right  of  free  speech." 

Hard  on  the  heels  of  the  above  case 
came  the  decision  in  Saumur  v.  Quebec, 
where  the  Supreme  Court  again  main- 
tained the  argument  of  Jehovah's  witness- 
es and  granted  an  injunction  against  a  cen* 
sorship  bylaw  of  the  City  of  Quebec  that 
demanded  that  religious  literature  be  ap- 
proved by  the  chief  of  police  before  it  could 
be  distributed.  This  injunction  against  cen- 
sorship was  another  decision  that  protect- 
ed freedom  of  press  and  of  worship. 

In  the  further  case  of  Ckaput  v.  Romain, 
Jehovah's  witnesses  again  successfully  ap- 
pealed to  the  Suprerrie  Court,  and  the  Que- 
bec Provincial  Police  were  roundly  con- 
demned for  interfering  with  freedom  of  as- 
sembly and  freedom  of  worship. 

The  unbroken  string  of  victories  con- 
tinued in  the  next  appeal,  Lamb  v.  Be- 
noit,  where  the  Supreme  Court  condemned 
unlawful  and  discriminatory  police  action. 
In  a  second  decision  rendered  the  same  day 
(January  27,  1959),  Maurice  Duplessis, 
dictatorial  premier  of  Quebec,  was  con- 
demned personally  to  pay  damages  and 
costs  totalling  over  $50,000  to  one  of  Je- 
hovah's witnesses  whose  business  had  been 
ruined  as  a  result  of  Duplessis'  unlawful 
act  of  cancelling  a  license.  Duplessis  died 
in  September,  1959,  shortly  after  paying 
the  penalty  imposed. 

The  value  of  these  decisions  and  of  the 
courageous  stand  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
has  been  warmly  recognized  by  leading 
constitutional  authorities  in  Canada.  Pro- 
fessor Frank  Scott  of  McGill  University,  in 
his  book  Civil  Liberty  and  Canadian  Fed- 
eralism, discusses  the  above  case  of  Lamb 
v.  Benoit:  "The  Lamb  case  is  merely  an- 
other example  of  police  illegality,  but  it  is 
part  of  the  dismal  picture  that  has  too 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


Jften  been  exposed  in  Quebec  in  recent 
rears.  Miss  Lamb,  another  Jehovah's  wit- 
ness, was  illegally  arrested,  held  over  the 
week  end  without  any  charge  being  laid 
against  her,  not  allowed  to  telephone  a 
lawyer,  and  then  offered  her  freedom  on 
condition  she  sign  a  document  releasing 
the  police  from  all  responsibility  for  the 
way  they  had  treated  her.  When  reading 
such  a  story  one1  wonders  how  many  other 
innocent  victims  have  been  similarly  treat- 
ed by  the  police  but  have  not  had  the  cour- 
age and  the  backing  to  push  the  matter 
through  to  final  victory — in  this  instance 
12£  years  after  the  arrest  had  taken  place. 
We  should  be  grateful  that  we  have  in  this 
country  some  victims  of  state  oppression 
who  stand  up  for  their  rights.  Their  vic- 
tory is  the  victory  of  us  all." 

The  same  writer  said  also,  "Five  of  the 
victims  whose  cases  reached  the  Supreme 
Court  of  Canada  in  the  last  decade,  and 
who  have  contributed  so  greatly  to  the 
clarification  of  our  law,  were  Jehovah's 
witnesses."  Another  legal  commentator 
writing  in  the  Faculty  of  Law  Review,  Uni- 
versity of  Toronto,  described  Jehovah's 
witnesses  as  "the  group  most  responsible 
for '  buttressing  the  privileges  of  citizen- 
ship." 

Dean  Ivan  C.  Rand,  former  judge  of  the 
Supreme  Court  of  Canada,  recently  dis- 
cussed some  of  the  above  cases  when  he 
spoke  at  Harvard  Law  School.  "The  free- 
doms we  enjoy,"  he  declared,  "were  won 
by  men  prepared  at  the  risk  of  life  and 
liberty  to  beard  the  brief  authority  sitting 
in  judgment  upon  them  .  .  ,  much  of  pres- 
ent Western  society  demonstrates  the 
truth  of  the  saying,  that  wolves  fight  in 
packs  but  the  lion  fights  alone." 

It  becomes  clear  from  these  statements 
of  recognized  authorities  that  Jehovah's 
witnesses,  as  a  minority,  fighting  against 
great  odds,  have  by  their  courageous 
stand  made  a  major  contribution  to  Ca- 
ll 


nadian  freedom,  and  their  victory  Is  a 
victory  for  the  liberty  of  the  people  of 
Canada.  Freedom  of  worship,  press,  speech 
and  assembly  have  all  been  protected 
through  the  cases  of  Jehovah's  witnesses. 

Effect  of  the  Bill 

Between  the  time  the  Bill  of  Rights  was 
urgently  needed  (circa  1945-50)  and  the 
time  it  was  finally  enacted  (August,  i960) 
the  above  legal  decisions  had  already  es- 
tablished most  of  the  important  principles 
of  liberty  embodied  in  the  Bill,  which  has 
now  become  law.  In  the  main,  the  Bill  does 
not  make  new  law  but  is  a  declaratory 
statement  of  what  the  law  already  is.  It 
does  mean,  however,  that  Parliament  has 
got  behind  the  courts  and  gone  on  record 
as  supporting  the  principles  of  liberty  that 
the  courts  have  enunciated.  The  Bill  of 
Rights  is  also  a  permanent  statement  of 
the  position  of  the  government  in  relation 
to  liberty  which  can  be  appealed  to  in  sit- 
uations where  these  freedoms  have  been 
denied.  It  is  also  useful  as  a  matter  of  pub- 
lic education.  Legally  speaking,  it  is  not 
binding  in  relation  to  provincial  legisla- 
tion, but  may  still  be  strongly  persuasive, 
as  no  court  would  want  to  make  a  decision 
that  was  admittedly  going  against  the 
principles  of  liberty  outlined  in  the  Bill  of 
Rights. 


Many  were  disappointed  that  the  Bill 
did  not  go  farther  and  provide  for  a  direct 
appeal  to  the  courts  in  all  cases  where  the 
defined  liberties  have  been  denied.  The 
hope  has  been  expressed  that  in  time  the 
Bill  can  be  enlarged  to  include  other  pro- 
visions. The  suggestion  has  also  been  made 
that  the  prpvinces  may  be  persuaded  to 
pass  provincial  bills  of  rights  similar  in 
tenor  to  that  of  the  federal  government. 
Such  laws,  if  enacted,  would  certainly 
h»*oaden  the  protection- given  to  civil  lib- 
erties. 

The  real  legal  value  of  the  Bill  of  Rights 
will  be  conclusively  determined  only  when 
the  passage  of  time  opens  the  door  for  its 
broad  terms  to  be  analyzed  by  the  courts 
in  cases  that  are  presented.  Meanwhile  Je- 
hovah's witnesses  will  continue  to  make 
their  staunch  stand  far  freedom,  using 
both  the  Bill  of  Rights  and  the  common- 
law  principles  already  established.  They 
appreciate  the  well-meant  efforts  of  liberty- 
loving  legislators  and  judges  who  take  steps 
to  protect  fundamental  freedoms  in  a  dem- 
ocratic state.  Primarily,  however,  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  rely  on  their  great  Father 
and  Lawgiver,  Jehovah  God,  to  maintain 
their  freedom  to  honour  his  name  and  to 
proclaim  his  everlasting  kingdom  of  jus- 
tice, peace  and  righteousness. 


moMH  msnsras 

*f.  "Civilized  warfare,"  says  Lewis  Mumf ord  in  the  Atlantic  magazine  of  October, 
1959,  "has  always  been  an  atrocity  per  se,  even  when  practiced  by  gallant  men 
fighting  in  a  Just  cause.  But  in  the  course  of  five  thousand  years  certain  inhibitions 
And  moral  safeguards  had  been  set  up.  Thus,  poisoning  the  water  supply  and 
slaying  the  unarmed  inhabitants  of  a  city  were  no  longer  within  the  modern 
soldier's  code,  however  gratifying  they  might  once  have  been  to  an  Ashurbanipal 
or  a  Genghis  Khan,  moral  monsters  whose  names  have  become  infamous  in  history. 
Overnight,  as  it  were,  our  own  countrymen  became  such  moral  monsters.  In 
principle,  the  extermination  c&mpa  where  the  Nazis  incinerated  over  six  million 
helpless  Jews  were  no  different  from  the  urban  crematoriums  our  air  force 
improvised  in  Its  attacks  by  napalm  bombs  on  Tokyo.  By  these  means,  In  a  single 
night,  we  roasted  alive  more  people  than  were  Killed  by  atom  bombs  in  either 
Hiroshima  or  Nagasaki," 


12 


AWAKE! 


WOULD 


Ider  People 

^^  BE  FORCED  TO 


6t\7"OU  simply  must  retire!"  a  71-year- 
X  old  professor  was  told,  "You  are 
too  old  to  work."  But  the  professor  did 
not  feel  old;  he  was  filled  with  dreams 
and  knowledge  and  wanted  to  keep  on 
working.  But  a  retirement  plan  forced 
him  out  of  a  job  and  a  younger  man  took 
his  place. 

One  of  the  professor's  former  students, 
however,  showed  compassion  and  got  the 
lively  "old"  man  a  job  in  the  research 
laboratory  of  a  pharmaceutical  concern. 
Three  years  later,  at  the  age  of  seventy- 
four,  professor  Benjamin  Duggar  gave  the 
world  aureomycin,  a  drug  that  has  saved 
the  lives  of  countless  people,  controlling 
such  diseases  as  scarlet  fever,  trachoma, 
tularemia  and  many  others.  What  a  bless- 
ing for  humanity  that  professor  Duggar 
kept  working! 

"The  idea  that  old  people  want  or  de- 
serve leisure,"  said  Dr.  Martin  Gumpert, 
former  chief  of  the  Geriatric  Clinic  at  the 
Jewish  Memorial  Hospital,  New  York  city, 
"has  been  one  of  the  most  stupid  stipula- 
tions of  the  human  mind."  Less  than  5  per- 
cent of  the  workers  in  good  health  who 
have  retired  have  done  so  because  they 
wanted  to.  Most  people  of  advanced  age 
want  to  work.  Work — not  leisure — is  the 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


miracle  drug  badly  needed  by  the  aged. 
In  recent  years,  unworthy,  bitter  prej- 
udices have  arisen  against  hiring  the  aged. 
This  tragic  fact  is  revealed  by  the  United 
States  Department  of  Labor  survey  that 
shows  half  of  all  employ- 
ers have  age  restrictions, 
and  that  between  50  and 
60   percent   of   the   job 
openings  are  still  not 
BE  FORCED  TO  available  to  men 

over  40  or  45,  or 
to  women  over 
35.  The  percent- 
age of  workers 
age  sixty-five  and 
over  in  America's  labor  force  has  dropped 
"from  80,6  percent  in  1870  to  41  percent 
today."  Older  people  can  still  find  work, 
but  jobs  are  hard  to  find.  In  fact,  it  is 
about  twice  as  hard  to  get  a  job  after  forty- 
five  as  it  is  before  that  age. 

The  aged  are  discriminated  against,  not 
on  the  basis  of  their  personal  qualities  or 
abilities,  but  because  they  have  passed  a 
certain  chosen  year.  A  young  man  of  twen- 
ty has  a  bad  memory  if  he  forgets  some- 
thing; but  if  a  man  over  fifty  forgets,  he 
may  be  suspected  of  senility.  If  a  young 
man  has  a  heart  attack  or  loses  an  arm 
in  an  accident,  people  expect  him  to  make 
a  comeback.  If  an  older  man  has  a  heart 
attack  or  by  arthritis  loses  the  use  of  his 
hand,  too  often  he  is  crossed  off  as  having 
outlived  his  usefulness.  "We  ignore  the 
fact,"  says  Oveta  C.  Hobby,  former  Secre- 
tary of  the  United  States  Department  of 
Health,  "that  his  brain  still  holds  priceless 
memories  and  skills  left  by  experience, 
that  his  wisdom  is  as  great  as  ever,  and 
that  he  probably  needs  his  work  now  as 
much  as  he  did  at  forty-five." 

This  sort  of  thinking  hardly  existed  a 
century  ago,  when  about  one  fortieth  of 
the  people  of  the  United  States  were  older 
than  sixty-five  and  more  than  half  of  the 


13 


nation's  population  lived  in  the  country. 
There  was  always  plenty  to  do  for  the 
middle-aged,  the  young  and  the  old  alike. 
The  sick  or  handicapped,  whether  old  or 
young,  were  cared  for  by  the  family;  often 
neighbors  helped  as  well.  The  aged  re- 
mained a  part  of  the  working  family  as 
long  as  they  lived. 

In  patriarchal  times,  ancient  Hebrew  fa- 
thers were  greatly  beloved.  They  continued 
as  heads  of  their  households  till  the  day 
they  died.  They  were  respected  in  the  com- 
munity for  their  wiadom  and  advice.  Di- 
vine commands  were  given  that  a  man 
should  honor  his  father  and  mother  and 
rise  up  before  gray  hair  and  give  consid- 
eration to  the  person  of  an  old  man.  Wom- 
en were  not  to  be  despised  because  they 
had  grown  old.  Truly,  ancient  civilizations 
had  respect  and  a  place  for  the  aged. — Gen. 
42:1,  2;  Ex.  20:12;  Lev.  19:32;  Prov.23:22. 

The  Golden  Age  of  Youth 

However,  with  the  introduction  of  the 
twentieth  century  and  its  high-pressure 
industrial  age,  there  have  come  changes. 
Only  a  small  fraction  of  America's  popu- 
lation today  lives  in  the  rurals.  Vast  num- 
bers of  people  work  in  industries  and  live 
in  crowded  rooms.  The  aged  have  become 
a  burden  and  their  contributions — un- 
wanted. 

The  modern  industrial  pace  calls  for 
elasticity  and  flexibility,  strength  and  mo- 
bility— all  qualities  of  youth.  So,  quite  nat- 
urally, youth  is  desired,  while  the  older, 
less  resilient,  slowed-down  worker  is 
shoved  into  the  background.  Almost  every 
effort  is  put  forth  to  satisfy  the  desires  of 
the  young,  but  relatively  little  is  being 
done  to  meet  the  needs  of  the  old.  What 
has  become  the  golden  age  of  youth  has 
turned  out  to  be  the  dark  ages  for  many 
older  persons. 

There  is  growing  concern  that  America, 
in  her  increased  devotion  to  youth,  has  be- 


come blind  to  the  important  contributions 
that  older  persons  make  to  society.  The 
nation  seems  to  have  forgotten  that  "64 
percent  of  the  world's  great  achievements 
have  been  accomplished  by  men»who  had 
passed  their  sixtieth  year."  It  seemingly 
ignores  the  fact  that  good  qualities  of 
thoroughness,  balance,  precision,  dependa- 
bility and  wisdom  come  with  age.  It  also 
appears  to  have  lost  sight  of  the  fact  that 
today  there  are  nearly  3,000,000  workers 
over  sixty^fivG  contributing  over  $12,000,- 
000,000  to  the  country's  economic  growth, 
that  there  is  another  $4,000,000,000  avail- 
able if  the  nation  would  allow  its  unem- 
ployed who  are  over  sixty-five  to  go  back 
to  work. 

Perhaps  an  oversight  that  is  even  more 
important  is  the  tragic  waste  in  lost  skills 
and  technical  knowledge  when  older  per- 
sons are  denied  a  chance  to  work  or  are 
forced  out  of  work  by  retirement  plans. 
G.  Warfield  Hobbs,  chairman  of  the  Na- 
tional Committee  of  the  Aging,  stated  that 
half  of  America's  9,000  scientists  and 
32,500  engineers  over  sixty-five  are  re- 
tired "We  talk  of  educating  youngsters  in 
science,"  he  said,  "but  we  overlook  those 
we  already  have.  A  scientist  in  the  hand 
is  worth  two  in  the  cradle." 

A  Growing  Problem 

While  America  may  be  honoring  its 
youth  in  one  way,  it  is  storing  up  a  seri- 
ous economic  burden  for  them  in  another 
way.  In  1900  the  average  boy  in  the  United 
States  could  expect  to  live  48,2  years,  as 
opposed  to  66.6  in  1951.  This  difference 
can  mean  only  one  thing,  namely,  more 
old  people.  There  are  approximately  15,- 
000,000  persons  in  the  United  States  sixty- 
five  years  of  age  or  over,  or  about  one 
for  every  four  or  five  persons  employed. 
By  1975  there  will  be  more  than  20,000,000. 

In  Canada,  where  the  age  problem  is 
similar   to   that   existing   in   the  United 


14 


AWAKE! 


States,  a  recent  estimate  of  life  expectancy 
of  males  was  67.6  years,  and  of  the  fe- 
males 73  years.  In  1955  Canada  had  1,730,- 
000  persons  who  were  sixty  years  and 
over;  it  is  estimated  that  by  1980  the  num- 
ber will  be  3,345,000,  an  increase  of  93 
percent! 

What  do  these  statistics  mean?  Prima- 
rily this:  the  more  people  forced  off  the 
payroll  because  of  their  age,  the  greater 
the  burden  will  be  upon  young  taxpayers 
to  care  for  them.  Some  four  fifths  of  those 
who  retire  in  the  United  States  today  have 
a  total  income  under  $2,000  a  year.  That 
is  hardly  enough  to  survive  on.  The  re- 
sult is  that  charitable  relatives  and  emer- 
gency arrangements  must  make  up  the 
difference.  Is  youth  ready  to  tackle  this 
growing  burden  heaped  on  it  by  modern 
society  or  will  it  allow  capable  old  people 
to  go  back  to  work  and  care  for  them- 
selves? That  decision  must  be  made  soon. 

The  Right  to  Work 

Old  people  have  just  as  much  of  a  right 
to  make  a  living  and  be  independent  of 
their  children  and  relatives  and  not  be  de- 
pendent on  public  assistance  as  anyone 
else.  A  worker  receives  a  sense  of  enjoy- 
ment from  productive  activity.  Old  people 
especially  crave  a  sense  of  worth,  a  feeling 
of  productivity.  Case  histories  disclose  that 
this  is  the  driving  force  that  "influences 
at  least  80  percent  of  the  people  who  con- 
tinue to  work  past  the  age  of  sixty-five." 

One  of  the  most  terrible  experiences  of 
old  age  is  the  isolation  and  the  loneliness 
that  follow  retirement — having  nothing  to 
do.  Walter  D.  Fuller,  former  chairman  of 
the  board  of  the  Curtis  Publishing  Com- 
pany,~said:  "It  is  sheer  mental  and  moral 
suicide  to  force  a  man  with  a  keen  mind, 
alert  faculties  and  a  fine  record  of  achieve- 
ment to  sit  on  the  sidelines  and  watch  the 
world  go  by."  If  nothing  else,  work  pro- 
vides an  escape  from  loneliness  by  open- 


ing up  the  way  for  group  participation. 
Some  people  are  ready  for  retirement 
and  seem  to  enjoy  it  thoroughly.  If  they 
can  afford  it  and  are  happy  in  it,  then 
there  is  no  reason  why  they  should  not 
enjoy  it.  However,  others  are  not  ready  to 
retire.  They  do  not  want  to  fish,  play  golf 
or  grow  begonias.  They  want  to  work.  To 
refuse  such  the  right  to  work  has  caused 
much  mental  and  physical  harm.  "I'm 
ready  for  the  scrap  heap,"  said  a  depressed 
soul  whose  blood  pressure  soared  and 
whose  breathing  became  short.  Then  she 
was  offered  a  job.  Work!  At  twenty-five 
she  would  have  groaned,  but  at  sixty-five 
it  was  the  sweetest  word  she  could  think 
of.  Almost  immediately  she  felt  better. 
Her  blood  pressure  went  down  and  her 
breathing  became  normal.  Her  doctor  was 
amazed.  "Don't  ever  give  up  that  job!" 
he  warned.  True,  recreation  and  hobbies 
can  give  one  a  lift,  but  they  cannot  give 
one  the  sense  of  worth  that  work  gives. 

Weighed  in  the  Balance 

There  are  various  reasons  given  for  not 
employing  older  people.  Some  workers  say 
their  worst  enemies  are  the  pension  and 
retirement  plans  that  many  firms  have  in- 
stituted to  protect  their  employees.  To  hire 
a  man  over  forty-five  years  old  a  firm 
may  have  to  pay  twice  as  much  in  premi- 
ums as  for  a  man  in  his  thirties. 

The  general  feeling  among  some  em- 
ployers is  that  older  people  work  too  slow 
to  meet  the  production  requirements,  that 
they  are  "too  set  in  their  ways,"  less  crea- 
tive than  younger  workers,  harder  to 
train,  more  prone  to  accidents  and  absen- 
teeism. No  doubt  some  of  these  traits 
characterize  some  older  people  as  well  as 
some  young  people,  but  certainly  not  all. 

Studies  have  proved  most  of  these  "rea- 
sons" to  be  myths.  For  example,  a  sur- 
vey of  3,313,000  employees  made  by  the 
National    Association    of    Manufacturers 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


15 


showed  that  in  work  performance  "92  per- 
cent of  the  older  workers  were  equal  or 
superior  and  only  seven  percent  were  not 
equal  to  younger  workers."  Li  experiments 
having  to  do  with  "perceptual  motor  skills," 
older  men  made  no  more  errors  than  the 
younger  men,  but  they  took  a  little  more 
time.  The  report  stated  that  perhaps  this 
was  "a  manifestation  of  the  greater  care 
and  accuracy  employed  by  older  people." 

Where  workers  could  set  their  own  pace 
and  distribute  tfeeir  own  work  load,  tests 
showed  "older  workers  had  better  merit 
ratings  than  younger  ones."  In  another 
study,  no  variation  of  merit  ratings  attrib- 
utable to  age  was  found  "between  those 
under  forty-five  and  those  above  that  age." 

Employers  interested  not  only  in  the  ef- 
ficiency of  workers  but  also  in  the  fre- 
quency of  costly  accidents  and  in  absen- 
teeism found  most  studies  to  indicate  that 
"accident  rates  are  lower  among  those  45 
or  over  than  among  younger  workers,  and 
lower  after  65  than  before."  The  absen- 
teeism rate  due  to  all  causes,  including  ac- 
cidents, was  "lower  in  all  age  brackets 
above  49  than  in  any  younger  age  brack- 
et." This  would  indicate  that  older  workers 
have  less  disabling  illness,  as  well  as  a 
lower  accident  rate,  than  younger  workers. 

Older  Workers  Are  the  Cream 

Many  industries  that  have  hired  young- 
er workers  are  now  switching  back  to  old- 
er workers.  An  official  of  a  Chicago  de- 
partment store  that  has  switched  to  older 
workers  said:  "Hiring  employees  Over  40 
is  good  business  for  us."  He  stated  that 
what  may  be  lost  in  speed  among  older 
workers  is  more  than  made  up  by  higher- 
quality  work.  The  Waltham  Watch  Com- 
pany has  found  that  "in  precision  work, 
the  productivity  and  accuracy  of  older 
workers  offset  the  greater  physical 
strength  and  dexterity  of  younger  employ- 
ees." In  Olympia,  Washington,  a  firm  that 


hired  younger  workers  because  of  expected 
greater  output  switched  back  to  older 
workers  when  it  got  a  high  rate  of  rejec- 
tion of  the  products  made  by  the  younger, 
less  experienced  and  less  patient  workers. 
A.  young  president  of  a  New  Jersey  elec- 
tronic firm  said  that  older  workers  have 
"upgraded  the  whole  level  of  work'?  at 
his  place.  The  Pitney-Bowes  Company  of 
Stamford,  Connecticut,  experimenting  with 
the  use  of  older  workers,  says:  "Ability, 
loyalty  and  experience  are  often  hard  to 
buy  in  the  labor  market,  and  discarding 
men  with  these  characteristics  because  of 
age  is  more  wasteful  than  prudent." 

To  hold  that  a  man's  usefulness  ends  at 
a  certain  age  is  a  dangerous  generality. 
For  it  is  a  known  fact  that  men  at  sixty 
can  have  a  physical  difference  of  as  much 
as  forty  years.  One  man  at  forry-J3ve  may 
look,  act  and  work  like  the  average  man 
at  sixty-five,  while  another  at  seventy  may 
be  no  different  from  the  average  man  of 
fifty.  Therefore,  it  is  foolish  to  judge  the 
work  capacity  of  the  whole  by  one  indi- 
vidual. For  example,  Sir  Winston  Churchill 
was  sixty-six  when  he  became  the  wartime 
.Prime  Minister  of  Great  Britain.  Seventy- 
year-old  Eisenhower  shouldered  the  bur- 
dens of  America  as  president.  Grandma 
Moses  took  up  painting  at  eighty  to  be- 
come a  most  successful  artist  This  does 
not  mean  that  all  aged  people  can  take  on 
such  heavy  burdens  and  learn  careers,  but 
it  does  show  that  some  aged  people  have 
tremendous  capacities  for  work,  that  na- 
tions derive  large  benefits  from  their  wis- 
don^  and  experience  if  they  are  not  forced 
to  retire. 

The  great  majority  of  older  people  are 
happier  and  better  off  when  they  continue 
in  some  productive  work.  Work,  in  moder- 
ation, is  vital  to  their  happiness,  and  it  is 
conducive  to  health  and  long  life.  Since  the 
old  and  the  young  benefit  from  older  people 
working,  why  not  let  them  work? 


16 


AWAKE! 


SNOWY  MOUNTAINS  SCHEME 


By  "Awoke  I"  coiretpondant  In  Auitratia 

STUPENDOUS  is  the  word  for  the 
kj  Snowy  Mountains  Scheme.  It  is  on 
such  a  vast  scale1  that  it  commands  a  place 
alongside  the  contemplated  Aswan  Dam  of 
the  Nile  and  the  St.  Lawrence  Seaway. 

Why  such  an  ambitious  scheme,  and  just 
what  is  it?  Australia  is  the  driest  conti- 
nent in  the  world.  Much  of  the  interior  is 
extremely  dry;  indeed,  over  one  third  of 
the  country  has  a  desert  rainfall  of  less 
than  ten  inches  yearly.  The  Snowy  Moun- 
tains Scheme  is  a  hydroelectric  project  to 
make  use  of  the  melting  snows  of  the  only 
part  of  Australia  that  has  an  extensive 
snowfall. 

An  idea  of  how  stupendous  the  project 
is  may  be  evident  from  the  fact  that  the 
final  completion  date  is  scheduled  for  1975! 
And  the  Snowy  Mountains  Authority  was 
set  up  in  August,  1949! 

Carrying  out  the  project  involves  the 
construction  of  7  major  dams,  17  power 
stations  (many  of  them  underground),  83 
miles  of  tunnels,  over  300  miles  of  race  lines 
or  aqueducts  that  will  lead  streams  to  res- 
ervoirs and  tunnels;  shafts  ranging  up  to 
1,100  feet  in  depth,  and  some  hundreds 
of  miles  of  mountain  roads.  The  whole 
scheme,  covering  some  3,000  square  miles 
of  the  Australian  Alps,  has  been  called 
"one  of  the  world's  largest  water  develop- 
ment projects." 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


The  scheme  has 
two  parts.  The  first 
part  consists  of  di- 
verting the  runoff 
of  the  melting  win- 
ter snows  from  their 
natural  course 
over  already 
well-watered 
country.  The 
diversion  is 
designed  to 
cause  the  wa- 
ter to  flow  to- 
ward the  dry 
country  of  the 
west.  In  the  process 
of  carrying  out  this  diversion,  the  waters 
will  fall  more  than  2,000  feet.  This  fall 
furnishes  the  power  to  be  used  to  generate 
electricity  to  supplement  the  main  power 
lines  of  both  New  South  Wales  and  Vic- 
toria. This  is  the  second  part. 

Much  preliminary  work  had  to  be  car- 
ried out  before  construction  could  be 
started.  This  has  been  no  small  task,  for 
the  area  involved  is  a  hundred  miles  long 
and  thirty  miles  wide,  rough  and  moun- 
tainous. Ground  crews  carried  out  geologi- 
cal surveys  over  the  whole  area.  Further 
preliminary  work  resulted  in  a  new  town- 
ship with  over  600  cottages,  together  with 
hostels,  barracks,  shops,  medical  centers, 
recreation  buildings  and  other  community 
facilities  for  about  4,000  people. 

The  Snowy  Mountains  Scheme  is  not 
solely  a  long-term  project  for  the  benefit 
of  people  in  years  to  come.  Power  and  wa- 
ter for  irrigation  are  already  being  pro- 
duced. More  will  be  supplied  progressively 
as  the  project  nears  completion. 

The  present  irrigation  areas  of  the  dry 
western  plains  receive  their  water  from 
two  large  rivers,  the  Murray  and  the  Mur- 
rumbidgee  Rivers.  Both  rise  in  the  Aus- 
tralian Alps.  The  water  in  these  rivers, 

17 


however,  is  not  adequate  for  increased  ir- 
rigation nor  suitable  for  the  generation  of 
power.  This  is  where  the  ether  streams 
rising  in  the  same  Alps  are  being  utilized. 
These  other  streams,  the  Snowy  River  and 
its  tributary,  the  Eucumbene,  will  be  held 
back  by  huge  dams  before  the  waters  leave 
the  highlands  and  are  diverted  through 
tunnels  under  the  mountains  to  both  the 
Murray  and  Murrumbidgee  Rivers. 

The  SntHcy-Murray  Section 

The  scheme  falls  neatly  into  two  sec- 
tions. One  is  called  the  Snowy-Murray  De- 
velopment. It  deals  with  the  water  that  will 
find  its  way  into  the  Murray  River  system 
of  irrigation.  This  development  is  designed 
to  impound  a  net  storage  of  1,100,000 
acre  feet*  <47,&16,000,000  cubic  feet)  — 
three  times  the  voJume  of  water  in  Sydney 
harbor,  one  of  the  largest  natural  harbors 
In  the  world.  The  water  will  be  used  to 
generate  electrical  power  and  will  then 
flow  eventually  into  the  Murray  River, 

The  high  lights  of  this  section  include 
the  construction  of  ten  power  stations  and 
a  tunnel  thirty  miles  long  under  the  moun- 
tains. The  only  part  of  this  scheme  op- 
erating at  present  is  called  the  Guthega 
Project,  a  power  station  operated  as  a 
self-contained  unit. 

A  length  of  about  eighteen  miles  of  rein- 
forced concrete  pipe  aqueducts  is  a  feature 
of  this  project.  They  run  along  the  con- 
tour high  up  on  the  mountainsides  to  col- 
lect the  upper  reaches  of  creeks  that  other- 
wise would  flow  into  the  Snowy  River 
downstream  from  the  reservoir  and  so  be 
lost.  About  one  third  of  the  electricity  out- 
put of  this  project  is  generated  by  water 
collected  by  these  aqueducts.  Guthega  has 
been  operating  since  February,  1955.  Other 
parts  of  the  plan  are  now  under  way,  and 
the  first  of  the  major  works  of  this  section, 

*  Cne  ai:re  loot  1$  t^.e  amount  of  water  required  to 
cover  an  acre  of  ground  to  a  depth  of  one  toot. 


the  concrete  dam  and  fifteen  miles  of  the 
tunnel,  Is  scheduled  for  completion  iri  1963. 

The  Snowy-Tumut  Development 

This  section  is  by  far  the  more  complex 
of  the  two.  It  involves  the  diversion  cf  the 
Eucumbene,  the  Tooma  and  the  Upper 
Murrumijidgee  Rivers  to  the  Tumut  River. 
An  outstanding  feature  is  the  driving  cf 
nearly  fifty  miles .  of  tunnels  under  the 
mountains.  The  combined  flow  of  the  riv- 
ers Is  to  pass  through  a  series  of  power 
stations  distributed  along  some  thirty 
miles  of  its  route,  as  it  flows  on  its  way 
to  the  irrigation  areas  of  the  Murrumbidg- 
ee Valley.  This  will  result  in  a  gain  of  one 
million  acre  feet  a  year,  enough  water  to 
meet  the  requirements  of  a  city  of  a  mil- 
lion people  for  six  years. 

To  enable  proper  regulation  of  the  wa- 
ter through  the  power  stations,  the  largest 
of  tine  Snowy  River  tributaries,  the  Eu- 
cumbene,  will  be  checked  and  stored  in  a 
dam — the  Eucumbene.  This  dam,  com- 
pleted in  1957  by  a  group  of  American  con- 
tractors two  years  ahead  of  schedule,  is 
half  a  mile  thick  at  the  base  and  381  feet 
high.  It  is  claimed  to  be  one  of  the  largest 
earth-and-rock-fiH  dams  in  the  world,  and 
the  quantity  of  water  held  back  equals 
eight  times  the  volume  of  water  in  the 
Sydney  harbor.  The  electrical  power  po- 
tential of  this  stored  water  is  equivalent 
to  the  total  amount  of  electricity  consumed 
in  New  South  Wales  in  two  years. 

Also  completed  is  the  longest  tunnel  in 
Australia  at  the  present  time:  a  twenty- 
one-foot-diameter  tunnel  that  is  fourteen 
miles  long.  It  takes  the  water  from  Lake 
Eucumbene  under  the  Great  Dividing 
Range  to  another  storage  point  called  the 
Tumut  Pond  en  the  Tumut  River. 

Dam  and  Underground  Power  Station 

The  Tumut  Pond  Dam  was  completed  in 
1958.  It  is  a  concrete  arch  structure  2S3 


18 


AWAKE! 


feet  high  and  670  feet  long  at  the  crest, 
with  a  thickness  varying  from  SO  feet  at 
the  base  to  14  at  the  crest. 

From  the  Tumut  Pond  Dam  the  water 
runs  through  a  mile-and-a-half  tunnel  to 
two  vertical  shafts  that  lead  to  a  huge 
underground  cavern  1,000  feet  below  the 
surface — the  first  of  five  hydroelectric 
power  stations  to  be  built  on  the  Tumut 
Riverj'Work  began  on  this  power  station, 
called  T.  1,  in  1954.  A  group  of  French 
contractors  completed  the  excavation  for 
this  power  station,  and,  by  early  1959,  two 
turbogenerators  with  a  capacity  of  160,- 
000  kilowatts  were  installed.  Two  more 
generators  are  yet  to  be  installed,  making 
a  total  final  capacity  of  320,000  kilowatts. 

From  the  Tumut  Pond  Reservoir  the 
waters  of  the  Tumut  and  the  diverted  wa- 
ters of  the  Upper  Murrumbidgee,  Eucum- 
bene  and  Tooma  Rivers  flow  through  the 
power  stations  and  into  the  Murrumbidgee 
River.  This  will  enable  the  prosperous  ir- 
rigation areas  of  the  Murrumbidgee  Valley 
to  be  extended  farther  into  the  dry  western 
plains. 

A  unique  feature  is  the  330,000-volt 
transmission  line  to  carry  power  from  the 
Snowy  River  power  stations  to  the  main 
load  centers  in  both  New  South  Wales  and 
Victoria.  This  voltage  is  claimed  to  be  the 
highest  used  anywhere  jn  the  world  for 
transmission  over  long  distances. 

The  magnitude  of  the  whole  undertaking 
can  be  judged  by  a  folder  advertising  tour- 
ist facilities  in  connection  with  the  Scheme. 
The  Authority  has  encouraged  visitors  to 
the  area;  year  by  year  more  and  more  peo- 


ple are  taking  advantage  of  this  opportu- 
nity. Conducted  tours  take  two  and  a  half 
days,  with  stops  overnight  in  the  Authori- 
ty's townships. 

The  stupendous  Snowy  Mountains 
Scheme,  then,  is  no  longer  a  dream.  Al- 
ready a  supply  of  electricity  for  industry 
and  water  for  irrigation  is  a  reality.  Water 
is  supplied  free  of  charge  to  the  states 
concerned;  the  Scheme  will  be  financed  by 
the  sale  of  electricity  to  the  consumer 
states  of  New  South  Wales  and  Victoria. 

Completion  of  the  Snowy  Mountains 
Scheme  will  mean  about  2,000,000  acre 
feet  (87,120,000,000  cubic  feet)  of  addi- 
tional water  each  year  for  use  in  irriga- 
tion in  the  Murrumbidgee  and  Murray  Val- 
leys. This  increased  water  supply  will  mean 
an  increase  of  1,000  square  miles  in  the 
amount  of  land  under  irrigation,  resulting, 
in  turn,  in  an  increased  food  production  to 
the  value  of  £30,000,000  each  year.  The 
annual  energy  output  of  the  generating 
plant  is  to  be  nearly  6,000  million  kilowatt- 
hours  — about  double  Australia's  present 
total  generating  capacity. 

By  working  with  nature  man  can  ac- 
complish many  wonderful  things,  for  the 
laws  of  Almighty  God  were  all  designed  so 
that  keeping  them  and  using  them  unself- 
ishly will  always  result  in  good.  The  Snowy 
Mountains  Scheme  shows  what  can  be 
done  to  make  better  use  of  natural  re- 
sources, and  what  man  is  capable  of  doing 
when  he  turns  from  destructive  works  to 
works  of  construction. 

•  One  kilowatt-hour  is  the  amount  of  electricity  re- 
Quired  to  light  a  100-watt  bulb  for  ten  hours. 


■•THE      LUCKLESS      LEGION" 

C  In  its  annual  highway  safety  booklet  entitled  "The  Luckless  Legion,"  The 
Travelers  Insurance  Companies  pointed  out:  "This  is  an  army  o£  suffering  humanity 
which  grows  more  rapidly  each  year.  It  is  made  up  of  the  injured  and  the  dead, 
the  heedless  and  the  innocent,  the  young  and  the  old.  Since  the  automobile  first 
appeared  on  the  American  scene,  these  ranks  of  the  crippled  and  the  dead  have 
included  more  than  60,000,000  of  us." 


FEBRUARY  S,  1961 


19 


PAe 


ty  "AwoW  corrupondtnl 
in  Iniicrmio 


FEW  islands  have  been  made  more  in- 
triguing to  armchair  travelers  than  the 
storybook  land  of  Bali.  Just  what  is  it 
about  this  isle  that  seems  to  make  it  ever 
exotic?  Could  it  be  the  festive  funerals, 
the  bizarre  cremations,  the  gala  cockfight- 
ing  or  the  fantastic  trance  dancing?  In  a 
sense,  yes;  but  underlying  all  these  things 
is  a  religiosity  that  pervades  the  whole  fab- 
ric of  the  island's  society.  Even  Balinese 
dancing  cannot  be  separated  from  religion, 
nor  religion  from  all  of  life. 

The  various  names  given  the  isle  of  Bali 
reflect  its  religiosity,  such  as  "Thousand 
Temples"  and  "The  Isle  of  Gods."  Temples, 
shrines  and  altars  are  certainly  of  fore- 
most importance  on  the  island.  They  come 
in  all  sizes  and  vary  from  the  modest  fam- 
ily shrines  in  homes  to  the  extravagant 
temples,  small  or  large,  in  the  markets,  on 
the  beaches,  in  caves,  on  deserted  hilltops 
and  even  on  barren  rocks  along  the  coast 
line. 

What  is  this  Balinese  religion  that  is  so 
much  a  part  of  everyday  life?  It  is  a  mix- 
ture of  many  religions.  Every  time  a  new 

20 


religion  was  introduced  to  the  island,  some 
of  it  seems  to  have  been  assimilated  into 
their  own.  Balinese  religion  is  thus  a 
modified  Hindu  religion  blended  with 
Buddhism  and  overlaid  with  elements 
of  the  islander's  originaljiature  wor- 
ship. It  is  called  Bali-Hinduism;  in 
this  polytheistic  religion  the  wor- 
shipers view  Siva,  Brahma  and 
Vishnu  as  the  most  important 
gods. 

The  determining  factor  in 
virtually  all  Balinese  activi- 
ty, the  main  pivot  around 
which  life  revolves,  is  the 
belief  that  the  island  is  the 
property  of  gods  and  Is  handed  down  in 
sacred  trust  to  the  people.  In  expressing 
their  gratefulness  .for  such  a  high  trust, 
the  people  devote  much  of  their  time  to 
offerings,  purifications,  temple  festivals, 
dances,  cremations  and  other  religious  ob- 
servances. 

Festive  Funerals 

Funeral  ceremonies  are  not  occasions  of 
great  sadness  and  mourning  for  the  Bali- 
nese; such  is  a  time  for  much  merriment 
and  celebration.  The  bodies  of  the  dead 
are  cremated  to  the  accompaniment  of 
fantastic  ceremonies.  To  the  Balinese  the 
only  thing  of  value  is  the  soul,  which  they 
believe  is  immortal;  and  so  the  body  is 
considered  something  vile  to  be  got  rid  of. 
At  the  cremation  the  corpse  will  be  poked 
in  the  fire  with  long  sticks  by  women  and 
men  who  will  be  making  loud  jokes  and 
scolding  the  corpse  for  not  burning  faster 
so  they  can  go  home. 

The  ceremonial  burning  of  the  dead 
means,  they  believe,  liberation  for  the  soul 
so  that  it  can  attain  to  higher  worlds  and 
be  free  for  reincarnation.  This,  however, 
is  believed  to  depend  on  a  person's  life  on 
earth,  whether  it  has  been  good  or  bad. 
A  man  guilty  of  serious  crime  is  believed 

AWAKE! 


to  be  punished  by  being  reborn,  often  for 
periods  of  thousands  of  years,  as  a  tiger, 
dog  or  snake. 

The  man  of  low  caste  attributes  his  state 
to  former  misconduct,  redeemable  in  fu- 
ture life  only  through  a  virtuous  existence. 
Such  will  enable  him,  he  believes,  to  be  re- 
born to  a  higher  state.  Between  reincarna- 
tions he  is  believed  to  go  to  a  heaven  where 
life  is  just  like  Bali,  only  devoid  of  all  trou- 
ble and  illness.  But  this  process  does  not 
go  on  forever,  since  he  hopes  eventually  to 
obtain  liberation  from  this  cycle  of  births 
and  become  a  god.  It  is  believed  that  one's 
life  on  earth  is  but  an  incident  in  the  long 
process  of  the  soul's  evolution.  Unless  the 
body  of  the  dead  is  obliterated  by  some 
means  such  as  fire,  the  soul  is  believed  to 
continue  to  hover  near  the  dead  body  and 
turn  into  a  ghost  to  haunt  the  careless 
descendants.  The  life  ambition  of  the  Ba- 
linese is  the  grand  send-off  of  the  soul  into 
heaven  by  means  of  a  rich  and  complete 
cremation. 

Some  families  save  for  years  to  raise 
funds  for  the  costly  cremation  ceremonies. 
During  such  long  waits,  the  body  remains 
buried  until  cremation  honors  can  be  paid 
for.  When  money  becomes  available,  the 
remains  of  the  corpse  are  dug  up. 

The  date  for  the  cremation  is  fixed  by 
the  priest.  An  effigy  of  the  dead  person  is 
made.  This  is  taken  in  procession  to  the 
grave,  since  it  is  believed  that  the  soul  has 
been  captured  in  the  effigy.  After  further 
ceremonies  at  the  grave  the  procession  re- 
turns home.  All  this  is  accompanied  with 
the  sprinkling  of  much  holy  water  and  of- 
ferings for  the  soul  and  for  the  gods.  There 
is  much  playing  of  music,  dancing  and 
public  reading  of  Balinese  religious  classics. 

The  following  day  the  procession  starts 
to  the  cremation  grounds,  where  further 
elaborate  preparations  have  been  made. 
The  orchestra  takes  the  lead  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  dancers.  Then  come  the  men 


carrying  the  coffin  with  the  remains  of  the 
body.  This  coffln  is  often  in  the  form  of  an 
animal.  The  coffin  for  the  aristocracy  is  a 
hollowed-out  log  shaped  in  the  form  of  a 
bull  or  cow;  the  animal-shaped  coffin  is 
beautifully  polished  and  expensively  deco- 
rated. For  lower  castes  the  body  may  be 
placed  in  a  coffin  shaped  in  the  form  of  a 
lion  or  deer. 

Next  in  the  procession  come  the  women 
who  are  carrying  the  effigy;  finally,  the 
bearers  of  the  cremation  tower.  The  cre- 
mation towers  may  be  elaborately  decorat- 
ed, and  some  of  them  may  reach  sixty  feet 
in  height.  The  bearers  of  the  cremation 
tower  are  not  silent  but  raucously  noisy. 
They  shout  furiously  and  whirl  and  sway, 
in  the  belief  that  this  misleads  the  spirit 
of  the  dead  so  that  it  cannot  find  its  way 
back  to  the  house. 

At  the  site  for  the  cremation,  various 
accessories,  including  considerable  ransom 
money  to  Yama,  viewed  as  lord  of  hell,  are 
spread  over  the  body.  These,  including  the 
body,  coffin,  effigy  and  tower,  are  burned 
together.  Water  is  poured  over  the  embers; 
the  remaining  bits  of  bone  and  ashes  are 
then  blessed  by  the  priest,  and  a  new  pro- 
cession carries  these  remains  to  the  sea  or 
river,  where  they  are  disposed  of. 

In  former  times  widows  of  deceased  no- 
tables, along  with  many  of  their  female 
slaves,  were  burned  alive  on  their  hus- 
band's pyre.  Others  were  pierced  with  a 
poniard  before  being  consigned  to  the 
flames.  Princesses  of  royal  blood  are  said 
to  have  leaped  alive  into  the  flames,  con- 
sidering it  a  great  dishonor  for  anyone  to 
lay  hands  on  them.  It  is  said  that,  due  to 
prearrangements,  some  were  so  thorough- 
ly hypnotized  that  they  jumped  into  the 
fire  as  if  jumping  into  a  bath. 

Balinese  Dancing 

A  great  deal  of  religious  significance  is 
attached  to  Balinese  dancing;  some  dances 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


21 


depict  famous  mythological  epics  found  in 
Hindu  stories.  Every  village  has  its  own 
orchestras  and  dance  teams.  These  per- 
form a  great  variety  of  dances  for  many 
occasions,  such  as  at  marriages  and  reli- 
gious festivals.  No  ceremony  or  holiday 
passes  without  dancing.  In  the  religious 
dances  the  community  amuses  itself  and 
at  the  same  time  tries  to  propitiate  the 
gods  and  ward  off  evil  spirits. 

One  of  the  most  renowned  of  Balinese 
dances  is  the  legong,  in  which  the  main 
roles  are  performed  by  two  small  girls. 
They  dance  gracefully  in  quick  eye,  hand 
and  hody  movements  to  the  vigorous  tem- 
po of  the  music.  They  are  especially  picked 
and  trained  extensively  from  the  age  of 
about  five  years.  At  the  age  of  twelve  they 
are  considered  too  old  to  perform  this 
dance. 

Another  dance,  the  sanghjang,  is  per- 
formed from  a  sitting  position.  It  is  a 
trance  dance.  Seated  in  a  small  square,  sur- 
rounded by  musicians,  the  dancer  throws 
herself  under  the  absolute  influence  of  the 
music,  being  moved,  swayed  and  driven  by 
it  to  the  most  minute  details  of  the  tones 
and  rhythms. 

Many  of  the  dances  are  performed  under 
trance  or  semitrance.  There  are  violent 
dances  in  which  the  performers,  in  a 
trance,  simulate  self-torture  with  knives  or 
walk  on  fire  to  appease  evil  spirits  and  to 
show  their  supernatural  powers.  Before 
any  performance  a  dancer  will  present 
small  offerings  to  the  deities  of  the  dance. 

In  one  of  the  dances,  tjcdaon  arnag,  a 
battle  between  a  witch  and  the  main  play- 
er is  enacted.  The  most  frightening  part 
of  the  dance  is  when  his  followers  become 
suddenly  entranced  and,  to  display  their 
invulnerability,  stab  themselves  repeatedly 
with  sharp  daggers,  yet  remain  unharmed 
and  unscratched. 

The  gods  of  Bali,  according  to  their  tra- 
dition, can  be  appeased  and  appealed  to  by 

22 


the  performance  of  various  dances.  Epi- 
demics of  malaria  and  tropical  fevers  to- 
ward the  end  of  the  rainy  season  are  at- 
tributed to  the  appearance  of  evil  spirits. 
Offerings  are  made  to  placate  them,  and 
good  spirits  are  implored  to  come  down  to 
protect  the  distressed  community.  Per- 
formance of  the  dance  aanghjang  dedari  is 
believed  to  be  one  of  the  most  effective 
means  to  drive  away  the  evil  spirits.  Two 
little  girls  are  trained  to  go  into  trance. 
Each  night  for  weeks  men  and  women 
chant  strange  rhythms  in  the  temple.  By 
degrees  the  little  girls  respond  to  the  hyp- 
notic power  of  the  chanting;  the  village 
priest  and  the  girls  are  able  to  fall  into  a 
deep  trance.  A  formal  performance  can 
now  be  given. 

Even  though  the  girls  have  never  re- 
ceived dancing  lessons,  once  in  a  trance, 
they  are  able  to  dance  in  any  style — even 
styles  that  would  take  an  ordinary  dancer 
months  and  years  of  training.  The  Balinese 
say  that  the  goddesses  are  performing  the 
dance  in  the  bodies  of  the  little  girls.  The 
girls  can  do  supernatural  feats  under  these 
spells,  such  as  scattering  live  coals  of  fire 
with  their  feet  or  taking  a  bath  in  fire.  Or 
the  girls  may  climb  on  the  shoulders  of  the 
men  and  perform  dances  in  which  they 
bend  at  incredible  angles  and  balance  pre- 
cariously from  their  position.  The  cere- 
mony lasts  for  two  or  three  hours,  and  de- 
spite the  intensity  of  the  performance  the 
girls  give  no  evidence  of  exhaustion, 

Cockfighting  and  Artistic  Expression 

One  may  well  imagine  that  in  Bali  even 
cockfighting  has  some  link  witty  religion, 
and  that  is  right.  Cockfighting  has  its  ori- 
gin in  a  religious  ceremony  of  the  past. 
At  certain  times  blood  would  be  shed  for 
Siva,  viewed  as  the~highest  god  in  the  Hin- 
du trinity  and  to  whom  temples  in  Bali  are 
dedicated.  Cockfights  are  still  held  in  con- 
nection with  cleansing  the  land  from  evil 
spirits.  The  lighthearted  Balihese  consid- 

AWAEE! 


ers  cockflghting  not  only  a  religious  duty 
but  the  opportunity  for  a  little  gambling, 
sport  and  excitement  Almost  every  village 
has  its  special  cockflghting  arena,  and  in 
almost  every  house  one  can  see  the  fight- 
ing cocks  kept  in  beautifully  built  bamboo 
cages.  The  birds  are  given  the  utmost  care, 
being  massaged,  bathed  and  trained  daily. 
Sharp  blades  are  tied 
to  the  spurs  of  the 
cocks  in  the  arena. 
The  fighting  is  usual- 
ly very  brief;  the  first 
deep  strike  of  a  spur 
ends  the  life  of  one  of 
the  beautiful  cocks. 

Almost  all  Balinese  consider  themselves 
artists  in  one  way  or 'another:  as  dancers, 
musicians,  carvers  of  wood,  workers  of 
silver  and  gold.  Artistic  expression  is  re- 
garded as  part  of  their  religious  activities. 
Their  temples  display  the  skillfulness  of 
their  art.  Women  excel  in  weaving  beau- 
tiful garments  in  cotton  and  silk  and  tex- 
tures of  gold  and  silver  thread.  "The  most 
intriguing  textiles,"  says  one  writer  on  Ba- 
li, are  those  "in  which  the  dyeing  and 
weaving  process  is  so  complicated  that 
years  of  labor  are  required  to  complete  a 
scarf."  Many  of  the  beautiful  stuffs  woven 
by  Balinese  women  are  used  for  religious 
rites  and  dance  costumes. 

Describing  an  unusual  aspect  of  Bali- 


COMING  IN  THE  NEXT  ISSUE 

#  The  Twentieth  Century  tn  Bible  Prophecy, 
Q  Tragedy    of    Vientiane.  S 

#  Hypnosis — A    Oangerou*   Two-edged 
Sword. 

9  The   Expanding  World  of  P lattice 
and   You. 


nese  artistic  expression,  Miguel  Covanu- 
bias  writes  in  his  book  Island  of  Bali:  "I 
have  seen  monuments,  seven  feet  in  height, 
made  entirely  of  roasted  pig's  meat  on 
skewers,  decorated  into  shapes  cut  out  of 
the  waxy  fat  of  the  pig  and  surmounted 
with  banners  and  little  umbrellas  of  the 
lacy  stomach  tissues,  the  whole  relieved  by 
the  vivid  vermilion 
of  chili-peppers."  At 
temple  festivities 
rdast  pigs  are  offered 
to  their  gods  and  eat- 
en later  by  the  people. 
Though  Bali  itself 
is  a  beautiful  isle,  full 
of  contrasts,  with  a  profusion1  of  vegeta- 
tion and  marvelous  distant  views  from  the 
mountains,  it  is  the  people  that  make  the 
land  a  storybook  subject.  But  for  real  hap- 
piness the  Balinese  need  more  than  artis- 
tic expression.  They  need  the  knowledge 
of  the  true  God,  "Jehovah,  the  Maker  of 
heaven  and  earth.  As  regards  the  heavens, 
to  Jehovah  the  heavens  belong,  but  the 
earth  he  has  given  to  the  sons  of  men." 
(Ps.  115:15, 16)  Blessed  are  those  Balinese 
and  those  of  all  races  and  tongues  who  turn 
from  false  gods  of  wood  and  stone  and  wor- 
ship the  true  God,  Jehovah.  The  hope  of 
living  forever  under  the  kingdom  of  heav- 
en and  of  using  all  their  artistic  abilities  to 
beautify  the  whole  earth  to  the  glory  of 
Jehovah  God  is  theirs! 


ELEPHANT  KNOW-HOW 

C  Discussing  some  of  the  little-known  abilities  of  elephants,  Christopher  Rand, 
writing  in  Natural  History  of  September,  1959,  tells  of  an  interview  with  a  man 
employed  in   the  teak  forests   of  Thailand.   "I  asked  what  an  elephant's   most 
striking  talents  were.  He  said  that  walking  on  slippery  ground  was  one,  the  kind 
of  ground  where  a  man  could  barely  move  with  hobnailed  boots— elephants  gripped 
on  to  such  places  like  an  octopus.  Then,  they  were  good  at  untangling  log  jams. 
They  would  go  out  into  a  stream,  groping  along  the  bottom  with  their  trunks, 
and  would  sense  what  log  was  holding  the  jam  up.  'You  find  the  elephant  fiddling 
around,'  he  said,  'and  suddenly  the  whole  stack  begins  to  move.  A  human  can't 
do  that,  but  an  elephant  knows  just  how  to  go  about  it.  And  it's  a  dangerous  job.' " 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


23 


A  SUBMARINE  that  operates  in  rivers 
and  that  uses  green  grass  as  fuel — 
that  is  something  found  only  in  naturel 
Yes,  the  hippopotamus  is  nature's  subma- 
rine monster,  a  twelve-  to  fourteen-foot- 
long  submersible  that  runs  on  the  surface, 
entirely  under  water  or  submerged  with 
only  "periscope"  and  "snorkel"  exposed; 
and  it  can  even  run  on  the  river  bottom. 
If  the  hippo's  anger  is  aroused,  this  four- 
ton  living  submarine  can  send  a  boat  to 
the  bottom  with  torpedolike  suddenness. 

The  river  is  the  patrol  ground  of  this 
unique  submarine  monster.  At  one  time 
the  hippo  cruised  throughout  most  of  the 
rivers  of  Africa,  but  now  it  has  disap- 
peared from  many  regions  and  is  said 
to  be  unknown  north  of  the  cataract  at 
Khartoum,  in  the  Anglo-Egyptian  Sudan, 
"It  used  to  inhabit  the  Nile  to  its  estuary 
in  the  Mediterranean,"  says  zoologist  Ivan 
Sanderson,  "where  it  was  known  to  the 
ancients  as  the  'behemoth'  or  translitera- 
tions thereof — a  word  that  appears  to  be 
of  Assyrian  origin  and  to  mean  monster." 

This  monster  is  caUed  "behemoth"  in  the 
King  James  Version  Bible,  but  modern 
translations  usually  use  the  word  hippopot- 
amus, which  means  "river  horse."  The 
hippo  is  one  of  the  few  animals  that  is 


;^&^p:>^aw-t.e  extensively  de- 

''||P$filljj|i^  in  the  Bible-and 

||^§^^^^-|Jehovah  himself.  To 

^^^^^S^yustrate   God's   mighty 

"fjpGwer  and  man's  insig- 

Sfflciifi'ce',   Jehovah  calls 

's  attention  to  vari- 

.aspects  of  nature,  in- 

"  "*  eluding  this  out- 

of-the-ordinary 

water  beast: 

"Here,  now,  is 
the  hippopota- 
mus that  I  have 
made  as  well  as 
you.  Green  grass 
it  eats  just  as  a  bull  does.  Here,  now,  its 
power  is  in  its  hips,'  and  its  dynamic  en- 
ergy in  the  tendons  of  its  belly.  It  bends 
down  its  tail  like  a  cedar;  the  sinews  of 
its  thighs  are  interwoven.  Its  bones  are 
tubes  of  copper;  its  strong  bones  are  like 
wrought-iron  rods.  It  is  the  beginning  of 
the  ways  of  God;  its  Maker  can  bring  near 
his  sword.  .  .  .  Under  the  thorny  lotus 
trees  it  lies  down,  in  the  hiding  place  of 
reeds  and  the  swampy  place. ...  If  the  riv- 
er acts  violently,  it  does  not  run  in  panic. 
It  is  confident,  although  the  Jordan  should 
burst  forth  against  its  mouth." — Job  40: 
15-23. 

Masterful  Construction 

Indeed  what  power  this  grass-eating 
hippo  has!  When  traveling  from  one  wa- 
ter system  to  another,  this  monster  some- 
times enters  gardens  and  plantations,  plow- 
ing through  like  a  bulldozer,  demolishing 
anything  less  than  fair-sized  trees.  Its 
strong-boned  legs  uphold  a  massive  body 
weighing  from  5,000  to  8,000  pounds. 

If  a  river  overflows  its  banks,  the  hippo 
does  not  panic.  It  can  make  its  way  up- 
stream at  a  good  pace  even  against  a  rapid 
current.  When  going  ashore,  the  hippo  can 
clamber  up  steep  banks  with  amazing  pow- 


24 


AWAKE! 


er  and  speed;  and  despite  Its  ungainly  ap- 
pearance it  can  run  as  fast  as  a  man.  But 
during  most  of  the  day,  hippos  live  in  the 
water.  Living  in  herds  of  twenty  to  thirty, 
they  frequently  sleep  in  the  sun,  each  mon- 
ster using  another's  back  as  a  pillow.  Their 
hiding  is  in  the  swampy  place,  and  they 
are  fond  of  relaxing  in  the  still  reaches  of 
sluggish  rivers,  Tliey  sometimes  sleep  on 
the  sandy  bank  or  among  thick  beds  of 
reeds. 

"Green  grass  it  eats,"  says  the  Creator. 
And  what  an  enormous  appetite  this  mon- 
ster has!  Feeding  on  soft  water  plants,  on 
grass  and  bushes  bordering  the  water,  it 
can  put  from  200  to  400  pounds  of  green- 
ery into  its  forty-  or  fifty-inch  stomach 
every  day. 

Though  the  build  and  face  of  a  hippo 
may  seem  grotesque  and  inapt  in  design, 
it  is  masterfully  constructed  for  feeding  on 
grass  and  dwelling  in  rivers.  The  hippo  can 
swim  on  the  surface  or  submerge  until  only 
its  eyes  and  nostrils  can  be  seen.  Strate- 
gically located  at  the  tip  of  his  snout,  the 
hippo's  nostrils  serve  as  a  snorkel,  enabling 
the  monster  to  breathe  while  its  great 
bulky  body  is  submerged. 

If  the  hippo  wishes  to,  it  can  dive  to  the 
bottom  faster  than  any  man-made  sub- 
marine. When  surfacing,  the  hippo's  nos- 
trils open  with  a  loud  snort  and  a  whale- 
like blast  of  water.  This  submarine  mon- 
ster can  even  submerge  and  surface  while 
sleeping.  When  the  carbon  dioxide  in  the 
hippo's  blood  reaches  a  certain  threshold, 
the  animal  automatically  surfaces  to  ex- 
change stale  air  for  fresh  air;  then  the 
sleeping  hippo  submerges  again. 

The  hippo's  sickle-shaped  teeth  are  well 
designed  for  cutting  tall  reeds,  grasses  and 
water  plants.  And  what  a  mouth!  The 
mouth  of  a  full-grown  hippo  can  reach  a 
width  of  two  feet  and  open  up  to  a  colossal 
size,  making  it  the  largest  mouth  of  any 
mammal  except  the  whale.  This  cavernous 

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


mouth  scoops  up  food  and  the  huge  jaws 
crush  the  mass,  making  it  ready  for  swal- 
lowing. 

Running  Under  Water 

Wherever  he  can  find  his  vegetation  din- 
ners, Mr.  Hippo  will  take  them:  on  land, 
in  the  water,  even  on  the  river  bottom. 
When  diving,  the  hippo's  ears  and  valve- 
like nostrils  close,  just  as  a  submarine 
closes  all  hatches.  The  hippo  then  leisurely 
cruises  along  the  river  bottom,  rooting  up 
water  plants  with  its  tusks.  After  about 
three  to  eight  minutes,  it  surfaces  for  a 
breath  of  air,  then  submerges  again.  It  has 
been  said  that  a  hippo  can  stay  under  for 
thirty  minutes,  but  many  authorities  chal- 
lenge that  view,  believing  about  nine  min- 
utes to  be  the  limit. 

If  this  submarine  monster  wishes  to,  it 
apparently  can  travel  on  the  river  bottom 
at  a  good  speed,  "The  queerest  trick  which 
a  hippo  possesses,"  says  Frank  Lane  in 
Nature  Parade,  "is  its  ability  to  run  along 
the  bottom  of  a  river.  The  famous  British 
animal  photographer,  Cherry  Kearton,  was 
once  walking  along  the  bank  of  an  African 
river.  He  surprised  a  young  hippo,  which 
immediately  dived  into  the  river  and  sank. 
Kearton  says:  'As  the  water  was  fairly 
clear,  I,  from  the  top  of  the  bank,  could 
see  him,  not  swimming,  but  actually  run- 
ning along  the  bed  of  the  river,  leaving  a 
trail  of  mud  behind  him;  and  so  fast  did 
he  go  that,  although  I  followed  him  as  fast 
as  the  bushes  along  the  bank  would  let  me, 
he  went  out  of  my  sight  in  75  yards.'  If 
Kearton  ran  at  only  5  miles  an  hour,  that 
gives  a  speed  for  the  hippo  in  the  region 
of  8  miles  an  hour — running  beneath 
water!" 

A  further  aid  for  its  in-and-out-of -water 
existence  is  the  hippo's  built-in  hide  con- 
ditioner. The  skin  of  hippos  exudes  large 
drops  of  oil  that,  in  sunlight,  take  on  a  pink 
color.  This  oily  substance  seems  to  keep 

25 


their  skin  moist  and  pliable  under  the  hot 
sun  and,  at  the  same  time,  forms  a  protec- 
tive veneer  when  the  monster  submerges. 

Peace-loving  but  •Unpredictable 

Being  grass  eaters,  hippos  are  hardly  on 
the  lookout  to  devour  humans.  "Though  of 
a  mild  disposition,"  says  Ivan  Sanderson, 
"the  hippopotamus  is  a  rather  fussy  ani- 
mal and  adopts  a  highly  proprietary  atti- 
tude to  its  own  chosen  stretch  of  river. 
Normally,  it  moves  out  of  the  way  of  boats 
and  then  floats,  just  below  the  surface, 
with  its  periscope  eyes  protruding  from  the 
surface,  observing  the  intruder,  its  small 
ears  flickering  constantly  and  vigorously. 
However,  it  may  for  reasons  known  only 
to  hippopotamuses  rush  upon  a  luckless 
passing  craft  and  either  stamp  it  under- 
water or  chew  it  up." 

One  hardly  knows,  then,  whether  or  not 
one  of  these  submarine  monsters  will  sud- 
denly surface  and  capsize  a  boat  with  its 
bulk  or  torpedo  a  boat  with  its  teeth.  Dr. 
Albert  Schweitzer  says:  "The  natives  are 
very  much  afraid  of  them  and  always  give 
them  a  wide  berth,  for  the  animals  are  un- 
predictable in  their  temper  and  have  al- 
ready destroyed  many  a  boat."  Dr.  Schwei- 
tzer tells  of  a  hippo  that  made  a  branch  of 
a  river  leading  to  a  certain  lake  perilous 
by  attacking  every  boat.  Ten  men  lost  their 
lives  before  this  submarine  monster  could 
be  shot.  Dr.  Schweitzer  further  writes,  as 
quoted  in  The  Animal  World  of  Albert 
Schweitzer: 


"A  missionary  formerly  stationed  in 
Lambarene  used  to  make  fun  of  the  anx- 
iety of  his  paddlers,  and  urge  them  to  ap- 
proach nearer  the  hippopotamuses.  One 
day  as  he  was  just  about  to  laugh  at  them 
again,  the  boat  was  flung  into  the  air  by 
a  suddenly  emerging  hippopotamus,  and 
only  with  difficulty  were  he  and  his  crew 
able  to  save  themselves.  All  his  baggage 
was  lost.  Later  he  had  the  hole  that  the 
animal  had  made  in  the  thick  shell  of  the 
boat  sawn  out  to  keep  as  a  souvenir." 

Four  men  in  a  boat  on  the  Kafue  River 
in  Northern  Rhodesia  recently  had  their 
craft  torpedoed:  The  hippo's  teeth  ripped 
through  the  galvanized  iron  side  of  the 
boat  at  water  level.  Only  by  desperate  pad- 
dling and  bailing  did  the  men  reach  safety. 

Why  does  the  peace-loving  hippo  some- 
times turn  itself  into  a  warlike  submarine? 
One  theory  is  that  the  hippo  might  view 
the  boat  as  some  kind  of  crocodile;  and 
hippos  will  not  tolerate  crocodiles  when 
baby  hippos  are  nearby.  When  a  crocodile 
tries  to  make  a  meal  of  a  baby  hippo,  the 
protecting  hippo  turns  its  torpedo  power 
against  the  crocodile.  And  what  is  the 
tough  armor  plate  of  a  crocodile  to  a  hip- 
po? With  one  bite,  the  hippo  pierces  the 
reptile's  armor,  just  as  easily  as  a  human 
crunches  a  stalk  of  celery. 

Thus,  whether  in  crocodile-infested  wa- 
ters or  in  the  rampaging  waters  of  an 
overflowing  river,  the  mighty  hippo  dwells 
securely.  As  its  Maker  said:  "It  is  confi- 
dent "—Job  40:23. 


BIRTHDAY   FOR   A    PORPOISE 

ffl,  Typically,  a  mammal  is  born  head  first.  A  porpoise,  however,  enters  life  under 
water,  and  if  it  emerged  head  first,  it  might  drown  before  being  completely  born, 
for  the  process  sometimes  requires  an  hour  or  more.  So  the  baby  porpoise  is  born 
tail  first.  And  as  soon  as  its  head  is  free,  the  mother  jerks  her  body  to  break 
the  umbilical  cord,  and  her  newborn  calf  rises  to  the  top  of  the  water  for  its 
first  breath  of  air.  Different  from  other  mammals,  too,  the  baby  porpoise  is  not 
completely  helpless  when  first  born.  It  can  swim  Immediately,  its  small  tail  flukes 
beating  the  water  furiously  to  keep  up  with  its  mother. — Science  Digest. 


26 


AWAKE! 


IN  THE  name  of  science  many  arguments 
are  used  to  try  to  discredit  the  Bible. 
One  of  these  is  that  it  presents  an  unscien- 
tific view  of  prenatal  influence.  By  pre- 
natal influence  is  meant  "the  effect  upon 
the  offspring  of  any  condition  or  activity 
of  the  mother  during  the  period  of  preg- 
nancy."— Medical  Dictionary,  Dorland. 

The  scientific  view  is  that  any  sustained 
undue  stress  that  a  pregnant  woman  is 
subject  to  will  adversely  affect  her  off- 
spring. In  support  of  this  the  Jtmerican 
Journal  of  Orthopsychiatry;,  April,  1960, 
contained  two  articles  dealing  with  pre- 
natal influence.  Among  other  things  these 
stated:  "There  is  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
a  variety  of  stresses  administered  to  the 
mother  during  pregnancy  can  have  a  pro- 
found and  lasting  effect  on  the  offspring." 
"The  offspring  of  mothers  who  have  suf- 
fered strong  emotional  stress  during  preg- 
nancy are,  to  all  intents  and  purposes, 
neurotic."  "Prenatal  diet  played  the  most 
important  role  in  determining  the  intellec- 
tual potential  of  infants." 

In  passing  let  it  be  noted  that  these 
findings  contain  much  food  for  thought  for 
prospective  parents  and  especially  for 
mothers.  Additionally,  they  fall  right  in 
line  with  the  principles  set  forth  in  God's 
Word,  the  Bible.  These  show  that  no  one 
"can  produce  someone  clean  out  of  some- 
one unclean,"  and  that  "whatever  a  man 
is  sowing,  this  he  will  also  reap." — Job  14: 
4;  Gal.  6:7. 


The  unscientific  view  held  in  ancient 
times,  and  by  some  people  yet,  is  that  al- 
most everything  a  mother  sees  or  experi- 
ences marks  her  unborn  offspring.  Thus  in 
ancient  Egypt  it  was  believed  that  if  a 
pregnant  cow  viewed  certain  spots  her 
calf  would  be  marked  by  such  spots.  Among 
the  hardy  Spartans  there  was  a  law  re- 
quiring pregnant  women  to  look  at  cer- 
tain choice  statues  so  that  their  offspring 
would  be  strong  and  beautiful.  Hippocrates, 
the  father  of  modem  medicine,  taught  that 
strong  emotions  experienced  by  a  mother 
would  mark  her  child.  And  Socrates,  sup- 
posedly one  of  the  wisest  men  of  all  times, 
thought  that  a  child  was  born  with  a  hare- 
lip, a  divided  lip  like  that  of  a  hare,  be- 
cause the  mother  had  seen  a  hare  while 
being  with  child.  In  fact,  to  this  day  there 
are  some  who  believe  that  physical  blem- 
ishes in  children  are  due  to  gruesome  or 
horrible  sights  that  their  mothers  saw 
while  carrying  them. 

Up  until  the  present  time  there  has  been 
no  evidence  in  support  of  such  a  view  of 
prenatal  impressions.  It  is  held  to  be  un- 
scientific because  there  is  no  nerve  con- 
nection between  the  mother  and  the  child 
she  carries  in  her  womb;  even  as  the  blood 
of  the  mother  does  not  mix  with  the  blood 
of  the  fetus  she  is  carrying,  the  mother's 
blood  feeding  the  fetus  by  means  of  osmo- 
sis or  absorption.  Thus  we  see  a  scientific, 
factual  view  and  an  unscientific  supersti- 
tious view  of  prenatal  influence,  the  latter 
perhaps  being  better  termed  "maternal  im- 
pressions." 

Critics  claim  that  the  Bible  teaches  this 
unscientific  view  of  prenatal  impressions. 
Where?  In  connection  with  the  flocks  of 
Laban  that  Jacob  the  patriarch  shepherd- 
ed. Jacob  had  wanted  to  leave  his  father- 
in-law  Laban  but  agreed  to  remain  if  for 
his  wages  he  received  all  the  speckled  and 
color-patched  sheep,  dark-brown  rams,  and 


FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


27 


color-patched  and  speckled  goats  among 
Laban's  flocks.  Laban  was  to  continue  to 
have  as  his  own  all  the  plain  or  uniformly 
colored  ones. 

Apparently  Jacob  had  a  certain  view  of 
maternal  impressions,  for  he  placed  staffs 
that  he  had  peeled  so  as  to  present  a 
striped  and  spotted- appearance  "in  front 
of  the  flock,  in  the  gutters,  in  the  water 
drinking-troughs,  where  the  flocks  would 
come  to  drink,  that  they  might  get  into  a 
heat  before  them  when  they  came  to  drink. 
Consequently  the  flocks  would  get  in  heat 
before  the  staffs,  and  the  flocks  would  pro- 
duce striped,  speckled  and  color-patched 
ones.  .  .  .  And  it  always  occurred  that 
whenever  the  robust  flocks  would  get  in 
heat,  Jacob  would  locate  the  staffs  in  the 
gutters  before  the  eyes  of  the  flocks,  that 
they  might  get  in  heat  by  the  staffs.  But 
when  the  flocks  became  feeble  he  would 
not  locate  them  there.  So  the  feeble  ones 
always  came  to  be  Laban's,  but  the  robust 
ones  Jacob's.— Gen.  30:37-42. 

What  the  Bible  critics  have  overlooked 
here  is  that,  while  the  Bible  tells  of  Jacob's 
having  a  particular  view  of  prenatal  in- 
fluence and  of  his  flocks  increasing,  this 
was  true  only  when  he  began  to  carry  out 
this  agreement.  The  rest  of  the  record 
shows  that  he  repeatedly  attributed  the  in- 
crease to  God;  at  the  same  time  it  throws 
light  on  just  how  the  increase  in  the 
striped  and  spotted  flocks  did  take  place. 
This  is  clear  from  what  Jacob  said  in  plead- 
ing his  cause  against  Laban  with  his  wives: 

"God  kept  taking  the  herd  of  your  fa- 
ther away  and  giving  it  to  me."  How?  "It 
came  about  at  the  time  when  the  flock  got 
in  heat  that  I  raised  my  eyes  and  saw  a 
sight  in  a  dream  and  here  the  he-goats 
springing  upon  the  flock  were  striped, 
speckled  and  spotty.  Then  the  angel  of  God 
said  to  me  in  the  dream,  'Jacob!'  to  which 
I  said:  'Here  I  am.'  And  he  continued, 
'Raise  your  eyes,  please,  and  see  all  the  he- 


goats  springing  upon  tne  nock  are  striped, 
speckled  and  spotty,  for  I  have  seen  all 
that  Laban  is  doing  to  you.'  " — Gen.  31: 
9-12. 

How  are  we  to  understand  this  vision 
and  the  words  of  the  angel?  Since  the  he- 
goats  belonged  to  Laban,  they  could  not 
have  been  spotted,  and  yet  they  so  ap- 
peared to  be  to  Jacob  and  they  produced 
spotted  offspring.  Could  this  be  possible? 
Yes,  if  they  were  hybrids  that  had  genes 
for  producing  striped,  speckled  and  spotty 
offspring  although  they  themselves  were 
plain-colored.  This  would  be  the  case  if 
somewhere  along  the  line  these  plain- 
colored  goats  had  a  parent  that  was  spotted, 
and  so  these  goats  could  beget  such  spotted 
offspring  although  they  themselves  were 
not  so  marked.  This  is  in  accordance  with 
the  laws  of  heredity  as  discovered  by  the 
nineteenth-century  Austrian  botanist,  Men- 
del. Jacob,  by  supernatural  vision,  in  a 
dream  and  at  the  instance  of  the  angel  of 
God,  could  see  these  goats  for  what  they 
could  beget  as  hybrids,  and  therefore  as 
marked  rather  than  as  plain-colored  ani- 
mals. 

The  record  also  tells  us  that  the  stronger 
animals  were  those  belonging  to  Jacob. 
How  can  this  be  accounted  for?  In  that  the 
striped,  speckled  and  spotty  animals  were 
hybrids,  and  today  it  is  a  Known  fact  that 
hybrids  are  stronger  than  uncrossed  breeds. 
While  the  foregoing  explains  how  these 
things  occurred,  we  may  not  overlook  the 
most  important  factor  of  all,  namely,  that 
Jehovah  God  is  given  the  credit  for  the 
increase. 

So  we  see  the  Bible  again  vindicated, 
both  by  what  it  says  and  by  what  it  does 
not  say.  It  does  not  leave  us  to  conclude 
that  the  increase  in  Jacob's  flocks  was  due 
to  prenatal  influence.  And  it  shows  that 
while  Jacob  had  a  certain  view  of  prenatal 
influence,  he  did  not  attribute  the  increase 
in  his  flocks  to  his  own  efforts  but  to  Jeho- 
vah God's  providence. 


28 


AWAKE! 


v»»      «* 


*|  WATCHING 


ORLD 


Belgians  Strike 

<$>  A  widespread  strike  against 
the  Belgian  government's  aus- 
terity program  that  began  in 
mid-December  erupted  in  vio- 
lence on  December  28.  The 
austerity  program  is  aimed  at 
saving  the  country  6,000,000,- 
000  Belgian  francs  (about 
$120,400,000).  The  objection- 
able part  of  the  program  is 
that  it  Included  higher  taxes 
and  reduced  welfare  spending. 

Tito  Blasts  West 

<§>  On  December  26  President 

Tito  of  Yugoslavia  accused  the 
West  of  being  responsible  for 
much  of  the  discord  in  the 
modern  world.  He  said  that  as 
far  as  "the  most  important  is- 
sues of  the  day"  are  concerned, 
his  nation  and  the  Soviet  Union 
see  eye  to  eye. 

Friendship  Treaty  Signed 

<$>  Japan  and  Pakistan  signed 
a  treaty  of  friendship  and  com- 
merce on  December  18.  The 
agreement  is  expected  to  in- 
crease trade  between  the  na- 
tions. Under  the  terms  of  the 
pact  both  countries  will  waive 
visas  and  fees  for  Japanese  or 
Pakistanis  visiting  each  other's 
country. 

U.S.  Government  Income 

<$>  The  United  States  Budget 
Bureau  estimated  that  by  1970 
the  government's  income  will 
be  In  the  vicinity  of  $120,000,- 

FBBRUARY  8,  1961 


000,000,  a  $40,000,000,000  in- 
crease in  ten  years.  Revenues 
for  1960  were  about  $81,000,- 
000,000. 

Israel  Moves  Toward  A-Bomb 
<%■  There  was  considerable  anx- 
iety that  Israel  was  about  to 
join  the  group  of  nations  with 
the  capacity  to  produce  atomic 
weapons.  The  Atomic  Energy 
Commission  chairman  John  A. 
McCone  said,  on  December  18, 
that  Israel  was  questioned 
about  the  rumors,  and  the  re- 
ply from  the  chairman  of 
Israel's  Atomic  Energy  Com- 
mission was  to  the  effect  that 
the  reports  were  "flattering  . . . 
but  untrue."  A  spokesman  for 
the  Israeli  Embassy  said  Is- 
rael's atomic  research  pro- 
gram Is  "directed  exclusively 
to  peace  uses." 

Bisk  or  Disaster? 

#  The  British  physicist,  Sir 
Charles  P,  Snow,  warned  the 
world  on  December  27  of  the 
danger  of  an  atomic  bomb 
build-up.  Within  six  years,  he 
said,  a  dozen  or  more  nations 
will  be  in  position  to  build 
atomic  bombs.  Snow  stated 
that  "if  enough  of  these  weap- 
ons are  made — by  enough  dif- 
ferent states — some  of  them 
are  going  to  blow  up.  Through 
accident,  or  folly,  or  madness 
—but  the  motives  don't  matter. 
What  dcss  matter  is  the  na- 
ture of  the  statistical  facts." 


He  urged  American  scientists 
to  take  a  "direct  and  personal 
responsibility"  in  seeking  a 
restriction  on  nuclear  arma- 
ments. It  is  either  some  sort 
of  nuclear  disarmament  pro- 
gram now  or  a  "certainty  of 
d'saster,"  he  concluded. 

A-Explosion  on  the  Sahara 
<^  On  the  lifeless  sands  of  the 
Sahara,  France  exploded  her 
third  nuclear  device.  The  an- 
nouncement was  made  public 
on  December  27  by  the  French 
Armed  Forces  Ministry.  Reac- 
tion to  the  test  was  "cool," 
but  milder  than  from  previous 
tests. 

A  Nuclear  Force  for  NATO 
^  For  some  time  the  idea  of 
equipping  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Organization  with 
atomic  weapons  has  been  up 
for  consideration.  On  Decem- 
ber 17  West  Germany  publicly 
declared  herself  favorable  and 
a  most  enthusiastic  supporter 
of  the  proposition.  The  West 
Germans  feel  that  NATO 
should  be  equipped  with  100 
Polaris  or  Pershing  missiles 
by  early  spring.  Some  NATO 
nations,  however,  are  rather 
dubious  about  the  whole  thing. 

More  Deaths  Dae  to  A-Borob 

^  On  December  27  the  Japa- 
nese newspaper  Aaaki  reported 
that  47  more  persons  died  be- 
cause of  illness  directly  result- 
ing from  the  1945  atomic  bomb 
explosion  on  Hiroshima. 

A  Week  of  Tragedy 

#  Death  fell  from  the  air  in 
New  York  city  and  on  Munich 
in  Germany.  The  grim  evi- 
dence in  New  York  was  that 
a  jet  engine  plane  and  a 
propeller-driven  transport  col- 
lided in  mid-air.  The  death  toll 
in  the  planes  and  on  the 
ground  was  137  persons.  The 
plane  In  Munich  developed  en- 
gine trouble  shortly  after  take- 
off and  crash-landed  o  n  a 
streetcar  in  a  busy  section  of 
the  city.  Sixty  persons  died  as 
a  result  of  the  accident.  Not 

29 


far  from  where  the  planes  col- 
lided In  Brooklyn,  the  aircraft 
carrier  Constellation  was  being 
built.  On  December  19,  49  ci- 
vilian workers  died  in  a  dis- 
astrous Are  that  was  caused 
by  spilled  fuel  oil.  The  Navy 
put  the  damage  at  $75,000,000. 

Water  Supplies 

#>  Studies  show  that  wafer  de- 
mands in  the  United  States  by 
1980  will  be  559,000)000,000  gal- 
lons daily,  about  double  the 
present  demand.  The  prospec- 
tive demand  for  water,  said  a 
report  released  by  the  U.S. 
Senate  committee  headed  by 
Robert  S.  Kerr,  would  equal 
almost  one  half  the  total  daily 
average  of  stream  flow  from 
all  rain  and  snow  that  falls 
on  the  United  States.  By  the 
year  2000  the  report  foresees 
some  areas  facing  "extreme" 
water  shortages.  To  keep  the 
United  States  supplied  with 
serviceable  water  over  the  next 
twenty  years,  it  will  cost  tax- 
payers between  $54,000,000,000 
to  $74,000,000,000. 

British  Christmas  Spending  Up 

^  Since  World  War  II  the 
British  have  been  spending 
more  on  Christmas  with  each 
succeeding  year.  In  1959  they 
spent,  on  an  average,  about 
forty  pounds  ($112)  each.  The 
1960  figure  is  expected  to  ex- 
ceed that. 

British  Movie  Attendance  Drops 

^  During  1960  an  estimated 
520,000,000  Britons  attended 
the  movies.  This  was  14  per- 
cent fewer  than  1959.  The 
gross  income  from  tickets, 
however,  showed  a  decline  of 
only  6  percent  from  1959,  pri- 
marily because  of  a  hike  in 
prices  of  seats.  More  than  350 
theaters  closed  during  1960,  as 
compared  with  440  in  1959. 

Holiday  Traffic  Deaths 

<^  From  Friday  December  23 
to  Tuesday  December  27,  461 
persons  died  in  traffic  accidents 
across  the  United  States,  The 
final  count,  however,  was  not 

30 


in.  It  was  predicted  to  pass 
510,  the  number  set  by  the 
National  Safety  Council. 

Air  Traffic  increase 

^  In  the  United  States  com- 
mercial air  traffic  has  increased 
fourfold  over  a  decade  ago. 
During  1960  there  were  an  es- 
timated 58,400,000  passengers 
carried  for  a  total  of  39,339,- 
700,000  passenger  miles. 

Refugees  Flow  West 

<$>  West  Germany  was  flooded 
with  more  than  2,000  refugees 
from  East  Germany  over  the 
f  o  u  r  -  d  a  y  Christmas  period. 
This  was  over  three  times  as 
many  as  arrived  in  West  Ber- 
lin in  1959. 

Racial  Discrimination 

#  The  United  Nations  General 
Assembly  called  on  the  Union 
of  South  Africa  on  December 
18  to  do  away  with  all  traces 
of  racial  discrimination  in  the 
Territory  of  South-West  Afri- 
ca. The  resolution  "calls  upon 
the  Government  of  the  Union 
of  South  Africa  to  revoke  or 
rescind  immediately  all  laws 
and  regulations"  based  on  the 
apartheid  policy.  The  resolu- 
tion, which  was  recommended 
by  the  U.N,  Trusteeship  Com- 
mittee, was  approved  78  to  0. 
The  United  States  and  Britain 
abstained  from  voting. 

Witness  Sent  Back  to  Prison 

$>  Wilhelm  Scheider,  62,  was 
sentenced  on  December  16  to 
a  six-year  term  for  having  dis- 
tributed Bible  literature  in  Po- 
land. Scheider  is  one  of  Je- 
hovah's witnesses.  He  was 
released  from  prison  in  1957 
in  a  general  amnesty  after 
having  served  five  years  of  a 
life  sentence.  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses are  outlawed  in  Poland. 

Catholics  Told  to  Tithe 

^  Members  of  St.  Joseph's 
Roman  Catholic  Church  in 
West  New  York,  New  Jersey, 
were  told  that  from  hence- 
forth they  must  contribute  one 
tenth  of  their  income  before 


taxes  to  the  support  of  their 
church  and  to  charity,  John  P. 
Welgand,  pastor  of  the  church, 
said  the  tithing  would  elimi- 
nate the  need  for  all  fund- 
raising  affairs— including  raf- 
fles, bingo  and  special  collec- 
tions. St.  Joseph's  church  is 
the  largest  in  the  Newark 
archdiocese,  with  a  member- 
ship of  approximately  36,000. 
However,  the  priest  stated  lat- 
er that  the  tithing  plan  was 
not  compulsory. 

Antarctic  on  the  Move 

<$>  The  largest  unbroken  mass 
of  floating  ice  in  the  world  Is 
floating  out  to  sea  at  a  rate 
of  about  5i  feet  a  day.  The 
ice  mass,  known  as  the  Ross 
Ice  Shelf,  is  between  330  and 
13,000  feet  thick  over  196,000 
square  miles  of  the  Ross  Sea 
in  the  vicinity  of  the .  South 
Pole.  The  speed  of  this  mass 
ice  flow  was  said  to  exceed 
that  of  any  other  water-borne 
glacier  yet  measured. 

A  New  Language  Emerging 

$>  After  World  War  II  the  in- 
dependent nation  of  Indonesia 
was  a  country  without  a  na- 
tional language.  The  language 
most  spoken  was  Malayan,  but 
only  by  some  7.7  percent  of 
the  population.  The  rest  spoke 
some  200  other  dialects.  Today 
Malaya  and  Indonesia  are 
slowly  blending  their  lan- 
guages together  to  form  a  new 
language.  More  than  90,000,- 
000  people  are  learning  new 
words  and  phrases.  New  words 
are  added  to  the  language  at 
the  rate  of  about  one  an  hour. 

Quick  Mail  Delivery 

<$>  West  Germans  are  install- 
ing electric  sorting  machines, 
plus  other  mechanical  equip- 
ment, to  speed  up  their  mail 
delivery.  They  hope  that  soon 
all  domestic  mail  will  be  de- 
livered within  34  hours  of 
mailing. 

Rationing  for  Tooth  Decay 

<§■  Eskimos  on  the  island  of 
Greenland  are  suffering  from 

AW  AKE  t 


bad  cases  of  tooth  decay  and 
digestive  troubles.  To  lessen 
their  miseries  the  Danish 
Board  of  Health  report  recom- 
mended rationing  of  candy  and 
pastries  in  Greenland. 

Death  Bate  Cut 

#  Deaths  caused  from  high 
blood  pressure  have  been  cut 
almost  in  half  in  the  last  ten 
years  by  antihypertensive 
drugs,  according  to  a  Massa- 
chusetts Memorial  Hospital 
survey.  The  study  Indicated 
that  over-all  mortality  rates 
for  drug-treated  patients  have 
fallen  from  53  to  27  percent. 

"Banish  Death"  Predicted 

<§>  The  Bible  speaks  of  life 
everlasting  as  a  gift  from  God 
through  Jesus  Christ.  (Rom. 
6:23)  But  Professor  V.  Kova- 
nov,  member  of  the  Soviet 
Academy  of  Medical  Sciences, 
told  doctors  that  it  may  some- 
day be  possible  to  "banish 
death  altogether"  by  means  of 
the  transplantation  of  animal 


organs.  He  declared  that  right 
now  It  is  possible  to  disconnect 
the  heart  for  more  than  an 
hour  and  remove  the  defects 
and  to  continue  blood  circula- 
tion during  that  time  by  arti- 
ficial methods. 

Russian  Diamond  Discovery 

■$>  Russian  geologists  have  dis- 
covered diamonds  near  the 
Arctic  Circle.  It  is  believed  to 
be  one  of  the  richest  diamond 
discoveries  in  the  Soviet  Union. 
The'  Soviet  newspaper  Trud 
hinted  that  the  news  of  the 
And  was  held  up  for  almost 
a  year  while  tests  were  made 
to  evaluate  the  discovery. 

Fish  1,100  Tears  Old 

<§>  In  November  some  fifty 
fishes  and  other  creatures,  such 
as  clams,  lamp  shells,  sponges 
and  corals,  were  discovered  on 
the  "top  of  the  ice  more  than 
a  mile  from  open  water  near 
the  South  Pole.  Their  radioac- 
tive carbon  content  showed 
them  to  be  1,100  years   old. 


One  theory  is  that  the  fishes 
were  trapped  on  the  Ross  Sea 
floor  at  the  time  that  it  froze, 
then  through  the  years  they 
were  borne  upward  as  the  bot- 
tom ice  ascended. 

British  Working  Days  Lost 
<&  The  British  Labor  Ministry 
reported  that  more  than  300,- 
000,000  working  days  are  lost 
annually  In  Britain  as  a  result 
of  sickness  and  injury. 

More  Houses  for  Germans 

^  The  West  German  Housing 
Ministry's  year-end  report 
stated  that  500,000  dwellings 
have  been  built  each  year 
since  1953  and  that  it  is  rea- 
sonable to  assume  that  at  least 
that  many  more  will  be  built 
during  1961. 

Honey  Crop 

<^  The  United  States  produced 
a  record  crop  of  honey  by  Its 
5,500,000  bee  colonies  in  1960. 
The  production  was  nearly 
253,500,000  pounds. 


fy%^*$t&tytyty$^y^y&&%*$rt*$^%^y$^y$^tt^yty& 


^Arre  uou  educated  for  life* 


Putting  away  the  schoolbooks  only  means  the  beginning  of  a 
more  serious  education.  Have  you  been  equipped  by  the  great- 
est of  all  textbooks,  the  Bible?  Have  you  learned  the  more 
difficult  requirements  for  an  adult  Christian?  Are  you  satisfied 
that  your  Bible  training  will  enable  you  to  face  the  most  seri- 
ous of  life's  problems,  secure  in  the  knowledge  of  what  course 
is  best  in  every  circumstance?  You  need  the  book  "This  Means 
Everlasting  Life."  Read  it  with  the  New  World  Translation  of 
the  Christian  Greek  Scriptures.  Together  they  will  educate 
you  for  life — without  end!  Send  only  10/6  (for  Australia,  12/-). 


WATCH  TOWER 


THE  RIDGEWAY 


LONDON   N.W.  7 


I  am  enclosing  10/6  (for  Australia,  12/-)  for  the  book  "This  Means  Everlasting  Life"  and  the 
World  Translation  of  the  Christian  Qreek  Scriptures. 


New 

Name 

Post 

Town  

FEBRUARY  8,  1961 


Street  ana  Number 

or  Route  and   Box  

Postal 
District  No County 


31 


7VM 


men 


succeed 


4h> 


"RUINING 


What  future  do  your  children  and  your  children's 
children  face?  Can  and  will  world  leaders  today 
provide  for  them  security  in  peaceful  surround- 
ings? or  will  they  leave  them  a  heritage 'of  de- 
struction? What  interest  does  God  have  in  their 
and  your  welfare  on  earth?  Is  it  God's  purpose 
to  intervene  in  world  affairs  to  insure  mankind 
continued  life  and  prosperity  on  this  planet  man 
calls  "home"?  Have  no  fear!  God  has  promised 
to  "bring  to  ruin  those  ruining  the  earth."  Good 
reason  to  rejoice?  "Happy  are  the  mild-tempered 
ones,  since  they  will  inherit  the  earth."  How  will 
this  be  accomplished?  What  is  your  part?  Send 
for  and  read: 


p*1Cm    fi~J~:  ■ 


!  ,■'■■>  r  .■"f  ■--.,<  <"7 -*.',•:■ 


WATCH  TOWER 


THE  RIDGEWAY 


LONDON   N.W.   7 


Please  send  me  the  book  From  Paradise  Lost  to  Paradise  Regained.  (Hard  bound,  coral  color, 
356  pages,  beautifully  Illustrated)  I  am  enclosing  5/6  (for  Australia,  6/6), 


Name  .... 
Post 
Town  .... 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  

Postal 
District  No County  . 


In:  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Rd.,  Strathfield,  N.S.W.  CANADA:  160  Brldgeland  Ave.,  Toronto  IB,  Ont, 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bar,  Elandsfontein,  Transvaal   UNITED  STATES:  11T  Adams  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N.  Y, 


32 


AWAKE! 


Aie  20th  Century  in  Bible  Prophecy 

wagedy  of  Vientiane 

wpnosis— a  Dangerous  Two-edged  Sword 


(=WGE    5 


PAGE    3 


F=>AGE    12 


Ae  Expanding  World  of  Plastics  and  You 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAL 

Newt  sources  that  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  th«  vital  Issues  of  our 
times  must  be  unfettered  by  cen  tort  hip  and  selfish  interests,  "Awake!"  has  no 
fetters.  It-recpgnixes  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts.  It  is  not  bound  by 
pofifical  ambitions  or  obftgafforuj  it  (*■  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  foes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  It  is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  Itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth. 

"Awakel"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  Is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  In  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncen  sored,  on  -t he-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  Is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages,  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  In  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  brood  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awakel"  Keep  awoke  by  reading  "Awakel" 

Published  SwiauKBOUJH.Y  in   thb  Unitw>  Statss  By  the 
WATCHTOWER   BIBLE  AND  TRACT  SOCIETY  OF  NEW  YORK,   INC. 
117  Adams  Street  Brooklyn  1;  New  York,   U.S.A. 

AND    IN/  -EdCLAND    BT 

WATCH  TOWER   BIBLE   AND    TRACT   SOCIETY 


Wateh  Tower  House,  The  Ridgeway 
N.  H.  Knorr,  President 

Printing  this  1»ue:  3,126,000 
"*rel»!"  h  pill  idled  In  the  followlnp  23  lengaaaM: 
SimfttMtfrljr— Afrttssm.  Ctarislt,  mulsh,  Dutch,  Eni- 
Hsu,  Pfmrfsu.  fraud!,  Gernian,  Great,  Italian,  Japanese. 
Norwegian,  PortuainsSr  Spanish,  Swedish,  Tugaloti,  Zulu, 
Monthly — ilscano,  in&HUBlta,  Korean,  atalaf&lam,  Pol- 
ish ,  Ctailnlsn. 

Yearly  subscription  rates 

BPjeei  to  semimonthly  editions 

America,  U.S.,  117  Adam  St.,  Brootlra  I,  N.T.         SI 
Autnlll,  11  Bereafwd  Bd.,  strMtaSiM,  N.8.W. 
Canada,  ISO  Bridneland  A"..  Toronto  19,  Out. 
Enjlud,  Wat*  Tower  Houss, 

3*1  BMaMray,  tcndim  N,W.  7 
Nor  Isalnni,  Ml  Set  Nerto  fld.,  Aw*ltM,  B.W.  : 
Soatfc  Atilea,  Private  Bes,  ElanflsToBtein,  Til. 

Monthly  adltloDB  cost  hall  the  above  rates. 


London  N.W,  7,   England 
Gbant  Suitek,  Secretary 

4d  a  copy  (Australia,  ed) 

hmltUtnett  for  subscriptions  should  tn  sent  tn  tho  office 
in    your    country.    Othsruise    send    your    remittance    to 

liGEHfain.  Afafles  at  ixplmtfon  Is  sent  at  least  too  issues 

before  subscription  expires. 


Hi 

Vi- 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  shogld  reach  is  thirty  days 
before  yoor  movt.tg  date.  Give  us  your  oil  and  »ew 
Jtdrws  <H  puis  in.,  yosr  el<  address  label).  Witt* 
Tower,  Witth  fewer  Hutu,  Tbe  Ridptwiy,  Un- 
do*.  N.W.   7,    England. 


Entered  as  eecond-clajj  matter  at  Brooklyn,  NX 
Printed  1u  Sngland 


The   Bible   traaslatlai   ihiI   In   "Awake!"    Is   the   New   World   Tranlitlon   tf   the   Heir   Scrlpturtt. 

Whei  other  ttanslatloas  are  ised  tl«  fotlowlni  symbols  will  appear  behind  the  citations: 
AS  -  American  Standard  Version    Dv  -  Catholic  Doner  leraion    Mo  -  James  MoTlatt's  lersloo 
AT  -  An  American  translation       ED  —  Tho  Emphatic  Diaflott    Ret  -  J.  B.  ttotbarham'e  version 
AV  -  Anthorlvd  Version   (1511)    JP  -  Jewish  Publication  Sot.   R8  -  Beilsed  standard  Version 
Da  -  J.  N.  Iferfcl'i  version  he  -  Isaac  Lceaer's  version       Yg  —  Robert  Young's  lerslorj 


CO 


Procrastination  Is  Folly 
The  20th  Century  in  Bible  Prophecy 
Tragedy  of  Vientiane 
Hypnosis — a  Dangerous  Sword 
The  Expanding  World  of  Plastics 
They  Have  Built-in  Pantries 
Peering  Across  the  Chasm  of 
Christendom's  Disunity 


NTENTS 

3 

Awake!  Aids  Boxer  to  Make  Wise 

5 

Decision 

25 

9 

TASf"  Saves  Time 

25 

12 

How  Venezuelans  Eat  to  Live 

26 

16 

■Tour  Word  Is  TTuth" 

20 

Did  Jesus  Have  Fleshly  Brothers 

and  Sisters? 

27 

21 

Watching  the  World 

29 

'Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake."  0/ 

— JUnani  13ilt  ^/ 


Volume  XLIi 


London,   EnaUnd,   February  22,   1961 


Number  4 


AMONG  the 
many  foibles 
or  weaknesses 
that  imperfect 
humans  have  fall- 
en heir  to  is  that 
of  procrastina- 
tion. One  is  guilty  of 
it  when  he  puts  off 
until  tomorrow  that 
■which  should  be  done 
today.  The  very  word  "procrastinate" 
comes  from  a  root  meaning  "tomorrow." 
According  to  the  dictionary,  procrastina- 
tion is  the  blameworthy  putting  off  of 
things  until  tomorrow  because  of  laziness, 
indifference  or  hesitation. 

This  common  failing  has  caused  various 
proverbs  or  sayings  to  be  coined.  Accord- 
ing to  the  Germans:  "  'Tomorrow,  tomor- 
row, but  not  today!'  is  what  lazy  people 
say."  The  English  like  to  quote:  "Pro- 
crastination is  the  thief  of  time."  And, 
"Never  leave  that  till  tomorrow  which  you 
can  do  today,"  is  an  American  version. 

True,  something  can  be  said  in  favor  of 
delaying.  'Fools  rush  in  where  angels  fear 
to  tread,'  and  "he  that  is  hastening  with 
his  feet  is  sinning."  But  if  our  delaying  is 
due  to  laziness,  indifference  or  hesitancy, 
then  it  is  procrastination. — Prov.  19:2. 

With  some,  procrastination  is  sheer  la- 
ziness, betraying  a  lack  of  will  power. 
Even  a  dead  man  qan  wait  for  a  tomorrow 
that  never  comes.  But  it  takes  strength  of 


will,  will  pow- 
er, to  discipline 
ourselves  to  do 
today  what  we 
know  should  be 
done  today  and 
now.  The  remedy  for 
procrastination  is  cul- 
tivating self-control. 
—Prov.  6:6-11. 
When  we  procras- 
tinate because  of  thoughtlessness  or  indif- 
ference we  betray  a  lack  of  wisdom.  To- 
morrow we  may  not  have  the  opportunity 
to  do  what  should  be  done,  or  it  may  be  too 
late  to  do  much  good.  Procrastination  re- 
garding your  health  may  result  in  the  loss 
of  a  tooth,  require  an  operation,  or  even 
land  you  at  the  undertaker's.  Procrastina- 
tion regarding  repairs  on  the  auto  you 
drive  may  result  in  a  fatal  accident.  If  you 
know  something  needs  to  be  done  and.  you 
can  do  it  now,  do  it  now!  Or  you  may  re- 
gret it  as  long  as  you  live! 

The  Bible  speaks  out  against  procrasti- 
nation because  of  hesitancy.  "Whenever 
you  vow  a  vow  to  God,  do  not  hesitate  to 
pay  it,  for  there  is  no  delight  in  the  stupid 
ones."  To  vow  and  then  hesitate  shows  lack 
of  wisdom  and  good  judgment,  "Better," 
the  wise  Congregator  goes  on  to  say,  "is  it 
that  you  vow  not  than  that  you  vow  and 
do  not  pay." — Eccl.  5:4,  5. 

Yes,  we  may  not  always  keep  putting 
off  until  tomorrow  difficult  decisions  to 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


ARTICLES  OF  INTEREST 

•  The  Strength   We   Uv«  By. 

#  Farth   HMlfng— la  It  from  God? 

•  Are  You  Getting   Bard? 

#  The    Case  for  the    Polio*    Dog. 
A  Spring    Cleaning    the    Eaeler   Way, 

Atk  for  the  next  it&ue. 


make  or  steps  to  take.  Tomorrow  it  may 
be  still  more  difficult  to  make  the  right 
decision,  and  in  the  meantime  we  may  be 
hurting  others  as  well  as  ourselves. 

Then  again  our  procrastination  may  be 
due  to  a  lack  of  a  keen  sense  of  justice, 
as  when  we  procrastinate  in  paying  our 
debts  if  at  all  able  to  do  so:  "I>o  not  hold 
back  good  from  those 
to  whom  it  is  owing, 
when  it  happens  to  be 
in  the  power  of  your 
hand  to  do  it.  Do  not 
say  to  your  fellow 
man:  'Go  and  com& 
back  and  tomorrow  ~^~  ~" 
I  shall  give,'  when  there  is  something  with 
you."— Prov.  3:27,  28. 

Because  our  hearts  are  prone  to  be 
"more  treacherous  than  anything  else" 
they  often  make  excuses  for  failings  with 
plausible  procrastination.  We  know  that 
we  should  change  our  ways,  clean  up, 
practice  self-control  in  thought,  speech 
and  action,  budget  our  time  and  money, 
go  on  a  diet,  and  so  forth,  but  we  keep 
putting  it  off  until  tomorrow.  In  the  mean- 
time we  flatter  ourselves  because  of  our 
good  intentions,  overlooking  the  fact  that 
thereby  we  are  building  on  sand  a  house 
of  wood,  hay  and  stubble.  Such  an  attitude 
calls  to  mind  the  prayer  of  "Saint"  Augus- 
tine: "Lord,  grant  me  chastity  and  con- 
tinence, but  not  yet!"  Such  procrastination 
is  dishonest  and  betrays  a  lack  of  justice. 
— Jer.l7:9. 

In  particular  does  procrastination  show 
a  lack  of  love.  If  we  love  our  work  we  will 
not  put  it  off  until  tomorrow.  If  we  have 
love  in  our  hearts  for  God  and  our  fellow 
man  we  will  be  eager  to  do  what  we  can 
and  should  do  today  rather  than  putting 
it  off  until  tomorrow.  Thus,  if  we  sense  we 
have  offended  someone,  love  will  make  us 
quick  to  settle  matters  between  us,  not 
procrastinating  because  ot  the  embarrass- 


ment or  humiliation  involved.  Love  will  be 
concerned  with  doing  what  good  it  can  to- 
day, knowing  that  tomorrow  such  oppor- 
tunities may  no  longer  be  there  or  there 
will  be  still  others  waiting. — Matt.  5:23, 24. 
In  view  of  the  foregoing  it  is  obvious 
that  procrastination  has  no  place  in  the 
life  of  a  Christian,  God's  Word  condemn- 
ing laziness,  indiffer- 
ence and  hesitancy. 
When  Jesus  asked 
four  young  fishermen 
to  follow  him,  they 
did  not  procrastinate 

but  "at  once  . . .  they 

followed  him."  When 
Saul  of  Tarsus  was  converted  and  then 
regained  his  sight,  he  likewise  did  not  pro- 
crastinate but  "immediately  in  the  syna- 
gogues he  began  to  preach  Jesus." — Matt 
4:18-22;  Acts  9:20, 

We  today  are  living  in  a  time  of  deci- 
sion, in  days  similar  to  those  of  Noah  and 
Lot,  according  to  Jesus'  own  words.  We 
dare  not  put  off  until  tomorrow  the  taking 
of  our  stand  with  Jehovah  God  and  his 
King  Jesus  Christ  if  we  have  not  already 
done  so.  Had  Noah  procrastinated,  the  ark 
would  not  have  been  ready  when  the  flood- 
waters  came.  Our  situation  is  as  urgent  as 
that  of  hot,  regarding  whose  dehVeranee 
the  inspired  record  states:  "The  angels  be- 
came urgent  with  Lot,  saying:  'Get  up! 
Take  your  wife  and  your  two  daughters 
who  are  found  here,  for  fear  you  may  be 
swept  away  in  the  iniquity  of  the  city!' " 
—Matt.  24:37-39;  Gen.  19:15-17;  Luke  17: 
28-30. 

Since  fulfillment  of  Bible  prophecy  lo- 
cates us  at  the  end  of  this  wicked  system 
of  things,  today,  more  than  ever  before, 
procrastination  is  folly.'  Do  not  delay  to 
seek  Jehovah,  righteousness  and  meek- 
ness, that  you  may  survive  its  end  to  en- 
joy life  in  God's  new  world.  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses stand  ready  to  help  you. — Zeph.  2:3. 


AW ARE ! 


iTTOB  modern 

Jt  a  'woodpecker  in  a.  petHhed  forest 


%dfcs  ■;  life:.:  f  m~  -tmnmui ::;  m^- 

em  eleetronie  equipment  and 
space  vehicles*  may  make  one's 
hrad  Kpm  to  amazement,  hut  If 
is  not  material  poft&e^iom-i  that 
can  fill  one's  life  with  the  tow* 
and.  purpose  in  IMHg  that;  br  tug- 
true  happmess.  It  ia  clear  a&t 
science  al.an.fi-  does  not  have  the 
answer  to  yom'  craving  for  trae 
contentment  and  security*  Yoy 
must  look  elsewhere — to  God's 
Word,  the  Holy  Bible, 
Those  who  look  to  the  Bible 
m  perplexed  &&    in  hops  of  finding  encouraging  facts  about 

the  future  should  not  be  surprised  to  find 


Countless  thcResmds  of  humans  living  in  critical  tinra.es  deluded  m  its  i'oreea&t  for 
the  twentieth  century  madly  ffltrtter  from  the  twentieth  century.  Wars,  food  short- 
one  ende&vor  to  another  only  to  expeH-  ages^  earthquakes* ,  increase  in  cr/ime  and  a 
enee  frustration  and  dtanpoinirnenL  To  collapse  in  morals  &re  all  prophesied  for 
such  p™>na  the  future*  toofe  bleak  indeed,  th  is  gen  oration.  But  then  it  also  ftpefrfei  of 
Some  people  wonder'  if  adenee  has  the  a  group  of  people  preaching  about  the 
answer  to  &  bright  tomorrow,  It  forecasts  righteous  kingdom  of  God,  a  war  o£  God 


that  with  Sin  decades  submarine  "fanning- 

wlH  help  fa^d.huogry  people;  all  sources? 
of  disease  will  be  destroyed;  artificial  in- 
M%ene(*  mzt&ftkm  will  do  things  people 


against  all  widcedneas,  followed  by  &  p&.rft* 
diae  earth  without  death— all' to  be  realised 
in  the*  twentieth  century,. 

Blinded  by  the  da&de  of  $dencie  in  this 


do  now— write  letters,  cook;  clean  houses    n^ilo-mhided  space  a$e,  the  vast  majori- 
drive  aufcom.obife  and  fly  airplanes;  &nd  a    ty  do  not  believe  the  BifolA  prop? 


trip  to  Mars  will  teke  only  a  year  in  cosmic    ModernM  clergy-  contend  that  the  Bible  te 
ships  tmvmlhiig  at  speeds  varying,  from    out  of  date  and  should  be  rewritten  in 


40,000  to  00,000  miles  an  hour.* 

Many  of  the  developments  of  science 
work  for  'the  benefit  of  man,  because  in- 


terms  of  space  fiction  m  children  would 
be*  more  interested.*  As  a  result  of  reli- 
gious leaders'  attitude  toward  the  Bible, 


creased  imdfirstandirj#  enables*  him.  to  use  it  ie  no  wonto:  that  people  in  genera! 

to  a.  fuller  extent  the  resources  provided  nave  become  indiflferetit  and  unconcerned., 

by  the.  Creator.  But  aH   too   often   Uite  Nevertheless  Interest  in  knowing  tfocs  fu- 

.knowledge  in  used  for  sel&ah  ends  and  to  ttir&  hM  not  lessened- 
the  liarai  of  mankind.  So  we-  must:  fa.ee  the        Human  attempts*  however,  hsrai  failed 

fact  that  knowledge  of  submarine  farming  to  predict  the  future  accurately  Would 

m  not  gomg  to  mlv®  the  world's  food  proh*  ytjtu  stake  your  3 if e  on  a  wea.therm^.os^ 

fern  £i.gi  lonpf  as  KeSJ!ishis<*ss  co^.tr ofe  the  urn  forocast  iror  tomorrow?  Then  why  tnM  in 

of  the  food  proclui:.**!  Nor  does  mmi*u  ahili*  long«nmga  predictions  made  by  humans? 

ty  to  alleviate  the  stii!£erihg:  caused  by  Some  modem  examples  exnpfc^dze  the 


immuAm  ms  mn 


IV 


tility.  Years  after  World  War  I  had  ended, 
British  General  Sir  Ian  Hamilton  was 
quoted  as  saying:  "The  'next  war'  will  take 
as  many  weeks  as  the  last  war  took  years 
and  civilization  will  be  blotted  out"11  Ac- 
cording to  him,  World  War  II  should  have 
ended  after  a  month's  fighting.  It  dragged 
on  piteously  for  six  years, 

Before  the  end  of  World  War  II  another 
prediction  was  made.  A-  peasant  girl  -in 
Italy  had  allegedly  received  visitations 
from  the  "virgin  Mary."  The  visitations 
began  on  May  12,  1944.  In  one  apparition 
the  war  was  predicted  to  be  over  by  the 
end  of  July,  1944.'1  The  stark  truth  is  that 
not  until  more  than  a  year  later,  on  Au- 
gust 14,  1945,  did  the  war  actually  end. 

Predictions  are  now  being  manufactured 
about  World  War  HI.  Jeane  Dixon,  favor- 
ite seeress  of  senators,  ambassadors  and 
White  House  intimates  in  the '  United 
States,  predicted  that  Red  China  would 
plunge  the  world  into  war  over  Quemoy 
and  Matsu  in  October,  1958.  "The  Red 
Chinese  will  take  those  islands,"  she  said 
grimly.  "Nothing  will  stop  them,  including 
the  immense  loss  of  life  that  will  result 
from  the  fighting."  Further,  she  predicted 
that  Soviet  boss  Nikita  Khrushchev  would 
begin  to  lose  his  power  before  the  end  of 
1958."  Two  years  have  gone  by  without 
seeing  any  fulfillment  of  the  above  pre- 
dictions. 

Source  and  Manner  of  True  Prophecy 

The  methods  man  has  employed  to  de- 
termine the  future  vary.  He  has  tried 
everything  from  balancing  an  ax  to  re- 
flecting the  sun's  rays  by  fingernails.  He 
has  looked  into  the  well-known  crystal 
ball,  besides  observing  the  color  and  pecu- 
liarities of  wine,  in  hopes  of  knowing  the 
future.  He  has  even  tried  myomancy,  a 
means  of  divination  by  the  movements  of 
mice.  Little  wonder  that  these  methods  as 
well  as  all  others  have  failed  miserably  to 

6 


aid  mankind  in  hi*  desire  to  know  the 
future. 

The  time  is  ripe  for  mankind  to  turn  to 
a  better  source  of  prophecy  than  what  im- 
perfect humans  can  offer.  That  source  is 
God.  His  book  of  prophecy  is  the  Holy 
Bible. 

What  is  Bible  prophecy?  Do  you  know? 
Most  people  have  only  a  hazy  idea.  Plainly 
defined,  Bible  prophecy  is  any  event  fore- 
told by  God  to  take  place  at  some  future 
time. 

There  were  several  methods  used  by 
God  in  revealing  future  events  to  man. 
Sometimes  God  would  utter  prophecy 
word  for  word.  At  otnen  times  he  would 
give  men  visions  during  their  wakeful 
hours.  Dreams  and  interviews  with  an- 
gels were  also  used.  Moved  by  holy  spirit, 
God-approved  prophets  recorded  these  di- 
vine messages  of  future  events  in  the  Bi- 
ble.—Dan.  2:19,  28;  Acts  10:10-16;  Gen. 
18:16-21. 

Fulfillments  in  the  20th  Century 

A  sensible  thing  to  do  now  is  to  examine 
a  few  of  the  many  Bihle  prophecies  that 
have  come  true  in  the  twentieth  century. 
Not  only  will  such  an  examination  serve 
to  prove  the  Bible's  reliability,  but  it  will 
also  build  confidence  in  prophecy  yet  to  be 
fulfilled. 

Matthew  24:7  says  that  "nation  will  rise 
against  nation."  Are  you  going  to  brush 
aside  this  statement  by  saying,  "We've 
always  had  wars"?  Have  any  of  those  pre- 
vious wars  been  as  monstrous  in  destruc- 
tion as  World  War  I?  It  far  outstripped  all 
previous  wars.  As  evidence,  compare  the 
casualty  list  of  five  major  wars  prior  to 
World  War  I:  Napoleonic  Wars,  1796-1815, 
6,000,000  casualties;  Crimean,  1854-1856, 
787,000;  U.S.  Civil  War,  1861-1865,  936,- 
122;  Franco-German,  1870-1871,  710,000; 
Russo-Japanese,  1904-1905,  550,000;  World 
War  I,  1914-1918,  37,508,686;  World  War 

AWAKE! 


II  was  even  greater,  with  casualties  mount- 
ing to  53,886,541.*  For  a  certainty,  this 
prophecy  for  the  twentieth  century  has 
come  true. 

Mark  13:8  says:  "There  will  be  food 
shortages."  Has  this  been  fulfilled?  Again, 
consider  the  facts.  India  reported  32,000,- 
000  people  on  the  verge  of  starvation  at 
the  end  of  World  War  I.  One  source  stated 
that  the  "existing  conditions  are  unparal- 
leled elsewhere  in  the  history  of  the 
world."'  Reporting  on  the  great  Russian 
famine  at  that  time,  it  was  said  that  peo- 
ple were  "dying  like  flies  from  the  eating 
of  offal,  grass,  wood  bark,  melon  rinds, 
clay  and  other  substitutes  for  food."6  Rus- 
sians numbering  13,772,613  were  actually 
starving  as  of  February,  1922.  In  1925  the 
worst  famine  since  1897  held  the  west 
coast  of  Ireland  in  its  grip.*  Sixty  percent 
of  Canada's  wheat  fields  were  burned  up 
by  drought  in  1933  and  1934.  Also,  the 
greatest  plague  of  grasshoppers  in  Cana- 
da's history  invaded  her  western  plains. 
Germany  lost  her  hay  crop;  France  and 
Italy  suffered  badly  from  drought;  Portu- 
gal's crops  were  eaten  up  by  great  swarms 
of  locusts;  Britain  had  a  most  severe  wa- 
ter shortage. 

Famines  have  increased  during  the 
twentieth  century  in  fulfillment  of  Bible 
prophecy,  as  the  following  figures  compar- 
ing major  famines  of  the  past  with  those 
of  our  era  show:  A.D.  1016,  30,000,000 
persons  affected;  A.D.  1344,  90,000,000; 
A.D.  1790,  103,000,000;  A.D.  1877,  116,- 
000,000;  A.D.  1920,  255,000,000;  A.D. 
1946,  500,000,000.  More  recent  is  a  news- 
paper report  that  "parents  in  famine- 
stricken  North  Bengal  [India]  have  sold 
children  for  70  cents  apiece  to  save  the 
youngsters  from  starvation  and  to  raise 
money  for  their  own  food."10  The  evidence 
is  overwhelming.  This  prophecy  has  also 
seen  fulfillment  in  the  twentieth  century. 


Luke  21:11  says:  "There  will  be  great 
earthquakes."  Can  anyone  deny  the  fact 
that  earthquakes  have  increased  in  de- 
structiveness  during  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury? Note  the  following:  "In  2,000  years 
of  recorded  history,  earthquakes  have 
probably  taken  10,000,000  lives."11  This 
constitutes  an  average  of  about  5,000  killed 
each  year.  However,  during  the  period  be- 
tween 1915  and  1949  a  total  of  848,450 
were  killed.  This  is  an  annual  average  of 
24,241  deaths  during  the  thirty-five-year 
period.  Not  to  be  forgotten  is  1960,  when 
during  the  first  five  months  of  the  year 
more  than  20,000  lives  were  lost  in  earth- 
quakes around  the  globe.  Again,  Bible 
prophecy  has  come  true. 

Fulfillment  of  Prophecy  Inspires  Hope 

The  twentieth  century  has  also  seen  a 
pleasant  fulfillment  of  Bible  prophecy.  The 
"good  news  of  the  kingdom"  is  being 
preached.  (Matt.  24:14)  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses, numbering  851,000  in  179  different 
lands,  are  doing  this  preaching.  Upward 
of  131,662,000  hours  spent  by  these  Chris- 
tians last  year  alone  gives  evidence  that 
more  than  15,000  are  preaching  every  min- 
ute of  every  day  about  this  kingdom. 
What  kingdom?  The  kingdom  of  God  that 
is  to  crush  all  present  kingdoms  of  men. 
(Dan.  2:44)  That  now-operating  kingdom 
in  heaven  will,  within  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury, cleanse  the  entire  earth  of  wicked- 
ness. 

Now  stop  and  reason.  Does  not  fulfill- 
ment of  all  the  foregoing  prophecies  give 
you  assurance  that  future  Bible  prophecy 
must  come  true?  Can  you  not  see  that  the 
twentieth  century  is  the  century  indicated 
by  the  prophetic  language  of  Matthew  24, 
Mark  13,  Luke  21,  and  2  Timothy  3?  Since, 
according  to  1  Corinthians  14:33,  40,  God 
does  everything  by  order  and  arrange- 
ment, is  it  not  only  logical  that  whatever 
else  is  recorded  in  these  above-mentioned 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


Bible  chapters  must  also  come  upon  the 
twentieth  century?  If  so,  then 

What  ]g  Ahead? 

Jesus  said:  "But  as  these  things  start  to 
occur,  raise  yourselves  erect  and  lift  your 
heads  up,  because  your  deliverance  is  get- 
ting near.  Truly  I  say  to  you,  This  genera- 
tion will  by  no  means  pass  away  until  all 
things  occur.  But  pay  attention  to  your- 
selves that  your  hearts  never  become 
weighed  down  with  overeating  and  heavy 
drinking  and  anxieties  of  life,  and  suddenly 
that  day  be  instantly  upon  you  as  a  snare. 
For  it  will  come  in  upon  all  those  dwelling 
upon  the  face  of  all  the  earth." — Luke  21: 
28,  32,  34,  35. 

What  day  was  Jesus  speaking  of?  The 
beginning  of  World  War  m?  No,  Zepha- 
niah  2:3  identifies  it  as  "the  day  of  Jeho- 
vah's anger."  Revelation  16:16  calls  it  the 
"war  of  the  great  day  of  God  the  Al- 
mighty," Armageddon.  This  war  will  come 
in  the  twentieth  century.  It  will  come  right 
on  schedule,  as  have  the  wars,  food  short- 
ages, earthquakes  and  other  events  fore- 
told. This  generation  will  see  its  fulfill- 
ment. 

The  real  cause  for  rejoicing  Is  found  in 
the  last  prophecy  recorded  in  the  Bible, 
found  in  Revelation,  chapter  21,  There  it 
foretells  the  operation  of  a  new  heaven  for 
the  uplifting  and  blessing  of  mankind.  Not 
only  will  all  disease  pass  away,  but  the 
sting  of  death  will  no  longer  be  felt  either. 
God  promises  to  make  all  things  new. 
—Rev.  21:4,  5. 

To  realize  the  fulfillment  of  this  proph- 
ecy requires  action  now.  The  time  that  is 
left,  must  be  spent  wisely  in  gaining  an 
understanding  of  Bible  prophecy  so  as  to 


act  with  benefit  to  ourselves.  To  gain  such 
an  understanding  means  first  of  all  to  cul- 
tivate the  proper  motives.  These  motives 
are  a  love  for  truth  and  righteousness  and 
a  desire  to  be  obedient  to  God's  Word. 
Then  associate  with  Jehovah's  witnesses, 
who  have  already  been  enlightened  by 
God's  spirit  to  an  understanding  of  the 
things  that  have  come  true  in  the  twen- 
tieth century. 

Final  advice  for  those  living  in  the 
twentieth  century  is  given  by  Jesus  him- 
self: "Keep  awake,  then,  all  the  time  mak- 
ing supplication  that  you  may  succeed  in 
escaping  all  these  things  that  are  destined 
to  occur,  and  to  hold  your  position  before 
the  Son  of  man."— Luke  21:36. 

Will  you  be  able  to  hold  your  position 
before  Christ  Jesus  when  he  fights  at  Ar- 
mageddon, or  will  you  be  involved  in  some 
aimless  activity  when  that  war  comes? 
Win  you  be  able  to  stand  in  the  earthly 
paradise  as  a  survivor  of  the  battle  of  Ar- 
mageddon, or  will  you  be  stone  dead  be- 
cause of  having  been  caught  off  guard  by 
its  approach? 

Now  is  no  time  to  be  applying  yourself 
to  fruitless  endeavors  in  this  doomed 
world.  Now  is  the  time  to  heed  Bible 
prophecy  concerning  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury and  live  forever  in  the  sunshine  of 
God's  new  world. 

tafanncM 

i  Bcienoe  News  Letter,  April  19, 1958,  and  May  3, 1958. 
2  Associated  Press  Dispatch,  Bristol,  England. 
£  San  Francisco  Examiner,  April  2,  1953. 

*  The  New  Italian  News  Service,  July  19.  19*4. 
s  Seattle  Poxt-IntgUigence,  September;  14,  1958. 
«  World  Almanac,  1946. 

T  The  Nation,  June  7, 1919,  p.  903. 

*  Current  History  Magsz&ie  (published  by  Jfew  Y«rJr 

3*imes),  October,  1921,  p.  134. 
»  Outlook,  May  27,  1925. 
io  New  York  Times,  May  1, 1958. 
il  New  York  Timet,  August  20, 1950. 


AWAKE} 


r««Gf£)f 


OF 


VKWIflfK 


By  "AwoImI" 

correspondent  In  Loot 

DECEMBER  13,  1960, 
started  out  as  a  beau- 
tiful day  in  Vientiane, 
Laos.  The  sun  was  shining 
in  a  blue  sky  and,  with  the 
many-colored  birds  gaily 
singing,  it  promised  to  be 
another  peaceful  day  in 
the  tropics. 

At  1:30  p.m,  the  picture 
changed.  It  sounded  as  if  the  whole  coun- 
try had  suddenly  erupted  into  a  battle- 
field. Cannons  boomed,  machine  guns  stut- 
tered and  mortars  set  up  a  deafening  roar. 
Thus  started  the  battle  of  Vientiane,  which 
was  to  last  for  seventy-six  hours  nonstop. 

Jehovah's  witnesses,  active  in  179  coun- 
tries of  the  world,  are  also  working  in 
Vientiane.  During  the  ensuing  seventy-six 
hours  they  found  themselves  right  in  the 
midst  of  the  fighting,  although  they  them- 
selves took  no  part  in  it.  The  battle  was 
between  pro-Communist  and  anti-Commu- 
nist troops  of  the  Royal  Lao  Army.  Since 
both  sides  were  dressed  in  identical  uni- 
forms, carried  the  same  flag  and  were  of 
the  same  nationality,  it  was  difficult  to 
distinguish  one  from  another.  It  was  a 
case  of  brother  fighting  brother. 

Everyone  scurried  home,  shut  his  doors 
and  got  down  on  the  floor,  prepared  for  a 


siege.  Soldiers  fought  up  and  down,  back 
and  forth,  through  the  streets  of  Vientiane, 
fighting  from  house  to  house  and  street  to 
street.  The  front  lines  moved  back  and 
forth  through  the  city  at  least  six  times. 
During  all  this  time  both  sides  had  can- 
nons well  back  of  the  front  lines  that  were 
firing  into  the  city.  No  one  had 
opportunity  to  leave.  They  just 
waited  for  the  shells  either  to 
fall  on  their  paper-thin  homes 
or  to  miss  them.  The  tragedy  of 
it  all  was  that  it  was  mostly  un- 
armed civilians  who  suffered 
and  died. 

During  the  heavy  shelling  on 
the  first  night,  the  neighbor  liv- 
ing next  to  the  missionary  home 
of  Jehovah's  witnesses  pounded 
on  the  door  and  asked  if  anyone 
knew  how  to  deliver  a  baby.  The 
one  missionary  sister  in  the 
home  gathered  up  supplies  and 
a  book  that  explained  the  sub- 
ject and  went  over  to  help,  even  though 
she  knew  practically  nothing  about  it.  For- 
tunately, the  fighting  let  up  for  about  a 
half  hour  and  a  doctor  was  found  who  per- 
formed the  delivery  with  the  help  of  the 
missionary. 

The  next  day  cannon  shells  flew  thick 
and  fast  in  all  parts  of  the  city,  blowing  up 
houses,  tearing  down  trees  and  anything 
else  they  hit.  Whole  sections  of  the  city 
were  burned  to  the  ground.  The  sky  was 
filled  with  thick  black  smoke,  which  made 
the  sun  a  red  ball  in  the  sky.  Blood-red 
flames  shot  high  into  the  air.  As  one  mis- 
sionary said,  "It  made  us  sick  at  heart  to 
think  of  the  many  people  we  knew  who 
would  be  dying  in  the  flames  at  that  very 
moment."  The  missionary  home  was  badly 
damaged,  as  were  all  the  other  homes  in 
the  district,  and  it  was  decided  to  evacuate 
and  go  to  another  part  of  town  that  was 
supposed    to    be    recognized    as    neutral, 


FEBRUARY  %8,  1961 


namely,  a  French  army  camp  that  was  es- 
tablished in  accordance  with  the  Geneva 
Conference  in  1954, 

It  was  thought  that  all  would  be  safe 
there,  as  the  troops  had  promised  not  to 
fire  on  the  camp.  They  did  not  keep  their 
word,  however,  but  systematically  shelled 
it.  Since  the  camp  was  crowded  with  refu- 
gees of  all  nationalities,  many  people  were 
killed  and  injured.  Here  again  mostly  un- 
armed civilians. 

Eyewitness  Account 

A  survivor  related  his  experiences  In 
this  way:  "I  never  thought  I  would  come 
out  of  this  situation  alive.  During  one  of 
the  many  heavy  shelling  attacks,  I  was  ly- 
ing flat  on  the  ground  helping  a  person 
who  has  a  large  family  of  seven  to  find 
shelter.  There  was  suddenly  an  explosion 
only  three  meters  away.  It  was  a  direct  hit 
on  my  friend's  car,  which  was  burned  up. 
Fifteen  persons  were  wounded  and  many 
killed.  The  explosion  was  so  loud  I  couldn't 
hear  anything  for  several  minutes. 

"The  ambulance  came  and  I  volunteered 
to  help  them  with  the  many  wounded.  Lit- 
tle did  I  know  that  this,  abandoning  my 
own  possessions  and  helping  these  people 
in  need,  would  result  in  my  own  means  of 
escape  from  the  city.  The  camp  being  in 
no  man's  land  made  it  impossible  for  other 
than  the  ambulance  to  go  through  the 
lines.  We  were  carrying  the  bleeding  per- 
sons into  the  ambulance  while  the  bullets 
were  whining  past., 

"On  the  way  to  the  hospital  something 
happened  that  touched  my  heart.  In  the 
ambulance  there  was  a  badly  wounded 
man.  When  we  came  to  the  roadblock  set 
up  by  the  anti-Communist  troops,  one  man 
who  had  just  been  firing  in  the  direction 
of  the  camp  recognized  this  wounded  man 
as  one  of  his  relatives.  Knowing  that  it 
may  have  been  he  who  was  responsible  for 
these  wounds,  he  started  to  cry.  This  is  a 

10 


typical  example  of  how  brother  fought 
brother. 

"At  the  hospital  there  was  much  work 
to  do  helping  wounded  people.  Knowing 
this,  I  helped  as  much  as  possible.  I  oan 
now  picture  how  I  looked,  dirty,  unshaved 
and  covered  with  other  people's  blood,  I 
was  quite  amazed  at  the  Catholic  priegts 
who  were  standing  there  dressed  in  their 
long  white  robes  and  not  lifting  a  finger 
to  help  anyone. 

"The  first  thing  that  I  had  in  mind  after 
finishing  at  the  hospital  was  to  find  my 
friends,  but  I  couldn't  find  any  of  them, 
and  many  of  their  homes  were  flattened  to 
the  ground.  To  me  the  tragedy  of  the 
whole  thing  was  that  I  saw  only  dead  and 
wounded  civilians. 

"Even  though  I  lost  everything  I  owned, 
I  was  very  happy  to  arrive  in  Bangkok 
after  six  days  with  very  little  sleep,  not 
much  food  or  water  and  thankful  to  God 
to  be  alive." 

Another  man  helped  the  commandant  of 
the  camp  in  going  to  each  home  in  his 
section  as  it  was  hit  to  make  sure  every- 
one was  out  and  to  lead  many  women  and 
children  to  trenches  and  other  places  of 
safety.  Another  took  his  life  in  his  hands 
to  go  outside  the  camp  in  no  man's  land  to 
the  home  of  one  of  his  acquaintances, 
which  had  had  a  direct  hit.  He  brought 
back  his  friend — dead — and  his  friend's 
wife,  who  had  a  leg  torn  off.  This  kind  of 
help  went  on  for  the  whole  three  days 
under  heavy  fire. 

Flight  to  Safety 

The  last  two  Witness  missionaries  were 
able  to  leave  and  get  out  from  under  the 
cannon  fire  due  to  the  hospitality  of  a 
person  of  good  will.  When  the  front  lines 
had  passed  by  about  500  yards,  the  brother 
jumped  up  and  literally  made  him  go  with 
them.  After  much  arguing  with  soldiers, 
they  finally  passed  through  the  lines  and 

AWAKE} 


reached  a  border  crossing  point  into  Thai- 
land, where  they  were  finally  able  to  get 
some  sleep. 

Meanwhile,  in  Vientiane  the  fighting 
continued  all  night  and  finally  stopped  the 
next  day.  The  Communist  troops  had  now 
been  pushed  back  to  their  camp  twenty 
kilometers  beyond  the  town. 

Within  Vientiane  water  and  food  were 
not  available.  Dead  bodies  in  the  ruins 
gave  off  a  terrible  smell  and  the  danger  of 
an  epidemic  was  great.  A  large  majority 
of  the  city  had  been  burned  down,  and  the 
number  of  the  dead,  although  officially  set 
at  150,  will  probably  never  be  known. 
Many  were  killed  by  bullets  and  fheir  bod- 
ies burned  up  in  the  fires  that  raged 
throughout  the  city.  The  majority  of  those 
that  died  were  innocent  men,  women  and 
children,  the  victims  of  a  war  between  op- 
\posing  political  groups. 

Tragedy  could  be  seen  in  the  faces  of 
all.  For  example,  the  man  who  was  seen 
poking  around  in  the  ashes  of  his  home, 
only  to  find  the  ashes  and  bones  of  his  wife 
and  five  children.  It  could  be  seen  in  the 
face  of  another  who  had  just  been  in- 
formed that  his  brother  and  ten  children 
had  all  died.  It  could  be  seen  in  the  face 
of  a  woman  holding  her  dead  daughter  in 
her  arms  and  sobbing,  and  in  the  face  of 
the  father  who  held  his  child  who  had  just 
lost  a  foot  and  the  blood  was  streaming 
from  the  stump.  It  was  seen  in  the  faces 


of  people  who  had  already  lost  everything 
they  owned,  some  as  many  as  five  times, 
due  to  war. 

These  people  truly  need  the  hope  of  a 
new  world  of  righteousness  as  taught  In 
the  Bible,  and  no  doubt  many  of  them  will 
learn  about  this  hope  as  they  now  pass  on 
to  other  countries  as  refugees,  seeking  a 
place  of  peace.  Jehovah  has  promised  in 
the  Bible  that  the  only  place  of  peace  will 
be  his  new  world,  which  will  shortly  be 
established  here  on  this  earth  and  in 
which  there  will  be  no  war.  Fathers  will 
not  hold  their  dead  children  in  their  arms 
and  ask  someone  to  help  them,  nor  will 
children  see  their  parents  blown  to  pieces 
before  their  eyes.  There  will  be  no  war  and 
no  death  in  that  new  world. 

Truly  the  wise  course  for  all  lovers  of 
peace  now  is  to  inform  themselves  about 
this  new  world.  The  next  time  one  of  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  calls  at  your  door,  take  a 
little  time  to  listen  to  what  he  has  to  say. 
If  you  heed  the  Word  of  Jehovah  that  they 
bring  to  you,  you  may  be  one  of  the  sur- 
vivors of  a  much  greater  war  than  that  of 
Vientiane,  namely,  the  battle  of  Jehovah, 
the  war  of  Armageddon,  in  which  he  will 
destroy  all  those  who  are  against  him  and 
will  give  everlasting  life  to  those  who  serve 
him.  Leam  about  this  peaceful  new  world 
now,  practice  what  you  learn,  and  you  will 
live  in  it. 


Evolution  4foax 


C  A  physiologist  for  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission,  Dr.  Theodore  Newton  Tah- 
misian,  told  audiences  at  several  European  universities:  "Scientists  who  go  about 
teaching  that  evolution  is  a  fact  of  life  are  great  con  men,  and  the  story  they 
are  telling  may  be  the  greatest  hoax  ever.  In  explaining  evolution  we  do  not  have 
one  iota  of  fact.  ...  To  advance  you  have  to  have  something  new.  How  can 
the  progenitor  pass  on  to  his  children  what  he  himself  didn't  have?  Lake  breeds 
like.  Yet  evolutionists  would  tell  us  like  breeds  unlike."  According  to  The  Fresno 
Bee,  Dr.  Tahmisian  called  the  so-called  historical  record  of  evolution  "a  tangled 
mishmash  of  guessing  games  and  figure  juggling." 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


11 


HYPNOSIS  is  coming  to 
and  more  patients  are 
use.  In  just  one  New  York  city* 
center  hundreds  of  women  made 
tion  for  the  use  of  hypnosis  in  chUdbif 
A  nationally  known  psychiatrist  stated  thsft 
he  was  receiving  as  many  as  five  hundred 
requests  a  month  for  treatment  by  hypno- 
sis. Its  use  is  rapidly  spreading  among  den- 
tists and  surgeons,  and  even  some  clergy- 
men praise  it  as  a  "sacred  counsel  aid," 
At  present,  in  the  United  States  alone,  hyp- 
nosis is  being  used  by  upward  of  6,000  pro- 
fessional men  in  the  healing  arts. 

What  are  the  facts  about  this  mysterious 
power?  How  does  it  work,  and  why?  Can 
it  be  used  for  criminal  ends?  Is  the  cur- 
rent trend  wise  or  ill-advised?  What  dan- 
gers are  associated  with  it?  Are  Biblical 
principles  involved  in  the  use  of  hypnosis? 

"No  one  knows  why  hypnosis  works.  It 
just  does."1  While  that  is  true,  there  are 
theories  as  to  what  takes  place  that  do 
appear  to  throw  some  light  on  the  subject. 
One  authority  on  the  subject  states  that 
hypnosis  is  "nothing  but  an  aspect  of  con- 
ditioning."1 According  to  another,  hypno- 
sis is  "a  state  of  exaggerated  suggestibili- 
ty brought  about  by  artificial  means."3 
Most  enlightening  is  the  description  that 
hypnosis  is  "a  passive  will-less  state  in 
which  only  the  powers  of  discrimination 
[reason]  and  choice  [will]  are  temporarily 

suspended It  is  dissociation  [a  cleavage, 

dividing  or  separating]  between  the  higher 


reasoning  centers  of  the  mind  and 
the  lower  and  automatic  centers  of 
the  brain."* 

Conscious  and  Unconscious  Mind 

Yes,  man  has  both  a  conscious  and  an 
unconscious  mind.  We  use  our  conscious 
mind  in  our  everyday  affairs,  to  think,  to 
choose,  to  remember,  to  speak,  to  act,  and 
so  forth.  Our  unconscious  mind  takes  care 
of  the  body's  life-sustaining  and  adaptive 
functions.  It  also  causes  us  to  dream.  The 
things  we  do  without  giving  them  a  con- 
scious thought  appear  to  have  been  di- 
rected by  the  unconscious  mind.  Appar- 
ently it  never  rests,  even  as  our  lungs 
and  heart  do  not  rest. 
Surgeoas  have  been 
warned  to  be  cautious  about 
what  they  say  while  a  pa- 
tient is  under  an  anesthetic, 
as  his  unconscious  mind 
hears  and  records  all  that  is 
said.  Tactless  expressions 
may  later  cause  emotional 
harm.5  Giving  support  to  this  claim,  re- 
cent research  into  the  unconscious  mind 
showed  that  some  patients  hate  their  sur- 
geons as  a  result  of  the  "ill-considered  re- 
marks of  the  operating  team"  while  the 
patients  were  under  anesthesia.  Thus  the 
patients  bore  their  surgeons  a  grudge  with- 
out either  ever  knowing  why!8 

Since  our  unconscious  mind  remains  ac- 
tive while  our  conscious  mind  sleeps  and 
since  in  hypnosis  there  is,  as  it  were,  a 
pushing  aside  of  certain  faculties  of  the 
conscious  mind,  could  it  be  that  a  hypno- 
tist couid  get  his  commands  across  to  the 
unconscious  when  a  person  is  asleep?  Does 
natural  sleep  serve,  in  a  way,  as  does  the 
hypnotic  trance?  Yes,  as  proved  by  a  Har- 
vard University  scientist.  He  found  that  a 
sleeping  person  who  was  readily  hypnotized 
when  awake  responded  in  the  same  way 
when  asleep — up  to  the  medium  trance 


12 


AWAKE! 


stage.  Upon  command  the  sleeping  one 
raised  and  lowered  his  arms  and  clasped 
his  hands.  Told  that  he  could  not  unclasp 
his  hands,  he  struggled  vainly  to  do  so, 
even  though  sound  asleep.  Then  he  was 
told  that  he  was  very  thirsty  and  that  he 
would  get  up  and  drink  some  water.  In 
eight  minutes  he  awoke,  got  up  and  drank 
two  glasses  of  water.  Upon  -waking  the 
next  morning  he  remembered  nothing  ex- 
cept that  he  awoke  during  the  night  and, 
feeling  thirsty,  drank  water/ 

It %  Uncanny,  Sinister  Power 

The  foregoing,  however,  is  but  the  ABC 
of  hypnosis.  Well  has  it  been  described  as 
an  "enormously  complex  psycho-physical 
performance."  For  example,  under  hypno- 
sis the  body  can  become  so  rigid,  a  state 
known  as  catalepsy,  that,  suspended  be- 
tween two  chairs,  it  will  support  the  weight 
of  two  men.  Certain  powerful  drugs  and 
abnormal  mental  states  produce  like  re- 
sults, but  why  can  hypnosis?  Why  this 
power  over  the  nervous  system? 

Note  also  the  power  of  posthypnotic  sug- 
gestions, that  is,  suggestions  carried  out 
after  one  comes  out  of  the  hypnotic  trance. 
Told  he  will  not  be  able  to  do  certain  sim- 
ple things,  such  as  saying  a  certain  word 
or  looking  at  his  shoes,  he  will  be  unable 
to  do  so.  Told  that  he  will  act  in  a  certain 
manner  every  time  he  hears  a  certain  word 
or  sees  a  certain  thing,  he  will  unconscious- 
ly comply.  Told  he  will  be  afflicted  with 
certain  neuroses  or  manifest  certain  symp- 
toms of  mental  unbalance,  he  will  likewise 
comply.1 

Uncanny  also  is  the  power  of  hypnosis 
over  the  memory.  Told  to  forget  a  certain 
thing,  the  person  forgets.  Told  that  in  a 
year  and  a  day  he  will  deposit  five  dollars 
in  his  bank,  he  will  make  certain  that  by 
the  time  that  day  comes  he  has  five  dol- 
lars and  on  that  day  he  will  deposit  it  in 
his  bank.  And  for  all  such  posthypnotic 

FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


suggestions  the  person  will  always  have 
plausible,  yet  wholly  false,  reasons  for  do- 
ing what  he  does. 

Hypnosis  also  has  a  sinister  power.  It 
can  cause  a  person  to  harm  others  or  even 
himself.  Told  to  kill  a  certain  person  be- 
cause that  one  is  intending  to  kill  him,  he 
will  try  to  kill  that  one.  In  the  famed 
"Heidelberg"  case  a  young  German  house- 
wife, virtuous,  wholly  normal  and  well- 
balanced,  was  thus  taken  advantage  of. 
Under  hypnosis  she  had  sex  relations  with 
her  hypnotist  and  with  others  (for  which 
he  collected  a  fee  from  them),  made  six 
attempts  on  the  life  of  her  husband  and 
twice  tried  to  commit  suicide.  Had  any  of 
those  eight  attempts  succeeded,  the  crimi- 
nal would  never  have  been  detected.8  That 
was  back  in  1934-5.  In  1954  a  Copenhagen 
court  sentenced  a  hypnotist,  Bjom  Nielsen, 
to  life  imprisonment  because  of  having 
caused  Palle  Hardryp  to  commit  a  bank 
robbery,  during  which  bank  cashiers  were 
killed. 

Says  one  authority  on  the  subject:  "Ap- 
propriate procedures,  which  need  not  nec- 
essarily be  subtle,  can  make  hypnotized 
persons  perform  antisocial  acts,  even  to  the 
extent  of  criminally  harming  themselves 
or  others.  As  a  result  of  hypnotic  sugges- 
tion subjects  have  stolen  money,  rushed 
to  pick  up  rattlesnakes,  and  thrown  sul- 
phuric acid  into  a  man's  face,  which,  un- 
known to  the  subject,  was  protected  by 
invisible  glass.  ...  Put  bluntly,  through 
hypnosis  it  is  possible  to  force  persons  to 
commit  crimes.  Those  who  speak  of  the 
necessity  for  hypnotic  suggestion  to  fit  in 
with  a  subject's  'moral  code'  should  revise 
their  concepts."2  All  of  which  helps  to  ex- 
plain why  certain  defendants  in  Nazi  and 
Communist  trials  could  be  made  to  act  so 
contrary  to  their  own  interests.8 

Ill-advised 

Even  in  the  hands  of  a  well-meaning 

13 


therapist,  hypnosis  is,  to  say  the  least,  ill- 
advised.  Contrary  to  popular  conception, 
hypnosis  does  not  act  as  a  pain  killer,  an 
analgesic,  or  as  a  deadener  of  feeling,  an 
anesthetic.  It  only  keeps  the  pain  from 
reaching  the  conscious  mind.  That  the  body 
still  feels  the  pain  can  be  seen  from  the 
fact  that  there  is  an  increase  in  the  pulse 
rate  and  a  change  in  the  skin,  even  as 
when  the  mind  feels  the  pain,  although  not 
to  the  same  degree.9 

Bearing  this  out,  a  boy  under  hypnosis, 
in  a  recent  experiment,  was  told  he  would 
not  feel  certain  pin  pricks.  At  the  same 
time  he  was  given  automatic  writing  to  do 
(in  which  the  unconscious  mind  writes  and 
the  conscious  is  not  aware  of  what  is  being 
written).  While  the  boy  felt  no  pain,  he 
did,  in  his  unconscious  automatic  writing, 
strongly  complain  about  the  pain. 

This  caused  the  physician  making  the 
experiment  to  conclude  that,  "since  the  hu- 
man being  is  still  experiencing  discomfort 
which  could  have  been  relieved  by  chemi- 
cal anesthetics  and  analgesics,  it  would 
seem  more  appropriate  to  use  these  types 
of  agents  when  possible,  rather  than  hyp- 
nosis, in  relieving  pain  of  this  kind.  This 
conclusion  is  based  on  the  assumption  that 
it  is  the  physician's  task  to  relieve  suffer- 
ing rather  than  displace  it."1* 

As  for  its  use  in  correcting  bad  habits, 
a  leading  psychiatric  textbook  states: 
"Hypnosis  necessitates  the  surrender  of 
the  mind  and  will  in  a  peculiar  way  to  the 
influence  of  another  personality.  I  regard 
these  procedures  as  in  the  highest  degree 
subversive  of  individual  strength  and  stam- 
ina of  character . . .  Hypnosis  is  an  exceed- 
ingly dangerous  svoord. . . .  Self-realization 
and  the  ability  to  become  an  independent, 
self-controlled  individual  are  most  effec- 
tively achieved  by  methods  which  require 
the  full,  hearty  and  active  co-operation  of 
the  patient.  .  .  .  Hypnosis  has  been  enthu- 

14 


siastically  tried  and  woefully  found  want- 
ing."9 

And  a  professional  journal  recently  said: 
"There  is  a  very  persistent  and  fallacious 
idea  that  hypnosis  can  in  some  mysterious 
way  remove  undesirable  impulses,  thoughts 
and  sensations  from  the  mind.  It  is  often 
naively  hoped  or  believed  that  symptoms 
can  be  destroyed  without  a  trace.  .  .  . 
This  illusion  is  based  on  the  universal 
wish  to  avoid  the  unpleasant  aspects  of 
reality.  .  .  .  The  idea  of  being  hypnotized 
and  thus  in  some  mysterious,  painless,  un- 
derstandable way  finding  oneself  rid  <of 
pain  or  psychologic  problems  has  great  ap- 
peal to  the  human  mind,  as  does  the  idea 
of  being  omnipotent  and  able  to  do  this  to 
someone  else."11 

Its  Dangers 

At  best  hypnosis  is  an  ill-advised  remedy 
and  at  the  worst  it  is  a  sinister  tool  for 
criminals.  It  is  so  dangerous  that  stage  and 
parlor  entertainers  have  done  immeasur- 
able harm  with  it.  Says  one  psychiatric  au- 
thority: "We  feel  impelled  especially  to 
condemn  the  public  exhibitions  carried  on 
by  professional  hypnotists.  The  authorities 
should  speedily  bring  these  demonstrations 
to  an  end.  They  are  debasing  and  demor- 
aliadng."*  And  says  another:  "Hypnosis  be- 
longs in  the  parlor  in  the  same  way  you 
would  want  an  atom  hpmb  there."5 

Hypnosis  is  an  unknown  quantity.  Some 
cannot  be  hypnotized  at  all,  others  only  to 
varying  degrees.  "Some  patients  may  be- 
come panicky,  angry,  suspicious  or  even 
delusional  .  .  .  Others  may  become  exces- 
sively dependent  upon  hypnosis  or  the  hyp- 
notist."11 Time  and  again  the  patient  is 
cured  of  one  failing  only  to  acquire  a  worse 
one,  or  to  commit  suicide  or  try  to  k;ill  a 
loved  one.  "Cures  are  publicized,  but  not 
what  happens  later  on.  The  patient  and  the 
public  do  not  even  realize  that  there  is  any 
connection  with  subsequent  tragedy."1 

awake: 


Because  of  the  spread  of  hypnosis  the 
American  Medical  Association  appointed  a 
Committee  on  Hypnosis  to  investigate  the 
situation.  Its  report,  while  not  condemning 
hypnosis  per  se,  spoke  out  in  the  strongest 
terms  against  the  popular  indiscriminate 
use  of  it,  warning  in  particular  against  the 
dangers  of  self -hypnosis. 

It  told  of  follies  being  committed  be- 
tween the  hypnotist  and  his  patient,  of  the 
seeming  magic  results  of  hypnosis  giving 
some  hypnotists  delusions  of  omnipotence 
and  omniscience,  and  of  hypnotists  going 
insane.  In  fact,  in  the  past  seven  years  one 
group  of  psychiatrists  never  had  less  than 
three  hypnotists  coming  to  theov  i<x  h«te 
each  month,  some  of  whom  were  violently 
insane.13 

According  to  the  spokesman  for  this  re- 
port, the  popular  use  of  hypnosis  is  "play- 
ing with  dynamite."1  Hypnosis  itself  is  not 
the  remedy,  but  "just  as  a  patient  with 
cancer  is  treated  surgically  under  and  not 
by  anesthesia,  so  a  patient  with  severe 
emotional  disease  can  be  treated  psychi- 
atrically,  under  but  not  by  hypnosis."1* 
And  says  another  leading  psychiatrist: 
"Notwithstanding  all  these  [unfavorable] 
facts,  hypnotism  is  an  invaluable  agent  for 
perfecting  the  diagnosis  in  numerous  ab- 
normal psychic  cases,  such  as  multiple  per- 
sonality and  complex  dissociation,  and  is 
indispensable  in  the  investigation  of  spir- 
itualistic mediums."* 

Against  Scriptural  Principles 

The  foregoing  has  only  scratched  the 
surface  of  the  potential  dangers  associated 
with  hypnosis,  ^i  not  on  guard,  a  person 
can  be  hypnotized  without  his  knowing  or 
wishing  it,  while  standing  and  with  his 


eyes  wide  open.  At  times  even  experts  can>- 
not  tell  whether  a  person  is  hypnotized  or 
not.  Hypnosis  had  to  be  banned  from  tele- 
vision because  of  the  accidents  resulting 
from  people  being  hypnotized  while  watch- 
ing it.  A  physician  can  learn  to  use  it  in 
fifteen  minutes,1  but  with  it  can  do  harm 
such  as  only  Almighty  God  can  remedy. 

Even  if  hypnosis  were  not  fraught  with 
such  danger,  a  Christian  may  not  volun- 
tarily submit  to  it.  Why  not?  Because  it 
runs  counter  to  the  principles  set  forth  in 
God's  Word,  the  Bible.  Having  dedicated 
himself  to  do  God's  will,  a  Christian  may 
not  surrender  his  discretion  and  power  of 
reason,  his  will  at«i  power  of  choice  to  an- 
other, regardless  of  how  much  confidence 
he  may  have  in  that  one's  skill  and  integ- 
rity. At  all  times  he  is  accountable  to  God, 
and  he  may  not  jeopardize  his  standing 
with  God  by  allowing  his  conduct  to  be 
subject  to  the  control  of  a  hypnotist,  not 
even  temporarily.  As  has  been  previously 
noted  in  this  magazine,  God's  holy  spirit 
is  sufficient  for  the  Christian."  To  fortify 
himself  against  hypnosis,  whether  waking 
or  sleeping,  a  Christian  should  deliberately 
and  explicitly  resolve  in  his  mind  never  to 
submit  to  the  sinister,  worldly-wise  pro- 
cedure known  as  hypnosis. 

SOURCES 

i  Dr.  Harold  Rosen— This  Week,  July  17.  1980. 

2  Dr.  A.  Salter— What  Is  Hypno&isf  DP-  13,  14. 

a  Dr.  G.  H,  EBt&bTOOks— Maclean's,  September  3, 1955. 

4  Dr.  J,  H.  Krltzer — Journal  of  the  National  Medical 
Society,  September-December,  1946. 

E  D.  L.  Hubbard— Dianetics,  pp.  115,  55-57. 

8  Nmesuxsefcj  August  22,  i960. 

/  Scientific  American,  April,  1957. 

a  Dr,  H,  E-  Hammerschlag— Hypnosis  and  Crime, 

»  Dr.  W.  S.  Sadler— practice  of  Psychiatry  (1953). 
pp.  860,  862. 

10  Dr.  E.  A,  Kaplan — Archives  of  General  Psychiatry. 

ii  Dr,  E.  W,  Werbed— .^jwoJj  0f  Internal  Medicine, 
June.  I960. 

12  Medical  World  Weios,  June  3,  I960- 

is  Dr,  Harold  Rosen— -Saturday  Evening  Post,  April 
27,  1957. 

i*  Awake!  October  22,  1959. 


FEBRUARY  22,  19B1 


15 


PLASTICS 


IT  IS  hard  to  believe  that 
people  once  thought  of 
plastics  as  substitute,  cheap, 
inferior  materials.  In  fact, 
less  than  twenty-five  years 
ago,  if  someone  had  tried  to 
sell  you  the  idea  of  buying  plastic 
furniture,  you,  no  doubt,  would 
have  dismissed  the  idea  as  absurd. 
Few  people  in  those  days  could  have  ac- 
curately predicted  the  part  plastics  have 
in  the  world  today. 

The  plastics  industry  has  come  of  age. 
Today  plastics  are  a  $2,000,000,000-a-year 
business,  employing  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  persons  and  spending  annually  more 
than  $5,000,000  for  advertising  alone.  The 
chemical  industry  in  the  United  States  is 
spending  upward  of  $500,000,000  a  year  in 
plastic  technical  research.  A  total  of  more 
than  6,000,000,000  pounds  of  plastics  are 
produced  yearly.  The  business  itself  is 
growing  at  five  times  the-growth  rate  of 
United  States  industry  as  a  whole. 

People,  as  a  rule,  no  longer  question  the 
place  of  plastics  among  materials.  As 
building  products  plastics  are  generally  ac- 
cepted for  their  wonderful  adaptability. 
They  are  light  and  sturdy,  both  flexible 
and  rigid,  translucent  and  transparent, 
breakable  and  "shatterproof."  And  things 
built  of  plastics  today  look  no  more  star- 
tling than/'those  built  of  other  materials. 
In  fact,  few  persons  are  able  to  spot  the 


principal  types  of  plastics  in  gen- 
eral use  currently.  If  an  article 
is  not  made  of  wood,  metal, 
stone,  paper,  glass  or  fabric,  it  is 
conveniently  referred  to  as  made 
of  plastic. 

Some  objects,  such  as  lamp 
shades,  telephones,  phonograph 
records,  tableware,  and  so 
forth,  may  be  quickly  identi- 
.  tied  as  plastic.  But  many  are 
surprised  to  team  that  the 
rayon  necktie  is  made  from 
the  same  plastic  material  as 
the  comb  in  their  pocket  or 
the  steering  wheel  in  their 
car.  They  are  further  sur- 
prised to  discover  that  the 
milk  they  drink  can  also  be 
converted  to  produce  the  plas- 
tic button  on  their  coats,  that 
the  red  tint  on  women's  fingernails  and 
toes  and  the  covering  on  the  heels  of  their 
shoes  are  made  of  the  same  plastic,  and 
that  both  their  hairbrushes  and  nylon  hose 
are  made  of  still  another  plastic. 

Yes,  plastics  are  a  very  versatile  family 
group  of  materials.  The  type  of  plastic  that 
is  used  to  make  a  raincoat  can  make  a 
rope  that  no  water  or  marine  life  can  af- 
fect. Another  type  is  molded  into  an  elec- 
tric insulator  or  turned  into  knives  and 
forks,  plates  and  spoons.  It  can  even  be 
converted  into  liquid  form  to  prevent  wool- 
ens from  shrinking.  Another  plastic  will 
be  used  to  form  a  radio  or  television  cabi- 
net or  be  employed  as  an  adhesive  to  ce- 
ment together  strips  of  cloth  or  wood  to 
form  parts  of  an  airplane  or  rocket. 

Some  plastics  are  as  transparent  as  glass, 
others  opaque.  They  can  be  woven  into 
cloth  or  sprayed  onto  surfaces.  Some  plas- 
tics are  molded  by  injection,  others  are  ex- 
truded; some  are  used  tor  fabrication  and 
others  for  lamination.  There  are  plastics 
that  will  not  melt  at  520  degrees  Fahren- 


16 


AWAKE! 


heit  yet  remain  resilient  and  flexible  at  55 
degrees  below  zero.  There  are  plastics  that 
are  tasteless  and  odorless.  Others  expand 
to  forty  times  their  original  size  so  that  a 
plank  made  of  such  plastics  9  feet  long, 
10  inches  wide  and  4  inches  thick  weighs 
only  four  pounds.  Another  plastic  is  30- 
percent  stronger  yet  40-percent  lighter 
than  aluminum.  Its  impact  strength  is  thir- 
ty times  that  of  other  plastics. 

The  ratio  of  low  weight  to  great  strength 
and  its  good  thermal  insulating  properties 
make  somevplastics  very  useful  to  indus- 
try. There  are  reportedly  about  "50,000 
plastic  applications  on  a  modern  battle- 
ship and  over  750  on  an  aircraft  bomber." 
An  automobile  has  "more  than  250  parts 
made  of  plastic."  That  paint  job  on  your 
new  car  is  really  a  plastic  job,  because  the 
lustrous  coating  is  a  plastic.  It  is  an  alkyd 
plastic  resin.  Its  use  has  completely  revo- 
lutionized the  process  of  car  painting. 

Plastics  in  Your  Borne 

In  the  home,  plastics  are  the  answer  to 
the  housekeeper's  dream.  Imagine  a  stain- 
proof  tablecloth!  By  giving  the  tablecloth 
an  invisible  coating  of  butyral  it  becomes 
waterproof  and  stain  resistant.  It  can  be 
laundered  and  ironed  just  as  the  ordinary 
tablecloth.  Oil  spots  on  some  materials  are 
almost  impossible  to  remove  with  even  the 
best  cleaning  fluids.  But  the  vinylidene 
plastic  fabrics  being  nonporous,  oil  spots, 
dirt  or  stains  are  not  absorbed  and  can  be 
easily  cleaned  away  with  a  cloth.  Age  and 
wear  affect  the  fabric  little  and  it  is  en- 
tirely waterproof  and  nonflammable. 

Step  inside  a  modern  home  with  its  large 
expanses  of  translucent  walls,  freer  flow 
of  interior  space  and  closer  relationship  to 
the  outdoors  and  you  are  at  once  attracted 
to  the  beauty  of  plastics.  The  bright- 
colored  vinyl  floor  tiles  in  the  kitchen  ex- 
cite your  imagination.  The  arch  of  light 
over  the  kitchen  counter  diffuses  an  even 


glow  through  translucent  plastic  panels. 
Lovely  room  dividers  in  shoji  patterns  use 
textured  plastic  like  rice  paper,  but  the 
dividers  are  tough  yet  easy  to  clean.  The 
door  panels  are  opaque  plastic.  The  terrace 
screens  are  flat  panels  of  milk-white  plas- 
tic in  redwood  frames.  The  screening  will 
not  rust  or  need  painting.  The  garage's 
carport  walls  are  made  of  sheets  of  pliable 
plastic  stretched  over  decorative  wood 
frames.  The  sheets  are  translucent,  and  sil- 
houettes of  plants  create  interesting  pat- 
terns on  them.  The  storage  room  wall  pan- 
els are  plastic-impregnated  abaca  cloth. 
The  material  has  the  look  of  coarse-tex- 
tured linen  but  cannot  soil  or  deteriorate 
and  its  surface  can  be  wiped  clean  as  easily 
as  glass. 

Plastics  are  being  used  extensively  for 
upholstery  fabrics,  rugs  and  curtains,  in- 
cluding such  items  as  draperies,  patio  cush- 
ion covers  and  foam-rubber  pillows.  Pillow- 
cases made  from  cloth  coated  with  the 
plastic  vinyl  resin  are  airtight,  odorless, 
nontoxic  and  easy  to  clean.  It  is  predicted 
that  in  the  near  future  nearly  everything 
in  the  house  will  be  made  of  plastic. 

Plastics—What  Are  They? 

What  are  plastics?  And  what  are  the 
advantages  and  disadvantages  of  plastics 
compared  to  other  materials? 

In  the  strict  sense  of  the  word,  a  plastic 
is  any  material  that  can  be  softened  and 
molded  or  pressed  into  a  desired  shape. 
According  to  the  dictionary,  the  term 
"plastic"  means  anything  "capable  of  be- 
ing molded."  However,  not  all  plastics  are 
molded.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  more  than 
65  percent  of  all  plastic  compounds  pro- 
duced are  used  for  purposes  other  than 
molding.  It  is  suggested  that  a  more  ac- 
curate name  for  the  new  products  would 
be  "synthetic  plastic  materials,"  since  at 
some  stage  in  their  production  they  are 
built  up  by  chemical  means  from  relatively 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


17 


simple  raw  materials,  such  as  petroleum 
products  and  coal,  timber  and  agricultural 
products  and  milk.  It  is  estimated  by  the 
Bituminous  Coal  Institute  that  "about  85 
percent  of  all  plastics  used  in  [the  United 
States]  are  derived  wholly  or  in  part  from 
coal." 

The  basic  ingredient  of  all  plastic  arti- 
cles is  the  resin  or  binder,  which  plastic 
chemists  make  from  raw  materials.  The 
resin  binds  the  other  basic  materials,  the 
fillers,  such  as  wood,  flour,  rags,  fibers, 
asbestos,  and  so  forth,  together  in  a  desired 
shape. 

Even  though  plastics  are  generally  be- 
lieved to  be  new  materials,  they  are  in  fact 
both  old  and  new.  An  English  scientist, 
H.  Ronald  Fleck,  asserts  that  plastic  ma- 
terials have  been  used  since  the  birth  of 
civilization.  He  tells  of  jars  of  spices  dis- 
covered in  the  tomb  of  Tutankhamen  at 
Thebes  that  were  sealed  by  means  of  pitch. 
So,  Fleck  says:  "The  ancient  Egyptians 
can  claim  to  have  founded  two  major  in- 
dustries— food  preserving  and  plastics." 

The  plastics  industry,  however,  may  be 
said  to  have  begun  with  the  discovery  of 
nitro-cellulose  by  an  Englishman,  Alexan- 
der Parkes,  in  1864.  Parkes  did  not  pursue 
his  discovery  commercially.  It  was  not 
until  shortly  after  the  Civil  War,  in  1868, 
that  the  plastics  industry  made  its  first 
major  step.  A  young  inventive  printer, 
John  Wesley  Wyatt,  in  search  for  a  sub- 
stitute material  to  replace  ivory  in  the 
making  of  billiard  balls,  struck  upon  the 
idea  of  mixing  pyroxylin  with  solid  cam- 
phor. The  result  was  America's  first  plastic 
— Celluloid. 

Cellulose  nitrate  branched  out  from  bil- 
liard balls  to  combs,  brush  handles,  piano 
keys,  toys,  trays  and  false  teeth.  Men  of 
the  Gay  Nineties  wore  shirt  collars  and 
cuffs  made  from  celluloid.  No  washing,  no 
starching  was  necessary  i  JU£t  a  damp  cloth 
and  wipe  clean.  But  woe  to  the  man  who 


carelessly  let  a  hot  cigar  or  cigarette  ash 
fall  on  his  collar  or  cuff!  There  would  be 
a  flash  flame  and  a  badly  burned  body. 
Less  than  twenty  years  after  Wyatt  intro- 
duced his  first  plastic,  there  were  close  to 
25,000  applications  found  for  it! 

For  forty-one  years  celluloid  was  alone 
in  the  plastic  family.  Then  a  second  type 
of  plastic  was  developed  called  phenolic 
plastic.  This  was  a  combination  of  phenol 
and  formaldehyde.  But  it  was  not  until 
after  World  War  II  that  the  world  became 
aware  of  the  abundance  of  these  new  syn- 
thetic materials.  Now  there  are  some  sev= 
enteen  different  families  of  plastics  and 
some  thirty  different  members  to  each 
family,  with  over  1,200  trade  names  under 
which  these  materials  are  produced!  In  less 
than  two  decades  plastic  products  have 
risen  to  the  point  where  now,  in  the  open 
market,  they  compete  with  such  ancient 
materials  as  metals,  wood  and  glass. 

The  Advantages 

What  do  plastics  have  that  other  mate- 
rials lack?  Being  man-made,  they  can  be 
molded  to  meet  specific  requirements.  Plas- 
tic screens  are  durable,  rustproof  and  need 
no  painting.  Moplen  fibers  look  and  feel 
like  wool,  still  they  are  water  repellent  and 
quick-drying  like  nylon.  They  cost  less  to 
produce  than  any  other  existing  synthetic. 
Nylon  costs  nearly  one  dollar  a  pound  to 
produce,  whereas  Moplen  can  be  produced 
at  less  than  fifteen  cents.  Moplen  can  be 
made  as  hard  or  softj  flexible  or  brittle  as 
the  chemist  desires. 

Melamirie,  the  basic  raw  material  from 
which  Meknac  tableware  is  molded,  is  a 
thermoset  plastic  that  will  not  bend,  ignite 
or  alter  shape  under  heat.  Melmac  dishes 
are  so  tough  that  you  can  count  on  them 
not  to  crack  or  break  for  at  least  a  year. 
Colors  and  patterns  are  actually  molded 
into  melamine  dinnerw&re,  not  superim- 
posed on  the  surface.  This  makes  them 


18 


AWARE! 


fadeproof  and  immune  to  serious  damage. 
A  sharp  knife  may  scratch  the  surface  of 
a  Melmac  plate,  but  since  the  material  is 
nonporous  and  the  color  built  in,  little 
harm  is  done. 

Some  plastics  provide  excellent  insula- 
tion against  heat  and  electricity.  Since 
house  owners  want  to  keep  the  heat  in 
during  the  winter  and  keep  heat  out  in  the 
summer,  low  heat  transmission  is  decided- 
ly an  advantage.  In  this  respect  plastics 
compare  favorably  with  wood.  But  wood 
blocks  the  passage  of  light.  X-ight  trans- 
mission is  one  field  where  some  plastics  ex- 
cel. They  have  a  unique  talent  for  diffusing 
light.  They  seem  to  gather  light  up  from 
one  or  several  sources  and  distribute  it 
evenly  over  a  wide  area.  Translucent  pan- 
els admit  light  where  a  transparent  glass 
window  would  be  undesirable. 

Another  field  where  plastics'  excel  is  in 
the  realm  of  color.  Though  some  are  lim- 
ited to  a  few  dark  and  rather  dull  tones, 
the  majority  can  be  produced  in  a  practi- 
cally unlimited  range  of  clear  shades  and 
tints.  The  color,  being  built  in,  is  always 
there,  no  matter  what  happens  to  the  sur- 
face. 

Moisture  barriers  of  pliable  plastics  are 
used  to  block  moisture  under  concrete 
slab  foundations.  They  are  said  to  be  more 
effective  against  water  penetration  than 
any  other  available  material. 

Ceilings  that  are  covered  with  acoustical 
tile  finished  with  vinyl  coating  are  easier 
to  keep  clean  than  conventional  acoustical 
surfaces.  Luminous  ceilings  are  possible 
because  the  light-diffusing  plastic  panels 
can  be  suspended  from  the  ceiling  without 
unduly  heavy  supports  or  danger  of  break- 
age because  of  their  light  weight. 

Plastic  bugles  weigh  only  ten  ounces, 
require  no  warming  up  and  they  possess 
excellent  tonal  quality  too.  Harmonicas 
molded  of  polystyrene  have  only  five  parts 
as  compared  to  eighty  parts  in  the  old- 


style  instrument  The  old-type  harmonica 
was  put  together  by  hand  in  about  150 
separate  operations,  while  the  plastic  one 
Is  assembled  in  a  single  operation  in  about 
fifteen  seconds. 

The  plastic  lenses  are  as  clear  as  the 
finest  optical  glass.  They  can  be  used  with 
telescopes,  binoculars,  cameras  and  other 
sighting  devices.  Today  practically  all  con- 
tact lenses  are  plastic.  The  lens  can  be 
easily  shaped  and  molded,  making  possible 
a  more  comfortable  and  accurate  fitting 
over  the  eyeball.  Unlike  a  glass  lens,  a 
plastic  lens  can  be  dropped  repeatedly 
without  any  fear  of  its  breaking.  Plastic 
artificial  eyes,  made  of  unbreakable  plas- 
tic, are  made  more  lifelike  by  arranging 
for  the  muscles  to  move  them  as  if  they 
were  real  eyes.  Over  200  persons  have  been 
fitted  with  these  lifelike  artificial  eyes. 

But  plastics  are  far  from  perfect.  They 
do  have  shortcomings.  The  plastics  do  not 
generally  take  well  to  extremely  high  tem- 
peratures. Many  of  them  tend  to  "creep" 
or  expand  under  loads  and  with  rises  in 
temperature.  Like  wood,  plastics  can  be 
destroyed  by  fire.  Some  burn  quite  easily; 
others  burn'  slowly,  and  some  are  "self- 
extinguishing." 

Many  plastics  are  vulnerable  to  abra- 
sion. One  happy  exception  is  vinyl  floor 
tile.  Plastics  also  tend  to  have  a  disagree- 
able attraction  to  dust,  but  this  can  be  min- 
imized either  by  a  special  process  in  manu- 
facturing or  fay  treatment  with  anti-static 
wax. 

The  plastics  in  general  enjoy  a  fairly 
good  reputation.  Care,  however,  must  be 
exercised  not  to  use  plastics  where  other 
materials  may  better  meet  the  need.  The 
key  to  satisfaction  is  to  get  the  right  plas- 
tic in  the  right  place.  This,  of  course,  takes 
knowledge  that  gradually  will  become 
more  plentiful  as  plastics  assume  their 
place  among  the  ancient  materials  and  are 
looked  upon  as  old  and  tried. 


FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


19 


THEY  HAVg 


/?///LT-\u 

mm 


S30D  shortages  are 
hardly  a  problem  to 
those  creatures  of  na> 
ture  enjoying  the  luxury  of 
a   built-in   pantry.   Even   long 
periods  of  food  scarcity  do  not 
unduly  disturb  them.   Take  the 
gila  monster,  for  instance,  a  poi- 
sonous lizard  of  about  eighteen 
Inches  in   length,   found  in  the 
desert  areas  of  Arizona  and  New 
Mexico.  And  where  is  the  gila  mon- 
ster's pantry? 

<L  This  strikingly  colored  lizard,  pos- 
sessing brightly  marked  skin  with 
black  bars  or  erossbands  on  a  whit- 
ish yellow  or  pink  background,  has  a  thick, 
short,  blunt  tail.  To  a  casual  observer,  the  glla 
monster  would  seem  to  be  at  a  disadvantage 
with  such  an  ungainly  looking  tail;  but  this 
lizard  is  very  practical  about  its  tail:  It  is  its 
portable  pantry.  When  food  is  scarce  the  tall 
becomes  thinjjwhen  food  is  abundant  the  tail 
becomes  thick  and  swollen.  So  food  short' 
ages  are  no  bother  to  the  glla  monster, 
It  can  live  without  additional  food  for 
several  months — thanks  to  its  built-in 
pantry! 

C  Then  there  is  the  Amazonian  tree 
frog  that  builds  itself  a  beeswax- 
lined  bowl  in  the  hollow  of  a  tree 
trunk,  located  so  as  to  catch  rain.  The 
tree  frog  then  lays  its  eggs.  When  the  polliwogs 
are  born,  they  have  not  only  a  fine  home  but 
an  abundant  food  supply,  a  built-in  pantry  in 
the  form  of  an  extra-fleshy  tall.  Most  tadpoles 
feed  on  algae  and  other  vegetation,  but  not 
these.  As  they  change  to  frogs  the  nutriment 
in  their  built-in  pantries  is  gradually  absorbed 
so  that  no  other  food  is  needed  for  their  grow- 
ing bodies  until  they  are  old  enough  to  hop 
about  and  secure  their  own  meals. 
<£  The  penguin  is  another  creature 
that  believes  in  storing  up  food 
for  lean  times.  This  is  especially 
necessary,  since  the  penguin  has  a 
long  winter  fast.  To  keep  alive  dur- 
ing the  fast  the  emperor  penguin 
builds  up  a  portable  pantry  of  about 
a  dozen  pounds  of  fat,  lodged  chiefly 
around  the  stomach. 
H  The  creature  with  the  most  remark- 

20 


able  portable  pantry  Is  perhaps  the 
camel.  Its  hump  (or  humps)  is  its  pan- 
try. The  size,  plumpness  and  erectness 
of  the  hump  are  an  indication  of  the 
camel's  state  of  health  and  his  current 
food  supply.  When  the  camel's  food  sup- 
ply runs  low,  it  simply  draws  its  suste- 
nance from  its  hump  and  continues  to  plod 
across  the  desert  as  strongly  as  if  it  had  a 
good  meal  each  night.  In  this  regard  Natural 
History  magazine  of  May,  1957,  pointed  out: 
€,  "There  is  no  water  in  the  camel's 
hump,  either.  It  is  fat,  stored  energy, 
like  the  hump  on  Brahma  cattle  now 
so  common  in  the  southern  United 
States.  Some  students  have  reasoned 
that  when  the  fat  of  the  camel's  hump 
is  utilized  it  produces  more  than  its 
weight  in  water  and  that  the  hump, 
therefore,  does  indirectly  store  water.  The 
physiologists  disproved  this.  They  have  shown 
that  it  takes  a  lot  of  oxygen  to  combine  with 
fat  and  transform  it  into  usable  energy.  Since 
oxygen  comes  through  the  lungs,  this  necessi- 
tates increased  breathing  and,  consequently, 
more  moisture  evaporated  in  the  exhaled 
breath.  As  a  result,  extra  water  pro- 
^._  duced  from  metabolized  fat  escapes  from 
the  body.  Even  though  the  hump  isn't 
a  water  tank,  it  is  quite  a  remarkable 
feature:  a  light,  easily  carried  form  of 
energy  that  keeps  the  camel  supplied 
after  the  feed  bag  is  empty  or  the  pas- 
ture dried  up." 
C  The  camel's  portable  pantry,  of  course,  is 
not  inexhaustible;  and  if  the  camel  is  required 
to  draw  nourishment  from  its  pantry  for  too 
long  a  time  the  skin  of  the  hump,  instead  of 
standing  up,  falls  over,  and  hangs  like  empty 
bags  on  the  side  of  the  dorsal  ridge.  Time  to  re- 
plenish the  pantry! 

ft  Speaking  of  portable  pantries,  "there  is  no 
need  to  leave  the  human  race  to  find  one  of 
the  queerest,"  writes  Frank  Lane  in  Nature 
\il//  Parade.  "The  Hottentots  often  wish  to 
1  -  '  -  store  fat  against  lean  times.  This  is 
simple  for  them  because  their  buttocks 
easily  become  portable  pantries,  and 
this  condition,  known  as  steatopy- 
gia,  enables  them  to  go  for  a  long 
time  without  food."  probab/y  few 
humans,  however,  envy  the  Hotten- 
tots for  their  remarkable  food  re- 
serve capacity. 

AWAKE! 


wtaft  tb&  prism  ate  of 
the  Cfaureh  of  Blnj.^ 
land*  Dn  Geoffrey 
Fkh<*r,  the  ArehbMv 
op  of  Canterbury,  v&?» 
ited  Pope  Mm  XXIII, 
h^&d  of  the  Roman 
C&thoMe  'Church*  at 
the  Vatican,  Rome, 
History,  imtofid/whani 
we  consider  that  no 
Archbishop  of  Canter- 
bury had  visited  the 
pope  for  over  tfive  ta.i.« 
dirad  y^ai'sf  No-  wonder 
Br.lta:in'$  mwspapem 
headlined  the  news 


ty.  As  Cardinal  God* 
frey,  Roman  CathaSk 
Ai'ehbklwp  of  West- 
minster*  said;  "The 
holy  father  wauTd  r€- 
edve  the  arohfel&hop 
with  the  $&m&  $&mp&? 
thelk  corilmlily  as  he 
and  his  predecessors 
have  axtaided  to  many 
other  religious  lead- 
ers," Another  Roman 
C  a  t  h  o  H  c  (a  rahbishop 
referred  to  the  visit  as 
a  ^signpost  to  chanty." 
However,  fxom  s.om& 
quarters  stemmed  aP- 


wta  the  visit  was  ofifaMUy  announced  prehension  am?  even  opposition.  A,  repre 

hm±  cm  October  30-  The  visit  conducted  a  tentative  off  the  Protectant  Truth  Society 

tea-day  tour  in  which  the  archbishop  had  thought,  tha  meeting  would  at  tea&t  "g£ve 

called  on  leader  a  of  Axiglieiwi  and  Orthodox  tte  ardibisihop  a.  toe  opportunity  to  tell 


ahmvfam  in  Jerusalem  and  Istanbul, 


the  pope  how  much  Protestants  abhor  the 


The  tows  immediately  provoM  great     psratMition  methods  of  his  church  in  Spain 
mtere&t  and  speculation tt  &&  and  Colombia/*  Evangelical 

welt  as;  misgivings  &ruS  suapi-  "^^^H^^^P^  organizations  weaat  farther; 
dom  Rumours  abounded  of  i\s™  ^^^^^^^F  ^^  ^n^-  a  ^ptrUvtion  to  the 
unfcwt  between  the  two  churches  ^^^^Bf  archbishop  expre-^mg  their  <M.~ 
now  separated  to  over  3$0  years  by  ^^y  c3m  lsi&  ^  visit  "'should  give  tfte 
the  Reformation.  «F       impression  to  the  wmirt  at  large  that. 

AfigJic&ft  a».d  Free  church      '       the  Church  of  England  was;  wi&irog  to 


leaders  in  Britain  welcomed  'the  news;.  Cm*  eompratxte  In  any  way  her  Reformation 

Anglican  bishop  said:  'It  is  on  important  principles^  Other  church  MMers  wens  of 

&tep  in.  the  increasing  of  pergonal  friend-  tjtm  opinion  that  tha  visit  was  "imwistf'* 

ships  whkh  arc*  growing  wp  nowadays  be-  and  demonstrated  the  "greatest  example  o£ 

tween  re^onsatato  leaders  In  fill  parts  of  bacfcalldlng1*  on  the  archbishop's  part, 

ChrMeJudom/'    A   Presbyterian    minus  t&r 

thou&tot  the  move  was  "a  very  wise  and  The  Purpose  of  the  Vmt 

profitable  tMng*'  While  tire  Moderator  of  What,  fhm\,  was  the purpose  oi:  this  ^i^ 

tlia  Church  of  Scotland  thought  "It:  cou].d  Urde  visit?  Th«re  wre,  of  course,  3  host 

amtSy  lead  to  pleasantries  between  the.  two  of  »pecuJationst  but  both  i±v  Church  of 


people. 


w 


England  and  th©  arehblBhop  hinialf  <*m* 


Eoittan  Q-itholic  statements^  coneraSly,     phased,  that  it  was  to  W  merely  a  a">u^ 
wen?  guarded,  but  mosrfc  assun-*d  D:t--  Kshfa'    tey  visit  with  no  agenda  and  no  JM  o:l: 


FEBRUARY  '£2,  m>i 


21 


problems  or  issues  to  be  discussed.  "I  have 
no  idea  what  I  shall  talk  about,"  confessed 
Dr.  Fisher  as  he  explained  that  his  sole 
purpose  In  meeting  the  pope  was  to  "make 
personal  contact"  and  give  a  good  example 
of  Christian  unity,  which  "if  others  fol- 
lowed there  would  be  a  diminution  of  the 
coldness  that  certainly  existed." 

An  informal  visit  we  had  been  led  to  ex- 
pect and  an  informal  visit  it  turned  out  to 
be!  At  Ciampino  airport,  Rome,  the  arch- 
bishop was  met  by  just  a  few  British  and 
Italian  government  representatives  and 
by  representatives  of  Italian  Protestant 
churches,  other  Free  churches,  Orthodox 
churches  and  a  number  of  Roman  Catho- 
lics. But  there  was  no  welcome  from  the 
Vatican!  Most  newspapers  thought  this  of- 
ficial behaviour  distinctly  "cool." 

It  did  suggest  this,  however,  that  the 
Vatican  was  treating  the  visit  as  a  strictly 
private  one.  Observers  in  Rome  sensed 
that  Vatican  officials,  who  took  the  view 
that  the  primate  was  just  passing  through 
Rome  and  stopping  to  pay  a  friendly  visit 
on  the  pope,  were  fearful  of  making  any 
single  false  move  that  could  be  interpreted 
as  official  recognition  of  the  visit,  thus 
attaching  any  importance  to  it  The  arch- 
bishop's arrival  at  the  Vatican  itself  con- 
firmed this.  Not  one  photographer  was  al- 
lowed into  St.  Peter's  Square  and  not  even 
the  pope's  favourite  photographer,  who 
normally  records  visits,  took  any  pictures 
on  this  occasion.  Nevertheless,  a  general 
"atmosphere  of  friendship  and  happiness" 
in  the  city  somewhat  offset  the  cool  official 
Vatican  reception,  and  the  Italian  press 
gave  the  visit  front-page  news. 

Although  the  archbishop  spent  two  days 
in  Rome,  his  actual  audience  with  the  pope 
lasted  only  sixty-five  minutes.  His  greet- 
ing to  the  pope:  "Your  Holiness,  we  are 
making  history,"  led  into  a  conversation 
that  touched  upon  "personal  experiences 
of   a   spiritual   nature,"   according  to  a 


Church  of  England  statement.  Dr.  Fisher 
spoke  of  his  recent  visits  to  Jerusalem  and 
Istanbul,  while  the  pope  recalled  some  of 
his  experiences  in  Istanbul,  where  he 
served  as  apostolic  delegate  for  ten  years. 
The  pope  expressed  his  desire  to  increase 
brotherly  feeling  among  all  men,  especially 
Christians,  and  the  archbishop  responded 
by  saying  there  was  a  keen  and  wide- 
spread desire  in  many  churches  to  act  for 
the  same  purpose.  An  exchange  of  gifts 
and  the  visit  was  over,  marked,  we  are 
assured  from  official  sources,  "by  a  happy 
spirit  of  cordiality  and  sympathy." 

Back  in  London,  after  the  visit,  the  arch- 
bishop explained  that  his  talk  with  the 
pope  was  "as  friendly  and  natural  as  pos- 
sible" and  covered  "what  two  people  say 
to  each  other  about  everything  and  noth- 
ing," In  the  Vatican  the  pope  told  cardi- 
nals and  prelates,  "We  remained  at  the 
threshold  of  the  great  problems." 

The  Outcome? 

Though  the  visit  was  just  a  cordial  and 
friendly  one,  is  there  any  basis  for  believ- 
ing that  it  is  a  steppingstone  toward  unity 
between  the  two  churches? 

Protagonists  for  unity  see  great  possi- 
bilities. Apart  from  the  visit  itself  estab- 
lishing friendly  relations  they  point  out 
that  previously  given  clear  signs  from  the 
pope  had  heightened  the  possibility  of  the 
visit's  taking  place.  They  refer,  first  of  all, 
to  a  speech  by  the  pope  in  May,  1960,  when 
he  called  for  "a  great  understanding  of 
those  who  carry  Christ's  name  in  their 
hearts  and  on  their  foreheads  although 
they  are  separated  from  the  Catholic 
church,"  as  a  clear  evidence  of  the  pope's 
intentions  to  work  for  Christian  unity. 

Secondly,  they  recall  the  pope's  forming 
of  a  secretariat  under  Cardinal  Bea  in  May, 
1960,  for  the  unity  of  Christians  in  con- 
nection with  the  second  Vatican  Council 
to  be  held  soon.  The  functions  of  the  sec- 


22 


AWAKE! 


retariat  are  to  enable  non-Roman  Catho- 
lics to  follow  the  work  of  the  second  coun- 
cil and  to  help  churches  not  in  communion 
with  the  Holy  See  to  arrive  at  unity  with 
the  Roman  Catholic  Church.  So  now  there 
will  be  what  Dr.  Fisher  described  as  a  "rec- 
ognised channel  of  interchange  of  informa- 
tion," instead  of  the  previous  roundabout 
and  unofficial  means  of  communication  be- 
tween the  two  churches. 

Thirdly,  protagonists  point  out  that  for 
the  first  time  there  were  two  Roman  Cath- 
olic observers,  one  of  whom  was  Monsignor 
Willebrands,  secretary  of  the  secretariat, 
present  at  the  Central  Committee  of  the 
World  Council  of  Churches  at  St.  An- 
drew's, Scotland,  last  August.  This  revolu- 
tionary step  seems  to  be  a  clear  indica- 
tion of  a  change  in  the  attitude  of  the 
Roman  church.  So  many  feel  the  same  con- 
fidence as  expressed  by  the  archbishop, 
who  said  on  his  return  from  Rome:  "I  am 
certain  there  will  be  talks  between  the 
churches.  I  hope  there  may  be  freedom  of 
discussion  .  .  .  with  the  Roman  Catholics 
as  we  already  have  it  with  the  Free 
churches." 

But  even  supposing  there  are  freer  dis- 
cussions in  the  future,  will  these  lead  to 
actual  unity  between  the  two  churches? 
Will  they  be  prepared  to  relax  their  doc- 
trine so  that  each  will  recognise  the  other? 
Each  side  admits  their  differences  are 
great,  both  in  doctrine  and  in  government. 
And  it  is  these  big  differences  that  have 
formed  the  basis  for  many  hatreds,  jeal- 
ousies and  rivalries  between  the  two 
churches  since  their  parting  in  the  six- 
teenth century. 

To  this  day  the  Church  of  Rome  does 
not  accept  the  English  church  as  part  of 
the  Christian  church;  hence,  neither  does 
she  recognise  the  ordination  of  Anglican 
priests  and  ministers.  Sacraments  or  serv- 
ices performed  by  these  are  therefore 
mockeries  or  imitations;  and  the  Anglican 

FEBRUARY  22,  i961 


marriage  ceremony  is  considered  to  be 
nothing  more  than  a  civil  affair.  On  the 
other  hand,  while  the  Church  of  England 
recognises  the  pope  as  the  lawful  bishop 
of  Rome,  she  does  not  accept  him  as  the 
head  of  the  Christian  church.  The  papal 
authoritarian  system  of  church  govern- 
ment borders,  in  her  eyes,  on  totalitarian- 
ism and  is  quite  unattractive.  She  abhors 
the  Roman  Catholic  practice  of  intolerance 
where  Roman  Catholics  are  in  the  major- 
ity and  views  such  dogmas  as  the  infallibil- 
ity of  the  pope,  the  immaculate  conception 
and  the  bodily  assumption  of  Mary  into 
heaven  as  complete  nonsense.  These  and 
many  other  doctrinal  differences  constitute 
the  solid-wall  partition  that  has  separated 
the  two  churches  for  so  long.  As  any  can- 
did observer  must  admit,  it  would  be  ask- 
ing a  lot  to  expect  real  unity  between  the 
churches  if  they  cling  to  the  doctrines  that 
have  separated  them  for  nearly  four  cen- 
turies. 

So  while  the  indications  are  that  the 
archbishop's  visit  to  the  pope  may  lead  to 
wider  informal  talks,  the  way  to  real  unity 
is  not  easy,  and  we  could  not  say  yet  that 
it  is  upon  the  horizon.  There  would  have  to 
be  acceptance  side  by  side  of  different 
forms  of  government,  rites  and  doctrines 
and  a  common  recognition  of  each  other. 
There  .would,  in  other  words,  have  to  be 
what  Dr.  Fisher  termed  a  peaceful  "ec- 
clesiastical co-existence."  But  to  what  ex- 
tent would  each  church  be  prepared  to 
make  concessions  to  achieve  this  kind  of 
unity? 

Warning  against  an  optimism  based  on 
wishful  thinking,  the  British  Daily  Ex- 
press, in  its  leader  of  November  1,  1960, 
said:  "Some  people  may  see  in  this  [visit] 
an  attempt  to  bring  the  churches  of  Eng- 
land and  Rome  closer  together.  They  may 
even  regard  it  as  the  first  step  towards 
achieving  unity.  Such  views  are  surely 
mistaken.  True,  the  Pope  has  called  on  his 

23 


followers  to  overcome  old  prejudices.  .  .  . 
But  tolerance  is  one  thing.  Glossing  over 
great  differences  between  the  faiths  is  an- 
other. .  .  -  [The  Roman  Catholic  church] 
will  never  compromise  with  its  doctrine. 
The  meeting  between  the  pope  and  the 
archbishop  will  not  lessen  the  differences 
between  the  churches." 

There  is  indeed  a  big  gulf  between  the 
churches,  a  gulf  so  great  that  it  needs  much 
more  than  mere  hopes  and  desires  for  unity 
to  span  it  It  calls  for  compromise  on  both 
doctrine  and  government,  and  that,  to  judge 
by  the  present  attitudes  of  the  two  church- 
es, is  quite  unacceptable  to  either.  Unity 
may  be  a  common  aim  but  at  present  it  is 
little  more  than  a  dream.  Dr.  Fisher's 
"wind  of  change,"  which  he  now  detects 
blowing  through  Christendom's  churches, 
will  have  to  blow  long  and  strong  if  it  is 
to  topple  the  stout,  four-centuries-old  wall 
of  partition  that  still  quite  firmly  divides 
the  two  camps. 

Why  Unity? 

Many  will  wonder  why  the  desire  of 
these  churches  to  reconcile  differences 
they  created  themselves  four  centuries  ago 
and  have  been  quite  prepared  to  accept  for 
so  long.  The  reason  is  before  our  eyes. 
Atheistic  communism  and  faith-subverting 
materialism  are  ravaging  all  of  Christen- 
dom's flocks,  left  spiritually  weak  and  de- 
fenceless by  years  of  Bible  ignorance  and 
confusion.  The  writing  has  begun  to  appear 
on  the  wall  and  the  truth  of  Jesus'  words 
at  Luke  11:17,  that  "every  kingdom  di- 
vided against  itself  comes  to  desolation, 
and  a  house  divided  against  itself  falls,"  is 
rapidly  manifesting  itself  in  the  case  of 


Christendom  itself.  So  in  this  day  of  need 
the  cry  is  for  unity. 

Yet  those  who  understand  their  Bibles 
know  that  true  Christians  never  have  been 
divided,  either  in  belief  or  conduct.  Indeed, 
they  know  that  to  confess  differences  is  to 
deny  Christianity,  for  the  Founder  of 
Christianity  not  only  established  a  united 
church  but  gave  frequent  warnings  against 
divisions  of  any  kind.  True  Christians  heed 
the  words  of  his  apostle  Paul  at  1  Corin- 
thians 1:10:  "Now  I  exhort  you,  brothers, 
through  the  name  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ 
that  you  should  all  speak  in  agreement, 
and  that  there  should  not  be  divisions 
among  you,  but  that  you  may  be  fitly  unit- 
ed in  the  same  mind  and  in  the  same  line 
of  thought."  Educated  from  God's  Word, 
they  know  what  they  as  Christians  must 
believe  and  hence  are  not  subject  to  "every 
wind  of  teaching."— Eph.  4:14;  Gal.  5:19- 
21, 

But  where  is  such  Christian  unity  to  be 
found  today?  The  facts  answer:  in  the 
New  World  society  of  Jehovah's  witnesses. 
This  international  body  of  Christians,  ac- 
cepting the  Bible  as  its  sole  standard  for 
belief  and  practice,  is  not  divided.  There  is 
strength  in  their  unity,  as  history  can  tes- 
tify. Fierce  persecution  in  many  quarters 
of  the  globe  has  not  weakened  their  faith, 
divided  their  ranks  or  caused  them  to  com- 
promise their  beliefs.  They  enjoy  unity, 
peace  and  joy,  looking  forward  to  the  time 
when,  in  this  generation,  God's  foretold 
battle  of  Armageddon  rids  this  earth  of 
trouble  and  divisions  for  all  time,  and 
transforms  it  into  a  paradise  state  where 
all  men  of  good  will  may  live  as  one  united 
family. 


Q 


24 


AWAKE! 


'AwaKei  Aids  Boxer  to  Make  Wise  Decision 


By  "Awatwl"   corntponaW  In   Italy 

fjHE  Rome  office  of  the  Watch  Tower  Bible 
land  Tract  Society  recently  received  the 
|  following  letter  from  a  faithful  reader  of 
e  Avxtkef  magazine: 
jL  "Four  times  I  was  a  champion  boxer  of 
Italy  and  once  of  Europe.  Certainly  the  ac- 
tivity that  I  carried  on  in  this  field  of  sport 
was  quite  intense  and  full  of  sacrifices.  Good 
balance,  and  extreme  willingness  and  decisive- 
ness were  necessary  in  order  to  reach  the  de- 
sired goal  of  success.  But  I  was  finally  re- 
warded with  the  laurel  crown  after  much 
training,  many  trials,  battles  and  discourage- 
ment that  often  deprived  me  of  confidence  In 
myself  and  in  my  ability. 
^  "One  day  I  became  acquainted  with  the 
truth.  It  was  indeed  a  source  of  great  Joy  to 
me  to  learn  the  pure  message  of  life  that 
proceeds  from  God's  Word.  I  realized  at  once 
that  I  had  to  devote  mygelf  to  a  weekly  Bible 
study  with  the  guiding  assistance  of  one  of 
Jehovah's  witnesses.  In  a  short  time  my  ap- 
preciation for  the  truth  grew  to  such  an  ex- 
tent that  I  felt  the  responsibility  of  being 
baptized  in  symbol  of  my  dedication  to  do  the 
will  of  God.  I  was  still  uncertain  and  doubtful 
about  something,  however.  Would  I  continue 
to  be  a  boxer?  To  tell  the  truth  I  was  not 
clear  on  the  matter,  but,  rather,  somewhat  con- 
fused. I  knew  I  had  to  conform  to  God's  will, 
but  I  could  not  see  clearly  Just  how  I  could 
do  this  and  at  the  same  time  take  care  of  my 
economic  obligations.  In  fact  I  supported  my- 
self and  family  by  boxing. 
<£  "But  Just  when  I  needed  assistance  to  help 
me  make  a  wise  decision  for  the  future,  an 
article  published  in  the  Italian  Awake!  of  May 
8,  1960  (English  edition  of  December  8, 1959), 
entitled  'Spotlight  on  Boxing*  came  to  my 
help.  As  if  it  were  yesterday,  I  recall  how  anx- 
iously I  read  this  article.  That  day  I  had  Just 
come  in  for  dinner  and  my  wife  asked  me  to 


sit  down  and  eat  since  I  was  already  late  and 
the  meal  would  get  cold.  At  this  point  my 
wife  exclaimed:  'Look,  Artenio,  the  Awake! 
magazine  has  just  been  delivered  and  there 
is  an  article  that  talks  about  boxing  in  it.' 
I  left  the  dinner  table  Immediately  and 
grasped  the  magazine  from  my  wife's  hand. 
I  did  not  take  my  eyes  off  the  Awaket  article 
until  I  had  read  it  all.  At  once  I  understood 
the  truth  of  the  matter.  Now  I  knew  what 
boxing  really  was,  exposed  by  the  spotlight  of 
God's  principles  as  set  forth  In  His  Word. 
I  realized  the  wise  decision  that  I  had  to 
make  and  I  did  not  hesitate  for  one  minute. 
I  said  to  my  wife:  'From  today  onward,  Maria, 
I  have  decided  not  to  do  any  more  boxing!' 
Yes,  now  I  had  no  more  doubt  on  the  subject; 
I  saw  It  clearly.  And  almost  as  if  to  put  the 
decision  I  had  made  to  a  severe  test,  eight 
days  later  I  received  a  phone  call  from  my 
manager.  He  begged  me  to  take  up  training 
at  once  for  a  boxing  match  that  he  was  anx- 
ious to  contract  for  in  Stockholm,  a  match 
that  would  have  brought  me  a  purse  of  one 
million  llras  (about  $1,600).  But  I  had  made 
my  decision,  and  gave  my  manager  this  an- 
swer: Tm  not  going  to  box  any  more,  I've 
made  up  my  mind!' 

«  "To  this  day,  when  I  review  in  my  mind 
this  decision,  I  can  see  how  I  have  been  bene- 
fited, what  blessings  I  have  received.  I  was 
able  to  find  a  good  occupation,  and  I  am  happy 
now.  My  body  is  strong  and  no  longer  exposed 
to  the  extreme  efforts  and  tensions  that 
brought  me  so  many  anxieties  and,  above  all, 
I  am  now  at  peace  with  my  conscience,  per- 
mitting me  to  approach  God  with  sincerity 
and  complete  dedication.  Yes,  now  I  can  truly 
say  that  I  understand  how  wise  and  meaning- 
ful are  the  words  expressed  by  the  psalmist: 
'Behold  I  come,  O  God,  to  do  your  will.'" 

Signed. 
Artenio  Calzavnra. 


74)24  Saw  Tim* 

•g  TASI  stands  for  Time  Assignment  Speech  Interpolation.  By  means  of  it  circuits 
capable  of  transmitting  thirty-six  transatlantic  telephone  conversations  are  able 
to  transmit  seventy-two.  TASI  takes  advantage  of  the  fact  that  in  using  a  telephone 
one  speaks  less  than  half  the  time.  It  scans  each  circuit  thousands  of  times  per 
second  and  interpolates  when  one  is  listening  instead  of  talking.  It  makes  this 
switch  in  only  15/1000  of  a  second,  much  too  quick  for  the  human  ear  to  detect. 


FEBRUARY  SB,  X961 


25 


J^ow    Venezuelans  C*al  lo  cJLi 


By   "Awokel"   Correspondent   in   Venezuela 

■HO  DOUBT  you  have  heard  ot  tortttlas  or 
Jul  enchiladas.  But  have  you  ever  heard  of 
bU  arepaef  If  you  happen  to  have  been  bora 
and  raised  in  Venezuela,  you  have  probably 
eaten  an  arepa  every  day  of  your  lite.  You 
see,  that  is  the  staff  oi  life  in  Venezuela. 
Bread  is  beginning  to  gain  in  popularity,  but 
most  housewives  continue  to  grind  out  the 
boiled  dried  corn  and  pat  it  into  cakes  about 
three  inches  in  diameter  and  one  inch  thick; 
they  then  toast  it  over  the  glowing  coals  of 
.the  brazier  or  bake  it  in  the  oven. 

•  Arepas  are  eaten  with  black  beans  or  with 
soup  or  some  white  Venezuelan  cheese  in  the 
center,  the  two  sides  held  together  with  a 
toothpick,  dipped  in  a  mixture  of  beaten  egg 
and  flour,  then  French  fried.  Mmmmmmm! 
Delicious!  In  the  latter  case  it  is  no  longer 
an  at&pa  but  a  tostada. 

•  If  you  happen  to  come  from  the  eastern 
part  of  the  country,  however,  a  substantial 
part  of  your  diet  is  probably  made  up  of 
casabe  rather  than  the  are-pa,  although  you 
might  eat  arenas  too.  Casabe  is  a  flat,  round 
cake  about  two  feet  in  diameter  and  a  fourth 
of  an  inch  thick,  with  no  seasonings  or  in- 
gredients other  than  the  cassava  root. 

•  Sugar-cane  products  are  used  extensively. 
Children  suck  on  the  pulp  of  the  raw  sugar 
cane  and  adults  step  into  a  grocery  store  and 
order  guara^o  de  cana,  the  juice  squeezed  out 
of  the  cane  and  sold  like  soft  drinks.  Another 
popular  sugar-cane  product  is  papeldn.  the 
cane  juice  is  crushed  out  into  large  vats, 
where  it  is  cooked  at  high  temperatures,  then 
passed  from  vat  to  vat  in  a  purifying  process, 
then  poured  into  cone-shaped  or  square  molds 
to  harden.  This  crude  brown  sugar  has  been 
used  for  generations  for  all  sweetening  pur- 
poses. Refined  sugar,  however,  is  gradually 
replacing  it.  There  are  now  twelve  sugar  mills 
in  the  country,  compared  to  three  ten  years 
ago. 

•  A  must  on  Venezuelan  menus  is  the  large 
cooking  bananas  called  plantains.  They  are 
used  at  whatever  stage — green,  yellow  with 
black  spots,  black  or  somewhat  moldy;  they 
are  roasted,  boiled,  fried  or  baked. 

•  If  a  Venezuelan  likes  to  eat  between  meals, 
he  is  sure  to  have  some  dulce  on  hand/ This 

26 


! 
I 

X 
T 

\ 

i 


we 

might  be  any  of  a  large  variety  of  tropical 
fruits,  such  as  green  figs,  hicocos  (coco  plums}, 
prunes  or  papaya,  which  are  prepared  in  a 
thick  syrup.  Hard  jellies  are  eaten  as  one 
would  eat  dessert,  served,  considerately,  with 
a  glass  of  water. 

•  A  major  problem  in  Venezuela  is  how  to 
supply  enough  food  to  feed  its  more  than 
6,000,000  inhabitants.  Agriculture  has  not  kept 
pace  with  the  growing  economy.  Many  on 
farms  have  migrated  to  the  cities.  Instead  of 
five  out  of  every  eight  Venezuelans'  living  in 
the  country,  as  there  were  twenty  years  ago, 
there  are  now  three  out  of  every  eight.  Much 
good  land  is  not  being  used  that  could  be 
producing  enough  for  home  use  and  for  ex- 
port. To  remedy  this,  the  government  has 
established  the  National  Agrarian  Bureau 
Unstituto  Agrario  National),  whose  objective 
is  to  improve  the  farmers'  living-  conditions, 
so  as  to  encourage  more  to  remain  on  farms. 
This  program  is  apparently  meeting  with  suc- 
cess, because  from  1950  to  1955  there  was  an 
increase  of  35  percent  in  food  crops. 

•  Fish  is  hot  included  in  this  problem  of  sup- 
ply and  demand.  Rather,  there  is  a  surplus. 
There  are  eight  sardine  canneries  in  Cumana, 
located  on  the  northeastern  coast.  These  pro- 
duce 50,000,000  cans  of  sardines  yearly.  The 
surplus  is  exported.  There  are  so  many  sar- 
dines in  the  Gulf  of  Carlaco  that  fishermen 
ignore  the  small  schools.  It  is  said  that  this 
gulf  has  one  of  the  richest  supplies  in  the 
world.  There  is  an  abundance  of  other  fish  too. 
In  that  section  of  the  country  it  is  not  un- 
common to  see  small  children  about  two  or- 
three  years  of  age  eating  whole,  fried  fish, 
carefully  picking  the  meat  from  the  bones. 
Salted-  flsh  is  also  very  popular. 

•  There  are  so  many  other  appetizing  foods 
for  which  a  Venezuelan  abroad  would  yearn, 
such  as  rice  with  coconut,  candy  from  coco- 
nut, cachapaa  (like  Mexican  tortillas  but  made 
with  fresh  corn),  mondongo  (a  soup  of  tripe) 
and  others.  But  for  Venezuelans  conscious  of 
their  spiritual  need,  no  food  provides  sucn 
vital  energy  as  the  spiritual  food;  for  they 
know  "man  must  live,  not  on  bread  alone,  but 
on  every  utterance  comihg  forth  through  Je- 
hovah's mouth,"— Matt.  4:4. 

AWAKE! 


T^l5y,!?,Siiiifin,l!?,!^ 


Did  Jesus  Have  Fleshly 
Brothers  and   Sisfers? 


iiiii 


THE  claim  is  made  that  Mary,  the  moth- 
er of  Jesus,  was  "ever  virgin."  Thus 
The  Catholic  Enclvpedia  (Vol.  15,  pp.  466- 
469)  states  that  Mary  was  a  virgin  before 
and,  during  the  time  she  gave  birth  to  Je- 
sus as  well  as  ever  after.  If  that,  wfrp  so, 
then  Jesus  did  not .  havejapx  fleshJx^rpihr- 
ers  and  sisters;  meaning,  of  course,  half 
brothers  and  sisters,  since  it  was  God  that 
had  begotten  him. 

Is  this  what  the  Bible  teaches?  No,  it  is 
not.  On  the  contrary,  it  very  plainly  shows 
that  Jesus  did  have  brothers,  four  pfjthem,r 
and  an  unspecified  number  of  sisters. 

Thus  at  the  beginning  of  his  ministry 
we  read  that  Jesus  went  down  to  Caper- 
naum, "he  and  his  mother,  and  his  breth- 
ren, and  his  disciples."  And  toward  the 
middle  of  his  ministry  it  is  recorded  that 
some  asked:  "Is  not  this  the  carpenter's 
son?  Is  not  his  mother  called  Mary,  and 
his  brethren  James  and  Joseph  and  Simon 
and  Jude?  And  his  sisters,  are  they  not  all 
with  us?'r  Further,  shortly  after  Jesus' 
ascension  into  heaven  we  find  the  eleven 
apostles,  together  "with  the  women  and 
Mary,  the  mother  of  Jesus,  and  with  his 
brethren,"  in  an  upper  room  in  Jerusalem. 
And  many  years  later  the  apostle  Paul 
made  mention  of  "the  brethren  of  the 
Lord"  and  of  "James,  the  brother  of  the 
Lord."— John  2:12;  Matt.  13:54-56;  Acts 
1:14;  1  Cor.  9:5;  Gal.  1:19,  Cath.  Confrat. 

Due  to  the  archaic  "brethren"  instead 
of  "brothers,"  some  might  think  that  spir- 


itual brothers  are  meant.  But  not  so.  True, 
the  word  here  translated  "brethren"  is  the 
Greek  word  adelphds,  which  is  used  to  re- 
fer to  both  spiritual  and  fleshly  brothers. 
However,  the  Greek  Scriptures  make  it 
clear  that  Jesus  had  both  kinds  of  "breth- 
ren," for  they  distinguish  between  the  two, 
as  noted  above  at  John  2:12^  which  speaks 
of  "his  brethren^  and  his  disciples."  In  fact, 
during  his  earthly  ministry  "his  brethren 
were  without  faith  in  him."— John  7:5, 
Knox. 

Some  argue  that  "brethren"  in  such 
texts  refers,  not  to  those  of  the  same  fam- 
ily, taut  to  those  somewhat  removed,  as 
cousins,  for  example.  What  about  this  ar- 
gument? Is  it  sound?  No,  it  is  not.  There 
is  a  third  use  of  adelphds  in  the  Christian 
Greek  Scriptures',  but  not  in  this  sense. 
Rather,  it  is  used  to  refer  to  all  one's  fel- 
low countrymen,  fellow  nationals,  as  it 
were.  Thus  Stephen  tells  that  when  Moses 
was  forty  years  old,  "it  occurred  to  him 
to  visit  his  brethren,"  not  spiritual  broth- 
ers, not  those  of  his  own  faim^ "but  his 
fellow  Israelites.  In  this  sense  Paul  also 
usedTTt""wHen  addressing  the  Sanhedrin: 
"Brethren,  I  have  conducted  myself  before 
God  with  a  perfectly  good  conscience."  The 
Gospel  writers,  however,  in  referring  to 
Jesus'  brothers  could  not  have  meant  adel- 
phds in  this  sense  because  it  included  all 
the  Jews  living  in  Jesus'  time. — Acts  7:23; 
23:1,  Cath.  Confrat 

When  these  writers  wished  to  indicate 
a  closer  relationship  than  that  of  nation 
and  yet  not  as  close  as  of  one's  own  family 
they  used  the  word  syngen&s,  which  occurs 
about  twelve  times  in  the  Christian  Greek 
Scriptures.  It  is  variously  translated  as 
"cousin,"  "kinsfolk"  and  "relatives."  It  is 
used  to  denote  the  relationship  between 
Mary  and  Elizabeth,  who  were  cousins: 
"See,  moreover,  how  it  fares  with  thy  cous- 
in Elizabeth;  she  is  old,  yet  she  too  has 
conceived  a  son."  The  same  word  is  ren- 


FEBRUARY*82,  1961 


27 


dered  "kinsfolk"  further  on:  "Her  neigh- 
bours and  her  kinsfolk,  hearing  how  won- 
derfully God  had  shewed  his  mercy  to  her, 
came  to  rejoice  with  her."  (Luke  1:36,  5S, 
Knox)  That  the  Christian  Greek  Scripture 
writers  distinguished  between  adelphds  and 
syngen^s,  or  between  brothers  and  rela- 
tives, is  apparent  from  what  they  recorded 
that  Jesus  said  in  his  great  prophecy: 
"You  will  be  delivered  up  by  your  parents 
and  brothers  [adelphds]  and  relatives 
IsyngenSs)  and  friends."  Therefore,  in 
view  of  the  way  these  words  are  used  it 
certainly  cannot  be  argued  that  Jesus  did 
not  have  half  brothers  and  half  sisters. 
(Luke  21:16,  Cath.  Confrat.)  Besides,  is  it 
reasonable  to  conclude  that  Mary  would 
repeatedly  be  traveling  with  her  nephews 
and  nieces,  since  the  Scriptures  repeatedly 
associate  her  with  Jesus'  "brethren,"  and 
especially  when  they  did  not  have  any 
faith  in  Jesus  but  were  critical  of  his  com- 
mission? 

Nor  is  that  all.  Concerning  Jesus'  con- 
ception and  birth  the  record  clearly  states 
that  Joseph  "knew  her  not  till  she  brought 
forth  her  firstborn  son:  and  he  called  his 
name  Jesus."  Clearly  the  implication  here 
is  that  Joseph  did  "know"  Mary,  that  is, 
have  relations  with  her,  after  she  gave 
birth  to  Jesus.  The  reference  to  Mary's 
first-born  son  also  implies  that  there  were 
others,  particularly  in  view  of  the  way 
Luke  words  his  reference  to  this  fact: 
"She  brought  forth  a  son,  her  first-born, 
whom  she  wrapped  in  his  swaddling- 
clothes,  and  laid  in  a  manger,  because 
there  was  no  room  for  them  in  the  inn." 
Had  this  matter  of  Mary  having  given 
birth  to  only  Jesus  really  been  a  fact  and 
as  vital  to  Christian  faith  as  some  claim, 
surely  the  Gospel  writers  would  have 
termed  Jesus  Mary's  "only"  son,  rather 
than  her  "first-born."— Matt.  1:25,  Dy; 
Luke  2:7,  Knox. 


That  Mary  had  other  children  aside  from 
Jesus  is  also  apparent  from  circumstantial 
evidence.  The  record  tells  us  that  when 
Jesus  was  twelve  years  old  she  and  Joseph 
went  to  Jerusalem  for  the  passover  feast 
as  was  their  custom.  "And  completing  the 
days  of  its  observance,  they  set  about 
their  return  home.  But  the  boy  Jesus,  un- 
known to  his  parents,  continued  his  stay 
in  Jerusalem,  And  they,  thinking  that  he 
was  among  their  travelling  companions, 
had  gone  a  whole  day's  journey  before 
they  made  inquiry  for  him  among  their 
kinsfolk  and  acquaintances.  When  they 
could  not  find  him,  they  made  their  way 
back  to  Jerusalem  in  search  of  him,  and 
it  was  only  after  three  days  that  they 
found  him.  He  was  sitting  in  the  temple." 
—Luke  2:42-46,  Knox. 

If  Jesus  had  been  Mary's  onfy  chi)d, 
could  we  imagine  that  she  would  or  could 
have  left  Jerusalem  with  her  husband  and 
not  at  all  notice  that  Jesus  was  not  with 
her?  What  solicitous  concern  she  would 
have  had  for  Jesus,  as  her  one  and  only, 
and  the  one  begotten  by  God!  But  with 
such  a  flock  of  children,  four  sons  and  per- 
haps as  many  daughters  by  that  time,  and 
perhaps  one  even  an  infant  in  arms,  she 
certainly  could  well  have  had  her  hands 
so  full  in  caring  for  these  that  she  would 
not  have  missed  Jesus  until  the  end  of  the 
first  day. 

So  we  see  that  all  the  evidence,  Scrip- 
tural and  circumstantial,  as  well  as  reason 
and  logic,  combines  to  show  that  Jesus  did 
indeed  have  fleshly  brothers  and  sisters 
and  that  his  mother  was  not  ever  virgin. 
The  attempt  to  make  her  so  is  not  because 
of  the  evidence  but  because  of  the  desire 
to  keep  her  on  a  pedestal  as  "the  mother 
of  God"  and  the  "most  important  mem- 
ber" of  the  Christian  congregation,  nei- 
ther of  which  expressions  finds  any  sup- 
port in  the  Scriptures.  Rather,  she  was  a 
humble  disciple  of  her  son  Jesus. 


28 


AWAKE! 


o%    «* 


\^ATCHINq 


Haiti  and  the  Church 

#>  On  January  10  Roman  Cath- 
olic Bishop  Remy  Augustin, 
along  with  four  Catholic 
priests,  was  ordered  from  the 
country  by  Haiti's  president 
Francois  Duvalier.  Just  six 
weeks  before,  on  November  24, 
Archbishop  Francois  Poirier 
had  been  charged  with  med- 
dling in  politics,  and  was  ex- 
pelled from  the  country.  On 
January  12  the  Vatican  count- 
ered by  declaring  excommuni- 
cated from  the  church  every- 
one who  had  anything  to  do 
with  the  expulsion  of  the  bish- 
ops. This  was  thought  to  in- 
clude President  Francois  Du- 
valier, himself  a  Roman  Cath- 
olic. 

Uassacre  of  Tibetans  Reported 

<$■  On  January  11  the  news 
agency  Press  Trust  of  India 
reported  that  over  4,000  Tibet- 
ans who  were  fleeing  from 
the  Lhasa  area  toward  India 
were  slain  by  Chinese  Com- 
munist troops. 

Finnish  Plane  Crash 

<^  On  January  3  a  plane  crash 
near  the  western  Finnish  town 
of  Vaasa  claimed  the  lives  of 
all  twenty-five  aboard.  It  was 
described  as  the  worst  accident 
in  the  history  of  Finnish  avia- 
tion. Just  two  minutes  before 
the  crash  the  pilot  radioed  the 
Vaasa  airport,  "Everything 
normal";  and  then,  according 
to  eyewitnesses,  the  plane 

FEBRUARY  22,  1961 


went  out  of  control  at  about 
1,500  feet. and  plunged  to  the 
earth  nose  down. 

Holiday  Weekend  the  Safest 

<$>  Traffic  accidents  during  the 
three-day  New  Year's  holiday 
weekend  claimed  338  lives,  ac- 
cording to  an  Associated  Press 
count.  The  National  Safety 
Council  said  that,  "based  on 
the  number  of  deaths  per  100,- 
000,000  miles  driven,  it  was 
the  safest  three-day  New 
Year's  week-end  since  the  Na- 
tional Safety  Council  began 
keeping  holiday  traffic  records 
in  1946." 

Polio  lowest  Since  1938 

&  On  January  6  the  Public 
Health  Service  reported  that 
there  were  3,277  polio  cases  in 
the  United  States  in  1960,  the 
lowest  number  on  record  since 
1938,  when  there  were  1,705. 
In  1959  there  were  8,567  polio 
cases,  which  means  that  in  ' 
1960  there  was  about  a  62- 
percent  decrease  in  total  cases. 

Cost  of  Man  in  Space 

<^  According  to  space  officials' 
estimates,  the  cost  for  the 
United  States  to  put  their  first 
man  in  space  will  exceed  $400 
million.  "If  all  the  tests  go 
well,"  this  could  be  late  this 
year,  said  Robert  R.  Gilruth, 
director  of  a  group  at  the 
Langley  Research  Center  of 
the  National  Aeronautics  and 
Space  Administration. 


Bace  Blot  at  Georgia  Campus 

^>  On  the  night  of  January  11 
some  600  students  and  a  few 
outsiders  staged  a  riot  at  the 
University  of  Georgia  in  pro- 
test against  the  enrollment  of 
two  Negro  students,  who  had 
just  completed  their  first  day 
of  classes.  After  about  an 
hour  the  raging,  cursing  mob 
was  finally  brought  under  con- 
trol by  police  using  tear  gas 
and  fire  hoses.  The  two  Negro 
students  were  taken  to  their 
homes  in  Atlanta  by  patrol- 
men, and  Dean  of  Students 
Joseph  A.  Williams  announced 
that  they  were  being  with- 
drawn from  the  university  for 
"the  interests  of  their  safety 
and  for  the  safety  and  welfare 
of  more  than  7,000  other  stu- 
dents at  the  university." 

Religion  Superficial 

^>  On  January  7  Dr.  Yoshio 
Fukuyama,  the  Congregational 
Christian  Churches'  director  of 
research,  revealed  that  the  re- 
sults of  a  survey  showed  that 
33  percent  of  the  denomina- 
tion's members  were  only  nom- 
inally religious;  He  said  that, 
of  the  two  thirds  who  showed 
a  stronger  religious  feeling, 
the  majority  looked  on  religion 
as  an  organizational  activity  in- 
stead of  an  intellectual,  creed- 
al  or  devotional  experience. 

Atheism  in  College 

4$>  Surveys  conducted  by  two, 
students  of  New  York's  City 
College  and  published  in  the 
college's  Psychology  Digest  re- 
vealed that  a  high  percentage 
of  the  students  were  atheists 
and  agnostics.  One  survey  in- 
dicated that  44.5  percent  of  the 
liberal  arts  and  science  majors 
and  17.9  percent  of  the  edu- 
cation and  engineer  majors 
were  agnostics  or  atheists. 

Curse  of  Death  Falls 

#  It  is  reported  that  for  the 
second  time  since  white  men 
came  to  Australia  an  aborigine 
was  saved  from  a  witch  doc- 
tor's curse  of  death.  A  witch 
doctor    pointed    a    bone    and 

29 


chanted  a  death  curse  at  15- 
year-old  Charlie  Yundar  when 
ha  accidentally  came  upon  trib- 
al elders  at  a  secret  cere- 
mony. Usually  the  victim  falls 
Into  a  coma  and  dies.  Charlie 
was  barely  breathing  when  he 
was  taken  to  a  Perth  hospital, 
but  after  a  month  he  was  re- 
covering, and  doctors  reported 
he  would  be  all  right. 

Tobacco  Sales  Up 

$>  Unlike  many  other  Indus- 
tries affected  by  the  recession, 
the  tobacco  industry  enjoyed 
a  boom  year  despite,  reports 
showing  the  relationship  of 
lung  cancer  to  smoking.  Amer- 
ican factories  produced  512 
billion  cigarettes,  a  22-billlon 
increase  over  the  previous 
year.  Ten  years  ago  filter  tips 
accounted  for  only  1  percent 
of  the  sales,  but  in  1960,  for 
the  first  time,  they  captured 
more  than  half  of  the  total 
cigarette  sales. 

Golden  Gate's  200th  Suicide 

<§>  On  August  8,  1937,  just  73 
days  after  its  opening,  Harold 
Wobber  became  the  first  to 
leap  to  his  death  from  the 
Golden  Gate,  the  longest  and 
most  beautiful  single  span  in 
the  world.  Mrs.  Iva  L.  Mazu- 
rek,  a  39-year-old  housewife, 
recently  became  the  200th  sui- 
cide victim,  making  the  Golden 
Gate  perhaps  also  the  most 
deadly  bridge  in  the  world. 

Niagara  Falls  Freezes  Solid 

<$>  During  a  bitter  cold  spell 
during  the  year-end  holiday 
season  the  American  side  of 
Niagara  Falls  froze  solid.  This 
was  the  first  time  it  had  hap- 
pened since  1936. 

France's  Costly  War 

<$>  France  is  in  her  seventh 
year  of  the  Algerian  war, 
which  is  said  to  be  costing  her 
more  than  $3  million  a  day. 
By  November  1,  1959,  official 
French  sources  said  a  total  of 
13,000  French  and  145,000  Al- 
gerian soldiers  had  been  killed 
during  the  conflict. 

30 


Girl  Haunted 

#  An  11-year-old  Irish  girl, 
Virginia  Campball,  of  the  Scot- 
tish village  of  Sauchie  has 
been  haunted  by  abnormal 
phenomena.  According  to  a 
signed  statement  by  two  doc- 
tors and  a  minister  who  were 
trying  to  help  her,  they  and 
other  observers  heard  "knock- 
ing and  scraping"  while  keep- 
ing watch  over  her.  They  said 
they  saw  pillows  moving  and 
bedclothes  "rippling"  and  the 
"violent  opening  and  shutting" 
of  a  linen  basket  They  con- 
cluded "that  the  happenings 
could  not  be  accounted  for  in 
the  normal  sense  of  cause  and 
effect." 

Witnesses  Preserve  Freedom 
<$>  A  retired  editorial  writer, 
Irving  Dillard,  in  a  speech  at 
Drake  University  on  the  sub- 
ject "Is  the  Bill  of  Rights  Be- 
ing Undermined?"  said:  "Like 
It  or  not,  the  Jehovah's  Wit- 
nesses have  done  more  to  help 
preserve  our  freedoms  than 
any  other  religious  group." 

Mothers  Exchange  Babies 

<§>  After  nearly  an  entire  year 
two  Irish  mothers  exchanged 
babies  when  instinct  and  blood 
tests  indicated  they  had  not 
been  raising  their  own.  Both 
mothers,  Mrs.  Una  Faul  and 
Mrs.  John  Philips,  had  been 
in  the  same  ward  in  the  same 
maternity  home,  and  both  had 
left  for  home  the  same  day. 
Mrs.  Philips  explained,  'There 
is  something  in  a  mother's  na- 
tural instinct  to  tell  her  which 
is  her  own  baby." 

Missing  Busee  Found 

®  The  Toronto  Transit  Com- 
mission discovered  in  a  garage 
25  mislaid  buses  that  had  been 
missing  since  1956.  At  a  meet- 
ing where  the  purchase  of 
$500,000  worth  of  new  coaches 
was  being  discussed  Commis- 
sioner Charles  Walton  told  of 
the  discovery.  "I  noticed  them 
there  the  other  day.  I  rubbed 
the  dust  off  one  of  the  license 
plates  and  it  read  1956." 


Venereal  Disease  Increases 
<§>  Dr.  Leona  Baumgartner  in 
a  year-end  review  of  the  health 
of  New  Yorkers  reported  a 
"sharp  and  disturbing"  77,4- 
percent  increase  in  reported 
cases  of  Infectious  syphilis  in 
the  ten  months  ending  last 
October,  compared  with  the 
like  1959  period.  According  to 
the  Italian  Dermatology  and 
Venereal  Disease  Association: 
"The  recent  increase  of  syphi- 
lis in  Italy  has  reached  a  level 
never  seen  in  any  other  civ- 
ilized country."  It  was  said 
that  in  Milan,  Italy,  cases  of 
syphilis  increased  140  percent 
and  continue  increasing  at  a 
terrible  rate. 

Church  Council  Halls  U.N. 

<&  The  National  Council  of 
Churches  in  a  resolution  ap- 
proved by  delegates  from  33 
Protestant  and  Orthodox  de- 
nominations hailed  the  growth 
of  the  United  Nations  and 
urged  U.S.  support  for 
strengthening  it  as  a  "power 
for  peace  among  the  nations." 

Catholics  Recommend 

Recognition  of  Mary 

^  On  January  2,'  at  the  clos- 
ing' session  of  their  annual 
convention,  the  Mariologlcal 
Society  of  America  recom- 
mended that  Mary,  the  moth- 
er of  Jesus,  be  recognized  as 
having  contributed  directly  to 
the  redemption  of  mankind. 
Juniper  B.  Carol,  secretary  of 
the  group,  pointed  out  that  un- 
der present  Catholic  theory 
Mary  contributed  only  indi- 
rectly to  mankind's  redemp- 
tion. 

Increase  of  Blindness 

^  The  Health  Information 
Foundation  estimates  that  ap- 
proximately one  out  of  500,  or 
about  356,000  persons  in  the 
United*  States,  are  legally 
blind,  with  another  1.5  million 
being  blind  In  one  eye.  A  le- 
gally blind  person  is  one  to- 
tally blind  or  unable  to  see  at 
20  feet  what  a  person  with 

AWAKE! 


normal  vision  can  see  at  200 

feet. 

Gbtttoltcs  Change  Church  Rates 
^On  January  2  certain 
changes  in  the  Catholic 
church's  code  of  rules  became 
effective.  Vatican  sources  said 
changes  were  designed  to  get 
away  from  "formalism  and 
routine."  In  the  mass  certain 
prayers  were  dropped,  also 
there  was  a  change  in  the  tone 
of  voice  used  by  the  priest. 
Instead  of  the  three  tones:  in- 
audible, middle  (audible,  but 
quiet),  and  loud,  there  would 
be  only  two  tones  used.  The 
middle  tone  was  eliminated. 

Heart  Disease  Outlook 

$>  Heart  disease,  which  is  kill- 
ing many  men  in  their  prime, 
will  be  brought  under  control 
within  the  next  five  or  ten 
years,  predicts  Dr.  J.  H.  Har- 
ley  Williams,  Secretary- Gener- 


al of  the  Chest  and  Heart  As- 
sociation, Nevertheless,  on  Oc- 
tober 12  he  suggested  that  all 
middle-aged  people  should  ex- 
ercise more.  "Gardening  Is  ex- 
cellent," he  said.  "They  should 
also  walk  at  least  two  miles  a 
day  and  walk  upstairs  more." 

Population  Rise 

#  The  present  Mexican  pop- 
ulation is  estimated  at  35,195,- 
000,  with,  an  annual  net  In- 
crease of  34.8  persons  per  thou- 
sand population.  It  is  esti- 
mated that  the  population  will 
grow  to  nearly  48,000,000  by 
1970. 

The  Soviet  statistical  hand- 
book shows  Russia's  popula- 
tion growth  for  1960  to  be 
about  4,000,000,  a  record 
growth.  The  new  handbook  al- 
so states  that  in  the  last  ten 
years  the  number  of  Soviet 
scientists  has  almost  doubled, 


from  162,500  In  1950  to  310,000 

in  1959. 

OU  Production  Up 

#  The  Oil  and  Gai  Journal 
stated  that  the  oil  production  of 
the  Western  world  expanded 
slzably  during  I960.  Oil  produc- 
tion averaged  about  17,628,000 
barrels  a  day  during  1960,  a  7- 
percent  increase  over  1959.  Oil 
reserves  in  the  West  were  said 
to  be  almost  267,500,000,000 
barrels  last  year. 

Costa  Less  to  Feed  Mow 

#  It  costs  less  to  feed  a  large 
family  than  a  smaller  one,  at 
least  that  Is  what  the  Univer- 
sity of  Minnesota  Institute  of 
Agriculture  has  found.  It  main- 
tains the  per  person  cost  of 
food  in  a  family  of  five  is  5 
percent  less  than  a  family  of 
four,  and  in  a  family  of  six  Jt 
is  10  percent  less. 


Which  would  you  choose  as  the  most  practical? 

Do  you  question  the  absolute  security  to  be  had  In 
dedicating  your  life  to  God  rather  than  In  seeking  the 
material  advantages  of  this  world?  Do  you  demand 
assurance  that  the  gain  from  such  a  course  is  the  most 
practical?  Would  you  accept  concrete  evidences  from 
thousands  of  Christian  lives  in  the  past  more  than 
eighty  years?  Then  you  should  read: 

JEHOVAH'S  WETNESSES  IN  THE  DIVINE  PURPOSE 

It  is  the  stirring,  factual  history  of  modern-day  Chris- 
tians whose  record  of  integrity  to  God's  righteous  prin- 
ciples has  left  an  inerasable  mark.  The  book  is  hard 
bound,  320  pages,  fully  documented.  Send  only  7/- 
Ifor  Australia,   8/10). 


WATCH  TOWER  THE  RIDGEWAY  LONDON   N.W.   7 

I  am  enclosing  7/-  (for  Australia,  8/10)  for  the  book  Jehovah's  Witnesses  in  the  Divine  Purpose. 


Name  ... 
Post 
Town  ... 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  

Postal 
District  No County 


FEBRUARY  28,  1961 


31 


m i  mmA  m  mmum 


To  o  child,  the  world  is  every- 
thing that  dreams  can  make  it. 
But  to  us  in  the  stern  world  of 
adult  reality,  even  the  most  opti- 
mistic view  must  be  realistic  to 
be  practical. 

What  does  it  mean  to  you  to  be  realistic? 


Do  you  consider  as  realistic  the  dif- 
fering and  often  conflicting  opinions  of 
"authorities"  on  every  major  and  minor 
issue?  Even  when  you  read  the  news, 
is  it  realistic  to  accept  the  viewpoint  of 
every  paid  writer?  Is  it  realistic  to  ac- 
cept as  inevitable  that  what  this  world's 
leaders  make  of  this  world  is  what  you 
must  live  in  throughout  your  natural 
lifetime?  But,  you  say,  what  can  we  do? 
What  choice  do  we  have? 


The  realistic  choice,  the  course  of 
practical  wisdom,  is  to  turn  to  the  One 
Authority  whose  views  are  the  basic 
source  of  realism,  because  'God's  word 
is  true.'  Furthermore,  God  had  his  Word, 
the  Bible,  written  so  that  everyone  can 
understand  it,  so  that  "the  man  of  God 
may  be  fully  competent,  completely 
equipped  for  every  good  work."  Thus 
you  can  be  free  of  men's  opinions,  be- 
cause "the  truth  will  set  you  free." 


In  the  Bible  you  will  learn  what  God's  purpose  is  for  this  earth  and 
the  part  God's  kingdom  will*  have  in  completely  upsetting  men's  schemes 
so  that  God's  government  can  rule  forever  in  peace.  These  events,  sched- 
uled for  our  generation,  are  of  greatest  importance  because  they  are 
a  reality.  To  keep  you  informed  on  their  progress  read: 

THE  WATCHTOWEB  and  AWAKE! 

These  two  magazines  provide  you  with  honest  reporting  on  the  Bible 
and  are  so  written  that  you  will  turn  to  your  Bible  for  a  realistic  view 
of  your  place  in  God's  purpose.  Send  only  14/-  (for  Australia,  16/-)  for 
one  year's  subscription  to  each. 


WATCH  TOWER 


THE  RIDGEWAY 


LONDON   N.W.  7 


For  the  14/-  ({or  Australia,  18/-)  enclosed  please  mall  me  The  Watcktower  and  Awake!  tor 
one  year.  For  mailing  the  coupon  I  am  to  receive  free  the  six  booklets  World  Conquest  Soon— 6y 
God's  Kingdom,  Oodn  Kingdom  Bules — 1$  the  World's  End  NearT,  Healing  of  the  Nations  Has 
Dromon  Near  When  God  Speaks  Peaoe  to  All  Nations,  God's  Way  le  Love  and  "This  Good  News 
of  t&e  Kingdom." 


Name  . 
Post 
Town  . 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  

District  No County 


In:  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Rd.,  Strathfleld,  N.S.W.  CANADA!  160  Brldgeland  Ave.,  Toronto  19   Ont. 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bag,  Blandsfontein,  Transvaal.   UNITED  STATES:  117  Adams  St..  Brooklyn  1.  N.  T, 


32 


AWAKE! 


Mwafcef 


Faith  Healing— Is  It  from  God? 


Are  You  Getting  Bald? 


The  Case  for  the  Police  Dog 


Spring  Cleaning  the  Easier  Way 


MARCH  8,  I96T 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAL 

News  sources  that  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  the  vital  Issues  of  «m» 
times  most  be  unfettered  by  censorship  and  selfish  interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fetters.  It  recognizes  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts.  It  is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  it  is  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  it  is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth. 

"Awake!"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  Is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  in  review— government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awake!"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awake!" 


Published  Simultaneously   in   the  United  States  by  the 
WATCHTOWER    BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY   OF  NEW  YORK,    INC. 
117   Adams   Street  Brooklyn   1,    New   York,    U.S.A. 

and  in   England  by 
watch  tower  bible  and  tract  society 
Watch   Tower  HouSs\   The  Ridgeway  London  N.W.  7,   England 

N.  H.  Knorb,  President  Grant  Suiter,  Secretary 


Printing   this    issue:      3,125,000 


4rJ   a    copy    (Australia,   5d;    South   Africa,  3J-'2c) 


"AWBhi!"  It  pihllihed  In  the  following  23  laniiujii: 
Si  HI  I  monthly— Afrlsauns,  Cinranja,  Danish,  Dutch,  Eng- 
lish,  Finnish,  French,  <}ennari,  Greek,  It^lUn,  Japanese, 
Norwegian,  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Nweclish,  Tagalcg,  Zulu. 
Monthly  -Tloeauo,  Indonesian,  Korean,  Malayalam,  I'ol- 
tsti,    Ukrainian, 

Yearly  fluhscrtption  rates 

Often  tor  semimonthly  editions 

America,   U.S.,  117  Adams  St..  Brooklyn  1,  N.Y.  tl 

Apstralla,  11  Reresford  lid,,  Strathflcld,  N.S.W.  8/- 

Gapada,   150  Brl.lgelanri  Ave.,  Toronto  19,  Ont.  |1 

Epglaoif,  Watch  Tower  House, 

Tin  BldgeffW,  London  N.W.    1  7/- 

New  Zealand,  fl^l  Nr«  North  Bit..  Auckland.  S,W.  1  7/- 
Sdlth   Africa,  Private  Bag,  Eland  sfontpltl.  Tvl.  70c 

MonLhly  editions  coat  hall  the  above  rates. 


Remittances  for  subscriptions  should  toe  sent  to  the  nfrlcQ 
in  your  country.  Otherwise  scud  your  remittance  to 
London.. Notice  of  txpfratlon  Is  seot  at  least  tiro  issues 
hefore  subscription  e^nlre9. 


CHANGES   OF 

ADDRESS 

shoild  reach  as.  thirty  days 

before  your  moving  date. 

Giva 

us  year  old  an 

o   new 

adiriss   (If  possible,  your 

old 

address  label}. 

Watch 

Tower,    Watch 

Tower    Ho  lie. 

Tie    Mdgewar, 

Lop- 

don   N.W.    7. 

Engl  an  if. 

Entered  as  fienomj-claas  matter  at  BrouHjn,  N.Y. 

Printed  in   England 


Tfce    Bible   translation    used    In    "Awikn["    Is   the    New    Worl*    Translation    of   the    floty   Scriptures. 

When  other  translations  are  used  the  hi  tow  ins  lymboh  wltf  appear  behJiuJ  the  cJtatld.15-. 
AS  -  American  Standard  Version    Dy  -  Catholic  Doiijiy  version    Mo  -  Janus  Moffatl's  Tutf-aa 
j_T  -  An   American  Translation        BO-  The   Emphatic  Dlanlott    Ra   —  J,   3,    RoLhtrham's  TeL-sion 
AV  -  Authorized  Veraimi    (1611)    JP  -  -lewtnti  Publication  Soc,    R&  -  Uevlaed  Standard"  Veraiou 
jjq  -  J.  N.   Darby's  feraiuEi  L@   -  Ishbc  Letaer's  version       Yg  -  EaLert  Young's  TOrslon 


C  O  NTE 


The  Strength  We  Live  By  3 

Faith  Healing—Is  It  from  God?  5 

Are  You  Getting  Bald?  9 

Language  and  Life  U 

Class  Distinctions  in  the  Churches  12 

On  the  Road  to  Petra  13 

How  Charged  Are  You?  16 

The  Case  for  the  Police  Dog  17 


NTS 

Spring  Cleaning  the  Easier  Way  20 

Colombia's  City  of  Enchantment  24 
Religious  Complacency— Who  Is 

to  Blame?  26 
"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 

Conquering  the  World  27 

Watching  the  World  29 


"Now  >t  is  high  time  to  awoke. 

— lomam  11:11 


Volume   XLII 


London,    England,   March  8,   1961 


Number  5 


,H!  IT  is  excel- 
lent to  have  a 


r 


"0 

giant's  strength,"  said 

Shakespeare.     But 

physical  strength  alone 

is  not  enough.  We  need 

strength   to   face   life 

and   death.   We   need 

strength    to    resist    the    fears    we    face, 

strength   to   overcome   the   doubts   that 

plague,  strength  to  endure  the  heartaches, 

burdens  and  miseries  that  beset  us  on 

every  side.  We  need  strength  to  speak 

truth,  to  stand  up  for  what  is  right,  to 

admit  error,  to  resist  pride,  to  believe  and 

to  love. 

How  often  have  the  weak  and  the 
mighty  begged:  "Give  us  more  strength, 
0  God!"  The  prayer  is  not  for  physical 
strength  but  for  spiritual  strength — 
strength  that  flows  from  inspired  ideas, 
from  truths  believed  and  from  faith  exer- 
cised. Such  strength  is  of  God. 

God  Almighty  is  the  Fountainhead  of 
strength,  as  Elihu  declared:  "As  for  the 
Almighty,  we  have  not  found  him  out;  he 
is  exalted  in  power."  Of  Jehovah  the  proph- 
et Isaiah  said:  "He  does  not  tire  out  or 
grow  weary.  ...  He  is  giving  to  the  tired 
one  power,  and  to  the  one  without  dynam- 
ic energy  he  makes  full  might  abound. 
Boys  even  may  tire  out  and  grow  weary, 
and  young  men  themselves  will  without 
fail  get  to  stumbling,  but  those  who  are 
hoping  in  Jehovah  will  regain  power."  How 

MARCS  8,  1961 


THE 


1 


STRENGTH 


[  WeJjive  By) 


appropriate,  then,  that 
man  should  call  on  God 
for  strength.^Job  37: 
23;  Isa.  40:28-31. 

The  ancient  nation 
of  Israel  relied  on 
Jehovah  for  their 
strength.  Governor 
Nehemiah  told  the  repatriated  Israelites: 
"The  joy  of  Jehovah  is  your  stronghold." 
The  psalmist  declared:  "God  is  for  us  a 
refuge  and  strength,  a  help  that  is  readily 
to  be  found  during  distresses."  Faithful 
Jews  found  great  strength  trusting  in  Je- 
hovah.—Neh.  8:10;  Ps.  46:1-3. 

How  does  Jehovah  impart  spiritual 
strength  to  men?  This  he  does  primarily 
through  his  Word,  the  Bible.  "The  word 
of  God  is  alive  and  exerts  power,"  wrote 
the  apostle  Paul.  As  people  take  in  truths 
from  the  inspired  Word  of  God,  they  are 
built  up  in  faith,  hope  and  love.  These 
spiritual  building  blocks  give  strength  to 
men  to  endure  tragedies  and  to  do  mighty 
works. — Heb.  4:12. 

For  example,  when  Joshua  received  the 
charge  to  lead  the  ancient  Israelites  into 
the  Promised  Land,  he  was  commanded  to 
"be  courageous  and  strong."  But  from 
where  was  he  to  receive  his  strength? 
From  God's  law,  which  he  was  commanded 
to  read  day  and  night,  following  its  every 
precept  closely.  Doing  this  assured  him 
Jehovah's  protection  and  strength. — Josh. 
1:6-9. 


Jesus  Christ  taught  men  that  life's  force 
is  not  sustained  by  bread  alone,  but  by 
exercising  faith  in  God's  Word.  After  hav- 
ing fasted  forty  days  and  forty  nights,  Je- 
sus Christ  was  gripped  with  hunger  pangs. 
Would  he  yield  to  the  subtle  satanic  temp- 
tation to  turn  stone  into  loaves  of  bread? 
Jesus  replied:  "Man  must  live,  not  on 
bread  alone,  but  on  every  utterance  com- 
ing forth  through  Jehovah's  mouth."  Not 
bread,  but  faith  in  the  Word  of  God  is  what 
gives  strength  to  resist  temptations  and  to 
endure  hardships  for  righteousness'  sake. 
—Matt.  4:4. 

The  Bible,  God's  written  Word,  is  a 
storehouse  of  strength.  By  exercising  faith 
in  its  truthfulness  and  inspiration,  by  hop- 
ing in  its  promises,  Christians  find  strength 
during  these  critical  times.  A  firm  faith  in 
the  Bible  gives  them  strength  to  believe 
that  God  "is  not  far  off  from  each  one  of 
us,"  as  Paul  preached.  "For  by  him  we 
have  life  and  move  and  exist,"  said  Paul. 
Therefore,  nothing  can  happen  to  us  un- 
less God  permits  it.  This  truth  is  a  source 
of  comfort,  peace  and  strength  to  the  be- 
liever.—Acts  17:26-29. 

By  means  of  that  same  Word,  we  have 
hope  of  life  and  courage  to  face  death.  The 
apostle  John  wrote:  "This  is  the  promised 
thing  which  he  [God  through  Jesus  Christ] 
himself  promised  us,  the  life  everlasting." 
Jesus  Christ  assured  mankind  of  the  pos- 
sibility of  everlasting  life,  saying:  "Most 
truly  I  say  to  you,  He  that  believes  has 
everlasting  life."  He  told  Martha:  "I  am 
the  resurrection  and  the  life.  He  that  ex- 
ercises faith  in  me,  even  though  he  dies, 
will  come  to  life,  and  everyone  that  is  liv- 
ing and  exercises  faith  in  me  will  never  die 
at  all.  Do  you  believe  this?"  Well,  do  you 
believe  this?  Faith  in  this  promise  of  life 
overcomes  the  fear  of  death,  the  false 
fears  of  "hell-fire"  and  purgatorial  suffer- 
ings.—1  John  2:25;  John  6:47;  11:25,  26. 

Faith  in  God's  Word  makes  one  forward- 


looking,  optimistic,  hopeful.  The  Bible 
promises  a  new  world  wherein  righteous- 
ness is  to  dwell,  one  in  which  there  will 
be  no  more  pain,  sickness,  sorrow  or  death. 
We  live  in  hope — hope  of  these  things  and 
even  of  a  resurrection  of  the  dead.  "I  have 
hope  toward  God,"  said  Paul,  "that  there 
is  going  to  be  a  resurrection  of  both  the 
righteous  and  the  unrighteous."  We  be- 
lieve this  firmly  because  "Christ  has  been 
raised  up  from  the  dead."  What  power  and 
strength  lie  in  these  words,  these  promises, 
these  truths,  if  we  but  believe! — Acts  24: 
15;  1  Cor.  15:20;  2  Pet.  3:13;  Rev.  21:4,  5. 

Spiritual  strength  is  built  by  faith,  hope 
and  love,  which  are  the  fruits  of  God's 
spirit  that  flow  to  mankind  through  an  ac- 
curate knowledge  of  God's  Word.  Without 
these  fruits,  what  strength  would  there  be? 
Without  faith  there  would  be  no  venturing 
forth,  no  trust,  no  confidence;  without 
hope  there  would  be  no  tomorrow;  with- 
out love  the  world  would  be  a  frozen  waste- 
land. 

Love  gives  us  the  strength  to  be  long- 
suffering  and  obliging.  It  prevents  us  from 
becoming  jealous,  from  bragging,  from  be- 
coming puffed  up.  Love  restrains  us  from 
behaving  indecently,  from  looking  after 
only  our  own  interests.  It  gives  us  the 
strength  to  forget  injuries  done  to  us  and 
the  power  to  rejoice  with  the  truth.  For 
love  "bears  all  things,  believes  all  things, 
hopes  all  things,  endures  all  things.  Love 
never  fails."— 1  Cor.  13:4-8. 

Christians  need  strength  to  speak  "with 
boldness"  the  truths  of  God  as  they  ought 
to  speak.  This  strength  may  be  acquired 
not  only  through  a  study  of  God's  Word 
but  also  through  prayer.  Prayer  links  the 
believer  with  the  Almighty,  the  Source  of 
strength.  So  let  us  not  fail  to  pray.  Neither 
let  us  fail  to  teach  men  truths  from  God's 
Wqrd  that  build  faith,  hope  and  love,  these 
lasting  dualities  that  give  us  strength — 
the  strength  we  live  by. — Eph.  6:20, 


AWARE} 


IN  MANY  parts  of 
the  world  faith 
healing  is  in  vogue. 
What  is  faith  heal- 
ing? How  reliable 
are  the  claims  for 
healing?  Is  the  sick 
Christian  missing 
out  on  something 
good  by  neglecting 
faith  healing?  What> 
kinds  of  faith  heal- 
ing are  there?  Has 
God  a  healing  pro- 
gram? 

That  faith  healers 
are  widespread  and 
popular  throughout  Christendom  is  becom- 
ing more  evident  each  year.  Some  of  the 
most  fashionable  churches  have  regular 
programs  of  prayers  for  the  healing  of  the 
sick.  One  survey  by  the  National  Council 
of  Churches  shows  that  of  460  noted  Prot- 
estant ministers  142  make  regular  use  of 
prayers  for  healing.  In  the  United  States 
some  popular  faith  healers  such  as  Oral 
Roberts  draw  many  thousands  of  people 
during  their  campaigns.  And  at  the  healing 
"Sanctuary"  near  London,  spiritualist  Har- 
ry Edwards  gives  "contact  healing"  to 
some  5,000  patients  a  year  and  "ab- 
sent healing"  by  correspondence 
to  some  9,000  a  week.  The 
French  medical  profession,  ,,.;■ 

in  a  survey,   finds  that  S& 

France  now  has  more 
specialists  in  mira- 
cles than  it  has  doc- 
tors. 

What   kinds   of 
healers  are  there? 
They  fall,   broadly, 
into  three  categories. 
The  first  is  the  religious 
category,  made  up  mainly 
of  those  attached  to  reli- 


Doe*  the  Bible  support 
the  el oims  of  faith  healers? 


gious  sects,  there 
usually  being  an  in- 
dividual who  is  said 
to  possess  healing 
powers.  In  this  same 
category  are  the 
Roman  Catholic 
healing  centers, 
such  as  Lourdes, 
where  the  waters 
are  said  to  have  mi- 
raculous healing; 
properties.  At  other 
centers  the  relics  of 
saints  are  said  to 
have  healing  prop- 
erties. 

Second,  there  is  that  group  of  persons 
said  to  have  psychic  powers,  such  as  the 
many  spiritualists  who  practice  healing. 
There  has  long  been  a  controversy  in  Eng- 
land as  to  whether  spiritualist  healers 
should  be  allowed  to  visit  hospitals  or  not. 
So  many  have  been  visiting  Britain's  3,500 
hospitals  that,  last  June,  the  British  Medi- 
cal Association  voted  to  exclude  the  spir- 
itualists and  other  kinds  of  "healers"  from 
hospitals.  Reporting  on  this,  the  Daily 
Telegraph  and  Morning  Post  of  June  18, 
1960,  said:  "Dr.  Doris  Odium,  psychiatrist, 
and  a  BM.A.  member  of 
the  Churches'  Council, 
said  that  spiritual 
healers  worked  by  es- 
tablishing a  medium- 
istic  connection  with 
people  who  were 
dead.  They  received 
'guidance'  on  the 
treatment  to  be  em- 
ployed. Medical  treat- 
ment and  spiritual  heal- 
::i  ing  combined  would  produce 
a  very  confused  and  divided 
state  of  mind  in  a  patient.  .  .  . 
Even  if  healers  did  not  go  into  a 


MARCH  8,  1961 


trance  they  would  disturb  other  patients 
in  the  ward." 

A  noted  personality  in  this  trance  cate- 
gory is  Jesse  Thomas,  who,  for  years,  has 
been  demonstrating  before  European  au- 
diences that  he  can  put  himself  in  a  trance 
and  perform  "psychic  operations"  on  the 
"astral  body"  of  patients,  with  resultant 
claims  that  he  cures  diseases  that  have  de- 
fied the  doctors. 

Third  is  the  category  of  people  who 
make  no  psychic  pretensions  of  any  kind 
but  are  said  to  be  possessed  of  powers  of 
healing.  They  are  most  frequently  found 
in  country  districts.  They  cannot  explain 
their  powers,  and  they  use  them  without 
trying  to  explain  them,  as  is  often  done 
in  water  witching  and  in  operating  ouija 
boards. 

What  is  the  Christian  to  think  of  all 
this?  If  he  wishes  the  right  kind  of  think- 
ing on  the  matter,  he  must  go  to  God's 
Word,  to  get  the  mind  of  God  on  the 
subject. 

Healing  and  the  Bible 

A  study  of  the  healing  performed  by 
Jesus  Christ  and  his  apostles  reveals  this 
fact:  There  were  no  limitations  and  no 
partiality.  Jesus  never  failed  in  curing  a 
disease  instantly,  even  though  it  be  lep- 
rosy. (Luke  5:12-14)  To  the  imprisoned 
John  the  Baptist,  Jesus  sent  word:  "The 
blind  are  seeing  again,  and  the  lame  are 
walking  about,  the  lepers  are  being  cleansed 
and  the  deaf  are  hearing,  and  the  dead  are 
being  raised  up,  and  the  poor  are  having 
the  good  hews  declared  to  them."  (Matt. 
11:5)  Yes,  even  the  dead  were  raised,  as 
was  Lazarus,  who  had  been  dead  four  days. 
(John  11:39)  And  as  to  those  who  came 
to  the  apostles  to  be  cured,  "they  would 
one  and  all  be  cured."  (Acts  5:16)  As  to 
faith,  was  it  always  required?  Not  by  any 
means,  as  is  shown  by  Paul's  healing  of 

6 


the  foreign-speaking  people  on  the  island 
of  Malta.— Acts  28:7-9. 

Another  thing:  The  healing  done  by  Je- 
sus and  his  apostles  was  always  performed 
without  cost.  There  were  no  collections, 
no  fees.  There  was  no  commercializing  of 
their  healing. 

Above  all,  the  healing  of  Jesus  and  the 
apostles  was  accompanied  with  true  spir- 
itual healing,  and  physical  healing  was 
secondary  to  this  spiritual  healing.  Of  par- 
amount importance  was  the  preaching  of 
God's  kingdom,  the  only  means  by  which 
permanent  physical  healing  of  obedient 
men  can  ever  come  about.  Said  Jesus:  "As 
you  go,  preach,  saying,  "The  kingdom  of 
the  heavens  has  drawn  near.'  Cure  sick 
people,  raise  up  dead  persons,  make  lepers 
clean,  expel  demons.  You  received  free, 
give  free."— Matt.  10:7,  8. 

Did  Jesus  say  that  his  main  purpose  in 
coming  to  the  earth  was  to  perform  physi- 
cal healing?  No!  "For  this  purpose  I  have 
come  into  the  world,"  he  declared,  "that 
I  should  bear  witness  to  the  truth." — John 
18:37. 

What,  then,  was  the  purpose  of  the  heal- 
ing performed  by  Jesus  and  his  apostles? 
It  was  to  establish  Christianity,  and  to 
prove  that  it  was  from  God,  (Heb.  2:1-4) 
Healing  such  as  Jesus  performed  could 
come  only  from  God,  especially  since  it  was 
accompanied  with  spiritual  healing,  the 
work  of  preaching  the  kingdom  of  God  be- 
ing of  foremost  importance. 

Gift  of  Healing  to  Pass  Away 

Was  this  divine  healing  to  be  passed  on 
to  other  people,  after  the  death  of  the 
apostles?  Writing  as  to  the  miraculous 
gifts  of  God's  spirit,  the  apostle  Paul  said: 
"Whether  there  are  gifts  of  prophesying, 
they  will  be  done  away  with;  whether 
there  are  tongues,  they  will  cease;  whether 
there  is  knowledge,  it  will  be  done  away 
with.  When  I  was  a  babe,  I  used  to  speak 

AWAKE! 


as  a  babe,  to  think  as  a  babe,  to  reason  as 
a  babe;  but  now  that  I  have  become  a  man, 
I  have  done  away  with  the  traits  of  a 
babe."  (1  Cor,  13:8,  11)  The  gift  of  heal- 
ing thus  marked  the  babyhood  of  the 
Christian  congregation.  It  was  due  to  pass 
away  with  the  death  of  the  apostles  and 
their  associates.  Men  who  received  the  gift 
of  miraculous  healing  through  the  apostles 
could  not  pass  on  the  gift  of  healing  power 
to  others.  Healing  and  the  other  miracu- 
lous gifts  were  passed  on  onKy  by  the  apos- 
tles or  in  their  presence.  When  the  apos- 
tles died  and  those  associated  with  them, 
then  the  divine  gift  of  miraculously  heal- 
ing people  in  a  physical  way  ceased  to  be 
imparted.— Acts  8:18-20;  10:44-46;  19:1-7. 

Little  wonder,  then,  that  modern  faith 
heaters  bear  no  resemblance  to  Jesus  Christ 
and  his  apostles!  Faith  healers  not  only 
have  many  failures  but  they  commercial- 
ize the  healing  they  profess!  Admits  Oral 
Roberts:  "If  I  could  bring  healing  to  25 
percent  of  those  who  ask  for  it,  I'd  be  the 
happiest  man  in  the  world."  And  as  to  the 
commercial  methods  used,  note  this  report 
in  the  Houston  (Texas)  Press  of  April  23, 
1957,  telling  of  faith  healer  A.  A.  Allen: 

"The  biggest  miracle  by  far  is  the  meth- 
od Allen  uses  to  draw  in  money  from  his 
followers.  They  pay  dearly — and  often. 
After  preaching  a  couple  of  hours  and 
working  the  crowd  up,  Allen  . . .  announces 
he  feels  the  'presence  of  the  Lord  inside 
this  temple.'  'How  many  believe  God  is 
going  to  work  miracles  tonight,'  he  rasps. 
Two-thousand  hands  jab  the  air  in  approv- 
al. 'Well,  I  know  He  is,'  Allen  says,  'and 
I  want  every  man  here  to  pull  out  a  $20 
bill  and  bring  it  to  this  platform.  If  you 
haven't  got  a  $20,  then  bring  a  $10.  And 
I  know  everybody  has  at  least  $5  they  can 
give  to  Jesus.'  .  .  .  Then  the  buckets  are 
passed  through  the  crowd  to  get  to  those 
who  didn't  come  forward  with  cash." 


Examining  the  Healing 

What  now  of  the  successes  professed  by 
many  of  the  healers?  A  great  majority  of 
them  are  viewed  by  medical  authorities  as 
dubious.  These  authorities  recognize  the 
power  of  the  emotions  to  bring  about  an 
improved  physical  condition,  and  the  sub- 
ject of  psychosomatic  medicine  has  been 
widely  discussed  in  many  books.  One  in- 
vestigator who  attended  hundreds  of  meet- 
ings of  faith  healers  reports  that  apparent 
successes  are  the  resu/t  of  careful  advance 
screening:  "The  healers  restrict  their 
choices  to  those  suffering  from  functional 
ailments — arthritis,  rheumatism,  migraine, 
for  example.  They  smoothly  sidestep  those 
suffering  from  organic  illness." — Reader's 
Digest,  September,  1960,  p.  50. 

Dr.  D.  J.  West,  in  his  Eleven  Lcmrdes 
Miracles,  analyzed  the  most  recent  cases 
officially  accepted  by  the  Catholic  church, 
cases  viewed  as  inexplicable  except  in  mi- 
raculous terms.  Dr.  West  concluded,  as  a 
result  of  his  investigations:  "In  no  case 
was  the  evidence  really  satisfactory,  and 
in  certain  cases  the  evidence  suggested  a 
perfectly  natural  alternative  explanation." 
Dr.  West  pointed  out  many  interesting 
facts:  That  the  majority  viewed  as  cured 
were  women;  that  he  saw  no  self-evident 
miracles,  such  as  lost  eyes  or  amputated 
fingers  being  restored  and  that  when  the 
appearance  of  miraculousness  seemed  the 
strongest,  the  evidence  was  often  untrust- 
worthy because  of  incomplete  data  and  in- 
sufficient consideration  of  alternative  diag- 
noses. Dr.  West  also  points  out  that  an 
unduly  high  number  of  those  viewed  as 
cured  had  tuberculosis,  a  disease  in  which 
there  are  often  sudden  changes  and  in 
which  one's  emotional  state  is  vital.  Dr. 
West  did  not  accept  any  of  the  cures  as 
miraculous,  and  the  cases  of  apparent  gen- 
uine cures  were  said  merely  to  illuminate 
the  extent  to  which  one's  emotional  state 
is  capable  of  changing  one's  physical  state. 


MARCH  8,  1961 


But  what  of  cures  that  may  seem  to 
have  no  explanation  other  than  the  mirac- 
ulous? The  power  of  the  emotions  to  affect 
health  may  be  even  greater  than  is  yet  rec- 
ognized; further,  we  should  note  the  follow- 
ing, as  Brian  Inglis  points  out  in  Emotion- 
ed Stress  and  Your  Health: 

"In  any  consideration  of  healing  today 
a  complication  arises:  that  for  the  most 
part  healers  are  not  aware  of  the  real  na- 
ture of  their  powers.  . . .  Healers  are  often 
difficult  people  to  handle,  truculent  and 
arrogant;  and  their  work  may  reek  of 
abracadabra.  .  .  .  The  mystical  passes  used 
by  divine  healers,  the  operations  on  'the 
astral  body'  by  'psychic  surgeons'  often 
seem  to  be  on  a  plane  with  witchcraft — as 

indeed  they  are There  have  been  many 

reports  of  cases  where  healing  has  been 
successfully  conducted  from  afar,  unbe- 
knownst to  the  patient — just  as  there  have 
been  many  reports  of  cases  where  a  curse 
has  been  laid  from  afar,  with  destructive 
results.  Once  a  common  practice  in  witch- 
craft, it  is  still  found  among  primitive 
tribes:  a  spell  is  laid  upon  an  enemy,  who 
gradually  wastes  away  and  dies.  .  .  .  The 
existence  of  the  power  to  make  people  ill 
is  not  to  be  scoffed  at  as  a  traveler's  tale." 
One  traveler  believes  he  personally  ex- 
perienced, not  long  ago,  the  power  of  a 
sorcerer  to  make  people  ill.  In  his  book 
Sorcerers'  Village,  Hassoldt  Davis  tells 
about  his  visit  to  a  village  near  the  Libe- 
rian  border  in  Africa  where  he  suffered  a 
temporary  paralysis  of  his  right  arm  and 
leg.  He  firmly  believes  this  was  brought 
about  by  a  sorcerer  hired  by  a  discharged 
employee.  No  medicine  worked.  Finally, 
in  desperation,  Davis  went  to  the  sorcerer 
to  have  the  spell  removed,  but  the  sorcerer 
was  loyal  to  his  client.  Only  when  Davis 
found  another  sorcerer  who  was  willing  to 
intervene  was  Davis  restored  to  his  custo- 
mary health. 
What  is  this  mysterious  power?  The  Ho- 


ly Bible  condemns  sorcery  and  similar 
types  of  black  magic  because  the  power 
involved  is  not  from  God  but  is  the  work 
of  invisible  wicked  spirits  called  demons. 
These  wicked  spirit  creatures  have  the 
power  to  bring  about  various  kinds  of  sick- 
ness; even  murder  by  demonology  is  pos- 
sible. The  Dutch  newspaper,  de  Tilburgse 
Krant,  in  1948,  told  about  a  dukun  or  witch 
doctor  in  Indonesia  that  murdered  people 
through  black  magic  for  a  price.  He  was 
finally  arrested.  Said  the  newspaper  re- 
port: "The  dukun  committed  suicide  by 
hanging  and  took  the  secret  along  with 
him  to  the  grave.  After  a  long  investiga- 
tion it  came  to  light  that  the  dukun  .  .  . 
had,  in  the  same  way  robbed  22  persons 
of  their  lives  by  the  guna-guna  [black 
magic]."  Dukuns,  in  general,  are  credited 
with  fantastic  powers  of  healing. 

So  the  power  of  the  demons  is  real.  Be- 
ing a  power  to  cause  illness,  it  is  not  in- 
conceivable that  some  kinds  of  healing  or 
apparent  healing  could  be  accomplished. 
Warning  Christians  of  the  operations  of 
demon  power  in  the  "last  days,".  Jesus 
said:  "False  Christs  and  false  prophets 
will  arise  and  will  give  signs  and  wonders 
to  lead  astray,  if  possible,  the  chosen  ones. 
You,  then,  watch  out;  I  have  told  you  all 
things  beforehand."— Mark  13:22,  23. 

God's  Word,  then,  warns  us  not  to  be 
led  astray  by  those  who  seem  to  perform 
miracles  today.  The  Bible  shows  that  abili- 
ty to  pass  on  the  gift  of  miraculous  healing 
passed  away  with  the  death  of  the  apostles. 
And  it  is  clear  that  modern  healers  bear 
no  resemblance  to  Jesus  Christ  and  his 
apostles.  Above  all,  modern  healers  do  not 
have  the  message  that  Jesus  Christ  fore- 
told for  true  Christians  in  the  "last  days," 
namely,  "this  good  news  of  the  kingdom." 
(Matt.  24:14)  The  conclusion  is  irresist- 
ible: Modern-day  faith  healing  of  the  phys- 
ical body  is  not  from  God. 


8 


AWAKE! 


ARE  YOU  GETTING 


BALDNESS  has 
been  around  for 
a  long  time.  So  have 
its  cures.  An  anti- 
baldness   remedy 
used  in  ancient  Egypt  con- 
tained these  ingredients: 
the  fat  of  a  lion,  a  hippopot- 
amus, a  crocodile,  a  cat,  a 
serpent  and  a  goose.  This 
was    mixed    together    and 
rubbed  on  the  head.  That 
ancient  baldness  remedy 
has  much  in  common  with 
many  modern  hair  res 
ers:  They  fail  to  grow  hair! 

No  one  knows  exactly  how  much  money 
is  spent  on  baldness-preventing  and  hair- 
growing  products,  but  the  sum  must  be 
vast.  In  America  alone  at  least  $300,000,- 
000  a  year  is  spent  on  hair-grooming  prep- 
arations, many  of  which  are  supposed  to 
prevent  or  cure  balding.  Baldness-prevent- 
ing products  are  likely  to  sell  well,  since 
it  is  said,  in  regard  to  the  white  race,  that 
after  puberty  about  80  percent  of  the  men 
and  about  15  percent  of  the  women  suffer 
loss  of  hair  from  "significant"  to  unques- 
tionably bald. 

The  word  "baldness"  does  not  necessari- 
ly mean  total  loss  of  hair.  It  is  a  general 
term  that  may  refer  to  only  a  slight  thin- 
ning out,  or  it  may  refer  to  complete  ab- 
sence of  hair,  whether  it  be  temporary  or 
permanent. 

There  are,  broadly,  three  kinds  of  bald- 
ness: (1)  baldness  in  spots  or  patches, 
known  as  alopecia  areata;  (2)  early  or  pre- 
mature baldness  and  (3)  old-age  baldness. 
Early  and  old-age  baldness  are  very  much 
alike  in  appearance  and  have  come  to  be 
known  as  "pattern  baldness." 

MARCH  8,  1961 


Pattern  Baldness 

Most  Common 

Pattern  baldness  is  esti- 
mated to  make  up  about  90 
percent  of  all  cases  of  bald- 
ness. The  pattern  of  hair 
loss  is  most  familiar.  It  may 
start  at  the  crown  of  the 
head  and  move  forward  to 
the  brow,  or  it  may  begin 
with  the  V-shaped  receding 
of  hair  at  the  temples.  The 
process,  although  slow,  of- 
ten results  in  the  common 
horseshoe-shaped  fringe 
around  the  denuded  crown. 
If  one  is  getting  bald,  the 
natural  tendency  is  to  won- 
der what  the  cause  of  bald- 
and  what  can  be  done  about  it.  But 
when  it  comes  to  the  cause  of  pattern 
baldness,  one  enters  a  world  of  theories,  a 
maze  of  uncertainties  and  contradictions. 
Even  the  tone  of  the  authorities  varies 
greatly.  Some  take  the  hopeful  view,  as 
does  dermatologist  Dr.  Irwin  I.  Lubowe, 
in  his  book  New  Hope  for  Your  Hairj  be- 
lieving that  much  can  be  done  now  in  re- 
lieving some  causes  of  baldness,  especially 
in  view  of  research  pointing  to  promising 
remedies.  Others  are  less  hopeful  when  it 
comes  to  common  baldness,  as  Dr.  Howard 
T,  Behrman  states  in  a  medical  textbook: 
"At  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge, 
there  is  no  effective  remedy  for  ordinary 
baldness.  The  millstones  of  inherited,  gen- 
etic patterns,  hormonal  variation,  and  ag- 
ing grind  on  inexorably  to  a  hairless  scalp." 

Hormones  and  Heredity 

Of  all  the  causes  of  baldness  heredity  is 
placed  at  the  top  of  the  list  by  most  au- 
thorities. But  how  great  a  role  heredity 
plays  is  disputed,  A  man's  hairline,  in  the 
view  of  many  leading  authorities,  will  be- 
gin to  recede  in  exactly  the  same  pattern, 


at  the  same  spot,  and  at  about  the  same 
age  as  his  father's.  Theoretically,  then,  a 
man  could  look  at  his  father  or  a  picture 
of  his  father  and  determine  how  much 
hair  he  would  have  at  a  particular  age.  Dr. 
Lubowe  does  not  believe  heredity  plays  so 
significantly  a  direct  role.  "It  is  my  obser- 
vation," he  says,  "that  the  truth  is  likely 
to  lie  somewhere  in  the  middle — that  what 
is  inherited  is  a  continuous  overstimulation 
of  machinery  for  the  production  of  andro- 
gen [male  sex  hormone],  and  also  the 
shape  of  the  skull,  another  factor  which 
influences  hair  growth." 

Explaining  the  significant  role  played 
by  hormones,  Dr.  Lubowe  says  in  his  book 
New  Hope  for  Your  Hair:  "Doctor  T.  B. 
Hamilton  of  the  State  University  Medical 
Center  in  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  was  one  of  the 
first  scientists  .  .  .  interested  in  the  field 
to  suggest  that  excessive  production  of  the 
androgens,  the  male  hormones,  is  an  im- 
portant contributory  factor  in  pattern 
baldness.  This  conclusion  has  been  fully 
supported  by  his  study  of  males  whose  ca- 
pacity to  produce  androgens  is,  to  say  the 
least,  most  limited — namely  men  who  have 
been  medically  castrated  at  various  ages. 
In  medical  eunuchs  castrated  before  the 
onset  of  puberty,  Dr.  Hamilton  found  no 
loss  of  scalp  hair  whatever,  not  even  the 
normal  recession  of  the  hairline  which  oc- 
curs, at  least  to  some  small  degree,  in  most 
men.  .  .  .  No  less  striking,  however,  was 
the  fact  that  if  a  eunuch  were  given  regu- 
lar doses  of  a  male  hormone,  such  as  testo- 
sterone propionate,  progressive  baldness 
ensued  in  most  cases  until  the  treatment 
was  terminated." 

Thus  one  of  the  popular  theories  is:  If 
a  man's  system  contains  fewer  male  hor- 
mones than  are  found  in  the  sexually  ma- 
ture male,  or  if  one's  family  does  noj-show 
a  hereditary  tendency  toward  baldness, 
then  it  is  believed  that  the  hairline  will 
likely  stay  put.  When  the  two  prime  fac- 


tors combine  in  a  man — plentiful  hormone 
activity  and  genetic  susceptibility— bald- 
ness is  almost  certain  to  occur. 

According  to  Dr.  Benjamin  Dorsey,  he- 
redity plays  a  vital  role  primarily  for  an- 
other reason:  it  determines  the  shape  of 
one's  head.  Dr.  Dorsey  believes  the  long, 
narrow  type  of  head  allows  for  better  blood 
circulation;  the  oval-shaped  head  is  be- 
lieved to  result  in  pinched  blood  vessels, 
and  blood  circulation  is  poor. 

Brain  Expansion  Theory 

and  Other  Factors 

But  Dr.  M.  Wharton  Young  of  Howard 
University  has  a  different  theory.  After 
twenty  years  of  research  to  back  up  his  as- 
sertion, he  says  people  lose  their  hair  be- 
cause of  growing  brains;  and  the  expand- 
ing brain  presses  the  scalp's  blood  vessels, 
cutting  down  on  the  flow  of  nourishment 
to  the  hair,  "In  brain-workers,"  he  writes, 
"the  brain  continues  to  grow  through  the 
fifth  decade  or  longer,  and  many  intellec- 
tuals are  bald,  but  idiots  and  morons  are 
seldom  so."  Not  all  authorities,  by  any 
means,  go  along  with  this  brain-expanding 
theory;  many  point  to  brainy  people  with 
heavy  hair  on  the  scalp,  such  as  the  late 
Albert  Einstein, 

To  complicate  matters,  there  are  many 
other  factors  believed  to  contribute  to  bald- 
ness: improper  diet,  excessive  dandruff, 
lack  of  cleanliness,  scalp  injuries,  poor  cir- 
culation, scalp  infections  and  constitution- 
al diseases,  such  as  diabetes.  There  are  spe- 
cial forms  of  baldness :  alopecia  neurotica, 
the  kind  due  to  nerve  disorders,  and  alo- 
pecia syphilitica,  the  kind  caused  by  syphi- 
lis. Baldness  of  women  is  said  to  be  caused 
sometimes  by  overactivity  of  the  adrenal 
glands  and  by  certain  ovarian  tumors.  Bald 
women  are  likely  to  have  bald  fathers. 

What  can  be  done  about  baldness  ?  It  all 
depends  on  what  is  the  cause.  Treatment 
should  be  to  remove  the  cause,  if  this  is 


10 


AWAKE! 


possible.  If  a  scalp  disease  is  the  cause, 
scalp  antiseptics  and  ointments  may  be  of 
considerable  value.  The  patchy  kind  of 
baldness  may  result  from  anemia,  fevers, 
ringworm,  and  so  forth.  It  is  more  than 
likely  that  a  cure  is  obtainable,  although 
not  all  forms  of  patchy  baldness  are  tem- 
porary. Dr,  Lubowe  reports  that  patchy 
baldness  almost  invariably  responds  to 
steroid  hormone  therapy,  these  hormones 
being  somewhat  like  those  of  the  adrenal 
cortex,  such  as  cortisone. 

Saving  Money  on  Baldness  Cures 

What  of  the  common  baldness  in  which 
heredity  and  hormones  seem  to  play  the 
key  role?  "There  is  no  effective  remedy," 
says  Dr.  Behrman,  "for  ordinary  bald- 
ness." The  steroid  hormone  therapy  is  to- 
tally ineffective.  Female  hormones  have 
been  used  with  some  success  in  treating 
male  pattern  baldness,  but  the  many  un- 
desirable side  effects  rule  out  this  form  of 
treatment.  Dr.  Stephen  Rothman,  a  skin 
specialist,  of  the  University  of  Chicago, 
says  nothing  can  be  done.  Reporting  on 
his  statements,  Science  Digest  said:  "There 
has  never  been  a  proved  case  of  a  cure  of 
early  male  baldness  in  medical  literature. 
A  patient's  vanity  is  often  the  most  dtffi- 
Oilt  part  of  baldness  to  deal  with.  ...  It 
is  responsible  for  much  of  the  money  spent 
on  hair  restorers,  massages  and  tonics.  , . . 
You're  bald  because  your  ancestors  were 
bald,  Dr.  Rothman  says.  If  it's  in  the  ge- 
netic' cards  that  you  are  to  lose  your  hair, 
there's  nothing  you  can  do  about  it." 

The  grim  fact  is:  ordinary  baldness  is 
a  hair-raising  subject;  it  baffles  the  experts 
and  furnishes  a  lucrative  livelihood  for 


ointment  and  salve  manufacturers  and 
other  producers  of  hair-restoring  products. 
"No  salve,"  says  dermatologist  Lubowe, 
"applied  locally  to  the  scalp  can  be  ab- 
sorbed by  the  follicles."  And  L.  Sherman 
Trusty  explains  in  the  volume  The  Art  and 
Science  of  Barbering:  "Ointments  and  oils 
cannot  feed  the  hair.  They  serve  as  lubri- 
cants and  their  medicinal  properties  alle- 
viate certain  conditions.  Some  external 
skin  conditions  can  be  corrected  by  oint- 
ments. The  only  source  of  nourishment  to 
the  hair  is  the  blood." 

If  a  dermatologist  or  physician  rules  out 
such  causes  as  scalp  disease,  malnutrition, 
nerves,  and  so  forth,  and  hormones  and 
heredity  are  the  culprits,  a  great  deal  of 
money  can  be  saved  on  unnecessary  salves, 
ointments  and  other  hair  restorers.  They 
can  do  nothing  but  enrich  the  manufac- 
turers and  salespeople. 

Despite  the  formidable  roles  played  by 
heredity  and  hormones,  "the  outlook  is 
hopeful/*  says  Dr.  Lubowe,  "More  basic 
research  on  hair  regeneration  has  been 
done  in  the  past  five  years  than  ever  be- 
fore. One  hope  is  a  balding  bird  from  Afri- 
ca. It  loses  its  head  feathers  almost  like 
pattern  baldness  in  man;  and  male  hor- 
mones seem  to  be  involved  in  the  bird's 
loss  of  feathers.  Explains  Dr.  Lubowe: 
"We  may  be  able  to  test  medicines  on  the 
bird,  and  then  apply  them  to  human  be- 
ings," 

Till  research  yields  more  definite  results, 
persons  concerned  about  this  hereditary- 
hormone  kind  of  baldness  might  gain  some 
consolation  (or  at  least  resignation)  by 
looking  at  a  picture  of  their  father. 


Language  and  Life 

"On  the  quality  of  a  nation's  language,"  says  F.  L.  Lucas  in  Style,  "depends 
to  some  extent  the  quality  of  its  lite  and  thought;  and  on  the  quality  erf  its  life 
and  thought  the  quality  of  Us  language." 


MARCH  8,  1961 


11 


CUsS  B  tsfcin.ct>on&  in  the  Churches 


(rjNDIVTDUAL  Protestant  churches,"  says 

■•■Dean  Liston  Pope  of  the  Yale  Divinity 
school,  "tend  to  be  'class  churches,'  with  mem- 
bers drawn  principally  from  one  class  group." 

Is  this  tendency  on  the  wane  or  on  the 
increase?  Reports  Vance  Packard  in  his  re- 
cent book  The  Status  Seekers:  "The  trend 
toward  more  rigid  stratification  in  the  Prot- 
estant churches  is  proceeding  apace  with  the 
general  trend  in  that  direction.  This  is  per- 
haps not  surprising,  because,  as  Liston  Pope 
points  out,  'every  American  community  .  .  . 
has  some  pronounced  pattern  of  social  strati- 
fication, and  religious  institutions  are  always 
very  closely  associated  with  this  pattern.' " 

Discussing  churches  that  are  attended 
largely  by  the  so-called  upper  class,  writer 
Packard  reports:  "An  earnest,  forthright 
Congregational  minister  of  the  socially  elite 
church  in  a  western  Wisconsin  town  (over- 
whelmingly Lutheran)  told  me,  'It  has  often 
bothered  me  that  we  don't  have  a  single 
farmer  or  workingman  in  the  congrega- 
tion'. . . . 

"Whatever  the  denomination,  care  is  taken, 
In  many  American  churches  having  a  strong 
element  of  wealthy  socialites  in  the  congre- 
gation, to  see  that  the  socialites  are  visited 
in  the  church's  annual  canvass,  by  someone 
of  their  own  social  standing  rather  than  by 
a  volunteer  chosen  at  random  from  the  gen- 
eral committee.  Also,  care  is  sometimes  taken 
to  see  that  downright  lower-class  people  don't 
wander  in  on  a  lovely  Sunday  morning.  The 
W.  Lloyd  Warner  group  reports  that,  in 
Yankee  City,  the  two  churches  with  the  heav- 
iest upper-class  membership  'devised  a  meth- 
od of  limiting  the  number  of  persons  from 
the  lower  parts  of  the  class  hierarchy'.  .  .  . 

"At  the  bottom  of  the  social  scale  you  find 
few  churchgoers.  They  suspect — and  cor- 
rectly, Hollingshead  found  in  Elmtown — that 
they  are  not  wanted  by  the  congregations 
of  the  so-called  respectable  churches  in  their 
town,  and  often  not  by  the  ministers.  One 
.  .  .  woman  commented  bitterly  on  the  'Every- 
one Welcome'  signs  in  front  of  several  Elm- 
town  churches.  .  .  .  Many  (but  not  all)  upper- 
class  churches  tend  to  generate  the  pleasant 
feeling  that  everything  within  the  social  sys- 
tem is  pretty  fine  just  as  it  is,  .  ,  , 

"Dr.  Walsh,  rector  of  St.  John's  Episcopal 
in  Northeast  City,  tried  to  explain  to  me  why 


the  Episcopal  church  Is  one  that  wealthier 
people  'naturally  adhere  to.'  He  mentioned 
that  the  Episcopal  ministers  preach  'literate' 
sermons  that  appeal  to  the  more  highly  edu- 
cated, and  that  the  church  has  a  kinship  with 
the  Church  of  England.  .  .  .  Then  he  added 
rather  sadly,  'The  more  churches  become 
filled  with  the  conservative  and  wealthy,  the 
more  reluctant  they  become  to  make  faith 
more  relevant  to  all  kinds  of  people.' " 

Concluding  his  study  of  religion,  writer 
Packard  says:  "I  believe  that  Christianity  in 
mid-century  America  shows  a  sizable  gulf 
between  practice  and  preaching.  The  minister 
of  the  most  fashionable  church  in  Jonesville 
told  W.  Lloyd  Warner,  'The  whole  trouble 
with  this  world  today  is  that  for  all  the  talk 
about  Christianity,  our  society  is  not  organ- 
ized on  its  principle.'  Liston  Pope,  while  not- 
ing all  the  very  real  efforts  being  made  to 
reduce  class  barriers  in  the  churches,  adds: 
'But,  unless  a  drastic  transformation  eomes 
about  in  the  churches,  and  especially  in  their 
idea  of  what  a  true  Christian  church  really 
is,  they  will  probably  continue  for  the  most 
part  to  adapt  to  class  divisions — and  even 
to  intensify  them — as  they  have  done  in  the 
past' 

"It  may  reasonably  be  argued  that  some  of 
the  social  stratification  of  Protestant  churches 
arises  from  the  composition  of  the  neighbor- 
hood surrounding  the  churches.  .  .  .  But  still 
the  question  persists:  Should  one  be  worship- 
ing in  a  setting  that  makes  a  mockery 
one  of  the  core  values  of  Christianity?" 

The  Bible  clearly  answers  that  question  at 
James  2:1-9:  "My  brothers,  you  are  not  hold- 
ing the  faith  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  our 
glory,  with  acts  of  favoritism,  are  you?  For, 
if  a  man  with  gold  rings  on  his  fingers  and 
in  splendid  clothing  enters  into  your  assem- 
bly, but  a  poor  man  in  filthy  clothing  also 
enters,  yet  you  look  with  favor  upon  the  one 
wearing  the  splendid  clothing  and  say:  'You 
take  this  seat  here  in  an  honorable  place,' 
and  you  say  to  the  poor  one:  'You  keep  stand- 
ing,' or,  'Take  that  seat  there  beside  my  foot- 
stool,' you  have  class  distinctions  among 
yourselves  and  you  have  become  judges  ren- 
dering corrupt  decisions,  is  that  not  so?  .  ,  , 
But  if  you  continue  showing  favoritism,  you 
are  working  a  sin,  for  you  are  reproved  by 
the  law  as  transgressors." 


12 


AW.AKE! 


By  "Awake!"  correspondent  in  Lebanon 

FOR  a  long  time  I  had  wanted  to  visit 
the  rock  city  of  Petra,  the  rose-red 
citadel  of  Biblical  Edom.  When  the  oppor- 
tunity presented  itself,  I,  together  with 
friends,  made  preparations  for  this  journey 
deep  into  the  mountains  of  southern  Jor- 
dan, through  land  once  known  as  Moab 
and  Edom. 

Our  interest  in  Petra  was  not  merely 
the  unusualness  of  it — its  singularly  weird 
approach  through  a  deep  rock  cleft  about 
a  mile  long;  its  temples  and  monuments, 
numbering  almost  a  thousand,  cut  into  the 
rock  of  stupendous  cliffs;  its  enthralling 
rose-red  colors.  We  were  especially  inter- 
ested because  Petra  is  generally  identified 
with  the  Edomite  city  called  Sela  in  the 
Bible.  (2  Ki.  14:7)  In  any  event  Petra  was 
one  of  the  foremost  Edomite  cities,  and 
concerning  these  cities  the  God  of  heaven 
and  earth  had  foretold  in  the  Holy  Bible, 
through  his  prophet  Ezekiel:  "A  desolate 
waste  is  what  you  will  become,  0  moun- 
tainous region  of  Seir,  even  ail  Edom,  all 


of  it;  and  they  will  have  to  know  that  I 
am  Jehovah."— Ezek.  35:15. 

Journey  Through  Southern  Jordan 

With    our  final   arrangements   com- 
pleted in  Amman,  we  rented  a  taxi  and 
started  for  Petra,  located  some  ninety- 
five  miles  south  of  Jerusalem,  about 
midway  between  the  Dead  Sea  and  the 
Gulf  of  Aqaba.  The  trip  by  car  was  to 
take  fourteen  hours,  so  we  settled  down 
for  the  drive,  eager  to  see  all  that  we 
could  of  this  part  of  the  Jordan  so  rich 
in  Bible  history.  To  us  the  trip  was  not 
the  usual  dusty  ride  over  rough  roads, 
but  rather  it  was  filled  with  interest; 
for  we  were  all  well  acquainted  with  the 
Bible  accounts  of  events  that  had  oc- 
curred along  the  way. 
According  to  the  maps  in  the  back  of 
our  Bibles,  we  knew  that  the  first  leg  of 
our  travels  would  take  us  through  what 
anciently  had  been  the  tribal  possession  of 
Reuben,  one  of  the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel. 
When  the  tribe  of  Reuben  came  up  out  of 
the  wilderness,  it  had  much  livestock  and 
thus  needed  a  territory  suited  to  the  graz- 
ing of  large  herds  of  cattle  and  sheep.  So 
we  found  this  territory  to  be.  Perfectly 
suited  for  grazing  countryf  it  supports  to- 
day principally  small  herds  of  goats,  along 
with  some  grain  farming.  It  did  not  take 
long,  on  our  narrow  asphalt  highway,  to 
traverse  this  section  of  rolling  hills. 

Looking  at  our  maps,  we  saw  that  the 
territory  of  Reuben  was  in  the  most  south- 
erly section  of  the  domain  of  the  twelve- 
tribe  kingdom  on  the  east  side  of  the  Jor- 
dan, and  it  was  bordered  on  its  extreme 
south  by  the  old  nation  of  Moab.  The  boun- 
dary between  the  two  nations  was  marked 
on  our  maps  by  a  thin  black  line  identified 
as  the  "River  Arnon."  It  was  our  expecta- 
tion shortly  to  reach  some  kind  of  a  small 
creek  or  dry  river  bed,  cross  a  small  bridge 


MARCS  8,  1961 


13 


and  find  ourselves  in  what  would  have  been 
Moab  a  few  thousand  years  ago.  Some  of 
us  wondered,  in  fact,  how  Bible  scholars 
could  know  that  this  supposed  narrow 
creek  would  really  be  the  true  dividing  line 
between  the  two  nations. 

It  was  with  great  wonderment  to  us, 
therefore,  when  we  turned  a  corner  and 
then,  suddenly,  before  us  was  the  begin- 
ning of  a  huge  canyon  about  two  thousand 
feet  deep  and  nearly  a  mile  wide. 

As  we  reflected  on  this  sudden  change  of 
topography,  our  car  began  to  wind  its  way 
down  a. gradually  twisting  grade  to  the 
bottom  of  the  canyon,  where  the  old  river 
Arnon  flowed  on  its  way  to  the  Dead  Sea. 

Into  Moab 

It  was  then,  for  the  first  time,  that  we 
began  to  realize  what  a  marvelous  natural 
boundary  this  wide,  deep  canyon  actually 
was  in  dividing  the  land  of  Israel  from 
the  land  of  Moab.  A  border  could  hardly 
be  more  decisive.  We  found  the  river  bed 
of  the  Arnon  to  be  almost  dry;  pools  of  wa- 
ter here  and  there  were  filled  with  large 
numbers  of  small  fish.  Being  the  late 
spring,  for  lack  of  water  the  stream  ran 
very  slowly. 

The  paved  road  soon  ran  out,  and  the 
steep  grade  and  hot  sun  soon  had  our  ra- 
diator boiling.  After  a  stop  we  climbed  in 
low  and  second  gear  the  half  mile  or  so 
that  still  remained  above  us  before  coming 
out  on  the  high  semi-flat  plateau  that 
marked  the  beginning  of  Moab. 

As  we  had  done  in  the  old-time  territory 
of  Reuben,  we  epened  a  quiz  on  what  we 
knew  about  this  territory,  both  from  a 
typical  and  from  a  prophetic  standpoint. 
We  remembered  that  it  was  into  this  area 
that  Lot  and  his  daughters  fled  after  the 
destruction  of  Sodom  and  Gomorrah.  We 
recalled  the  beautiful  love  story  of  Ruth, 
the  Moabitess,  and  we  remembered  from 
our  studies  that  Moab  repeatedly  allied  it- 


self with  Ammon  and  Mt,  Seir  (Edom)  In 
attacking  God's  ancient  people  on  various 
occasions. 

As  we  discussed  these  things,  our  driver 
pulled  up  in  front  of  the  first  of  several 
small  stone  fortresses.  Among  their  vari- 
ous purposes,  these  fortresses  serve  as  a 
road  check  on  all  passing  cars.  We  exam- 
ined the  small  fortification  with  interest, 
for  it  was  the  first  one  we  had  seen  at  close 
range.  It  had  high  walls  and  on  each  end  a 
watchtower.  Between  the  guard  towers  ran 
parapets  and  along  the  walls  and  up  the 
sides  of  the  towers  were  narrow  rifle  ports, 
which  gave  the  defenders  the  advantage  of 
protection  as  well  as  height.  Any  attacking 
desert  bands  that  might  chance  to  shoot 
at  or  besiege  the  small  garrison  of  some 
dozen  cavalrymen  would  find  it  hard  going. 
After  our  passports  were  checked,  we 
asked  about  water  for  our  canteens.  Two 
Arabs  standing  by  asked  us  if  we  would 
like  to  draw  fresh  water  from  a  nearby 
cistern.  We  followed  them  out  onto  the 
plain  where  they  uncovered  a  deep  cistern 
and  drew  water  for  us.  The  water  was 
clean  and  cool.  We  thanked  our  hosts  and 
continued  on  our  way,  eager  now  to  reach 
the  southern  limits  of  Moab  and  enter  the 
region  of  Mt.  Seir,  the  ancient  territory  of 
Esau. 

Our  maps  indicated  the  boundary  by  a 
thin  black  line  marked  "River  Zered." 
Here  again,  far  more  than  just  a  dried-up 
river  bed  divided  the  two  territories.  An- 
other deep  canyon  was  in  evidence.  Actu- 
ally one  might  have  anticipated  such  nat- 
ural divisions,  when  it  is  realized  that  these 
rivers  drain  into  the  Dead  Sea  basin  and 
that  this  salt  lake  lies  1,292  feet  below  sea 
level,  while  the  mountainous  region  around 
it  is  all  well  above  sea  level. 

Mountainous  Region  of  Edom 

As  we  worked  our  way  gradually  down 
the  roadway  to  the  bottom  of  the  canyon, 


14 


AWAKEl 


we  could  see  that  the  landscape  on  the  op- 
posite side  was  not  as  had  been  the  north- 
ern side  of  Moab,  but  here  the  land  began 
to  break  up  into  a  mountainous  region. 
This  was  not  a  land  of  grain  fields  and 
cisterns  sunk  in  a  flat  plain,  but  a  land  for 
the  hunter,  a  land  for  the  high-flying  eagle 
and  the  sure-footed  goat,  yes,  a  land  well 
suited  to  the  tastes  of  Esau,  the  hunter,  a 
man  who  would  dwell  in  the  open  and 
whose  descendants  would  turn  out  to  be 
robber  bands  that  lived  by  the  sword. 
—Gen.  27:40. 

Life  has  changed  very  little  out  here 
from  what  it  must  have  been  thousands  of 
years  ago.  Arabs  tented  here  and  there  in 
the  rocks,  while  small  shepherd  boys  and 
girls  watched  the  grazing  flocks  of  goats. 
Our  car  always  attracted  the  herd  dogs, 
and  they  would  snap  and  snarJ  at  the  spin- 
ning wheels  of  the  car  until  they  felt  they 
had  chased  us  out  of  their  domain  and 
eould  safely  go  back  to  their  vigil  over  the 
goats. 

We  now  traveled  toward  Maan,  a  town 
about  eighteen  miles  southeast  of  Petra. 
Darkness  settled  down  over  the  wilderness 
while  we  still  had  some  thirty  miles  to 
travel  before  arriving  in  Maan.  We  slowed 
down  a  little  to  allow  our  headlights  to 
pick  out  the  best  way  through  the  rocks 
and  ruts  that  lay  ahead  in  the  dusty  road- 
way. From  time  to  time  the  lights  would 
fall  upon  small  groups  of  Arabs  walking 
along  th&  road.  We  could  appreciate  why 
they  traveled  at  night  rather  than  during 
the  blistering  heat  of  the  day. 

Arriving  in  Maan  tired,  thirsty  and  cov- 
ered with  dust,  we  were  soon  made  to  feel 
much  fresher  by  a  kind  friend  living  there. 
After  a  meal  of  cooked  rice  wrapped  in 
grape  leaves  along  with  some  other  Arab 
delicacies,  we  were  soon  feeling  fit  again. 
The  next  morning  we  arrived  at  what  is 
known  as  Wadi  Musa,  the  entranceway  to 
Petra.  There  at  a  final  military  garrison 

MARCH  8,  1961 


we  paid  a  tax  and  were  cleared  by  the  au- 
thorities. One  may  rent  horses  here  for  the 
trip  into  Petra,  but  we  felt  we  would  be 
more  free  to  move  about  if  we  went  on  foot. 

With  the  facts  fully  in  mind  on  how  the 
Swiss  explorer  Johann  Burckhardt  had 
first  stumbled  upon  the  almost  completely 
hidden  entranceway,  we  searched  with 
keen  anticipation  for  the  cleft  in  the  rock 
that  would  denote  this  spot  and  which  we 
knew  would  lead  us  back  into  the  heart  of 
the  city. 

As  we  drew  closer  to  the  yet  unseen 
entranceway,  many  structures  carved  out 
of  the  rock  of  the  river  bed  could  be  no- 
ticed. One  interesting  thing  about  the 
entranceway  is  that  it  is  not  commer- 
cialized, nor  have  tourists  defaced  the 
surrounding  landscape.  The  increasing 
number  of  rooms  and  holes  in  the  rock  in- 
dicated that  we  were  near.  Then,  turning 
a  corner  in  the  stony  stream  bed,  we  saw 
the  narrow  cleft  in  the  rocks  indicating 
the  final  entranceway  to  Petra. 

Into  Rose-Red  Petra 

Entering,  we  began  the  close-to-a-mile 
walk  down  the  stream  bed  between  the 
walls  of  the  cleft.  We  gazed  above  at  the 
sheer  sandstone  walls  rising  hundreds  of 
feet  straight  up  and  at  times  coming  as 
close  as  twelve  feet  apart.  Birds  chirped 
and  our  voices,  as  well  as  theirs,  echoed. 
With  each  step  new  sights  began  to  unfold 
before  our  eyes.  The  rocks  began  to  take 
on  the  rose-red  color  that  gives  the  city  its 
most  interesting  hue.  Here  and  there,  as 
though  a  painter  had  mixed  his  colors  and 
then  tipped  his  paint  cans  over,  spilling  the 
color  down  the  walls,  were  vivid  streaks 
of  red,  white,  yellow,  orange,  blue  and 
gold.  Truly  a  sight  and  a  wonder  that  could 
never  be  forgotten! 

Along  both  walls  of  the  cleft  an  aque- 
duct had  been  chiseled  out  to  convey  the 
water  into  the  city.  At  various  points  along 

15 


the  walls,  terra-cotta  piping  much  like  any 
modern  water-pipe  system  could  still  be 
seen,  linked  together  in  the  usual  fashion. 

In  no  place  could  we  see  far  ahead, 
crooks  and  corners  preventing.  Niched  in 
the  walls  are  small  shrines  as  votive  offer- 
ings to  a  deity.  We  strained  our  eyes  for 
a  first  glimpse  of  Petra;  it  must  be  near. 
The  defile  twisted  and  narrowed,  and  the 
cliffs  almost  came  together  overhead. 
Abruptly  the  cleft  ends  in  a  cross-gorge. 
There,  framed  through  what  was  almost  a 
tunnel,  rose  the  first  of  Petra's  rock-hewn 
monuments,  a  temple  to  an  unknown  god. 
Called  by  the  Arabs  Khaznet  Firaun,  the 
Treasury  of  Pharaoh,  this  temple  was  cam- 
eoed  out  of  the  face  of  the  cliff  opposite 
the  mouth  of  the  cleft.  Arabs  used  to  think 
that  Egypt's  Pharaohs  were  gods,  who 
alone  could  be  responsible  for  such  a  re- 
markable structure.  It  was  thought  that 
Pharaoh's  treasure  was  concealed  in  the 
urn  that  tops  the  130-foot  facade  of  soft 
sandstone.  This  temple  reflects  a  soft,  rose 
glow  that  probably  causes  much  of  the 
rose-red  hue  permeating  the  area.  The 
temple's  color  is  said  to  range,  with  vary- 
ing light,  from  marble  white  under  the 
moon  to  red  in  the  brilliant  sun,  and  to 
deep  mahogany  when  shadows  creep  along 
the  walls.  This  was  our  introduction  to  one 
of  the  most  interesting  cities  one  can  im- 
agine, a  city  that  has  been  called  the 
"strangest  city  built  by  man." 

Farther  inside  the  city  we  saw  a  Roman 
amphitheater,  with  a  seating  capacity  of 
about  3,000  to  5,000,  carved  in  sweeping 


semicircular  tiers  from  the  face  of  a  cliff. 

One  unusual  experience  was  the  difficult 
climb  up  a  mountain  sitting  in  the  middle 
of  the  oval -shaped  city,  upon  which  ancient 
priests  offered  sacrifices  to  their  gods.  The 
temple  area  gives  the  tourists  a  bird's-eye 
view  of  the  entire  city.  The  mountaintop 
was  unusually  well  suited  for  its  purpose, 
for  here  on  an  altar  cut  out  of  solid  stone 
and  on  the  very  brink  of  a  cliff  at  least  a 
thousand  feet  above  the  basin  floor,  the 
high  priest  could  offer  sacrifices  to  Petra's 
gods,  in  full  view  of  almost  half  the  city. 
The  principal  altar  had  a  round  basin 
carved  out  of  the  rock  nearby  and  from  it 
a  rock  channel  had  been  hollowed  out  to 
conduct  the  blood  of  sacrificial  victims 
over  the  edge  of  the  sheer  precipice. 
Streams  of  glistening  red  blood  must  have 
flowed  down  the  face  of  the  rocks! 

Great  was  the  deception  into  which  the 
people  of  Petra  fell  in  those  ancient  times. 
Feeling  secure  in  their  mountain  hideaway,' 
awed  by  the  religious  sacrifices,  charmed 
by  the  splendid  rich  colors  of  their  homes 
and  enriched  with  the  loot  of  a  thousand 
caravans,  how  proud  they  must  have  been! 
Despite  their  dwelling  like  eagles  in  the 
rocks,  they  were  nevertheless  brought  to 
ruin  by  the  all-powerful  God,  Jehovah,  who 
had  declared:  "A  desolate  waste  is  what 
you  will  become." 

Today,  in  vindication  of  Bible  prophe- 
cies involving  Mt.  Seir,  the  territory  is 
"a  desolate  waste."  And  Petra  is  visited  by 
about  a  thousand  tourists  a  year,  who  mar- 
vel at  its  desolate  ruins. 


HOW   CHARGED    ARE    YOU? 

The  National  Safety  Council  has  a  record  of  a  woman  that  could  not  hold  her 
Job  because  she  was  so  charged  with  static  electricity.  She  had  the  habit  of  shuffling 
her  feet  back  and  forth  when  she  was  sitting,  and  as  a  result  started  seven  fires  at 
one  place  of  employment.  She  was  dismissed  as  a  fire  hazard.  Another  record  is 
of  a  farmer  who  got  all  wet  while  spraying  his  apple  trees.  When  he ;  walked 
home  the  wind  dried  out  his  clothes  but  in  the  process  he  generated  so  much 
static  electricity  that  he  set  his  own  pants  on  fire. 


16 


AWAKES 


POLICE  DOG 


DOWN  a  dark  street  a  police  officer  was 
patrolling  his  beat.  Suddenly  he  was 
surprised  by  several  hoodlums  and  before 
he  was  able  to  protect  himself  he  lay  un- 
conscious on  the  ground.  But  when  he  re- 
gained consciousness,  the  hoodlums  were 
still  there.  How  so?  Because  the  officer  had 
with  him  a  police  dog  that  had  held  the 
hoodlums  at  bay  until  the  officer  regained 
consciousness,  called  for  help  and  arrested 
his  assailants. 

When  a  dog  is  neglected  by  man,  it  may 
bring  forth  notoriously  bad  characteris- 
tics; whereas  when  it  is  properly  trained 
and  disciplined  by  its  overlord,  man,  it  be- 
comes one  of  the  most  intelligent  and  val- 
uable servants  of  man.  Thus  of  Dox,  one 
of  the  German  shepherd  dogs  on  Rome's 
police  force,  it  has  been  said:  "He  prob- 
ably has  cracked  more  cases  than  any  de- 
tective on  the  force.  We  consider  him  one 
of  our  best  men." 

Of  the  four  general  classifications  of 
domestic  dogs — hunting,  working,  toy  and 
miscellaneous — the  police  dog  belongs  to 
the  working  group  with  such  other  dogs 
as  the  Saint  Bernard  and  the  collie.  For 
most  persons  "police  dog"  means  "German 
police  dog,"  but  erroneously  so,  as  his  cor- 
rect name  is  German  shepherd  dog.  There 
are  several  other  breeds  that  also  make 
good  police  dogs  and  all  of  which  look  very 
much  alike,  such  as  the  Doberman  pin- 
scher  and  the  Belgian  shepherd  dog,  al- 
though the  German  shepherd  dog  is  by  far 
the  one  most  frequently  used  in  police 
work.  Rome's  prize  dog  is  a  German  shep- 
herd. 

MARCH  8,  1961 


Among  their 
many  assets  for 
police  work  are  their  weight,  strength  and 
speed — some  140  pounds  of  bone,  muscle 
and  sinew.  A  flying  leap  by  one  of  them  is 
sufficient  to  floor  any  criminal.  A  fleeing 
burglar  has  no  chance  at  all  of  escaping 
from  a  police  dog.  He  may  elude  a  man  by 
running  down  dark  alleys,  climbing  fences 
and  other  rough  terrain,  but  not  the  dog. 

Another  asset  is  their  teeth  and  fangs. 
Exposed  menacingly,  they  strike  terror  in 
the  heart  of  the  evildoer.  As  one  of  them 
expressed  it,  "You  can  argue  with  a  cop 
but  not  with  his  dog."  No  doubt  one  rea- 
son that  the  police  dog"  is  so  successful  is 
that  criminals  are  such  physical  cowards. 
It  is  even  claimed  by  some  that,  were  cor- 
poreal punishment  reinstated,  crime  would 
take  a  big  drop.  Wisely  this  method  was 
used  in  Israel  in  such  cases  as  did  not  merit 
capital  punishment. — Deut.  25:3. 

A  further  asset  is  the  police  dog's  hear- 
ing, said  to  be  many  times  as  strong  as 
that  of  man.  More  technically,  a  sound  that 
a  man  can  hear  six  and  a  half  yards  away 
can  be  heard  by  the  trained  police  dog  at 
twenty-six  yards.  And  a  sound  that  is 
pitched  so  high  that  man  cannot  hear  it 

17 


at  all,  no  matter  how  close  he  is  to  it,  can 
be  heard  by  the  police  dog  seventy-five 
yards  away. 

The  dog's  sight  is  not  as  sharp  as  that 
of  man,  a  dog  being  color  blind.  By  rea- 
son of  his  height  man  can  also  see  farther 
than  the  dog.  In  police  work,  however, 
these  are  more  than  compensated  by  the 
dog's  being  able  to  see  in  the  dark.  For 
this  reason  dogs  are  especially  valuable  in 
flushing  prowlers  from  darkened  premises, 
deserted  buildings  or  from  undergrowth  in 
parks  and  woods. 

Among  the  police  dog's  chief  assets,  es- 
pecially for  detective  work,  is  his  remark- 
able sense  of  smell.  It  is  said  to  be  forty 
times  as  keen  as  that  of  man.  From  twen- 
ty pieces  of  wood  a  police  dog  will  pick 
the  one  that  was  touched  by  his  master's 
finger.  Given  a  scent  forty-eight  hours  old, 
a  good  dog  will  trace  it  unerringly  through 
a  maze  of  streets.  This  sense  is  so  strong 
as  to  give  him  almost  a  sixth  sense,  that 
of  detecting  whether  a  man  is  guilty  or  in- 
volved in  the  crime  or  not.  It  may  be  that 
a  guilty  conscience  causes  a  cold  sweat  to 
break  out  that  has  its  own  odor  and  to 
which  the  police  dog  is  especially  sensitive 
and  alert. 

Training  Police  Dogs 

Training  a  police  dog  takes  months  and 
is  no  simple  matter,  for  either  the  police- 
man or  the  dog.  As  to  just  how  much  suf- 
fering the  dog  undergoes  while  training 
doubtless  depends  upon  the  trainer,  the 
method  of  training  used  and  the  objective. 
For  some  kinds  of  work,  dogs  are  specially 
trained  to  be  vicious,  but  not  for  ordinary 
police  work.  Usually  only  volunteers  are 
chosen  for  police  work  with  dogs;  a  man 
must  want  to  work  with  a  dog.  More  than 
that,  his  family  must  fully  approve  of  the 
idea,  as  the  dog  lives  with  his  master's 


family.  At  times  even  the  neighborhood  is 
checked  to  make  certain  that  the  dog  will 
be  accepted  by  it.  A  policeman  and  his  dog 
are  trained  together  if  they  are  to  work 
together.  Generally  a  dog  is  not  trans- 
ferred if  his  master  quits  the  police  force, 
as  it  is  not  easy  for  some  dogs  to  adjust  to 
a  new  master. 

Dogs  used  in  police  work  are  taught  to 
be  kind  to  children,  make  ideal  pets  for 
them  and  seem  to  take  pride  in  protecting 
children.  They  are  taught  to  note  suspi- 
cious moves  and  to  attack  only  on  com- 
mand. In  attacking  they  are  taught  to  grab 
the  gun  arm  and  yet  to  do  this  so  carefully 
as  not  to  even  break  the  skin  of  the  arm. 
Dogs  are  also*  taught  to  untie  knots,  no 
matter  how  complicated  they  may  be,  such 
as  when  a  victim  is  tied  to  a  post  or  chair. 
Perhaps  tops  is  the  ability  of  one  of  them 
to  unload  a  pistol  without  firing  it. 

Trained  German  shepherd  dogs  come 
high,  usually  $1,000  each,  although  in  one 
large  city  dog  lovers  donated  all  the  dogs 
the  police  force  needed.  Usually  the  officer 
is  paid  $200  for  keeping  the  dog;  a  good 
dog  lasts  from  eight  to  ten  years,  a  record 
being  held  by  one  dog  that  is  still  going 
strong  at  fourteen  years. 

Exploits 

Many  are  the  books  that  have  been  writ- 
ten, as  well  as  magazine  articles,  on  the 
exploits  of  the  police  dog.  During  World 
War  II  police  dogs  were  especially  valuable 
in  detecting  living  persons  among  the 
bombed  ruins  of  cities.  Uncannily  they  de- 
tected a  living  person  in  a  partly  demol- 
ished building  or  under  a  pile  of  rubble, 
even  though  he  may  have  been  uncon- 
scious or  a  sleeping  infant.  In  fact,  German 
shepherd  dogs  not  specially  trained  dis- 
tinguished themselves  in  this  kind  of  work. 
At  airports  these  dogs  would  sound  warn- 
ing of  impending  airplane  attacks  minutes 


18 


AWAKE! 


before  the  high-frequency  direction  finders 
discovered  the  planes,  and,  in  particular, 
when  the  attacking  planes  were  flying  low. 
Dogs  also  aided  refugees  to  escape  Nazi 
border  guards. 

Currently,  the  world's  champion  police 
dog  is  Dox,  above  referred  to.  He  has  as- 
sisted in  the  apprehension  of  400  criminals 
and  has  received  four  gold  medals  and 
twenty-seven  silver  medals.  A  button  lost 
at  the  scene  of  the  crime  by  a  burglar  was 
sufficient  for  him  to  trace  the  burglar, 
even  to  the  closet  where  the  coat  hung 
from  which  the  button  had  been  torn.  Once 
he  kept  twelve  suspects  from  escaping 
while  his  master  telephoned  for  help.  On 
another  occasion  he  caught  a  burglar  after 
chasing  him  for  five  miles,  on  three  legs, 
the  fourth  having  been  broken  by  a  bullet 
from  the  burglar's  gun. 

A  leading  New  York  city  department 
store  long  suffered  considerable  losses  not 
only  from  prowJers  but  from  persons  who 
hid  among  the  goods  at  night  and  in  the 
morning  left  with  their  arms  full  of  mer- 
chandise. Ail  of  this  came  to  an  end  some 
years  ago  with  the  institution  of  a  police 
dog  patrol.  The  store  is  now  so  free  from 
prowlers  that  they  have  to  plant  prowlers 
every  now  and  then  to  keep  the  dogs  from 
getting  discouraged!  In  a  Richmond,  Vir- 
ginia, warehouse  police  vainly  looked  for 
a  prowler  for  an  hour  and  a  half.  A  police 
dog  flushed  him  out  in  thirty  seconds!  Art 
museums  are  finding  it  very  practical  to 
keep  police  dogs  to  guard  their  treasures, 
especially  when  making  changes.  No  one 
dares  touch,  let  alone  remove  a  painting, 
while  a  dog  is  on  duty.  The  dogs  are  also 
a  great  help  when  mobs  form  or  riots 
break  out.  In  fact,  their  greatest  usefulness 


is  in  helping  to  maintain  the  peace  and 
prevent  crime. 

Police  dogs  have  long  been  used  in  Eu- 
ropean countries,  particularly  in  Germany, 
France,  Italy  and  England.  Scotland  Yard 
of  London  has  a  force  of  three  hundred  po- 
lice dogs,  which  not  only  greatly  help  po- 
lice officers  but  frequently  apprehend 
criminals  unaided. 

The  United  States  Army  in  Korea  makes 
good  use  of  police  dogs,  as  does  the  United 
States  Air  Force,  it  having  5,000  dogs. 
Among  the  pioneers  in  the  use  of  dogs  on 
the  police  force  must  be  mentioned  Balti- 
more, Maryland,  and  Stockton,  California. 
In  one  year  Baltimore's  thirty-six  dogs  as- 
sisted in  five  hundred  arrests  as  well  as 
causing  a  great  decrease  in  crime  in  the 
city's  most  dangerous  sections.  The  suc- 
cess of  Baltimore  inspired  the  police  de- 
partment of  Washington,  D.C.,  to  place  an 
order  for  Scotland  Yard  to  train  a  number 
of  dogs  for  it.  Among  other  United  States 
cities  that  have  begun  to  use  police  dogs 
must  be  mentioned  Pittsburgh,  Pennsyl- 
vania; Richmond,  Virginia;  St.  Louis,  Mis- 
souri, and  Portland,  Oregon. 
-  In  view  of  the  way  police  dogs  have 
proved  themselves  in  so  many  lands  and 
different  cities,  it  is  difficult  to  understand 
why  so  many  leading  cities  in  the  United 
States  that  are  so  plagued  with  crime  are 
so  far  behind  in  the  use  of  police  dogs. 
What  greater  recommendation  could  be 
given  the  police  dogs  than  the  statement 
of  the  men  that  work  with  them  that  "they 
prefer  the  dog  as  a  partner  to  another 
officer,  on  either  foot  patrol  or  in  patrol 
cars"? — California  Peace  Officer,  May- 
June,  1960. 


The  righteous  one  is  caring  for  the  soul  of  his  domestic  animal,  but 
the  mercies  of  the  wicked  ones  are  cruel,— Prov.  12:10. 

MARCH  8,  1961 


19 


«T  ET"S  face  it," 

J_j  said  a  Brooklyn 
housewife,    "spring 
cleaning  is  a  big  pain. 
It's  no  picnic,  I'll  have 
you  know."  Perhaps 
cleaning  house  will  £ 
never  be  easy,  but  it  is  '.____ 
easier   today   than   it  -  - 
was  a  century  ago  or~7 
even  a  decade  ago.-£ 
Housewives  must  ad-  _.i 
mit  that  new  special-  JV 
ized  products  and   ^ 
equipment  take  some  _^ 
of  the  sting  out  of--? 
housework,  / 

Also,  preventive  housekeeping  is  a  big 
help  today.  It  is  possible  to  select  materials 
that  resist  soil  and  clean  easily.  You  can 
choose  colors  and  patterns  that  are  not  so 
apt  to  show  soil,  buy  fabrics  that  can  be 
machine  washed  and  that  need  no  ironing. 
Modern  methods  and  tools  and  a  host  of 
new  products  to  keep  home  furnishings 
polished,  free  from  moths,  mildew  and  ex- 
cessive soiling  have  all  eased  the  task  of 
spring  cleaning. 

For  example,  frequent  polishing  becomes 
unnecessary  by  spraying  copper  molds  and 
accessories  with  a  tarnishproof  plastic.  En- 
amel paints  on  walls  and  woodwork  in  chil- 
dren's rooms  or  where  fingermarks  are  apt 
to  show  make  cleaning  easier.  Painted 
walls  and  woodwork  come  clean  in  a  hurry 


with  a  grease-cutting  cleaner  that  needs 
no  rinsing.  Keeping  special  china  collec- 
tions, hobbies  and  bric-a-brac  in  a  glass 
display  case  will  save  precious  hours  of 
tedious  dusting-  In  other  words,  the  mod- 
ern housewife  decorates  and  furnishes  her 
home  with  materials  that  make  future 
cleaning  much  easier.  But  despite  this 
fact,  there  is  still  much  to  be  done  each 
spring. 

To  prevent  yourself  from  collapsing 
from  sheer  exhaustion  at  the  end  of  the 
cleaning  period  or  even  before,  it  is  wise 
to  plan  your  work.  Do  this  before  you  be- 
gin and  then  stick  to  your 
plan.  Planning  requires  time. 
Allow  for  it.  Analyze  every 
job  or  as  many  as  you  can 
beforehand.  Do  this  mental- 
ly, if  you  wish.  But  it  is  bet- 
~ter  to  have  a  pad  and  pencil 
"..handy  to  jot  down  things 
-  that  must  be  done,  supplies 
that  must  be  purchased  and 
jiew  ideas  that  come  to  mind. 
Write  down  what  things 
are  to  be  sent  to  commer- 
cial cleaners  and  laundries,  and  so  forth. 
If  the  work  is  going  to  be  done  outside, 
it  may  be  well  to  plan  a  day  for  taking 
down  curtains  and  draperies  and  removing 
drapery  hardware,  assembling  the  bed- 
spreads and  blankets  and  rolling  up  the 
rugs.  If  the  work  is  going  to  be  done  at 
home,  allow  a  day  or  two  for  the  blankets 
and,  perhaps,  another  day  or  so  to  have 
the  draperies  cleaned.  Check  on  the  proper 
method  of  cleaning  and  storage  of  new 
fabrics.  Many  new  fabrics  that  look  as  if 
they  should  be  dry-cleaned  are  actually 
machine  washable,  others  are  not.  It  is 
wise  to  save  the  manufacturer's  printed 
instructions  for  the  care  of  any  new  home 
furnishing.  This  will  save  you  time  and 
money  in  the  long  run. 


20 


AWAKE! 


Bints  That  Make  Loads  Lighter 

The  trick  is  to  divide  big  jobs  and  do 
them  little  by  little.  Do  Drst  things  first 
Do  not  remove  everything  out  of  a  room 
until  you  are  in  position  to  clean  the  room 
completely  that  day  and  move  back  in.  If 
not,  cut  the  work  load  down  first  by  doing 
the  closets  and  the  dresser  drawers,  by 
washing  the  scarves  and  doilies,  by  sending 
the  clothes  to  the  cleaners  and  airing  oth- 
ers out.  Clean  one  closet  shelf  at  a  time, 
one  dresser  drawer  at  a  time  and  one  room 
at  a  time.  You  save  steps  that  way  and  see 
good  fruits  sooner  too. 

The  Bible  says:  "Let  all  things  take 
place  ...  by  arrangement"  or  order,  which 
is  good  sense  come  cleaning  time.  Do  your 
cleaning  in  the  right  sequence  and  you  will 
save  time  and  energy.  Start  upstairs  and 
work  down;  the  dirt  will  come  with  you. 
Start  in  the  farthest  corner  and  work  to- 
ward the  door.  Do  a  thorough  cleaning  job 
at  least  once  a  year  and  your  home  will 
remain  clean  longer. — 1  Cor.  14:40. 

Before  you  start  cleaning,  however, 
check  your  supply  list.  See  that  all  your 
equipment  is  on  hand.  It  can  be  irritating 
to  find  that  you  have  no  boxes  or  bags 
ready  in  which  to  store  fresh  fluffy  blan- 
kets, cleaned  curtains  and  drapes.  Check 
to  see  if  you  have  the  needed  sponges,  pol- 
ishes, buckets,  brushes,  waxes,  and  so 
forth,  A  small  sturdy  stepladder  or  a  step 
stool  is  a  must.  An  apron  with  large  pock- 
ets for  extra  dust  cioths,  a  large  paper 
shopping  bag  for  emptying  wastebaskets 
are  all  real  step  savers. 

Do  not  be  afraid  to  experiment  with  new 
products.  The  new  pressurized  cleaners 
really  make  light  work  of  window  and  wall 
cleaning.  Some  cleaners  leave  a  protective 
coating  to  slow  down  future  soiling.  New 
upholstery  cleaners  often  deposit  protec- 
tive silica  on  fibers.  If  your  upholstery  is 
slightly  faded  besides  being  soiled,  try  us- 
ing a  new  tint  that  can  be  sponged  on.  It 


cleans  as  it  tints  the  faded  spots.  Some 
new  paints  take  only  a  few  hours  to  dry! 
New  spray  wax  cleans  and  waxes  as  you 

dust.  Treated  dusting  papers  are  now  on 
the  market  that  clean  and  polish  in  a  sin- 
gle operation.  These  are  real  work  savers! 

It  is  amazing  what  work  vacuum  attach- 
ments will  do.  They  are  great  for  cleaning 
mattresses,  springs,  drawers  and  closets  in 
a  jiffy.  An  upholstery-brush  nozzle  at- 
tached to  a  cleaner  is  an  aid  in  dusting 
drapery  tops,  wall  hangings,,  high  mold- 
ings, ledges,  chandeliers,  in  fact,  anything 
else  that  needs  dusting,  including  uphol- 
stered furniture  and  your  furs.  Vacuuming 
loose  dirt  and  dust  from  tile  or  linoleum- 
covered  floors  makes  washing  and  polish- 
ing easier.  A  spray  attachment  is  ideal  for 
shampooing  rugs,  also  for  mothproofing 
and  to  spray  liquid  wax. 

Why  insist  on  scrubbing  on  hands  and 
knees?  This  not  only  takes  more  energy, 
tires  muscles  and  leaves  one  with  an  aching 
back,  but  it  roughens  the  knees  besides. 
Why  not  use  a  long-handled  sponge  mop? 
You  can  stand  straight  and  the  leverage 
helps  with  the  work.  Also,  let  a  long- 
handled  dust  pan  and  broom  do  your 
reaching  for  you.  Save  your  back  as  much 
as  possible.  Use  your  leg  and  shoulder  mus- 
cles when  lifting  baskets  of  clothes  and 
other  heavy  items. 

Clean  One  Room  at  a  Time 

With  the  closets,  curtains  and  draperies 
done,  you  are  ready  to  tackle  the  room. 
First,  strip  the  room  completely  of  every- 
thing— vases,  pottery,  pictures,  and  so 
forth — so  that  there  will  be  no  interfer- 
ence. Use  a  large  basket  to  collect  these 
items.  Then  carry  them  all  out  at  one  time 
into  the  hall  and  leave  them  there.  Next, 
remove  all  the  furniture.  To  move  furni- 
ture, push  or  pull,  rather  than  lift.  Many 
housewives  strain  back  muscles  or  wear 
themselves  out  lifting  heavy  furniture. 


MARCH  8,  1961 


21 


There  is  no  substitute  for  professional 
cleaning  of  wall-to-wall  carpets  and  room- 
size  rugs.  You  can  do  the  job  yourself  if 
you  have  the  right  equipment.  Even  though 
your  carpets  have  been  brushed  daily  and 
vacuumed  regularly,  it  is  advisable  to 
shampoo  them  at  regularly  scheduled  in- 
tervals. This  will  lengthen  their  life.  When 
shampooing  a  rug  with  the  vacuum  clean- 
er, move  the  cleaner  lengthwise  on  a  large 
rug  in  slow,  steady  strokes,  but  run  it  cross- 
wise on  small  rugs  to  lessen  the  likelihood 
of  their  wrinkling. 

Many  people  like  to  roll  up  the  rug  and 
store  it  for  the  summer.  The  waxed  hard- 
wood floors  give  the  room  an  added  cool- 
ness and  a  fresh  appearance.  To  store  rugs, 
roll,  never  fold  them.  Wrap  them  in  heavy 
wrapping  paper  or  plastic  film.  Then  seal 
the  roll  with  masking  tape  and  label.  It  is 
best  to  lay  the  rolled  rug  horizontally,  but 
if  space  is  lacking,  the  rug  may  be  placed 
on  end  in  a  closet. 

The  ceiling  of  the  vacant  room  is  now 
ready  to  be  wall-mopped.  Eliminate  the 
streaks.  When  finished,  begin  on  the  walls. 
Use  a  long-handled  sponge  mop  and  a 
grease-cutting  cleaner.  Wash  the  walls 
from  bottom  up.  In  this  way  you  will  keep 
water  from  running  down  the  soiled  sur- 
face, leaving  hard-to-remove  streaks. 

Paneled  walls  are  not  hard  to  clean.  Use 
a  clean-up  wax  on  them,  to  save  time  and 
energy.  Use  both  hands  whenever  possible 
to  speed  work  along.  Balance  the  move- 
ments of  your  hands  by  using  motions  that 
are  equal  and  opposite  in  direction.  For 
nonwashable  wallpapers,  use  a  doughy 
cleaner  to  lift  off  the  dust  and  dirt.  You 
can  get  the  kind  you  want  at  your  local 
store.  Doors  look  good  and  feel  clean  when 
washed  with  ammonia-diluted  water. 

Windows  often  present  a  problem.  To 
wash  the  less  soiled  inside  first  is  a  time- 
saver.  Use  your  favorite  window  cleaner 
and  wipe  with  paper  towels  for  a  neat  job. 

22 


Then  throw  the  used  towels  away.  There 
is  no  lint,  no  mess!  Wax  the  window  sills 
to  protect  them  from  water  spotting. 
Waxed  sills  are  easier  to  clean  and  the 
wax  preserves  the  wood.  Like  windows, 
radiators  need  a  good  brushing  and  clean- 
ing. A  long  bottle  brush  is  ideal  for  this 
cleaning  operation. 

Do  the  floor  last.  Hardwood  floors  may 
be  dry-cleaned  and  waxed  at  one  time  with 
liquid  polishing  wax.  Never  use  water  on 
hardwood  floors.  Use  a  paste  or  a  liquid- 
polishing  wax.  They  dry-clean  the  wood 
while  waxing.  Two  thin  coats  of  wax  are 
better  than  one  thick  coat.  Use  fine  steel 
wool  or  a  discarded  toothbrush  or  some 
other  brush  for  stubborn  hard-to-get-at 
spots.  An  electric  polisher  will  save  back- 
breaking  work.  You  may  be  able  to  rent 
a  unit,  if  you  cannot  afford  to  buy  one. 
For  floors  that  are  discolored  or  that  have 
a  build-up  of  wax,  use  a  wax  remover,  but, 
for  the  best  results,  always  follow  the  di- 
rections on  the  container. 

Take  care  how  you  clean  your  furniture. 
Use  liquid  wax  for  any  furniture  that  has 
a  waxed  surface  and  oil  polish  for  the  oiled 
surfaces.  Even  though  wax  can  be  placed 
on  an  oiled  surface,  you  cannot  put  oil  on 
a  waxed  surface  without  making  an  awful 
mess  of  things.  For  new  furniture  try  us- 
ing a  little  ammonia  in  water.  But  for  old 
furniture  use  a  small  amount  of  furniture 
polish  and  a  little  ammonia  in  a  half  pan 
of  warm  water.  Afterward  rub  off  any  ex- 
cess oiliness  with  a  soft,  dry  cloth.  Never 
use  floor  wax  on  furniture.  If  you  want 
a  subdued  sheen  on  your  furniture,  use  a 
cream  or  a  paste  wax  and  not  a  liquid. 

Upholstered  furniture  should  be  vacu- 
umed and  shampooed.  As  for  slip  covers, 
have  them  either  washed  or  dry-cleaned 
and  repaired,  if  necessary.  This  can  be 
done  while  the  rug  is  being  cleaned  and 
the  room  is  being  prepared,  so  furniture 
that  is  put  back  will  likewise  be  cleaned. 

AWAKE! 


A  work  saver  is  to  dampen  men's  dis- 
carded socks  with  furniture  polish,  slip  one 
on  each  hand  and  use  both  hands  to  polish 
in  circular  motions.  Or  apply  self-polishing 
wax  with  one  and  wipe  with  the  other. 
Put  polish  or  wax  on  the  surface  of  the 
cloth  and  never  directly  on  the  furniture. 
After  spreading  it  thinly  with  the  cloth, 
polish  with  a  second  cloth,  preferably  of 
flannel. 

With  the  floors  done  and  the  furniture 
polished,  the  rug  can  be  brought  in  and 
the  room  refurnished.  Place  upholstered 
furniture  away  from  the  sunlight,  because 
the  sunlight  will  fade  the  fabric.  Also  keep 
furniture  away  from  radiators  and  win- 
dows, if  possible,  because  heat  will  weaken 
the  fabric  and  dust  and  rain  will  soil  or 
spot  it  A  change  of  curtains  or  drapes 
from  heavy  to  light,  from  warm  colors  to 
cool  greens  and  blues,  a  rearrangement  of 
furniture,  plants  and  pictures,  an  added 
scent,  a  bouquet  of  spring  flowers,  and  the 
room  will  take  on  a  freshness  and  beauty 
that  will  be  irresistible. 

Bathroom  and  Kitchen  Cleaning 

When  cleaning  your  bathroom,  place  a 
large  tray  across  the  sink  to  hold  bottles 
and  jars  while  you  clean  out  the  medicine 
cabinet.  Wash  the  shower  curtains  in  your 
washer  or  by  hand.  Use  warm  water  and 
a  detergent  or  soap  when  cleaning  tiles. 
A  sponge  or  a  plastic  pan  scourer  will 
help  remove  the  spots.  For  a  real  shine 
dry  the  tiles  with  a  soft  dry  cloth.  The 
scum  from  the  rubber  mat  can  be  removed 
by  using  a  damp,  soap-filled  steel-wool  pad. 

The  kitchen  should  also  be  dismantled 


completely.  Take  everything  out  and  clean 
thoroughly.  New  antistatic  polishers  or 
clean-up  waxes  are  worth  a  try  on  refrig- 
erators, ranges  and  small  appliances.  These 
cleaners  help  the  equipment  to  resist 
grease,  food,  finger  stains  and  keep  items 
sparkling.  Gas-burner  portholes  can  be 
cleaned  with  a  darning  needle.  To  keep 
from  pricking  yourself,  stick  the  needle 
into  a  cork.  Scrub  the  burners  with  a  stiff 
brush.  Use  sudsy  water,  rinse  and  dry.  For 
electric  ranges,  keep  the  reflectors  shiny 
clean  for  maximum  efficiency.  Use  a  scour- 
ing pad  or  a  mild  cleanser,  rinse  and  dry. 

This  is  also  a  good  time  to  check  for  re- 
pairs. Look  for  damaged  plumbing  lines, 
loose  tiles,  electrical  cords  that  need  re- 
pairing or  replacing.  To  clean  an  electrical 
cord,  disconnect  it  first,  then  draw  it 
through  a  soap  sponge.  Let  it  dry  com- 
pletely before  plugging  it  in. 

Watch  your  pace.  Take  a  coffee  break 
when  cleaning  rooms  and  miss  a  day  be- 
tween large  rooms.  Sit  to  do  jobs  concen- 
trated in  one  area,  such  as  dusting  books, 
cleaning  drawers,  and  so  forth.  Sitting  is 
an  energy  saver.  Music  in  the  background 
also  often  helps  to  relax  the  nerves  and 
keeps  the  mind  off  the  burden.  When,  tired 
it  may  be  wise  to  lie  down  for  a  few  min- 
utes. Place  a  wet  washcloth  across  the 
closed  eyelids.  This,  too,  is  restful. 

But  nothing  seems  to  perk  up  the  weary 
soul  as  much  as  a  word  of  appreciation 
from  an  understanding  husband.  It  does 
marvels  to  ease  the  pain  of  spring  cleaning 
and,  what's  more,  it  makes  the  life  of  a 
housewife  worth  living. 


*W* 


MARCH  8,  19G1 


23 


COLOMBIA'S 


MJ 


"ANY  world  travel- 
ers agree  that  Me- 
dellin  is  one  city  that 
has  almost  everything:  natural  beauty,  un- 
excelled climate,  excellent  business  oppor- 
tunities and  plenty  of  color  and  enchant- 
ment. 

Over  the  past  four  hundred  years  Me- 
dellin  has  kept  its  original  charm  and,  if 
anything,    is    even    more    intriguing    to 
twentieth-century  visitors  than  it  was  to 
the  Spanish  conquistadors.  It  has  been  said 
that  when  those  conquistadors  came  to  the 
South  American  continent,  "first  they 
fell  upon  their  knees,  and  then  they  fell 
upon  the  Indians."  The  history  of  the 
city  of  Medellin  in  Colombia  confirms 
that  statement. 

Two  things  lured  those  early  conquerors 
across  towering  ranges  of  the  Andes  to  the 
well-protected  valley  in  which  Medellin  is 
situated.  Here  was  a  place  that  had  almost 
everything  the  Spanish  wanted.  It  had  gold 
to  take,  whether  the  owners  liked  it  or 
not;  and  it  had  Indians  whom  the  Span- 
iards wanted  to  convert  to  another  form 
of  worship — again,  whether  they  liked  it 
or  not. 

The  first  European  eyes  to  gaze  upon 
this  beautiful  valley  were  those  of  the 
Spaniard  Jerome  Louis  Tijelo,  who,  with 
his  troop  of  soldiers,  came  in  1541  to  re- 
lieve the  Indians  of  their  gold  and  also  to 
convince  them  of  their  need  of  a  different 
religion.  More  than  a  hundred  years  were 
to  pass  before  anything  was  done  in  the 
way  of  settling  the  valley.  Its  natural  beau- 
ty apparently  did  not  tempt  the  first  Span- 
iards to  stay  and  build  homes,  for  they 
soon  pressed  on  to  other  regions  in  their 
search  for  gold. 
The  year  1675  saw  a  change.  A  new 

24 


cifa  #£  \me$a/ztm&?i£ 


By  "Awakel"  correspondent 
in  Colombia 

wave  of  settlers  arrived  from  Spain,  this 
time  not  drawn  by  the  lure  of  gold  but  by 
their  desire  to  be  isolated.  They  found  this 
valley  with  its  natural  barrier  of  precipi- 
tous mountains  very  much  to  their  liking. 
The  city  of  Medellin,  founded  that  year, 
was  named  in  honor  of  the  Count  of  Me- 
dellin in  Spain. 

Those  first  settlers  had  large  families 
and  they  worked  the  land  themselves,  re- 
fusing to  use  Negro  slave  labor,  as  was 
the  practice  in  other  regions.  From  that 
day  to  this  the  growth  of  the  city  has  not 
been  due  to  immigration,  for  there  has 
been  very  little  of  that,  but  it  has  been  due 
to  a  natural  increase  in  population.  Now 
with  its  550,000  inhabitants,  Medellin  is 
Colombia's  second  city,  following  the  capi- 
tal city  of  Bogota,  in  size  as  well  as  in  na- 
tional importance. 

Beauty  and  Climate 

That  formidable  barrier  of  encircling 
mountains  that  attracted  the  first  perma- 

AWAKEt 


nent  settlers  to  this  spot  has  been  removed, 
in  our  day,  by  modern  air  travel.  As  a  re- 
sult, many  persons  have  visited  Medellin 
in  recent  years,  a  large  number  of  them 
feeling  that  here  is  a  city  with  almost 
everything.  Few  cities  in  the  world  can 
begin  to  match  the  rugged  grandeur  of  the 
mountains  that  completely  surround  Me- 
dellin. These  are  not  the  barren,  rocky  and 
unproductive  mountains  that  make  one 
long  to  see  something  growing,  but  a  lus- 
cious green  they  are,  heavily  grassed  and 
wooded,  with  their  summits  often  lost  to 
sight  in  the  clouds. 

As  if  in  an  effort  to  match  the  beauty 
of  its  setting,  the  city  of  Medellin  itself 
possesses  more  than  usual  attractiveness. 
From  the  typical  Spanish  architecture  of 
its  residences  with  their  open  interior  pa- 
tios and  red  tile  roofs  to  the  bright  mod- 
ern buildings  that  comprise  the  downtown 
section,  Medellin  is  filled  to  overflowing 
with  charm.  With  the  usual  Spanish  eye 
toward  beauty,  even  the  wide  avenues  are 
laid  out  in  pleasantly  winding  patterns  in- 
stead of  the  cold  and  practical  straight 
lines  and  blocks  of  most  cities.  Some  of 
these  avenues  are  just  one  long  park,  with 
towering  trees  supplying  abundant  shade, 
and  upon  which  wild  orchids  grow  in  pro- 
fusion. On  the  islands  that  separate  the 
four  lanes  of  many  avenues  are  found 
arbor-covered  benches  every  fifty  feet. 

The  people  of  Medellin  are  naturally 
proud  of  their  city,  and  so  seem  to  be  more 
than  willing  to  pay  for  an  army  of  street 
sweepers  to  keep  the  streets  free  of  litter. 
By  any  standards  in  the  world,  this  is  a 
clean  city.  Beauty?  Medellin  has  it. 

It  also  has  a  most  refreshing  climate, 
for  climate  in  Colombia  is  a  matter  of  al- 
titude, not  of  seasons.  So  the  5,300-foot 
altitude  of  the  city  puts  it  quite  high  in 
the  climate  of  the  Temperate  Zone,  there 
being  an  average  temperature  of  70  de- 
grees, like  that  of  an  English  summer  day 


or  like  a  beautiful  spring  day  in  Paris. 

That  temperature  does  not  vary  more  than 
three  degrees  the  year  around,  on  the  av- 
erage. 

Business  Appeal 

To  many,  however,  beauty  is  a  minor 
consideration;  and  even  an  excellent  cli- 
mate takes  second  place  to  making  a  live- 
lihood. It  must  be  admitted  that  Medellin 
has  business  appeal.  Because  of  its  central 
location  in  the  country,  and  because  of  the 
abundance  of  natural  resources  and  a  good 
supply  of  labor,  many  industries  have 
sprung  up  in  recent  years.  It  is  by  no  means 
exaggeration  to  say  that  it  is  the  indus- 
trial capital  of  the  country,  a  city  seething 
with  life  and  energy.  The  city  produces 
more  than  80  percent  of  the  textile  output 
of  the  country.  There  are  also  major  ce- 
ment, glass,  tile,  chocolate  and  steel  plants, 
rimming  the  city  in  the  industrial  section. 
Many  foreign  organizations  find  Medellin 
the  ideal  location  for  their  Colombian 
branch,  for  air  travel  makes  it  the  hub  of 
the  country. 

Where  there  is  industry,  of  course,  mon- 
ey is  seldom  far  away.  So  it  is  no  surprise 
to  find  that  Medellin  is  the  financial  focal 
point  in  the  nation.  Banks  are  found  in  its 
downtown  section  that  represent  the  in- 
terests of  many  nations,  such  as  Canada, 
Britain,  the  United  States,  France  and 
Italy. 

Colorful  Customs 

Good  business  and  favorable  financial 
conditions  may  be  interesting  to  one  think- 
ing of  living  permanently  in  Medellin,  but 
to  the  casual  visitor,  the  big  interest  is  the 
color  of  the  city.  This  is  one  place  long  re- 
membered for  its  colorful  life  and  customs. 

The  city's  buses,  for  example,  are  not 
all  painted  one  monotonous  color.  More 
than  one  bus  is  painted  yellow,  orange, 
green,  blue,  black  and  pink!  One  suspects 


MARCH  8,  19S1 


25 


that  this  wild  color  scheme  is  more  out  of 
consideration  for  safety  than  for  beauty. 
Pedestrians  need  all  the  warning  they  can 
get  to  avoid  becoming  an  accident  statistic, 
and  who  could  miss  seeing  one  of  these 
multicolored  buses  speeding  down  the 
strest?  Skilled  drivers  weave  through  traf- 
fic as  if  their  very  life 
depended  on  shaving 
minutes  off  their  pre- 
cious record  run!  At 
least  that  is  the  way 
it  appears  to  a  stran- 
ger. In  reality,  the 
drivers  are  expert, 
seldom  becoming  involved  in  traffic  acci- 
dents. Anyway,  it  costs  only  the  equivalent 
of  two  American  cents  to  go  anywhere  in 
the  city,  so  who  can  complain? 

To  become  personally  acquainted  with 
another  of  the  city's  colorful  customs,  one 
would  have  to  lose  a  little  sleep.  It  is  cus- 
tomary to  serenade  one's  sweetheart  with 
a  quartet  of  professional  troubadours. 
Three  o'clock  in  the  morning  is  the  hour 
usually  selected  because  all  the  city  is 
quiet  then,  and  the  still,  cool  night  can  be 
depended  upon  to  lend  its  charm.  In  the 
still  of  the  night  their  singing  can  be  heard 
for  quite  some  distance,  and  many  doubt 
that  more  enchanting  music  could  be 
heard  anywhere  on  earth. 

Almost  like  paradise?  Well,  not  quite 
that.  True,  Medellin  has  many  attractions, 
but  it  also  shares  the  sorrows  of  cities  the 
world  over.  Exactly  as  in  your  city,  there 


IN  THE  NEXT  ISSUE 

Be  Moderate   in   ATI   Things. 

Obeying  the   Two   Great  Commandments 

for    Lite. 
Life   in  a   Matriarchal  Society. 
The  Sensitive  Sense  of  Smell. 
The   Oil   Situation. 


is  sickness,  unhappiness  and  delinquency 
here.  So,  like  thoughtful  people  in  all  na- 
tions, many  citizens  of  this  city  are  longing 
for  a  better  future.  They  realize  their  city 
lacks  something. 

It  was  for  this  reason  that  in  195S,  per- 
haps for  the  first  time  in  four  long  cen- 
turies, a  group  of  peo- 
ple came  to  Medellin, 
not  to  take  what  the 
city  had  to  offer 
them,  not  to  exploit 
its  citizens,  not  to 
take  advantage  of  its 
business  opportuni- 
ties, not  even  merely  to  enjoy  the  natural 
beauties  that  are  so  abundant  here,  but  to 
offer  the  city's  inhabitants  what  they 
lacked — a  knowledge  of  God's  righteous 
new  world.  Just  a  few  years  ago  virtually 
no  one  here  was  aware  of  the  nearness  of 
the  time  for  establishing  perfect  conditions 
earth-wide  under  the  kingdom  of  heaven. 
Now,  however,  an  energetic  congregation 
of  Jehovah's  witnesses,  composed  in  part  of 
the  descendants  of  the  early  Indian  settlers 
of  this  valley  and  of  the  Spanish  conquista- 
dors, is  very  busy  proclaiming  "this  good 
news  of  the  kingdom." 

Many  people  of  Medellin  are  finding  this 
announcement  far  more  beautiful  to  their 
ears  than  the  enchanting  harmonies  of  the 
troubadours  that  sing  in  their  streets,  and 
far  more  precious  than  the  yellow  gold  of 
the  surrounding  mountains  that  lured  men 
here  four  hundred  years  ago. 


JQeligfoui  @omjaiacencu Who  S/i  to  Mama? 

Christendom's  religions  today  lack  the  fiery  zeal  of  first-century  Christianity,  The 
book,  ApologMique,  published  under  the  direction  of  Catholic  priest  Nedoncelle, 
and  carrying  the  Catholic  Nihil  Obstat  and  Imprimatur,  advances  the  reason  why. 
It  says  that  "believers  are  largely  to  blame  for  the  lack  of  uneasiness  in  this 
modern  world;  Christian  action  and  psychology  depend  too  much  on  selfish  and 
natural  motives;  we  no  longer  astonish  people  the  way  the  early  Christians  did; 
we  are  not  sufficiently  sowers  of  uneasiness  and  we  shall  have  to  answer  for  the 
multitudes  of  apathetic  people." 


26 


AWAKE/ 


AMONG  the  things  Jesus  Christ  told  his 
eleven  apostles  in  an  upper  room  in 
Jerusalem  on  the  night  of  his  betrayal  was : 
"In  the  world  you  will  have  tribulation, 
but  cheer  up!  I  have  conquered  the  world." 
And  the  apostle  John,  who  lovingly  record- 
ed those  words  for  us,  said:  "This  is  the 
conquest  that  has  conquered  the  world,  our 
faith."— John  16:33;  1  John  5:4. 

World  conquerors  there  have  been  in 
times  past;  such  as  Nebuchadnezzar,  noted 
for  his  victories  at  Carchemish,  Tyre  and 
Jerusalem,  who  made  Babylon  the  third 
world  power.  There  was  "Cyrus,  the  great- 
est Oriental  conqueror  known  in  history," 
according  to  Beacon  Lights  of  History, 
by  Lord.  There  was  Alexander  the  Great, 
who  is  said  to  have  wept  for  more  worlds 
to  conquer.  And  there  was  Constantine  the 
Great,  who  waded  through  seas  of  blood, 
wiping  out  his  five  peers  to  become  ruler 
of  the  Roman  world  power. 

While  God's  Word  assures  us  that  the 
resurrected  glorious  Jesus  Christ,  together 
with  his  heavenly  armies,  will  conquer  this 
world  by  destroying  it  at  Armageddon,  cer- 
tain it  is  that  neither  Jesus  Christ  when 
on  earth,  nor  his  followers  since,  have  con- 
quered the  world  in  the  sense  that  these 
worldly  rulers  conquered  it. — Rev.  16:14, 
16;  19:11,  19-21. 

Then  how  did  Jesus  Christ  while  a  hu- 
man conquer  the  world,  and  how  can  it  be 
said  that  his  imperfect  human  followers 
are  able  to  conquer  the  world?  Jesus,  as 


well  as  his  apostle  John,  in  the  texts  above 
quoted  doubtless  had  in  mind,  not  a  world 
made  up  of  an  invisible  heavens  and  a  vis- 
ible earth,  such  as  the  apostle  Peter  men- 
tions in  the  third  chapter  of  his  second  let- 
ter, but  rather  the  world  of  people  or  man- 
kind arranged  in  a  certain  order  and  con- 
cerning which  God  showed  a  general  love 
by  sending  his  only-begotten  Son  to  die  for 
it.  It  is  the  world  that  "is  lying  in  the 
power  of  the  wicked  one,"  Satan  the  Devil. 
It  is  the  same  world  concerning  which  we 
are  counseled:  "Take  your  stand  against 
him  [the  Devil],  solid  in  the  faith,  know- 
ing that  the  same  things  in  the  way  of  suf- 
ferings are  being  accomplished  in  the  entire 
association  of  your  brothers  in  the  world." 
—1  John  5:19;  1  Pet.  5:9. 

This  world  of  mankind  is  an  unclean 
world  that  hates  Christians.  That  is  why 
Christians  are  spoken  of  as  "having  es- 
caped from  the  defilements  of  the  world 
by  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  Lord  and 
Savior  Jesus  Christ."  And  Jesus  told  his 
followers:  "If  the  world  hates  you,  you 
know  that  it  has  hated  me  before  it  hated 
you.  If  you  were  part  of  the- world,  the 
world  would  be  fond  of  what  is  its  own. 
Now  because  you  are  no  part  of  the  world, 
...  on  this  account  the  world  hates  you." 
—2  Pet.  2:20;  John  15:17-19. 

Dominating  this  world,  and  part  of  it, 
are  big  business,  commerce  or  greedy 
money-making,  big  politics  or  ruling  pow- 
er and  worldly  false  religion.  These  in  par- 
ticular a  Christian  must  conquer  by  not 
letting  them  swerve  him  from  doing  God's 
will.  God's  will  for  Jesus  was  to  lead  a  per- 
fect life,  bear  witness  to  the  truth  and  give 
his  life  a  ransom  for  many.  He  conquered 
the  world  by  not  letting  its  money-making 
or  commerce  sidetrack  him,  by  rejecting 
all  opportunities  for  gainir/g  political  pow- 
er and  by  refusing  to  make  common  cause 
with  false  religion  but,  instead,  fearlessly 
exposing  its  hypocrisy.  Yes,  Jesus  con- 


MARCH  S,  1961 


27 


quered  Satan's  world  in  that  he  did  not 
let  it  cause  him  to  stoop  to  its  tactics:  "He 

committed  no  sin,  nor  was  deceit  found  in 
his  mouth.  When  he  was  being  reviled,  he 
did  not  go  to  reviling  in  return.  When  he 
was  suffering,  he  did  not  go  to  threatening, 
but  kept  on  committing  himself  to  the  one 
who  judges  righteously."— 1  Pet.  2:22,  23. 
The  same  was  true  of  Jesus'  apostles  arfd 
other  early  disciples.  They  also  followed 
a  course  of  integrity-keeping  as  regards 
right   conduct   and   fulfilling  their  com- 
mission to  make  known  God's  name,  Word 
and  kingdom.  All  that  this  world  had  to 
offer  they  considered  as  "a  lot  of  refuse." 
When  the  world,  as  represented  by  the 
Jewish  hierarchy,  commanded  them  to  stop 
preaching,  they  replied:   "We  must  obey 
God  as  ruler  rather  than  men."  They  too 
refused  to  let  this  world  make  them  over 
to  its  image:    "Being  reviled,  we  bless; 
when  being  persecuted,  we  bear  up;  when 
being  defamed,  we  entreat;  we  have  be- 
come as  the  refuse  of  the  world."  They  did 
not  let  the  world  conquer  them,  but  they 
conquered   the   world.    Thus   Paul   could 
write  at  the  close  of  his  ministry:  "I  have 
fought  the  right  fight,  I  havft  run  the 
course  to  the  finish,  I  have  observed  the 
faith.  From  this  time  on  there  is  reserved 
for  me  the  crown  of  righteousness." — Phil, 
3:8;  Acts  5:29;  1  Cor.  4:12,  13;  2  Tim. 
4:7,  S. 

All  who  profess  to  be  Christians  today 
are  obligated  to  follow  a  like  course  of  ac- 
tion and  must  do  so  if  they  would  receive 
God's  approval  and  reward  of  everlasting 
life.  Having  taken  in  basic  knowledge,  re- 
pented and  converted  and  dedicated  them- 
selves to  the  doing  of  God's  will,  they  must 
heed  the  admonition:  "Present  your  bodies 
a  sacrifice  living,  holy,  acceptable  to  God, 
a  sacred  service  with  your  power  of  reason. 
And  quit  being  fashioned  after  this  system 
of  things";  that  is,  do  not  give  in  or  yield 


to  the  world's  temptations  or  pressures, 
"but  be  transformed  by  making  your  mind 
over,  that  you  may  prove  to  yourselves  the 
good  and  acceptable  and  complete  will  of 
God."— Rom.  12:1,  2. 

That  means  that  Christians  must  "keep 
on  making  sure  of  what  is  acceptable  to 
the  Lord;  and  quit  sharing  with  [the 
world]  in  the  unfruitful  works  which  be- 
long to  the  darkness,  but,  rather,  even  be 
reproving  them,  for  the  things  that  take 
place  in  secret  by  them  it  is  shameful  even 
to  relate."  In  this  way  they  conquer  the 
world.  They  must  also  conquer  it  in  that 
they  do  not  love  "either  the  world  or  the 
things  in  the  world,"  and  do  not  permit 
its  "desire  of  the  flesh  and  the  desire  of 
the  eyes  and  the  showy  display  of  one's 
means  of  life"  to  detract  them  from  their 
ordination  to  preach  'this  good  news  of  the 
Kingdom  in  all  the  world  for  the  purpose 
of  a  witness  to  all  the  nations.'  And  they 
must  also  conquer  it  by  rendering  "evil  for 
evil  to  no  one."— Eph.  5:10-12;  1  John  2: 
15,  16;  Matt.  24:14;  Rom.  12:17. 

What  is  "the  conquest  that  has  con- 
quered the  world"  of  Satan?  "Our  faith," 
the  apostle  John  tells  us.  To  have  strong 
faith  we  need  to  study  God's  Word  dili- 
gently. In  it  are  contained  commands  to 
have  faith,  reasons  for  having  faith  and 
fine  examples  of  faith.  But  our  faith  will 
not  grow  strong  unless  we  understand  what 
we  read,  and  to  this  end  God  has  provided 
Bible-study  aids  and  a  teaching  organiza- 
tion known  as  the  New  World  society  of 
Jehovah's  witnesses,  which  stands  ready  to 
help  all  those  who  wish  to  strengthen  their 
faith.  Further,  God's  holy  spirit  is  needed 
if  we  would  understand  God's  Word  and 
grow  strong  in  faith.  And  finally,  one  may 
not  overlook  prayer,  for  whoever  asks  in 
faith  will  receive.  With  such  help  we  can 
conquer  the  world. — Luke  17:5,  6. 


28 


AWAKE! 


^    VVATCH!f^G 

1      1^   ^H 


WORLD 


Elsenhower  Out,  Kennedy  In 

<§>  On  January  17  Dwight  D. 
Eisenhower,  who  was  the  old- 
est president  of  the  United 
States,  gave  a  televised  ad- 
dress of  farewell  to  the  Amer- 
ican people.  Three  days  later 
John  Fitzgerald  Kennedy,  the 
youngest  man  ever  elected  to 
the  presidency,  was  sworn  in 
by  Chief  Justice  Earl  Warren 
as  the  thirty- fifth  president  of 
the  United  States. 

Cost  of  Trip  to  the  Moon 

4&  On  January  17  at  the  sev- 
enth annual  meeting  of  the 
American  Astronautical  So- 
ciety three  space  experts  esti- 
mated  that  to  make  the  first 
trip  to  the  moon,  stay  eight 
or  ten  days,  and  return  to  the 
earth  would  cost  about  $3,068,- 
000,000. 

Portuguese  Ship  Seized 

4>  On  January  23  the  Portu- 
guese luxury  liner  Santa  Ma- 
ria, carrying  600  passengers 
and  300  crew  members,  was 
taken  over  in  a  gun  and  gre- 
nade battle  by  a  band  of  con- 
spirators from  among  the  pas- 
sengers. A  spokesman  for  Por- 
tugal's Premier  Antonio  de 
Oliveira  Salazar  called  the  at- 
tack a  "return  to  the  barbarian 
practices  that  made  the  Carib- 
bean Sea  an  area  of  dishonor," 
and  the  conspirators,  a  "gang 
of  pirates."  Henrique  M.  Gal- 
vao,  the  rebels'  leader,  in  a 
message  to  the  National  Broad- 

MABCH  8,  1961 


casting  Company  said:  "We 
are  Portuguese  politicians  in  a 
Portuguese  ship,  fighting  for 
the  liberty  of  our  homeland, 
and  we  are  not  and  will  not 
be  confused  with  pirates," 

Gambling  Profits  Build  Church 

4>  On  January  4  Catholic 
priest  R.  Steele  reported  that 
the  Roman  Catholic  church  at 
Torquay,  Australia,  was  partly 
paid  for  with  the  profits  made 
from  gambling  on  spinning 
wheels  and  raffles  at  a  beach 
carnival.  Mr.  Steele  commented 
on  gambling:  "If  you  believe 
in  the  right  to  private  proper- 
ty, then  you  must  accept  a 
person's  right  to  gamble — to 
spend  that  property  as  he 
wishes,  provided  it  does  not 
hurt  anyone  else." 

Radar  Tower  Collapses 

^  On  January  16  an  Air  Force 
radar  tower  serving  as  a  mis- 
sile warning  station  collapsed 
into  the  Atlantic  Ocean  during 
a  raging  storm,  killing  all 
twenty-eight  on  it.  The  tower 
was  located  eighty  miles  south- 
east of  New  York. 

TV  Violence  Breeds  Violence 

<$>  Dr.  Fredric  Wertham,  a 
leading  psychiatrist,  warned 
that  violence  in  fiction  can  set 
off  violence  in  life.  The  tele- 
vision industry  has  helped  pro- 
duce what  Dr.  Wertham  called 
a  "cult  of  violence."  He  said 


that  the  U.S.  has  "been  condi- 
tioned to  an  acceptance  of  vio- 
lence as  no  civilized  nation 
has  ever  been  before"  and  that 
"if  democracy  does  not  do  away 
with  violence  violence  may  do 
away  with  democracy." 

Telephone  Conversations 

#  T  h  e  American  Telephone 
and  Telegraph  Company  pre- 
sented statistics  revealing  that, 
on  an  average,  every  man, 
woman  and  child  in  the  U.S. 
had  496  telephone  conversa- 
tions in  1959,  an  increase  of 
23.6  calls  per  person  over  the 
previous  year.  Canadians,  how- 
ever, proved  to  be  much  more 
talkative,  recording  an  aver- 
age of  530  conversations  per 
person,  as  compared  to  511  for 
the  year  before. 

Taxes  Increased  In  I960 

<$■  The  Commerce  Clearing 
House  said  in  its  annual  fed- 
eral tax  review  that  in  1960 
U.S.  taxpayers  laid  out  a 
record-breaking  $91,775,000,000 
.  for  support  of  the  government, 
representing  an  unprecedented 
peace-time  increase  of  $12  bil- 
lion. The  average  tax  load  per 
individual  was  said  to  be  $508.- 
37,  an  increase  of  $57.80  per 
person. 

Underwater  Colonies  Proposed 

<§>  On  January  18  a  space  scien- 
tist, Dandridge  M.  Cole,  pro- 
posed to  an  annual  meeting  of 
the  American  Astronautical  So- 
ciety in  Dallas,  Texas,  the  es- 
tablishing of  undersea  colonies 
in  order  to  survive  a  nuclear 
war.  He  said  that  temporary 
blast  and  fallout  shelters 
would  be  inadequate.  "If  an 
all-out  nuclear  war  should  be 
fought  in  say  1970,  the  survi- 
vors would  emerge  from  their 
shelters  to  find  themselves  on 
an  alien  planet  almost  as  in- 
hospitable as  the  moon,  and 
perhaps  even  more  inimical  to 
life  than  Mars,"  he  explained. 
Cole  proposed  having  a  pres- 
surized sphere  around  thirty 
or  forty  feet  in  diameter  made 
of  transparent  plastic  or  of 
steel  with  many  windows- 

29 


These  underwater  hideaways 
would  contain  living  quarters, 
laboratories,  dining  and  recrea- 
tion areas. 

Church  Attendance  Encouraged 

#  The  members  of  the  Con- 
y e r s,  Georgia,  Methodist 
Church  are  being  given  green 
or  yellow  "trading"  stamps  for 
each  attendance  aj:  church. 
After  Easter,  persons  with  the 
most  stamps  will  be  treated 
to  a  picnic  outing  at  Warm 
Springs,  Georgia. 

Illiteracy  In  Greece 

^  Of  a  population  of  eight 
million  Greece  has  an  esti- 
mated 1.5  to  2  million  persons 
that  are  illiterate.  Nearly  all 
of  these  are  over  twenty  years 
of  age  and  live  in  the  country. 
A  major  campaign  is  under 
way  to  help  these  to  read  and 
write  by  establishing  night 
schools  and  by  training  teach- 
ers for  these  classes. 

Statistics  on  Crime 

<&  The  Federal  Bureau  of  In- 
vestigation estimates  that  in 
the  United  States  in  1959  for 
every  100  serious  crimes  com- 
mitted there  were  only  four- 
teen persons  who  were  con- 
victed. Since  that  means  that 
for  every  seven  crimes  com- 
mitted only  one  person  is  con- 
victed, it  has  been  said  that 
the  good  chance  of  not  being 
caught  is  one  reason  for  the 
increase  of  crime. 

Steps  to  "Sainthood" 

#  A  Vatican  tribunal  is  ex- 
amining proposals  to  make 
Euphrasie  Bar  bier,  a  French 
nun  who  died  in  Britain  sixty- 
seven  years  ago,  a  "saint"  of 
the  Roman  Catholic  Church. 
According  to  Catholic  priest 
Leonard  Whatmore,  over  400 
"favors"  have  been  granted 
sick  persons  who  have  prayed 
to  her.  On  one  occasion,  it  is 
claimed,  a  piece  of  paper  from 
a  letter  written  by  Euphrasie 
was  pinned  to  the  nightgown 
of  a  nun  dying  of  cholera,  and 
within  minutes  she  recovered. 
Citing  from  a  file  of  her  life 

30 


that  contains  evidence  that  is 
believed  will  prove  Euphrasie 
qualifies  for  "sainthood,"  priest 
Whatmore  said:  "She  submit- 
ted herself  to  a  daily  discipline 
of  between  400  and  500  strokes 
of  the  lash,  inflicted  by  her- 
self, in  her  cell.  She  embarked 
upon  extraordinary  penances, 
scourging  herself  to  blood." 

Bible  on  life  Expectancy 

#  Sir  John  Charles,  Britain's 
recently  retired  Chief  Medical 
Officer,  Ministry  of  Health, 
said  that  the  psalmist  was 
right  when  he  put  man's  aver- 
age life  span  at  seventy  years. 
(Fs.  90:10)  Since  1954  the  av- 
erage life  expectancy  at  birth 
in  Britain  has  remained  nearly 
the  same— sixty-eight  years 
for  men  and  seventy-four  for 
women. 

Steaks  Tested  on  Hoof 

^  Professor  J.  R,  Stouffer  of 
New  York  State  College  of  Ag- 
riculture  at  Cornell  University 
reports  that  he  has  developed 
a  device  that  bounces  high- 
frequency  sound  waves  off  the 
layers  of  fat  and  muscle  of 
live  animals.  This,  he  says,  en- 
ables one  to  determine  how 
good  a  steak  is  while  still  on 
the  hoot 

Fines  for  Ignoring  Anthem 

<§>  Under  the  Singapore  State 
Arms  Flag  and  National  An- 
them Rules,  1960,  anyone  who 
does  not  stand  during  the  play- 
ing of  Singapore's  national  an- 
them can*  be  fined  up  to  $336. 
According  to  Lee  Kuan  Yew, 
prime  minister  of  Singapore, 
the  people  got  to  ignoring  the 
British  national  anthem  dur- 
ing the  British  rule. 

The  Most  Annoying  Noise 

^  At  a  meeting  of  the  Royal 
Society  of  Health  in  London 
Dr.  B,  Wheeler  Robinson  de- 
scribed the  most  annoying 
noise  as  that  being  made  by 
scraping  a  saucepan  with  a 
knife.  He  illustrated  by  play- 
ing a  recording  of  the  noise 
as  compared  to  other  objec- 
tionable noises. 


New  Archbishop 

#  The  Archbishop  of  Canter- 
bury, Dr.  Geoffrey  Fisher,  will 
retire  this  May  31  in  favor  of 
Arthur  Michael  Ramsey,  who 
will  become  the  100th  Arch- 
bishop of  Canterbury. 

Negro  Population  of 

Washington,  D.C. 

<§>  Of  Washington,  D.C.'s,  total 
population  of  763,956,  53.9  per- 
cent or  411,737  are  Negroes, 
according  to  the  1960  count. 
Ten  years  ago  the  United 
States  capital  had  802,200  in- 
habitants, but  only  270,400  or 
34  percent  were  nonwhites. 

Airborne  Alert 

#  On  January  18  General 
Thomas  S.  Power,  chief  of  the 
Strategic  Air  Command,  an- 
nounced  a  program  for  a 
twenty-four-hour  airborne 
alert.  This  means  that  some  of 
the  3,000  SAC  bombers  will  be 
in  the  air  at  all  times  to  pro- 
tect the  U.S.  from  possible  at- 
tack. 

Time  Spent  Watching  TV 

<§>  A  study  made  by  Paul  Wit- 
ty of  Northwestern  University 
of  2,000  pupils  and  their  par- 
ents of  the  Chicago  area  re- 
vealed that,  on  the  aveVage, 
elementary  school  children 
spend  21  hours  weekly  before 
the  TV  screen,  high  school  stu- 
dents  14  hours  and  parents  av- 
erage 20  hours  a  week. 

Effects  of  Wartime  Syphilis 

#  An  increase  of  general  pa- 
ralysis of  the  insane,  or  pare- 
sis, attributed  to  cases  of  syph- 
ilis contracted  during  World 
War  II,  has  been  reported  by 
doctors  of  the  North  Middlesex 
Hospital,  London.  In  a  report 
in  the  British  Medical  Journal, 
January  7,  1961,  Drs.  S.  Bock- 
ner  and  N.  Coltart  conclude: 
"It  is  now  15  years  since  the 
193945  war  ended,  about  the 
correct  time  interval  for  the 
appearance  of  G.P.I,  from 
syphilis  contracted  during  the 
war." 

AWAKEI 


Weapons  Blake  life  Insecure 

#■  In  a  speech  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  Wisconsin,  New  York 
University  Professor  Charles 
A.  Seipmann  said  that  "we  are 
in  very  great  trouble,  and  very 
great  danger."  He  asserted: 
"We  do  not  have  an  assured 
life  expectancy  beyond  one 
thousand  breaths — which  is  the 
time  it  takes  for  one  of  the 
(Russian)  guided  missiles  to 
get  from  Point  A  to  Point  B 
at  any  place  on  the  face  of  the 
earth."  Indicating  the  United 
States  potential  lor  causing 
destruction,  atomic  scientist 
Dr.  Ralph  E.  Lapp  estimated 
the  U.S.  has  about  1,000  hy- 
drogen bombs,  each  capable  of 
wiping  out  a  city,  and  enough 
of  a  nuclear  stockpile  to  make 
50,000  more  H-bombs. 

Catholics  Eat  Meat  Friday 

<$>  Friday,  January  20,  the  day 
of  John  Kennedy's  inaugura- 
tion, was  not  a  meatless  Fri- 
day for  Catholics  in  Washing- 
ton, D.C.  Patrick  A.  O'Boyle, 


archbishop  of  Washington, 
granted  special  dispensation  to 
all  Catholics  who  were  in  the 
archdiocese  on  Friday  so  they 
could  enjoy  the  festivities  of 
the  occasion. 

Unemployment  In  U.S. 
$>  On  January  13  the  U.S. 
Labor  Department  reported 
that  for  the  month  of  Decem- 
ber the  total  unemployed  in 
the  U.S.  rose  to  4,540,000.  This 
was  an  increase  of  509,000 
over  the  previous  month  and 
was  the  largest  number  unem- 
ployed for  any  December  since 
1940. 

World  War  IT  Still  Killing 

<§>  In  West  Germany  officials 
estimate  that  since  the  end  of 
the  war  several  thousand  peo- 
ple have  been  killed  by  explod- 
ing ammunition.  The  latest 
casualties  were  Ave  children 
who  were  seriously  wounded 
by  an  exploding  shell  while 
playing  in  the  woods  outside 
Limburg.  During  1960  it  is  re- 


ported that  removal  teams  un- 
earthed and  defused  380,000 
explosives  in  the  West  German 
state  of  Schleswig-Holstein. 

Russians  Release  U.S.  Fliers 

#  On  January  25  at  the  first 
news  conference  of. his  admin- 
istration as  president,  Kennedy 
announced  the  release  by  the 
Soviet  Union  of  the  two  U.S. 
airmen  shot  down  over  the 
Barents  Sea  and  hold  prisoner 
since  July  1,  1960.  Kennedy  al- 
so announced  his  continuance 
of  the  ban  on  flights  over  So- 
viet territory. 

U.S.  Jet  Spued  Record 

#  On  January  12  the  B-158 
Hustler  averaged  an  amazing 
1,200.194  miles  per  hour  in  a 
trip  over  a  621-mile  closed 
course.  This  broke  the  previous 
record  claimed  by  the  Soviet 
Union  of  639  miles  an  hour, 
set  in  October,  1959.  The  B-158 
Hustler  is  a  four-jet  bomber 
costing  $10,000,000. 


in  FAMILY  LIFE 


Keep  the  family  circle  unbroken. 
Read  and  study  the  Bible  as  a 
family  group.  "The  Watchlower" 
is  designed  to  help  you.  Send 
for  it.  Use  it  to  keep  your  family 
together. 

It  ii  a  companion  magazine  fo  "Awake!" 
Sam  8  size,  issued  an  alternate  weeks. 
Devoted  exclusively  to  Bible  subjects.  7/- 
(for  Australia  B/»;  for  South  AFrfca,  70c) 
for  one  year. 


WATCH   TOWER 


THE  RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W,   7 


I  am  enclosing  1/-  (for  Australia,  &/-;  for  South  Africa,  70c)  for  The  Watchtuwer  for  one  year's 
subscription.  For  mailing  the  coupon  I  am  to  receive  free  the  booklets  Gad'a  Kingdom  Rules — Is 
the  World's  End  Near?,  World  Conquest  Soon — by  God's  Kingdom  and  Healing  of  the  Nations 
Has  Drawn  Near. 


Name  . 
Post 
Town  . 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box   

Postal 
District  No County  . 


MARCH  8,  1961 


31 


l/o  beacon  liakfo  the  nig  lit  like  \jod&    tA/ord 

lanauaae  uou  can  understand 


in  Lanauaae  uou  can 

The  Bible  is  the  oldest  book,  written  long 
before  the  English  language  was  spoken. 
Furthermore,  though  written  by  many  men, 
it  has  but  one  Author.  This  is  God's  Book. 
For  that  reason  its  wisdom  outshines  all 
philosophy  of  men  and  elevates  our  thinking 
far  beyond  what  any  other  book  can  do. 
But  to  benefit  most  you  should  read  it  in  the 
language  of  today.  Send  now  for  this  excel- 
lent modern  English  version,  the  New  World 
Translation  of  the  Holy  Scriptures.  Now 
available  in  six  volumes. 


Each  volume  has  large  clear 
type,  copious  cross  references, 
helpful  footnotes,  maps  and 
drawings.  Vol.  I  of  the  Hebrew 
Scriptures  contains  Genesis  to 
Ruth;  Vol.  II,  First  Samuel 
to  Esther;  Vol.  Ill,  Job  to  The 
Song  of  Solomon;  Vol.  IV, 
Isaiah  to  Lamentations;  Vol. 
V,  Ezekiel  to  Malachi.  The 
Christian  Greek  Scriptures  con- 
tains Matthew  to  Revelation. 

Total  pages:  3,786.    Size  of  each  volume:  7  5/16"  x  4  7/8"  x  7/8"  <  appro  r.). 
Green  leatherette  hard  cover  embossed  in  gold;  Bible  paper.  7/-  (for 
Australia,  8/-;  for  South  Africa,  70c)  each  volume,  all  six  for  42/-  (for 
Australia,  48/-;  for  South  Africa,  4.20  rand). 


WATCH   TOWER 


THE    RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W.   7 


I  am   enclosing  for  the  volume  (s)   of  the  New  World  Translation  of  the  Holy 

Scriptures  checked,  h  Vol.  I,  D  Vol.  II,  Q  Vol.  Ill,  O  Vol.  IV.  □  Vol.  V  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures. 
"J  Christian  Greek  Scriptures.  7/-  (for  Australia,  8/-;  for         "  ■        '  '    '    " 

Australia,  48/-;  for  South  Africa,  4.20  rand)   for  all  six. 


Name 

Post 

Town 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  

Postal 
District  No County  . 


In:  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Rd.,  StrathfleM,  N.S.W.  CANADA:  150  Bridgeland  Ave.,  Toronto  19,  Ont, 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bag,  Elandsfontein,  Transvaal.   UNITED  STATES:  117  Adama  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N,  Y. 


32 


AW  a  K  W.  ! 


Awake? 


Obeying  the  Two  Great  Commandments  for  Life 


The  Sensitive  Sense  of  Smell 


Life  in  a  Matriarchal  Society 


The  Oil  Situation 


MARCH  22,  1961 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAL 

N«wj  sources  that  am  able  to  keep  you  awoke  to  the  vital  issues  of  our 

timet  mutt  be  unfettered  by  ceniorihip  and  selfish  interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fetters.  It  racognlz*s  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts.  It  is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  it  is  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  it  is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  Its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth. 

"Awakel"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  ts  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  arm  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  un censored,  on-th«-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
theft  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  In  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
hisrory,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awakel"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awakel" 


Published  Simultaneously  in  tub   United  States  by  the 
WATCHTOWER    BIBLE   AND   TRACT    SOCIETY  OF  NEW  YORK,    INC. 
117   Adams   Street  ■    Brooklyn   1,    New   York.    U.S.A. 

and  in   England  by 
WATCH   TOWER   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY 
Watch  Tower   House,   The   Rldgeway  London  N.W.  7.   England 

N.  H.  Knobe,  President  Grant  Suites,  Secretary 

Printing   this   issue.'     3,125,000  4<J   a   copy    (Australia,   6<J;   South   Africa,   &/&) 

"Awake!"  it  pltlJihed   In  tho  foifowlng  22  lawisages:    Remittance  for  subscriptions  should  be  sent  to  the  office 
Semimonthly — Afrttaans,  Cim'ania,  Danish,  Dutch,  Ens-    t0    your    country.    Otherwise    send    rour    remittance    to 
lish,  Finnish,   French,   German,   Greek,   Italian,  Japanese.     London.    Notice  of  expiration  Is  sent  at  least  two   Issues 
Norwegian,   Portuguese,    Spanish,   Swedish,   Tagftlog,    Zulu,    before  subscription  expires. 
MonUly—  Iloeano,  Korean,  Malayalam.  Polish,  Ukrainian. 


Offices 


Yearly  subscription  rates 
for  semimonthly  editions 


America.  U.S.,  117  Adams  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N,T. 
Australia,  11  Barejforrt  Rd.,  Stuthfleld.  N.S.W. 
Canada,  150  Briilgcland  Ate,,  Toronto  19.  Ont. 
England,  Watch  Tower  House, 

The  Rldgeway,  Londoo  N.W.  7 
Nerw  ZaaliiU,  eai  New  North  Rd.,  AiieMr.no:,  S.ff.  1 
Soitr,  Africa,  Private  Bag,  Handsfontein.  Tvl. 

Monthly  editions  cost   half  the  above   rates. 


tl 

Ti- 
ll- 
70c 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  sfioild  ranch  n  thirty  days 
hefore  your  moving  date.  Slue  us  your  old  and  new 
address  (if  poislfcle.  y«nr  old  address  label)  Watch 
Town,  Vrateh  Tower  Knte,  The  Rldgeway,  Lon- 
don  N.W.   7,    Engl  an  I. 


Entered  as  second-class  matter  at  Brooklyn,  NX 
Printed  in   England 


Tho    Rtble   translation    esed   In    "Awake!"    Is   the   Mew   Worll   Trantiatien   of   the   Holy   Scriptural 

When  other  translations  art   used  the  following  symbol  s  will  appear  behind  the  1 1  tat  Ions: 
jlS   _  American  Standard   Version     Dy  -   Catholic  Douay   version    Mo  -  James  Mnffatt's  version 
AT  -  An   American  Translation        ED  -  The  Emphatic  Dtaglott     Ro   -  J.   E.   flotlierbam's   version 
AV  -  Authorised  Version   [1611)    JP  -  Jewlah  Publication  soc.   RS  -  Revised  Standard  Version 
Da  -  J.   N.   Darby's  version  D&    <    Isaac  Leeaer's   version        Yg  -  Robert  Young'a  version 


CO 

Be  Moderate  in  All  Things 

Obeying  the  Two  Great  Commandments 

for  Life 
The  Sensitive  Sense  of  Smell 
The  Virgin  Islands:  Emeralds  of 

the  Caribbean 
Buying  on  Impulse 
Life  in  a  Matriarchal  Society 


NTENTS 

3 


5 
9 

12 

16 

17 


Taaty  Pish  from  Manitoba 
The  First  Purpose  of  Science 
The  Oil  Situation 
Field  Ministry  Experiences 
"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 
Is  Capital  Punishment  Right  or 
Wrong? 
Watching  the  World 


20 
20 
21 
26 


27 
29 


"Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake." 

— Ronton!  13  ill 


Volume   XLII 


London,    England,    March  22,    19S1 


Number  6 


TIE  city  drunk  sprawled  in  an  alcoholic 
stupor  on  a  dirty  sidewalk  is  not  a 
pleasant  sight,  but  he  well  illustrates  in  a 
striking  way  the  folly  of  immoderation. 
Of  course,  knowing  when  to  stop  drinking 
is  only  one  of  many  ways  that  moderation 
can  be  exercised,  in  your  daily  living  for 
your  own  good.  It  plays  an  important  part 
in  nearly  everything  you  do. 

Immoderate  eating  habits  may  not  be  as 
disgustingly  obvious  as  are  immoderate 
drinking  habits,  but  they  manifest  the 
same  lack  of  wisdom  and  self-control.  Just 
as  you  should  know  when  to  stop  drinking, 
you  should  know  when  to  stop  eating.  Be- 
cause the  food  that  is  before  you  is  tasty 
and  there  is  lots  of  it,  that  is  no  reason  to 
stuff  yourself  like  a  goose  that  is  force  fed 
to  fatten  its  liver.  More  often  than  not  the 
momentary  pleasure  from  eating  an  over- 
abundance of  delicious  food  is  offset  by 
pains  of  indigestion  or  other  ailments  re- 
sulting from  abusing  your  body.  This  im- 
moderate habit  can,  in  time,  shorten  your 
life  span.  It  is,  therefore,  in  your  own  good 
interests  to  exercise  moderation  in  eating. 
Why  overload  your  system  because  an  in- 


considerate host  insists  that  you  eat  or 
drink  more?  Politely  decline.  "Do  not 
come  to  be  among  heavy  drinkers  of  wine, 
among  those  who  are  gluttonous  eaters  of 
flesh."— Prov.  23:20. 

When  at  a  social  gathering  you  may 
show  wisdom  in  your  eating  and  drinking 
and  yet  show  a  lack  of  it  in  not  knowing 
when  to  go  home.  If  you  stay  until  such  a 
late  hour  that  you  are  unable  to  perform 
your  work  the  next  day  because  you  had 
insufficient  rest,  can  it  be  said  that  you 
acted  wisely?  Can  it  be  said  that  you  used 
moderation?  Just  as  you  may  have  resist- 
ed social  pressure  to  overdrink  or  overeat, 
why  not  resist  it  in  the  matter  of  staying 
later  than  is  good  for  you?  Have  the  cour- 
age to  excuse  yourself  in  time  to  get  suf- 
ficient rest  for  performing  your  work  well 
the  next  day.  The  habit  of  keeping  late 
hours  is  just  as  immoderate  as  overindul- 
gence in  food  and  drink.  It  too  can  have  a 
bad  effect  upon  your  physical  body.  If  you 
are  conscientious  about  your  daily  work 
you  will  be  moderate  about  the  hours  you 
stay  up  at  night. 

Being  conscientious  about  your  work 
does  not  mean,  however,  that  you  should 
be  an  extremist,  allowing  it  to  so  dominate 
your  life  that  you  have  little  time  for  any- 
thing else.  Whatever  your  daily  work  may 
be,  it  should  be  balanced  with  other  activ- 
ity for  your  own  good.  Your  body  and 
mind  require  a  change.  In  this  way  you 


MARCH  22,  1961 


get  the  best  efficiency  from  the  hours  you 
devote  to  your  work.  . 

If  you  are  a  married  man  you  must  rec- 
ognize your  obligation  to  schedule  your 
work  so  that  it  does  not  habitually  cut  into 
the  time  you  owe  your  wife.  Harmonious 
marital  relationship  can  hardly  be  main- 
tained when  a  husband  is  immoderate  in 
his  work  habits,  permitting  his  work  to 
take  up  more  of  his  time  than  it  should. 

When  balancing  your  work  with  other 
activity  use  moderation.  It  is  unwise  to 
permit  recreational  pursuits  to  take  such 
a  large  bite  from  your  spare  time  that 
more  important  things  are  crowded  out. 
This  can  easily  happen  in  this  modern  age 
where  we  have  such  a  great  number  of 
time-consuming  forms  of  recreation.  The 
temptation  to  overindulge  in  these  forms 
of  pleasure  can  be  just  as  great  as  with  the 
pleasures  of  eating  and  drinking. 

Recreation  should  have  its  place  in  our 
schedule,  but  self-control  must  be  exer- 
cised to  keep  it  within  reasonable  bounds. 
This  holds  true  with  anything  that  brings 
you  pleasure.  It  seems  to  be  a  human  tend- 
ency to  overindulge  in  whatever  is  pleas- 
urable to  the  flesh;  yet  overindulgence, 
more  often  than  not,  brings  suffering  rath- 
er than  greater  pleasure.  This  might  be 
illustrated  with  a  child.  Give  him  a  dish 
of  ice  cream  and  he  is  delighted  with  its 
pleasant  taste,  but  allow  him  to  overin- 
dulge in  it  and  his  pleasure  becomes  mis- 
ery. A  little  is  good;  too  much  is  bad.  You 
get  the  keenest  delight  from  recreation, 
as  well  as  from  food,  when  you  use  mod- 
eration. 

Reading  of  worth-while  literature  is  fre- 
quently neglected  because  a  television  set 
is  easy  to  turn  on  and  requires  little  men- 
tal effort  to  watch.  Would  it  not  be  much 
more  beneficial  to  you  mentally  if  you 


would  be  moderate  in  your  watching  of 
television  and  devote  some  time  to  serious 
reading?  This  may  require  self-discipline, 
but  there  can  be  no  question  about  the 
greater  benefit  you  will  get.  The  very  best 
literature  you  can  read  is  the  Holy  Bible. 
Its  upbuilding  counsel  and  wisdom  fulfills 
your  greatest  need  in  this  hectic  age.  Its 
words  are  words  of  life  that  lead  you  to 
harmonious  relationship  with  your  Crea- 
tor, giving  you  sound  hope  for  a  secure  and 
peaceful  world.  "Happy  is  the  man  that 
has  found  wisdom,  and  the  man  that  gets 
discernment,  for  the  gaining  of  it  is  better 
than  the  gaining  of  silver  and  the  produce 
of  it  even  than  gold.  Its  ways  are  ways  of 
pleasantness,  and  all  its  roadways  are 
peace.  It  is  a  tree  of  life  to  those  taking 
hold  of  it,  and  those  keeping  fast  hold  of 
it  are  to  be  called  happy." — Prov.  3:13, 14, 
17, 18. 

One  of  the  requirements  that  this  writ- 
ten Word  of  God  wisely  places  upon  per- 
sons appointed  as  overseers  in  the  Chris- 
tian congregation  is  that  they  should  be 
"moderate  in  habits."  (1  Tim.  3:2)  How 
can  an  overseer  set  the  proper  example 
for  others  if  he  is  immoderate?  How  can 
he  make  wise  decisions  if  he  lacks  self- 
control?  Certainly  what  is  expected  of  him 
can  properly  be  expected  of  all  Christians. 
Remember  that  immoderateness  was  one 
of  the  things  that  Jesus  condemned  about 
the  scribes  and  Pharisees. — Matt.  23:25. 

For  your  own  good,  exercise  self-control 
in  whatever  you  do,  especially  in  those 
things  that  bring  pleasure  to  the  flesh.  In- 
stead of  being  like  the  drunk  who  suffers 
from  his  own  folly,  know  when  to  stop. 
Balance  your  activities  so  that  you  get  the 
greatest  good  from  your  life  and  do  the 
greatest  good.  Be  moderate  in  all  things. 


AWAKE! 


TIE  deep-throated  roar 
of  fleet   after  fleet   of 
bombing  planes  accompa- 
nied by  thunderous  explo- 
sions from  the  bombs  they 
dropped  made  many  a  night 
during  World  War  II  a 
frightening  experience  for 
millions  of  people.  It  was  a 
nightmare  no  sane  person 
would  want  his  children  to 
experience,  yet  the  children 
of  those  people  now  face  the  possi- 
bility of  a  world  conflict  that  would 
eclipse  World  War  n  in  destruction 
and  horror.    Instead   of  bombing 
planes,  city-destroying  rockets 
threaten  to  fill  each  day  and  night 
with  apprehension  and  heart-chilling 
fear. 

The  awfulness  of  modern  warfare  un- 
derscores mankind's  great  need  to  exer- 
cise the  quality  of  love.  If  it  were  present 
in  all  human  relations,  would  there  be 
war?  Would  there  be  dishonesty?  Would 
there  be  crime?  How  could  there  be?  Love 
does  not  produce  that  which  injures. 

Long  ago  Jesus  Christ  recognized  the 
need  for  love  among  all  peoples  for  the 
good  of  mankind.  When  questioned  by  re- 
ligious leaders  of  his  day  as  to  what  he 
thought  was  the  greatest  commandment 
of  the  law  covenant  that  was  given  to  the 
nation  of  Israel,  he  said:  "  'You  must  love 
Jehovah  your  God  with  your  whole  heart 
and  with  your  whole  soul  and  with  your 
whole  mind.'  This  is  the  greatest  and  first 
commandment.  The  second,  like  it,  is  this: 
'You  must  love  your  neighbor  as  your- 
self.' On  these  two  commandments  the 
whole  Law  hangs,  and  the  Prophets." 
—Matt.  22:37-40. 

By  this  statement  Jesus  pinpointed  the 
fundamental  requirements  of  the  famous 
Mosaic  law  as  being  love  for  God  and  love 
for  neighbor.  Since  the  person  who  loves 

MARCH  m,  1961 


OBEYING- 


+<?fi**0*~~ 


FOR 
LIFE 


*2 


Is  this 
practical 
today? 
How  can  they 
improve 
human 
relations? 


God  would  not  break 
his  law  and  the  person 
who  loves  his  neighbor 
would  not  dishonor  his 
parents,  steal,  murder 
or  do  any  of  the  other 
things  forbidden  by  the 
law,  it  can  be  said  that 
love  is  the  greatest  com- 
mandment. Obedience 
to  these  two  command- 
ments is  the  need  of  this 
modern  world;  it  is  re- 
quired of  all  who  would 
gain  life  in  God's  new 
world. 


Love  for  God 

Of  the  two  command- 
ments Jesus  named,  the 
one  of  foremost  impor- 
tance is  that  of  love  for 
God.  This  is  only  proper 
since  he  is  man's  Creator  and  Life-giver, 
the  One  who  lovingly  prepared  the  earth  so 
that  it  would  be  ideally  suited  for  human 
habitation.  All  the  things  that  man  needs 
for  a  comfortable  and  enjoyable  life  he  pro- 
vided in  the  vegetation,  animal  life,  metals, 
minerals  and  other  substances  that  he 
placed  on  the  earth.  These  were  put  here 
for  man  to  use  for  his  own  good.  That  man 
has  misused  them  and  handled  them  in  a 
selfish  manner  is  no  fault  of  God. 

Our  indebtedness  to  Jehovah  for  our  ex- 
istence and  for  all  the  material  things  he 
placed  on  earth  for  us  to  use  is  concrete 
reason  for  us  to  have  love  for  him.  As  a 
father  shows  love  for  his  children  long  be- 


fore  they  have  love  for  him,  so  the  Creator 
showed  his  love  for  us.  This  was  pointed 
out  by  the  apostle  John:  "As  for  ub,  we 
love,  because  he  first  loved  us."  (1  John  4: 
19)  He  placed  that  quality  in  us  and  set 
us  an  example  in  how  to  exercise  it. 

Although  man,  in  the  beginning,  failed 
to  respond  to  God's  love  by  demonstrating 
love  for  Him,  He  has  not  failed  to  manifest 
loving-kindness  toward  the  descendants  of 
the  first  disobedient  pair.  By  providing  a 
ransom  sacrifice  for  our  salvation,  that  we 
might  regain  what  Adam  and  Eve  lost,  he 
has  given  an  outstanding  demonstration  of 
his  love.  "By  this  the  love  of  God  was 
made  manifest  in  our  case,  because  God 
sent  forth  his  only-begotten  Son  into  the 
world  that  we  might  gain  life  through 
him."— 1  John  4:9. 

These  demonstrations  of  his  undeserved 
kindness  toward  us  as  well  as  his  loving 
provision  for  a  righteous  and  peaceful 
world  for  obedient  humans  increase  our 
great  indebtedness  to  Jehovah  and  accen- 
tuate our  need  to  exercise  love  for  him 
above  love  for  self  or  for  another  person. 
There  can  be  no  sharing  of  this  love.  It 
must  be  exclusive.  No  other  gods  are  to 
be  given  the  loving  devotion  and  worship 
that  is  due  Jehovah  God.  "You  must  not 
bow  down  to  them  nor  be  induced  to  serve 
them,  because  I  Jehovah  your  God  am  a 
God  exacting  exclusive  devotion." — Ex. 
20:5. 

Obedience  to  the  first  great  command- 
ment of  life  is  shown  by  our  worship,  our 
speech  and  our  actions.  If  we  love  God 
with  our  whole  heart,  soul  and  mind,  we 
will  magnify  him  in  our  daily  speech,  talk- 
ing about  the  good  things  of  his  Word  and 
the  magnificent  things  he  has  done.  Our 
worship  will  be  according  to  the  way  he 
has  indicated  in  his  Word.  It  will  not  be 
corrupted  by  human  imaginations  that 
cause  a  person  to  venerate  material  things 


and  creatures.  Finally,  by  our  daily  actions 
we  show  our  love  for  him  by  obeying  the 
laws  and  good  counsel  of  his  Word.  We 
must  do  so  if  we  are  to  gain  everlasting 
life  in  his  righteous  new  world. 

Love  for  Neighbor 

While  love  for  God  must  be  exclusive, 
love  for  neighbor  cannot  be.  It  must  be  for 
all  peoples  irrespective  of  skin  color.  The 
second  commandment  of  life  does  not  per- 
mit a  person  to  love  only  those  with  the 
same  skin  color  as  his  own  or  who  were 
born  within  the  same  national  boundaries. 
As  God's  love  is  color-blind  so  must  our 
love  be.  Love  for  persons  of  another  race 
cannot  be  such  love  as  you  might  have  for 
a  pet  animal,  but  it  must  be  the  same  love 
you  have  for  yourself.  That  is  what  the 
Founder  of  Christianity  said:  "You  must 
love  your  neighbor  as  yourself."  (Matt.  22: 
39)  This  fundamental  law  was  also  stated 
by  God  to  Moses,  and  is  recorded  at  Levit- 
icus 19: 18. 

Included  in  the  neighbors  that  must  be 
loved  are  enemies.  For  those  who  prefer 
the  loveless,  tooth-and-claw  existence  of 
this  world,  this  is  inconceivable.  Yet  Jesus 
Christ  said:  "You  heard  that  it  was  said: 
'You  must  love  your  neighbor  and  hate 
your  enemy.'  However,  I  say  to  you:  Con- 
tinue to  love  your  enemies  and  to  pray  for 
those  persecuting  you;  that  you  may  prove 
yourselves  sons  of  your  Father  who  is  in 
the  heavens."  (Matt  5:43-45)  As  God  has 
shown  love  for  those  who  have  opposed 
him  by  patiently  giving  them  ample  time 
and  help  to  repent,  so  we  must  be  forgiv- 
ing to  those  who  are  our  enemies.  Instead 
of  loving  only  those  who  love  us,  we  must 
expand  neighbor  love  to  include  those  who 
hate  us.  This  is  manifested  by  a  willing- 
ness to  help  an  enemy,  especially  in  a 
spiritual  way,  pointing  out  to  him  God's 
requirements  for  life. 


6 


AWAKE! 


How  Neighbor  Love  la  Expressed 

Jesus  Christ  and  his  disciples  showed 
love  for  neighbor  by  teaching  people  of  all 
kinds,  including  enemies,  the  life-giving 
truths  of  God's  Word.  In  the  case  of  Saul 
of  Tarsus,  love  begot  love,  and  this  former 
enemy  became  a  friend.  At  no  time  did 
Jesus  teach  his  disciples  to  do  physical 
injury  to  anyone  because  of  difference 
in  race  or  religious  beliefs.  The  love  for 
neighbor  they  manifested  is  a  good  exam- 
ple for  us  today. 

How  love  for  neighbor  may  be  expressed 
was  pointed  out  by  the  apostle  Paul  when 
he  said:  "Love  is  long-suffering  and  oblig- 
ing. Love  is  not  jealous,  it  does  not  brag, 
does  not  get  puffed  up,  does  not  behave  in- 
decently, does  not  look  for  its  own  inter- 
ests, does  not  became  provoked.  It  does 
not  keep  account  of  the  injury.  It  does  not 
rejoice  over  unrighteousness,  but  rejoices 
with  the  truth."  (1  Cor.  13:4-6)  As  God 
has  been  long-suffering  with  mankind  so 
we  must,  out  of  love,  be  long-suffering  with 
others.  We  must  be  willing  to  forgive  them 
for  their  mistakes,  their  rudeness,  their 
thoughtlessness,  their  cutting  remarks  and 
whatever  else  they  may  do  or  say.  When 
asked  how  many  times  a  person  should 
forgive  sins  against  him,  Jesus  said:  "I  say 
to  you,  not,  Up  to  seven  times,  but,  Up 
to  seventy-seven  times."  (Matt.  18:22) 
In  other  words,  neighbor  love  is  long- 
suffering. 

The  one  who  exercises  neighbor  love  will 
not  be  jealous  over  what  another  person 
has  or  the  position  he  may  hold  and  then 
seek  to  take  it  away  for  himself.  Neither 
will  he  be  puffed  up  with  self-importance 
because  of  what  he  possesses,  his  position 
of  authority  or  the  favor  that  may  be 
shown  him.  He  will  not  feel  superior  to  his 
neighbor  or  covet  for  himself  what  his 
neighbor  has. 

Obeying  the  commandment  of  neighbor 
love  also  means  to  behave  decently  toward 


him,  not  stealing  from  him,  lying  to  him, 
killing  him  or  seeking  immoral  relations 
with  him.  Anyone  that  seeks  to  commit 
fornication  or  adultery  with  another  per- 
son manifests  no  love  for  God  or  for  his 
neighbor.  Not  only  does  he  violate  the  laws 
of  God,  but  he  corrupts  his  neighbor,  mak- 
ing him  unclean  in  the  eyes  of  God.  Im- 
morality is  the  road  to  death,  not  the  road 
to  life,  and  it  is  no  expression  of  love  for 
neighbor  to  entice  him  to  take  that  road. 

Instead  of  selfishly  looking  out  for  one's 
personal  interests,  as  is  the  common  prac- 
tice in  the  world,  love  for  neighbor  means 
to  look  out  for  the  other  person's  interests. 
It  means  being  generous  to  him  rather 
than  callously  seeking  to  take  advantage 
of  him. 

The  person  who  is  easily  provoked  by 
what  another  person  does  fails  to  exercise 
love.  Anger  injures,  severing  friendly  re- 
lations, whereas  love  does  not.  Love  calls 
for  the  exercise  of  self-control.  Anger  not 
only  damages  peaceful  human  relations 
but  can  even  damage  one's  physical  health 
by  putting  undue  strain  on  the  heart. 

When  a  neighbor  does  injure  you,  love 
is  not  shown  by  returning  injury  for  in- 
jury, and  neither  is  it  shown  by  keeping 
account  of  that  injury — by  holding  a 
grudge.  A  grudge  is  like  a  smoldering  fire 
that  will  eventually  do  injury  to  yourself 
as  well  as  to  others.  Jesus  wisely  said: 
"Everyone  who  continues  angry  with  his 
brother  will  be  accountable  to  the  court  of 
justice."  (Matt.  5:22)  Such  person  would 
not  be  obeying  the  two  great  command- 
ments for  life  and,  therefore,  could  not 
pass  divine  judgment,  "He  who  does  not 
love  his  brother,  whom  he  has  seen,  can- 
not be  loving  God,  whom  he  has  not  seen." 
—1  John  4:20. 

Never  can  those  who  exercise  love  re- 
joice in  what  is  unrighteous.  What  is 
wrong  is  never  right  no  matter  how  much 
a  person  may  benefit  in  a  material  way. 


MARCH  22,  1961 


COMING  IN  THE  NEXT  ISSUE 

$  The  Beat  Things  in   Life  Are  Free. 
Hf  Youth's   Opportunities 

in  Thia    Modern    Age. 
*  Patrolman's  Job  Is  Not  an   Easy  One 
■%  Christian  Assemblies  for  1961. 
jtf  Printing— Revolutionary    Invention, 


In  any  conflict  between  right  and  wrong, 
he  will  side  with  what  is  right.  When  an 
enemy  suffers  an  injustice  or  is  foully  mis- 
treated, the  one  exercising  love  will  not 
rejoice  over  his  misfortune.  He  cannot  do 
so  and  still  obey  the  two  commandments 
for  life.  He  can  properly  rejoice,  however, 
when  a  wicked  man  receives  just  punish- 
ment. 

From  these  fea- 
tures of  love  that  are 
mentioned  by  the 
apostle  Paul  in  the 
thirteenth  chapter  of 
his  first  letter  to  the 
Corinthians,  it  be- 
comes evident  that  love  is  a  positive  quali- 
ty, not  a  negative  one.  The  exercising  of  it 
does  not  tear  down  and  divide  but  rather 
builds  up  and  unites.  It  does  not  cause 
strife  but  brings  peace. 

Proof  that  the  two  great  commandments 
for  life  can  be  obeyed  today  and  are  prac- 
tical is  found  in  the  New  World  society 
of  Jehovah's  witnesses.  Despite  national 
boundaries,  differences  in  color  and  the 
problem  of  language  barriers,  Jehovah's 
witnesses  are  united  by  love. 

In  Africa,  where  intertribal  differences 
frequently  make  the  gathering  in  assem- 
bly of  people  from  various  tribes  impos- 
sible, the  New  World  society  is  able  to 
hold  peaceful  assemblies  without  a  sign  of 
difficulty  because  of  intertribal  mixing. 
Obedience  to  the  commandment  of  neigh- 
bor love  makes  this  possible. 

The  fact  that  obedience  to  this  com- 
mandment brings  peace  to  families  that 
were  once  torn  by  domestic  trouble  is  fur- 
ther proof  that  it  is  practical  today.  How 
can  there  be  domestic  trouble  when  man 
and  wife  are  long-suffering  with  each  oth- 
er, behave  decently,  look  out  for  each  oth- 
er's interests,  never  become  provoked  and 
never  keep  account  of  injury,  but  are  for- 
giving? Happiness  and  peace  come  to  the 


home  where  the  two  great  commandments 
for  life  are  obeyed. 

Although  obedience  to  these  command- 
ments is  far  more  difficult  than  speaking 
about  them,  this  does  not  alter  the  fact 
that  they  are  practical.  What  is  necessary 
to  help  you  obey  them  is  a  molding  of  your 
mental  attitude  in  harmony  with  God's 
Word.  Instead  of  con- 
tinuing to  think  and 
reason  in  the  selfish 
manner  the  world 
does,  permit  God's 
Word  to  transform 
your  thinking  so  that 
it  is  in  harmony  with 
his.  "Quit  being  fashioned  after  this  sys- 
tem of  things,  but  be  transformed  by  mak- 
ing your  mind  over,  that  you  may  prove 
to  yourselves  the  good  and  acceptable  and 
complete  will  of  God." — Rom.  12:2. 

It  is  God's  written  Word  that  expresses 
his  thoughts,  his  laws  and  his  will  for  man- 
kind. Here  is  where  you  can  gain  informa- 
tion about  him  that  helps  you  to  obey  the 
first  commandment,  loving  him  with  all 
your  heart.  Here  is  where  you  can  learn 
about  the  good  laws  he  has  made  for  man 
and  the  wise  counsel  he  has  given.  These 
loving  expressions  of  the  Creator  can 
transform  your  thinking  for  your  own 
good  if  you  permit  them  to  do  so.  By  learn- 
ing and  applying  them  you  will  find  it  pos- 
sible to  exercise  love  for  God  and  neigh- 
bor while  living  in  a  world  that  does  not. 
Doing  so,  you  will  come  in  line  for  ever- 
lasting life  in  God's  new  world. 

The  time  is  near  in  that  new  world  when 
the  fear  of  bombing  raids  by  planes  and 
rockets  will  cease  because  of  the  two  great 
commandments  for  life.  Under  the  rule  of 
God's  kingdom  earth's  inhabitants  will  con- 
sist of  persons  who  will  obey  these  com- 
mandments. With  love  uniting  all  peoples, 
mankind  will  at  last  enjoy  security  and 
peace. 


8 


AWAKE! 


'^hM^U^Q-sM^  of'^j/njM 


TIE  sense  of  smell  plays  a  very  impor- 
tant part  in  the  life  of  man.  The  pleas- 
ure that  he  derives  from  a  pleasant  scent 
is  just  a  little  nearer  to  his  conception  of 
true  beauty  than  that  which  he  receives 
from  music  and  art.  In  fact,  a  haunting 
scent  may  affect  him  in  such  a  way  that 
he  may  be  apt  to  regard  it  with  a  faint  un- 
easiness. Despite  its  emotional  influence, 
scent  performs  little  or  no  part  in  the  sex- 
ual life  of  a  normal  man. 

Women  seem  to  have  a  more  acute  sense 
of  smell  than  men.  Children  appear  to  have 
a  keener  sense  of  smell  than  grownups. 
Odors  that  strike  terror  in  adults  may 
cause  children  to  laugh.  Certain  unpleasant 
smells  become  pleasant  when  they  are  di- 
luted. For  example,  indole  smells  like  a 
sewer  when  strong,  but  when  diluted  it 
smells  like  narcissus.  Odors  can  remind 
one  of  music  or  poetry,  create  sensations 
of  "wooliness"  and  "squashiness"  and  sum- 
mon forth  vivid  mental  images  of  past  ex- 
periences. The  effect  of  odors  on  humans 
is  dependent  on  many  factors — the  chemi- 
cal content  of  the  odor,  the  subject's  health 
and  sex,  and  the  effective  tone  of  associa- 
tions. 

The  sense  of  smell  is  primarily  for  man's 
pleasure,  although  it  also  has  a  slight 
warning  value  in  making  man  intolerant 
of  defective  sanitation  and  alerting  him  to 


decomposition  in  food  and  the  presence  of 
things  potentially  dangerous.  But  this  lat- 
ter function  is  often  overrated,  because 
many  poisonous  substances  are  odorless 
and,  at  least  one,  hydrocyanic  acid,  has  a 
rather  pleasant  scent  to  it. 

The  pleasure  value  of  the  sense  of  smell 
is  usually  underrated,  because  men  too 
often  fail  to  realize  that  what  is  called 
flavor  in  food  is  almost  always  an  olfac- 
tory or  smell  sensation.  The  organs  of 
taste  can  only  distinguish  between  the 
qualities  of  sweet,  sour,  bitter  and  salt.  It 
is  difficult  to  identify  foods  taken  into  the 
mouth  in  terms  of  taste  alone.  That  is 
why,  when  the  sense  of  smell  is  put  out  of 
action  by  a  severe  cold,  it  is  almost  im- 
possible, with  the  eyes  shut,  to  tell  by 
taste  alone  the  difference  between  an'apple 
and  a  potato,  though  it  is  still  possible  to 
tell  if  your  coffee  is  sweetened. 

Odors  can  excite  other  organs  to  action. 
A  deep  breath  of  fresh  air  increases  the 
amplitude  of  the  respiratory  movements. 
"Ah,  how  good  the  air  smells,"  you  say. 
But  air  and  food  flavors  are  actually  a 
combination  of  taste  and  smell.  Nothing 
will  make  a  man  drool  more  than  the 
smell  of  food.  The  message  is  direct  and 
his  whole  system  is 
alerted.  What  is  more,  ,r--r-~  -  • 
he  is  emotionally 
stirred  up  for  ac-  -■      *p 

tion— he  is  ready  -W^" 

to  eat!  ...  .."::-' 


Sensory 

Seduction 

Merchan- 
disers have 
caught  on  to 


MARCH  23,  1961 


the  emotional  power  of  odors  and  are 
using  them  as  bait  to  catch  unwary  cus- 
tomers. Chain  stores  have  used  devices 
that  produce  the  smell  of  frying  bacon 
to  lure  the  customers  to  the  bacon  coun- 
ter, a  cheese  smell  to  give  them  a  de- 
sire for  cheese,  an  apple  and  celery  smell 
to  draw  them  to  the  fruit  and  vegetable 
stands.  Licorice  odor  has  been  conveyed  to 
the  sidewalk  areas  to  promote  the  sale  of 
licorice  candy.  The  same  has  been  done 
with  popcorn  steam.  Hot  dog  stands  have 
been  installed  in  front  of  many  retail 
stores  to  entice  customers.  The  tantalizing 
odors  are  said  to  influence  people  of  lower 
income  to  become  expansive,  and  it  helps 
them  get  into  a  buying  frame  of  mind.  Ex- 
periments show  that  people  are  probably 
most  susceptible  to  the  odor  trap  between 
four-thirty  and  five  in  the  afternoon. 

Advertisers  have  also  gone  overboard 
for  sensory  seduction.  They  have  joined 
color  and  smell  in  an  ink  substance  to  se- 
duce buyers.  A  chain  of  supermarkets  had 
a  scented  advertisement  printed  for  the 
sale  of  oranges.  Alfred  Neuwald,  presi- 
dent of  the  Fragrance  Process  Company, 
said:  "It  brought  orange  buyers  into  the 
markets  in  droves."  Neuwald  says  that  he 
has  made  a  chocolate  milk  scent  for  Bor- 
den's, a  maple-syrup  scent  for  General 
Foods,  even  the  scent  of  frankincense  and 
myrrh  for  a  Bible  publisher.  Many  used 
cars  are  now  scented  with  a  "new  car" 
smell.  It  has  been  made  for  dealers  out  of 
the  smells  of  upholstery,  gasoline  and  the 
banana  oil  in  new  paint.  It  is  a  great  sales 
stimulator,  say  dealers. 

Today,  industrial-perfume  laboratories 
are  in  business  reodorizing  with  a  pleas- 
ant smell  practically  everything  from  ar- 
tificial flowers  to  garbage  cans.  Whether 
a  thing  smells  good  or  bad  or  has  no  odor, 
in  today's  highly  competitive  market 
place,  can  spell  the  difference  between  suc- 
cess and  failure.  An  estimated  $1,400,000,- 


000  was  spent  by  the  American  public  in 
1957  for  toilet  preparations,  and  a  consid- 
erable percentage  of  that  amount  went  for 
concoctions  guaranteed  to  make  the  hu- 
man body  smell  other  than  it  does.  The 
$4,000,000,000-a-year  beauty  business  is 
also  attuned  to  the  persuasive  power  of 
perfumes. 

Perfumed  odors  have  also  entered  the 
field  of  improving  relations  between  man- 
agement and  labor.  Nauseating  odors  used 
in  some  manufacturing  processes  have 
been  the  cause  of  poor  production  and  ef- 
ficiency. Now  special  compounds  have 
masked  the  sickening  odors,  resulting  in 
improved  efficiency,  greater  production  and 
better  morale  all  around. 

From  human  relations  to  dogs  is  quite  a 
jump,  but  the  ?193,000,000-a-year  pet  food 
business  is  another  field  for  the  perfume 
chemists.  Perfumed  pet  sprays,  flea  pow- 
ders, dog  shampoos,  even  a  line  of  special 
dog  perfumes  are  ringing  up  additional 
sales  for  the  merchants. 

Just  as  odor  can  help  business,  it  can 
also  be  of  harm.  In  western  Oklahoma  dur-, 
ing  May  of  1943,  30  percent  of  2,500,000 
pounds  of  butter  had  a  peculiar  odor.  Peo- 
ple refused  to  buy  it. 

Tuned  to  the  Infinitely  Small 

The  organs  of  smell  have  a  very  high 
sensitivity.  Mercaptan  (which  is  the  es- 
sence of  skunk)  is  apparent  to  most  per- 
sons when  only  one  molecule  is  present  per 
50,000,000,000,000  molecules  of  air!  Still 
some  otherwise  normal  people  cannot  smell 
skunk  no  matter  how  strong  the  scent. 
Certain  blind  and  deaf  persons  are  able  to 
recognize  persons  with  whom  they  have 
previously  come  in  contact  by  their  odor. 
The  wife  of  a  prominent  scientist  said  that 
she  could  tell  when  her  sister  had  bor- 
rowed her  clothes,  "for  although  laundered 

1  recognized  a  lingering  odor,"  she  said. 
"I  often  knew  which  one  of  several  serv- 


10 


AWAKE! 


ants  had  'done  up'  my  room  by  the  odor." 
To  a  human  an  odor  may  be  more  emo- 
tionally disturbing  than  anything  he  can 
see  or  hear.  It  also  has  a  way  of  creating 
vivid  mental  images  of  long-forgotten  ex- 
periences. Therefore,  the  use  of  odors  is 
now  being  explored  for  purposes  of  psycho- 
analysis. A  man  who  was  given  some  cam- 
phor to  smell  immediately  felt  distressed. 
The  camphor  stimulus  brought  back  to  his 
mind  an  incident  that  happened  more  than 
thirty  years  before,  which  he  had  forgot- 
ten completely  until  smelling  the  camphor. 
Odors  are  known  to  induce  many  differ- 
ent moods  in  people.  The  smell  of  rose  oil 
seems  to  soothe  and  tranquilize  and  give 
people  a  sense  of  well-being.  Musk,  a  veri- 
table chameleon  of  odors,  sometimes  is 
pleasing,  sometimes  irritating,  at  other 
times  causes  a  reflective  mood.  The  tang 
of  pine  oil  is  reassuring  and  friendly;  the 
smell  of  ferric  valerian  leaves  persons  un- 
comfortable, and  a  whiff  of  vanillin  causes 
them  to  become  drowsy. 

It  is  commonly  believed  that  when  a  per- 
son becomes  frightened  the  body  gives  off 
what  is  called  "fear  odor,"  which  animals 
recognize.  Various  authorities  state,  how- 
ever, that  sight  and  touch  appear  to  be 
the  means  of  carrying  man's  fear  to  the 
animals:  A  dog  can  sense  a  man's  uneasi- 
ness, a  horse  can  feel  the  trembling  of  the 
inexperienced  rider  on  him. 

Nosing  Out  Diseases 

A  well-trained  nose  is  nowhere  more 
important  than  in  the  medical  profession. 
Many  different  diseases  may  be  identified 
by  odor.  A  famous  Berlin  physician  diag- 
noses skin  diseases  by  smelling.  McKenzie, 
a  practicing  physician,  reportedly  attrib- 
utes odors  to  respective  diseases  as  fol- 
lows: typhus  fever,  close  mawkish;  small- 
pox, horrible;  nephritis,  resembles  chaff; 
favus,  a  skin  disease,  odor  of  mice;  ace- 
tone poisoning  in  later  stages  of.  diabetes, 


sweet-smelling  breath;  plague,  the  sweet 
smell  of  mellow  apple.  Death  is  said  to  her- 
ald its  approach  by  an  odor  that  attracts 
ravens. 

Tupa  Mbae,  a  Paraguayan  "healer,"  of 
Obera,  Argentina,  reportedly  had  such  a 
keen  sense  of  smell  that  he  was  able  to 
prescribe  for  the  sick  without  seeing  them. 
He  simply  listened  to  a  description  of  their 
symptoms  and  then  smelled  'the  apparel 
that  came  in  touch  with  the  afflicted  body. 
"Once  Tupa  Mbae  investigated  a  man's 
sock  and  correctly  diagnosed  hookworm, 
only  to  learn  that  the  patient  was  not  wor- 
ried about  his  hookworm  but  about  his  un- 
detected tuberculosis." 

Hippocrates  and  other  ancient  doctors 
classed  perfumes  with  medicine  and  pre- 
scribed them  for  many  diseases,  particu- 
larly for  those  of  a  nervous  kind.  Sweet- 
scented  herbs  were  supposed  to  act  direct- 
ly on  the  brain. 

Superstitious  men  once  wore  bags  of 
smelly  stuff  to  drive  harmful  demons  away. 
During  the  great  plagues  in  Europe  people 
stuffed  sweet-smelling  thyme,  rue  and 
pennyroyal  into  their  ears  and  nostrils  as 
a  preventive.  Often  cedar  and  pine  boughs 
were  burned  in  the  narrow  streets  in  hope 
of  quelling  a  certain  disease.  The  Aztecs 
similarly  employed  the  fragrance  of  flow- 
ers in  the  treatment  of  fatigue  and  melan- 
cholia. And  for  centuries  incense  has  been 
used  in  churches  to  help  relieve  pain  and 
grief  and  soothe  the  heart. 

While  odors  have  interested  man  since 
the  dawn  of  creation,  and  at  least  one 
trained  human  nose  is  credited  with  the 
ability  to  detect  nine  thousand  different 
odors,  besides  combinations  of  them,  still 
there  has  been  no  real  progress  toward  an 
understanding  of  odors,  no  real  science  of 
odor.  There  is  no  known  way  to  measure 
it  or  weigh  it.  This  may  be  a  field  of 
science  that  will  be  left  for  the  inhabitants 
of  the  new  world  to  explore. 


MARCH  gg,  1961 


11 


—Emeralds 
of  the  Caribbean 


By  "Awoke I"  comtpondant  in  the  Virgin  Islands 

NOT  long  ago  a  giant  Pan-American 
plane  streaked  from  New  York's  Idle- 
wild  Airport  toward  the  Caribbean  on  a 
special  flight.  As  the  plane  neared  its 
rendezvous,  the  passengers  beheld  tiny 
mountain  peaks  silhouetted  in  the  eve- 
ning sun  like  pyramids  on  a  shimmering 
desert.  Swiftly  lowering  itself  down  over 
an  island  of  emerald-green  mountains, 
the  plane's  wheels  touched  down  at  Alex- 
ander Hamilton  Airport,  St.  Croix,  largest 
of  the  Virgin.  Islands,  1,700  miles  from 
New  York.  Camera  bulbs  flashed  andnews- 
men  were  on  hand.  There  were  gifts  for 
passengers  and  crew  members,  for  this  was 
the  inauguration  of  the  first  regular  sched- 
uled nonstop  flight  from  New  York  to  St. 
Croix,  Virgin  Islands. 

Yes,  the  number  of  visitors  to  the  Vir- 
gin Islands  is  increasing.  One  of  the  rea- 
sons is  the  Virgin  Islands  National  Park, 
a  unique  park  on  the  island  of  St.  John 
where  coconut  palms  rustle  above  dazzling 
white  beaches.  Other  attractions  are  ah 
Old  World  atmosphere,  duty-free  merchan- 
dise and  a  climate 
viewed  by  many  per- 
sons as  ideal. 

What  are  the  Vir- 
gin Islands?  Those  in 
American  possession 
are  comprised  of  three 
main  islands  and  some 
fifty  pin-dot  isles.  The 
three  main  ones  are 
St.  Croix,  St.  Thomas 
and  St.  John.  The 

12 


name  for  these  islands  goes  back  to  the 
time  of  their  discovery.  Columbus  discov- 
ered them  during  his  second  voyage,  in 
1493.  Astonished  by  their  numerousness 
and  delighted  by  their  fresh  beauty,  he 
named  them  the  Virgin  Islands,  after  the 
legend  of  St.  Ursula  and  her  eleven  thou- 
sand virgins. 

The  islands  were  relatively  unoccupied 
after  their  discovery  but  over  the  years 
some  of  them  came  under  the  rule  of  the 
Spanish,  English,  Dutch,  Knights  of  Malta, 
French  and  the  Danish.  In  1672  the  Danish 
West  India  Company  founded  a  permanent 
settlement  on  the  island  of  St.  Thomas. 
Under  Danish  rule  for  more  than  250 
years,  the  islands  were  sold  to  the  United 
States  in  1917  for  $25,000,000,  the  United 
States  paying  this  high  price  because  of 
fear  of  German  occupation  during  World 
War  I.  The  Danish  atmosphere  still  pre- 
vails, as  one  readily  notes  on  a  visit  to  the 
island  of  St.  Croix, 

St.  Croix:  Largest  of  the  Three 

Visitors  to  the  island  usually  take  a 
tour  of  the  two  port  towns  bearing  Danish 
names,  Christiansted,  on  the  northern 
coast,  and  Frederiksted,  fifteen  miles  away 
at  the  western  tip  of  the  island.  Seven- 
teenth-century shops,  buildings  andhouses, 
steeped  in  the  memory  of  the  distant  past, 
line  the  narrow  streets,  some  of  which 
bear  Danish  names.  Within  the  shops  is 


Christiansted,  St.  Croix 

AWAKE! 


merchandise  from  all  parts  of  the  world: 
Danish  silver,  mahogany  pieces  from  Haiti, 
rings  and  brooches  from  Thailand,  watches 
from  Switzerland,  carved  ivories  from  Del- 
hi, cameras  and  binoculars  from  Germany 
and  Japan,  perfume  from  France  and  in- 
numerable other  items.  Many  "ooh"  and 
"ah"  over  the  prices,  after  noting  their  less- 
than-half  Stateside  cost. 

The  lower  prices  for  merchandise  goes 
back  to  the  time  of  Danish  control.  In  1755 
the  king  of  Denmark  acquired  the  Danish 
West  India  Company's  rights  and  made  the 
harbor  of  Charlotte  Amalie,  principal  port 
of  the  Virgin  islands,  on  the  island  of  St, 
Thomas,  a  free  port.  When  the  United 
States  acquired  the  islands,  President  Wil- 
son specified  that  they  should  never  "be 
placed  in  a  less  favorable  position  . , .  than 
they  now  enjoy."  Thus  American  customs 
officials  followed  the  Danish  practice  of 
levying  almost  no  duties  on  imports. 

Anyone  on  St.  Croix  may  satisfy  his  ap- 
petite with  island-grown  vegetables  such 
as  the  yuca,  tania  and  pidgeon  peas.  Fresh- 
ly caught  salt-water  fish  may  grace  his 
plate;  and  there  is  prime  steak  from  St. 
Croix's  own  developed  cattle,  one  of  the 
tamest,  gentlest  breeds  on  earth.  Or  one 
may  snack  on  any  one  of  the  island's  va- 
riety of  tropical  fruits:  custard  apple,  sour- 
sop,  papaya  and  mango. 

Although  St.  Croix  is.  the  largest  of  the 
three  islands,  it  is  only  some  twenty-eight 
miles  long  and  eight  miles  wide.  Traveling 
from  one  end  to  the  other  by  automobile 
affords  a  fine  opportunity  to  see  the  is- 
land's variety  of  vegetation,  including  cac- 
ti that  grow  in  astounding  profusion  along 
the  water's  edge  or  up  in  the  hills. 

In  the  interior  of  the  island  one  may 
find  the  jungle,  the  untouched  beauty  of 
St.  Croix.  Rich  and  luxuriant  in  tropical 
growth,  shaded  by  giant  trees  centuries 
old,  complete  with  strong  swinging  vines 
over  a  hundred  feet  in  length,  adorned 


with  hanging  moss  and  tropical  plants  nes- 
tled in  the  high  branches  of  the  only  trees 
that  monkeys  dare  not  climb,  the  island  is 
a  kingdom  for  the  nature  lover.  Unafraid 
of  snakes,  whose  presence  would  be  fitting 
but  impossible  to  find,  he  would  have  a 
field  day  in  this  beauty  spot.  Scenic  routes 
have  recently  been  constructed  to  give  a 
captivating  view  of  the  island's  irregular 
coast  line. 

No  matter  where  one  drives  on  the  is- 
land, one  seems  to  behold  the  ubiquitous 
ruins  of  the  estate  houses  and  sugar  mills 
that  not  too  many  years  ago  hummed  with 
excitement.  Here  slaves  once  toiled  the  day 
away,  cutting  cane  in  the  fields;  and  men, 
women  and  children  all  felt  the  whips  of 
their  masters.  Now  the  towering  truncated 
smokestacks  and  round  windmills  stand  as 
mute  reminders  of  an  unsavory  history. 

Yes,  St.  Croix  in  its  early  days  was  a 
slave  center.  Here  were  slave  barracks  sim- 
ilar to  those  on  the  Gold  and  Ivory  Coasts 
of  Africa.  Great  estate  houses,  solidly  built 
of  native  rock,  were  erected  on  hilltops. 
The  ruins  of  these  houses  are  situated  on 
hilltops  commanding  magnificent  views 
of  descending  slopes.  The  vast  central 
halls,  flanked  by  wings  and  surrounded  by 
flagged  terraces,  still  rear  lofty  walls;  and 
in  adjacent  clearings  long  slave  quarters 
still  stand. 

St.  Thomas:  Commercial  Center 

St.  Thomas  is  altogether  different  from 
its  sister  islands.  Here  life  hinges  around 
its  harbor  of  Charlotte  Amalie;  indeed  it 
is  said  that  the  chief  value  of  the  island  is 
the  harbor,  one  of  the  best  in  the  Antilles. 
With  its  bottlenecked  entrance  it  is  mar- 
velously  landlocked.  Hundreds  of  sightsee- 
ing ships  yearly  bring  thousands  of  tour- 
ists to  flood  the  streets  and  stores  for  a 
one-day  visit.  These  and  regular  flights 
daily  from  nearby  Puerto  Rico  and  St. 
Croix  have  for  years  made  St.  Thomas  an 


MARCH  23,'  1961 


13 


outstanding  attraction  in  the  Caribbean. 
Commercially  St.  Thomas  is  the  most 
important  of  the  three  islands.  Thus  for 
visitors  who  have  first  seen  St.  Croix,  St. 
Thomas  might  remind  them  of  a  Coney 
Island  amid  a  tropical  setting  by  compari- 
.  son.  But  here,  as  in  the  other  two  islands, 
shades  of  the  past  blend  with*the  modern. 
The  old  donkey-drawn  carts  still  found  on 
St.  Croix  are  gone,  but  sturdy  women  bal- 
ance buckets  of  water  on  their  heads  and 
walk  for  blocks  to  their  little  houses  with 
hardly  a  ripple  on  the  water  they  carry. 
Or  they  may  be  seen  on  the  busy  streets, 
unhurriedly  strolling  with  the  week's  sup- 
ply of  groceries  resting  on  wide-brimmed 
straw  hats  over  a  turbaned  head,  with  arms 
and  hands  swinging  free  of  any  such  bur- 
den. 

The  town  of  Charlotte  Amalie  is  built 
upon  hills  so  steep  that  vehicular  traffic  is 
curtailed.  About  half  of  the  Virgin  Islands' 
estimated  32,000  people  live  along  this 
town's  sharply  tilted  streets.  A  single-level 
street  parallel  to  the  water  front  forms  a 
common  base  for  three  cone-shaped  clus- 
ters of  red-roofed  white  dwellings  on  the 
green  background  of  mountain  ridges. 

The  prevailing  language  on  St.  Thomas, 
as  on  the  other  islands,  is  English,  despite 
Denmark's  long  control  of  the  islands. 
Many  of  the  Danish  estates  belonged  to 
absentee  landlords  who  employed  Irish 
overseers.  Island  English  today  is  thus  a 
speech  born  of  many  influences.  Besides 
being  related  to  the  "calypso  talk"  of  the 
British  West  Indies,  it  contains  phrases 
and  words  left  by  Danish  colonials  and  the 
Irish  overseers.  Though  English  prevails, 
Danish,  Dutch,  French  and  Spanish  are 
also  common. 

St.  John:  Home  of  the  National  Park 

The  smallest  of  the  three  islands,  St. 
John  is  a  mass  of  rugged  mountains  and 
the  home  of  the  youngest  of  the  United 

14 


States  national  parks.  St.  Jonn  is  about  the 
size  of  Bermuda,  being  about  nine  miles 
long'  and  up  to  five  in  width.  The  Virgin 
Islands  National  Park  comprises  about 
three  fourths  of  the  island.  A  gift  from 
philanthropist  Laurance  Rockefeller,  the 
park  is  one  that  few  persons  have  even 
heard  about,  probably  because  its  official 
existence  is  less  than  five  years  old.  A  boat 
from  St.  Thomas  takes  one  to  St.  John  in 
about  half  an  hour.  The  park  offers  splen- 
did scenery  similar  to  that  found  on  St. 
Croix,  for  St.  John  is  one  of  the  best  wa- 
tered and  most  fertile  of  the  Virgin  group. 
What  a  forest!  An  infinite  variety  of  trees! 
There  is  the  kapok  tree  with  its  seed  pods 
of  silky  fibers,  the  umbrella-shaped  rain 
tree  with  its  pink  flowers  and  the  gumbo 
limbo  or  turpentine  tree.  Should  one  tire 
of  exploring  jungle,  he  can  enjoy  the  white 
and  spacious  beach  and  the  splendor  of  the 
coral  reefs.  And  the  weather?  Rarely  does 
the  temperature  go  below  65  degrees  Fahr- 
enheit or  higher  than  91. 

St.  John  has  little  commerce,  and  its 
population  is  less  than  one  thousand  in- 
habitants. The  interior  being  a  mass  of 
green-covered  mountains  rising  abruptly 
from  the  shore,  the  roads  are  rugged  and 
only  jeeps  are  used  to  traverse  them. 

The  ruins  of  great  estate  houses  are  also 
found  here,  for  at  one  time  St.  John,  like 
St.  Croix,  was  the  scene  of  vast  cane  fields. 
Driving  through  today's  jungle,  one  can 
hardly  believe  that  at  one  time  virtually 
the  whole  island  was  planted  with  sugar 
cane.  But  all  the  work  was  not  accom- 
plished by  the  Danes  themselves.  Slaves 
from  Africa  did  most  of  the  work.  The 
slaves  were  often  whipped  and  starved, 
cut  up  at  the  slightest  provocation  and 
hanged  without  compunction.  A  nineteen- 
paragraph  mandate,  made  law  by  the  gov- 
ernors and  carried  out  by  owners,  ren- 
dered life  for  the  slaves  unbearable.  Lead- 
ers of  runaway  slaves  were  branded  with 

AWAKE! 


red-hot  irons  and  then  hanged.  If  a  runa- 
way slave  got  caught  within  a  week,  he 
was  given  150  lashes.  If  not  caughtf  for 
three  months,  he  lost  a  leg;  for  six  months' 
freedom  he  lost  his  life. 

Any  slave  caught  in  a  conspiracy  to  re- 
volt lost  a  leg,  was  given  150  lashes  or  lost 
his  ears.  Failure  to  report  knowledge  of  a 
revolt  called  for  a  brand  on  the  forehead 
and  150  lashes.  Three  times  a  year  this 
mandate  was  read  and  proclaimed  to  the 
beat  of  drums,  lest  the  slaves  forget. 

This  cruel  treatment  of  the  slaves  went 
on  for  years,  until  finally  the  slaves  would 
stand  it  no  more;  and  a  rebellion  broke 
out  on  St,  John  in  the  year  1733,  culmi- 
nating in  an  insurrection  that  makes  up 
the  bloodiest  pages  of  Virgin  Island  his- 
tory. Half-starved  slaves  attacked  and 
seized  the  garrison  at  Coral  Bay,  surpris- 
ing the  soldiers  and  hacking  to  death  all 
but  two  or  three  who  managed  to  escape. 
From  one  estate  to  another  the  revolt 
spread  from  a  well-developed  plan,  as 
slaves  armed  with  weapons  and  cane 
knives  slaughtered  men,  women  and  chil- 
dren. They  destroyed  the  great  stone  build- 
ings on  almost  half  of  the  ninety-two  es- 
tates. Only  a  few  were  able  to  withstand 
the  onslaught  of  the  slaves,  such  as  those 
who  barricaded  themselves  behind  the 
strong,  thick  walls  of  the  Peter  Durloe  es- 
tate house,  which  is  standing  to  this  day. 


A  few  others  escaped  to  St.  Thomas  in 
boats. 

The  self-freed  slaves  held  the  island  for 
several  months.  Finally,  at  the  request  of 
the  planters,  French  troops  from  Marti- 
nique were  sent  over.  Stalking  the  island, 
the  troops  killed  the  slaves  as  they  found 
them.  There  is  a  legend  (supported  by 
some  historians)  that  when  the  slaves 
found  themselves  bottled  up  with  no  means 
of  escape,  about  300  of  them  joined  hands 
and  leaped  to  their  death  from  the  edge  of 
a  mountain  onto  the  coral  rocks  of  the 
ocean  below. 

Slavery  continued,  but  emancipation 
finally  came.  On  July  3,  1848,  Governor 
Carl  Frederik  Von  Scholten  issued  his 
history-making  proclamation:  'AH  unfree 
in  the  Danish  West  Indies  are  from  today 
FREE.' 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Virgin  Islands 
today  are  largely  the  descendants  of  those 
who  were  thus  freed.  Today  they  are  the 
businessmen,  lawyers,  doctors,  judges  and 
the  cane  growers.  And  today  these  persons 
are  hearing  the  gladsome  message  of  the 
truths  concerning  God's  kingdom.  Many  on 
these  little  emerald  islands  of  the  Carib- 
bean have  responded  to  the  truth  that  real- 
ly makes  men  free,  just  as  Jesus  Christ 
said:  "If  you  remain  in  my  word,  you  are 
really  my  disciples,  and  you  will  know  the 
truth,  and  the  truth  will  set  you  free." 
—John  8:32. 


Crime  on  Television 

•g  According  to  a  report  by  the  National  Association  for  Better  Radio  and  Tele- 
vision, the  crime  rate  on  television  has  rocketed  to  new  heights.  A  survey  was  made 
of  the  programs  of  the  seven  Los  Angeles  stations  for  the  period  of  a  week.  The 
crime  rate  {not  counting  programs  after  9  p.m.)  was  as  follows:    161  murders, 
60  so-called  justifiable  killings,  2  suicides,  192  attempted  murders,  83  robberies, 
15  kidnapings,  24  conspiracies  to  commit  murder,  21  escapes  from  jail,  7  attempted 
lynchings,  6  dynamitings,  11  extortions,  2  cases  oi  arson  and  2  cases  of  physical 
torture.  The  innumerable  fist  fights  and  similar  forms  of  violence  were  not  even 
counted.  Commenting  on  this  survey,  Clara  S.  Logan,  president  of  the  National 
Association  for  Better  Radio  and  Television,  said:  "Our  report  indicates  that  crime 
on  TV  has  reached  an  all-time  peak." 


MARCH  B»,  1961 


15 


BUYING  ON  IMPULSE 


I  N  HIS  book  The  Hidden  Persuaders  Vance 
Packard  reports  on  his  study  of  impulse 
buying:  "For  some  years  the  DuPont  com- 
pany has  been  surveying  the  shopping  habits 
of  American  housewives  in  the  new  jungle 
called  the  supermarket.  .  .  .  DuPont's  investi- 
gators have  found  that  the  mid-century  shop- 
per doesn't  bother  to  make  a  list  or  at  least 
not  a  complete  list  of  what  she  needs  to  buy. 
.  .  .  Why  doesn't  the  wife  need  a  list?  Du- 
Pont gives  this  blunt  answer:  'Because  seven 
out  of  ten  of  today's  purchases  are  decided 
in  the  store,  where  the  shoppers  buy  on 
impulse! ! !' 

"The  proportion  of  impulse  buying  of  gro- 
ceries has  grown  almost  every  year  for  nearly 
two  decades,  and  DuPont  notes  that  this  rise 
in  impulse  buying  has  coincided  with  the 
growth  in  self-service  shopping.  Other  stud- 
ies show  that  in  groceries  where  there  are 
clerks  to  wait  on  customers  there  is  about 
half  as  much  impulse  buying  as  in  self- 
service  stores.  ... 

"One  motivational  analyst  who  became  cu- 
rious to  know  why  there  had  been  such  a 
great  rise  in  impulse  buying  at  supermarkets 
was  James  Vicary.  He  suspected  that  some 
special  psychology  must  be  going  on  inside 
the  women  as  they  shopped.  .  .  .  His  suspi- 
cion was  that  perhaps  they  underwent  such 
an  increase  in  tension  when  confronted  with 
so  many  possibilities  that  they  were  forced 
into  making  quick  purchases.  He  set  out  to 
find  out  if  this  was  true." 

This  analyst  used  a  hidden  motion-picture 
camera  to  record  the  eye-blink  rate  of  women 
as  they  shopped.  "How  fast  a  person  blinks 
his  eyes  is  a  pretty  good  index  of  his  state 
of  inner  tension.  The  average  person,  accord- 
ing to  Mr.  Vicary,  normally  blinks  his  eyes 
about  thirty-two  times  a  minute.  If  he  is 
tense  he  blinks  them  more  frequently,  under 
extreme  tension  up  to  fifty  or  sixty  times 
a  minute. 

"Mr,  Vicary  set  up  his  cameras  and  started 
following  the  ladies  as  they  entered  the  store. 
The  results  were  startling,  even  to  him.  Their 
eye-blink  rate,  instead  of  going  up  to  indi- 
cate mounting  tension,  went  down  and  down, 
to  a  very  subnormal  fourteen  blinks  a  minute. 
The  ladies  fell  into  what  Mr.  Vicary  calls  a 
hypnoidal  trance,  a  light  kind  of  trance  that, 
he  explains,  is  the  first  stage  of  hypnosis. 

16 


,  .  .  Interestingly  many  of  these  women  were 
in  such  a  trance  that  they  passed  by  neigh- 
bors and  old  friends  without  noticing  or  greet- 
ing them.  .  .  .  When  the  wives  had  fllled 
their' carts  (or  satisfied  themselves)  and 
started  toward  the  check-out  counter  their 
eye-blink  rate  would  start  rising  up  to  a 
slightly  subnormal  twenty-five  blinks  per  min- 
ute. Then,  at  the  sound  of  the  cash-register 
bell  and  the  voice  of  the  clerk  asking  lor 
money,  the  eye-blink  rate  would  race  up  past 
normal  to  a  high  abnormal  of  forty-five 
blinks  per  minute.  ,  .  . 

"In  this  beckoning  field  of  impulse  buying 
psychologists  have  teamed  up  with  the  mer- 
chandising experts  to  persuade  the  wife  to 
buy  products  she  may  not  particularly  need 
or  even  want  until  she  sees  them  invitingly 
presented.  ... 

"Shrewd  supermarket  operators  have  put 
the  superior  impulsiveness  of  little  children 
to  work  in  promoting  sales.  [An]  Indiana 
supermarket  operator  .  .  .  has  a  dozen  little 
wire  carts  that  small  children  can  push  about 
the  store  while  their  mothers  are  shopping 
with  big  carts.  .  .  .  The  small  children  go 
zipping  up  and  down  the  aisles  imitating 
their  mothers  in  impulse  buying,  only  more 
so.  They  reach  out,  hypnotically  I  assume, 
and  grab  boxes  of  cookies,  candies,  dog  food, 
and  everything  else  that  delights  or  Interests 
them.  Complications  arise,  of  course,  when 
mother  and  child  eome  out  of  their  trances 
and  together  reach  the  check-out  counter.  The 
store  operator  related  thus  what  happens: 
'There  is  usually  a  wrangle  when  the  mother 
sees  all  the  things  the  child  has  in  his  basket 
and  she  tries  to  make  him  take  the  stuff 
back.  The  child  will  take  hack  items  he 
doesn't  particularly  care  about  such  as  coffee 
but  will  usually  bawl  and  kick  before  sur- 
rendering cookies,  candy,  ice  cream,  or  soft 
drinks,  so  they  usually  stay  for  the  family. 

"All  these  factors  of  sly  persuasion  may 
account  for  the  fact  that  whereas  in  past 
years  the  average  American  family  spent 
about  23  percent  of  its  income  for  food  it 
now  spends  nearly  30  percent.  The  Indiana 
operator  I  mentioned  estimates  that  any 
supermarket  shopper  could,  by  showing  a 
little  old-fashioned  thoughtfulness  and  pre- 
planning, save  25  percent  easily  on  her  fam- 
ily's food  costs." 

AWAKE! 


D 


O  YOU  know  what  happens  in 
a  matriarchal   society  when, 


Life  in  a 


for  instance,  a  man  takes  a  wife? 
To  find  out,  there  is  perhaps  no 
better  place  than  the  Indonesian 
island  of  Sumatra  Throughout  the  cen- 
turies some  strange  societies  have  devel- 
oped here.  One  of  the  strangest  has  de- 
veloped on  the  island's  central  west  coast 
where  a  tribe  of  about  two  million  peo- 
ple live.  These  people  have  retained  the 
ancient  custom  of  the  matriarchate;  that 
is,  descent  and  inheritance  in  the  female 
line,  which  is  said  to  be  preserved  nowhere 
in  a  more  primitive  form  than  here. 

The  name  referring  to  this  tribe  is  also 
strange — Minangkarbau.  It  is  a  combina- 
tion of  two  words,  minang  and  Ttarbau, 
meaning  victory  and  bull.  This  goes  back 
to  a  traditional  historical  event.  The  king 
of  the  island  of  Java  and  the  king  ot  this 
area  of  Sumatra  had  a  dispute.  They  de- 
cided to  settle  it  by  a  bullfight,  the  victo- 
rious bull  deciding  the  dispute.  The  king 
of  Java  provided  a  mighty  specimen.  The 
local  king  trotted  onto  the  field  no  fighting 
bull  but  a  hungry  buffalo  calf  with  two 
small  metal  horns 
erected  on  its  head. 
The  starved  bull  calf 
rushed  over  to  the 
mighty  bull;  in  the 
process  of  searching 
for  milk  the  sharp 
metal  horns  fatally 


vi  urc  hi  a 

1  latriarchal 


s 
o 
c 
I 

E 
T 
Y 

B*  "Awake!" 
correspondent 
in  Indonesia 


MARCH  28,  1961 


wounded  the  big  bull.  Ever 
since,  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
winner  king  has  been  called 
Minangkarbau. 

With  the  invasion  of  the 
Arabs  in  the  thirteenth  cen- 
tury, the  people  became 
strongly  Islamic  by  faith, 
but  the  matriarchal  system 
of  rule  is  carried  on  by  tra- 
dition from  the  past.  So 
much  has  tradition  been 
fused  with  religion  and  vice 
versa  that  there  is  a  say- 
ing in  this  land:  "Reli- 
gion leaned  on  tradition 
and   tradition   leaned   on   religion. 

Family  Life 

A  man  of  Minangkarbau  is  known  as 
anak  minang,  or  a  son  of  Minangkarbau 
Let  us  get  acquainted  with  an  anak  minang 
who  was  born -and  raised  in  i 
village.  At  the  age  of  four  a  chila 
customarily  leaves  the  home  of 
his  parents  every  night  to  sleep 
at  one  of  the  many  religious 
homes  (surau)  in  the  village. 
Early  in  the  evening  he  learns  to 
read  aloud  the  A  B  C's  in  the 
Arabic   characters.   Older  chil- 
dren, both  boys  and  girls,  learn 
to  memorize  lessons  from  the 
Koran,  reading  in  pure  Arabic. 
It  is  considered  humiliating,  even  at  the 
tender  age  of  four,  if  the  child  still  sleeps 
at  his  mother's  house,  as  his  playmates 
will  ridicule  him.  He  will  sleep  at  the  re- 
ligious home  until  he  grows  up.  He  sees 
his  mother,  sisters  and  brothers  at  meal- 

17 


times  and  at  work  in  the  sawahs  or  irri- 
gated rice  fields.  But  he  will  seldom  see 
his  father  during  the  month,  as  he  is  away 
most  of  the  time  minding  his  other  wives 
and  his  half  brothers  and  sisters  in  ad- 
joining villages,  the  Islamic  religion  and 
traditions  allowing  men  to  have  several 
wives. 

When  I  was  six  years  old,  my  father 
divorced  my  mother,  who  was,  incidental- 
ly, his  third  wife.  After  divorcing  my 
mother,  he  married  two  other  virgins. 
When  asked  by  his  children  for  support, 
father  always  had  a  ready  answer.  He 
would  say:  'You  have  several  uncles  and 
granduncles;  why  should  you  come  to  me?' 

You  might  ask,  Why  should  the  uncles 
and  granduncles  raise  the  children?  How 
can  a  father  get  away  with  it  all?  That 
can  be  explained  by  the  traditions  of  the 
matriarchal  society.  Let  us  start  from  the 
beginning. 

Marriage  and  Polygamy 

When  a  man  takes  a  wife,  the  bride- 
groom does  not  bring  his  bride  into  his 
house.  He  has,  in  fact,  no  house  of  his  own. 
Instead,  the  bridegroom  moves  into  the 
house  of  the  bride's  family.  It  is  a  commu- 
nal house  occupied  by  several  families  and 
all  the  womenfolk  are  related  to  the  bride. 
Such  a  matriarchal  tribal  house  is  of  a 
permanent  nature,  and  the  structure  is  set 
on  stakes  several  feet  above  the  ground. 
Each  family  occupies  one  bedroom  and  a 
sitting  space.  This  is  one  reason  why  a 
child  of  four  is  expected  to  sleep  in  the 
surau.  Several  such  communal  houses,  rice 
barns,  a  mosque,  school,  inn  and  market 
place  form  a  village. 

When  a  young  man  has  mastered  reli- 
gious instruction  and  is  able  to  do  farm 
work,  he  is  considered  a  man  to  be  desired 
as  a  husband.  Several  prospective  mothers- 
in-law  come  to  inquire  about  the  young 
man  from  his  mother  or  uncle,  usually 


without  the  young  man's  knowledge.  Ha 
has  no  choice  in  the  matter,  because  tra- 
dition says  the  mother  has  the  exclusive 
right  to  choose  a  first  wife  for  her  son. 
After  the  first  wife,  he  has  relative  free- 
dom to  choose  other  wives. 

But  even  though  he  loves  his  wife,  does 
not  want  to  divorce  her,  desires  to  care  for 
his  children  and  does  not  desire  to  have 
more  than  one  wife,  rarely  is  there  a  man 
among  the  anaJc  mmang  who  remains  mar- 
ried to  only  one  wife.  Why  is  this?  Accord- 
ing to  tradition  the  mother  could  not  be 
satisfied  with  such  an  arrangement;  he 
must  take  other  wives  to  prove  to  the  com- 
munity and  the  world  that  her  son  is  in- 
deed a  man  of  distinction,  a  favored  man 
whom  everyone  seeks  after  and  not  a  for- 
gotten man.  It  would  be  humiliating  to  her 
if  her  son  could  not  handle  and  wield  pow- 
er over  more  than  one  woman. 

In  this  matriarchal  system  the  woman 
does  not  rule  in  the  matter  of  divorce.  By 
the  man's  merely  saying,  "I  divorce  thee," 
to  his  wife  three  times,  she  will  find  her- 
self without  a  husband.  But  what  about 
property  rights  in  such  cases?  They  own 
nothing  in  common,  not  even  the  children. 
All  children  belong  to  the  mother's  family, 
A  brother  of  a  widow  or  divorced  woman 
is  required  to  feed  and  rear  the  children. 
Only  a  few  years  ago  my  father  reminded 
me  of  my  matriarchal  responsibilities  to- 
ward my  own  fleshly  sister  who  was  then 
on  her  own  with  children  left  by  her  hus- 
band. Homes,  land,  rice  field,  fruit  trees 
— all  these  belong  to  the  matriarchal  tribe. 
No  individual  is  allowed  to  sell  these  prop- 
erties. A  family  in  need  may  mortgage  a 
piece  of  land  only  with  consent  of  all  rela- 
tives on  the  woman's  side. 

Now  if  the  bridegroom  is  a  man  of  prom- 
inence or  a  nobleman,  he  need  do  no  man- 
ual work,  nor  need  he  support  his  wife 
and  children.  In  time  he  will  have  several 
wives.  He  will  receive  a  weekly  allowance 


IS 


AWAKE! 


of  money  from  his  wife  or  whichever  one 
he  stays  with  during  the  week.  A  noble- 
man will  usually  have  a  hard  time  turning 
down  an  offer  to  marry  anew.  The  family 
will  propose  something  along  these  lines: 
'We  need  you.  Our  tribe  would  be  grateful 
to  raise  your  offspring.  Please  come  with 
our  humble  request.  And,  besides,  why 
should  you  object?  You  do  not  have  to 
work  for  us.  We  have  a  lot  of  rice  fields, 
and  there  are  so  many^brothers  and„uncles 
of  the  bride-to-be  to  do  the  farm  work  for 
you.' 

Women  Come  Second 

Since  the  woman  exercises  so  much  in- 
fluence over  matters,  one  might  be  led  to 
believe  that  the  woman  can  sit  as  ruler. 
But,  to  the  contrary,  in  this  matriarchal  so- 
ciety the  woman  has  no  voice  whatsoever 
concerning  the  law  of  tradition.  Only  a 
male  heir  can  be  appointed  ruler  over  a 
tribe.  An  heir  inherits  title  and  real  estate 
by  consent  from  his  uncle  on  his  mother's 
side.  He  himself  can  inherit  nothing  ex- 
cept noble  blood  from  his  father.  Names, 
property  and  privileges  derive  from  the 
mother's  side.  The  eldest  man  of  the  elder 
female  line  is  termed  marnak,  and  he  is 
the  keeper  of  all  the  possessions  of  the 
family.  Even  though  a  man  has  been  mar- 
ried to  a  woman  a  score  of  years  and  may 
have  grown-up  children,  he  may  suddenly 
find  himself  a  stranger  within  his  family 
when  it  comes  to  tribal  matters. 

The  law  of  tradition,  in  fact,  never  con- 
siders the  woman  equal  to  the  man;  in 
everything  the  woman  comes  second.  Prep- 
aration for  a  party  is  done  by  the  woman, 
the  men  get  served  first  and  the  woman 
may  share  what  is  left  over,  but  she  must 
eat  in  the  kitchen.  Only  when  all  the  male 
guests  have  gone  home  may  she  eat  in  the 


dining  hall.  In  private  life  the  man  comes 
first.  The  wife  must  get  up  and  prepare  the 
meal  for  the  man.  When  going  for  a  walk 
she  may  accompany  the  man,  but  at  a  re- 
spectable distance  behind  him.  Respect 
does  not  end  here.  When  speaking  of  her 
husband,  it  would  be  considered  rude  to 
mention  his  name.  She  will  substitute  "he" 
or  "father  of  John"  (one  of  the  children), 
when  referring  to  him.  Speaking  personal- 
ly to  her  husband,  she  will  never  mention 
his  name  but  will  use  the  word  "oneself." 

The  population  of  the  Minangkarbau 
people  can  be  classified  into  two  categories, 
the  noble  families  and  rulers  (who  once 
owned  most  of  the  real  estate)  and  the 
non-titled  class.  Many  of  the  noble  class 
seem  to  have  the  attitude  that  every  day 
is  a  holiday;  and,  as  a  result,  not  a  few 
fall  victim  to  money-lending  and  become' 
destitute.  Most  of  the  people,  however,  are 
industrious;  and  regardless  of  the  class  in 
which  they  belong,  the  matriarchal  system 
guarantees  that  the  family  is  provided  a 
livelihood,  as  each  family  owns  rice  fields. 
One  hardly  ever  finds  a  beggar  among  the 
Minangkarbau  people. 

Among  these  people,  in  their  compara- 
tive prosperity  and  ancient  traditional 
laws,  rebellions  and  discord  in  community 
and  family  life  are  prevalent,  as  in  other 
parts  of  the  world.  Many  among  these  peo- 
ple are  realizing,  too,  that  it  is  not  in  man 
to  direct  his  steps,  and  that  the  only  laws 
that  lead  to  peaceful  community  living  and 
unity  are  Jehovah's  perfect  laws.  Such 
ones  then  abandon  polygamy  and  other  un- 
scriptural  practices,  realizing  that  "the  law 
of  Jehovah  is  perfect,  bringing  back  the 
soul.  The  reminder  of  Jehovah  is  trust- 
worthy, making  the  inexperienced,  one 
wise."— Ps.  19:7. 


Husbands,  continue  loving  your  wives,  just  as  the  Christ  also  loved 
the  congregation  and  delivered  up  himself  for  it. — Bph.  5:25. 


MARCH  88,  1961 


19 


^<**ty  S-Ufc  \r&m  <Tt\anito\sa 


By  "Awoket"  corratpondtM  In  Canada 

■■■ANITOBANS  are  fortunate:  The  river* 
|X1  and  lakes  in  their  province  abound  with 
pj0|  some  one  hundred  varieties  of  fish.  Fif- 
teen species  have  commercial  value,  some  of 
them  being  pickerel,  whitefish,  sawger,  pike, 
tullibee,  sucker,  perch,  bass,  carp  and  maria. 
Most  outstanding  is  the  famous  Winnipeg 
goldeya  What  a  tasty  fish! 
9  "I  think  there  is  nothing  as  tasty  as  a 
Winnipeg  goideye,"  exclaimed  one  writer.  And 
Indeed,  this  delicious  little  fish  is  so  much  in 
demand  that  production  cannot  come  any. 
where  near  to  meeting  the  demand. 
O  The  goldeye  is  subjected  to  a  very  interest- 
ing process.  When  first  caught  it  is  placed 
in  cold  storage;  then  when  fully  frozen  it  is 
removed  and  washed  in  warm  water,  partially 
thawed,  scales  are  removed  and  it  is  dipped 
in  a  processing  brine.  The  next  step  involves 
skewering  it  in  strings,  head  uppermost,  and 
placing  it  upon  a  rack  to  dry.  After  a  short 
drying  period  the  fish  are  wheeled,  still  on 
the  drying  rack,  into  the  "smoker,"  where 
the  smoke  from  a  slow  fire  of  oak  logs  rising 
through  the  strings  of  goldeyes  completes  the 
process. 

O  Goldeyes  are  easy  to  prepare  for  the  fry- 
ing pan,  which  in  all  probability  enhances 
their  reputation.  A  smoked  goldeye  Is  merely 
placed  in  a  pan  with  a  half  inch  or  so  of 
water  and  baked  In  an  oven  of  350  to  375 
degrees  Fahrenheit  for  about  fifteen  minutes. 
When  the  fish  is  removed  from  the  oven,  the 
skin  is  easily  peeled  off  and  the  nsh  is  ready 
to  serve.  Not  only  is  the  goldeye  extremely 
tasty,  but  its  attractive  red  and  white  meat 
makes  it  a  colorful  dish.  Goldeye,  incidentally, 
is  usually  served  whole— eyes,  head  and  tall. 
If  not,  beware  of  substitution! 
©  Manitoba,  with  its  39,000  square  miles  of 
lakes,  rivers  and  streams,  is  ideally  suited  for 
fresh-water  fishing.  This  vast  area  of  water 
is  almost  as  large  as  the  whole  of  England 
(about  50,000  square  miles).  New  lakes  are 
opened  up  every  year  for  commercial  fishing. 


•  Interesting  Indeed  are  the  methods  used 
In  fishing.  In  the  summer,  fishing-  fleets  of 
motor  skiffs  on  the  smaller  lakes  and  diesel- 
powered  whitefish  boats  on  the  larger  lakes 
go  out  to  set  their  nets.  In  the  winter, 
caterpillar. tractor-drawn  trailers  on  sleighs 
are  used  on  the  frozen  lakes  to  bring  in  over 
half  the  total  fish  caught 

O  From  November  to  February  the  lakes  are 
a  vast,  frigid  desert  of  snow  and  ice.  Here 
is  a.  bfeak  and  barren  wilderness  often  rav- 
aged by  sixty-mile-an-hour  winds,  with  tem- 
peratures dropping  to  thirty  or  forty  degrees 
below  zero!  It  would  seem  to  present  an  In- 
surmountable obstacle  to  the  men  whose  live- 
lihood depends  on  fishing.  But  the  men  are 
hardy,  and  at  early  dawn  they  set  out  to  the 
fishing  grounds,  sometimes  remaining  on  the 
frozen  lake  for  two  and  three  days  in  their 
mobile  homes. 

9  Despite  the  adverse  conditions,  the  rewards 
for  persistence  are  lucrative  in  a  good  season. 
An  operator  with  his  crew  of  one  to  two  men 
can  garner  as  much  as  $200  to  $300  a  day. 
There  Is  a  considerable  initial  investment  in- 
volved, however— one  amounting  to  about 
$4,000  to  buy  the  nylon  nets,  motorboats  and 
other  equipment. 

#  To  keep  Manitoba  lakes  well  stocked  the 
Department  of  Fisheries  operates  a  number 
of  fish  hatcheries.  Patrols  arff  sent  out  on 
all  lakes,  both  in  summer  and  in  winter,  to 
ensure  that  regulations  are  followed.  A  fleet 
of  boats,  trucks  and  bombardier  snowmobiles 
—sometimes  even  airplanes — carry  out  these 
patrols. 

«  The  fame  of  Manitoba's  fresh-water  fish 
has  spread  far  and  wide.  Whether  one  is  in 
Montreal,  New  York,  Chicago  or  Lob  Angeies, 
the  pickerel,  whitefish  and  goldeye  are  found 
on  the  menus  of  the  most  exclusive  dining 
places.  It  you  are  fortunate  enough  to  enjoy 
some  ot  Manitoba's  tasty  fish,  reflect  upon 
the  hardy  fishermen  who  wrest  their  liveli- 
hood from  wide  fresh-water  lakes  located  in 
the  center  of  a  continent 


THE    riHST    PUiiPQSE    DF    SCIENCE 
C  "The  first  purpose  of  science  is  to  learn  about  God,  and  admire  Him,  through 
His  handiwork.  If  any  usefulness  comes  in — as  it  does  In  large  quantities — why, 
So  much  the  better.  If  scientists  looked  upon  their  work  in  this  way  they  would 
cease  to  worship  science," — Anthony  Standen,  Science  Is  a  Sacred  Cow. 


20 


AWAKE! 


THE  OIL  SITUATION 


By 


mHE  use  of  mineral-oil    ***  *'* 
1  products  has  come  a  long 

way  since  Noah  and  Moses  float- 
ed to  safety  in  pitch-sealed  ves- 
sels and  the  Babel-builders  mor- 
tared their  bricks  together  with 
bitumen.  The  oil  industry  as  we 
know  it  today  is  just  over  one 
hundred  years  old,  dating  from 
the  day,  in  August,  1859,  when 
Edwin  Drake  struck  oil  at  Titus- 
ville,  Pennsylvania. 

Since  that  date  oil  production 
has  gone  forward  in  a  series  of  leaps  and 
bounds— 1,000,000  tons  in  1873,  10,000,- 
000  tons  in  1890,  100,000,000  tons  in  1921, 
500,000,000  tons  in  1950-^and  has  now 
reached  the  fabulous  figure  of  a  billion 
tons  a  year!  For  years,  the  demand  for 
petroleum  products  equaled  and  at  times 
(such  as  during  the  Suez  crisis)  even  ex- 
ceeded the  supply,  which  meant  that  prices 
could  be  fixed  artificially  by  the  big  oil 
companies  and  by  the  governments  of  the 
producer  countries.  But  that  situation  is 
rapidly  changing. 

For  reasons  that  will  later  be  explained, 
the  giant  companies  are  no  longer  able  to 
control  production  and  maintain  a  favor- 
able (to  them!)  sellers'  market.  Today  sup- 
ply exceeds  demand.  A  report  published 
recently  in  London  by  the  Iraq  Petroleum 
Company  puts  the  surplus  as  high  as  five 
million  barrels  a  day,  or  250  million  tons 
a  year,  which  is  25  percent  of  world  pro- 
duction. A  more  conservative  figure  was 
given  in  Le  Monde  dated  September  14, 
1960,  as  follows:  "All  the  official  and  pri- 
vate statistics  show  there  is  increasing 
overproduction,  exceeding  average  yearly 
consumption  by  nearly  10  percent."  Wheth- 
er the  surplus  amounts  to  10  or  25  percent 
of  world  production,  the  fact  remains  that 


'Awoke!"  correspondent 
in  Fro  nee 


there  is  at  present  a  glut 
of  oil  and  that  certain  pow- 
erful interests  that  can 
weigh  heavily  on  govern- 
mental decisions  find  their 
entrenched  positions  chal- 
lenged for  the  first  time. 
Past  experience  has  shown 
that  when  oil  interests  are 
at  stake  a  situation  can 
develop  that  is  highly 
inflammable,  not  to  say  ex- 
plosive! 


The  Big  Seven  Oil  Cartel 

Three  names  stand  out  in  the  history  of 
today's  oil  industry:  John  D.  Rockefeller, 
Henry  Deterding  and  William  d'Arcy. 
Rockefeller  dominated  the  oil  market  in 
America  and  in  many  other  parts  of  the 
world  for  some  forty  years.  He  founded  the 
company  Standard  Oil  of  Ohio  in  1870,  and 
his  empire  grew  into  an  industrial  levia- 
than so  big  that  it  was  divided  into  thirty- 
three  separate  companies  by  U.S.  court 
action  in  1911.  But  the  dismembered  parts 
grew  into  new  colossi  of  which  Standard 
Oil  of  New  Jersey,  Standard  Oil  of  Cali- 
fornia and  Socony-Mobil  Oil  are  but  three. 

Deterding  became  the  head  of  the  Royal 
Dutch  Petroleum  Company  in  1900.  This 
Dutch  concern,  founded  in  1883,  was  pro- 
ducing oil  in  the  Netherlands  East  Indies, 
It  soon  attracted  the  attention  of  a  British 
firm,  the  Shell  Transport  and  Trading 
Company,  whose  ships  were  plying  Far 
Eastern  waters  with  nacre  and  other  prod- 
ucts. In  1907  the  two  companies  amalga- 
mated into  the  Royal  Dutch  Shell  group, 
which,  due  to  the  business  acumen  of  De- 
terding, soon  grew  into  the  most  powerful 
competitor  of  Standard  Oil,  supplying  by 
the  end  of  World  War  I,  75  percent  of  all 


MARCH  88,  1961 


21 


oil  produced  outside  the  United  States. 
William  d'Arcy,  British  diplomat  and 
twentieth -century  merchant  adventurer, 
laid  the  foundations  for  a  third  oil  colos- 
sus. In  1901  he  obtained  for  his  company, 
d'Arcy  Exploration,  an  oil  concession  from 
the  shah  of  Persia  for  an  area  in  that  land 
more  than  twice  the  size  of  France.  When 
oil  was  struck,  in  1908,  he  changed  the 
name  of  this  concern  to  Anglo-Persian  Oil 
Company.  Just  before  the  first  world  war 
broke  out,  the  British  Admiralty,  guided 
by  the  canny  foresight  of  a  little-known 
sea  lord  called  Winston  Churchill,  took 
over  a  controlling  interest  in  this  firm, 
which  later  became  known  as  the  Anglo- 
Iranian  Oil  Company  and  more  recently 
as  British  Petroleum  (B.P.), 

To  B.P.,  Shell  and  the  three  main  daugh- 
ter companies  of  the  Rockefeller  empire, 
two  other  oil  giants  must  be  added  to  com- 
plete the  list  of  the  Big  Seven  oil  cartel. 
They  are  the  Gulf  and  Texas  oil  compan- 
ies, both  of  which  were  formed  (the  for- 
mer by  the  Mellons,  American  aluminum 
magnates)  following  the  discovery  of  oil 
in  Texas  at  the  beginning  of  the  century. 
Two  factors  contributed  to  the  rapid  ex- 
pansion of  these  oil  companies:  the  mass 
production  of  automobiles,  started  by  Hen- 
ry Ford  in  1911,  and  World  War  I.  Toward 
the  end  of  the  war  oil  was  as  vital  for  vic- 
tory as  manpower.  Georges  Clemenceau 
stated:  "Each  drop  of  oil  is  worth  a  drop 
of  blood,"  and  Britain's  Lord  Curzon  spoke 
of  the  Allies  as  'sailing  to  victory  on  a  sea 
of  petrol.'  As  for  the  oil  companies,  they 
sailed'on  the  same  sea— to  prosperity! 

The  post-World-War-I  peace  period 
brought  certain  difficulties  for  the  oil  in- 
dustry. Commercial  concerns  and  private 
individuals  spending  their  own  money  are 
annoyingly  economical  in  comparison  with 
wartime  wastefulness.  It  would  take  time 
for  peacetime  demand  to  attain  the  con- 
sumption reached  during  the  war.  By  1925 

22 


supply  exceeded  demand  by  over  30  per- 
cent. To  make  matters  worse,  the  British 
and  American  oil  industries  engaged  in  a 
fierce  battle  to  conquer  new  markets 
throughout  the  world.  This  led  to  a  price 
war,  which,  although  beneficial  for  the 
consumers,  cut  deeply  into  the  profits  of 
the  oil  companies.  The  latter,  doubtless 
considering  that  philanthropy  is  all  right 
in  its  place,  came  to  the  conclusion  that 
co-operation  would  have  certain  advan- 
tages over  free- enterprise  competition. 

In  1928  Deterding  of  Shell  invited  the 
presidents  of  Anglo-Iranian  and  Standard 
Oil  of  New  Jersey  to  a  grouse-shooting 
party  at  his  castle  in  Achnacarry,  Scot- 
land. Grouse  they  shot  and  "grouse"*  they 
did — about  the  oil  situation,  finally  agree- 
ing that  something  would  have  to  be  done. 
On  September  17  of  that  year  the  three 
companies  reached  what  has  come  to  be 
known  as  the  Achnacarry  Agreement, 

The  quickest  way  to  sum  up  this  agree- 
ment is  to  take  verbatim  Webster's  defi- 
nition of  the  word  "cartel":  "An  inter- 
national combination  of  rival  firms  for 
regulating  production  and  prices  in  a  given 
field."  It  outlined  a  series  of  "as  is"  prin- 
ciples by  which  the  three  companies  agreed 
to  pool  their  equipment  and  to  share  the 
market  in  proportion  to  their  current  pro- 
duction and  sales,  this  proportion  to  stay 
"as  was"  in  1928.  Further  conventions 
completed  the  Achnacarry  Agreement  in 
1932  and  1934,  and  these  were  signed  not 
only  by  the  three  original  companies  but 
also  by  Gulf,  Texas  and  Socony-Vacuum. 
Thus  the  big  companies  sheltered  them- 
selves from  what  the  preamble  to  the  Ach- 
nacarry Agreement  quaintly  calls  "de- 
structive competition." 

From  time  to  time  since  then  the  Big 
Seven  oil  cartel  has  had  to  put  up  with 
"annoying"  antitrust  proceedings  in  the 

*  "To  grouse" — British  equivalent  for  lo  grumble  or 
complain. 

AWAKE! 


United  States.  Reporting  on  one  such  case, 
which  took  seven  years  to  settle,  the  New 
York  Times  of  November  15,  1960,  wrote: 
"The  [American]  Government's  1953  civil 
suit  charged  that  five  United  States  oil 
companies,  with  the  collaboration  of  two 
British  dominated  companies,  conspired 
to  control  a  majority  of  the  world's  oil 
wells,  refineries,  tankers,  pipelines  and 
marketing  facilities."  But,  as  Daniel  Du- 
rand  states  in  his  book  La  Politique  Petro- 
liere  Internationale,  "most  of  these  cases 
are  either  finally  abandoned  or  settled  out 
of  court  between  the  Administration  and 
the  accused." 

The  Cartel's  Heyday 

The  terms  of  the  Achnacarry  Agree- 
ment, inapplicable  inside  the  United  States 
due  to  the  antitrust  laws,  were  neverthe- 
less to  be  the  governing  principles  for  the 
bulk  of  the  world's  oil  industry  over  a  pe- 
riod of  roughly  thirty  years.  During  this 
period  the  oil  companies,  and  particularly 
the  Big  Seven,  became  globe-encircling 
concerns.  The  American  companies,  con- 
scious of  the  fact  that  most  of  the  world's 
oil  resources  outside  the  United  States 
were  in  the  hands  of  the  British-controlled 
companies,  set  out  to  acquire  oil-prospect- 
ing rights  wherever  "black  gold"  could  be 
found  throughout  the  world. 

Thus,  by  1958,  Standard  Oil  of  New  Jer- 
sey was  obtaining  only  20  percent  of  its 
oil  from  U.S.  wells,  the  remainder  com- 
ing from  places  as  far  apart  as  Canada 
(through  its  subsidiary  Imperial  Oil) ,  Ven- 
ezuela, Saudi  Arabia,  Iraq,  Iran  and  Qatar. 
Of  the  Big  Seven,  only  the  Texas  Company 
gets  a  little  more  than  half  its  oil  from 
the  United  States,  the  others  obtaining 
most  of  their  supplies  either  from  Vene- 
zuela or  the  Middle  East. 

Although  able  to  reach  agreement  when 
their  collective  interests  are  at  stake,  the 
members  of  the  oil  cartel  manifest  canni- 


balistic tendencies  when  it  comes  to  ac- 
quiring or  retaining  oil  concessions  in  oth- 
er lands.  It  would  take  pages  to  describe 
the  frantic  jockeyings  for  position  in  Ven- 
ezuela by  Standard  Oil,  Shell  and  Gulf,  and 
to  tell  of  their  efforts,  when  once  their  own 
feudings  were  finished,  to  keep  out  the 
other  oil  companies.  The  same  story,  with 
more  or  less  sinister  variations,  could  be 
told  of  the  rivalry  between  the  Big  Seven 
over  the  Middle  East  oil  fields. 

The  British  companies  tried  hard  to 
keep  the  Americans  out  of  the  Middle  East, 
but.  by  1950  45  percent  of  Middle  East  oil 
was  being  produced  by  the  five  big  Ameri- 
can concerns.  At  that  date,  Anglo-Iranian 
held  a  monopoly  of  Iranian  oil  and  shared 
the  rich  Kuwait  oil  reserves  with  Gulf. 
Aramco  (the  Arabian  American  Oil  Com- 
pany, grouping  Standard  Oil  of  California, 
the  Texas  Co.,  Standard  Oil  of  New  Jersey 
and  Socony- Vacuum )  held  a  monopoly  of 
the  fabulous  Saudi  Arabian  oil  fields,  and 
Iraq  and  Qatar  oil  was  shared  by  Anglo- 
Iranian,  Shell,  Standard  of  New  Jersey, 
Socony  and  the  French  C.F.P.  (Compagnie 
frangaise  des  Petroles). 

However,  since  Mossadegh  nationalized 
the  oil  industry  in  Iran  in  1951,  Britain's 
monopoly  in  that  country  has  been  broken. 
By  means  of  an  American-inspired  "con- 
sortium," the  six  other  members  of  the  oil 
cartel  now  have  a  greasy  finger  in  the 
Iranian  oil  pie.  Since  1954  the  five  big 
American  companies  have  had  access  to 
40  percent  of  Iranian  oil,  which  means 
that  the  United  States  has  replaced  Britain 
as  the  principal  oil-producing  power  in  the 
Middle  East. 

But  these  fratricidal  shovings  and  push- 
ings  inside  the  oil  cartel  have  not  prevent- 
ed each  of  its  members  from  making  ends 
meet,  so  to  speak.  For  instance,  Standard 
Oil  of  New  Jersey  does  seven  billion  dol- 
lars' worth  of  business  each  year,  which 
is  second  only  to  the  turnover  of  General 


MAROH  22,  1961 


23 


Motors  and  just  about  equals  one  half  of 
France's  state  budget!  Shell  uses  a  nine- 
million-ton  fleet  of  tankers — twice  the  size 
of  France's  total  merchant  tonnage.  Ac- 
cording to  the  New  York  Times  of  Novem- 
ber 21,  1960,  in  1959  alone  Shell  spent 
$16,000,000  in  the  U.S.  merely  on  adver- 
tising. In  1958  the  five  big  American  com- 
panies netted  well  over  one  and  a  half  bil- 
lion dollars,  and  the  two  British-controlled 
companies  had  a  net  profit  of  just  600 
million  dollars.  This  period,  from  1928  to 
1958  (including  the  second  world  war, 
which  was  no  disaster  for  the  oil  compa- 
nies), was  the  heyday  of  the  Big  Seven 
oil  cartel. 

A  report  published  in  Le  Monde  on  Feb- 
ruary 12,  1960,  summed  up  as  follows  the 
situation  that  prevailed  during  that  pe- 
riod: "On  a  world-wide  scale,  seven  com- 
panies, three  groups,  two  nations — Great 
Britain  and  the  United  States — were  to 
build  a  bicephalous  [two-headed]  empire. 
In  1949  a  U.S.  congressional  committee  re- 
vealed that  the  seven  companies  controlled 
92  percent  of  oil  reserves  outside  the 
U.S.S.R  and  the  U.S.A.,  99  percent  of  Mid- 
dle East  oil  production,  all  the  main  pipe- 
lines, half  the  world's  tanker  fleet  and  prac- 
tically all  the  distribution." 

With  such  a  stranglehold  on  the  world's 
oil  resources  and  marketing  facilities,  it 
was  relatively  easy  for  the  oil  cartel  to 
maintain  an  artificial  oil  market  that  took 
little  or  no  account  of  the  law  of  supply 
and  demand.  Prices  were  fixed  arbitrarily, 
with  no  thought  for  the  consumer,  wheth- 
er a  private  individual  or  a  government, 
whether  in  times  of  peace  or  war. 

Thus,  in  1943,  Prime  Minister  Winston 
Churchill  had  the  unpleasant  surprise  of 
discovering  that  the  Anglo-Persian  Oil 
Company,  whose  biggest  shareholder 
(thanks  to  Churchill,  thirty  years  earlier) 
was  the  British  Admiralty,  was  selling  Per- 
sian oil  to  the  British  Navy  in  the  Middle 


East  at  a  price  that  included  fictitious 
freight  charges  as  if  the  oil  had  come  from 
the  Mexican  gulf!  Similarly,  the  American 
government,  after  having  paid  out  mil- 
lions of  dollars  to  keep  Aramco  in  Saudi 
Arabia  during  the  war,  got  a  rude  awaken- 
ing when  it  was  disclosed  that  Aramco  was 
very  patriotically  showing  its  gratitude  by 
charging  the  U.S.  Navy  $1.05  a  barrel  in- 
stead of  the  agreed  price  of  40  cents!  If  oil 
companies  will  do  things  like  that  to  their 
own  governments  in  times  of  national 
emergency,  what  treatment  can  the  small 
private  consumer  expect  from  them?* 

The  Cartel  Challenged 

As  mentioned  earlier  in  this  article, 
there  is  a  glut  of  oil  in  the  world  today, 
resulting  in  a  buyers'  market;  and  much 
oil  is  being  sold  below  the  "posted  prices" 
rigged  by  the  oil  cartel.  Obviously,  some- 
thing has  occurred  to  upset  the  plans  of 
the  Big  Seven,  who,  for  some  thirty  years, 
had  carefully  avoided  letting  such  a  situa- 
tion develop.  What  has  happened? 

The  challenge  has  come  from  three  dif- 
ferent quarters:  enterprising  independent 
oil  companies,  "rebellious"  local  govern- 
ments and  the  Soviet  Union. 

In  oil  parlance,  "independent"  means 
outer  Big  Seven  oil  concerns.  Such  com- 
panies have  been  operating  for  years  in 
most  of  the  industrial  countries  of  the 
West,  particularly  in  the  United  States, 
where  the  antitrust  legislation  has  favored 
their  development.  Some  of  these  inde- 
pendents have  themselves  become  huge 
concerns  able  to  devote  millions  of  dollars 
to  oil  prospecting  in  other  lands.  But,  un- 
like the  Big  Seven,  they  cannot  afford  to  let 

*  In  all  fairness  It  must  be  added  thai  the  oi)  etna- 
parties  are  not  alone  to  blame  for  the  high  price"  of 
gasoline  In  many  countries.  The  governments  them- 
selves reap  a  big  Income  Irom  oil.  When  an  Englishman 
buys  a  gallon  of  petrol,  more  than  half  the  price  he 
pays  goes  to  the  government,  and  lor  every  liter  of 
essence  a  French  motorist  buys,  some  three  quarters  of 
the  price  represents  state  tax. 


24 


AWAKE! 


the  newly  discovered  oil  lie  dormant  until 
needed.  They  need  to  get  quick  returns  for 
their  investments,  which  means  pumping 
out  the  oil  as  fast  as  possible  and  selling 
it  just  as  fast,  even  at  "unapproved"  prices. 

The  same  is  true  of  the  non-American 
independents  such  as  the  Italian  E.N.I. 
(Ente  nazionale  idrocarburi)  and  the  Jap- 
anese Export  Oil  Company.  Not  only  are 
these  independents  producing  and  selling 
oil  outside  the  Big  Seven  cartel,  but  in  ad- 
dition they  are  willing  to  allow  the  gov- 
ernments of  the  producer  countries  a  much 
larger  percentage  of  the  oil  revenues  than 
the  cartel  has  been  accustomed  to  giving. 

This,  in  turn,  has  made  the  local  gov- 
ernments more  demanding  in  their  rela- 
tions with  the  Big  Seven.  During  the  Iat- 
ter's  heyday,  many  of  the  oil-producing 
countries  were  willing  to  accept  as  little 
as  10  percent  of  the  revenues  coming  from 
the  oil  pumped  from  their  soil.  By  1954 
they  had  succeeded  in  wringing  a  50-50 
share  from  the  cartel.  But  in  recent  years 
the  independent  companies  have  been  will- 
ing to  grant  the  local  governments  an  even 
higher  percentage   of  revenues  and  the 
governments  are  now  chafing  under  the 
Big  Seven's  50-50  agreements.  In  1958  the 
Venezuelan  government  squeezed  a  60-40 
agreement  out  of  the  cartel  members  op- 
erating in   that  country.   The  following 
year  a  series  of  Arab  Oil  Congresses  began 
(attended   by   Venezuelan   delegates)    at 
which  the  Middle  East  oil-producing  coun- 
tries have  been  laying  claim  to  a  larger 
share  in  the  oil  proceeds. 

All  this  is  a  big  enough  headache  for  the 
Big  Seven,  but  to  make  matters  worse,  the 
French  are  beginning  to  pump  millions  of 


tons  of  oil  out  of  the  Sahara  into  an  al- 
ready glutted  market,  and  the  Russians 
have  started  exporting  sizable  quantities 
of  oil  to  Western  countries  at  prices  much 
lower  than  the  cartel's. 

One  way  for  the  oil  giants  to  maintain 
their  huge  profits,  while  granting  larger 
revenues  to  the  local  governments  (as  they 
most  surely  will  have  to  do),  would  be  to 
increase  their  sales.  But  the  market  is  al- 
ready saturated  with  oil.  Another  way 
would  be  to  increase  their  prices,  but  the 
stiff  competition  brought  about  by  the 
buyers'  market  makes  this  impossible.  The 
quickest  way  to  turn  the  current  buyers' 
market  into  a  sellers'  market  would  be  to 
reduce  production.  But  the  producer  coun- 
tries, with  the  possible  exception  of  Vene- 
zuela, will  not  hear  of  this,  nor  will  the 
independent  companies.  Finally,  the  only 
way,  short  of  a  "hot  war,"  to  stop  Soviet 
oil  from  invading  the  Western  markets 
would  be  to  impose  a  "cold  war"  economic 
blockade.  But  it  is  doubtful  if  countries 
such  as  Italy,  which  has  just  signed  a  five- 
year  oil  agreement  with  Russia,  would 
stand  for  this. 

The  current  oil  situation  is  therefore 
complicated  and  highly  dangerous.  A  huge 
monopoly  is  being  seriously  challenged  for 
the  first  time  in  its  short  history.  Power- 
ful interests  are  at  stake.  The  Suez  crisis, 
still  fresh  in  our  minds,  is  a  chilling  re- 
minder of  the  lengths  to  which  the  nations 
will  go  to  protect  their  oil  interests.  And 
the  gruesome  fact  is  that  a  non-atomic, 
classical  "hot  war"  would  quickly  absorb 
the  oil  surplus,  send  the  independents  run- 
ning back  home  and  keep  Russian  oil  out 
of  the  West.  The  oil  situation  is  certainly 
worth  watching — closely! 


MARCH  22,  1961 


25 


Field  Ministry  Experiences 


Talking   with    Catholics 

ESUALLY  when  one  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
knocks  at  a  door  and  the  householder 
asks,  "Are  you  one  of  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses?" it  means  that  the  householder  is  not 
'interested.  A  Witness  in  the  Midwest  of  the 
United  States,  however,  had  a  different  ex- 
perience. When  answering  "Yes"  to  that  ques- 
tion he  was  invited  in  by  a  young  couple 
who  said:  "We  are  devout  Catholics  and  our 
very  best  and  lifetime  friends  out  in  Wash- 
ington have  become  Jehovah's  witnesses.  We 
want  to  know  what  on  earth  we  can  write 
them  to  bring  them  back  to  their,  senses." 
For  the  next  two  hours  the  Witness  showed 
them  from  their  big  new  $30  Bible  why  their 
lifetime  friends  had  become  Jehovah's  wit- 
nesses. "I  am  going  to  see  my  priest  about 
this  at  once,"  said  the  young  woman  as  the 
Witness  left. 

+  When  the  Witness  made  a  return  call  the 
young  couple  were  very  cool  and  told  him 
he  need  not  return.  The  priest  had  told  them 
not  to  study  the  Bible  with  strangers,  as  he 
would  study  with  them  as  soon  as  he  had 
time  and  especially  if  they  could  get  a  group 
together,  enough  to  make  it  worth  while  for 
him,  as  he  could  not  take  time  for  them  alone. 
They  waited,  and  so  did  the  Witness,  who  re- 
turned from  time  to  time,  but  the  priest  never 
kept  his  promise. 

+  Then  one  December  day  the  couple  phoned 
the  Witness  and  asked  him  to  have  dinner 
with  them.  Thereafter  a  Bible  study  was 
started,  and  within  a  short  time  they  took 
their  stand  for  Jehovah  and  that  in  spite 
of  their  Catholic  landlady,  their  Catholic 
neighbors,  the  nuns  at  school  where  their 
children  attended,  the  priest  and  their  rela- 
tives, some  of  whom  came  over  450  miles  to 
straighten  them  out  and  "bring  them  back 
to  their  senses."  They  took  their  children  out 
of  the  parochial  school  and  moved  from  the 
neighborhood  that  was  under  the  shadow  of 
the  Roman  Catholic  church, 
+  Within  three  months  from  the  time  when 
the  Witness  had  dinner  with  them  they  dis- 
posed of  two  large  sacks  full  of  crucifixes, 
crosses,  holy  pictures,  holy  water,  images, 
idols,  the  altar  of  the  Virgin  Mary,  before 
which  they  had  spent  many  hours  praying, 
the  chains  around  their  necks  and  expensive 

26 


rosaries.  They  continued  to  advance  in  ap- 
preciation of  the  truth  of  God's  Word  so 
much  that  last  year  they  symbolized  their 
dedication  by  water  baptism  and  now  enjoy 
the  privilege  of  knocking  at  the  doors  of 
others,  as  do  all  witnesses  of  Jehovah. 

"Feed  My   Little  Sheep" 

♦  A  person  of  good  will  in  Argentina  visited 
friends  in  the  country,  some  200  kilometers 
(120  miles)  from  the  nearest  congregation  of 
Jehovah's  witnesses,  and  while  there  spoke 
to  his  friends  about  Jehovah  God  and  His 
kingdom.  Returning,  this  person  reported 
that  these  people  wanted  to  know  more  about 
the  truth  of  the  Bible,  that  they  were  Roman 
Catholic  but  not  at  all  pleased  with  the  local 
priest. 

♦  So  a  witness  of  Jehovah  wrote  the  family, 
and  the  man  answered  at  once,  asking  for 
help  to  study  the  Bible.  This  was  provided 
by  means  of  a  Bible  correspondence  course. 
As  the  man  and  his  family  received  their 
copy  of  La  Atalaya  (The  Watchtower,  Span- 
ish), they  studied  it,  marking  the  answers 
with  a  red  pencil.  They  then  sent  this  marked 
copy  to  the  Witness  to  be  corrected,  which 
he  did  with  a  pencil  of  another  color  and 
then  sent  it  back  so  that  the  family  could 
see  the  right  answers  and  make  the  correc- 
tions. 

♦  After  studying  for  a  time,  the  man  wrote 
to  the  Witness,  opening  his  letter  with  the 
words:  "Dear  Brother  in  the  faith  of  Christ. 
We  are  glad  to  know  that  we  are  doing  so 
well  with  the  study  and  we  will  do  all  we 
can  to  do  better  every  study.  Thank  you  for 
sending  the  book  From  Paradise  Lost  to  Para- 
dise Regained;  it  is  helping  us  to  understand 
the  Bible  better;  it  is  so  nice.  How  the  book 
guides  one  in  the  study  of  the  Bible!  As  you 
know,  I  have  five  children  and  all  are  study- 
ing. The  youngest  child  is  five  years  old  and 
does  not  know  how  to  read  as  yet,  but  asks 
us  to  explain  the  pictures,  and  asked  his 
mother  to  teach  him  to  pray  before  going  to 
bed.  I  hope  to  get  to  see  you  real  soon  if  it 
be  God's  will."  Arrangements  have  been  made 
to  have  a  traveling  representative  of  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  visit  this  family  and  help 
them  in  their  efforts  to  worship  Jehovah  God. 
— 1961  Yearbook  of  Jehovah's  Witnesses. 

AWAKE! 


MVQRP  IS   TRUTH 

lllllllllllllf 


Is  Capital   Punishment 
Right  or  Wrong? 

iiiiiifflllflfl'jifllii!1' 

BECAUSE  a  man's  life  is  the  most  pre- 
cious thing  he  has  and  the  taking  of 
it  is  a  costly  price  to  pay  for  committing 
a  crime,  there  have  been  heated  argu- 
ments world-wide  against  capital  punish- 
ment. So  strong  have  the  objections  been 
over  the  years  that  the  trend  in  the  West- 
ern world  has  been  toward  abolishing  it. 
Regarding  this  the  New  York  Times  of 
March  3,  1960,  stated:  "In  1780,  there 
were  about  350  offenses  punishable  by 
death  in  ^Britain.  Today  Britain  rarely  ex- 
ecutes anyone  and  usually  only  for  mur- 
der. But  she  is  not  unique  in  that  respect. 
Capital  punishment  for  civil  crimes  has 
been  abolished  in  thirty-five  foreign  coun- 
tries. Several  that  have  such  a  law  on  the 
books  never  invoke  it.  In  the  United  States 
it  has  been  abolished  in  nine  states.  In  ad- 
dition, bills  are  before  Congress  and  many 
State  Legislatures  to  end  the  death  sen- 
tence or  limit  it." 

Although  many  people  have  strong  feel- 
ings on  the  subject,  it  is  best  for  them  to 
consider  what  God's  Word  has  to  say  and 
let  feelings  give  way  to  reason.  Certainly 
what  the  Maker  of  life  says  about  the  tak- 
ing of  human  life  is  worth  considering.  As 
the  Supreme  Authority  on  law  his  Word 
is  the  best  guide  for  man  and  should  be 
permitted  to  direct  our  thinking. 

When  Jehovah  gave  his  law  to  the  first 
human  pair,  he  made  it  clear  to  them  that 
he  wanted  them  to  obey  it.  "As  for  the 
tree  of  the  knowledge  of  good  and  bad  you 


must  not  eat  trom  it,  ror  in  tne  aay  you 
eat  from  it  you  will  positively  die."  (Gen. 
2:17)  Note  that  the  punishment  for  dis- 
obeying divine  law  was  death.  By  disre- 
garding the  divine  law,  despite  the  fore- 
warned punishment,  Adam  and  Eve  showed 
that  they  did  not  appreciate  the  gift  of  life. 
In  due  time  capital  punishment  was  in- 
flicted upon  them. 

Well  over  sixteen  centuries  later  an  en- 
tire world  followed  a  similar  course  of 
willfully  violating  _  divine  law.  "Jehovah 
saw  that  the  badness  of  man  had  become 
great  in  the  earth  and  every  inclination  of 
the  thoughts  of  his  heart  was  only  bad  all 
the  time."  (Gen.  6:5)  They  made  no  effort 
to  change  from  their  wrong  way.  Aside 
from  eight  persons  who  received  God's  ap- 
proval, none  survived  the  great  Deluge 
that  destroyed  the  world  of  that  time.  They 
paid  with  their  lives  for  stubbornly  follow- 
ing a  course  of  lawlessness. 

Right  after  the  Flood  God  stressed  the 
variableness  of  human  life  when  he  said: 
"Anyone  shedding  man's  blood,  by  man 
will  his  own  blood  be  shed,  for  in  God's 
image  he  made  man."  (Gen.  9:6)  This 
meant  that  if  a  man  were  to  take  from  an- 
other man  his  most  valuable  possession — 
life,  he  would  be  deprived  of  his  own  most 
valuable  possession.  This  divine  law  was 
later  incorporated  in  the  Mosaic  Law  by 
the  command:  "If  any  harm  follow,  then 
thou  shalt  give  life  for  life."— Ex.  21:23, 
AS. 

In  the  days  of  Lot  when  lawlessness  was 
rampant  in  the  cities  of  Sodom  and  Gomor- 
rah God  judged  the  people  there  and  found 
them  unworthy  of  life.  For  their  wicked- 
ness they  suffered  capital  punishment  at 
the  hand  of  God.— Gen.  19:29. 

In  addition  to  murder,  God's  law  to  the 
nation  of  Israel  provided  capital  punish- 
ment for  other  crimes  against  divine  law. 
When  the  Law  was  given  at  Mt.  Sinai  that 
nation  agreed  to  obey  it.  "All  the  words 


MARCH  22,  1961 


27 


that  Jehovah  has  spoken  we  are  willing  to 
do."  (Ex,  24:3)  By  agreeing  to  obey  the 
Law  they  were  also  agreeing  to  its  sanc- 
tions for  disobedience.  On  several  occa- 
sions   it    was    necessary    to    bring    upon 
violators  of  it  the  sanction  of  capital  pun- 
ishment. Three  thousand  men  who  wor- 
shiped the  golden  calf  while  Moses  was  on 
Mt  Sinai  were  executed  for  their  crime. 
(Ex.  32:28)   Later  when  some  were  en- 
snared by  the  worship  of  Baal  of  Peor,  they 
were  killed.   (Num.  25:1-11)  God  judged 
them  and  made  known  his  judgment  to  his 
visible  representatives  in  that  theocratic 
nation.  It  was  proper  for  God  to  require 
capital  punishment  for  crimes  that  con- 
taminated his  people  whom  he  had  chosen 
for  himself  as  a  holy  nation. 

Although  Jesus  Christ  brought  the  law 
covenant  along  with  its  sanctions  to  an 
end,  he  did  not  express  disapproval  of  capi- 
tal punishment.  In  fact,  he  referred  to  it 
approvingly  in  some  of  his  parables  when 
he  spoke  about  the  fate  of  the  wicked.  The 
Scriptures  even  foretell  that  he  will  act  as 
executioner  of  wicked  violators  of  divine 
law.  "To  you  who  suffer  tribulation,  relief 
along  with  us  at  the  revelation  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  from  heaven  with  his  powerful  an- 
gels in  a  flaming  fire,  as  he  brings  due 
punishment  upon  those  who  do  not  know 
God  and  those  who  do  not  obey  the  good 
news  about  our  Lord  Jesus.  These  very 
ones  will  pay  the  penalty  of  everlasting  de- 
struction from  before  the  Lord  and  from 
the  glory  of  his  strength."— 2  Thess.  1:7-9. 
In  the  very  closing  pages  of  the  Bible 
we  read  of  the  wicked  in  the  four  quarters 
of  the  earth,  the  liars,  the  cowards  and 
those  who  add  or  take  from  the  book  of 
Revelation,  being  administered  capital 
punishment — the  death  penalty. — Rev.  20: 
7-9;  21:8; 22:19. 

■  Those  opposed  to  capital  punishment 
often  quote  the  sixth  of  the  Ten  Command- 
ments: "You  shall  not  kill."  But  let  it  be 


noted  that  these  commandments  were  not 
directed  to  the  government  of  Israel  but 
to  its  individual  members,  the  Israelites 
themselves.  For  example,  would  a  govern- 
ment be  commanded  not  to  covet  its  neigh- 
bor's wife?  The  sixth  commandment  there- 
fore did  not  go  contrary  to  the  law  of  God 
as  stated  to  Noah  right  after  the  Deluge; 
it  could  not,  because  God  does  not  contra- 
dict himself.  That  is  why  some  transla- 
tions read:  "You  must  not  murder."  In 
view  of  God's  mandate  at  Genesis  9:6,  it 
can  hardly  be  said  that  a  government  com- 
mits murder  when  it  executes  a  murderer. 
—Ex.  20:13,  RS;NW. 

It  should  also  be  noted  that  God  pro- 
vided for  mercy  to  be  shown  to  persons 
who  killed  by  accident  and  to  persons  who 
repent  of  their  crimes.  He  extends  such 
mercy  to  the  wicked  of  this  world  by  giv- 
ing them  ample  warning  and  opportunity 
to  repent  and  save  their  lives  before  the 
time  arrives  for  their  execution. 

While  there  may  be  grounds  for  ques- 
tioning the  right  of  governments  of  this 
world  to  require  capital  punishment  for 
violating  human  laws,  there  are  no  Scrip- 
tural grounds  for  saying  they  have  no 
right  to  execute  persons  guilty  of  violating 
the  divine  law  against  murder.  The  fact 
that  capital  punishment  is  a  Scriptural 
sanction  for  bloodshed  should  impress  upon 
all  the  high  value  God  expects  man  to  place 
upon  human  life.  War  does  not  change 
that  value. 

From  Genesis  to  Revelation  God's  Word 
testifies  to  the  justice  of  capital  punish- 
ment, but  it  also  testifies  to  the  loving 
quality  of  mercy  for  the  truly  repentant 
at  heart.  Under  the  rule  of  God's  kingdom 
mercy  will  be  extended  to  the  repentant, 
but  capital  punishment  will  be  required  of 
the  willfully  lawless.  "Jehovah  is  guarding 
all  those  loving  him,  but  all  the  wicked 
ones  he  will  annihilate." — Ps.  145:20. 


28 


AWAKE! 


^  WATC  H I  ft* 

THE 


\s 


WORLO 


High  Cost  of  the  Military 

^  On  February  3  the  West 
German  Finance  Ministry  dis- 
closed that  West  Germany  has 
paid  out  $16,600,000,000  since 
the  close  of  World  War  II  for 
the  maintenance  of  foreign 
troops  within  its  borders. 

Hepatitis  Increases 

<$>  On  February  3  the  U.S.  Pub- 
lic Health  Service*  said  that 
during  the  previous  week  1,856 
cases  of  hepatitis  had  been  re- 
ported. While  this  was  only  a 
slight  rise  from  the  week  be- 
fore, it  is  well  above  compara- 
ble periods  for  the  last  nine 
years.  Hepatitis  is  a  virus  in- 
fection of  the  liver  often  trans- 
mitted through  blood  transfu- 
sions. 

Population  Increase 

<#>  According  to  the  Canadian 
Press,  if  the  current  rate  of 
population  growth  continues, 
in  forty  years  the  earth  will 
have  more  than  doubled  its 
population,  reaching  over  six 
billion  persons. 

Americans  and  Their  Pets 

<§>  In  the  United  States  it  is 
said  that  55.6  percent  of  all 
families  have  animal  pets  of 
some  kind.  A  three-year  census 
of  the  pet  population  revealed 
that  Americans  keep  around 
the  home  an  estimated  26,700,- 
000  cats,  25,000,000  dogs,  15,- 
000,000  parakeets,   6,000,000 

MARCH  22,  1961 


canaries  and  3,000,000  turtles. 
Perhaps  most  surprising  is  the 
fact  that  100,000  monkeys  and 
10,000  skunks  are  said  to  be 
kept  by  Americans  as  house 
pets. 

Sheep-shearing  Record 

<$>  Godfrey  Bowen  recently 
broke  his  own  sheep -shea  ring 
record  by  clipping  643  animals 
in  a  nine-hour  working  day,  an 
average  of  more  than  one  a 
minute.  His  old  record  was 
456. 

Death  Toll  from  Fires 

<$>  According  to  a  report  of  the 
National  Fire  Protection  As- 
sociation, "the  over-all  1959 
Are  record  added  up  to  the 
worst  in  history."  In  the  United 
States  in  1959  there  were  11,- 
300  deaths  caused  by  fires,  and 
during  the  year  American 
homes  were  hit  by  Are  at  the 
rate  of  more  than  10,000  a 
week.  The  total  number  of 
fires  was  2,115,000. 

Death  Toll  on  European  Roads 

<$>  On  January  17  Paul  le  Vert, 
director  of  the  transport  divi- 
sion of  the  United  Nations 
Economic  Commission  for  Eu- 
rope, reported  that  in  Europe 
road  accidents  annually  claim 
60,000  lives.  Mr.  Vert  said  that 
cyclists  and  motorcyclists  com- 
pose some  45  percent  of  the 
fatalities. 


Fish  Can  Travel  by  Smell 

<$■  C.  W.  Threinen,  administra- 
tive assistant  in  the  Wisconsin 
Conservation  Department,  said 
that  experiments  indicate  that 
fish  can  reach  their  destination 
by  using  their  sense  of  smell. 
Long  ear  sun  fish  were  used  in 
the    experiments.    Some   were 
blinded,  others  had  their  sense 
of  smell  destroyed  and  a  third 
group  had  both  sight  and  smell 
destroyed.  When   placed  in  a 
stream,  those  blinded  but  still 
able  to  smell  were  able  to  trav- 
el back  to  their  homes  safely. 

Handling  Checks 

<§>  It  is  estimated  that  in  the 
United  States  last  year  15  bil- 
lion checks  were  written  and 
that  in  ten  years  the  figure 
will  reach  20  billion.  George 
Garnsey,  manager  of  methods 
and  procedures  at  National 
City  Bank,  Cleveland,  Ohio, 
explained:  "When  you  realize 
that  the  average  check  is  han- 
dled nine  times  until  it  is  re- 
turned to  the  originator  as  a 
canceled  check,  you  begin  to 
get  some  idea  of  the  time  and 
man  power  involved." 

Cancer  Toll 

<$>  During  1960  about  265,000 
Americans  died  of  cancer- — an 
increase  of  6,000  over  1959. 
Lung  cancer  killed  37,000  per- 
sons, 32,000  men  and  5,000 
women,  five  times  as  many  as 
twenty  years  ago.  Cancer  also 
claimed  the  lives  of  4,000  chil- 
dren under  15  years  of  age.  It 
is  said  that  more  school  chil- 
dren died  of  cancer  last  year 
than  from  any  other  disease. 
In  all,  for  every  six  deaths  in 
the  United  States,  one  is  caused 
by  cancer. 

Cost  of  Election  Campaigns 

<§>  On  January  26  U.S.  Senator 
Edward  V.  Long  reported  that 
he  had  heard  that  the  cost  for 
the  1960  presidential,  congres- 
sional and  local  election  cam- 
paigns was  more  than  $175,- 
000,000.  He  introduced  a  bill 
that  would  limit  an  individual's 
contribution  to  any  candidate 

29 


or  candidates  or  to.  any  politi- 
cal committee  or  committees 
to  $10,000. 

Divided  by  Politics 

<i>  On  January  29  the  Austra- 
lian Labor  party  leader,  Ar- 
thur Augustus  Calwell,  la- 
mented that  "every  Catliolic 
family,  every  convent,  every 
monastery,  every  rectory  is  di- 
vided." The  division  extends 
right  up  to  the  heads  of  the 
church  in  Australia.  In  the 
last  federal  election  in  1958 
the  Labor  party  was  split  when 
the  Democratic  National  party 
broke  away.  The  breakaway 
party  has  the  open  support  of 
Archbishop  Daniel  M  a  n  n  i  x, 
whose  political  viewpoint  has 
been  publicly  questioned  by 
Cardinal  Norman  T.  Gilroy  of 
Sydney. 

Water  Shortage 
4>  On  January  29  the  House 
Science  and  Astronautics  com- 
mittee warned  that  by  1970 
there  would  probably  be  a  crit- 
ical shortage  of  fresh  water 
in  the  United  States.  The  com- 
mittee said  that,  although  re- 
search is  being  done  on  con- 
verting salt  water  to  fresh,  it 
is  "proceeding  at  a  pace  which 
promises  to  be  inadequate  in 
view  of  the  time  and  need  fac- 
tors involved."  Twenty  years 
ago  the  nation  had  109,000,000,- 
000  more  gallons  of  water  a 
day  than  it  was  using,  but  by 
1960,  the  committee  said,  "the 
situation  was  reversed,  and  the 
rate  of  use  surpassed  dependa- 
ble supplies  by  8,000,000,000 
gallons  a  day." 

Bomb  Victims  StiU  Ailing 

<§>  According  to  a  Reuters 
press  report  of  January  30, 
there  are  230,000  persons  that 
are  still  suffering  from  radio- 
active diseases  resulting  from 
the  atomic  bomb  blasts  over 
Hiroshima  and  Nagasaki.  Ail- 
ments vary  from  burns  and 
bleeding  gums  to  cancer.  Some 
4,500  were  still  in  the  hospital 
by    the    end    of    1960.    Many 

30 


others,    it    is    reported,    have 
committed  suicide. 

Tokyo's  Commuter  Problem 

<§  During  rush  hours,  such  as 
between  seven  and  nine  in  the 
morning,  some  four  million 
people  in  the  world's  most  pop- 
ulous city  struggle  to  board 
trains.  Officials  estimate  that 
about  100  windows  a  day  are 
broken  as  a  result  of  pressing 
and  crowding  in  the  stuffed 
trains.  This  has  also  resulted 
in  countless  injuries  and  torn 
clothing.  As  of  December  1, 
1960,  Tokyo's  population  was 
9,709,439,  compared  to  about 
2,500,000  at  the  close  of  World 
War  rr. 

Avoiding  Sleep  While  Driving 

<$>  In  a  letter  to  the  British 
Medical  Journal,  Dr.  Alfred  B. 
Alexander  said  that  drowsi- 
ness while  driving  a  car  could 
be  overcome  by  taking  your 
shoes  off  and  driving  bare- 
footed. 

Indonesian  Airliner  Crash 

<§>  On  January  24  an  Indone- 
sian airliner  with  twenty-one 
aboard  went  down  in  the  hills 
of  west  Java.  Five  days  later 
when  a  ground  party  reached 
the  wreckage  they  reported 
that  all  aboard  had  been  killed. 

Refugees  from  East  Germany 

<$>  On  February  6  the  West 
German  Refugee  Ministry  an- 
nounced that  a  total  of  16,697 
refugees  from  Communist  East 
Germany  had  made  their  way 
into  West  Berlin  or  West  Ger- 
many during  the  month  of 
January.  This  was  an  increase*" 
of  2,298  over  the  previous 
month  and  is  compared  to  only 
9,905  of  January  a  year  ago. 

Hungary  Arrests  Priests 

<§>  Six  Roman  Catholic  priests, 
two  Cistercian  monks  and  a 
monk  in  another  religious  or- 
der were  among  those  arrested 
by  Hungarian  security  authori- 
ties on  charges  of  taking  part 
in  a  plot  against  the  state,  ac- 
cording to   a  Budapest  radio 


report.  The  leader  in  the  al- 
leged plot  was  Silvester  Koer- 
mendt,  a  tank  captain  in  World 
Warn. 

Wet  Year  in  England 
^  It  is  reported  that  the  pe- 
riod from  July  to  November 
1960  proved  to  be  the  wettest 
for  more  than  200  years  In 
England  and  Wales.  October 
was  the  wettest  in  57  years. 

Torture  Brings  Jail  Sentence 

^  On  January  24  Istvan  Ko- 
muves,  a  twenty-three-year-old 
Hungarian  woman,  was  sen- 
tenced to  a  prison  term  of  two 
years  and  ten  months  for  hav- 
ing: tortured  her  stepchildren 
with  flre. 

Rise  in  Venereal  Disease 

<$>  Doctors  throughout  Eng- 
land and  Wales  are  greatly 
concerned  with  the  unprece- 
dented increase  of  venereal 
disease,  particularly  among 
young  people.  In  1959  there 
were  31,344  cases  of  gonorrhea 
seen  at  clinics  in  England  and 
Wales,  as  compared  to  18,064 
cases  in  1951.  Both  the  Minis- 
try of  Health  and  the  Venere- 
ologists' Group  Committee  of 
the  British  Medical  Associa- 
tion believe  that  the  increase 
in  venereal  disease  is  one  of 
the  country's  most  serious  so- 
cial problems. 

Snow  and  Cold 

4>  Many  parts  of  the  eastern 
United  States  have  experi- 
enced some  of  the  worst  win- 
ter weather  since  the  Weather 
Bureau  began  keeping  records. 
New  York  city  was  one  of  the 
country's  hardest  hit  places.  At 
7  p.m.  January  18  the  tempera- 
ture was  32  degrees  in  Central 
Park  and  for  16  consecutive 
days  it  never  reached  that  high 
again.  This  broke  an  80-year- 
old  record  for  uninterrupted 
cold.  Toward  the  end  of  the 
cold  spell  the  city  was  smoth- 
ered with  17.4  inches  of  snow, 
literally  crippling  the  country's 
largest  city,  which  was  al- 
ready  clogged  with  snow  and 

AWAKE! 


ice.  On  February  4  Mayor  Wag- 
ner declared  an  "emergency," 
prohibiting  "all  vehicular  traf- 
fic beyond  public  transporta- 
tion, food  and  fuel  trucks, 
emergency  vehicles  such  as 
fire,  police  and  hospitals  and 
sanitation  equipment  and  pri- 
vate vehicles  performing  emer- 
gency services."  The  ban  re- 
mained in  effect  for  several 
days. 

Space  Exploits 

#  On  January  31  from  Caps 
Canaveral,  Florida,  the  United 
States  rocketed  a  thirty-seven- 
pound  chimpanzee,  tucked 
away  in  a  space  capsule,  420 
miles  over  the  Caribbean,  In 
preparation  for  a  man-ln-space 
flight.  About  three  hours  after 
the  launching  the  space  cap- 
sule was  pulled  from  the  water 
by  a  helicopter,  and  the  chim- 
panzee was  taken  out  in  good 
condition.  He  had  spent  about 
IS  minutes  in  flight  and  had 


reached  an  altitude  oi  155 
miles. 

On  February  4  Russia 
launched  Into  orbit  the  largest 
man-made  object,  a  7.1  ton 
sputnik— large  enough  to  car- 
ry a  man.  It  was  reported  to 
be  circling  the  earth  every  89.8 
minutes  in  an  orbit  ranging 
from  203.4  miles  to  138.9  miles 
from  the  earth.  A  leading  Rus- 
sian space  scientist  denied  that 
it  was   carrying  a  man. 

Wage  of  U.S.  Scientist 
ty  A  questionnaire  sent  out  to 
110,000  scientists  by  the  Na- 
tional Science  Foundation 
showed  that  of  the  half  re- 
sponding about  50  percent 
earned  more  than  $9,000  a 
year  and  about  50  percent 
earned  less  than  that  figure. 

Beading  Speed  Increased 

$>  The  average  adult  reads 
only  about  250  words  a  min- 
ute, but  H.  Matthews,  head- 
matter  of  the  Artarmon  Pub- 


lic School  near  Sydney,  Aus- 
tralia, has  trained  two  teen-age 
pupils  to  read  at  the  rate  of 
3,000  words  a  minute  and  some 
fifty  of  his  eleven-year-old  stu- 
dents to  read  2,000  words  a 
minute.  By  using  a  projector 
with  a  speed  shutter  the  chil- 
dren were  trained  to  recognize 
groups  of  words  in  a  1/50-of-a- 
second  flash  on  the  projector. 

Age  of  Dead  Sea  Scrolls 

<$■  The  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  are 
now  dated  to  about  20  B.C. 
instead  of  A.D.  40,  because 
scientists  have  determined  a 
more  accurate  half-life  for 
carbon-14,  the  "atomic  clock" 
for  dating  objects  of  geologi- 
cal and  archaeological  signifi- 
cance. Instead  of  the  previous- 
ly accepted  half-life  of  5,568 
years,  W.  B.  Mann  and  W.  F. 
Marlow  of  the  National  Bu- 
reau of  Standards  have  found 
that  5,760  years  is  a  more  ac- 
curate figure  for  the  half-life 
of  carbon-14. 


♦♦♦♦♦♦fttf»»»fr&»a0^60»#a»+S0C0»0»<$»ft$*fr»fr»ft»»»»^ft^frfrfrfrS#frfr6^&6&&6^663* 


Can  you  fulfill  your  Christian  re- 
sponsibilities in  every  phase  of  life? 


.  .  .  toward  your  loved  ones?  in  business 
associations?  and,  especially,  by  preaching 
"this  good  news  of  the  kingdom"  from 
door  to  door  as  Jesus  did?  Become  ac- 
quainted with  the  full  measure  of  activity 
required  of  those  God  approves  as  footstep 
followers  of  his  Son,  Jesus. 

Read  Qualified  to  Be  Ministers  Send  now 

"Qualified  to  Be  Ministers"  is  a  textbook  of  ministry 
training  containing  90  studies.  Hard  bound,  indexed, 
384  pages,  3/6  (for  Australia,  4/-;  fur  South  Africa, 
35c). 


WATCH   TOWER 


THE    RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W.   7 


Name  . 
Post 
Town  . 


1  am  enclosing  3/6  (for  Australia,  4./-;  for  South  Africa,  35c)  for  the  book  of 
ministry  training  Qualified  to  Be  Ministers.  Please  send  my  copy  at  once. 

Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  „ 

Postal 
- District  No County  


MARCH  92,  1961 


31 


^Mre  uou  finding.  refreAnment  and  contentment 
in  the    lA/ord  of  Ljodi 


Despite  increasing  world  tensions,  hundreds  of  thousands  of  searchers 
for  peace  are  finding  reassurance  through  the  congregational  meetings 
of  Jehovah's  witnesses.  In  more  than  21,000  of  such  places  of  assembly, 
instructive  and  stimulating  Bible  talks  and  studies  are  conducted.  Out- 
standing among  these  is  the  weekly  Bible  study  using  The  Watchtawer, 
the  most  widely  circulated  religious  journal  in  the  world  today — actually 
3.8  million  copies  in  59  languages!  You  can  share  in  the  benefits  of  this 
timely  and  informative  magazine  by  receiving  it  into  your  own  home  twice 
a  month.  Mail  the  coupon  below  with  7/-  (for  Australia,  8/-;  for  South 
Africa,  70c)  for  your  year's  subscription.  Find  refreshment  and  content- 
ment in  your  study  of  God's  Word. 


Read 


THE  WATCHTOWER 


7/-  (for  Australia,  8/-;  for  South  Africa,  70c) 


WATCH  TOWER 


THE    RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W.   7 


Please  send  me  The  Watchtower  for  the  "ih  (for  Australia,  8/-;  for  South  Africa,  70c)  enclosed. 
For  acting  now  I  am  to  receive  free  the  three  booklets  When  God  Speaks  Peace  to  All  Nations, 
After  Armageddon— Qod' s  Nev)  World  and  "This  Good  News  of  the  Kingdom." 

Street  and  Number 

Name or  Route  and  Box 

Post  Postal 

Town  District  No County 

In:  AUSTRALIA  addresa  11  Beresford  Rd.,  Strathfield,  N.S.W.  CANADA;  1B0  Bridsreland  Ave,,  Toronto  19,  Ont. 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bas,  Elandsfontein,  Transvaal.   UNITED  STATES:  117  Adams  St..  Brooklyn  L,  N,  T. 

AWAKE! 


32 


'vmxerA 


mth's  Opportunities  in  This  Modern  Age 
Aiga  of  the  Santa  Maria 
minting— the  Revolutionary  Invention 
Aristian  Assemblies  for  1961 


F>AGE=    S 


PAGE   13 


F=AGE   17 


RAGS  2*2 


APRIL  8,  1961 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAt 

News  sources  that  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  the  vital  Issues  of  oiir 
times  must  be  unfettered  by  censorship  and  selfish  interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fetters.  It  recognizes  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts,  it  is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  it  is  unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  ft  h  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  integrity  to  truth. 

"Awake!"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  in  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Gel  acquainted  with  "Awakel"  Keep  awake  by  reading  "Awake!" 


Puiu.t&hed   Simultaneously   in   ttte   United   States   by   the 

WATCHTOWEH    BIBLE   AND    TRACT    SOCIKTY   OF  NEW   YORK,    INC. 

117   Adams    Street  Brooklyn   1.    New   York,    U.S.A. 

and  in   England  by 

WATCH   TOWER    BIBI.E   AND    TRACT    SOCIETY 


Watch   Tower   Housp,   The   Rfdgeway 
N,  II.  Knoer,  President 


Printing  this  issue:  3,125,000 
"Awaits!"  is  published  In  the  (oil  owing  22  I  an  lyases 
Semimonthly — Afrikaans,  Cinyailja,  Danish,  DlUcli.  Krk- 
lish,  Finnish,  Fimoh,  (German.  Greclr,  Italian.  Japanese, 
Mercian,  rortusuese,  Sjmnlsti,  Swedish,  TasuloB.  tfnlu. 
Monthly — llocano,  Korean,  Malnyalam,  Polish,  Tlkrainlan. 

Yearly  sut^cription  rut™ 
Offices                                            fur  aemi  monthly  editions 

America,   U.S.,  11"  Arlama  St..  RrimMj-n   1,  N.Y.  SI 

Australia,   11   Feresfonl  IM..  StralMeld,  N.S.W.  8/- 

Canada,    ir,0  P-rld^i-land  Ave.,   Toronto  19,  Otlt.  $1 
England,   Watch   TDwer  House, 

The   HidgeMy,    London  M.W.    7  7/- 

Ne*  Zealand,  H'i\  sn  Ninth  Ho.,  Auckland.  S.W.  1  7/- 

South   Africa,   rriyale  Ban,   ElAtiLlsffljitpiji,  Tvl.  70e 

Monthly   editions   cost   half   tue   above  rates. 

The    Bible   translation   used    In    "Awake!' 


London  N.W.   7,   England 
Ckant  Suiter,  Secretary 

4d    a   copy    (Australia,   Sd;    South    Africa,   3'/2o) 


Remittances  for  sub-serin  tions  should  be  Kent  to  the  office 
in  your  country.  Otherwise  send  your  Fcmltlnnr.c-  to 
London,  Notice  of  expiration  is  sent  at  least  two  lilies 
before  subscription  expires. 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  should  reach  as  thirty  days 
before  yolr  ruovha  date.  Give  us  your  ofd  and  new 
address  (If  possible,  your  old  address  label).  Watch 
Tower,  Watch  Tower  Houss,  The  Rldgeway,  Lon- 
don  N.W.   7,   England. 


Entered  as   second-class  matter  at  Brooklyn,  N.Y. 

Printed   In   England 


When   other   translations   are   used   the   fallowing   symbols  will 

AS   -  American   Standard  Version    Dy  -  Catholic   homy    version 
AT  -  An  American   Transition.        ED  - 
AV  -  Authorized   Version    (1S11)    JP  - 
Da  -  J-   ^'-    Darby's  version  Le    - 


the    New   World   Translation   uf   the   Holy   Scri uteres. 
"~ appear   behind  the  citations: 

MO  ~  James   MiilTalL's  Tension 
The  Emphatic  Biaclott     Ru   -  J.   B.    Kotbrrham's-   version 
Jewish  Pub]  lea  Lion   Boc,    R8  -  Revised    Standard   Version 
Isaac  Lecser's   version        Yg   -  Robert  Young's  version 


CONTENTS 


The  Best  Things  in  Life  Are  Free  3 
Youth's  Opportunities  in  This  Modern  Age   5 

A  Patrolman's  Job  Is  Not  an  Easy  One  9 

Saga  of  the  Santa  Maria  13 

Increase  in  Korea  15 

"The  Worst  Era  of  Lawlessness"  16 

Printing — the  Revolutionary  Invention  17 


Catholic  Comment  on  Special  Awake!  21 
Christian  Assemblies  in  the 

United  States  for  1961  22 

1961  District  Assembly  at  Vancouver  25 
"Your  Word  Is  Truth" 

May  Christians  Take  Oaths?  27 

Watching  the  World  29 


"Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake."   0k 

—  ft  o  mom  13:11  ^y 


Volums   XLII 


London,    England,   April   8,   1961 


Number  7 


7ke  fo&tkucgt 


tt* 


THERE  is  very  little 
that  money  cannot 
buy,  but  can  it  be  said 
that  these  are  the  best  things  in  life?  The 
fact  that  wealthy  people  who  are  surround- 
ed with  every  material  thing  their  hearts 
desire  are  frequently  unhappy,  some  even 
committing  suicide,  indicates  that  material 
riches  do  not  bring  the  best  things  in  life. 
The  Christian  apostle  Paul  pointed  this  out 
when  he  said:  "The  love  of  money  is  a  root 
of  all  sorts  of  injurious  things,  and  by 
reaching  out  for  this  love  some  have  been 
led  astray  from  the  faith  and  have  stabbed 
themselves  all  over  with  many  pains." 
—1  Tim.  6:10. 

While  material  things  may  make  life 
more  comfortable  and  may  bring  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  pleasure,  there  are  much 
better  things  in  life  for  which  material 
things  are  no  substitute.  How  can  material 
possessions  and  riches  take  the  place  of 
friendship?  They  cannot  give  the  warm 
companionship  that  a  friend  can;   they 

APRIL  8,  1961 


cannot  listen  to  your  problems  and 
give  you  advice;  they  cannot  com- 
fort you  in  time  of  sorrow;  they 
cannot  help  you  in  time  of  distress; 
they  cannot  share  with  you  your 
joys,  but  a  friend  can. 

The  person  with  many  posses- 
sions can  distribute  gifts  that 
cause  people  to  be  very  friendly 
with  him,  but  his  gifts  cannot  buy 
genuine  friends.  "Everybody  is  a 
companion  to  the  man  making  a 
gift."  (Prov.  19:6)  When  he  stops 
giving  gifts,  these  counterfeit 
friends  quickly  leave.  Genuine  friendship 
cannot  be  bought;  it  is  free,  and  it  is  one 
of  the  best  things  in  life. 

Love  also  is  one  of  the  best  things  in 
life,  for  it  is  a  vital  need  of  man,  but  it 
does  not  come  to  those  who  do  not  ex- 
press it.  It  is  far  more  than  an  emotional 
feeling.  It  involves  expressions  and  ac- 
tions that  let  others  know  that  they  are 
wanted  and  that  you  are  interested  in 
their  welfare.  Love  is  not  necessarily 
shown  by  what  you  do  not  do  to  your  fel- 
low man,  but  by  what  you  do  for  him.  It 
is  a  positive  quality  that  requires  you  to 
give  without  expecting  a  return.  It  is  not 
a  commodity  that  can  be  bought  and  that 
moves  in  only  one  direction.  If  you  want 
others  to  love  you,  you  must  love  them. 
Riches  can  buy  a  sumptuous  meal,  but 
there  can  be  no  real  enjoyment  of  it  when 
friendship  and  love  are  missing.  The  poor 


man  who  eats  a  simple  meal  with  those 
who  have  Jove  for  one  another  is  far  bet- 
ter off  than  the  rich  man  who  eats  with 
hypocrites  who,  in  their  hearts,  hate  him. 
"Better  is  a  dish  of  vegetables  where  there 
is  love  than  a  manger-fed  bull  and  hatred 
along  with  it,"— Prov.  15:17. 

Knowledge  of  the  life-giving  truths  God 
has  provided  for  man  is  certainly  one  of 
the  very  best  things  in  life.  Knowing  them 
brings  freedom  from  the  shackles  of  reli- 
gious superstitions  and  falsehoods.  "You 
will  know  the  truth,  and  the  truth  will 
set  you  free."  (John  8:32)  Such  knowl- 
edge is  not  for  the  private  possession  of 
a  favored  few,  but  is  for  all  mankind. 
It  is  not  to  be  made  merchandise  that 
is  sold  to  those  who  have  money  and 
denied  to  those  who  do  not.  The  truth 
from  God  is  free  to  all  who  want  it.  This 
is  clearly  pointed  out  in  the  Scriptures, 
where  truth  is  likened  to  water,  wine  and 
milk.  Note  what  they  say  about  it:  "Hey 
there,  all  you  thirsty  ones!  Come  to  the 
water.  And  the  ones  that  have  no  money! 
Come,  buy  and  eat.  Yes,  come,  buy  wine 
and  milk  even  without  money  and  without 
price." — Isa.  55:1. 

Those  who  know  God's  truth  can  show 
their  love  in  a  positive  way  by  giving  that 
truth  out  freely  to  others.  The  early  Chris- 
tians did  it  by  teaching  the  truth  to  all 
who  would  listen  to  them,  in  private  homes 
and  in  public  places.  They  did  as  their 
Leader  commanded  them:  "You  received 
free,  give  free." — Matt.  10:8. 

Is  not  life  itself  the  best  thing  you  pos- 
sess? Do  you  not  value  it  above  all  your 
material  possessions?  Yet  you  did  not  pur- 
chase it;  it  was  free.  Without  it  all  the 
things  you  have  bought  with  your  money 
could  not  be  enjoyed.  This  free  gift  is 
much  better  than  all  of  them. 


The  One  who  gave  life  to  mankind  in 
the  beginning  has' lovingly  provided  the 
means  for  renewing  it  so  that  humans 
might  live  endlessly.  This  too  is  a  free 
gift  from  him.  It  is  given  out  of  love  for 
the  world  of  mankind.  "By  this  the  love 
of  God  was  made  manifest  in  our  case, 
because  God  sent  forth  his  only-begotten 
Son  into  the  world  that  we  might  gain 
life  through  him." — 1  John  4:9. 

This  free  gift  of  life,  which  is  the  very 
best  thing  a  man  could  be  given,  is  likened 
by  the  Scriptures  to  life-sustaining  water: 
"To  anyone  thirsting  I  will  give  from  the 
fountain  of  the  water  of  life  free." — Rev. 
21:6. 

Life  comes  from  God  without  a  price 
tag.  Although  it  is  available  to  all  people, 
not  everyone  is  able  to  have  it.  To  receive 
God's  free  gift  of  endless  life  you  must 
show  yourself  worthy  of  it.  Why  should 
he  give  it  to  selfish,  greedy  people  who 
would  not  appreciate  it?  Because  it  is  free, 
that  does  not  mean  God  is  obligated  to 
give  life  to  everyone  that  feels  entitled  to 
it.  It  is  only  right  that  he  should  give  this 
wonderful  gift  only  to  those  who  show 
themselves  worthy  of  it  and  who  would 
appreciate  it.  The  free  gift  of  life  is,  there- 
fore, limited  to  those  who  exercise  faith 
in  the  Giver  of  life  and  who  continue  lov- 
ing him. — John  3:16;  Jas.  1:12. 

Because  this  materialistic  world  may 
think  the  best  things  in  life  are  the  ma- 
terial things,  luxuries,  power  and  pleas- 
ures that  money  can  buy,  it  is  difficult  for 
many  people  to  realize  that  what  is  free 
is  not  necessarily  of  little  value.  Actually 
the  best  things  in  life  cannot  be  bought, 
and  they  are  by  far  a  superior  goal  to  live 
for.  "Keep  on,  then,  seeking  first  the  king- 
dom and  his  righteousness,  and  all  these 
other  things  will  be  added  to  you." — Matt 
6:33. 


r^t^^~*  +J&/1&-+  frj&fZp~m  ■•«*^sfl^i  i^s^rt  »— "hJNS*i 


AWAKE! 


ft  Opportunities 


in  this 
MODERN  AGE 


WW  is  youth's  great- 
est opportunity?  How 
can  they  realize  it? 


THE  two  atomic  bomb 
blasts  over  Japan  nearly 
sixteen  years  ago  rang  down 
the  curtain  on  the  bloodiest, 
most  inhumane  act  of  history. 
As  six  years  of  unparalleled 
suffering,  devastation  and  war 
were  brought  to  a  close  man- 
kind stepped  into  this  modern 
age  of  atomic  power  and  space 
ships. 

This  postwar  world  has 
opened  to  youth  advantages 
and  opportunities  never  real- 
ized by  any  previous  genera- 
tion. Education  in  the  ad- 
vanced knowledge  of  this 
:ientific  age  and  opportuni- 
ties for  good- 


-.-A 


paying  jobs, 
making  pos- 
sible  fine 
.-.-.  homes 
w;j  and  many 
:m  o  d  e  r  n 
-conve  n- 
ienccs  and 
luxuries, 
are  within  the  grasp  of 
youths  striving  for  these 
things.  Super-jets  circling 
the  globe  open  up  oppor- 


tunities of  world  travel  to  many. 
Since  youth  has  the  advantages 
and  opportunities  that  this  ad- 
vanced modern  age  provides,  one  would 
expect  to  find  them  happy,  well-adjusted 
and  applying  themselves  to  taking  advan- 
tage of  their  opportunities.  But  to  the  con- 
trary, irresponsible,  delinquent  youth  with 
a  "couldn't  care  less"  attitude  has  become 
a  global  problem  of  tremendous  propor- 
tions. On  October  30,  1959,  a  United  Na- 
tions group  described  juvenile  delinquency 
as  a  world-wide  disease,  and  recommended 
that  United  Nations  Secretary  General 
.Dag  Hammarskjbld  give  the  problem  "the 
urgent  attention  that  its  increasing  gravity 
deserves."  J.  Edgar  Hoover,  director  of  the 
Federal  Bureau  of  Investigation,  said  that 
a  "decadence  disease"  has  infected  youth 
and  that  the  urgency  of  the  delinquency 
situation  canhot  be  overemphasized. 

Today's  youth  were  born  during  the  dis- 
tressful pangs  of  World  War  II,  and  they 
have  grown  up  in  a  postwar  atmosphere 
breathing  with  fear,  suspicion  and  mis- 
trust. Adult  leaders  of  the  world  who  were 
responsible  for  staging  history's  most 
dreadful  act  of  suffering,  bloodshed  and 
war  are  now  foolishly  stockpiling  weapons 
of  destruction  capable  of  making  World 
War  IZ  look  like  child's  play.  Youth  has 
observed  this;  it  sees  nations  break  inter- 
national laws  and  then  try  to  save  face  by 
lying  about  it,  and  it  notes  that  millions 
starve  while  food  rots  away  in  store- 
houses. Disillusioned  by  the  inconsistency, 
and  living  with  the  threat  of  their  lives 
being  snuffed  out  by  nuclear  war,  youth, 
rebels  against  society's  restrictions  in  or- 
der to  enjoy  the  excitement  of  the  moment. 
It  has  been  referred  to  as  the  "revolt  of 
youth,"  and,  indeed,  it  has  amounted  to 


APRIL  8,  19S1 


an  open  rebellion,  as  youth  today  adopts 
the  "eat,  drink  and  be  merry,  for  tomor- 
row we  die"  philosophy. 

Modern  Age  Fails  to  Meet 

Needs  of  Youth 

This  modern  age  has  provided  youth 
with  automobiles,  television,  hi-fi  and 
plenty  of  free  time  to  enjoy  these  and 
countless  other  marvels  of  modern  ingen- 
uity. These,  however,  are  not  needs;  youths 
of  previous  generations  did  not  suffer  from 
lack  of  them;  in  fact,  they  were  better 
adjusted  and  less  delinquent  without 
them.  What  youth  really  needs  is  proper 
discipline  from  parents  and  adults  who 
themselves  practice  self -discipline.  They 
need  education,  not  in  the  advanced  knowl- 
edge of  this  scientific  modern  age,  but  a 
moral  education,  teaching  them  a  proper 
sense  of  responsibility  toward  their  fellow 
man  and,  most  importantly,  toward  their 
Creator.  Last,  but  not  least,  they  need  a 
good  example  to  follow. 

Along  a  windy  seacoast  one  will  note  all 
the  trees  bent  over,  growing  in  the  direc- 
tion that  the  wind  blows  them.  Youths,  like 
young  trees,  will  grow  in  the  direction  that 
the  instruction  they  receive  points  them. 
That  is  why  the  Bible  counsels:  "Train  up 
a  boy  according  to  the  way  for  him;  even 
when  he  grows  old  he  will  not  turn  aside 
from  it."  This  means  disciplining  youth, 
directing  them  in  the  right  way,  teaching 
them  proper  conduct.  But  will  not  giving 
such  discipline  cause  youth  to  be  resentful 
and  hate  their  elders?  Listen  to  the  in- 
spired Bible  writer:  "We  used  to  have  fa- 
thers who  were  of  our  flesh  to  discipline 
us  and  we  used  to  give  them  respect."  Yes, 
disciplined  youths  respect  their  elders! 
— Prov.  22:6;  Heb.  12:9. 

Youths  of  today  are  perhaps  the  best 
educated  and  at  the  same  time  least  edu- 
cated of  any  generation;  educated  in 
worldly  wisdom,  but  not  educated  in  being 


good  people.  Johann  Wolfgang  von  Goethe, 
one  of  the  most  eminent  in  world  litera- 
ture, spoke  of  the  Bible  as  "the  founda- 
tion and  as  the  instrument  of  education" 
by  which  "truly  wise  men  are  formed." 
Thomas  Jefferson  said  that  a  study  of  the 
Bible  "will  make  better  citizens,  better  fa- 
thers, better  husbands  . . .  The  Bible  makes 
the  best  people  in  the  world." 

Has  youth  been  given  this  Bible  educa- 
tion, which  teaches  a  proper  sense  of  re- 
sponsibility toward  God  and  fellow  man? 
A  questionnaire  addressed  to  18,434  high 
school  students  showed  that  87  percent 
could  not  name  three  disciples  of  Jesus, 
and  64  percent  could  not  name  the  four 
Gospels.  Not  knowing  the  names  of  the 
books  wherein  is  recorded  the  basis  of 
proper  Christian  conduct,  one  can  be  quite 
sure  youths  are  ignorant  of  the  righteous 
principles  found  there.  Certainly  this  mod- 
ern age  has  been  a  dismal  failure  in  pro- 
viding the  all-important  need  of  youth  for 
proper  moral  education  and  guidance. 

Discipline  of  youth  is  necessary,  but 
valueless  if  adults  are  not  self-disciplined. 
A  proper  moral  education  from  the  Bible 
is  a  requisite,  but  practically  useless  if 
adults  are  immoral.  J.  Edgar  Hoover 
raised  the  question,  "How  can  we  head  off 
future  delinquency?"  and  then  gave  his 
answer:  "The  best  way  is  by  example — 
adult  example.  Yet,  as  examples  thou- 
sands of  American  mothers  and  fathers 
are  proving  dismal  failures."  Youth  needs 
a  good  example,  but  the  modern  age  has 
failed  to  provide  one. 

Youth's  Greatest  Opportunity 

in  This  Modern  Age 
The  Bible  gives  sound  counsel  to  youth. 
It  sets  forth  simply  and  clearly  the  wise 
course  for  them  to  take.  It  recognizes  that 
there  are  many  occupations  and  pleasures 
that  may  be  pursued  in  life,  but  shows 
that  in  the  end  they  are  vanity,  a  striving 

AWAKE.' 


after  the  wind,  producing  no  lasting  bene- 
fit or  reward.  Wise  King  Solomon  spoke 
from  experience  as  well  as  under  inspira- 
tion from  God  when  he  said;  "The  conclu- 
sion of  the  matter,  everything  having  been 
heard,  is:  Fear  The  true  God  and  keep  his 
commandments.  For  this  is  the  whole  ob- 
ligation of  man."  So  in  the  final  analysis 
Solomon  showed  there  is  only  one  oppor- 
tunity open  to  youth  that  is  worth  ♦striv- 
ing for.  This  he  said  is  to  "remember,  now, 
your  grand  Creator  in  the  days  of  your 
young  manhood,  before  the  calamitous 
days  proceed  to  come,  or  the  years  have 
arrived  when  you  will  say:  'I  have  no  de- 
light in  them.'  "— EccL  12:13,  1. 

The  Creator  being  the  "source  of  life," 
apart  from  him  life  ends  in  the  calamity 
of  eternity  in  death,  where  there  is  neither 
work,  nor  knowledge,  nor  wisdom.  But  by 
serving  Him  one  can  gain  his  "blesssing, 
even  life  for  evermore."  Therefore  those 
with  true,  wisdom  will  realize  that  youth's 
greatest  opportunity  in  this  modern  age  is 
to  remember  their  Creator,  earn  his  favor 
and  enjoy  his  blessing  of  endless  life  in 
happiness.— Ps.  36:9;  133:3,  AS. 

Calamity  awaits  those  who  refuse  to  re- 
member their  Creator  and  do  not  grasp 
the  opportunity  to  serve  him.  This  word 
of  warning  recorded  at  Ecclesiastes  11 : 9, 
10  is  directed  to  you  as  youth:  "Rejoice, 
young  man,  in  your  youth  and  let  your 
heart  do  you  good  in  the  days  of  your 
young  manhood,  and  walk  in  the  ways  of 
your  heart  and  in  the  things  seen  by  your 
eyes.  But  know  that  on  account  of  all  these 
The  true  God  will  bring  you  into  judgment. 
So  remove  vexation  from  your  heart  and 
ward  off  calamity  from  your  flesh,  for 
youth  and  the  prime  of  life  are  vanity." 

The  above  counsel  shows  that  the  course 
one  takes  in  his  youth  in  satisfying  the  de- 
sires of  his  heart  and  eyes  will  affect  his 
judgment  before  Almighty  God.  Youths 
are  prone  to  foolishness,  to  live  for  the 


excitement  of  the  moment  and  to  feel  that 

later  on,  after  satisfying  the  desires  inci- 
dental to  youth,  they  will  remember  their 
Creator.  How  wise  youth  would  be  to  heed 
the  apostolic  advice:  "Flee  from  the  de- 
sires incidental  to  youth,  but  pursue  right- 
eousness, faith,  love,  peace,  along  with 
those  who  call  upon  the  Lord  out  of  a 
clean  heart."  So,  youth,  drive  from  your 
heart  the  foolishness  tied  up  there,  by 
daily  studying  God's  Word,  and  soon  you 
will  find  welling  up  in  your  heart  a  de- 
sire to  serve  your  grand  Creator.  In  thus 
'letting  your  heart  do  you  good'  you  will 
"ward  off  calamity  from  your  flesh." 
—2  Tim.  2:22;  Pwv,  22:15. 

Today  a  great  calamity  is  impending  for 
this  generation  that  no  bomb  shelter  or 
any  other  protection  of  man  will  be  able 
to  ward  off.  Jesus  in  his  revelation  to  John 
called  it  Armageddon,  "the  war  of  the  great 
day  of  God  the  Almighty,"  and  said  the 
destruction  would  be  comparable  to  the 
flood  of  Noah's  day.  At  that  time  those 
who  remembered  Jehovah  and  walked  with 
him  were  preserved,  but  those  who  "took 
no  note"  of  Jehovah  or  his  message  of 
warning  were  forgotten  beneath  the  deluge 
of  waters.  So  now  is  the  time  for  you  to 
grasp  your  greatest  opportunity  of  this 
modern  age:  'Remember  your  Creator  in 
the  days  of  your  youth,'  and  then  he  will 
remember  you  with  preservation  at  the 
time  of  Armageddon's  calamity. — Rev.  16: 
14,  16;  Matt  24:37,  39. 

To  serve  your  Creator  as  a  youth  is  an 
interesting  and  exciting  work,  bringing 
lasting  rewards.  You  will  be  following  the 
examples  of  such  outstanding  individuals 
as  Joseph,  Samuel,  David,  Daniel  and  his 
three  Hebrew  companions,  Timothy,  Jesus 
and  many  others.  All  of  these  youths  were 
fearless  and  courageous  in  faithfulness  to 
their  Creator.  David  in  vindication  of  Je- 
hovah's name  fought  the  giant  Goliath; 
the  three  Hebrew  youths  refused  to  wor- 


APRIL  8,  1961 


ship  Nebuchadnezzar's  image  and  received 
the  reward  of  divine  protection  in  the  fiery 
furnace;  and  Timothy  traveled  to  distant 
lands  as  the  apostle  Paul's  partner.  When 
but  twelve  years  of  age  Jesus  had  already 
made  such  a  careful  study  of  God's  Word 
that  the  teachers  at  Jerusalem  and  all 
those  listening  to  him  "were  in  constant 
amazement  at  his  understanding  and  his 
answers."  So,  youth,  copy  those  examples. 
—Luke  2:47. 

In  order  to  serve  your  Creator  today 
you  need  to  study  the  Bible  to  learn  Jeho- 
vah's will  and  his  righteous  requirements 
for  life.  You  must  then  preach  this  good 
news  to  others  so  that  others  also  can 
avoid  the  calamitous  end  facing  this  world 
at  Armageddon.  The  New  World  society 
of  Jehovah's  witnesses  is  designed  to  help 
you  take  in  this  necessary  knowledge  of 
your  Creator,  and  then  to  train  you  in 
using  it  in  the  ministry.  Five  weekly  meet- 
ings are  provided,  including  a  ministry 
school  where  you  can  improve  your  speak- 
ing ability  to  your  Creator's  praise.  Wisely 
seize  your  opportunities  to  serve  Jehovah 
with  the  New  World  society. 

Assist  Youths  to  Realize  Their 

Greatest  Opportunity 

Parents  and  adults  have  a  heavy  re- 
sponsibility toward  youth.  Youth  needs 
discipline  to  drive  out  the  foolishness 
bound  up  in  its  heart.  They  need  the  all- 
important  education  found  only  in  the  Bi- 
ble, and  they  need  a  good  example  from 
their  elders.  Christian  parents  are  under 
obligation  before  Almighty  God  to  pro- 
vide these  needs  so  as  to  help  their  chil- 
dren avoid  the  pitfalls  that  have  sunk  so 
many  of  today's  youth  into  crime  and  im- 
morality. 

The  greatest  need  of  youth  today,  how- 
ever, is  guidance  and  instruction  in  choos- 
ing the  course  in  life  that  will  be  for  their 
greatest  benefit.  Open  before  youth  are 


many  opportunities  for  education,  advance- 
ment in  business,  good-paying  jobs,  and  so 
forth.  The  educational  systems  of  this 
world  teach  that  these  are  the  most  im- 
portant things  in  life  and  that  youth 
should  now  seize  their  opportunities  to  at- 
tain them.  However,  in  the  final  analysis 
such  things  are  of  no  lasting  value.  They 
will  not  ward  off  the  calamity  of  eternity 
in  gravedom  or  destruction  at  God's  ap- 
proaching war  of  Armageddon,  It  is  the 
responsibility  of  parents  to  teach  their 
children  this  and  to  show  them  that  their 
only  opportunity  for  real  blessing  lies  in 
remembering  their  Creator. 

The  greatest  heritage  that  Christian 
parents  can  leave  their  children  is  a  heart- 
felt desire  to  serve  Jehovah  God.  How  can 
this  be  done?  By  setting  them  a  proper 
example.  Do  you  regularly  study  the  Bible 
and  carry  its  life-giving  message  to  oth- 
ers? If  you  do,  and  you  lovingly  encourage 
your  children  to  do  so,  they  will  likely 
copy  your  example.  If  you  desire  youth  to 
be  honest,  truthful  and  morally  upright, 
then  by  all  means  be  that  way  yourself. 
If  you  remember  your  Creator  by  serving 
him,  your  children  in  all  probability  will 
also. 

Calamity  awaits  the  vast  majority  of 
people  of  this  modern  age  because  of  their 
selfish  pursuit  of  pleasure  and  failure  to 
remember  their  Creator.  However,  in  lov- 
ing consideration  Jehovah  God  has  swung 
open  before  youth  the  grandest  opportu- 
nity ever  enjoyed  by  young  people,  that  of 
living  through  the  calamitous  end  of  this 
old  world  at  Armageddon,  never  growing 
old,  but,  instead,  growing  to  perfection  in 
mind  and  body  in  that  glorious  new  world 
of  the  Creator's  making.  So,  both  young 
and  old,  remember  your  Creator,  grasp 
your  opportunity  of  serving  him  by  doing 
his  will  and  rejoice  throughout  eternity, 
enjoying  his  "blessing,  even  life  for  ever- 
more."—Ps.  133:3,  AS. 


8 


AWAKE! 


H  Patrolman's  Job 


SCREAMS  for  help  brought  a  New 
York  city  patrolman  to  a  Bowery  mis- 
sion where  a  maniac  had  cowed  a  hun- 
dred persons  by  brandishing  a  large  knife. 
What  should  the  patrolman  do?  Shoot,  or 
try  to  disarm  the  man?  Not  wanting  to 
kill,  the  patrolman  tried  to  rush  the  mani- 
ac The  result?  A  fatally  wounded  patrol- 
man who  Jeft  behind  a  widow  and  an  or- 
phan and  a  dead  maniac. 

Early  in  January  this  year  a  youth  fell 
down  an  abandoned  Nevada  mine  shaft. 
The  only  one  to  volunteer  to  risk  his  own 
life  to  save  the  youth's  was  a  patrolman 
from  a  nearby  city.  It  was  a  very  close 
call,  but  the  effort  was  successful;  the  pa- 
trolman was  first  let  down  the  shaft  and 
then  the  two  were  hoisted  up. 

Yes,  a  patrolman's  job  is  not  an  easy 
one,  for  he  has  to  come  to  the  aid  of  who- 
ever may  be  in  trouble.  As  Spring  3100, 
New  York  city's  police  journal,  notes,  a 
patrolman's  duties  are  multitudinous.  In- 
cluded are  "cajoling  would-be  suicides 
from  precarious  perches,  interceding  in 
drunken  brawls,  facing  armed  adversaries, 
plunging  in  for  watery  rescues,"  and  what 
not. 

The  term  "patrolman"  comes  from  the 
French  and  literally  means  "to  go  through 
puddles."  And  that  is  exactly  what  a  pa- 
trolman is  required  to  do,  go  through  wa- 
ter puddles  and  all  other  conditions  under- 
foot and  in  all  kinds  of  weather.  In  the 
United  States  he  is  popularly  known  as  a 
"cop."  This  nickname  he  received  more 
than  a  hundred  years  ago  when  the  pa- 
trolmen of  New  York  city  received  a  new 
eight-pointed  star  badge  of  copper  and  so 

APRIL  8,  1961 


were  called  "coppers,"  later  abbreviated  to 
"cops."  The  London  "bobby"  also  received 
his  name  more  than  a  hundred  years  ago, 
after  Sir  Robert  Peele,  one  of  England's 
leading  prime  ministers,  because  of  the  im- 
provements he  made  in  the  London  police 
force. 

To  measure  up  to  the  patrolman's  job  a 
man  should  be  above  average  in  integrity, 
intelligence,  physical  strength  and  health! 
City  budgets  and  corrupt  politics,  how- 
ever, often  interfere  with  this  ideal  being 
realized.  Then  there  is  a  period  of  train- 
ing, which  in  New  York  city  lasts  many 
months. 

While  a  patrolman's  regular  job  may  be 
limited  to  eight  or  ten  hours  a  day,  he 
must  be  ready  to  respond  to  the  call  of 
duty  twenty-four  hours  a  day,  seven  days 
a  week.  In  some  United  States  cities  he 
is  required  to  carry  his  revolver  with  him 
at  all  times.  This  is  in  striking  contrast  to 
Great  Britain,  where  a  bobby  never  car- 
ries a  gun,  not  even  when  on  duty.  In 
spite  of  the  increase  in  violent  crime,  so 
few  bobbies,  comparatively  speaking,  have 
been  slain  that  this  appears  to  be  the  best 


way  to  deal  with  the  criminal  element — at 
least  in  Great  Britain.  Apparently  crimi- 
nals who  do  not  need  to  fear  being  shot 
are  themselves  not  so  prone  to  shoot;  ex- 
perience thus  supporting  Bible  principles. 

As  has  well  been  observed,  "the  police 
comprise  one  of  the  most  important  oc- 
cupational groups  in  the  nation"  because 
"they  keep  its  citi2ens  living,  working  and 
prospering  within  the  framework  of  civil- 
ized law  and  acceptable  social  conduct." 
(Police,  Nov.,  Dec,  1960)  Above  all,  they 
preserve  the  peace.  An  outstanding  per- 
formance in  this  regard  was  recently  given 
by  the  police  department  of  New  York 
city.  Its  24,000  members,  of  whom  18,000 
are  patrolmen,  were  charged  with  the 
safety  of  all  the  delegates  to  the  United 
Nations  assembly  that  opened  September 
20,  1960,  including  the  heads  of  twenty- 
six  nations  and  their  ministers.  Described 
as  "the  largest  gathering  of  potentates  in 
the  history  of  mankind  and  representing 
over  one  billion  human  beings,"  it  neces- 
sitated a  world-wide  intelligence  service  so 
as  to  know  from  what  quarters  to  expect 
trouble.  Taxed  were  all  the  facilities  of  the 
police  department,  from  its  three  helicop- 
ters to  its  232  horses,  also  the  physical 
stamina  of  the  entire  force  by  reason  of 
many,  many  hours  of  overtime.  This  un- 
precedented challenge  was  met  without  a 
single  serious  incident,  even  though  politi- 
cal passions  at  times  were  at  a  white  heat 
and  repeatedly  firm  measures  had  to  be 
taken.  Peace  was  preserved. 

Prevention  of  crime  is  considered  more 
important  than  the  apprehension  of  crimi- 
nals. The  patrolman's  very  presence,  on 
foot  or  in  a  patrol  car,  serves  as  a  deter- 
rent, for  he  appears  as  a  symbol  of  law  and 
order.  Discipline  makes  a  police  force  a 
semimilitary  organization.  When  on  duty 
a  New  York  patrolman  is  not  supposed  to 
smoke,  drink  liquor,  carry  personal  pack- 
ages, not  even  engage  in  idle  conversation. 


Participation  in  politics  is  denied  him  and 
in  strikes  he  must  remain  strictly  neutral. 
Indicative  of  the  high  standard  aimed  at 
by  the  New  York  city  and  Chicago  police 
forces  is  their  following 

"Law  Enforcement  Code  of  Ethics" 

"As  a  Law  Enforcement  Officer,  my  funda- 
mental duty  is  to  serve  mankind;  to  safeguard 
lives  and  property;  to  protect  the  innocent 
against  deception;  the  weak  against  oppression 
or  intimidation,  and  the  peaceful  against  vio- 
lence and  disorder;  and  to  respect  the  constitu- 
tional rights  of  all  men  to  liberty,  equality  and 
justice. 

"I  will  keep  my  private  life  unsullied  as  an 
example  to  all;  maintain  courageous  calm  in 
the  face  of  danger,  scorn  or  ridicule;  develop 
self-restraint;  and  be  constantly  mindful  of  the 
welfare  of  others.  Honest  in  thought  and  deed 
in  both  my  personal  and  official  life,  I  will  be 
exemplary  in  obeying  the  laws  of  the  land  and 
the  regulations  of  my  department.  Whatever 
I  see  or  hear  of  a  confidential  nature  or  that  is 
confided  to  me  in  my  official  capacity  will  be 
kept  ever  secret  unless  revelation  is  necessary 
in  the  performance  of  my  duty. 

"I  will  never  act  officiously  or  permit  personal 
feelings,  prejudices,  animosities,  or  friendships 
to  influence  my  decisions.  With  no  compromise 
for  crime  and  with  relentless  prosecution  of 
criminals,  I  will  enforce  the  law  courteously 
and  appropriately  without  fear  or  favor,  malice 
or  ill  will,  never  employing  unnecessary  force 
or  violence  and  never  accepting  gratuities. 

"I  recognize  the  badge  of  my  office  as  a  sym- 
bol of  public  faith,  and  I  accept  it  as  a  public 
trust  to  be  held  so  long  as  I  am  true  to  the 
ethics  of  the  police  service.  I  will  constantly 
strive  to  achieve  these  objectives  and  ideals, 
dedicating  myself  before  God  to  my  chosen  pro- 
fession— Law  Enforcement. 

"I  have  read  the  foregoing  Law  Enforcement 
Code  of  Ethics  and  fully  understand  it  I  sub- 
scribe to  it  wholeheartedly  and  without  reserva- 
tion and  pledge  that  I  will  abide  by  it  through- 
out my  eareer  as  an  honored  and  honorable 
member  of  the  Chicago  Police  Department. 
Signed.  Rank. —  Star,  No.  — — — 

Problems 

Some  eighty  years  ago  the  Gilbert  and 
Sullivan  light  opera  team  wrote  a  ditty 


10 


AWAKE  ' 


entitled  "A  Policeman's  Lot  Is  Not  a  Hap- 
py One."  How  true,  when  we  compare  his 
code  of  ethics  with  the  conditions  found 
particularly  in  large  cities  throughout  the 
world.  For  a  patrolman  to  keep  integrity 
and  not  get  discouraged  and  quit  he  truly 
must  be  dedicated  to  law  enforcement. 

Among  the  problems  facing  the  patrol- 
man is  his  contact  with  human  wretched- 
ness and  suffering.  When  a  United  jet  liner 
struck  another  plane  in  mid-air  in  Decem- 
ber, 1960,  and  landed  on  the  streets  of 
Brooklyn,  New  York,  it  took  good  nerves 
and  self-control  to  work  among  the  ruins 
to  extricate  the  scores  of  burned  and  dis- 
membered bodies.  The  patrolman  thus  con- 
tinually comes  in  contact  with  horror  and 
yet  may  not  become  hard-boiled  or  unfeel- 
ing, for  at  times  it  is  his  lot  to  notify  a 
mother  of  the  accidental  killing  of  her 
child  or  a  wife  of  the  death  of  her  hus- 
band due  to  some  mishap. 

Then  there  is  the  problem  of  facing  dan- 
ger with  courage.  No  one  wants  to  die. 
A  patrolman  meets  up  with  danger  con- 
tinually. How  shall  he  respond?  Shall  he 
look  the  other  way  or  dally  because  of  be- 
ing outnumbered  or  outarmed?  Shall  he 
pursue  the  lawbreakers  at  a  safe  distance 
to  himself,  permitting  them  to  escape,  or 
shall  he  risk  his  life,  make  his  wife  a  wid- 
ow, his  children  orphans,  to  apprehend  the 
lawbreakers?  If  he  yields  to  fear  he  has 
a  guilty  conscience  to  struggle  with.  If  he 
does  not  he  may  be  wounded  or  killed. 

Among  the  patrolman's  greatest  prob- 
lems is  how  to  remain  on  the  force  and 
keep  his  wife  contented.  If  he  is  truly  ded- 
icated he  is  content  with  his  salary,  with 
the  interruptions  and  other  inconven- 
iences connected  with  his  work.  But  unless 
his  wife  is  also  dedicated  she  will  keep 
nagging  and  interfere  with  his  efficiency 
and  eventually  cause  him  to  drop  out  of 
the  force. 

Then  there  is  the  problem  of  loyalty 


versus  friendship,  or  loyalty  to  principle 
versus  loyalty  to  friends.  If  he  notes  an- 
other patrolman  stealing  goods,  accept- 
ing a  bribe,  or  otherwise  betraying  his 
trust,  what  shall  he  do?  Report  the  guilty 
one  and  risk  being  ostracized  by  his  fel- 
low patrolmen,  or  keep  quiet  and  wrestle 
with  a  guilty  conscience  ?  His  code  of  ethics 
requires  that  he  deal  with  all  impartially 
and  accept  no  bribes,  but  when  he  sees 
corruption  all  about  him  it  is  not  easy  to 
go  straight 

Making  It  Harder 

As  if  the  patrolman's  job  were  not  hard 
enough,  it  is  daily  becoming  more  difficult. 
There  is  ever  more  disrespect  for  law  and 
order,  in  large  part  traceable  to  modern 
education  in  which  Marx,  Darwin  and 
Freud  have  replaced  Moses,  Jesus  Christ 
and  the  apostle  Paul  as  teachers  of  prin- 
ciples and  modes  of  life.  Youth  reared 
without  love  and  proper  discipline  erupts 
in  deeds  of  violence,  "It's  the  young  ones 
that  go  for  the  gun  or  the  knife  or  the 
weapon  most  often.  And  they're  usually 
two  or  more  to  one  against  you,"  is  the 
way  one  veteran  police  official  expressed  it. 

And  J.  Edgar  Hoover,  in  his  October, 
1960,  bulletin  to  law-enforcement  officers, 
said:  "Each  passing  day  sees  law-enforce- 
ment officers  exposed  to  more  .  .  .  dan- 
gers. Crime  in  the  first  six  months  of 
1960  rose  a  startling  9  percent,  with  rob- 
bery showing  the  greatest  increase — 13 
percent.  Murder  and  aggravated  assault 
jumped  6  and  4  percent  respectively.  All 
of  these  crimes  are  potentially  deadly  ones 
far  the  apprehending  officers." 

The  patrolman's  job  is  also  made  harder 
by  the  courts  of  the  land.  In  their  zeal  to 
give  the  guilty  as  well  as  the  innocent  the 
benefit  of  constitutional  guarantees  and  to 
prevent  the  country  from  becoming  a  po- 
lice state  they  lean  over  backwards  to  pro- 
tect the  criminal  and  invariably  he  gets 


APRIL  8,  1961 


11 


the  benefit  of  a  doubt  in  the  borderline 
cases.  Like  the  Pharisees  of  old,  they  let 
technicalities  instead  of  good  sense  gov- 
ern. Typical  of  the  attitude  of  United 
States  courts  is  the  Durham  rule,  which  re- 
quires that  the  prosecutor  must  bear  the 
burden  of  proof  that  a  criminal  was  not 
insane  at  the  time  he  committed  a  crime 
if  his  lawyer  claims  that  he  was.  Could 
anything  be  more  preposterous? 

Courts  also  make  it  more  difficult  for 
the  patrolman  by  their  light  sentences.  A 
man  with  a  previous  police  record  was 
sentenced  to  only  five  years  for  stabbing 
a  man  to  death.  Released  after  thirty 
months,  within  a  week  he  shot  and  killed 
another  man.  No  wonder  law-enforcement 
officers  complain  that  criminals  receive 
"powder-puff"  and  "vanishing-cream" 
treatment. 

What  Can  Be  Done  About  It? 

The  job  of  the  patrolman  could  be  made 
easier  if  the  average  man  were  more  con- 
cerned with  doing  what  is  right  and  ac- 
corded the  patrolman  the  respect  his  po- 
sition deserves.  As  Orlando  W.  Wilson, 
new  superintendent  of  Chicago's  police 
force  and  one  of  the  leading  law-enforce- 
ment authorities  in  the  United  States,  ex- 
pressed it  in  an  article  entitled  "Let's 
Stop  Kidding  About  Cops":  "We  must  re- 
cruit more  and  more  high-minded  young 
men  who  possess  an  almost  religious  dedi- 
cation to  the  ideals  of  police  work.  I'm 
sure  we  can  get  them — if  they  feel  their 
work  and  their  sacrifices  will  lead  to  an 
atmosphere  of  respect  and  mutual  co- 
operation." 

Courts  could  also  help  if  they  mani- 
fested as  much  concern  for  the  property 
and  lives  of  the  victims  as  they  do  for  the 


rights  of  the  criminals,  also  if  they  tried 
more  often  to  put  themselves  in  the  shoes 
of  the  law-enforcement  officers  instead  of 
the  shoes  of  the  criminals. 

An  aid  to  patrolmen  that  has  been  used 
in  European  lands  for  many  years — for 
centuries,  in  fact,  in  France — is  the  police 
dog.  In  Stockton,  California,  where  in  re- 
cent years  police  dogs  were  added,  they 
aided  in  the  capture  of  3,000  lawbreakers 
in  but  ten  months  and  that  without  a  sin- 
gle patrolman's  being  injured. 

Of  course,  it  would  also  greatly  help  if, 
as  Wilson  further  points  out,  policemen 
were  better  paid  and  more  highly  regarded 
in  the  community;  if  applicants  were  more 
carefully  screened  and  only  those  of  above 
average  intelligence  and  moral  standards 
accepted;  and  if,  in  addition  to  the  very 
best  scientific  techniques,  leadership  and 
judgment  were  taught. 

But  apparently  it  is  vain  to  expect  con- 
ditions to  improve  or  for  the  patrolman's 
job  to  be  made  easier.  As  London's  1958 
police  report  complained:  "Neither  the  ab- 
sence of  poverty  nor  the  more  progressive 
methods  employed  in  dealing  with  delin- 
quents appear  to  have  done  anything  to  re- 
duce the  volume  of  crime." 

These  are  the  "critical  times  hard  to 
deal  with"  foretold  in  God's  Word,  when 
Satan  and  his  demons  are  hurrying  all 
mankind  on  to  corruption  and  destruction. 
However,  in  God's  new  world  patrolmen 
will  have  it  easier,  for  they  will  be  doing 
something  else,  because  then  "the  wicked 
one  will  be  no  more."  Until  that  time  let 
all,  including  patrolmen,  heed  the  counsel: 
"Do  not  show  yourself  heated  up  because 
of  the  evildoers.  Do  not  be  envious  of  those 
doing  unrighteousness.  Trust  in  Jehovah 
and  do  good."— 2  Tim.  3:1;  Ps.  37:9,  10, 
1,  3. 


-<  Mil  3=t  ■»■-■-*  1cOiiCT=H"*  ~H*&<I3+*" 


12 


AWAKE! 


ofvthe 


By     "Awake!"     correspondent 
in    Curasao 


WHEN  the  luxurious  Portuguese  cruise 
ship  Santa  Maria  stopped  at  Cura- 
sao in  the  Netherlands  Antilles  on  the  last 
leg  of  its  trip  from  Lisbon  to  Florida,  its 
607  passengers  and  350  crewmen  had  no 
idea  that  their  trip  would  end  a  little  over 
twelve  days  later  in  Brazil.  Unbeknown  to 
most  of  them,  the  man  who  would  cause 
this  unexpected  extension  of  their  cruise 
boarded  the  ship  while  it  was  here  in  Cu- 
racao. It  appears  that  many  of  his  fellow 
conspirators  had  boarded  when  the  ship 
stopped  at  La  Guaira,  Venezuela. 

With  the  aid  of  twenty-nine  companions, 
Henrique  M.  Galvao  surprised  the  crew  of 
the  Santa  Maria  at  1:45  in  the  morning  on 
January  22,  After  a  brief  skirmish  in 
which  one  crewman  was  killed  and  one 
wounded,  the  thirty  men  took  complete 
control  of  the  vessel. 

When  the  passengers  sat  down  for  break- 
fast that  morning,  they  sensed  that  some- 
thing was  wrong,  especially  because  of  the 


strange  noises  they  heard  during  the  night. 
They  were  sure  of  it  when  they  were  no- 
tified to  meet  in  the  lounge  after  break- 
fast. There  they  were  informed  by  the 
public-address  system  that  the  Santa  Ma- 
ria was  not  going  on  to  Florida.  They 
would,  however,  be  disembarked  at  a  neu- 
tral port  in  five  or  six  days.  They  soon 
learned  that  the  ship  had  been  captured  by 
armed  rebels  who  were  against  the  Por- 
tuguese government  of  Premier  Antonio 
de  Oliveira  Salazar. 

Captors 

The  rebels  wore  khaki  unforms  with  red 
and  ■  green  armbands.  They  consisted  of 
Portuguese  and  Spanish  men  who  had  as 
their  objective  the  ultimate  overthrow  of 
the  Portuguese  and  Spanish  governments. 
During  the  course  of  the  following  twelve 
days  they  mingled  with  the  crew  and  pas- 
sengers and  are  said  to  have  conducted 
themselves  well.  Remarking  on  this  to 
Life  magazine,  one  of  the  passengers  said: 
"It  was  amazing  how  quickly  Galvao's  men 
fitted  into  things.  If  they  were  desperate- 
ly anxious  about  their  mission,  they  were 
also  friendly  and  courteous,  and  in  no  time 
at  all  were  accepted  by  everyone.  Many 
friendships  sprang  up  between  them  and 
the  crew  members  and  passengers.  They 
were  nearly  all  young,  intelligent,  well  edu- 
cated, and  many  of  them  were  extremely 
good-looking.  It  was  something  of  a  shock 
to  see  some  of  our  most  respectable  ladies 
dancing  with  them  by  the  fourth  or  fifth 
day.  .  .  .  The  bars  stayed  open.  Our  cap- 
tors paid  for  their  drinks  just  as  every- 
body else  did.  There  was  no  drunkenness." 

The  passengers  did  not  suffer  from  any 
shortage  of  food,  but  they  did  have  the 
discomfort  of  water  rationing.  On  their 
next  to  last  night  aboard,  when  the  ship 
was  anchored  off  Recife,  Brazil,  Galvao 
gave  the  special  dinner  that  is  customary 
for  captains  to  give  at  the  end  of  a  voyage. 


APRIL  S,  1961 


13 


The  same  passenger  that  described  his  cap- 
tors for  Life  magazine  said:  "The  meal 
was  excellent,  and  afterward  a  number  of 
the  passengers  asked  Captain  Galvao  and 
his  staff  to  autograph  their  souvenir  men- 
us, which  they  did  graciously.  Later,  there 
was  dancing,  throwing  of  paper  streamers, 
and  a  real  fiesta." 

The  legal  captain  of  the  Santa  Maria, 
Mario  Simoes  Maia,  said  he  had  no  com- 
plaint about  how  he  was  treated  by  the 
rebels.  He  retained  his  quarters  and  con- 
tinued to  function  as  first  in  command  un- 
der their  direction. 

Purpose  of  the  Seizure 

Galvao  seized  the  ship  for  the  apparent 
purpose  of  attracting  world  attention  to 
the  government  of  Salazar,  which  Galvao 
described  as  a  "tyrannical  government." 
In  his  first  official  communique  from  the 
Santa  Maria,  he  declared  that  the  ship  was 
taken  "in  the  name  of  the  National  Inde- 
pendent Junta  of  Liberation  led  by  Gen- 
eral Humberto  Delgado."  This  declaration 
quieted  fears  in  many  parts  of  the  world 
that  the  seizure  had  been  an  act  of  piracy. 
His  plan  appears  to  have  been  to  seize  the 
ship,  discharge  the  passengers  at  a  neu- 
tral port  and  sail  to  the  African  island  of 
Fernando  Po  in  the  Gulf  of  Guinea,  al- 
though it  was  reported  on  one  occasion 
that  they  were  headed  for  Angola.  From 
this  African  island  the  rebels  may  have 
planned  to  conduct  operations  against  the 
Portuguese  and  Spanish  governments. 

The  seizure  had  been  planned  with  Gen- 
eral Delgado,  who  is  head  of  the  opposition 
movement.  He  was  Salazar's  opponent  in 
the  Portuguese  presidential  elections  held 
nearly  two  years  ago.  He  claims  that  he 
lost  the  election  because  of  fraud.  General 
Delgado  remarked  that  they  had  set  three 
previous  dates  for  the  seizing  of  the  Santa 


Maria  but  had  to  postpone  them  because 
of  unfavorable  conditions. 

It  was  on  Friday  evening,  January  20, 
that  Galvao  arrived  in  Curacao  on  a  Vene- 
zuelan plane.  He  registered  at  the  Hotel 
Brion  in  Otrabanda.  The  next  day  he  board- 
ed the  ship  and  made  ready  to  seize  it 
early  the  following  morning. 

After  Galvao 's  men  succeeded  in  taking 
command  of  the  Santa  Maria,  they  changed 
course  toward  the  British  island  of  St.  Lu- 
cia, At  10  a.m.,  January  23,  they  stopped 
offshore  and  sent  a  lifeboat  to  Castries, 
St.  Lucia,  with  one  wounded  man,  another 
sick  with  jaundice  and  six  crewmen  to 
man  the  boat.  The  ship  then  steamed  off 
into  the  Atlantic  with  British  and  Ameri- 
can ships  and  planes  intently  searching  for 
it.  Finally  a  United  States  Navy  pilot  spot- 
ted the  Santa  Maria  far  out  in  the  Atlan- 
tic, thus  ending  the  three-day  search.  Unit- 
ed States  destroyers  and  the  nuclear 
submarine  Seawolf  sped  to  its  location. 

End  in  Sight 

Now  that  destroyers  were  escorting  the 
ship  and  negotiations  were  being  carried 
on  between  the  United  States  Navy  and 
Galvao,  Africa  no  longer  appeared  to  be 
the  destination  of  the  607  passengers  of 
the  Santa  Maria.  The  end  of  their  strange 
odyssey  appeared  to  be  in  sight. 

Excitement  ran  high  when  two  French 
photographers  tried  to  board  the  ship  by 
parachuting  from  a  plane  but  landed  in  the 
sea.  One  succeeded  in  his  objective  by  be- 
ing rescued  by  the  Santa  Maria,  while  the 
other  was  picked  up  by  one  of  the  destroy- 
ers. As  the  latter  indignantly  told  his  res- 
cuers: "I  risked  my  life  to  board  the  San- 
ta Maria,  not  this  ship." 

On  January  31,  Galvao  agreed  in  a  con- 
ference with  Rear  Admiral  Allen  E,  Smith, 
Jr.,  to  bring  the  ship  to  Recife,  Brazil,  to 
disembark  the  passengers.  On  the  night  of 
February  1,  it  finally  lay  at  anchor  near 


14 


AWAKE! 


the  three-mile  limit  off  Recife.  As  the 
hours  passed  and  no  attempt  was  made  to 
take  the  passengers  ashore,  the  temper  of 
the  passengers  became  hot.  A  wild  demon- 
stration erupted  among  the  third-class 
passengers,  and  that  apparently  convinced 
Galvao  that  something  had  to  be  done  to 
avoid  bloodshed.  So  he  gave  the  order  for 
the  Santa  Maria  to 
hoist  anchor  and  pull 
into  Recife  harbor 
and  into  Brazilian  ju- 
risdiction. 

It  was  on  Febru- 
ary 2  that  the  passen- 
gers and  crew  were 
taken  ashore,  leaving 
Galvao  and  his  men 
on  board  to  conclude 
negotiations  with 
Brazilian  authorities. 
Admiral  Fernandes 
of  the  Brazilian  navy 
expressed  the  under- 
standing attitude  of  the  Brazilian  govern- 
ment when  he  said:  "Captain  Galvao  and 
his  companions  are  Portuguese  and  other 
citizens  and  as  such  deserve  our  respect 
and  cordiality.  Their  condition  of  men  in 
rebellion  makes  them  eligible  for  political 
asylum  in  Brazil."  This  meant  they  would 
be  free  men  when  they  got  to  shore  and 
would  not  be  arrested.  Two  hours  after  the 
rebels  had  surrendered  the  ship  to  the 
Brazilian  navy,  the  Santa  Maria  was 
turned  over  to  the  Portuguese  government. 
Giving  the  ship  to  the  government  instead 
of  the  owners  protected  Galvao  and  his 


SPECIAL!     NEXT  ISSUE! 
How  Well  Da  Yaa  Know  Your  Religion? 

This  issue  is  filled  with  fascinating  quizzes. 
It  will  both  test  and  broaden  your  knowledge 
of  religion  In  general  and  of  your  own  reli- 
gion in  particular.  Included  are  quizzes  with 
answers  carefully  documented  from  authori- 
tative historical  and  religious  sources  on 
such   subjects   as: 

0  Religions   of   the    World. 

•  God.  •  The  Bible. 

0  Soul.    Death    and    Hereafter. 

0  Life   and    Ministry  of   Jesus  Christ. 

0   F&maus   religious  quotations, 

0  World's  End.  •   Kingdom  of  God. 

0   Holidays  and    Celebrations. 

0  Bible    Principles   and    Family    Life. 

Don't  miss  it — in  the  next  issue! 


men  from  being  sued  in  Brazilian  courts. 
The  Portuguese  government  has  been 
greatly  embarrassed  by  the  Santa  Maria 
episode,  and  that  was,  apparently,  one  of 
the  objectives  that  Galvao  had.  His  ac- 
tions focused  world  attention  on  the  Sala- 
zar  government  and  its  thirty-two-year 
rule  of  Portugal.  The  seizure  appears  to 
have  sparked  a  peti- 
tion to  the  Portu- 
guese government  for 
the  restoration  of 
normal  democratic 
liberties.  Rioting  that 
broke  out  in  the  Por- 
tuguese West  African 
possession  of  Angola 
also  appears  to  have 
been  inspired  by  the 
Santa  Maria  incident. 
For  the  607  pas- 
sengers the  saga  of 
the  Santa  Maria  was 
finished.  Their  restful 
cruise  had  been  transformed  into  an  ex- 
citing adventure  that  will  live  vividly  in 
their  memories.  Perhaps  it  will  impress 
some  of  them  with  man's  great  need  for 
the  time,  under  the  righteous  rule  of  God's 
kingdom,  when  no  one  will  feel  impelled 
to  endanger  the  lives  of  other  people  to 
protest  against  a  form  of  oppressive  gov- 
ernment. 

In  the  little  island  of  Curacao,  where  the 
episode  had  its  beginning,  the  memory  of 
it  is  preserved  by  a  local  restaurant  that 
offers  on  its  menu  "Galvao  sandwiches" 
and  "Santa  Maria  soup." 


Dncxe&ia  in  Kozao. 

Ten  years  ago  war  was  raging  in  Korea.  At  that  time  there  were  but  sixty-one 
witnesses  of  Jehovah  scattered  throughout  that  land.  Today  there  are  3,844 
witnesses  of  Jehovah  there.  This  means  that  during  the  past  ten  years  sixty-three 
others  joined  each  one  of  the  sixty-one.  What  expansion  in  ten  years! — 1961 
Yearbook  of  Jehovah's  Witnesses. 


APRIL  8,  1961 


15 


THE  WORST    ERA    OF    LAWNESSNESS 


J  Edgar  Hoover,  director  of  the  Federal 
*  Bureau  of  Investigation,  in  two  speeches 
last  October  gave  a  vivid  picture  of  the  seri- 
ousness of  the  crime  wave  sweeping  through 
the  United  States.  The  following  are  his  re- 
marks before  the  Annual  Conference  of  the 
International  Association  of  Chiefs  of  Police 
in  Washington,  D.C.,  on  October  3,  1960: 

■  "Since  1950,  crime  has  increased  69  per 
cent— four  times  as  fast  as  our  expanding 
population.  Today,  we  find  ourselves  confront- 
ed with  the  worst  era  of  lawlessness  in  the 
Nation's  history.  Each  20  seconds  another 
serious  crime  is  added  to  the  Nation's  total. 
A  murder,  forcible  rape  or  assault  to  kill  is 
committed  every  four  minutes.  There  is  a 
burglary  every  46  seconds;  a  robbery  every 
seven  minutes;  and  33  automobiles  are  stolen 
every  hour. 

■  "While  budget-cutting  local  politicians  deny 
many  law  enforcement  agencies  the  resources 
to  adequately  perform  their  duties,  the  Amer- 
ican people  are  being  fleeced  by  the  criminal 
element  as  never  before.  Our  Nation's  annual 
crime  bill  now  totals  $22  billion— an  amount 
equivalent  to  $128  for  every  man,  woman  and 
child  in  the  United  States.  For  every  $1.00 
spent  on  education,  $1.11  goes  to  crime.  And 
for  every  $1.00  contributed  to  religious  organi- 
zations, crime  costs  our  people  $9.00. 

■  "Shocking  though  these  statistics  may  be, 
a  far  more  tragic  aspect  of  America's  crime 
problem  lies  in  the  role  played  by  youth.  The 
specter  of  juvenile  terrorism  and  gang-style 
intimidation  hangs  menacingly  over  commu- 
nity after  community.  A  surging  teen-age 
underworld — one  which  practices  open  de- 
fiance of  the  law  and  utter  contempt  for  the 
rights  and  welfare  of  others — has  arisen  to 
challenge  the  forces  of  law  and  order.  It  casts 
a  stigma  upon  every  community  where  it 
exists. 

■  "Since  1948,  juvenile  arrests  have  more 
than  doubled,  while  the  population  in  this  age 
group  has  increased  by  less  than  one  half. 
Today,  youthful  offenders  account  for  more 
than  one  fourth  of  the  arrests  for  robberies, 
one  half  of  the  burglary  and  larceny  arrests, 
and  nearly  two  thirds  of  the  arrests  for  auto- 
mobile thefts. 

■  "But  statistics  are  cold  and  lifeless.  They 
do   not   tell   the   complete   story   of   wanton 


brutality  and  mounting  savagery  which  typify 
the  arrogant  teen-age  gangs  of  today.  In  the 
explosive  atmosphere  surrounding  the  Hang- 
outs of  these  young  sadists,  no  one  may  feel 
secure.  'I'll  get  even  with  you  one  of  these  days 
even  if  I  have  to  kill  you'  is  the  violent  threat 
shouted  at  a  judge  in  the  Midwest  by  a  17- 
year-old  terrorist  who  was  sentenced  to  the 
reformatory  for  criminally  assaulting  a  de- 
fenseless girl.  .  .  .  These  are  not  isolated 
cases.  Disrespect  for  the  law  and  for  all  forms 
of  authority  has  become  a  badge  of  distinction 
in  the  eyes  of  growing  numbers  of  teen-agers." 

■  In  a  speech  at  the  American  Legion  Na- 
tional Convention  at  Miami  Beach,  Florida, 
on  October  18,  1960,  Mr.  Hoover  struck  at  a 
major  c^use  for  the  current  crime  wave.  He 
said:  "The  motion  picture  industry  as  well  as 
the  television  industry  owes  a  tremendous  re- 
sponsibility to  the  American  public  in  its  effect 
on  the  moral  upbringing  of  our  youth.  It  is 
not  surprising  to  any  thinking  citizen  that 
youthful  criminality  continues  to  skyrocket. 
Examine  the  dally  newspaper  movie  adver- 
tisements. You  can  rarely  find  a  motion  pic- 
ture suitable  for  family  consumption.  When 
adultery,  abnormality  and  adulation  of  crim- 
inals coinpose  such  a  substantial  segment  of 
today's  film  offerings,  the  society  mirrored  on 
the  screen  is  dangerously  close  to  national 
disaster." 

■  Hoover  presented  this  solution  to  the  prob- 
lem: "The  teachings  of  God,  if  followed,  will 
prevent  criminality.  The  stabilizing  force  of 
religion  is  needed  more  today  then  ever  be- 
fore. A  child  who  has  been  taught  to  respect 
the  laws  of  God  will  have  little  difficulty  re- 
specting the  laws  of  man." 

■  The  Bible  predicted  that  "in  the  last  days 
critical  times  hard  to  deal  with  will  be  here. 
For  men  will  be  .  .  ,  disobedient  to  parents, 
without  gratitude,  with  no  loving-kindness, 
having  no  natural  affection,  not  open  to  any 
agreement,  slanderers,  without  self-control, 
fierce,  without  love  of  goodness."  (2  Tim, 
3:1-3)  For  rejecting  God's  Word  as  a  guide 
this  world  has  reaped  a  bumper  crop  of  wick- 
edness and  is  fit  only  for  destruction.  To  Chris- 
tians, however,  this  is  a  sign  to  'raise  them- 
selves erect  and  lift  up  their  heads'  for  deliv- 
erance into  God's  new  world  of  righteousness 
is  close  at  hand.— Luke  21:28. 


16 


AWAKE! 


Bum 

"Awaitl" itaff 

urttrr 


WHEN  I  stood  beside  a  giant  printing 
press  watching  it  pour  out  completed 
magazines  at  the  rate  of  25,000  an  hour, 
I  thought  of  the  tremendous  change  the 
invention  of  printing  brought  to  man's  ef- 
forts to  duplicate  the  written  word.  In  the 
first  century  when  the  apostle  Paul  wrote 
his  inspired  letters,  great  effort  was  re- 
quired to  make  copies  of  them  for  distri- 
bution to  the  various  Christian  congrega- 
tions. Each  copy  had  to  be  made  labori- 
ously by  hand.  This  slow  process  of  dupli- 
cating his  letters  meant  that  only  a  few 
could  be  made,  but  today  speedy  printing 
presses  have  reproduced  them  by  the  mil- 
lions of  copies. 

From  the  simple  wooden  press  used  by 
Johann  Gutenberg  for  his  first  printing 
efforts  in  about  A.D.  1450  to  the  precision- 
made  printing  presses  of  today  has  been  a 
tremendous  step  forward  that  has  coincid- 
ed with  the  educational  advancement  of 
mankind.  After  centuries  of  intellectual 
stagnation  in  Europe,  the  invention  of 
printing  revolutionized  man's  thinking  by 
opening  up  the  way  for  the  easy  dis- 
tribution of  knowledge. 

Although  printing  from  blocks  and 
clay  tablets  was  done  in  China  as 
early  as  50  B.C.  and  metal  type  was 
being  cast  in  Korea  about  A.D.  1403, 
Johann  Gutenberg  is  given  the  credit 
for  taking  the  first  step  in  printing 
that  has  led  to  what  we  have  today. 
When  he  released  the  first  printed 
copy  of  the  Bible  in  about  1456,  he 


_    revolutionized  Bible  copying.  A 
great  future  was  in  store  for  this 
marvelous  invention. 

Rotary  Presses 

The  big  press  I  was  watching  in  the 
printing  plant  of  the  Watchtower  Society 
is  called  a  web-perfecting  rotary  press. 
The  reason  for  this  name,  as  pointed  out 
by  the  manager  of  the  plant,  Max  Larson, 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  printing  plates 
are  on  cylinders  and  they  print  on  both 
sides  of  a  continuous  web  of  paper  that  is 
threaded  through  the  machine.  The  paper 
unwraps  from  a  giant  roll  that  may  weigh 
more  than  1600  pounds. 

"What  happens  when  the  roll  of  paper 
runs  out?"  I  inquired.  "On  our  presses  it 
is  necessary  to  stop  them  so  that  a  new 
roll  may  be  spliced  to  the  web,"  Mr.  Lar- 
son replied,  "but  there  is  an  attachment 
used  on  some  presses  that  makes  this  un- 
necessary. It  can  splice  a  new  roll  to  the 
old  roll  while  the  machine  is  running  at 
full  speed.  This  is  done  by  causing  the  new 
roll  to  revolve  at  the  same  speed  as  the 
web  passing  through  the  press  before  the 


FLOW  OF  PAPER "AWAKE!"  WEB  ROTARY  PRESS 


APRIL  8,  1961 


17 


splice  is  automatically  made."  I  could 
readily  see  the  advantage  of  this  device 
for  newspaper  presses  that  have  a  tight 
printing  schedule. 

A  rotary  press,  I  learned,  is  made  up  of 
printing  units,  with  each  unit  consisting  of 
a  cylinder  that  holds  the  printing  plates,  an 
impression  cylinder  that  presses  the  paper 
against  the  plates  and  a  system  of  ink  roll- 
ers that  apply  the  ink.  These  units  can  be 
built  next  to  one  another  in  a  long  row  of 
fifty  or  more.  This  is  frequently  done  in 
newspaper  plants.  Several  webs  of  paper,  in 
such  arrangements,  are  passed  through  two 
units  apiece  and  then  brought  together  at 
one  folder,  where  they  are  cut  and  folded 
into  finished  newspapers  of  many  pages.  By 
using  several  webs  of  paper  and  groups  of 
printing  units  in  the  one  long  row,  a  news- 
paper plant  can  easily  vary  the  number  of 
pages  printed  and  have  several  folders 
pouring  out  completed  newspapers. 

Before  the  rotary  press  began  to  make 
its  appearance  in  1865,  cylinder  presses 
had  been  in  use  since  1812.  These  are  much 
slower  machines  that  hold  the  printing  sur- 
faces in  a  flat  bed  that  may  reciprocate 
either  horizontally  or  vertically  under  a 
pressure  cylinder.  The  cylinder  rolls  the 
paper  against  the  type.  Machines  of  this 
design  are  still  used  for  many  kinds  of 
printing. 

Printing  Plates 

I  inquired  of  Mr.  Larson  about  the 
curved  printing  plates  that  the  rotary 
presses  use.  To  answer  this  he  took  me  to 
the  composition  department,  where  metal 
type  is  fitted  into  steel  frames  called 
"chases."  Each  chase  of  type  may  repre- 
sent one  or  more  pages  of  whatever  is 
being  published.  Picking  up  what  looked 
like  a  piece  of  cardboard,  he  said,  "This 
is  called  a  mat.  It  is  made  of  a  special 
composition  so  that  it  can  be  used  to  make 
a  mold  of  the  type  in  these  chases.  Under 

18 


heat  and  great  pressure  a  clear  impres- 
sion is  made  of  every  letter.  The  mat  is 
then  used  to  mold  a  plate." 

To  show  me  how  this  is  clone  he  took 
me  to  the  plate  department  and  pointed  to 
a  big  pot  of  molten  metal  that  had  two 
sturdy  casting  boxes  sitting  next  to  it,  and 
remarked,  "The  molten  metal  in  that  pot 
is  kept  at  600  degrees  Fahrenheit  and  is 
poured  into  these  casting  boxes  after  mats 
have  been  placed  in  them.  The  result  is  a 
curved  printing  plate." 

I  noticed  that  the  glistening  metal 
plates  that  came  from  the  boxes  copied 
every  letter  and  punctuation  mark  in  the 
mat  with  beautiful  clarity.  "Why,"  I  in- 
quired, "do  these  plates  reproduce  the 
smallest  impressions  in  the  mold  when  me- 
tal contracts  as  it  cools?"  The  answer,  I 
was  told,  is  in  the  13|  percent  of  anti- 
mony that  is  mixed  with  the  other  metals 
in  the  pot  "Antimony,"  Mr.  Larson  ex- 
plained, "seems  to  be  the  only  metal  that 
expands  as  it  cools.  When  mixed  with  the 
other  metals  in  the  proper  proportion,  it 
compensates  for  their  contraction.  This 
fact  causes  the  casting  metal  to  retain 
every  impression  of  the  mold,  giving  us 
a  printing  plate  of  good  quality."  He  went 
on  to  point  out  that  "a  thin  coating  of 
nickel  will  increase  the  usefulness  of  the 
plate  from  some  10,000  impressions  to  at 
least  one  million." 

Stereotypes,  as  these  plat&s  are  called, 
are  not  used  by  all  printing  establish- 
ments. While  they  are  a  very  fast  and 
economical  way  of  making  durable  print- 
ing plates,  there  are  other  kinds  of  plates 
that  are  satisfactory  for  certain  types  of 
work.  Among  these  are  electrotypes,  light- 
weight plastic  plates  and  rubber  plates.  It 
is  when  printing  must  be  done  on  cello- 
phane, corrugated  cartons,  sacks  and  oth- 
er unusual  surfaces  that  rubber  plates 
prove  to  be  very  good. 

AWAKE! 


Typecasting 

For  several  hundred  years  type  was  set 
by  the  slow  process  of  picking  out  each 
letter  by  hand  from  a  box  and  placing  it 
in  proper  order  to  form  a  line  of  type.  In- 
ventors tried  diligently  to  devise  some  way 
of  doing  this  by  machine.  Finally  the  in- 
ventive genius  of  Ottmar  Mergenthaler 
brought  forth  a  workable  machine  in  1884. 
Two  years  later  an  improved  model  was 
dubbed  the  Linotype. 

The  idea  that  made  Mergenthaler's 
machine  practicable  was  the  use  of  ma- 
trices, or  molds,  for  each  letter.  After  be- 
ing used  the  molds  were  recirculated 
through  the  machine.  This  idea  is  still  the 
heart  of  the  modern  Linotype  and  Inter- 
type  machines. 

The  metal  matrices  are  released  from  a 
container  or  magazine,  as  it  is  called,  by 
depressing  keys  on  a  typewriter-like  key- 
board. These  fall  into  a  receptacle  until 
several  words  have  been  formed.  They  are 
then  sent  into  the  machine,  where  molten 
metal  is  poured  on  them,  and  in  a  few  sec- 
onds a  line  of  type  pops  out.  The  advance- 
ment of  printing  is  greatly  indebted  to  the 
invention  of  this  remarkable  machine. 

Photoengraving 

Because  pictures  and  illustrations  play 
an  important  part  in  modern  printing,  I 
was  interested  in  learning  how  they  are 
put  on  metal  plates  so  they  will  print  on 
paper.  I  was  told  that  it  is  done  by  photo- 
engraving. This  consists  of  photographing 
a  picture  or  illustration  on  a  special  film, 
and  then  printing  the  picture  photographi- 
cally on  a  piece  of  metal  that  has  been 
chemically  treated  so  as  to  be  sensitive  to 
light.  The  image  that  is  put  on  the  plate 
is  developed  and  then  etched  into  the  met- 
al by  acid. 

A  halftone  etching  is  made  by  photo- 
graphing the  original  picture  through  a 
halftone  screen  that  has  a  certain  number 


of  crossed  lines.  When  putting  the  picture 
on  the  metal  plate,  light  passes  between 
the  lines  and  falls  upon  the  sensitive  plate 
as  round  spots.  When  the  plate  is  devel- 
oped, these  spots  of  light  become  round 
dots.  Acid  then  eats  away  the  metal  from 
around  them  to  a  depth  desired  by  the 
engraver.  The  raised  dots  may  vary  from 
3,000  to  160,000  dots  to  the  square  inch, 
depending  upon  the  coarseness  or  fineness 
of  the  screen  used.  These  many  tiny  dots 
are  the  means  by  which  a  picture  can  be 
printed  on  paper. 

A  somewhat  similar  process  is  used  to 
etch  the  large  copper  cylinders  that  are 
used  in  rotogravure  printing.  This  proc- 
ess differs  from  letterpress  printing  in  that 
the  printing  is  done  from  depressions  that 
have  been  eaten  into  the  cylinders  by  acid 
instead  of  from  raised  surfaces.  As  the 
cylinder  rotates  through  a  trough  of  ink, 
a  scraper  removes  the  ink  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  cylinder  but  leaves  it  in  the 
many  etched  depressions.  The  ink  in  these 
depressions  is  then  transferred  to  the  pa- 
per as  the  paper  is  passed  between  the 
copper  cylinder  and  a  pressure  cylinder. 

The  rotogravure  method  of  printing  is 
used  extensively  for  color  work  at  high 
speeds.  It  is  an  intaglio  process,  which 
means  the  image  is  cut  below  the  surface 
of  the  plate,  causing  its  printed  impres- 
sion to  be  raised  above  the  surface  of  the 
paper  instead  of  being  embossed  into  the 
paper  as  is  done  by  the  letterpress. 

Lithography 

Another  interesting  development  in 
printing  that  has  aided  it  greatly  in  doing 
fine-quality  work  is  that  of  lithography. 
This  form  of  printing  had  its  beginning  in 
1796  when  Aloys  Senefelder  discovered  he 
could  make  prints  from  drawings  he  made 
on  limestone  by  applying  the  principle  that 
water  and  grease  do  not  mix.  Water  ap- 
plied to  the  porous  stone  was  absorbed  ex- 


APRIL  8,  1961 


19 


cept  where  the  image  was  drawn  with  a 
greasy  material;  there  the  water  was  re- 
pelled. When  special  ink  was  applied  to 
the  stone  it  adhered  to  the  greasy  image 
but  was  repelled  by  the  damp  areas.  Paper 
pressed  against  the  image  carried  away  an 
inked  impression. 

Having  read  about  this,  I  was  interested 
in  seeing  an  offset  press,  for  it  operates  on 
the  lithographic  principle.  When  I  ex- 
pressed this  desire,  Mr.  Larson  led  me  to 
where  one  was  in  the  process  of  printing 
letterheads.  Instead  of  limestone  as  a  print- 
ing plate,  the  press  uses  a  thin  sheet  of 
aluminum  that  is  curved  to  fit  one  of  its 
cylinders. 

"How  is  the  image  put  on  the  plate," 
I  inquired.  "Photographically,"  he  replied. 
"The  aluminum  is  grained  with  abrasives 
so  that  it  will  hold  moisture.  When  the  im- 
age has  been  photographically  printed  on 
the  plate  and  developed,  it  consists  of  a 
light-hardened  and  grease-receptive  mate- 
rial that  repels  moisture  but  holds  a  special 
lithographic  ink."*He  then  pointed  to  a  rub- 
ber cylinder  that  revolves  against  the  plate. 
"The  inked  image  on  the  plate  is  printed 
on  this  rubber  roller,  and  then  the  roller 
prints  the  offset  image  on  the  paper.  That 
is  the  reason  this  is  called  offset  printing." 

Color  Printing 

Printing  pictures  in  color  involves  much 
more  than  printing  them  in  black  and 
white.  Instead  of  using  one  plate,  at  least 
four  must  be  used.  Three  are  for  the  three 
primary  colors— red,  blue  and  yellow;  the 
fourth  is  for  black.  By  properly  combining 
these  three  colors  all  the  other  shades  that 
may  appear  in  a  picture  can  be  reproduced. 
Separation  of  the  primary  colors  and  black 
from  the  original  picture  is  done  by  spe- 
cial filters  when  the  engraver  makes  neg- 
atives of  it.  From  these  four  negatives  he 
makes  four  plates.  Each  must  be  impressed 
upon  the  same  piece  of  paper  to  produce  a 


finished  picture.  For  very  fine  quality, 
some  presses  use  more  than  the  three  pri- 
mary colors. 

Since  a  colored  picture  requires  so  many 
impressions,  something  has  to  be  done  to 
prevent  the  ink  from  smudging  and  trans- 
ferring to  where  it  is  not  wanted.  Even 
black  ink  presents  a  problem  when  a  web 
of  paper  is  moving  through  a  press  at 
about  800  feet  a  minute.  In  reply  to  my 
inquiry,  Mr.  Larson  explained  that  with 
soft  or  coarse  papers,  such  as  newsprint, 
the  oils  in  the  ink  are  absorbed  into  the 
paper.  Absorption  along  with  oxidation 
causes  the  ink  pigments  left  on  the  paper 
to  become  hard  enough  to  resist  offsetting 
and  smudging. 

"What  about  papers  with  a  hard  finish?" 
I  asked.  "Oxidizers  are  used,"  he  said, 
"that  quickly  cause  a  film  to  form  over 
the  ink,  preventing  it  from  smearing.  Inks 
designed  to  set  by  evaporation  also  help 
solve  the  problem.  For  such  inks  some 
presses  have  special  heating  units  that 
cause  rapid  evaporation."  He  went  on  to 
explain  that  colored  inks  that  are  printed 
on  top  of  one  another  require  the  tacki- 
ness of  each  to  be  varied  so  that  each  suc- 
cessive ink  will  be  held  on  the  image  by 
the  greater  tackiness  of  the  previous  ink. 
All  these  factors  must  be  considered  by 
the  inkmaker  as  he  mixes  each  ink  to 
suit  the  paper  and  press  that  will  use  it. 

The  more  I  looked  into  the  process  of 
printing  the  more  evident  it  became  that 
printing  is  a  complex  industry  that  re- 
quires a  multitude  of  skills.  Although  it 
plays  a  vital  role  in  our  daily  lives,  its 
greatest  value  is  in  making  possible  the 
educating  of  peoples  of  all  nations  in  the 
purposes  and  written  Word  of  man's  Crea- 
tor. Because  of  printing,  such  educating 
work  can  now  be  done  on  a  scale  that  was 
impossible  in  the  days  of  the  apostles.  Es- 
pecially in  this  respect,  printing  has  proved 
to  be  a  revolutionary  invention. 


20 


080461 


AWAKE! 


(fatkdtc  @ommea£  oh  SfeectaC  }4w&6ef 


IN  The  Catholic  Worker,  published  in  New 
York  city  as  the  "organ  of  |  the  Catholic 
worker  movement,"  Associate  Editor  Ammon 
Hennacy  writes  on  page  two  of  the  February, 
1961,  issue:  "The  Jehovah  Witnesses  have 
issued  a  48  [sic]  page  edition  of  their  AWAKE 
on  'The  Catholic  Church  in  the  20th  Century.1 
A  copy  was  sent  to  me  by  a  reader  who  asks 
me  to  refute  the  charges  against  our  Church. 
This  edition  goes  to  3,125,000  people  and  is 
printed  in  22  languages.  All  of  their  facts 
about  the  Catholic  Church  are  from  Catholic 
sources  and  fairly  well  documented.  About  all 
they  say  any  well  educated  Catholic  could 
admit  as  being  true,  but  the  Faith  of  the 
Church  still  remains,  and  the  deficiencies  of 
Churchmen  is  no  reason  for  us  to  become 
Jehovah  Witnesses.  .  .  . 

•  "Naturally  when  they  point  to  all  churches, 
including  ours,  as  supporting  wars  and  unholy 
governments  that  make  war,  they  are  speak- 
ing the  truth,  and  it  is  no  wonder  that  church- 
es which  have  given  the  minimum  to  their 
followers  and  have  commercialized  their  mes- 
sage into  a  worship  of  Mammon  are  losing 
members  to  the  fast  growing  JW's.  The  first 
section  tells  of  burning  Bibles  this  year  in 
Spain,  Puerto  Rico  and  Colombia,  This  is  what 
is  done  to  any  literature  which  may  cause 
members  of  the  Church  to  fall  away  in  these 
countries.  That  has  always  been  done  since 
Inquisition  times.  It  was  Protestant  Bibles 
that  were  burned;  not  Catholic  ones.  There 
is  no  defense  for  such  action  by  bigoted  Cath- 
olics, ... 

•  "  'The  Catholic  Church  and  Freedom.'  Un- 
der this  heading  there  is  a  terrific  bombarding 
of  the  Churchmen  and  political  dictators  for 
their  complicity.  Our  readers  are  familiar  with 
what  we  have  written  about  Franco,  Musso- 
lini, and  what  Gordon  Zahn  has  said  about 
Hitler  and  the  German  hierarchy.  He  is  quoted 
in  a  later  section  of  this  booklet.  Of  course 
Pius  IX  was  an  ultra  conservative  and  Pius  XI 
said  that  Mussolini  was  'sent  by  Providence,' 
and  Cardinal  Shuster  of  Milan  blessed  the 
troops  and  said,  'The  Italian  flag  is  at  this  mo- 
ment bringing  in  triumph  the  Cross  of  Christ 
to  Ethiopia,'  That  is  one  reason  that  Italy  has 
the  strongest  Communist  Party  outside  of 
Russia  and  China.  Our  Churchmen  make  the 
mistake  of  furnishing  fuel  for  the  Communist 

APRIL  8,  1961 


© 


fire  by  upholding  dictators  and  their  exploita- 
tive practices.  Evidence  of  the  'concordances,' 
[sic]  by  which  Hitler  and  Mussolini  were  sup- 
ported by  the  Bishops  is  given.  This  is  only 
too  true.  I  do  not  doubt  if  Mr.  Abrams  who  is 
quoted  as  not  being  able  to  find  a  single  priest 
who  had  scruples  against  World  War  I  in  this 
country  looked  hard  enough  he  would  find 
some,  but  of  course  the  majority  did  as  clergy 
do  in  all  countries:  support  the  government, 
right  or  wrong. 

0  "The  section  on  schools  deals  almost  en- 
tirely with  what  happened  in  France.  I  am  in 
no  position  to  say  whether  this  is  correctly 
given  or  not.  In  Spain  tho  anarchist  Franciseo 
Ferrer  was  killed  by  the  State  and  the  Church- 
men for  starting  a  public  school  where  more 
than  one  side  of  a  question  could  be  given. 
And  where  those  clergy  are  in  power  who  can 
put  it  over  it  is  still  done  in  many  countries. 
There  is  no  indication  that  this  would  ever  be 
the  line  in  this  country.  .  .  . 

•  "  'Catholic  Church  and  Morals'.  .  .  .  The  ac- 
ceptance of  legalized  prostitution  and  gam- 
bling by  Churchmen  is  certainly  not  follow- 
ing Christ,  Whether  the  Vatican  is  a  large 
stockholder  in  Monte  Carlo,  and  also  in  the 
gambling  at  Biarritz  and  Vichy  I  do  not  know. 

1  would  not  defend  this  investment.  Church 
attendance  in  South  America  is  very  low  and 
in  many  Catholic  countries  it  is  mainly  the 
women  and  children  who  attend  Mass.  .  .  . 
I  suppose  that  the  JW's  .  .  ,  find  many  rea- 
sons for  thinking  that  they  would  not  have 
much  freedom  in  a  preponderantly  Catholic 
country.  The  JW's  have  certainly  been  given 
the  limit  by  Catholic  judges,  and  were  exe- 
cuted the  very  first  by  Hitler  and  Mussolini. 

•  "Any  educated  Catholic  who  would  read  this 
booklet  would  not  be  troubled  in  his  faith  if 
the  charges  were  twice  as  bad  against  the 
Church  as  given  in  this  booklet  I  have  heard 
much  worse  from  priests  who  are  not  even 
radical.  And  the  others  for  whom  the  booklet 
is  meant  would  be  afraid  to  read  it,  or  would 
be  too  busy  or  ignorant  to  notice  that  there 
ever  was  such  literature  printed." 

•  If  you  missed  reading  the  well- documented 
special  Awake!  on  "The  Catholic  Church  in 
the  Twentieth  Century,"  you  are  welcome  to 
write  for  a  free  copy. 

21 


(Ui/iitfimcAiMmblm. 


UNITED  STATES 

for 


THE  greatest  reli- 
gious  conven- 
tion ever  held  in  the 
United  States  was 
the  eight-day  world 
assembly  of  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  held 
in  Yankee  Stadi- 
um and  the  Polo 
Grounds  simultane- 
ously in  1958.  Over 
a  quarter  of  a  million  peo- 
ple attended  from  123  lands! 
There  will  be  no  such  world  assem- 
bly of  Jehovah's  witnesses  in  1961,  but 
they  will  hold  smaller  regional  six-day  as- 
semblies in  six  cities  in  various  sections 
of  the  United  States.  Jehovah's  witnesses 
will  also  hold  other  assemblies  in  Canada 
and  Europe. 

A  quick  glance  at  the  map  on  this  page 
will  reveal  that  the  assemblies  will  be  held 
within  short  traveling  distance  from  al- 
most any  part  of  the  United  States.  These 
arrangements,  of  course,  were  made  so 
that  you  will  be  able  to  attend  at  least 
one  of  the  assemblies.  The  provision  is  for 
your  spiritual  enrichment;  by  all  means 
take  advantage  of  it. 

Such  religious  assemblies  are  occasions 
of  great  joy  and  happiness  for  Jehovah's 
people.  From  early  times  God's  people  were 
commanded  to  assemble  several  times  a 
year  to  worship  God  and  to  strengthen 
themselves  spiritually.  As  in  the  past,  so 
today,  they  hear  Jehovah's  law  read,  the 
righteous  acts  of  Jehovah  declared,  old  and 
new  thoughts  brought  to  mind.  Christian 
men  and  women  are  thereby  spiritually  re- 
freshed and  built  up  with  appreciation  and 
understanding  of  Jehovah's  organization 
and  purposes. 

22 


These  conventions  are  nei- 
ther crusades  nor  revivals. 
They  are  quiet,  dignified  gath- 
erings of  Christians  intent 
upon  filling  their  minds  with 
Bible  wisdom.  At  Witness  as- 
semblies 
there  is  no 
wild  emotion- 
a  1  i  s  m,  no 
noisy  r  e  1  i- 
gious  mani- 
festations; 
there  is  happiness. 
Their  hearts  glow 
with  the  happiness 
that  comes  from 
leaving  behind  old- 
world  barriers  and 
distinctions  to  gather  in  a  model  assembly 
community  where  Jehovah's  spirit  prevails 
and  intense  love  for  one  another  manifests 
itself  in  Christian  orderliness,  considera- 
tion and  co-operation. 

Getting  Ready 

Preconvention  work  requires  months  of 
hard  work  by  hundreds,  even  thousands, 
of  volunteer  workers.  Many  months  prior 
to  the  assembly  contracts  for  each  assem- 
bly must  be  arranged  for,  contact  with  ho- 
tel officials  and  arrangements  for  large 
blocks  of  rooms  must  be  made.  The  city 
must  be  worked  from  three  to  six  times 
in  search  of  rooming  accommodations. 
City  officials  and  restaurant  owners  must 
be  notified  in  advance  so  that  they  can 
prepare  to  handle  the  increased  crowds. 

Many  fine  expressions  are  made  by  peo- 
ple who  have  rooms  to  rent.  One  woman 
said  that,  upon  hearing  of  the  convention, 
she  arranged  her  vacation  for  that  week 
so  that  she  could  attend  every  day.  In  one 
city  a  retired  policeman  said:  "You 
know,  I  used  to  give  you  people  a  hard 
time  years  ago.  ...  I  tell  you  what,  send 

AWAKE! 


me  a  couple  of  your  nice  people,  I'd  like 
to  make  up  for  the  past."  Another  house- 
holder stated:  "We  know  we  can  trust  Je- 
hovah's witnesses.  They  are  welcome  to 
come  into  my  home  any  time.  Just  tell  the 
people  who  come  here  to  stay,  not  to  work 
too  hard  trying  to  convert  us." 

A  great  amount  of  equipment  is  needed 
to  operate  a  convention  of  any  large  size. 
Gathering,  repairing  and  even  making 
things  needed  for  the  assembly  are  a  tre- 
mendous task.  Used  tray  washers,  kettles 
and  stoves  must  all  be  put  into  usable  con- 
dition. The  stage  or  platform  must  be  de- 
signed and  built.  Some  of  these  are  worked 
on  months  in  advance.  It  is  interesting  how 
the  brothers  cut  down  on  expenses  when 
building.  Instead  of  using  new  lumber, 
which  is  very  expensive,  they  use  scrap 
lumber  wherever  possible.  Much  of  this 
lumber  is  obtained  from  shipping  crates 
donated  by  importing  companies. 

Jehovah's  witnesses  are  glad  to  engage 
the  best  convention  facilities  available. 
Where  there  are  no  auditoriums,  as  in  the 
interior  of  Africa,  they  will  carve  a  place 
of  worship  out  of  bush  country  and  mold  a 
speaker's  platform  around  an  African  ant- 
hill. Those  in  charge  of  numerous  conven- 
tion facilities  from  the  world's  largest  are- 
nas to  modest  village  halls  are  glad  to  have 
Jehovah's  witnesses.  Their  own  comments 
explain  why.  Jess  Walls,  superintendent 
of  Briggs  Stadium,  Detroit,  Michigan, 
said  that  the  Stadium  was  the  cleanest 
it  had  been  in  years.  "When  my  clean- 
ing men  take  over  the  cleaning  work  after 
Jehovah's  Witnesses'  Convention,"  he  said, 
"they  will  have  to  wear  white  gloves."  Yes, 
with  a  thousand  volunteer  workers  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  scrubbed  that  place  from 
roof  to  basement  before  assembling  in  it. 
At  the  Coliseum  in  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah, 
the  chief  fire  inspector  said:  "That  coli- 
seum is  the  cleanest  that  I've  ever  seen 
it."  No  wonder,  for  Jehovah's  witnesses 


scrubbed,  swept  and  mopped  the  buildings. 
They  even  waxed  the  main  arena  floor  in 
the  Coliseum.  At  Baltimore  Memorial  Sta- 
dium, Maryland,  the  management  stated: 
"The  entire  Stadium  was  scrubbed  from 
top  to  bottom  both  before  and  after  the 
convention.  .  .  .  After  your  convention  end- 
ed, it  was  impossible  to  realize  that  your 
group  had  been  here  for  five  days  with  a 
top  daily  attendance  of  41,000." 

Volunteer  Service 

After  the  Boston  district  assembly  last 
year,  an  official  of  the  Chamber  of  Com- 
merce convention  bureau  called  up  and 
asked:  "Is  it  really  true  that  all  of  those 
people  who  had  worked  so  hard  at  the 
convention  did  so  with  no  pay?"  This 
seemed  to  amaze  him  and  it  was  hard  for 
him  to  think  it  true  that  they  did  so  volun- 
tarily. 

Yes,  all  the  work  is  voluntary  and  there 
is  much  to  be  done.  Besides  the  work  de- 
voted to  preparing  and  rehearsing  talks 
and  demonstrations,  besides  the  additional 
work  done  by  those  at  Brooklyn  headquar- 
ters to  be  sure  things  needed  for  the  assem- 
blies are  ready  on  time,  there  are  hundreds 
of  other  things  to  be  done.  And  often  broth- 
ers leave  their  personal  businesses  to  see 
that  these  jobs  get  done.  They  work  long 
hours,  even  seven  days  a  week.  Outsiders 
often  contribute  their  time,  energy  and 
resources  to  help  assemblies  along.  For  ex- 
ample, at  the  Nashville,  Tennessee,  assem- 
bly last  year  a  large  boiler  was  needed  to 
produce  the  hot  water  and  steam  necessary 
for  the  operation  of  the  cafeteria.  A  boiler 
was  located  in  a  building  that  was  sched- 
uled to  be  torn  down.  The  salvage  company 
not  only  offered  the  boiler  free  of  charge, 
but  tore  the  building  down  sufficiently  so 
that  the  whole  boiler  could  be  lifted  up 
with  a  large  crane  and  placed  on  a  truck. 
A  local  crane  company  donated  the  use  of 
their  crane  to  place  the  boiler  where  it  was 


APRIL  8,  1961 


23 


needed.  Such  kind  expressions  are  indeed 
deeply  appreciated  by  Jehovah's  witnesses. 

To  give  you  some  idea  of  the  work  done 
at  assemblies  and  the  number  of  workers 
who  volunteer  their  services,  just  glance 
over  these  figures,  which  are  by  no  means 
exhaustive.  The  rooming  department  at 
one  assembly  had  over  a  hundred  volun- 
teer workers.  At  another  over  237,000 
hours  were  spent  searching  for  rooms 
alone!  The  installation  department  at  the 
1958  assembly  used  125  volunteer  workers; 
the  sign  department,  thirty-four.  Nearly 
12,000  workers  were  used  just  to  see  that 
the  conventioncrs  got  their  meals!  To  sup- 
plement the  cafeteria,  there  were  126  re- 
freshment stands  manned  by  another  7,000 
convention  delegates.  Volunteer  workers 
set  up  the  sound  system  of  500  trumpets 
and  horns,  raised  230,000  square  feet  of 
tents,  assembled  47,000  chairs,  manned  109 
trucks,  used  some  150,000  feet  of  lumber, 
and  so  forth.  At  another  assembly  the  con- 
struction crew  alone  utilized  150  workers, 
the  sanitation  department  used  350  men 
and  moved  fifty  truckloads  of  trash  dur- 
ing the  assembly.  Over  5,000  attendants 
were  used.  The  First  Aid  was  staffed  with 
more  than  twenty  doctors.  Certainly  this 
is  striking  evidence  of  God's  spirit  in  op- 
eration on  those  who  offer  themselves  so 
willingly. 

But  why  do  these  people  volunteer  to 
work?  Jehovah's  witnesses  do  so  because 
they  love  their  brothers.  "I've  volunteered 
because  I  get  a  lot  of  satisfaction  from  it," 
said  one  Witness.  "I  feel  that  I'm  needed." 
Another  stated:  "I  consider  it  a  privilege 
to  work.  You  get  to  feel  that  you're  a  part 
of  a  great  wheel."  A  cafeteria  worker  re- 
marked: "In  the  kitchen  you  get  to  see  the 
brothers  from  all  over  the  country.  You 
see  them  come  in  with  their  clean  suits, 
change  over  to  their  work  clothes  and  be- 


fore you  know  it,  they're  in  there  work- 
ing. It's  wonderful!"  An  office  worker  who 
was  assigned  to  peel  potatoes  said:  "It  does 
something  to  you  to  see  the  spirit  of  these 
brothers  who  take  any  job.  They're  so  pa- 
tient and  humble.  It  makes  you  glad  that 
you're  a  part  of  the  New  World  society." 
A  secretary  said:  "I  don't  feel  as  if  I've 
been  to  an  assembly  unless  I've  worked. 
Those  that  work  are  the  happier  ones.  The 
others  remind  me  of  visitors."  So  the  spirit 
of  love  in  action  sees  that  there  are  plenty 
of  cooks,  vegetable  cleaners,  dishwashers, 
servers,  butchers,  truckers,  carpenters, 
electricians,  plumbers,  steam  fitters,  weld- 
ers, and  so  forth,  as  needed  during  assem- 
bly times. 

Everywhere  one  turns  during  assembly 
times  the  spirit  is  different.  People  seem 
more  congenial  and  co-operative,  more 
willing  to  sacrifice  and  give  of  themselves. 
Landladies  give  of  their  rooms.  Jehovah's 
witnesses  as  a  rule  prefer  to  stay  in  pri- 
vate homes,  because  of  the  personal  touch 
and  the  opportunity  that  it  affords  to  give 
a  witness. 

So  during  1961  Jehovah's  witnesses  will 
be  assembling  at  New  York  city's  famed 
Yankee  Stadium,  with  Spanish  meetings 
at  the  nearby  New  Rockland  Palace.  They 
will  be  meeting  in  the  all  air-conditioned 
Sam  Houston  Coliseum  in  Houston,  Texas. 
In  the  heart  of  the  business  district  of 
Omaha,  Nebraska,  the  Omaha  Civic  Audi- 
torium will  open  its  doors  to  them.  On 
the  shores  of  Lake  Michigan  the  $10,000,- 
000  multipurpose  Milwaukee  Auditorium- 
Arena  will  swing  wide  its  gates  to  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses.  And  in  the  all-new 
Candlestick  Stadium,  the  home  of  the  San 
Francisco  Giants,  in  San  Francisco,  Cali- 
fornia, the  last  of  the  1961  district  assem- 
blies will  be  held  in  the  United  States. 
Here  a  willing  people  will  worship  their 
God.  You  are  most  welcome  to  attend. 


24 


AW  AKE! 


1961 


DISTRICT     u 
ASSEMBLY^ 


i 


CANADA'S  great  Pacific 
seaport,  Vancouver,  is  to 
be  host  city  to  a  multitude  of 
Jehovah's  witnesses  and  per- 
sons of  good  will  toward  God  July  4  to  9, 
1961,  the  occasion  being  a  national  assem- 
bly. Will  you  be  one  of  the  thousands  of 
delegates  who  will  converge  on  this  beauti- 
ful flower-garden  city?  If  yes,  then  you  can 
look  forward  to  a  delightful  and  beneficial 
visit. 

Vancouver,  with  a  backdrop  of  majestic 
mountain  ranges  and  distant  snowcapped 
peaks,  is  sheltered  from  the  open  ocean  by 
nearby  Vancouver  Island.  Here  in  this 
thriving  modern  seaport  live  some  665,000 
people.  It  was  fitting  that  Vancouver,  with 
one  of  the  finest  natural  harbors  in  the 
world,  should  get  its  name  from  the  in- 
trepid sailor,  Captain  George  Vancouver, 
whose  navigations  in  the  area  first  direct- 
ed attention  to  the  city's  maritime  com- 
mercial possibilities.  Here  it  may  be  truly 
said  that  East  met  West,  for  a  city  and 
a  port  were  vitally  necessary  for  the  open- 
ing up  and  maintenance  of  social  and  com- 
mercial intercourse  between  Canada  and 
the  Orient. 

As  is  usual  with  seaport  cities,  Vancou- 
ver has  a  distinctly  international  flavor. 
Practically  one  third  of  the  entire  popula- 
tion can  lay  claim  to  national  origins  other 
than  British.  The  leading  nations  of  Eu- 
rope and  Asia  are  all  well  represented. 
Conventioners  will  be  able  to  see  people 
from  all  parts  of  the  world  on  the  streets 

APRIL  8,  1961 


of  Vancouver  when  they  come  this  year. 

In  summertime  Vancouver  enjoys  a 
pleasingly  temperate  climate.  Sunshine 
predominates  during  the  summer  months, 
with  temperatures  averaging  a  pleasing  60 
degrees  to  70  degrees  Fahrenheit  by  rea- 
son of  the  moderating  breezes  from  the 
Pacific.  Flower  gardens  and  flowering 
shrubs  abound.  Fr9m  June  onward  the 
scent  of  roses  fills  the  air. 

Jehovah's  witnesses  are  very  interested 
in  the  great  variety  of  people  comprising 
the  local  population.  This  interest  dates 
back  to  the  dawn  of  the  twentieth  century, 
when  some  glimmerings  of  Bible  under- 
standing first  penetrated  Vancouver.  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  were  then  known  as  Bible 
Students. 

Reminiscing  about  the  year  1911,  one 
old-timer  speaks  about  attending  his  first 
Bible  study  meeting  in  a  home  with  a  total 
of  fourteen  in  attendance.  Greater  Van- 
couver now  has  2,858  ministers  of  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  in  twenty-four  congrega- 
tions. In  fact,  throughout  the  province  of 
British  Columbia  there  is  one  minister  of 
Jehovah's  witnesses  for  every  165  inhabit- 
ants. Jehovah  God  has  surely  blessed  the 
efforts  of  their  faithful  work! 

Vancouver  has  proved  to  be  a  gracious 
host  to  Jehovah's  witnesses  on  numerous 
occasions.  Outstanding  instances  were  the 

25 


district  assemblies  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
held  here  in  June,  1949,  when  5,836  as- 
sembled to  hear  the  public  lecture,  and  in 
August,  1954,  when  9,632  were  present  for 
"the  feature  address.  Then  there  was  that 
memorable  gathering,  the  Triumphant 
Kingdom  Assembly  of  1955,  that  drew  a 
throng  of  21,877,  filling  the  greater  part 
of  the  then  new  Empire  Stadium. 

Since  that  time  the  already  spacious  fa- 
cilities of  the  Pacific  National  Exhibition's 
Empire  Stadium  have  been  greatly  expand- 
ed to  accommodate  over  30,000,  with  half 
of  that  accommodation  under  cover.  Add- 
ing to  the  stadium's  attraction  is  its  beau- 
tiful park  setting  and  the  spacious  provi- 
sion for  parking  of  thousands  of  cars. 

At  this  assembly  you  will  meet  publish- 
ers of  the  Kingdom  who  are  carrying  on 
the  preaching  and  teaching  work  under  a 
great  variety  of  conditions.  You  will  meet 
ministers  who  serve  in  the  beautiful  or- 
chard district  of  the  Okanagan  Valley, 
some  who  penetrate  the  great  logging 
areas  of  northern  British  Columbia,  na- 
tives from  the  north  end  of  Vancouver  Is- 
land and  the  coastland,  and  still  others 
who  spend  most  of  their  life  afloat  on  fish- 
ing vessels.  Then,  too,  there  are  the  great 
numbers  that  are  employed  in  the  various 
segments  of  the  pulp,  plywood  and  canning 
industries.  How  happy  you  will  be  to  meet 
them  and  learn  of  their  interesting  experi- 
ences! How  overjoyed  they  will  be  to  meet 
you! 

As  ships  enter  Vancouver  Harbor  there 
is  always  someone  to  show  loving  concern 
for  crew  members  who  seldom  have  oppor- 
tunity to  hear  the  good  news  of  the  King- 
dom. From  one  diligent  minister  we  have 
the  following  report  of  his  experience 
aboard  an  Italian  freighter:  "With  the 
captain's  permission  I  began  calling  on  the 
officers  and  on  my  third  call  met  the  chief 
officer.  When  I  introduced  myself  he 
reached  in  a  drawer  and  drew  out  a  well- 


worn  copy  of  the  book  'New  Heavens  and 
a  New  EArth/  He  asked  many  questions 
and  showed  a  great  desire  to  have  a  Bible 
in  his  own  language."  This  call  resulted 
in  placing  many  Bibles  and  much  Bible 
literature,  not  only  with  the  chief  officer, 
but  with  many  of  the  crew. 

Imagine  the  joy  of  the  brothers  attend- 
ing a  circuit  assembly  in  Vancouver  when 
the  whole  crew  of  a  Japanese  freighter 
trooped  in  to  see  the  showing  of  one  of 
the  Society's  films!  Enterprising  brothers 
had  arranged  taxi  service  from  ship  to  au- 
ditorium so  that  they  could  come. 

In  general  you  will  find  Vancouver  resi- 
dents a  friendly  and  sociable  lot.  They  are 
cosmopolitan,  easy  to  approach  and  cour- 
teous. Many  will  invite  you  inside  and 
hear  the  sermon  you  have  prepared  and 
will  manifest  a  very  sympathetic  attitude. 
Their  reception  of  the  Kingdom  message 
may  be  judged  by  the  fact  that  there  are 
in  the  Greater  Vancouver  area  over  2,000 
Bible  studies  being  conducted  by  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  in  the  homes  of  the  people. 
Doubtless  this  is  why  there  is  such  a  fine 
ratio  of  publishers  to  population,  and 
why  British  Columbia  has  produced  so 
many  ministers  who  have  moved  east  and 
even  oversees  to  serve  in  lands  where  there 
is  a  great  need  for  the  hearing  of  the  Word 
of  God. 

July  4  to  9,  1961,  Vancouver's  Empire 
'Stadium  will  become  a  spacious  outdoor 
Kingdom  Hall  for  Jehovah's  witnesses. 
Here  will  be  assembled  people  of  many 
races  and  nationalities  united  in  the  de- 
sire for  true  Christian  education  and  fel- 
lowship. The  assembly  program  will  pro- 
vide just  that.  Again  memories  of  the  bless- 
ings of  previous  assemblies  will  be  super- 
seded by  the  reality  of  another  rich  feast 
at  Jehovah's  table.  Do  come  and  join  us 
and  be  richly  satisfied.  Won't  you? 


26 


AWAKE! 


MAY  Christians  take  oaths?  No,  they 
may  not,  say  certain  sects  such  as  the 
Quakers.  According  to  them  Jesus'  words 
at  Matthew  5:33-37  forbid  Christians'  tak- 
ing any  oaths.  Because  of  this  those  who 
have  conscientious  scruples  against  taking 
oaths  are  permitted  to  affirm  instead  of  to 
swear  to  statements  they  make  in  court. 

The  words  of  Jesus  referred  to  are  part 
of  his  sermon  on  the  mount  and  read:  "You 
heard  that  it  was  said  to  those  of  ancient 
times,  'You  must  not  swear  without  per- 
forming, but  you  must  pay  your  vows  to 
Jehovah.'  However,  I  say  to  you :  Do  not 
swear  at  all,  neither  by  heaven,  because  it 
is  God's  throne;  nor  by  earth,  because  it  is 
the  footstool  of  his  feet;  nor  by  Jerusalem, 
because  it  is  the  city  of  the  great  King. 
Nor  by  your  head  must  you  swear,  because 
you  cannot  turn  one  hair  white  or  black. 
Just  let  your  word  Yes  mean  Yes,  your 
No,  No;  for  what  is  in  excess  of  these  is 
from  the  wicked  one."— Matt.  5:33-37. 

The  disciple  James  and  half  brother  of 
Jesus  gave  similar  admonition:  "Above  all 
things,  though,  my  brothers,  stop  swear- 
ing, yes,  either  by  heaven  or  by  earth  or 
by  any  other  oath.  But  let  your  Yes  mean 
Yes,  and  your  No,  No,  so  that  you  do  not 
fall  under  judgment."— Jas.  5:12. 

Is  it  reasonable  to  conclude  that  the 
above  commands  prohibit  Christians'  tak- 
ing any  oaths  whatsoever?  No,  it  does  not 
seem  that  we  should  put  such  a  literal  con- 
struction upon  these  commands.  For  one 

APRIL  8,  19C1 


thing,  it  is  of  interest  that  Jesus  did  not 
forbid  one's  swearing  by  Jehovah  God,  the 
most  weighty  of  all  oaths.  Thus  the  Scrip- 
tures tell  that  Abraham,  David  and  others 
swore  by  God.— Gen.  21:23,  24;  1  Sam.  24: 
21,  22. 

Rather,  in  view  of  the  various  things 
mentioned  by  Jesus — heaven,  earth,  Jeru- 
salem, one's  head — by  which  men  were 
prone  to  swear,  it  appears  that  his  words 
were  directed,  not  against  the  solemn  legal 
oaths  taken  in  courts  of  law,  but  against 
the  custom  of  many  in  his  day  to  empha- 
size every  declaration  made  with  an  oath, 
as  if  every  statement  one  made  had  to  be 
sworn  to  to  be  believed.  He  was  simply 
telling  us  to  be  straightforward  in  our 
speech,  to  mean  what  we  say.  Then  such 
oaths  are  unnecessary. 

Had  Jesus  opposed  solemn  oaths  in  court, 
would  he  have  allowed  the  Jewish  high 
priest  to  put  him  under  oath  at  the  time  of 
his  trial?  Yet  Jesus  answered  when  the  high 
priest  said:  "By  the  living  God  I  put  you 
under  oath  to  tell  us  whether  you  are  the 
Christ  the  Son  of  God!"— Matt.  26:63. 

But  more  than  that,  the  Scriptures  make 
upward  of  fifty  references  to  Jehovah 
himself  as  making  oaths.  Thus  at  Psalm 
110:4  he  confirms  his  promise  to  his  Son 
by  means  of  an  oath:  "Jehovah  has  sworn 
(and  he  will  not  feel  sorry) :  'You  are  a 
priest  to  time  indefinite  according  to  the 
manner  of  Melchizedek !'  "  Jehovah's  use 
of  oaths  as  well  as  the  value  and  appro- 
priateness of  oaths  are  brought  to  our  at- 
tention by  the  apostle  Paul:  "When  God 
made  his  promise  to  Abraham,  since  he 
could  not  swear  by  anyone  greater,  he 
swore  by  himself,  saying:  'Assuredly  in 
blessing  I  will  bless  you  and  in  increasing 
I  will  increase  you.'  And  thus  after  Abra- 
ham had  shown  patience,  he  obtained  this 
promise.  For  men  swear  by  the  one  great- 
er [not  by  one's  own  head!],  and  their 
oath  is  the  end  of  every  dispute,  as  it  is  a 

27 


district  assemblies  of  Jehovah's  witnesses 
held  here  in  June,  1949,  when  5,836  as- 
sembled to  hear  the  public  lecture,  and  in 
August,  1954,  when  9,632  were  present  for 
"the  feature  address.  Then  there  was  that 
memorable  gathering,  the  Triumphant 
Kingdom  Assembly  of  1955,  that  drew  a 
throng  of  21,877,  filling  the  greater  part 
of  the  then  new  Empire  Stadium. 

Since  that  time  the  already  spacious  fa- 
cilities of  the  Pacific  National  Exhibition's 
Empire  Stadium  have  been  greatly  expand- 
ed to  accommodate  over  30,000,  with  half 
of  that  accommodation  under  cover.  Add- 
ing to  the  stadium's  attraction  is  its  beau- 
tiful park  setting  and  the  spacious  provi- 
sion for  parking  of  thousands  of  cars. 

At  this  assembly  you  will  meet  publish- 
ers of  the  Kingdom  who  are  carrying  on 
the  preaching  and  teaching  work  under  a 
great  variety  of  conditions.  You  will  meet 
ministers  who  serve  in  the  beautiful  or- 
chard district  of  the  Okanagan  Valley, 
some  who  penetrate  the  great  logging 
areas  of  northern  British  Columbia,  na- 
tives from  the  north  end  of  Vancouver  Is- 
land and  the  coastland,  and  still  others 
who  spend  most  of  their  life  afloat  on  fish- 
ing vessels.  Then,  too,  there  are  the  great 
numbers  that  are  employed  in  the  various 
segments  of  the  pulp,  plywood  and  canning 
industries.  How  happy  you  will  be  to  meet 
them  and  learn  of  their  interesting  experi- 
ences! How  overjoyed  they  will  be  to  meet 
you! 

As  ships  enter  Vancouver  Harbor  there 
is  always  someone  to  show  loving  concern 
for  crew  members  who  seldom  have  oppor- 
tunity to  hear  the  good  news  of  the  King- 
dom. From  one  diligent  minister  we  have 
the  following  report  of  his  experience 
aboard  an  Italian  freighter:  "With  the 
captain's  permission  I  began  calling  on  the 
officers  and  on  my  third  call  met  the  chief 
officer.  When  I  introduced  myself  he 
reached  in  a  drawer  and  drew  out  a  well- 


worn  copy  of  the  book  'New  Heavens  and 
a  New  Earth.'  He  asked  many  questions 
and  showed  a  great  desire  to  have  a  Bible 
in  his  own  language."  This  call  resulted 
in  placing  many  Bibles  and  much  Bible 
literature,  not  only  with  the  chief  officer, 
but  with  many  of  the  crew. 

Imagine  the  joy  of  the  brothers  attend- 
ing a  circuit  assembly  in  Vancouver  when 
the  whole  crew  of  a  Japanese  freighter 
trooped  in  to  see  the  showing  of  one  of 
the  Society's  films!  Enterprising  brothers 
had  arranged  taxi  service  from  ship  to  au- 
ditorium so  that  they  could  come. 

In  general  you  will  find  Vancouver  resi- 
dents a  friendly  and  sociable  lot.  They  are 
cosmopolitan,  easy  to  approach  and  cour- 
teous. Many  will  invite  you  inside  and 
hear  the  sermon  you  have  prepared  and 
will  manifest  a  very  sympathetic  attitude. 
Their  reception  of  the  Kingdom  message 
may  be  judged  by  the  fact  that  there  are 
in  the  Greater  Vancouver  area  over  2,000 
Bible  studies  being  conducted  by  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  in  the  homes  of  the  people. 
Doubtless  this  is  why  there  is  such  a  fine 
ratio  of  publishers  to  population,  and 
why  British  Columbia  has  produced  so 
many  ministers  who  have  moved  east  and 
even  oversees  to  serve  in  lands  where  there 
is  a  great  need  for  the  hearing  of  the  Word 
of  God. 

July  4  to  9,  1961,  Vancouver's  Empire 
'Stadium  will  become  a  spacious  outdoor 
Kingdom  Hall  for  Jehovah's  witnesses. 
Here  will  be  assembled  people  of  many 
races  and  nationalities  united  in  the  de- 
sire for  true  Christian  education  and  fel- 
lowship. The  assembly  program  will  pro- 
vide just  that.  Again  memories  of  the  bless- 
ings of  previous  assemblies  will  be  super- 
seded by  the  reality  of  another  rich  feast 
at  Jehovah's  table.  Do  come  and  join  us 
and  be  richly  satisfied.  Won't  you? 


26 


AWAKE! 


THI 


Lumumba's  Death 

<$>  The  death  of  35-year-old 
Patrice  Lumumba,  deposed 
premier  of  the  Congo,  on  Feb- 
ruary 12,  was  a  spark  that  set 
off  rioting  and  violence  around 
the  world.  On  February  15  dur- 
ing Adlai  Stevenson's  first  for- 
mal speech  as  .U.  S.  represent- 
ative to  the  United  Nations, 
about  sixty  men  and  women 
burst  into  the  Security  Coun- 
cil, bringing  the  session  to  an 
abrupt  halt  by  staging  the 
most  violent  demonstration  in 
the  UN's  history.  The  day 
before,  Russia  had  issued  a 
statement  blaming  Secretary 
General  Dag  Hammarskjold 
as  "an  accomplice  and  organiz- 
er of  the  murder"  of  Patrice 
Lumumba.  The  statement  con- 
tinued: "For  its  part,  the  Soviet 
Government  will  not  main- 
tain any  relations  with  Ham- 
marskjold and  will  not  recog- 
nize him  as  an  official  of  the 
United  Nations."  The  United 
States  quickly  declared  their 
support  of  Hammarskjold,  and 
the  United  Nations'  chief,  in 
turn,  told  Russia  that  he  was 
not  going  to  be  forced  out  of 
his  position. 

Eclipse  of  Sun 

<^  On  February  15,  during 
about  a  two-minute  period 
around  8:40  a.m.,  there  was  a 
total  eclipse  of  the  sun  in  a 
160-mile-wide  strip  in  northern 
Italy.    It    left    a    pathway    of 

APRIL  8,  1961 


darkness  across  southern 
France,  Italy,  Yugoslavia,  Bul- 
garia and  the  southern  part  of 
Russia.  In  Rome  the  eclipse 
was  93-percent  total,  and  north- 
ward in  London  80  percent. 
Italian  and  foreign  scientists, 
with  tons  of  special  equipment, 
flocked  to  observatories  in 
Italy  that  were  located  in  the 
path  of  tho  total  eclipse.  The 
best  place  for  watching  was 
the  Arcetri  observatory,  lo- 
cated in  the  hills  overlooking 
Florence,  as  it  was  close  to 
the  center  of  the  area  of  total 
blackout.  The  eclipse  was  out- 
standing since  it  was  the  first 
one  to  be  readily  observable 
from  an  area  in  which  there 
were  fixed  astronomical  ob- 
servatories. 

Russia's  Venus  Shot 

<$>  On  February  12  Russia 
launched  a  rocket  toward 
Venus  from  a  heavy  satellite 
orbiting  the  earth.  The  rocket 
weighing  1,418.66  pounds  was 
originally  expected  to  reach 
the  vicinity  of  Venus  in  the 
latter  half  of  May,  but  on 
February  14  a  Russian  scien- 
tist said  that  it  would  arrive 
at  least  a  month  earlier.  This 
space  achievement  was  hailed 
around  the  world  as  the  great- 
est since  the  first  satellite  was 
put  in  orbit  in  1957.  The  Brit- 
ish paper  the  Daily  Mail  point- 
ed out  that  the  orbiting  Rus- 
sian   satellite    could    just    as 


easily  have  shot  a  missile  at 
any  target  on  the  earth. 

Indian  Car  Production 

#  According  to  an  AP  dis- 
patch, India  set  a  new  record 
by  producing  and  assembling 
52,115  cars,  buses  and  trucks 
in  1960 — a  15,192  increase  over 
the  production  in  1959. 

Belgian  Air  Disaster 

<^  On  February  15  a  Sabena 
Airlines  Boeing  707  jet  en 
route  from  New  York  crashed 
in  a  field  near  Brussels  as  it 
was  preparing  to  land,  killing 
all  seventy-two  aboard  as  well 
as  a  young  farmer  on  the 
ground.  Included  in  the  dead 
were  tho  eighteen  members  of 
the  United  States  figure  skat- 
ing team  who  were  on  their 
way  to  compete  in  a  champion- 
ship meet  in  Prague.  This 
marked  the  second  air  disaster 
in  four  months  involving 
American  athletes.  On  October 
29  sixteen  members  of  the 
California  State  Polytechnic 
College  football  team  were 
killed  in  a  crash  in  Toledo, 
Ohio. 

Preparation  for  Man  in  Space 

#  On  February  21  three  U.  S. 
men  were  selected  as  candi- 
dates for  a  one-man-into-space 
flight  expected  within  two  or 
three  months.  The  flight  is  ex- 
pected to  be  similar  to  the 
18-minute,  420-mile  flight  that 
the  chimpanzee  took  on  Janu- 
ary 31  this  year. 

The  Tragic  Arms  Race 

.$>  The  New  York  Times  of 
February  26  commented  on  the 
tragie  arms  race:  "The  world 
is  spending  $14,000,000  an  hour 
— on  arms  and  armies.  The 
United  States  and  the  Soviet 
Union  together  spend  about  73 
per  cent  of  the  total-  $88,000,- 
000,000  a  year.  The  cost  of  the 
arms  race  is  about  $40  a  year 
for  each  man,  woman  and 
child  now  living  ,  .  .  An  abso- 
lute end  to  the  arms  race 
would  release  the  constructive 
energies  of  at  least  15,000,000 

29 


men  now  in  training  to  kill 
each  other.  This,  however, 
does  not  tell  the  whole  story. 
One  of  the  world's  rules-of- 
thumb  Is  that  at  least  four 
men  must  labor  to  keep  one 
soldier  armed,  fed  and  sup- 
plied. Thus,  an  end  to  the  arms 
race  would  enahle  75,000,000 
men  to  turn  to  peaceful  tasks." 

Birth  Record  Set 

<&  On  February  23  the  United 
States  Public  Health  Service 
reported  that  there  were  an 
estimated  362,000  registered 
live  births  in  the  U.  S.  last  De- 
cember. This  total  was  12,000, 
or  3.4  percent,  more  than  in 
December  of  1959. 

Nutrition  and  Mental  Health 

^Dr.  G.  H.  Collins,  a  consult- 
ant psychiatrist  at  the  Kings- 
way  Hospital.  Derby,  England, 
reports  that  in  all  psychiatric 
disorders  faulty  nutrition  plays 
an  important  part.  He  said 
that  indiscriminate  use  of  bar- 
biturates and  other  sedatives, 
because  of  contributing  to  a 
depressed  appetite  and  poor 
food  assimilation,  was  one  of 
the  most  common  causes  of 
malnutrition  in  psychiatric  pa- 
tients. 

Paper  Production  Up 

<$>  It  was  reported  at  the  an- 
nual meeting  of  the  Canadian 
Pulp  and  Paper  Association 
that  the  Canadian  pulp  and 
paper  industry  produced  more 
than  $1.5  billion  worth  of 
goods  in  1960,  which  is  an  in- 
crease of  $100  million  over 
1959.  The  total  production  of 
wood  pulp  was  11,182,907  tons, 
and  newsprint  production 
jumped  344,439  tons  from  1959, 
to  6,738,611  tons  last  year. 

Sex  Behavior  of  Adolescents 

<§>  England's  Central  Council 
for  Health  Education  is  start- 
ing an  extensive  investigation 
into  the  growing  problem  of 
promiscuity  among  boys  and 
girls.  Sir  John  Charles,  recent- 
ly retired  Chief  Medical  Offi- 
cer, Ministry  of  Education,  in 

30 


his  last  report  to  Sir  David 
Eccles,  the  Minister,  gave  sub- 
stantiated evidence  of  promis- 
cuity among  adolescents.  He 
cited  a  case  where  the  prose- 
cuting counsel  spoke  of  the 
"shocking  precocity  and  de- 
pravity" of  girls  14  and  15. 
"These  children,  because  that 
is  all  these  girls  were,  played 
'strip  poker'  and  invited  boys 
to  undress  and  have  inter- 
course with  them.  In  many 
cases  the  boys  were  not  only 
lured  by  the  girls  but  deliber- 
ately provoked  hy  them."  Sir 
John  also  commented  on  the 
source  of  the  trouble:  "The 
earlier  physical  maturity,  that 
has  outstripped  emotional  ma- 
turity, of  present-day  children, 
especially  girls,  is  undoubtedly 
a  causative  factor  in  the  irre- 
sponsible behaviour  of  some  of 
them.  Lack  of,  or  inadequate, 
parental  guidance  and  exam- 
ple are,  however,  at  the  root 
of  most  of  it."  In  195S,  of  the 
740,715  babies  born,  more  than 
10  percent  were  born  out  of 
wedlock,  and  55,787  were  born 
within  nine  months  of  the  mar- 
riage of  their  mothers. 

Death  Toll  from  Bombs 

<^  In  a  major  policy  speech 
made  earlier  this  year  in  Mos- 
cow, Khrushchev  said  that  four 
large  bombs  dropped  on  Lon- 
don, Birmingham,  Lancashire 
and  Yorkshire  would  kill  near- 
ly half  of  Britain's  40  million 
population. 

Poetry  in  Romania 

<^  Bucharest  reports  that  Ro- 
manian poets  are  being  urged 
to  write  less  about  flowers,  na- 
ture and  love  and  more  about 
such  things  as'man's  achieve- 
ments in  hydroelectric  power 
schemes,  the  building  of  settle- 
ments and  launching  of  space- 
ships. 

Cancer  and  Cigarettes 

•#•  Dr.  George  E.  Moore,  direc- 
tor of  the  second -largest  can- 
cer research  center  in  the 
United  States,  said  that  today 
one  out  of  every  3.5  persons 


dies  of  cancer  "and  the  frequen- 
cy is  growing."  He  said  that 
during  the  past  ten  years  in 
New  York  state,  lung  cancer 
has  increased  by  680  percent, 
"primarily,  we  believe,  because 
of  cigarette  smoking."  Women 
at  one  time  had  a  relatively 
low  incidence  of  lung  cancer, 
but  Dr.  Moore  declared  that 
they  were  now  rapidly  catch- 
ing up,  his  reason  being  that 
women  took  up  smoking  In 
earnest  some  eight  or  ten 
years  later  than  men. 

Women's  Time  for  Accidents 

<§>  Investigations  made  by  Dr. 
Katharina  Dalton  of  North 
London  revealed  that  women 
are  more  likely  to  be  involved 
in  accidents  during  their  men- 
strual period  or  the  four  days 
before  menstruation.  She 
found  that  of  84  women  in- 
volved in  accidents,  52  percent 
had  their  accidents  during  this 
time  of  the  menstrual  cycle. 
Her  findings  were  reported  in 
a  survey  published  in  the  Brit- 
ish Medical  Journal. 

Students  Take  Tranquilizers 

^  An  unofficial  inquiry  carried 
out  by  Miss  Elva  Corrie,  presi- 
dent of  the  Students'  Union, 
revealed  that  half  of  the  7,000 
students  of  England's  Man- 
chester University  were  taking 
tranquilizers  on  prescription 
in  order  to  ease  the  strain  of 
their  studies  and  other  person- 
al problems. 

Blood  and  Freedom 

<§>  An  official  Roman  Catholic 
publication,  the  Canadian  Reg- 
ister, undoubtedly  having  Je- 
hovah's witnesses  in  mind,  re- 
cently commented  on  the  forc- 
ing of  persons  to  take  blood 
transfusions  against  their  con- 
science. This  Catholic  weekly 
paper  of  January  14  said  that 
"no  medical  or  civil  authority 
has  the  right  to  force  [a  per- 
son] to  accept  such  treatment 
against  his  conscience.  And 
since  the  responsibility  for  the 
life  of  a  child  rests  on  the  par- 
ents,  as  long  as  the  parents 

AWAKE! 


are  physically  and  mentally 
capable  of  assuming  it,  the 
state  cannot  force  them  to  sub- 
ject the  child  to  treatment 
which  they  consider  morally 
wrong." 

Flag  salute  ana  uuiiamg  use 

^  Three  Democratic  senator: 
from  the  state  of  Washin^™ 
recently  proposed  a  law 
would  bar  any  organ iz; 
that  advocates  refusal  t< 
lute  the  flag  from  using 
publicly    maintained    bui] 

Rgllgious  Activity  In  Russia 

#  Increased  religious  activity 
in  Russia  apparently  has  the 
Communist  party  worried. 
Party  organizations  have  been 
told  to  try  to  prevent  young 
people  from  associating  with 
Jehovah's  witnesses.  Seventh- 
day  Adventists  and  other  reli- 
gious groups.  Kommunist.  a 
journal  of  the  party's  Central 


Cojgimittee,  in  a  recent  issue 
Said  tKatTRere  were  frequenj: 
^yjgUtions^of  the  Soviet  law 
regarding  proselytizing_  anct 
other  religious  ad3vTty7lt  said 
some  Pentecostal  groups  and 
Jehovah's  witnesses  were  guil- 
ty of  "political  lack  of  loyalty." 

Printing  Behind  Iron  Curtain 

<§>  The  Warsaw  radio  reported 
recently  the  discovery  by  po- 
lice of  an  underground  print- 
ing plant  belonging  to  Jeho- 
vah's witnesses  near  Wroclaw, 
Poland.  One  quarter  million 
•pamphlets  and  four  tons  of 
printing  paper  were  confiscat- 
ed by  the  police  according  to 
the  report.  It  said  that  the 
printing  presses  were  found  in 
0  room  under  the  floor  of  a 
tarm house.  Josef  Adamczyk 
toas  taken  into  custody,  the  re- 
port added,  and  he  was  to  be 
brought  to  trial  on  charges  of 
illegal  printing  and  member- 


ship in  an  illegal  religious  or- 
ganization. 

Cruelty  to  Animals 

<$>  The  London  Sunday  Times 
told  of  a  50-percent  increase  in 
reported  cases  of  cruelty  to 
animals  by  children  over  the 
past  two  years.  Convictions  in 
juvenile  courts  leaped  from  114 
in  1959  to  134  in  1960.  Com- 
menting on  this  increase,  John 
Hall,  chief  secretary  of  the 
prevention  of  cruelty  to  ani- 
mals society,  said:  "Many  of 
the  convictions  have  been  for 
acts  of  pure  sadism.  Often  It  is 
a  reaction  against  boredom  and 
frustration,  and  lack  of  paren- 
tal control." 

Alcohol  Advertising 

<^  It  was  reported  in  the 
pamphlet  "Advertising  Alco- 
hol" that  in  Britain  in  1959 
between  $44,000,000  and  $50,- 
400,000  was  spent  on  the  adver- 
tising of  drink.  This  represents 
a  fivefold  increase  over  1935. 


IIIIIIIIMIIIHIIIIIIIIIIIIilllllllllllllllllltlllitlllllllUllltillllllllillltllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllHIIHIIIllllll 


"DEATH  f 

will  be    | 

no  more"  I- 


■^i^i*^. 


...,.1^uJrJH.|.'*1, 


Do  you  believe  this? 

It  is  God's  promise.  Do 
you  know  how  and  when 
it  will  be  fulfilled?  Send 
8d  (for  Australia,  lOd; 
for  South  Africa,  7c) 
for  the  three  timely  and 
highly  comforting  book- 
lets: 


God's  Way  Is  Love 

"This  Good  News  of  the  Kingdom" 
Security  During  "War  of  the  Great  Day  of  God  the  Almighty'* 


WATCH   TOWER 


THE    RIDGEWAY 


LONDON   N.W.  7 


I  am  enclosing  Sd  <for  Australia,  lOcl;  for  South  Africa,  7c)  for  the  three  revealing  and  com- 
forting booklets  God's  Way  Is  Love,  ffThis  Good  News  of  the  Kingdom"  and  Security  During 
"War  0/  the  Great  Day  of  God  the  Almighty." 


Name  , 
Post 
Town  , 


Street  and  Number 

or   Route  and   Box   

Postal 
District  No.  County 


APRIL,  S,  1961 


31 


eace 


life 


u  one  lite 

can  mane 


im 


poSSt 


e 


Did  you  know  that  the  an- 
swer to  -  your  prayer  to 
God,  "Thy  will  be  done 
in  earth,"  is  made  possible 
by  the  supreme  sacrifice  of 
Jesus  Christ?  But  why  did 
Jesus  have  to  die  a  cruel 
martyr's  death?  What  part 
does  this  have  in  God's 
purpose  for  peace  on  this 
earth?  And  what  bearing 
does  the  present  struggle 
for  world  control  have  on 
the  outworking  of  God's 
purpose  for  this  earth? 


These  questions  are  of  vital  importance  to  you. 
The  answers  are  found  in  the  Bible-study  aids: 

"Your  Will  Be  Done  on  Earth" 
"Let  God  Be  True" 

Send  for  and  read  these  two  timely  books  at  once.  They  are 
both  hard  bound,  total  over  700  pages,  contain  complete  sub- 
ject and  scripture  indexes  with  questions  for  study. 

SEND  ONLY  7/-    (for  Australia,  8/-;  for  South  Africa,  70c)  TODAY 


WATCH    TOWER 


THE    RIDGEWAY 


LONDON    N.W.    7 


I   am   enclosing  II-   (for  Australia,   S/-;   for   South  Africa,   70c)   for  the  two   Bible-study  aids 
'Your  Will  Be  Done  on  Earth"  and  "Let  God  Be  True." 


Name 

Post 

Town 


Street  and  Number 

or  Route  and  Box  

Postal 

District  No County 


Tn:  AUSTRALIA  address  11  Beresford  Rd.,  Strath field,  N.S.W.  CANADA:  150  Krfdgelaiid  Ave.,  Toronto  19,  Ont. 
SOUTH  AFRICA:  Private  Bag,  Elanflsfontein,  Transvaal.   UNITED   STATES:  117  Adams  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N.  T. 


32 


AWAKE! 


SP£C/M  /$M£ 


THE  MISSION  OF  THIS  JOURNAL 

N«wj  sources  that  are  able  to  keep  you  awake  to  th£  vital  Issues' 
times  mustTie  unfettered  by  censorship  and  selfish  interests.  "Awake!"  has  no 
fatten,  it  recognizes  facts,  faces  facts,  is  free  to  publish  facts.  Jt  Is  not  bound  by 
political  ambitions  or  obligations;  it  is 'unhampered  by  advertisers  whose  toes 
must  not  be  trodden  on;  it  is  unprejudiced  by  traditional  creeds.  This  journal 
keeps  itself  free  that  it  may  speak  freely  to  you.  But  it  does  not  abuse  its  freedom. 
It  maintains  Integrity  to  truth, 

"Awake!"  uses  the  regular  news  channels,  but  is  not  dependent  on  them. 
Its  own  correspondents  are  on  all  continents,  in  scores  of  nations.  From  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth  their  uncensored,  on-the-scenes  reports  come  to  you  through 
these  columns.  This  journal's  viewpoint  Is  not  narrow,  but  is  international.  It  is 
read  in  many  nations,  in  many  languages,  by  persons  of  all  ages.  Through  its 
pages  many  fields  of  knowledge  pass  in  review — government,  commerce,  religion, 
history,  geography,  science,  social  conditions,  natural  wonders — why,  its  cover- 
age is  as  broad  as  the  earth  and  as  high  as  the  heavens. 

"Awake!"  pledges  itself  to  righteous  principles,  to  exposing  hidden  foes 
and  subtle  dangers,  to  championing  freedom  for  all,  to  comforting  mourners  and 
strengthening  those  disheartened  by  the  failures  of  a  delinquent  world,  reflecting 
sure  hope  for  the  establishment  of  a  righteous  New  World. 

Get  acquainted  with  "Awaket"  Keep  awoke  by  reading  ''Awaket" 

Published  Simultaneously  in   the  United  States  by  the 
WATCHTOWER    BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY   OF  NEW   YORK.    INC. 
117   Adams   Street  Brooklyn   1.    New   York,    U.S.A. 

and  in   England  by 

WATCH  TOWER   BIBLE   AND   TRACT   SOCIETY 

Watch  Tower  House,  The  Ridgeway  London  N.W,  7,  England. 

N.  H.  Knore,  President  Grant  Suiter,  Secretary 

Printing   this   issus:     3,125,000  +d    a   copy    {Australia,   5d;    South   Africa,  314c) 

"4wato>"   is   published   In   the   following   22   languages 


Sen  I  ninthly — Afrikaans,  Clnyanja,  Danish,  Dutrh,  Eng- 
lish, Finnish,  French,  Gorman,  Greek.  Italian.  Japanese, 
Norwegian,  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Swedish.  TagaloE,  Zulu, 
ttontnly — Ilooano.  Korean.  Malayalam,  Pollab.  Ukrainian. 

Yearly  subscription  rates 

for  semimonthly  editions 

*1 


Remittances  fn^  subscriptions  should  bo  sent  to  the  office 
fo  jtj[[t  etwfftrj-.  (ttltewtw  sentf  your  remttistiee  to 
London.  Notice  of  expiration  is  sent  at  least  two  issues 
before  subscription  expires. 


SDMI 

Amerlta,  U.S.,  in  Arttms  St.,  Brooklyn  1,  N.Y. 
Antral  la,  11  Btreslord  Rd.,  strathfield,  N.S.W. 
Caning,  130  Brldseland  Ave.,  Toronto  IS,  Out. 
England,  Watch  Tower  House, 

The  Ridgeway.  London  N,W.  I 
New  Zealand,  931  New  North  Hd.,  Auckland,  S.W. 
Snath  Africa.  Prtiais  Bag,  Elandsfontelti.  Tvl, 

Moncirfr  eiittons  east  lndt  the  4&£P£  1318$. 


6/- 

1/- 

<■/■ 

70c 


CHANGES  OF  ADDRESS  ihoild  reach  is  thirty  days 
before  yonr  moving  date.  Give  k  yoir  old  and  new 
ladrest  (If  posElkla,  yeir  old  address  label) .  Watch 
Tower,  Wtteh  Tawer  Hoise,  The  Ridgeway,  Lon- 
don N.W.  7,  England. 
__1 


Entered  as  senond-claa  matter  at  Brooklyn,  N.I, 
Printed  in  Enfjand 

tilt   New   WorU   Translation   of   tie   Holy   Serlptirss. 


The    Bible   translation    Med   In   "Awake!"    bj  ...  _ r 

When  other  translations  art  ated  the  following  lymboli  will  appear  behind  tht  citations: 
AS   -  American,   standard  Version     Dy  -  Catholic  Douay  Tersion     M.0  -  James   Moffatt's  Tension 
AT  -  An  Amertcan  Translation       ED  -  The  Emphatic  Dlaslott    Rn  -  J.  B.  Butherham's  version 
AV  -  Authorized  Version  (1811)    JP  -  Jeuleb  Publication  Soe.   RS  -  Revised  stannard  Version 
£fa  -  J.   N.   Darby's  version  he        is;iac   l.mser s  version        Yg  -  Robert  Young's  version 


CONTENTS 


What  You  Should  Know  About  Your 

Religion 
Test  Your  Religious  Knowledge 
Religions  of  the  World 
Facts  About  the  Holy  Bible 
What  Follows  the  World's  End? 
Soul,  Death  and  Hereafter    .. 
What  Do  You  Know  About  God? 


3 
4 
7 
9 

12 
13 
15 


The  Life  and  Ministry  of  Jesus  Christ 

Who  Said  It? 

What  Is  the  Kingdom  of  God? 

Did  You  Know  This  About  Holidays  and 

Celebrations? 
Bible  Principles  and  Family  Life 
Letter  to  Readers 
Watching  the  World 


20 

23 

26 
28 
30 


"Now  it  is  high  time  to  awake." 

— Bomom  1 3 :  II 


Volume   XLIi 


London,    England,   April   22,   1961 


Number  8 


RELIGIOUS  illiteracy 
is  a  world-wide  prob- 
lem. It  is  really  at  the  heart  of  the  world 
delinquency  problem.  It  afflicts  persons  of 
all  religions.  "We  have  not  been  well 
taught  about  religion,"  declared  the  presi- 
dent of  Harvard  University  a  few  years 
ago,  "and  there  is  as  a  consequence  a  very 
widespread  religious  illiteracy." 

Everyone  has  a  right  to  know  whether 
his  religion  has  prevented  him  and  his 
loved  ones  from  being  victims  of  this 
world's  religious  illiteracy.  You  cannot  de- 
pend upon  higher  education  to  solve  the 
problem.  Regarding  college  students,  Dr. 
A.  C.  Howell  of  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  said  that  as  to  religious  or  Bible 
knowledge  they  are  "hopelessly  illiterate." 
Nor  can  you  depend  upon  church  attend- 

rance,  "The  fact  of  the  situation  is  that  90 
percent   of  our   church   members,"    said 

■■  Bishop  Wells  of  the  West  Missouri  diocese 
of  the  Episcopal  Church,  "do  not  really 
know  what  they  believe  and  why.  They 
might  be  called  religious  illiterates."  And 
ponder  this  item  that  appeared  in  the  New 
York  Times  of  March  18,  1957:  "A  base- 
ball fan  knows  more  about  baseball  than 
church  members  know  about  Christianity, 


the    Rev.    Dr,    Robert   J.    Mc- 

Cracken  said.  .  .  .  'Ask  the  ma- 
jority of  church  members  what 
they  believe  and  after  a  few 
halting,  fumbling  sentences 
they  would  be  through.'  " 
If  one's  religion  has  not  enabled  one  to 
explain  clearly  what  he  believes  along  with 
authoritative  grounds  for  his  belief,  then 
there  should  be  cause  for  concern.  If  one's 
religion  has  not  informed  one  who  God 
is,  what  his  purposes  are  and  what  He 
requires  of  man,  then  it  is  not  accom- 
plishing its  purpose.  If  one's  religion  has 
not  made  one  a  new  person,  having  happi- 
ness and  the  qualities  of  love,  kindness, 
peaceableness,  self-control,  open-minded- 
ness  and  reasonableness,  then  there  should 
be  cause  for  questioning.  If  one's  religion 
has  not  moved  one  to  help  others  over- 
come religious  illiteracy,  then  something 
is  lacking.  If  one's  religion  has  left  one  in 
a  confused  state  as  to  principles  for  daily 
life,  a  certain,  bright  hope  for  the  future 
and  one's  purpose  in  living,  then  it  is  time 
to  take  action. 

Take  your  pencil  and  answer  the  quizzes 
on  the  next  three  pages.  Carefully  compare 
your  answers  with  the  authorities  cited  on 
the  answer  pages.  Whether  you  profess  to 
be  religiously  learned  or  not,  take  the 
quizzes,  keeping  in  mind  what  everyone 
should  know  about  his  religion.  Your  ever- 
lasting destiny  depends  upon  its  being  re- 
ligion that  God  approves. 


APRIL  n,  1961 


Test  your 


©  mxmvmm 


RELIGIONS  OF  THE  WORLD 


Match    book    or   writings 
philoiophy: 

I-  Th*  Koran 

2.  __  Baltimore 

Catechism 

3.  Thw  Talmud 

4.  ___  Vedas 

5.  __  Book  of 

Mormon 

6.  __  Five  Classics 


with    corresponding    religion    or 

a.  Confucianism 

b.  Church  of  Jesus 
Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints 

C.  Hinduism 

d.  Judaism 

e.  Islam 

f.  Roman  Catholic        • 
Church 


identify  belter  or  tradition  with 


A Vicarious 

baptism  for 
the  dead 

B.  __  Caste    System 

C Limbo 

D Day  of 

Atonement 

E Dalai  tama 

F Rosary 

(Am wen  on  page  7) 


religion  It) : 

Roman   Catholic 

Church 

Judaism 

Church  of  Jesus 

Christ  of  Latter-day 

Saints 

Hinduism 

Islam 

Buddhism 


WHO  SAID  IT? 


Match 
I 

2 

3.__ 


5. 
6. 
7. 


quotation    with    correct    tource 

_  "All  is  vanity." 
_  "To  obey  is  better 

than  sacrifice." 
_  "Cleanliness  Is, 

indeed,  next  to 

godliness." 
__  "Do  not  do  to 

others  what  you 

would  not  want 

them  to  do  to  you." 
_  "Col/  no  man  your 

father." 
_"The  guardians  of 

hell  inflict  torture." 
_  "In  sin  my  mother 
conceived  me." 


Martin  Luther 

Confucius 

Buddhist 

writings 

David 

Solomon 
Jesus  Christ 

John  Wesley 

Samue)  the 

prophet 
Proverb  in 
many 
languages 
Hindu  Books 

of  Knowledge 


8. "God  helps  them  who  help  themselves." 

9-  "My    conscience    is    taken    captive    by 

God's  Word." 
10.  .,.„    "The  soul  is  not  born,  nor  does  it  die." 

(Answers  en  page  IP) 

THE  HOLY  BIBLE 

Underscore  the  correct  ontwer: 
l.The  men  used  in  writing  the  Bible  were  ali 
(Orientals;  Latins;  Catholics). 

2.  About  (8;  28;  35)  men  were  used  to  write 
the  Bible. 

3.  Originally  the  Sfbfe  was  written  m  (2;  3;  4f 
languages. 

4.  The  Bible  is  made  up  of  (2;  66;  72)  books. 

5.  The  last  Bible  writer  was  (Moses;  John; 
Jesus). 

6.  The  Bible  books  written  since  the  beginning 
of  the  Christian  Era  were  put  in  their  present 
catalogue  form  by  {early  Christians;  the 
Council  of  Carthage;  Martin  (.ufherj. 

Mark  "T"   or   "P'   for  "True"   or   "False": 

A.  The  Buddhist  Canon  of  Sacred  Scrip- 
tures   and    the    Mohammedan    Koran 

are  slightly  older  than  the  Bible.  __ 

B.  The  Bible  teaches  an  impersonal  re- 
ality as  ultimate  truth.  

C.  The   Bible   writers    admit   they    wrote 
under  inspiration  of  God.  —___ 

D.  The    Bible    indicated    the    earth    was 
round  when  men  thought  it  was  flat.     .. 

E.  The  Bible's  account  of  a  global  flood 
harmonizes  with  archaeology.  ___ 

(Am wart  en  page*  9-1 1 1 

THE  WORLD'S  END 

Put  an   [XI   tn  front  of  the  correct  »talement: 

l.The  Bible  says  a  world  has  [  1  ended 
[  ]  partially  ended  [  ]  never  ended  in  re- 
corded history. 

AWAKE1 


2.  According  to  the  Bible,  God's  original  pur- 
pose for  earth  Is  to  [  ]  make  it  a  paradise 
t  J  burn  it  to  a  cinder  [  ]  use  it  as  a  testing 
ground  in  choosing  souls  for  heaven. 

3.  The  Revelation  says  God  will  [  ]  allow  man 
to  destroy  himself  and  the  earth  [  ]  bring 
to  ruin  those  ruining  the  earth  I  ]  destroy 
the  earth  himself  to  punish  the  wicked. 

4.  In  the  Bible,  the  final  war  is  called  [  ]  Dooms* 
day  [  ]  Armageddon. 

5.  The  end  of  the  world,  according  to  the  Bible, 
results  in  the  [  1  end  of  the  wicked  [  1  end 
of  time    [  J    end  of  the  earth. 

6.  Jesus  said  it  would  be  possible  for  those 
living  at  the  world's  end  to  know  [  ]  the 
day,  but  not  the  hour  of  the  end  [  ]  when 
it  is  near  [  ]  nothing  of  its  coming. 

(Aniwen  on  page   13) 

SOUL,    DEATH   AND   HEREAFTER 

Undersell™  the  correct  aniwtr: 

1.  Belief  in  a  hereafter  or  life  after  death  is 
{taught;  denied]  among  non-Christian  re- 
ligions. 

2. Torment  after  death  (is;  is  not)  taught  only 
by  the  religions  of  Christendom. 

3.  The  early  Christians  ( believed;  did  not 
believe)  in  the  doctrine  of  the  inherent  im- 
mortality of  the   human   soul. 

4.  A  soul,  in  the  Bible,  is  synonymous  with 
(spirit;  ego;  living  creature)  and  (is;  is  not) 
used  with  reference  to  animals  as  well  as 
humans. 

S.Moses,  David  and  Daniel  are  all  (conscious; 
unconscious)  in  (Gehenna;  heaven;  the 
grave)    according    to  the  Scriptures. 

6. The  Bible  hell  (is;  is  not)  eternal  and  there- 
fore   (will;  will   never)    be  emptied. 

7. The  Bible  says  death  (is;  is  not)  man's  friend 
and  (will;  will  not)  always  be  a  part  of 
man's    normal    experience. 

lAmweri   on   pagat    13,    14) 

GOD 

Und*recora  tha  correct  answer: 

1.  According    to    archaeology    (monotheism; 

polytheism)    came   first. 


2.  The  Hindus  have  [0;  only  3;  330,000,000} 
gods  and  goddesses. 

3.  Shintoists  are  said  to  have  (0;  3;  8,000,000) 
gods. 

4.  Belief  in  a  creator  of  all  things  does  not 
exist  in  (Buddhism;  Hinduism;  Mohammedan' 
ism  or  Islam). 

5.  A  trinity  of  divinities  was  taught  (exclusively 
by  the  early  Christians;  by  most  ancient  non- 
Christian  religions). 

6. The  word  "trinity"  appears  (0;  1;  3)  times 
in  the  Bible. 

7.  Those  mainly  responsible  for  the  doctrine  of 
the  trinity  as  taught  in  Christendom  are 
(Jesus  Christ  and  the  apostle  Paul;  Con- 
stantlne  and  the  Greek  philosophers;  Martin 
Luther   and   the  Reformers). 

8.  The  Bible  teaches  that  the  Son  of  God  (was 
created;  always  existed). 

9.  The  early  Christians  believed  that  the  holy 
spirit  is  (energy  originating  with  God;  a 
person;  God  himself). 

10.  The  Bible  teaches  that  the  one  bringing 
distress  to  the  earth  today  is  (God;  God's 
enemy  the  Devil) . 

11.  According  to  the  Bible,  the  unique  and  dis- 
tinctive name  of  the  Most  High  God  is  (Jesus; 
Jehovah;  Allah;  Lord). 

(Am wen  on  page!  15-17) 

THE  LIFE  AND  MINISTRY 
OF  JESUS  CHRIST 

Mark    "T"   or  "F"   for   "Tru-"   or  "Fa1t*"i 

1.  Jesus  was  born  in  Nazareth  and 
reared  in  Bethlehem.  ____ 

2.  Mary  had  other  children  after  Jesus, 

her  first-born.  ____ 

3.  The  name  "Jesus"  means  "Jehovah  Is 
Salvation."  ___ 

4.  His  parents  had  him  baptized  at  the 

age  of  twelve.  ____ 

5.  While  studying  at  a  seminary  in  Je- 
rusalem Jesus  met  the  men  who  be- 
came   his    apostles    after    graduation.    _____ 

6.  Jesus  taught  that  all  religions  are 
merely  different  roads  leading  to  the 
same  blessed  goal.  , 


APRIL  n,  1961 


5 


7.  He  rejected  the  Bible  account  of 
Adam  and  Eve,  preferring  the  theory 
of  evolution  advanced  by  the  Greek 
Empedocles    {493-435    B.C.).  

8.  His  main  theme  or  message  was  the 
good  news  of  God's  kingdom.  

(Aniwera  on  page  1SI 

THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOD 

Mark   "T"   or   "F"   for   "True"   or  "False"- 
According  to  the  Blbla  — 

l.The  Kingdom  is  the  extinction  of  the 

flame  of  life  and  reunion  with  Brahma.     

2.  The  Kingdom  is  a  spiritual  state  with- 
in the  hearts  of  the  friends  of  Jesus.     

3.  The   Kingdom    is   a    real    government.    

4.  The  Kingdom  is  represented  by  the 
United  Nations.  

5.  The  Kingdom  will  be  established  on 
earth.  

6.  The    Kingdom's    establishment   would 

be  marked  by  universal  peace.  

7.  Membership  in  the  Kingdom  is  limited 

in  number.  

8.  The  Kingdom  of  God  will  destroy  the 
kingdoms  of  this  world.  

I  Ant  won  on  pages  20-22) 

HOLIDAYS  AND  CELEBRATIONS 

Underscore  the  correct  answer-. 

1.  Jesus  told  his  followers  to  celebrate  his 
(birth;  death;  resurrection). 

2.  A  celebration  connected  with  the  Roman 
Saturnalia  and  the  ancient  Feast  of  Fools 
is  (Guy  Fawkes  Day;  Mardi  Gras;  Hallow- 
een). 

3.  Easter  gets  its  name  from  (on  early  Christian 
festival;  a  pagan  goddess  of  the  spring; 
Queen    Esther). 

4.  December  25  was  the  chief  holy  day  of  the 
(tffirly  Christians;  Jews;  pagan  worshipers 
of  Mithras), 

5.  The  holiday  finding  Its  origin  in  the  honor 
given  a  goddess  of  fertility  is  |May  Day; 
April    Fool's  Day;  Valentine's  Day). 

Mark   "T"   or  "F"   far   "True"   or   "Folio": 

A.  Jesus  was  born  In  the  winter.  

6 


B.  The  early  Christians  knew  nothing 
about  the  period  of  fasting  called 
Lent. 

C.  The  Bible  records  many  birthday 
celebrations  of  God's  servants. 

D.  After  the  Reformation,  Protestants 
rejected  Christmas  and   Easter. 

E.  The   Bible  encourages   the  celebrat- 

ing of  holidays. 

(Amwen   on   page*.   23-25) 


BIBLE  PRINCIPLES  AND,  FAMILY  LIFE 

Keeping  in  mind  Bible  principles,  how  would  you  oniwer? 

Yes       No 

Lit  is  a  good  thing  for  a  hus- 
band to  beat  his  wife  occa- 
sionally to  let  her  know  who 
is   boss,  

2.  A  married  woman  is  wise  to 
resist   her   husband's   headship 

in   subtle  ways.  j_  

3.  If  things  go  bad,  it  is  manly  to 
tell  the  other  person  what  you 
think  of  him  even  if  temper  is 
momentarily  lost.  

4.  A  married  Christian  may  di- 
vorce  his   mate   if  the   ground 

for  divorce   is  adultery.  

5.  Engagement  entitles  unmar- 
ried companions  to  have  pre- 
marital   sex    relations.  

6.  Consensual  or  common-law 
marriage  is  complete  and  ac- 
ceptable   for    Christians    who 

love  each   other.  

7.  A  Christian  should  never  marry 
out  of  his  faith  even  if  the  in- 
tended   mate   promises    not   to 

interfere  with   his  worship.  ___  

8.  Children  cannot  be  expected 
to  be  obedient  to  their  parents 
all    the   time,    since   they   must 

learn  to  live  their  own   lives.        __  

9.  Rather  than  send  children  out 
for  religious  instruction,  par- 
ents   themselves    should    teach 

their  children  God's  Word. 

[Amwen    on    page   26) 

AWAKE! 


ANSWERS  TO   QUIZ   ON  PAGE  4 

1— Islam.  2— Roman  Catholic  Church. 
3-^Tudaism.  4— Hinduism.  5— Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints. 
6— Conf  ucianis  m. 

A— Church  of  Jesus  Christ  ot  Latter-day 
Saints.  B— Hinduism.  C— Roman  Catholic 
Church.  D^Judaism.  E — Buddhism.  F — 
Hinduism,  Buddhism,  Islam,  Roman  Cath- 
olic Church. 


The  Koran;  "The  scriptures  of  the 
Mohammedans,  containing  the  professed 
revelations  to  Mohammed.  By  Mohammed 
the  name  Koran  was  given  to  a  single  rev- 
elation or  to  a  collection  of  revelations, 
but  after  his  death,  when  his  various  ut- 
terances had  been  collected  in  writing, 
this  name  was  applied  to  the  whole  book. 
The  Koran  is  in  Arabic,  is  divided  into 
114  suras,  or  chapters,  and  is  the  basis 
for  the  religious,  social,  civil,  commercial, 
military,  and  legal  regulation  of  the  Mo- 
hammedan world." — Webster's  New  In- 
ternational Dictionary. 

Baltimore  Catechism:  "An  official 
summary  or  statement  of  Roman  Catholic 
beliefs  and  practices  prepared  by  direction 
of  the  Third  Plenary  Council  of  the  Amer- 
ican Catholic  hierarchy,  held  in  Baltimore 
in  1884." — Webster's  New  International 
Dictionary. 

APRIL  22,  1961 


The  Talmud;  "The  body  of 
Jewish  civil  and  canonical  law,  con- 
sisting of  the  combined  Mishnah  or 
text,  and  Gemara,  or  commentary; 
also,  restrictedly,   the  Gemara 

§  alone.  There  are  two  Talmuds, 
named  from  the  region  in  which 
they  originated,  the  Palestinian, 
often  called,  incorrectly,  the  Tal- 
mud of  Jerusalem,  Jerusalem  Tal- 
mud, or  Talmud  Yerushalmi;  and 
the  Babylonian,  often  called  Talmud  Babli. 
They  contain  the  same  Mishnah,  but  dif- 
ferent Gemaras.  The  Palestinian  Talmud 
was  practically  completed  in  the  4th  cen- 
tury, and  the  Babylonian  in  the  5th  or  6th 
century  A.D," — Webster's  New  Interna- 
tional Dictionary. 

Vedas:  "The  most  ancient  sacred  lit- 
erature of  the  Hindus,  comprising  more 
than  one  hundred  extant  books  and  in- 
cluding, in  addition  to  the  four  Sanhitas 
to  which  they  are  individually  attached, 
works  of  exegesis,  legend,  ritual,  and 
religio-philosophical  speculation." — Web- 
ster's New  International  Dictionary. 

Book  of  Mormon:  "The  sacred  scrip- 
tures of  the  Mormon  Church,  first  pub- 
lished in  1830,  and  purporting  to  be  a  his- 
tory of  colonies  successively  led  by  divine 
power  from  Asia  to  the  American  conti- 
nent before  the  5th  century  A.D.  It  is 
claimed  that  this  history,  engraved  on 
thin  gold  plates,  was  found  in  1827  by 
Joseph  Smith  near  Palmyra,  N.Y.,  and 
translated  by  him  through  'the  gift  and 
power  of  God.'  " — Webster's  New  Interna- 
tional Dictionary. 

Five  Classics:  "The  Confucian  can- 
on of  five  books  (Ching),  comprising:  The 
/  Ching,  or  Book  of  Changes,  traditionally 
ascribed  to  Wen  Wang  in  the  12th  century 

7 


B.C.  .  .  .  The  Shu  Ching,  or  Book  of  His- 
tory, consisting  of  ancient  documents,  most 
of  them  of  the  first  millennium  B.C.  The 
Shift  Ching,  or  Book  of  Odes,  an  anthology 
of  ancient  Chinese  popular  ballads  and 
ceremonial  odes  which  date  from  the  first 
and  second  millenniums  B.C.  The  Li  Chi, 
or  Book  of  Rites,  a  post-Confucian  compi- 
lation of  ceremonial  forms  and  usages. 
The  Ch'un  Ch'iu,  or  Spring  and  Autumn 
Annals,  a  chronological  record  of  events  in 
the  state  of  Lu,  722-4S1  B.C.,  usually  as- 
cribed to  Confucius." — Webster's  New  In- 
ternational Dictionary. 

•   •   •   • 

Vicarious    Baptism    for    the    Dead: 

"An  essential  feature  of  the  Mormon  sys- 
tem is  the  doctrine  and  practise  of  bap- 
tism for  the  dead Saints,  [they  teach,] 

may  be  baptized  for  the  dead  and  thus  in- 
sure the  salvation  of  the  latter." — The 
New  Schaff-Herzog  Encyclopedia  of  Reli- 
gious Knowledge. 

Caste  System:  "As  Hindu  thought 
divides  life  into  higher  and  lower  forms, 
Hindu  society  divides  its  people  into  higher 
and  lower  castes.  The  subtlety  of  caste 
divisions  and  subdivisions  makes  the  social 
structure  of  Hindu  society  as  complicated 
as  its  theology.  .  .  .  For  the  religious  Hin- 
du, however,  caste  is  not  primarily  social 
or  economic.  It  is  the  functioning  of  kar- 
ma and  of  reincarnation." — The  World's 
Great  Religions. 

Limbo:  Roman  Catholic  belief.  "The 
abode  of  souls  barred  from  heaven 
through  no  fault  of  their  own,  esp.,  of  the 
souls  of  just  men  who  died  before  the  com- 
ing of  Christ  (lim'bo  pa'trum)  or  of  un- 
baptized  infants  (lim'bo  in-fan'tum) ; — so 


called  because  it  was  believed  by  theolo- 
gians to  lie  on  the  confines  of  hell," — Web- 
ster's New  International  Dictionary. 

Day  of  Atonement:  "The  Day  of 
Atonement  falling  on  the  tenth  day  of 
Tishri  and  observed  as  a  solemn  fast  day 
[in  Judaism],  according  to  the  rites  de- 
scribed in  Leviticus  xvi." — Webster's  New 
International  Dictionary. 

Dalai  Lama:  "Lamaism.  The  Bud- 
dhism of  Tibet  and  Mongolia It  is  note- 
worthy for  its  ritualistic  practices  (includ- 
ing the  use  of  prayer  wheels,  prayer  flags, 
rosaries,  bells,  etc.,  and  the  rites  of  bap- 
tism and  confirmation),  and  esp.  for  its 
elaborate  hierarchal  organization,  at  the 
head  of  which  is  the  Grand,  or  Dalai,  La- 
ma (literally,  the  Ocean  Lama)  and  the 
almost  equally  exalted  Teshu,  or  Bogodo, 
Lama.  Below  these  are  several  monastic 
orders,  both  monks  and  nuns," — Webster's 
New  International  Dictionary. 

Rosary  or  Chaplet:  In  addition  to 
Roman  Catholic  use,  it  "may  be  traced  in 
non-Christian  religions,  as  among  the  Ti- 
betan Buddhists,  who  use  strings  of  beads, 
generally  108  in  number,  and  made  of 
jewels,  sandal-wood,  mussel-shells,  and  the 
like."  (The  New  Schaff-Herzog  Encyclo- 
pedia of  Religious  Knowledge)  "Moslem 
Chaplet:  The  Moslems  use  a  chaplet  of 
ninety-nine  beads,  representing  the  ninety- 
nine  attributes  of  the  Divine  Being,  ac- 
cording to  the  Koran.  Brahmanic  [Hindu] 
Chaplet:  The  chaplet  .  .  .  was  used  in  In- 
dia long  before  it  became  known  in  the 
West.  ...  It  is  still  in, use  today.  Buddhist 
Chaplet:  Buddhism  borrowed  the  chaplet 
from  Brahmanism." — Larousse  du  Ving- 
tieme  Siecle  (Larousse's  Twentieth  Cen- 
tury encyclopedic  dictionary),  Vol.  2. 


AWAKRi 


^T-acts  TJ&i<*:&fao*i4^'f&t0%m 


1,  The  men  used  in  writing  the  Bible  were 
aU  Orientals.  Almost  the  whole  Bible  was 
written  in  Oriental  lands,  and  the  men  who 
did  the  writing  were  all  Orientals,  being 
Israelites  or  Jews.  In  writing  to  the  Chris- 
tians in  Rome,  the  apostle  Paul  said: 
"What,  then,  is  the  superiority  of  the  Jew, 
or  what  is  the  benefit  of  the  circumcision? 
A  great  deal  in  every  way.  First  of  all,  be- 
cause they  [the  Jews]  were  entrusted  with 
the  sacred  pronouncements  of  God."  (Rom. 
3:1,  2)  None  of  the  Bible  writers  were 
Latins. 


to  the  Indus  on  the 
border  of  western 
India.  Even  in 
the  capital  of  the 
Roman  Empire, 
not  Latin,  but 
Greek  was  the 
favorite  lan- 
guage  among 


literary  men, 

artists,   and 

tradesmen.  Paul,  a  Roman  citizen,  wrote 

his  letter  to  the  Romans  in  Greek." — The 

Interpreter's  Bible,  Vol.  7,  p.  44. 


The] 

HOJY 
BIBLE 


2.  About  thirty-five  men  were  used  to 
write  the  Bible.  Among  them  are:  Moses, 
Joshua,  Samuel,  Gad,  Nathan,  Nehemiah, 
Ezra,  Mordecai,  David,  Solomon,  Agur, 
Lemuel,  Isaiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel,  Hosea, 
Joel,  Amos,  Obadiah,  Jonah,  Micah,  Na- 
hum,  Habakkuk,  Zephaniah.  Haggai,  Zech- 
ariah,  Malachi,  Matthew,  Mark,  Luke,  John 
the  apostle,  Paul,  James  the  half  brother 
of  Jesus,  Peter,  Jude  the  half  brother  of 
Jesus. 


3.  Originally  the  Bible  was  written  in 
three  languages.  Says  The  Encyclopedia 
Americana:  "The  books  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment were  written  in  Hebrew,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  some  isolated  words  or  expres- 
sions, one  verse  (Jeremiah  10:11)  and  a 
few  chapters  (Ezra  4:8-6:18;  7:12-26; 
Daniel  2:4b-7:28)  which  were  written  in 
Aramaic."  The  koine  or  common  Greek 
was  used  for  writing  the  Christian  Greek 
Scriptures.  "Koine  Greek  had  become,  by 
the  first  century  of  our  era,  the  lingua 
franca  of  the  entire  Roman  Empire.  In- 
scriptions in  koine  testify  to  its  use  over 
an  area  reaching  from  the  Tagus  in  Spain 


4  The  Bible  is  made  up  of  sixty-six  books. 
"Originally,  the  Hebrew  Bible  consisted  of 
24  books;  but  now,  like  the  Christian  O.T., 
it  has  39,  since  each  of  the  Minor  Prophets 
is  considered  one  book;  Ezra  has  been  sep- 
arated from  Nehemiah ;  and  Samuel,  Kings, 
and  Chronicles  have  been  divided  into  two 
books  each."  (Harper's  Bible  Dictionary) 
"The  New  Testament  is  a  collection  of 
twenty-seven  documents  written  within 
the  space  of  a  hundred  years.  Four  of 
these  are  gospels,  one  is  a  history,  twenty- 
one  are  letters,  and  the  last  [Revelation] 
is  an  apocalypse." — A  Guide  Book  to  the 
Bible,  p.  93,  by  A.  Parmelee. 

Some  spurious  or  apocryphal  writings 
have  been  added  to  certain  Bible  transla- 
tions, but  as  The  Imperial  Bible  Dictionary 
(Vol.  I,  p.  14)  points  out:  "In  regard  to 
the  question  itself,  whether  the  Apocrypha 
should  be  admitted  into  the  Old  Testament 
canon  or  excluded  from  it,  the  following 
may  be  taken  as  a  brief  summary  of  the 
reasons  for  maintaining  the  negative  side: 
— 1.  There  is,  first  of  all,  the  historical  ar- 
gument against  it — it  was  not  received  as 


APRIL  22,  1961 


authoritative  Scripture  by  those  who  had 
intrusted  to  them  the  formation  of  the  Old 
Testament  canon.  Nor  have  the  Jews  at 
any  period  of  their  history  put  the  apoc- 
ryphal writings  on  a  level  with  those  of 
the  sacred  books. ...  2.  Then,  there  is  the 
entire  silence  of  our  Lord  and  the  apostles 
respecting  them.  By  these  the  scriptures 
of  the  Old  Testament  are  quoted  with  end- 
less frequency,  but  never  the  Apocrypha. 
The  Jewish  canon  just  as  it  stood  was  rec- 
ognized and  sanctioned  as  the  Word  of 
God  by  the  founders  of  the  Christian 
church.  .  .  .  [The  apocryphal  writings] 
contain  things  utterly  at  variance  with  the 
proper  character  of  a  divine  revelation — 
fables,  falsehoods,  and  errors  of  doctrine." 


5.  The  last  Bible  writer  was  John.  He 
wrote  the  book  of  Revelation  about  A.D. 
96  and  his  Gospel  and  three  letters  about 
A.D.  98,  thus  closing  the  canon  of  the  Holy 
Bible. 


6.  The  Christian  Greek  Scriptures  were 
put  in  their  present  catalogue  form  by  the 
early  Christians,  Long  before  the  Council 
of  Carthage  (397  A.D.)  the  early  Chris- 
tians fixed  the  canon  of  the  Christian 
Greek  Scriptures,  as  The  Encyclopedia 
Americana  states  (Vol.  3, 1956  ed.,  p.  652) : 
"It  is  clear  that  from  the  end  of  the  sec- 
ond century  the  main  contents  of  our 
present  New  Testament  were  not  ques- 
tioned. It  was  not  by  any  decree  of  synod 
or  council  that  the  choice  was  made;  ibut 
by  the  constant  test  of  daily  usage  these 
books  stood  out  as  uniquely  valuable  for 
edification,  instruction,  and  the  positive 
statement  of  historic  Christianity  over 
against  the  speculative  vagaries  and  mis- 
interpretations of  the  Gnostic  and  other 
heretical  groups The  process  by  which 


the  27  books  of  the  New  Testament  were 
selected  and  authorized  for  reading  in  pub- 
lic and  for  private  devotional  study  goes 
back,  undoubtedly,  to  the  1st  century.  .  .  . 
The  beginnings  of  the  New  Testament  can- 
on are  to  be  found  ...  in  the  life  and 
thought,  the  worship  and  propaganda,  the 
ministry  of  edification  and  the  scriptural 
exegesis  of  the  primitive  church." 

The  canon  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures, 
however,  was  not  left  for  the  early  Chris- 
tians to  decide.  This  was  done  by  the  Great 
Synagogue  of  Jerusalem  long  before  the 
time  of  Christ.  Says  McClintock  and 
Strong's  Cyclopaedia:  "To  show  to  the  peo- 
ple which  of  the  ancient  prophetical  books 
were  sacred,  the  Sopherim  and  the  men  of 
the  Great  Synagogue  compiled  the  canon 
of  the  prophets.  As  the  early  prophets  and 
the  great  prophets — i.e.  Isaiah,  Jeremiah, 
and  Ezekiel — like  the  Pentateuch,  were  al- 
ready regarded  as  sacred,  it  only  remained 
for  the  Great  Synagogue  to  complete  the 
prophetical  canon  by  inserting  into  it  the 
twelve  minor  prophets,  which  this  synod 
accordingly  did,  as  may  be  seen  from  Baba 
Bathra,  15;  Aboth  di  Rabbi  Nathan,  c.  i" 
{Vol.  10,  p.  83)  Thus  the  canon  of  the  He- 
brew Scriptures  was  decided  in  the  days  of 
the  Jewish  governor  Nehemiah  in  the  fifth 
century  B.C.  and  shortly  afterward. 

♦    ♦    ♦    ♦ 

A.  It  is  not  true  that  the  Buddhist  scrip- 
tures and  Mohammedan  Koran  are  older 
than  the  Bible.  Jesus  Christ  said:  "If  you 
believed  Moses  you  would  believe  me,  for 
that  one  wrote  about  me."  (John  5:46) 
Moses  began  writing  at  the  command  of 
God:  "Jehovah  now  said  to  Moses:  'Write 
this  as  a  memorial  in  the  book.'  "  (Ex.  17: 
14)  Moses  began  this  writing  in  the  six- 
teenth century  before  the  Christian  Era. 
Over  a  period  of  1,600  years,  from  Moses' 
time  on,  the  Bible  was  written.  Thus  the 


10 


AWAKE! 


Bible  began  to  be  written  about  a  thousand 
years  before  the  Buddhist  era  (563  E.C.E.) . 
As  to  the  Buddhist  scriptures,  the  book 
The  Veddntic  Buddhism  of  the  Buddha* 
says :  '  'According  to  the  tradition  the 
Books  of  the  Pali  Canon  were  taken  orally 
to  Ceylon  by  Prince  Mahinda  . . .  about  the 
middle  of  the  third  century  B.C.,  and  were 
there  reduced  to  writing  in  the  first  cen- 
tury B.C." 

The  Bible  began  to  be  written  more  than 
2,000  years  before  the  IVTohammedan  Ko- 
ran was  produced.  Mohammed,  who  estab- 
lished the  principles  embodied  in  the  Ko- 
ran, died  A.D.  632.  As  to  the  Koran,  The 
New  Funk  &  Wagnalls  Encyclopedia  says : 
"The  book  was  compiled  by  [Mohammed's] 
secretary  Zaid  ibn  Thabit,  under  the  di- 
rection of  Abu-Bekr,  the  father-in-law  of 
the  prophet  The  authorized  version  was 
produced  in  650  A.D.  by  a  group  of  Arabic 
scholars  under  the  Caliph  Othman." — P. 
7580. 


B.  No,  the  Bible  does  not  teach  an  im-per- 
zonal  reality  as  ultimate  truth.  It  is  the 
Hindu  Vedas  that  teach  such:  "The  Vedas 
preach  an  impersonal  reality  as  ultimate 
truth,  and  not  the  Personal  God,  though 
they  make  room  for  such  a  God  and  for 
other  divinities."  (Hinduism,  by  Swami 
Nikhilananda)  The  Bible  simply  and  un- 
derstandably shows  that  Jehovah,  the  Su- 
preme Being  who  created  the  heavens  and 
the  earth,  is  "the  God  of  truth."  (Acts  4: 
24;  Ps.  31:5)  Of  his  Word  of  truth,  the 
Bible,  2  Timothy  3:16,  17  says:  "All  Scrip- 
ture is  inspired  of  God  and  beneficial  for 
teaching,  for  reproving,  for  setting  things 
straight,  for  disciplining  in  righteousness, 
that  the  man  of  God  may  be  fully  compe- 
tent, completely  equipped  for  every  good 
work." 


C.  It  is  true  that  the  Bible  writers  ad- 
mitted they  wrote  under  inspiration  of 
God.  I^avid,  for  instance,  explained  that 
he  did  not  write  under  his  own  driving 
force;  "The  utterance  of  David  the  son  of 
Jesse; .  ,  .  The  spirit  of  Jehovah  it  was  that 
spoke  by  me,  and  his  word  was  upon  my 
tongue."  (2  Sam.  23:1,  2)  Centuries  later 
Peter  reminded  Christians  that  the  ancient 
prophets  wrote  under  the  activating  force 
of  the  holy  spirit  of  God:  "You  know  this 
first,  that  no  prophecy  of  Scripture  springs 
from  any  private  release.  For  prophecy 
was  at  no  time  brought  by  man's  will,  but 
men  spoke  from  God  as  they  were  borne 
along  by  holy  spirit."— 2  Pet.  1:20,  21. 


D.  True,  the  Bible  indicated  the  earth 
was  round  wlien  men  thought  it  was  fiat. 
The  prophecy  of  Isaiah,  written  in  the 
eighth  century  before  Christ  when  men 
thought  the  earth  fiat,  states  at  Isaiah  40: 
22:  "There  is  One  who  is  dwelling  above 
the  circle  of  the  earth."  Moffatt's  transla- 
tion of  this  verse  reads:  "He  sits  over  the 
round  earth." 


E.  Trite,  the  Bible's  account  of  a  global 
flood  does  harmonize  with  archaeology. 
(Gen.  6:13-8:15)  Prince  Mikasa,  a  well- 
known  authority  on  archaeology,  states: 
"Was  there  really  a  Flood?  As  the  resuft 
of  excavation  by  archaeologists  in  recent 
years,  the  fact  that  the  flood  actually  took 
place  has  been  convincingly  proved."*  "As 
a  matter  of  fact,"  says  archaeologist  Nel- 
son Glueck  in  the  book  Rivers  in  the  Desert 
(1959),  "it  may  be  stated  categorically 
that  no  archaeological  discovery  has  ever 
controverted  a  Biblical  reference." — P.  31. 


*  A  collection  of  historical  texts  translated  from  the 
original  Pali  and  edited   by  J.   G,  Jennings,  p.  441. 


*  Monorcus   and   Tombs  and   Peoples — the   Dawn   of 

the  Orient,  p.  25. 


APRIL  22,  1961 


11 


What  Follows  the  World's  End? 


OA  startling  fact  is  recorded  in  the  Bible: 
Prior  to  our  day  a  world  completely 
ended  without  destroying  all  mankind  or  the 
planet  earth.  This  is  stated  at  2  Peter  3:5,  6: 
"There  were  heavens  in  ancient  times  and  an 
earth  standing  compactly  out  of  water  and 
in  the  midst  of  water  by  the  word  of  God,  and 
by  those  means  the  world  of  that  time  suffered 
destruction  when  it  was  deluged  with  water." 
The  account  tells  that  Noah  and  his  family 
survived  that  world's  end. 

©The  Bible  shows  that  God  did  not  pur- 
pose the  earth  to  be  a  desolate  waste. 
When  instructing  the  first  human  couple  God 
said  nothing  of  destroying  the  planet  earth 
at  some  future  time,  nor  did  he  Indicate  that 
the  earth  was  a  testing  ground  for  heavenly 
candidates.-  Open  your  Bible  to  the  book  of 
Genesis  and  read  what  he  did  say,  at  Genesis 
1:28:  "God  blessed  them  and  God  said  to 
them:  'Be  fruitful  and  become  many  and  fill 
the  earth  and  subdue  it,  and  have  in  subjec- 
tion the  fish  of  the  sea  and  the  flying  crea- 
tures of  the  heavens  and  every  living  creature 
that  is  creeping  upon  the  earth.' "  Their 
failure  to  carry  out  that  mandate  in  righteous- 
ness did  not  cause  God  to  abandon  his  original 
purpose  for  earth  and  man.  Centuries  later 
Jesus  Christ  emphasized  that  God's  purpose 
must  be  carried  out,  when  he  taught  his  fol- 
lowers to  pray:  "Let  your  kingdom  come. 
Let  your  will  come  to  pass,  as  in  heaven,  also 
upon  earth."— Matt.  6:9,  10. 

©Man  today  has  weapons  capable  of  wip- 
ing out  all  human  life,  but  the  Bible  as- 
sures mankind  that  Jehovah  God  will  inter- 
vene to  prevent  man  from  destroying  himself 
and  ruining  the  earth.  "The  nations  became 
wrathful,  and  your  own  wrath  came,  and  the 
appointed  time  ...  to  bring  to  ruin  those 
ruining  the  earth." — Rev.  11:18. 

©Armageddon  is  a  Scriptural  name  of  that 
final  war,  "the  war  of  the  great  day  of 
God  the  Almighty."  To  that  war  and  in  opposi- 
tion to  God,  Revelation  16:14,  16  and  19:11-19 
shows  that  all  "the  kings  of  the  entire  in- 
habited earth"  are  gathering,  together  with 
those  who  support  this  corrupt  old  world. 

©The  end  of  the  world,  as  taught  in  the 
Bible,  could  not  mean  destruction  of 
the  earth,  for  Psalm  104:5  declares:  "He  has 
founded  the  earth  upon  its  established  places; 


l 


© 


it  will  not  be  made  to  totter  to  time  indefinite, 
nor  forever."  (See  also  Ecclesiastes  1:4.)  When 
the  world  ended  in  Noah's  day,  the  literal 
heavens  and  earth  remained.  At  Armageddon 
Satan's  visible  and  invisible  organization  will 
be  destroyed,  but  not  the  physical  heavens  or 
the  literal,  earth.  The  apostle  Peter  spoke  of 
"the  day  of  judgment  and  of  destruction  of 
the  ungodly  men."  (2  Pet.  3:7)  As  for  the 
demons,  they  showed  knowledge  of  their  -fate 
when  they  caused  two  men  to  scream  at  Jesus: 
"What  have  we  to  do  with  you,  Son  of  God? 
Did  you  come  here  to  torment  us  before  the 
right  time?"  (Matt.  8:29)  Satan  knows  that 
"right  time"  Is  close,  as  Revelation  12:12 
states:  "Woe  for  the  earth  and  for  the  sea, 
because  the  Devil  has  come  down  to  you, 
having  great  anger,  knowing  he  has  a  short 
period  of  time." 

No  man  can  calculate  the  exact  time  of 
Armageddon's  arrival.  As~Je"sus  saidT 
"Concerning  that  day  and  hour  nobody  knows, 
neither  the  angels  of  the  heavens  nor  the  Son, 
but  only  the  Father."  (Matt.  24:36)  Yet  it  is 
possible  to  recognize  the  season  of  Arma- 
geddon's approach,  as  indicated  by  Jesus' 
illustration:  "Note  the  fig  tree  and  all  the 
other  trees:  When  they  are  already  in  the 
bud,  by  observing  it  you  know  for  yourselves 
that  now  the  summer  is  near.  In  this  way 
you  also,  when  you  see  these  things  [enumer- 
ated in  the  preceding  verses]  occurring,  know 
that  the  kingdom  of  God  is  near.  Truly  I  say 
to  you,  This  generation  will  by  no  means  pass 
away  until  all  things  occur."— Luke  21:29-32. 
Of  conditions  that  will  follow  this  world's 
end  on  the  cleansed  earth,  John  wrote  In  the 
Revelation:  "Look!  the  tent  of  God  is  with 
humankind  .  .  .  And  God  himself  will  be  with 
them.  And  he  will  wipe  out  every  tear  from 
their  eyes,  and  death  will  be  no  more,  neither 
will  mourning  nor  outcry  nor  pain  be  any 
more.  The  former  things  have  passed  away." 
(Rev.  21:3,  4)  What  good  news!  Jehovah's 
witnesses,  preaching  in  179  lands,  point  out 
to  all  men  these  New  World  prospects  that 
God  will  make  a  reality  following  the  end  of 
this  wicked  world.  They  are  doing*  the  work  of 
which  Jesus  said:  /'This  good  news  of  the 
kingdom  will  be  preached  in  all  the  inhabited 
earth  for  the  purpose  of  a  witness  to  all  the 
nations,  and  then  the  accomplished  end  will 
come."— Matt,  24:14. 


12 


AWAKE! 


1.  Belief  in  a  hereafter  or  life  after 
death  is  taught  among  non-Christian  reli~ 
gions.  According  to  Hindu  belief,  "the  soul 
of  a  man  who  dies  does  not,  except  in  the 
single  case  of  one  who  at  death  returns 
into  indistinguishable  oneness  with  Brah- 
ma, pass  into  a  permanent  state  of  being 
in  heaven  or  hell  or  elsewhere;  the  soul, 
rather,  is  reborn  into  another  existence 
which  will  terminate 

in  due  time  and  ne